en 1

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 0 i–Model A
Connection Manual (Function)
GFZ-63503EN-1/01 May 2000

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may
be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which
are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 2000 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B–63503EN–1/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
B–63503EN–1/01 PREFACE
PREFACE
This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine

tool builders to design their CNC machine tools. The following items are
explained for each function.
1. General
Describes feature of the function. Refer to Operator’s manual as
requied.
2. Signals
Describes names, functions, output conditions and addresses of the
signals required to realize a function.
3. Parameters
Describes parameters related with a function.
4. Alarms and messages
Lists the alarms and messages related with a function in a table.
5. Reference item
List the related items of the related manuals in a table.
A list of addresses of all signals and a list of signals are described in the
appendix of this manual. Refer to it as required.
Applicable models The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 0i–TA 0i–TA

Series 0i
FANUC Series 0i–MA 0i–MA
For ease of understanding, the models are categorized as follows:

T series: 0i–TA
M series: 0i–MA
NOTE
Some functions described in this manual may not be applied
to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual
(B–63502EN).
p–1
PREFACE B–63503EN–1/01
Signal description Relation of interface signals among the CNC, the PMC and the machine
tool is shown below:
CNC PMC MT
G000 or later X1000 or

later
Built in I/O
(Basic) Y1000 or
F000 or later later Machine
tool
X 000 or
later
FANUC
I/O Link
Y 000 or
(Optional) later
NOTE
For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits.
Each bit has a different meaning.
D Expression of signals One address accommodates eight signals.
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signals
are covered with shade ( ) in the signal address figure as shown
below. This means either T series or M series does not have this signal.
Upper part is for T series and lower part is for M series.
[Example 1]
Signal EXLM, ST is a common signal, STLK is for T series only and
RLSOT and RVS are for M series only.
#7 #6 #2 #1 #0
T series
G007 RLSOT EXLM ST STLK
M series
p–2
Parameter description Parameters are classified by data type as follows :

Dta type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
0 or 1
Bit axis
Byte
0 to"127 In some parameters, signs are ig-
Byte axis 0 to 255 nored.
Word
0 to"32767
Word axis 0 to 65535
2–word
"
0 to"99999999
2–word axis
NOTE
1 For the bit type and bit axis type parameters, a single data
number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different
meaning.
2 The axis type allows data to be set separately for each
control axis.
3 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general
range. The range varies according to the parameters. For
the valid data range of a specific parameter, see the
explanation of the parameter.
p–3
PREFACE B–63503EN–1/01
D Notation of bit type and

bit axis type parameters
Data No. Data (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
D Notation of parameters
other than bit type and
bit axis type
Data No. Data
1023 Servo axis number of a specific axis
NOTE
In an item where both T series and M series are described,
parameters having different meanings between the T series
and M series and parameters that are valid only for the T or
M series are indicated in two levels as shown below.
Parameters left blank are unavaliable.
[Example 1]
Parameter 5010 has different meanigs for the T series and M series.
Tool nose radius compensation . . . T series

5010
Cutter compensation C . . . M series
[Example 2]
DPI is a parameter common to the M and T series, but GSB and GSC
are parameters valid only for the T series.
#7 #6 #0
GSC GSB DPI T series
3401
DPI M series
[Example 3]
The following parameter is provided only for the M series.
T series
1450
F1 digit feed . . . M series
p–4
Related Manuals The table below lists manuals related to MODEL A of Series 0i.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Specification
Manual name
Number
DESCRIPTIONS B–63502EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–63503EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–63503EN–1 *

OPERATOR’S MANUAL For Lathe B–63504EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL For Maching Center B–63514EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63505EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B–63510EN
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B–61803E–1
(Macro Compiler / Macro Executer)
FAPT MACRO COMPILER PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–66102E
Manuals related to the The table below lists manuals related to the SERVO Motor α series.
SERVO Motor α series
Table 2 Manuals related to the SERVO Motor α series
Document
Document name Major contents Major usage
number
D Specification
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series D Characteristics
B–65142E
DESCRIPTIONS D External dimensions
D Connections D Selection of motor
D Specification D Connection of motor
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series D Characteristics
B–65152E
DESCRIPTIONS D External dimensions
D Connections
D Specifications and
functions D Selection of
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series D Installation amplifier
B–65162E
DESCRIPTIONS D External dimensions and D Connection of
maintenance area amplifier
D Connections
D Start up the system
D Start up procedure
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series (Hardware)
B–65165E D Troubleshooting
MAINTENANCE MANUAL D Troubleshooting
D Maintenance of motor
D Maintenance of motor
D Initial setting
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series
B–65150E D Setting parameters D Start up the system
PARAMETER MANUAL
D Description of parameters (Software)
D Initial setting D Turning the system
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series
B–65160E D Setting parameters (Parameters)
PARAMETER MANUAL
D Description of parameters
p–5
B–63503EN–1/01 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1
1. AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.1 Name of Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2.2 Increment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2.3 Specifying the Rotation Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2.4 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.2.5 Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2.6 Follow–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2.7 Servo Off (Mechanical Handle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2.8 Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3.2 Backlash Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.4 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO–CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.4.1 Parameters Related to Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.4.2 Absolute Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.5.2 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair (M series) . . . 44
1.5.3 Rotary Axis Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.6 SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

2.1 EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.2 CNC READY SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.3.1 Overtravel Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.3.3 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.4 ALARM SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.5 START LOCK/INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.6 MODE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.7 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.8 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.9 ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

3.1 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
3.3 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
c–1
B–63503EN–1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.2 SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.3 REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT(M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4.4 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.5 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/3RD, 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . 151
4.6 BUTT–TYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.2 RESET AND REWIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5.3 TESTING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
5.3.1 Machine Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
5.3.2 Dry Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
5.3.3 Single Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
5.7 PROGRAM RESTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.8 EXACT STOP/EXACT STOP MODE/TAPPING MODE/CUTTING MODE (M SERIES) . . . . . . 190
5.9 DNC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
5.10 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
5.11 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

6.1 POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
6.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
6.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
6.4 THREAD CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
6.4.1 Thread Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
6.4.2 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
6.5 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6.7 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
6.8 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.9 POLYGONAL TURNING (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.10 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . 242

7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
7.1.3 Feed Per Minute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
7.1.5 F1-digit Feed (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
7.1.6 Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
c–2
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63503EN–1/01
7.1.6.1 Rapid traverse override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

7.1.6.2 Feedrate override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7.1.6.3 Override cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
7.1.7 Automatic Corner Override (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7.1.8 External Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
7.1.9 Feedrate Clamping by Arc Radius (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
7.1.10 Automatic Corner Deceleration (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.1.11 Advanced Preview Control (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
7.1.12 Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are read in advance) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell–shaped Acceleration/Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
7.2.4 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration before Cutting Feed Interpolation
(Look–ahead Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
7.2.5 Corner Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
7.2.5.1 In–position check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
7.2.5.2 In–position check independently of feed/rapid traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
7.2.5.3 Error detect (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
7.2.6 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

8.1 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
8.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
8.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
8.4 HIGH–SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

9.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
9.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
9.3 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
9.4 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
9.5 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
9.6 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
9.7 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
9.8 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
9.9 MULTI–SPINDLE CONTROL (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
9.10 RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
9.10.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
9.10.2 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
9.10.3 Rigid Tapping Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
9.10.4 Display Data on the Diagnosis Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
9.10.5 Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
9.10.6 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
9.10.6.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
9.10.6.2 Signals related to S code output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
9.10.6.3 Signals related to gear switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
c–3
9.10.6.4 Signals related to second spindle rigid tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

9.10.6.5 Signal addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
9.10.6.6 Notes on interface with the PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
9.10.7 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
9.10.7.1 When M29 is specified before G84 (G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
9.10.7.2 M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
9.10.7.3 Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
9.10.7.4 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
9.10.8 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
9.10.9 Alarm and Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
9.10.10 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
9.10.11 Reference Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
9.11 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
9.12 SPINDLE ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
9.13 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

10.1 TOOL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
10.2 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
10.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
10.4 CUTTER COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
10.4.1 Cutter Compensation C (M Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
10.4.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
11. PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

11.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
11.2 G CODE SYSTEM (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
11.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
11.4 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
11.5 CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
11.5.1 Custom Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
11.5.2 Interruption Type Custom Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
11.6 CANNED CYCLE (M SERIES)/CANNED CYCLE FOR HOLE MACHINING (T SERIES) . . . 567
11.7 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
11.8 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) . . . . 580
11.9 INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
11.10 SCALING (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
11.11 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
11.12 MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
11.13 SMALL HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

12.1 DISPLAY/SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
12.1.1 Clock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
12.1.2 Displaying Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
c–4
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63503EN–1/01
12.1.3 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

12.1.4 Displaying Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
12.1.5 Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
12.1.6 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
12.1.7 Waveform Diagnosis Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
12.1.8 Self–diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
12.1.9 Display of Hardware and Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
12.1.10 Position Display Neglect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
12.1.11 Run Hour and Parts Count Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
12.1.12 Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
12.1.13 Displaying Operating Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
12.1.14 Software Operator’s Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
12.1.15 Multi–language Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
12.1.16 External Operator Message Logging and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
12.1.17 Erase Screen Display/Automatic Erase Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
12.2 EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
12.2.1 Part Program Storage Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
12.2.2 No. of Registered Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
12.2.3 Memory Protection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
12.2.4 Password Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
12.2.5 Background Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
12.2.6 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
12.2.7 Conversational Programming with Graphic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

13.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
13.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
13.3 EXTERNAL PROGRAM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
14. MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

14.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
14.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
14.3 SKIP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
14.3.1 Skip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
14.3.2 High–speed Skip Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
14.3.3 Torque Limit Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
14.4 ENTERING COMPENSATION VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
14.4.1 Input of Offset Value Measured A (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
14.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
14.4.3 Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

15.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
15.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
15.3 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
15.4 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
c–5
15.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780

15.6 DIRECT OPERATION BY Personal computer connected to the HSSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
APPENDIX
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
A.1 List of Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
A.1.1 List of Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
A.2 SIGNAL SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
A.2.1 Signal Summary (In Order of Functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
c–6
B–63503EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL
1 AXIS CONTROL
1
1. AXIS CONTROL B–63503EN–1/01
1.1
CONTROLLED AXES
General
Item M series T series
No. of basic 1–path 3 axes 2 axes

controlled axes
Controlled axes 1–path Max. 4 axes Max. 4 axes
expansion (Including the Cs axis) (Including the Cs axis)
(total)
Basic 1–path Max. 4 axes Max. axes
simultaneously
controlled axes
Parameter
8130 Total number of controlled axes
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 2 to 4
Specify the total number of controlled axes for the CNC.
1010 Number of CNC–controlled axes
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., the number of controlled axes
Set the maximum number of axes that can be controlled by the CNC.
[Example] Suppose that the first axis is the X axis, and the second and subsequent
axes are the Y, Z, and A axes in that order, and that they are controlled as
follows:
X, Y, and Z axes: Controlled by the CNC and PMC
A axis: Controlled by the PMC
Then set this parameter to 3 (total 3: X, Y, and Z)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Controlled Axes
(For Machining Center)
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Controlled Axes

(For Lathe) (B–63504EN)
2
1.2
SETTING EACH AXIS
1.2.1
Name of Axes
General Each axis that is controlled by the CNC (including those controlled by the
PMC) must be named. Select and set names from among X, Y, Z, A, B,
C, U, V, and W (with parameter 1020).
The names of the basic axes, however, are fixed (X, Y, and Z for the M
series and X and Z for the T series). The names of additional axes can be
selected, as desired, from the names other than those for the basic axes.
The same name cannot be assigned to more than one axis.
Parameter
1020 Name of the axis used for programming for each axis
[Data type] Byte axis
Set the name of the program axis for each control axis, with one of the
values listed in the following table:
Axis Set value Axis name Set value Axis name Set value
name
X 88 U 85 A 65
Y 89 V 86 B 66
Z 90 W 87 C 67
NOTE
1 In the T series, when G code system A is used, neither U,
V, nor W can be used as an axis name. Only when G code
system B or C is used, U, V, and W can be used as axis
names.
2 The same axis name cannot be assigned to more than one
axis.
3 Address used for the secondary auxiliary function (address
B in the T series, address set in parameter No. 3460 in the
M series) cannot be used as an axis name. In the T series,
when CCR, #4 of parameter 3405, is set to 1, address A and
C may not be used with functions such as direct drawing
dimensions programming.
3
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL NAMES OF AXES
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL NAMES OF AXES

4
1.2.2
Increment System
General The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input ) and
least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the
least increment for programming the travel distance. The least command
increment is the least increment for moving the tool on the machine. Both
increments are represented in mm, inches, or degrees.
The increment system is classified into IS–B and IS–C (Tables 1.2.2(a)
and 1.2.2 (b)). Select IS–B or IS–C using bit 1 (ISC) of parameter 1004.
Table 1.2.2 (a) Increment system IS–B
Least input increment Least command increment
Metric mm 0.001mm(Diameter) 0.0005mm
system input
0.001mm(Radius) 0.001mm
machine
0.001deg 0.001deg
inch 0.0001inch(Diameter) 0.0005mm
input
0.0001inch(Radius) 0.001mm
0.001deg 0.001deg
Inch mm 0.001mm(Diameter) 0.00005inch
system input
0.001mm(Radius) 0.0001inch
machine
0.001deg 0.001deg
inch 0.0001inch(Diameter) 0.00005inch
input
0.0001inch(Radius) 0.0001inch
0.001deg 0.001deg
Table 1.2.2 (b) Increment system IS–C

Least input increment Least command increment
Metric mm 0.0001mm(Diameter) 0.00005mm
system input
0.0001mm(Radius) 0.0001mm
machine
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
inch 0.00001inch(Diameter) 0.00005mm
input
0.00001inch(Radius) 0.0001mm
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
Inch mm 0.0001mm(Diameter) 0.000005inch
system input
0.0001mm(Radius) 0.00001inch
machine
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
inch 0.00001inch(Diameter) 0.000005inch
input
0.00001inch(Radius) 0.00001inch
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
5
NOTE
Diameter programming is used only for T series. Whether
diameter programming or radius programming is used is
selected by parameter DIAx (No. 1006#3) on each axis.
Also, parameter IPR (No. 1004#7) can make the least input
increment of IS–B and IS–C ten times the least command
increment on each axis.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI
Setting entry is acceptable.

[Data type] Bit
INI Unit of input
0 : In mm
1 : In inches
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit

INM Least command increment on the linear axis
0 : In mm (metric system machine)
1 : In inches (inch system machine)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1004 IPR ISC
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

ISC The least input increment and least command increment are set.
ISC Least input increment and Symbol
least command increment
0 0.001mm, 0.001deg, or 0.0001inch IS-B
1 0.0001mm, 0.0001deg, or 0.00001inch IS-C
6
IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value 10 times as
large as the least command increment is specified, in increment systems
of IS–B and IS–C, mm input.
0 : The least input increment is not set to a value 10 times as large as the
least command increment.
1 : The least input increment is set to a value 10 times as large as the least
command increment.
If IPR is set to 1, the least input increment is set as follows:
Input increment Least input increment
IS-B 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg, or 0.0001 inch
IS-C 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, or 0.00001 inch
NOTE
When inch of input is specified, the least input increment
does not become 10 times as large as the least command
increment.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 DIAx
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
[Data type] Bit axis

DIAx Either a diameter or radius is set to be used for specifying the amount of
travel on each axis.
0 : Radius
1 : Diameter
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Increment System
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Increment System

7
1.2.3
Specifying the Rotation
Axis
General Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter 1006 can be used to set each axis to a linear
axis or rotation axis. Bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter 1006 can be used to select
the rotation axis type, A or B, for each axis. See the explanation of the
parameters for details of types A and B.
When the roll over function is used, the values displayed for absolute
coordinates are rounded by the shift amount per rotation, as set in
parameter No. 1260. This can prevent coordinates for the rotation axis
from overflowing. Displayed values for relative coordinates are also
rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation when bit 2 (RRLx) of
parameter No. 1008 is set to 1. The roll–over function is enabled by
setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter 1008 to 1.
For an absolute command, the coordinates after the tool has moved are
values rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation set in
parameter No. 1260. The tool moves in the direction in which the final
coordinates are closest when bit 1 of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0. For
an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in the
command.
8
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE

ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis.
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type.
(Not rounded in 0 to 360°)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type
(Refer to parameter No. 3624)
0 1 Rotation axis (A type)

(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_. Ab-
solute coordinate values and relative coordinate values
are rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0
and #2.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Re-
fer to parameter No. 3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in
the reference position return direction and the move
amount does not exceed one rotation.
1 0 Setting is invalid (unused)
1 1 Rotation axis (B type)

(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values
and relative coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not
rounded in 0 to 360_)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer
to parameter No. 3624)
(4) The rotation axis roll over function and index table index-
ing function (M series) cannot be used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1008 RRLx RABx ROAx
NOTE

ROAx The roll–over function of a rotation axis is
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
9
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for
which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)
RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1 : Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
RRLx Relative coordinates are

0 : Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
1 : Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No. 1260.
1260 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis
NOTE
1 After setting the parameter, turn off the power once and turn
it on again to operate the machine.
2 This parameter is valid only when ROAx = 1.
[Data type] Two–word axis

[Unit of data] Increment system Unit of data Standard value
IS–B 0.001 deg 360000
IS–C 0.0001 deg 3600000

Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis.
10
Note
NOTE
Rotary axis roll–over function cannot be used together with
the indexing function of the index table.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rotary Axis Roll–over
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rotary Axis Roll–over

11
1.2.4
Outputting the
Movement State of an
Axis
General The movement state of each axis can be output to the PMC.
Signal
Axis moving signals

MV1 – MV4 <F102>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals indicate that a control axis is moving.
The signals are provided for each control axis, and the number in the
signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
MV 1
1 ..... The 1st axis is moving.
2 ..... The 2nd axis is moving.
3 ..... The 3rd axis is moving.
: :
: :
[Output condition] The signals turn to “1” in the following cases:

. The corresponding axis has started moving.
. In manual handle feed mode, the handle feed axis of the corresponding
axis has been selected.
The signals turn to “0” in the following case:
. When the move command for the corresponding axis has been
distributed (when bit 6 (MVX) of parameter 3003 is 0)
. When deceleration for the corresponding axis has been completed and
the axis is set to the in–position condition. If in–position check is not
performed, when the deceleration for the corresponding axis is
completed. (When bit 6 (MVX) of parameter 3003 is 1)
12
Axis moving direction

signals
MVD1 – MVD4 <F106>
[Function] These signals indicate the movement direction of control axis.
They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal name
corresponds to the control axis number.
MVD 1
1 ..... The moving direction of the 1st axis is minus.
2 ..... The moving direction of the 2nd axis is minus.
3 ..... The moving direction of the 3rd axis is minus.
: :
: :
[Output condition] “1” indicates the corresponding axes are moving in the minus direction,
and “0” indicates they are moving in the plus direction.
CAUTION
These signals maintain their existing condition during a
stop, indicating the direction of the axes’ movement before
being stopped.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F102 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1
F106 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1
Parameter
D Setting the output format
of the axis moving signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 MVX
[Data type] Bit

MVX The axis moving signal is set to 0 when:
0 : Distribution for the axis is completed. (The signal is set to 0 in
deceleration.)
1 : Deceleration of the axis is terminated, and the current position is in the
in–position.
When the deceleration–time in–position check is suppressed by
setting bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601, the signal is set to 0 at the
end of deceleration.
13
Caution
CAUTION
Axis moving signals and axis moving direction signals are
output in both automatic and manual operations.
1.2.5
Mirror Image
General Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or by

parameters (setting input is acceptable). All movement directions are
reversed during automatic operation along axes to which a mirror image
is applied.
X
B
A B’
Z
0
When MI1 signal turned to “1” at point A
Mirror image (Example for T series)
However, the following directions are not reversed:

– Direction of manual operation and direction of movement, from the
intermediate position to the reference position during automatic
reference position return (for the M and T series)
– Approach direction for single direction positioning (G60) and shift
direction for boring cycles (G76 and G87) (for M series only)
Mirror image check signals indicate whether mirror image is applied to
each axis. System variable #3007 contains the same information (refer
to the operator’s manual).
Signal
Mirror image signal

MI1 – MI4 <G106>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Apply mirror image to the specified axes.
[Operation] Apply mirror image to those axes for which the signals are 1.
These signals are provided for the controlled axes on a one–to–one basis.
A number appended to a signal represents the controlled axis number.
14
MI 1
1 ..... Applies mirror image to the 1st axis.
2 ..... Applies mirror image to the 2nd axis.
3 ..... Applies mirror image to the 3rd axis.
: :
: :
The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases:
a) During offset cancel;
b) When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state and not in the
feed hold state.
Mirror image check

signal
MMI1 – MMI4<F108>
[Function] These signals indicate the mirror image condition of each axis. The mirror
image is set by taking the logical sum of the signal from the MDI panel
and the input signal of the machine tool, then relaying the information to
the machine tool.
These signals are provided for every control axis; the numeral in the signal
name indicates the relevant control axis number.
MMI 1
1 ..... Mirror image is applied to the 1st axis
2 ..... Mirror image is applied to the 2nd axis
3 ..... Mirror image is applied to the 3rd axis
: :
: :
[Output condition] These signals turn to “1” when:

· Mirror image signal MIn of the corresponding axis is “1”; or
· Mirror image of the corresponding axis is turned on by setting data
from the MDI panel.
These signals turn to “0” when:
· Mirror image signal (MIn) of the corresponding axis is “0” and the
setting of the mirror image in the control unit is turned off.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G106 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F108 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1
15
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 MIRx

MIRx Mirror image for each axis
0 : Mirror image is off.
1 : Mirror image is on.
Warning
WARNING
1 When programmable mirror image and ordinary mirror
image are specified at the same time, programmable mirror
image is applied first.
2 No programmable mirror image affects mirror image check
signals MMI1 to MMI4 <F108>.
Caution
CAUTION
Even when the mirror image is applied, commands which do
not actuate mirror image (such as automatic reference
position return and manual operation) do not affect mirror
image check signals MMI1 to MMI4 <F108>.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Mirror Image
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Mirror Image

16
1.2.6
Follow–up
General When position control is disabled for the controlled axes (when the servo
is off, during emergency stop, or during a servo alarm), if the machine is
moved, a positional error occurs. Follow–up is a function for changing
the current position of the CNC and reset the error counter to zero,
assuming a command corresponding to the error has been specified.
You can select whether to perform follow–up for axes for which the servo
is turned off.
Follow–up is always performed during emergency stop or a servo alarm.
D When follow–up is not When signal *FLWU is 1 or bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter 1819 is 1,
performed for the axes follow–up is not performed. The error is added to the error counter as a
for which the servo is servo error. In this case, the machine moves to compensate for the error
turned off when the servo off signal changes to 0.
In general, follow–up is not used if the machine is mechanically clamped
when position control is disabled for the controlled axes.
D When follow–up is When *FLWU is “0”, the follow-up function is engaged. The present
performed for the axes position of the CNC is changed to reset the error counter to zero. The
for which the servo is machine tool remains in a deviated position, but since the present position
turned off of the CNC changes correspondingly, the machine moves to the correct
position when the absolute command is next applied.
In general, follow–up should be used when motors are driven by
mechanical handles.
Signal
Follow–up signal
*FLWU <G007#5>
[Function] Select whether to perform follow–up when the servo is turned off for those
axes for which bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter 1819 is 0.
[Operation] 0: Performs follow–up.
1: Does not perform follow–up.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 *FLWU
17
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1819 FUPx

FUPx To perform follow–up when the servo is off is set for each axis.
0 : The follow–up signal, *FLWU, determines whether follow–up is
performed or not.
When *FLWU is 0, follow–up is performed.
When *FLWU is 1, follow–up is not performed.
1 : Follow–up is not performed.
CAUTION
When the index table indexing function (M series) is used,
be sure to set FUPx of the 4th axis to 1.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 1.2.7 Servo Off (Mechanical handle)
(This manual)
18
1.2.7
Servo Off
(Mechanical Handle)
General Place the controlled axes in the servo off state; that is, they stop the current
to the servo motor, which disables position control. However, the
position detection feature functions continuously, so the current position
is not lost.
These signals are used to prevent the servo motors from overloading when
the tools on the axes are mechanically clamped under certain machining
conditions on the machine, or to move the machine by driving the motors
by mechanical handles.
Signal
Servo off signal

SVF1 – SVF4 <G126>
[Function] Select whether to place each axis in the servo off state.
These signals are provided for the controlled axes on a one–to–one basis.
A number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
SVF 1
1 ..... Servo off for the first axis
2 ..... Servo off for the second axis
3 ..... Servo off for the third axis
: :
[Operation] These signals place those axes for which the signals are 1 in the servo off
state (the current to the servo motor is stopped), thus disabling position
control. However, the position detection feature continues to function, so
the current position is not lost.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G126 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1
19
Caution
CAUTION
1 In general, interlock is applied to an axis while the servo off
signal for that axis is 1.
2 When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor is
turned off. The mechanical clamp is done by using the
auxiliary function. Set the timing for the auxiliary function,
mechanical clamp and servo off signals as shown in the
diagram below. The clamp command auxiliary function
should be executed only after the distribution end signal
(DEN) turned to “1”.
Clamp command Unclamp command

MF
Machine
clamp
Servo off state
SVF1, ...
FIN
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 1.2.6 Follow–up
(This manual)
20
1.2.8
Position Switch
General Position switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machine
coordinates along a controlled axes are within a specified ranges.
Signal
Position switch signal

PSW01 – PSW10
<F070#0 – F071#1>
[Function] Notifies that the machine coordinates along the controlled axes specified
by parameters (6910 to 6919) are within the ranges specified by
parameters (6930 to 6939 and 6950 to 6959). Up to ten position switch
signals can be output.
[Output condition] These signals are 1 in the following case:
· When the machine coordinates along the controlled axes are within the
specified ranges.
These signals are 0 in the following case:
· When the machine coordinates along the controlled axes are not within
the specified ranges.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01
F071 PSW10 PSW09
21
Parameter
D Setting the
correspondence
between the position
switch signals and the
controlled axes
6910 Axis corresponding to the first position switch
6911 Axis corresponding to the second position switch
6912 Axis corresponding to the third position switch
6913 Axis corresponding to the fourth position switch
6914 Axis corresponding to the fifth position switch
6915 Axis corresponding to the sixth position switch
6916 Axis corresponding to the seventh position switch
6917 Axis corresponding to the eighth position switch
6918 Axis corresponding to the ninth position switch
6919 Axis corresponding to the tenth position switch
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, . . . , control axis count
These parameters specify the control–axes numbers corresponding to the
first through tenth position switch functions. A corresponding position
switch signal is output to PMC when the machine coordinate value of a
corresponding axis is within the range that is set using a parameter.
NOTE
Set 0 for those position switch numbers that are not to be
used.
22
D Setting the machine

coordinate ranges for
which the position
switch signals are output
D Maximum operation
range 6930 Maximum operation range of the first position switch
6931 Maximum operation range of the second position switch
6932 Maximum operation range of the third position switch
6933 Maximum operation range of the fourth position switch
6934 Maximum operation range of the fifth position switch
6935 Maximum operation range of the sixth position switch
6936 Maximum operation range of the seventh position switch
6937 Maximum operation range of the eighth position switch
6938 Maximum operation range of the ninth position switch
6939 Maximum operation range of the tenth position switch
[Data type] Two–word

[Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric machine 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999

These parameters set the maximum operation range of the first through
tenth position switches.
23
D Minimum operation
range 6950 Minimum operation range of the first position switch
6951 Minimum operation range of the second position switch
6952 Minimum operation range of the third position switch
6953 Minimum operation range of the fourth position switch
6954 Minimum operation range of the fifth position switch
6955 Minimum operation range of the sixth position switch
6956 Minimum operation range of the seventh position switch
6957 Minimum operation range of the eighth position switch
6958 Minimum operation range of the ninth position switch
6959 Minimum operation range of the tenth position switch

Metric machine 0.001 0.0001 mm

These parameters set the minimum operation range of the first through
tenth position switches.
24
1.3
ERROR
COMPENSATION
1.3.1
Stored Pitch Error
Compensation
General If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can
be compensated in detection unit per axis.
Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation position at the
intervals specified for each axis. The origin of compensation is the
reference position to which the tool is returned.
Pitch error compensation data can be set with external devices such as the
Handy File (see Operator’s manual). Compensation data can also be set
directly with the MDI panel.
The following parameters must be set for pitch error compensation. Set
the pitch error compensation value for each pitch error compensation
position number set by these parameters.
In the following example, 33 is set for the pitch error compensation
number at the reference position.
Pitch error compensation value (absolute value)

Compensation number for
3 the compensation position
Compensation number for the
having the largest value
reference position (No. 3620)
(No. 3622)
2
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Reference position
–1
Compensationmagnification
parameter (No. 3623)
–2
Compensation number for the Compensation interval
compensation position having the parameter (No. 3624)
smallest value (No. 3621)
Compensation
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
position number
Compensation –3 +1 +1 +1 +2 –1 –3
value to be set
· Number of the pitch error compensation position at the reference

position (for each axis): Parameter 3620
· Number of the pitch error compensation position having the smallest
value (for each axis): Parameter 3621
· Number of the pitch error compensation position having the largest
value (for each axis): Parameter 3622
· Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis): Parameter
3623
25
· Interval of the pitch error compensation positions (for each axis):

Parameter 3624
Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data
1 Set the following parameters:

⋅ Number of the pitch error compensation position at the
reference position (for each axis): Parameter 3620
⋅ Number of the pitch error compensation position having the
smallest value (for each axis): Parameter 3621
⋅ Number of the pitch error compensation position having the
largest value (for each axis): Parameter 3622
⋅ Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis):
Parameter 3623
⋅ Interval of the pitch error compensation positions (for each
axis): Parameter 3624
PITCH 2 Press function key SYSTEM

.
3 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft
Continuous menu key
key [PITCH].
The following screen is displayed:
PIT–ERROR SETTING O0000 N00000
NO. DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA

0000 0 0010 0 0020 0
0001 0 0011 0 0021 0
0002 0 0012 0 0022 0
0003 0 0013 0 0023 0
(X)0004 0 0014 0 0024 0
0005 0 0015 0 0025 0
0006 0 0016 0 0026 0
0007 0 0017 0 0027 0
0008 0 0018 0 0028 0
0009 0 0019 0 0029 0
> _
MEM **** *** *** 16:05:59
[ NO.SRH ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][ +INPUT ][ –INPUT ]
4 Move the cursor to the compensation position number to be set in

either of the following ways:
⋅ Enter the compensation position number and press the
[NO.SRH] soft key.
⋅ Move the cursor to the compensation position number using the
PAGE
page keys, PAGE

and , and cursor keys, , , ,
and .
5 Enter a value with numeric keys and press the [INPUT] soft key.
26
Explanations
D Specifying the To assign the compensation positions for each axis, specify the positive
compensation position direction or the negative direction in reference to the compensation
position No. of the reference position. If the machine stroke exceeds the
specified range on either the positive direction or the negative direction,
the pitch error compensation does not apply beyond the range.
D Compensation position 1024 compensation positions from No. 0 to 1023 are available on the
number pitch error setting screen. Assign arbitrary positions for each axis using
parameters.
The number of the compensation position at the reference position
(parameter 3620), number of the compensation position having the
smallest value (parameter 3621), and number of the compensation
position having the largest value (parameter 3622) must be set for each
axis.
The name of each axis is displayed before the smallest compensation
position number on the pitch error setting screen.
Examples
D For linear axis ⋅ Machine stroke: –400 mm to +800 mm
⋅ Interval between the pitch error compensation positions: 50 mm
⋅ No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 40
If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation position in
the negative direction is as follows:
No. of the compensation position of the reference position – (Machine
stroke on the negative side/Interval between the compensation
positions) + 1
= 40 – 400/50 + 1= 33
No. of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction is as
follows:
No. of the compensation position of the reference position + (Machine
stroke on the positive side/Interval between the compensation
positions)
= 40 + 800/50= 56
The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the
compensation position No. is as follows:
–400 –350 –100 –50 0 50 100 750 800

Machine
coordinate (mm)
Compensation
position number.
33 39 40 41 42 56
Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by .
27
Therefore, set the parameters as follows:

Parameter Setting value
3620 : Compensation number for the reference position 40
3621 : Smallest compensation position number 33
3622 : Largest compensation position number 56
3623 : Compensation magnification 1
3624 : Interval between pitch error compensation positions 50000
The compensation amount is output at the compensation position No.

corresponding to each section between the coordinates.
The following is an example of the compensation amounts.
No 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 56
Compensation
value –2 –1 –1 +2 0 +1 0 +1 +2 +1 0 –1 –1 –2 0 +1 +2 1
Pitch error compensation value

+4 (absolute value)
+3
+2
+1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
0 (mm)
–400 –300 –200 –100 –1 100 200 300 400
–2
Reference –3
position
–4
28
D For rotary axis ⋅Amount of movement per rotation: 360°

⋅ Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45°
⋅ No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 60
If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation position in
the negative direction for the rotating axis is always equal to the
compensation position No. of the reference position.
The No. of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction is
as follows:
No. of the compensation position of the reference position + (Move
amount per rotation/Interval between the compensation positions)
= 60 + 360/45= 68
The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the
compensation position No. is as follows:
Reference position 0.0
45.0 315.0
(61) (68)
(60)
(62) (67)
(+)
90.0 270.0
(63) (66)
(64) (65)
135.0 225.0
180.0
Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by .
Therefore, set the parameters as follows:
Parameter Setting value
3620 : Compensation number for the reference position 60
3621 : Smallest compensation position number 60
3622 : Largest compensation position number 68
3623 : Compensation magnification 1
3624 : Interval between pitch error compensation positions 45000
If the sum of the compensation values for positions 61 to 68 is not 0, pitch

error compensation values are accumulated for each rotation, causing
positional deviation.
The same value must be set for compensation positions 60 and 68.
29
The following is an example of compensation amounts.

No 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Compensation
value +1 –2 +1 +3 –1 –1 –3 +2 +1
Pitch error compensation value

(absolute value)
+4
+3 Reference position
68 +2
(60)
+1 68
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 (60) 61 62
45 90 135 180 225 270 315 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 0 45 90 (deg)
–1
–2
–3
–4
Parameter
3620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position
for each axis
NOTE
[Data type] Word axis

[Unit of data] Number
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference
position for each axis.
3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative

position for each axis
NOTE

Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely
negative position for each axis.
30
3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive posi-
tion for each axis
NOTE

Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely
positive position for each axis.
NOTE
This value must be larger than set value of parameter (No.
3620).
3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis
NOTE

[Unit of data] 1
Set the magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis.
If the magnification is set to 1, the same unit as the detection unit is used
for the compensation data.
3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis
NOTE

[Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
31

The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equally spaced.
Set the space between two adjacent positions for each axis.
The minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions is
limited and obtained from the following equation:
Minimum interval of pitch error compensation positions = maximum
feedrate (rapid traverse rate)/3750
Unit:
· Minimum interval of pitch error compensation positions: mm, inches,
deg.
· Maximum feed rate: mm/min, inch/min, deg/min
[Example] When the maximum rapid traverse rate is 15000 mm/min, the minimum
interval between pitch error compensation positions is 4 mm.
Warning
WARNING
1 Compensation value range
Compensation values can be set within the range from –7
x compensation magnification (detection unit) to +7 x
compensation magnification (detection unit). The
compensation magnification can be set for each axis within
the range from 0 to 100 in parameter 3623.
2 Intervals of compensation positions
The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with
equally spaced. Set the space between two adjacent
positions for each axis to the parameter (No. 3624).
3 Pitch error compensation of the rotary axis
For the rotating axis, the interval between the pitch error
compensation positions shall be set to one per integer of the
amount of movement (normally 360°) per rotation. The sum
of all pitch error compensation amounts per rotation must be
made to 0. Also, set the same compensation value to a
position and the same position with one rotation.
4 Conditions where pitch error compensation is not
performed
Note that the pitch error is not compensated in the following
cases:
· When the machine is not returned to the reference
position after turning on the power. This excludes the
case where an absolute position detector is employed.
· If the interval between the pitch error compensation
positions is 0.
· If the compensation position Nos. on the positive or
negative direction do not fall within the range of 0 to
1023.
· If the compensation position Nos. do not conform to the
following relationship:
Negative side x Reference position < Positive side
32
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Inputting pitch error compensation data
(B–63514EN) Outputting pitch error compensation data
Displaying and setting pitch error compensation data
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Inputting pitch error compensation data

Outputting pitch error compensation data
Displaying and setting pitch error compensation data
33
1.3.2
Backlash
Compensation
General
D Backlash compensation Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set a
compensation value in parameter No. 1851, in detection units from 0 to
"9999 pulses for each axis.
D Backlash compensation More precise machining can be performed by changing the backlash
for each rapid traverse compensating value depending on the feedrate, the rapid traverse or the
and cutting feed cutting feed.
Let the measured backlash at cutting feed be A and the measured backlash
at rapid traverse be B. The backlash compensating value is shown below
depending on the change of feedrate (cutting feed or rapid traverse) and
the change of the direction of movement.
Change of feedrate Cutting feed to Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Cutting feed to
cutting feed to rapid traverse to cutting feed rapid traverse
Change of direction
of movement
Same direction 0 0 "α " (*α)
Opposite direction "A "B "(B+α) " (B+α)
@ a = (A–B)/2
@ The positive or negative direction for compensating values is the
direction of movement.
Stopped during cutting feed Stopped during rapid traverse
α α
A B
⇒ ⇒
a : Overrun
@ Assign the measured backlash at cutting feed (A) in parameter No.

1851 and that at rapid traverse (B) in parameter No. 1852.
34
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 RBK
[Data type] Bit

RBK Backlash compensation applied separately for cutting feed and rapid
traverse
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis

[Unit of data] Detection unit
Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When RBK is 1, set the backlash compensating value for cutting feed.
When the machine moves in the direction opposite to the reference
position return direction after the power is turned on, the first backlash
compensation is performed.
1852 Backlash compensating value used for rapid traverse for each axis

Set the backlash compensating value used in rapid traverse for each axis.
This parameter is valid when RBK is set to 1.
Caution
CAUTION
The backlash compensation for each rapid traverse and
cutting feed is not performed until the first reference position
return is completed after the power is turned on. Under this
state, the normal backlash compensation is performed
according to the value specified in parameter No. 1851
irrespective of a rapid traverse and a cutting feed.
Note
NOTE
When backlash compensation is applied separately for
cutting feed and rapid traverse, jog feed is regarded as
cutting feed.
35
1.4 The servo interface of the Series 16 features the following:

S Digitally controlled AC servo motor
SETTINGS RELATED S Motor feedback with serial pulse coders
TO SERVO– (1) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses/rev
CONTROLLED AXES (2) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 65,536 pulses/rev
(3) Incremental pulse coder with a resolution of 10,000 pulses/rev
S Scale feedback with A/B/Z signal interface
1.4.1
Parameters Related to
Servo
General Explanation of terms frequently used in CNC

Least command increment
The minimum unit of a command to be given from CNC to the
machine tool
Detection unit
The minimum unit which can detect the machine tool position
Command multiplier (CMR)
A constant to enable the weight of CNC command pulses to meet the
weight of pulses from the detector
Detection multiplier (DMR)
A constant to enable the weight of CNC command pulses to meet the
weight of pulses from the detector
CAUTION
The relations among the least command increment,
detection unit, CMR, and DMR are as specified below.
Least command increment = CMR detection unit
Move amount per revolution of motor
Detection unit =
DMR number of pulses of detector per revolution
The flexible feed gear function in the digital servo defines

constant DMR using two parameters (Nos. 2084 and 2085)
n and m (DMR = n/m).
36
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 CVR
[Data type] Bit

CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before position
control ready signal PRDY comes ON
0 : A servo alarm is generated.
1 : A servo alarm is not generated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx APZx OPTx
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

OPTx Position detector
0 : A separate pulse coder is not used.
1 : A separate pulse coder is used.
APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the
absolute position detector is used
0 : Not corresponding
1 : Corresponding
WARNING
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary
adjustment is performed or after the absolute position
detector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, power
must be turned off and on, then manual reference position
return must be performed. This completes the positional
correspondence between the machine position and the
position on the absolute position detector, and sets this
parameter to 1 automatically.
APCx Position detector

0 : Other than absolute position detector
1 : Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1816 DM3x DM2x DM1x
NOTE
37

DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiplier
Set value
Detection multiplier
DM3x DM2x DM1x
0 0 0 1/2
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 3/2
0 1 1 2
1 0 0 5/2
1 0 1 3
1 1 0 7/2
1 1 1 4
NOTE
When the flexible feed gear is used, do not use these
parameters. Set the numerator and denominator of DMR
to an appropriate values in parameters 2084 and 2085
respectively.
1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)
NOTE

Set a command multiplier indicating the ratio of the least command
increment to the detection unit for each axis.
Least command increment = detection unit x command multiplier
Relationship between the increment system and the least command
increment
38
T series
Least
Least input increment command
increment
IS–B Millimeter Millimeter 0.001 mm (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm
machine input
0.001 mm (radius specification) 0.001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm
0.0001 inch (radius specification) 0.001 mm
Inch Millimeter 0.001 mm (diameter specification) 0.00005 inch
machine input
0.001 mm (radius specification) 0.0001 inch
Inch input 0.0001 inch (diameter specification) 0.00005 inch
0.0001 inch (radius specification) 0.0001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 deg 0.001 deg
Least
Least input increment command
increment
IS–C Millimeter Millimeter 0.0001 mm (diameter specification) 0.00005 mm
machine input
0.0001 mm (radius specification) 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.00001 inch (diameter specification) 0.00005 mm
0.00001 inch (radius specification) 0.0001 mm
Inch Millimeter 0.0001 mm (diameter specification) 0.000005 inch
machine input
0.0001 mm (radius specification) 0.00001 inch
Inch input 0.00001 inch (diameter specification) 0.000005 inch
0.00001 inch (radius specification) 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg
M series
Increment Least input increment and least command increment
system IS–B IS–C Units
Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm
The value set in the parameter is obtained as follows:

(1) When command multiplier is 1/2 to 1/27
Set value = 1 + 100
(Command multiplier)
Valid data range: 102 to 127

(2) When command multiplier is 1 to 48
Set value = 2 command multiplier
Valid data range: 2 to 96
NOTE
When command multiplier is 1 to 48, the set value must be
determined so that an integer can be set for command
multiplier.
39
1821 Reference counter size for each axis

Set the size of the reference counter.
NOTE
1825 Servo loop gain for each axis

[Unit of data] 0.01 s –1
Set the loop gain for position control for each axis.
When the machine performs linear and circular interpolation (cutting), the
same value must be set for all axes. When the machine requires
positioning only, the values set for the axes may differ from one another.
As the loop gain increases, the response by position control is improved.
A too large loop gain, however, makes the servo system unstable.
The relationship between the positioning deviation (the number of pulses
counted by the error counter) and the feedrate is expressed as follows:
Positioning deviation = feedrate
60 (loop gain)
Unit : Positioning deviation: mm, inches, or deg
Feedrate: mm/min, inches/min, or deg/min
Loop gain: s–1
1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement

Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during
movement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is stopped
immediately (as in emergency stop).
Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some
margin in this parameter.
40
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state

Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning
deviation limit set for stopped state, a servo alarm is generated, and
operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
1850 Grid shift for each axis

A grid shift is set for each axis.
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in
this parameter. Up to the maximum value counted by the reference
counter can be specified as the grid shift.
NOTE
41
1.4.2
Absolute Position
Detection
General Even when the power to the CNC is turned off, a battery–powered pulse
coder stores the current position. No reference position return is required
when the power to the CNC is turned on next.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx
NOTE

APCx Position detector
0: Other than absolute position detector
1: Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)
42
1.5
SETTINGS RELATED
WITH COORDINATE
SYSTEMS
1.5.1
Machine Coordinate
System
General Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point
proper to the machine system.
A coordinate system in which the reference position becomes the
parameter-preset (No. 1240) coordinate value when manual reference
position return is performed, is set. With G53 command, the machine
coordinate system is selected and the axis can be moved at rapid traverse
to the position expressed by the machine coordinates.
Parameter
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine
coordinate system
NOTE

[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999

Set the coordinate values of the reference positions in the machine
coordinate system.
Warning
WARNING
Since the machine coordinate system must be set before
the G53 command is specified, at least one manual
reference position return or automatic reference position
return by the G28 command must be performed after the
power is turned on. This is not necessary when an
absolute–position detector is attached.
43
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MACHINE COORDINATE
(For Machining Center) SYSTEM
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MACHINE COORDINATE

(For Lathe) (B–63504EN) SYSTEM
1.5.2
Workpiece Coordinate
System/Addition of
Workpiece Coordinate
System Pair (M series)
General A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a

workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set
with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate system).
A machining program sets a workpiece coordinate system (selecting a
workpiece coordinate system).
A set workpiece coordinate system can be changed by shifting its origin
(changing a workpiece coordinate system).
Setting a workpiece A workpiece coordinate system can be set using one of three methods:
coordinate system (1) Method using G92 (G50 for G code system A)
A workpiece coordinate system is set by specifying a value after G92
(G50) in the program.
(2) Method of using G54 to G59
Six workpiece coordinate systems are set in advance, using the MDI
panel, and the workpiece coordinate system to be used is selected
using program commands G54 to G59.
44
Selecting a workpiece The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described
coordinate system below.
(1) Selecting a workpiece coordinate system set by G92 (G50) or
automatic workpiece coordinate system setting
Once a workpiece coordinate system is selected, absolute commands
work with the workpiece coordinate system.
(2) Choosing from six workpiece coordinate systems set using the
MDI panel
By specifying a G code from G54 to G59, one of the workpiece
coordinate systems 1 to 6 can be selected.
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1
Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 are established after reference
position return after the power is turned on. When the power is turned
on, G54 coordinate system is selected.
Changing workpiece The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be
coordinate system changed by changing an external workpiece zero point offset value or
workpiece zero point offset value.
Three methods are available to change an external workpiece zero point
offset value or workpiece zero point offset value.
(1) Inputting from the MDI panel
(2) Programming by G10 or G92 (G50)
(3) Using external data input (refer to 15.2)
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

coordinate coordinate coordinate coordinate
system 1 (G54) system 2 (G55) system 3 (G56) system 4 (G57)
ZOFS2 ZOFS3
ZOFS1 ZOFS4
Workpiece
coordinate
ZOFS5 system 5 (G58)
EXOFS
ZOFS6
Machine zero Workpiece
coordinate
system 6 (G59)
EXOFS : External workpiece zero point offset value
ZOFS1 to ZOFS6 : Workpiece zero point offset value
Changing an external workpiece zero point offset value or workpiece zero point offset value
45
Workpiece coordinate When the coordinate system actually set by the G92 (G50) command or
system shift (T series) the automatic coordinate system setting deviates from the programmed
workpiece coordinate, the set coordinate system can be shifted.
Set the desired shift amount in the workpiece coordinate system shift
memory.
X
x X–Z: Coordinate system in programming
x–z : Current set coordinate system with shift
ÂÂÂ
amount 0
ÂÂÂ
(coordinate system to be modified by
shifting)
ÂÂÂ
O’
z
Shift
Z
O
Set the shift amount from O’ to O in the workpiece coordinate system shift memory.
Workpiece Coordinate System shift
Addition of workpiece Besides the six workpiece coordinate systems (standard workpiece
coordinate system pair coordinate systems) selectable with G54 to G59, 48 additional workpiece
(M series) coordinate systems (additional workpiece coordinate systems) can be
used.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 AWK
[Data type] Bit

AWK Action taken after the workpiece zero point offset value is changed
0 : The absolute coordinate value is changed when the first automatic
operation is performed.
1 : The absolute coordinate value is changed immediately.(If automatic
operation is not in the start–up sequence)
NOTE
In either case, the change becomes effective when the next
block is buffered.
46
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1202 G50 EWS EWD
[Data type] Bit

EWD The shift direction of the workpiece coordinate system is:
0 : The direction specified by the external workpiece zero point offset
value
1 : In the opposite direction to that specified by the external workpiece
zero point offset value
X X X X
EWD=0 EWD=1
Z Z (Shifted workpiece
coordinate system)
EXOFS –EXOFS
Z (Original workpiece
Z
coordinate system)
EXOFS : External workpiece zero point offset value
EWS Shift value of the workpiece coordinate system and external workpiece
zero point offset value are
0 : Stored in the separate memory areas.
1 : Stored in the same memory area, that is, the shift and the offset values
are the same.
G50 G50 command for setting a coordinate system (or the G92 command in G
command system B or C) is specified,
0 : The G50 (or G92) command is executed without an alarm.
1 : P/S alarm No. 010 is issued and the G50 (or G92) command is not
executed.
1220 External workpiece zero point offset value

[Unit of data] Input increment IS–B IS–C Unit
Linear axis (input in mm) 0.001 0.0001 mm
Linear axis (input in inches) 0.0001 0.00001 inch

This is one of the parameters that give the position of workpiece
coordinate system (G54 to G59). It gives an offset of the workpiece zero
point common to all workpiece coordinate systems. In general, the offset
varies depending on the workpiece coordinate systems. The parameter
value can also be set from the PMC by using the external data input
function.
47
1221 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system1 (G54)

[Unit of data] Input increment IS–B IS–C Unit
Linear axis (input in mm) 0.001 0.0001 mm
Linear axis (input in inches) 0.0001 0.00001 inch

The workpiece zero point offset values in workpiece coordinate systems 1
to 6 (G54 to G59) are set.
Workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)
Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)

Workpiece zero point offset
Origin of machine coordinate system
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM

48
1.5.3
Rotary Axis Roll Over
General The roll–over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from
overflowing. The roll–over function is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx)
of parameter 1008 to 1.
For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in the
command. For an absolute command, the coordinates after the tool has
moved are values rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation set
in parameter No. 1260. The tool moves in the direction in which the final
coordinates are closest when bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set
to 0. Displayed values for relative coordinates are also rounded by the
angle corresponding to one rotation when bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.
1008 is set to 1.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE

ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis
ROSx ROTx Description
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type.
(Not rounded in 0 to 360_)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to pa-
rameter No. 3624)
0 1 Rotation axis (A Type)

(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_. Absolute
coordinate values and relative coordinate values are rounded or
not rounded by parameter No. 1008 #0 and #2.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to pa-
rameter No. 3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the ref-
erence position return direction and the move amount does not ex-
ceed one rotation.

(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and rela-
tive coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to
360_)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to pa-
rameter No. 3624)
(4) The rotation axis roll over function and index table indexing func-
tion (M series) cannot be used.
49
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1008 RRLx RABx ROAx
NOTE

ROAx The roll–over function of a rotation axis is
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for
which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)
RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1 : Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
RRLx Relative coordinates are

0 : Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
1 : Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No. 1260.
1260 Move amount per rotation of rotary axis
NOTE

Unit of data 0.001 0.0001 deg
Standard setting
360000 3600000
value

Set move amount per rotation of rotation axis.
50
Note
NOTE
This function cannot be used together with the indexing
function of the index table (M series).
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL ROTARY AXIS ROLL–OVER
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL ROTARY AXIS ROLL–OVER

51
1.6
SIMPLE
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL
General A movement along an axis can be executed simply by executing a move
command specified for that axis or by synchronizing the movement with
another axis. Either of these two types can be selected by means of a signal
sent from the machine.
In synchronous operation, that axis for which move commands can be
specified is called the master axis, while an axis along which the tool
moves in sync with the master axis is called a slave axis.
D Simple synchronous The M series and T series support different simple synchronization
control for the M series control functions. One of the greatest differences is that:
and T series
<T series> The function can synchronize only automatic operations. It
cannot synchronize manual operations.
<M series> The function can synchronize both automatic and manual
operations.
The following functions are provided only for the M series:
D Synchronization error check function
D Synchronization compensation function
D Synchronization error Any difference between the servo positional deviation of the master axis
check based on and that of the slave axis is monitored constantly. A P/S alarm condition
positional deviation (M (No. 213) is detected if a limit set in parameter No. 8313 is exceeded.
series)
The function monitors the difference between the machine coordinates on
D Synchronization error
the master and slave axes. If the function detects a difference greater than
check based on machine
coordinates (M series) or equal to a preset value, it stops the machine. This function constantly
monitors the difference. Even if the synchronization control signal is
erroneously set to 0, thus disabling synchronization control, the function
can issue an alarm, stop the machine, and thus prevent damage.
If the detected difference is greater than or equal to the maximum error
set in parameter 8314, servo alarm 407 is output.
WARNING
1 Before using the synchronization error check function, set
identical values for the reference positions of the master
and slave axes.
2 To clear the alarm, first increase the maximum
synchronization error set in parameter 8314, then press the
reset key. Next, perform handle operations or other manual
operations so that the machine coordinates agree. Then,
restore the original value in parameter 8314.
3 If an alarm is detected during a synchronous operation, set
the signals indicating that a synchronous operation is in
progress (G138, G140) to off, then follow the procedure for
clearing an alarm.
52
NOTE
If the synchronization error check function is not used, set
parameter 8314 to 0.
D Synchronization If the agreement between the positions of the master and slave axes is lost
compensation function when the system power is turned off, the function compensates for the
(M series) difference between them. After performing a follow–up at power on, the
function sends compensation pulses to the slave axis to adjust its position
such that it agrees with that of the master axis. This function is enabled
only when the slave axis of synchronization control supports the
absolute–position detection function.
This function, however, cannot be used for rotation axes.
WARNING
1 The synchronization compensation function is enabled
after reference position returns have been performed. The
function is not executed if the parameter is set before
reference position returns are performed.
2 The synchronization compensation function is not executed
when the servo alarm is eliminated.
CAUTION
The synchronization deviation is processed as a position
error on the slave axis while at rest. The position error is
displayed as diagnostic data 300, in the same units as used
to detect the error. If the error exceeds the value set in
parameter 8315, servo alarm 410 is triggered. The alarm
can be cleared by pressing the reset key. As the position
error for the slave axis remains even after the alarm is
cleared, however, the positions must be adjusted.
NOTE
1 To use the synchronization compensation function, set the
SOF bit, bit 7 of parameter 8301.
2 The synchronization compensation function is also enabled
when emergency stop is canceled.
53
Signal
<T series and

M series>
Signals to select the

slave axis for simple
synchronous control
SYNC1 to SYNC4 <G138>
[Function] synchronous control is performed for memory or MDI operation.
The signal is provided for each controlled axis. The number at the end
of the signal name represents the number of the controlled axis.
SYNC 1
1. ... The first axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
2. ... The second axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
3. ... The third axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
:
:
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as described below:
– During memory or MDI operation, the control unit supplies the move
command, specified for the master axis, to both the master and slave
axes of synchronous control.
The master axis is specified with a parameter.
<M series>
Signals for selecting the

manual feed axis for
simple synchronous
control
SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ4
<G140>
[Function] synchronous control is performed in jog, handle, or incremental feed
mode.
The signal is provided for each controlled axis. The number at the end
of the signal name represents the number of the controlled axis.
SYNCJ 1
1. ... The first axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
2. ... The second axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
3. ... The third axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
:
:
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as described below:
54
– In jog, handle, or incremental feed mode, the control unit supplies the
move command, specified for the master axis, to both the master and
slave axes of synchronous control.
The master axis is specified with a parameter.
Signal address
T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G138 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1
M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G140 SYNCJ4 SYNCJ3 SYNCJ2 SYNCJ1
55
Parameter
T series
8311 Axis number of master axis in synchronous control

Select a master axis for simple synchronous control. Set a master axis
number for the axis used as a slave axis. If the value of this parameter is
0, the first axis is the master axis. In this case, when the synchronous
control select signal G138 is set to 1, operation starts with the 1st axis
being the master axis.
Units digit in the parameter for the first axis
→ Set the master axis number for the first axis.
Tens digit in the parameter for the first axis
→ Set the master axis number for the second axis.
Units digit in the parameter for the second axis
→ Set the master axis number for the third axis.
Tens digit in the parameter for the second axis
→ Set the master axis number for the fourth axis.
Number Tens digit Units digit

First Second axis First axis
Second Fourth axis Third axis
NOTE
The axis number settings are: 0 for the first axis, 1 for the
second axis, 2 for the third axis, and so on.
Example) To set the 3rd axis to teh master axis and the 4th axis to the slave
axis, set as follows:
No. 8311
1st axis 00
2nd axis 20
3rd axis 00
4th axis 00
56
8312 Enabling/disablingmirror image in synchronous control

This parameter sets the mirror image function. When 100 or a greater
value is set with this parameter, the mirror image function is applied to
synchronous control. Set this parameter to the slave axis.
Example: To establish reversed synchronization when using the third axis

as the master axis and the fourth axis as the slave axis, set parameter No.
8312 as follows:
Parameter No. 8312 (first axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8312 (second axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8312 (third axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8312 (fourth axis) = 100
M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 SMF
[Data type] Bit

SMF During simple synchronous contorol, movement along a slave axis is:
0 : Included in the actual speed display
1 : Not included in the actual speed display
NOTE
This parameter is valid when simple syncronous contorol is
applied according to the setting of parameter No. 8311
(master and slave axes can be arbitrarily selected).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8301 SOF
[Data type] Bit

SOF The synchronization compensation funciton under simple synchronous
control is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
57
8311 Axis number of master axis in synchronous control

Select a master axis and slave axis for simple synchronous control. Set
a master axis number for the slave axis side.
Example: When using the first axis (X–axis) as the master axis, and the
third axis (Z–axis) as the slave axis, set parameter No. 8311 as follows:
Parameter No. 8311 X (first axis) = 0

Parameter No. 8311 Y (second axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8311 Z (third axis) = 1
Parameter No. 8311 A (fourth axis) = 0
Specifying the third axis (Z–axis) as the master axis, and the first axis
(X–axis) as the slave axis is not allowed. The master axis number must
always be smaller than the slave axis number.
It is impossible to specify more than one slave axis for a master axis.
8313 Limit of the difference between the amount of positioning deviation of the master
and slave axes
[Data type] Word

This parameter specifies a limit imposed on the positional deviation
difference between the master and slave axes. If the limit is exceeded, a
P/S alarm (No. 213) is issued.
58
8314 Allowable error in synchronization error check


This parameter sets, in the detection unit, the allowable error when a
synchronization error check is made. The mechanical coordinates of the
master axis and slave axis are monitored. When a synchronization error
equal to or greater than the value set in this parameter is detected, servo
alarm No. 407 is issued, and the machine is stopped. Set this parameter
to the master axis. When 0 is set with this parameter, no synchronization
error check is performed.
8315 Maximum compensation value for synchronization compensation
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the maximum compensation value for
synchronization. When a compensation value greater than the value set
in this parameter is used, servo alarm No. 410 is issued.
Alarm and message
T series
Number Message Description
213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN A move command was specified for the

SYNCHRO–MODE slave axis of synchronous control.
214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN A command for coordinate system set-
SYNCHRO–MODE ting or shift–type tool compensation
was executed during synchronous
control. Correct the program.
59
M series
213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN One of the following errors occurred

SYNCHRO–MODE during synchronous operation (simple
synchronous control):
(1) The program contains a move command
for the slave axis.
(2) A command for jog feed, manual handle
feed, or incremental feed was issued for
the slave axis.
(3) After power on, the command for auto-
matic reference position return was spe-
cified before a manual reference
position return had been performed.
(4) The difference in position error between
the master and slave axes exceeded
the value set in parameter 8313.
Servo alarm
407 SERVO ALARM: The difference in position error be-

EXCESS ERROR tween the master and slave axes ex-
ceeded the value set with the parame-
ter 8314.
410 SERVO ALARM: The most likely causes are:
n AXIS EXCESS ERR 1 For the n axis, the positional devi-
ation observed when the axis is
stopped has exceeded the value
set in parameter No. 1829.
2 In simple synchronous control, the
compensation used during syn-
chronous compensation has ex-
ceeded the value set in parameter
No. 8315. This alarm occurs only
for the slave axis.
Diagnostic data
540 SYNCHRO ERROR The data represents the difference in

position error between the master and
slave axes during synchronous control.
60
Caution
CAUTION
1 When a manual reference position return is executed,
identical movements are performed along the master and
slave axes until deceleration commences. Subsequently,
grids are detected separately.
2 Pitch error compensation and backlash compensation are
executed separately for the master and slave axes.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Simple synchronous control
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Simple synchronous control

61
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63503EN–1/01
2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
62
B–63503EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
General If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the
machine movement stops in a moment.
Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Fig. 2.1 (a) EMERGENCY STOP
This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the

machine tool builder, the button can usually be unlocked by twisting it.
Signal
Emergency stop
*ESP<X1008#4,G008#4>
[Function] Outputting an emergency stop signal stops the machine instantly.
[Operation] When the emergency stop signal *ESP turns to “0”, the emergency stop
is applied to the machine and the CNC is reset. This signal is controlled
by the B contacts of a pushbutton switch. The emergency stop signal turns
the servo ready signal (SA) to “0”.
Overtravel detection by this CNC is handled by the stored stroke check
function, and a limit switch for normal overtravel detection is not needed.
To prevent the machine from moving beyond the software limit through
servo feedback error, always install a stroke end limit switch (shown in
Fig. 2.1 (b) as follows).
63
Emergency stop limit switch

Emergency stop
+X =X +Y =Y +Z =Z +4 =4
Relay power
Emergency stop temporary release
supply
EMG
SK
Spark killer
Fig. 2.1 (b) Connection of emergency stop limit switch
The distance from the position where the dynamic brake is applied to that
where the tool stops moving is given in the “AC Servo Motor
Descriptions.”
WARNING
Software limit setting point and operating point of limit switch
for emergency stop
The stop point by the software limit goes beyond the setting
point by as much as the following distance.
R (mm)
7,500
R: Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
The actual stopping point may exceed the position set by a
parameter (Nos.1320 and 1321) by as much as R/7500
(mm). Set the limit switch for emergency stop including the
allowance for the above value.
Software limit setting point
Stroke end direction
ÄÄÄÄ
R
7,500
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
The machine stops in this Set the limit switch for emergency stop in
range. this range.
64
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1008 *ESP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G008 *ESP
Reference item
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series B–65142E
DESCRIPTIONS
65
2.2
CNC READY SIGNAL
General When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the CNC
ready signal is set to 1.
Signal
CNC Ready Signal

MA<F001#7>
[Function] The CNC ready signal reports that the CNC is ready.
[Output condition] When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the signal
is set to 1. Normally, it takes several seconds to establish this state after
the power is turned on. If a system alarm is issued, the signal is set to 0.
The signal remains set to 1, however, when an emergency stop or a similar
operation is performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 MA
66
Servo Ready Signal

SA <F000#6>
[Function] Signal SA turns to “1” when the servo system is ready to operate. For an
axis that is to be braked, release the brake when this signal is sent and
apply the brake when this signal is not sent.
Time chart of this signal is as follows:
Power off
Power on
Ready signal (MA)
60 to 100 msec
Servo ready
signal (SA)
Brake on
Servo alarm Servo alarm
Overload
Reset
Reset Emergency stop
1 to 2 seconds About 1 second
Fig. 2.2 Time chart for servo ready signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 SA
67
2.3
OVERTRAVEL
CHECK
2.3.1
Overtravel Signal
General When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool
limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit
switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed.
Signal
Overtravel signal
*+L1 to *+L4<G114>
*+L1 to *–L4<G116>
[Function] Indicates that the control axis has reached its stroke limit. There are
signals for every direction in every control axis. The +/– in the signal
name indicates the direction and the number corresponds to the control
axis.
+ L 1
1 No. 1 axis is at stroke limit.

+ Has moved to and reached a + direction.

– Has moved to and reached a – direction.
[Operation] When it is “0” , the control unit operates as given below.

@ In automatic operation, if even one axis overtravel signal turns to “0”,
all axes are decelerated to stop, an alarm is given and operation is
halted.
@ In manual operation, only the axis whose movement signal has turned
to “0” is decelerated to a stop, and the axis can be moved in the
opposite direction.
@ Once the axis overtravel signal has turned to “0”, the axis direction is
registered. Even if the signal returns to “1”, it is not possible to move
that axis in that direction until the alarm is cleared.
68
The following shows the deceleration distance at overtravel.

(i) Rapid traverse
Command pulse
deceleration
V
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
Servo system delay
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
VR
t
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
*+La limit switch t1 t2 TR
TR 1
L1=VR(t1+t2+ +TS) · [mm or inch]
2 60000
L1:Deceleration distance
VR: Rapid traverse speed (mm/min or inch/min)
t1: Limit switch signal delay time (from limit switch operation to *+La
signal turn off (ms))
t2: Receiver delay time 30ms
TR: Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant (ms)
TS: Servo system time constant (ms)
NOTE
Servo system time constant TS is 33 msec when the servo
unit is adjusted to the standard setting.
(ii)Cutting feed
ÄÄÄÄ
V Servo system delay
ÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄ
VC
ÄÄÄÄ
t1 t2
*+La limit switch
TR 1
L2=VC(t1+t2+ +TS) · [mm or inch]
2 60000
L2:Deceleration distance
Vc: Maximum feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
t1, t2, Ts: Same as (i).
69
D Releasing overtravel Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving the tool to the safety
direction by manual operation.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G114 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1
G116 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3004 OTH
[Data type] Bit

OTH The overtravel signal is:
0 : Checked
1 : Not checked
WARNING
For safety, usually set 0 to check the overtravel signal.
Alarm and message

506 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–4) +

side hardware OT.
507 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–4) –
side hardware OT.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Overtravel
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Overtravel

70
2.3.2
Stored Stroke Check 1
General When the tool tries to exceed a stored stroke check, an alarm is displayed
and the tool is decelerated and stopped.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool
can be moved in the reverse direction from which the tool came.
Parameters (Nos. 1320, 1321 or Nos. 1326, 1327) set boundary. Outside
the area of the set checks is a forbidden area. The machine tool builder
usually sets this area as the maximum stroke.
Signal
Stored stroke check

select signal EXLM
<G007#6> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Selects stroke check 1–I (parameter Nos. 1320 and 1321) or stroke check
1–II (parameter Nos. 1326 and 1327).
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
– Checks stroke check 1 on the basis of parameter Nos. 1326 and 1327,
instead of parameter Nos, 1320 and 1321.
Stroke check external

setting signals +LM1 to
+LM4 <G110> and –LM1
to –LM4 <G112> (M
series) [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Change the values of the parameters governing the stroke check (1320 and
1321).
[Operation] When these signals are set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
– Change the stored checks, set with parameter Nos. 1320 and 1321,
to the machine coordinates when the signals are input.
Stroke check release

signal RLSOT <G007#7>
(M series) [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Selects whether the stored stroke check 1 are checked.
– Does not check the stored stroke check 1.
71
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 RLSOT EXLM
G110 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1
G112 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 BFA LZR LMS
[Data type] Bit

LMS The EXLM signal for switching stored stroke check 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
LZR Checking of stored stroke check 1 during the time from power–on to the
manual position reference return
0: The stroke check 1 is checked.
1: The stroke check 1 is not checked
NOTE
When the absolute–position detector is being used, and the
reference position is already set at power–on, the stored
stroke check is checked immediately after the power is
turned on, regardless of the setting of this bit.
BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke check 1, 3 is issued

0: An alarm is generated after the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.
1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.
1320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction each axis

Metric input 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] – 99999999 to 99999999
The coordinate values of stored stroke checks 1 in the positive and

negative directions are set for each axis in the machine coordinate system.
The outside area of the two checks set in the parameters is inhibited.
72
WARNING
1 For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must
be set.
2 When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke
becomes infinite:
parameter 1320 < parameter 1321
For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set,
only incremental commands are available. If an absolute
command is issued for this axis, the absolute register may
overflow, and normal movement will not result.
1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction each axis


Set the coordinate values of stored stroke checks 1 in the positive and
negative directions for each axis in the machine coordinate system.
When stroke check switching signal EXLM is ON, stroke checks are
checked with parameters 1326 and 1327, not with parameters 1320 and
1321. The area outside that set by parameters 1326 and 1327 is inhibited.
NOTE
The EXLM signal is enabled only when LMS, #2 of
parameter 1300, is set to 1.
Alarm and message


side stored stroke check 1.
Caution
CAUTION
In setting a forbidden area, if two points to be set are the
same, all area is forbidden in check 1.
73
Note
NOTE
1 Parameter LZR (bit 6 of No. 1300) selects whether each
check becomes effective after the power is turned on and
manual reference position return or automatic reference
position return by G28 has been performed or immediately
after the power is turned on.
2 Parameter BFA (bit 7 of No. 1300) selects whether an alarm
is displayed immediately before the tool enters the
forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the
forbidden area.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Stroke check
(B–63514EN)

74
2.3.3
Stored Stroke
Check 2, 3
General Three areas (Two axes in M series) which the tool cannot enter can be
specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2,and stored
stroke check 3.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Stored stroke
ÇÇÇÇÇ
check 3
ÇÇÇÇÇ
Stored stroke
check 2
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ Stored stroke check 1
ÇÇÇ : Forbidden area for the tool
Fig. 2.3.3 (a) Stroke check (T series)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
(X, Y, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
(I, J, K)
(1) Forbidden area is inside.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X, Y, Z)
(I, J, K)
ÇÇÇ
(2) Forbidden area is outside.
ÇÇÇ
: Forbidden area for the tool
Fig. 2.3.3 (b) Stroke check (M series)
75
When the tool exceeds a stored stroke check, an alarm is displayed and
the tool is decelerated and stopped.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool
can be moved in the reverse direction from which the tool came.
Stored stroke check 2 Parameters (Nos. 1322, 1323) or commands set these boundaries. Inside
or outside the area of the check can be set as the forbidden area. Parameter
OUT (No. 1300#0) selects either inside or outside as the forbidden area.
In case of program command a G22 command forbids the tool to enter the
forbidden area, and a G23 command permits the tool to enter the forbid-
den area. Each of G22; and G23; should be commanded independently of
another commands in a block.
The command below creates or changes the forbidden area:
G 22X_Z_I_K_;
A(X,Z)
B(I,K)
X>I,Z>K
X–I>ζ
Z–K>ζ
ζ is the distance the tool travels in 8 ms. It is 2000 in least

command increments when the feedrate is 15 m/min.
Fig. 2.3.3 (c) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a program
(T series)
G 22X_Y_Z_I_J_K_;
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X,Y,Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(I,J,K)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
X>I,Y>J,Z>K
X–I> ζ (In least command increment)
Y–J> ζ (In least command increment)
Z–K> ζ ((In least command increment)
Fig. 2.3.3 (d) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a program
(M series)
76
A(X1,Z1)
B(X2,Z2)
X1>X2,Z1>Z2
X1–X2> ζ
Z1–Z2> ζ

Fig. 2.3.3 (e) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters
(T series)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ A(X1, Y1, Z1)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
B(X2, Y2, Z2)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2
X1–X2> ζ (In least command increment)
Y1–Y2> ζ (In least command increment)
Z1–Z2> ζ (n least command increment)

Fig. 2.3.3 (f) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters
(M series)
When you set the forbidden area X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2 and Z2 through
parameters (Nos. 1322, 1323), the data should be specified by the
distance from the reference position in the least command increment
(output increment).
If set the forbidden area X, Y, Z, I, J, K (X, Z, I, K, on T series) by a G22
command, specify the data by the distance from the reference position in
the least input increment (input increment). The programmed data are
then converted into the numerical values in the least command increment,
and the values are set as the parameters.
D Stored stroke check 3 Set the boundary with parameters Nos. 1324 and 1325. The area inside
(T series) the boundary becomes the forbidden area.
D Checkpoint for the The parameter setting or programmed value (XZIK) depends on which
forbidden area part of the tool or tool holder is checked for entering the forbidden area.
Confirm the checking position (the top of the tool or the tool chuck) before
programming the forbidden area.
If point C (The top of the tool) is checked in Fig. 2.3.3 (g), the distance
“c” should be set as the data for the stored stroke check function. If point
D (The tool chuck) is checked, the distance “d” must be set.
77
d
D
c
C The position of the

tool after reference
Forbidden area boundary position return
Fig. 2.3.3 (g) Setting the forbidden area (T series)
B
The position of the
tool after reference
position return
b
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
A a
Forbidden area boundary
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 2.3.3 (h) Setting the forbidden area (M series)
D Forbidden area over– Area can be set in piles.

lapping
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Fig. 2.3.3 (i) Setting the forbidden area overlapping (T series)
Unnecessary checks should be set beyond the machine stroke.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Setting the forbidden area over lapping
Fig. 2.3.3 (j) Setting the forbidden area overlapping (M series)
78
D Effective time for a Parameter LZR (bit 6 of No. 1300) selects whether each check becomes
forbidden area effective after the power is turned on and manual reference position return
or automatic reference position return by G28 has been performed or
immediately after the power is turned on.
After the power is turned on, if the reference position is in the forbidden
area of each check, an alarm is generated immediately (Only in G22 mode
for stored stroke check 2).
D Releasing the alarms When the tool enters and forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool
can be moved in the reverse direction from which the tool came. Please
move the tool out of the forbidden area, then please release the alarm by
reset. If succeeded, the tool become movable to both paths.
D Change from G23 to When G23 is switched to G22 in the forbidden area, the following results.
G22 in a forbidden area (1)When the forbidden area is inside, an alarm is informed in the next
move.
(2)When the forbidden area is outside, an alarm is informed immediately.
Signal
Storoke check 3 release

signal RLSOT3
<G007#4> (T series)
[Function] Selects whether stored stroke check 3 is checked.
[Use] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
· The control unit does not check stored stroke check 3.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 RLSOT3
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 BFA LZR RL3 OUT
BFA LZK OUT
[Data type] Bit

OUT The area inside or outside of the stored stroke check 2 is set as an
inhibition area.
0: Inside
1: Outside
RL3 Stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT3
0: The signal is disabled.
1: The signal is enabled.
79
LZR Checking of stored stroke check 1 during the time from power–on to the
0: The stroke check 1 is checked.
1: The stroke check 1 is not checked
NOTE
When the absolute–position detector is being used, and the
reference position is already set at power–on, the stored
stroke check is checked immediately after the power is
turned on, regardless of the setting of this bit.
BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke check 1, 3 is issued

0: An alarm is generated after the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.
1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1310 OT3x OT2x (T series)
OT2x (M series)

OT2x Whether stored stroke check 2 is checked for each axis is set.
0: Stored stroke check 2 is not checked.
1: Stored stroke check 2 is checked.
OT3x Whether stored stroke check 3 is checked for each axis is set.
0: Stored stroke check 3 is not checked.
1: Stored stroke check 3 is checked.
1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis
1323 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis

negative directions for each axis in the machine coordinate system. OUT,
#0 of parameter 1300, sets either the area outside or the area inside
specified by two checks as the inhibition area.
WARNING
For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must
be set.
80
1324 Coordinate value of stored stored check 3 in the positive direction on each axis
1325 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negatice direction on each axis

negative directions for each axis in the machine coordinate system. The
area inside the checks set in the parameters is forbidden.
Alarm and message


(Parameter No.1322 )
(Parameter No.1323)
Warning
WARNING
1 In setting a forbidden area, if the two points to be set are the
same, the area is as follows:
(1)When the forbidden area is check 1, all areas are
forbidden areas.
(2)When the forbidden area is check 2 or check 3, all areas
are movable areas.
2 In setting a forbidden area, if the two points are set in the wrong
order, the area is set as follows:
(1) When the forbidden area is check 1, the stroke check becomes
infinite.
(2) When the forbidden area is check 2 or 3, a quadrangle with the
two points assumed as vertexes is set as the check.
81
Note
NOTE
Parameter BFA (bit 7 of No. 1300) selects whether an alarm
is displayed immediately before the tool enters the
forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the
forbidden area. (check 1, 3 only)
Reference item
(B–63514EN)

82
2.4
ALARM SIGNAL
General When an alarm is triggered in the CNC, the alarm is indicated on the
screen, and the alarm signal is set to 1.
If the voltage level of the memory backup battery falls to below a specified
level while the CNC is turned off, the battery alarm signal is set to 1.
Signal
Alarm signal
AL<F001#0>
[Function] The alarm signal reports that the CNC is in an alarm state.
There are the following alarms. The following alarms are issued:
(a) TH alarm
(b) TV alarm
(c) P/S alarm
(d) Overtravel alarm
(e) Overheat alarm
(f) Servo alarm
[Output condition] The alarm signal is set to 1 when:
– The CNC is placed in the alarm state.
The alarm signal is set to 0 when:
– The alarm has been released by resetting the CNC.
Battery alarm signal

BAL<F001#2>
[Function] The battery alarm signal indicates that the voltage of the battery for the
memory has fallen to below a specified level while the CNC is off. In
general, this signal is used to turn on an LED to notify the operator.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:
– The battery voltage has fallen to below the specified level.
The signal is set to 0 when:
– The battery voltage has risen to the specified level or higher.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 BAL AL
83
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 NPA
[Data type] Bit

NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message is
entered
0 : The display shifts to the alarm or message screen.
1 : The display does not shift to the alarm or message screen.
84
2.5
START LOCK/
INTERLOCK
General This signal disables machine movement along axes. When this signal is
input during movement along axes, the tool movement is decelerated,
then stopped.
Signal
Start lock signal

STLK<G007#1>(T series)
[Function] This signal disables machine movement along axes in automatic
operation (memory or MDI operation).
[Operation] When the STLK signal turns to “1”, the axis movement is decelerated and
stopped.
In automatic operation, blocks containing M, S, T, or B commands 2nd
auxiliary function are executed consecutively until a block containing an
axis move command is encountered; the movement then stops and is
placed into the automatic operation mode (STL is “1”, SPL is “0”). When
the STLK signal turns to “0”, operation restarts. (Figs. 2.5 (a), (b)).
Command read
Axis move
STLK
Fig. 2.5 (a) Block containing only axis move command
Command read
MF/SF/TF
FIN
STLK
Fig. 2.5 (b) Block containing only auxiliary functions only
85
All axes Interlock signal

*IT<G008#0>
[Function] This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effective
regardless of the selected mode.
[Operation] When the *IT signal is “0”, the axis movement is decelerated and stopped.
In automatic operation, blocks containing M, S, T or B 2nd auxiliary
mode commands are executed consecutively until a block containing an
axis move command is encountered; the system then stops and is placed
into the automatic operation mode (cycle start lamp signal STL is “1”,
feed hold lamp signal SPL is “0”). When the *IT signal turns to “1”,
operation resumes (Figs. 2.5(c), (d)).
Command read
Axis move
*IT
Fig. 2.5 (c) Block containing only axis move command

(manual and automatic operation)
Command read
MF/SF/TF
FIN
*IT
Fig. 2.5 (d) Block containing auxiliary functions only

(automatic operation)
NOTE
The overtravel amount of the motor after turning *IT to “0”
is represented by the following formula.
1 Tc Ts A
Qmax =Fm @ × ( + + )
60 1000 1000 1000
Where
Qmax : Overtravel quantity (mm or inch)
Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
Tc : Cutting time constant (ms)
Ts : Servo time constant (Ts = 33ms normally)
A : Processing time of CNC
A = 50ms
86
Interlock signal for each

axis
*IT1 to *IT4<G130>
[Function] These signals disable feed along axes on an axis–by–axis basis.
A separate interlock signal is provided for each controlled axis. The
number at the end of each signal name denotes the number of the
corresponding controlled axis.
*IT 1
1 ..... Interlock for the first axis
2 ..... Interlock for the second axis
3 ..... Interlock for the third axis
: :
: :
[Operation] a) In manual operation

The movement of an interlocked axis is inhibited, but the other axes
are movable. If an axis is interlocked during movement, it stops after
being decelerated, and it starts moving again when it is released from
interlock.
b) In automatic operation (MEM RMT or MDI mode)
If an axis is interlocked while its movement is being commanded (the
move amount is not 0, inclusive of the tool offset), all axes movements
are prevented.
If a moving axis is interlocked, all axes stop moving after being
decelerated, and they start moving again when it is released from being
interlocked.
This function is effective during dry run.
Interlock signal for each

axis and direction
+MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, –MIT2,
+MIT3, –MIT3, +MIT4, –MIT4
<G132#0 to #3, G134#0 to
#3> (M series)
+MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, –MIT2
<X1004#2 to X1004#5>
(T series)
[Function] This function allows a directional interlock for each axis.
[Operation] When the axis/directional interlock signal becomes “1”, CNC applies
interlock only in the corresponding axial direction. However, during
automatic operation, all axes will stop.
87
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 STLK
G008 *IT
G130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
G134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1004 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX ITL
[Data type] Bit

ITL Interlock signal for all axes
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
ITX Interlock signals for each axis
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
DIT Interlock for each axis direction
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
Note
NOTE
The interlock signal for each axis and direction (T series) is
supported regardless of whether the direct input of tool
offset value measurement B is provided.
88
2.6
MODE SELECTION
General The mode select signal is a code signal consisting of the three bits MD1,
MD2, and MD4. The seven modes -- memory edit (EDIT), memory
operation (MEM), manual data input (MDI), manual handle/incremental
feed (HANDLE/INC), manual continuous feed (JOG), TEACH IN JOG,
TEACH IN HANDLE -- can be selected. And in addition, DNC operation
mode can be selected by combining the (MEM) mode setting and the
DNCI signal. Manual reference position return mode can be selected by
combining the manual continuous feed (JOG) mode setting and the ZRN
signal.
The currently selected operation mode can be posted by outputting the
operation mode check signal.
Signal
Mode selection signal

MDI, MD2, MD4
<G043#0∼#2>
DNCI <G043#5>
ZRN <G043#7>

[Operation] As shown in the following table, the mode select signal is a grey code (a
code in which only one bit is different from that of the adjacent mode).
To prevent faulty mode switching, use an overcrossing contact rotary
switch so that only one bit changes from that of the adjacent mode.
”Faulty mode switching” means” for example:
When the mode is switched to the EDIT mode during memory operation,
the CNC enters the single block state and the operation stops at the end
of the executing block.
For this mode switching, only MD2 should change from 0 to 1. If a

transient signal status change occurs in a signal other than MD2 during
mode switching, however, another mode (manual continuous feed mode,
for example) is set between automatic operation mode and memory edit
mode. When manual continuous feed mode is set while the CNC is in
automatic status, the CNC immediately stops memory operation. As a
result, although the operator intends to switch the mode to the memory
edit mode, the CNC is, instead, placed in the feed hold state.
89
Signal status
Mode
MD4 MD2 MD1 DNCI ZRN
1 Memory edit (EDIT) 0 1 1 0 0
2 Memory operation (MEM) 0 0 1 0 0
3 Manual data input (MDI) 0 0 0 0 0
4 Manual handle/incremental feed 1 0 0 0 0

(HANDLE/INC)
5 Manual continuous feed (JOG) 1 0 1 0 0
6 TEACH IN HANDLE (THND) 1 1 1 0 0
7 TEACH IN JOG (TJOG) 1 1 0 0 0
8 DNC operation (RMT) 0 0 1 1 0
9 Manual reference position return 1 0 1 0 1

(REF)
90
Operation mode check

signal
MMDI, MMEM , MRMT,
MEDT, MH, MINC, MJ,
MREF, MTCHIN
<F003, F004#5>
[Function] The currently selected operation mode is output.
[Operation] The following lists the relationship between the mode selection signals
and check signals:
Input signal
Mode Output signal
MD4 MD2 MD1 DNCI ZRN
Manual data input 0 0 0 0 0 MMDI<F003#3>
(MDI) (MDI operation)
Automatic operation Memory operation 0 0 1 0 0 MMEM<F003#5>

(MEM)
DNC operation(RMT) 0 0 1 1 0 MRMT<F003#4>
Memory edition (EDIT) 0 1 1 0 0 MEDT<F003#6>
Manual handle feed / 1 0 0 0 0 MH<F003#1>

MINC<F003#0>
Incremental feed
(HANDLE/INC)
Manual continuous 1 0 1 0 0 MJ<F003#2>

feed(JOG)
Manual operation Manual reference posi- 1 0 1 0 1 MREF<F004#5>

tion return (REF)
TEACH IN JOG (TJOG) 1 1 0 0 0 MTCHIN<F003#7>,

MJ<F003#2>
TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1 0 0 MTCHIN<F003#7>,

MH<F003#1>
(THND)
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH MINC
F004 MREF
91
Note
NOTE
Precautions on modes and mode switching
1 In the MDI mode, the STL signal turns to “0” and the CNC
stops at the end of execution of the commands input from
the CRT/MDI panel, but the SPL signal does not turn to “1”.
Therefore, another command can be input from the manual
data input unit under this state.
2 Manual operation in jog feed mode
a) When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 0
Only jog feed is possible.
b) When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1
Both jog feed and manual handle feed are possible, the
manual handle feed is used. Jog feed and manual
handle feed cannot, however, be performed
simultaneously. Manual handle feed can be performed
when the tool is not being moved by means of jog feed.
3 Manual operation in TEACH IN JOG and TEACH IN
HANDLE mode.
a) When parameter JHD no.7100#0 is set to ”0” so that jog
operation and handle feed operation are performed with
separate modes:
In TEACH IN JOG mode, jog operation can be done.
In TEACH IN HANDLE mode, handle feed can be done
when manual handle feed function is not used, and
incremental feed can be done when handle feed function
is not provided.
b) When parameter JHD no.7100#0 is set to “1” so that jog
operation and handle feed operation are performed with
the same mode:
In TEACH IN JOG mode, handle feed and jog feed can
be done when manual handle feed function is not used,
but jog feed only when it is not included.
In TEACH IN HANDLE mode, handle feed and jog feed
can be done when manual handle feed function is not
used, but incremental feed only when it is not included.
The program can be edited in both TEACH IN JOG and
TEACH IN HANDLE modes.
92
NOTE
4 Manual operation in TEACH IN JOG mode
a) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 0
Only jog feed is possible.
b) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1
Both jog feed and manual handle feed are possible, the
manual handle feed is used. Jog feed and manual
handle feed cannot, however, be performed
simultaneously. Manual handle feed can be performed
when the tool is not being moved by means of jog feed.
5 During operation in automatic operation mode (MEM, RMT,
or MDI), specifying switching to another automatic
operation mode (MEM, RMT, or MDI) or memory editing
mode (EDIT) first places the CNC in the automatic operation
stop state after executing the command of the current block,
after which the mode is switched. At this time, signal STL
is set to 0. Signal SPL is not, however, set to 1. (Fig. 2.6
(a), (b))
MEM mode
Mode select signal state
MDI mode
Operation
Executing command Manual data in-

put possible in
STL this range
Fig. 2.6 (a)
MDI mode
MEM mode
Operation
Memory opera-
Executing command tion possible in
in MDI mode this range
STL
Fig. 2.6 (b)
93
NOTE
6 When the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode is
selected while the CNC is operating in the MEM or MDI
mode, the automatic or MDI operation stops, the STL signal
turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”, and
the CNC enters the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE
mode. Manual handle feed or incremental feed by axis
direction select signal is possible under this state. Since the
MEM mode or MDI mode commands are held, operation
can be restarted by the cycle start signal by selecting the
MDI or MEM mode. However, if operation was stopped by
switching to the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode
during manual data input or automatic operation, it can be
restarted only by the mode in use before the operation was
stopped (Fig. 2.6 (c)).
MEM/MDI mode
HANDLE/INC or
TEACH IN HAN-
DLE mode
Operation in the MEM

mode or MDI mode
Manual handle
/incremental
feed enabled
STL
SPL
ST
Cycle start signal
Fig. 2.6 (c)
94
NOTE
7 When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected during
RMT, MEM or MDI mode operation, operation stops, the
STL signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns
to “1”, and the CNC enters the JOG or TEACH IN JOG
mode. Manual feed by feed axis direction select signal is
possible under this state. Operation can be restarted by
returning to the original state, as described for
HANDLE/STEP or TEACH IN HANDLE mode (Fig. 2.6 (d)).
When the mode is switched to the JOG or TEACH IN JOG
mode during manual handle feed or step feed operation, the
CNC ignores the manual handle feed or step feed command
and manual jog feed becomes effective. If a feed axis
direction select signal turns to “1” before the JOG or TEACH
IN JOG mode is selected, that signal is ignored. The feed
axis select signal is selected by turning the necessary feed
axis direction signal to “1” after turning all the feed axis
direction select signals to “0” (Fig. 2.6 (e)).
It is possible to perform handle feed in TEACH IN JOG mode
by parameter THD no.7100#1. For details, refer to item (2),
(4).
MEM/MDI mode
Mode select signal state HANDLE/INC or

TEACH IN JOG
mode
Operation in the
MEM mode or MDI
mode
Jog feed
enabled
STL
SPL
ST Cycle start signal
Fig. 2.6 (d)
100ms or more
MEM/MDI/HADLE/
Mode select signal state INC mode/TEACH
IN HANDLE mode
Jog or TEACH
IN JOG
Feed axis
direction select
signal
Jog feed Jog feed enable

disable
Fig. 2.6 (e)
95
NOTE
8 The mode switching operation is summarized in the time
chart below (Fig. 2.6 (f)).
M M M M
D D D
Disable because of Disable because of

feed hold state of MDI operation
possible here- feed hold state of
automatic operation MDI operation
after
H / S or
J End of opera-
End of operation tion
Memory read Memory Memory Memory read
operation MDI command MDI command
operation operation operation
ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
STL STL STL STL STL

SPL SPL
*SP
M MEM mode selection
D MDI mode selection
H/S HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode selection
J JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode selection
Fig. 2.6 (f) Mode signal time chart
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 4.1 Manual Reference Position Return
(This manual)
96
2.7
STATUS OUTPUT
SIGNAL
General The table below lists the status output signals for notifying the state of the
CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of each signal.
Signal name Symbol Reference section
Alarm signal AL 2.4
Battery alarm signal BAL 2.4
Reset signal RST 5.2
Rewinding signal RWD 5.2
Tapping signal TAP 11.7
Moving signal MV1 – MV4 1.2.5
Moving direction signals MVD1 – MVD4 1.2.5
In–position signals INP1 – INP4 7.2.6.1
Rapid traversing signal RPDO 2.8 (the section you are

reading)
Cutting feed signal CUT 2.8 (the section you are

reading)
Thread cutting signal THRD 6.4.1
Constant surface speed CSS 9.5

signal
Inch input signal INCH 11.4
Signal
Rapid traversing signal

RPDO <F002#1>
[Function] This signal indicates that a move command is executed at rapid traverse.
[Output condition] “1” indicates an axis starts moving after rapid traverse has been selected;
“0” indicates that an axis starts moving after a feedrate other than rapid
traverse has been selected. This holds true for both automatic and manual
operation modes.
97
NOTE
1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid
traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference
point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The
rapid traverse in manual operation also includes the rapid
traverse in reference position return.
2 Once rapid traverse has been selected, this signal remains
“1”, including during a stop, until another feedrate has been
selected and movement is started.
Cutting feed signal CUT

<F002#6>
[Function] Notifies that cutting feed is being performed by automatic operation.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:
– When cutting feed is being performed by automatic operation (cutting
feed for linear interpolation, circular interpolation, helical
interpolation, thread cutting, skip cutting, or cutting in canned cycle)
CAUTION
This signal is not output in the feed hold state.
NOTE
This signal is output even when the feedrate override is 0%,
or during interlock.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 CUT RPDO
98
2.8
VRDY OFF ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL
General The German VDE safety standard requires that the motor be deactivated
when the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFF alarm ignore
signal, however, the CNC can be restarted without resetting, even if the
safety guard has been opened.
Signal
All–Axis VRDY OFF

Alarm Ignore Signal
IGNVRY<G066#0>
[Function] Disables the detection of servo alarm No. 401, VRDY OFF, for all axes.
[Operation] When this signal is set to logical 1, the control unit operates as follows:
@ The control unit does not issue servo alarm No. 401, VRDY OFF, even
when the servo amplifier ready signal goes off. The control unit,
however, sets servo ready signal SA to 0. The SA signal can remain set
to 1, depending on the setting of SAK, bit 6 of parameter No. 1804.
Each–Axis VRDY OFF

Alarm Ignore Signal
IGVRY1 – IGVRY4
<G192#0 to #3> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Disables the detection of servo alarm No. 401, VRDY OFF, for the
corresponding axis. These signals correspond to the controlled axes. The
suffixed number of each signal corresponds to the number of the
controlled axis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to logical 1, the control unit operates as follows:
@ The control unit does not issue servo alarm No. 401, VRDY OFF, even
when the servo amplifier ready signal for the corresponding axis goes
off. The servo ready signal SA, however, is set to 0. The SA signal,
however, can remain set to 1 depending on the setting of SAK, bit 6 of
parameter No. 1804.
99
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G066 IGNVRY
G192 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1804 SAK
[Data type] Bit

SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGNVRY is 1, or when the
VRDY OFF alarm ignore signals IGVRY1 to IGVRY4 are 1:
0 : Servo ready signal SA is set to 0.
1 : Servo ready signal SA remains set to 1.
Alarm and Message

401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH The n–th axis (axis 1–4) servo amplifi-
AXIS VRDY OFF er READY signal (DRDY) went off.
Caution
CAUTION
1 When the control enters NOT READY status due to
emergency stop or a servo alarm and then the control is
reset, reset processing is not terminated until the VRDY
OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 0.
2 When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1 and the
servo amplifier ready signal is set to off, the motor is freed
from the drive, but follow up is not performed. To perform
follow up, set the servo off signal to 1.
Note
NOTE
While the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1, and a
servo alarm other than alarm No. 401 occurs, the control
unit detects the alarm.
100
2.9
ABNORMAL LOAD
DETECTION
General Machine collision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large load
torque on the servo and spindle motors, compared with normal rapid
traverse or cutting feed. This function detects a load torque on the motors
and sends it as an estimated load torque to the PMC via the CNC. If the
detected load is abnormally great compared with the value specified in the
parameter, the function stops the servo motor as early as possible or
reverses the motor by an appropriate value specified in a parameter, in
order to minimize a possible damage to the machine. (The function to
reverse motors is effective only for servo motors.)
The abnormal load detection function is further divided as follows:

(1) Estimated load torque output function
The CNC is always calculating the estimated load torque for the motor
(excluding acceleration/deceleration torque). The estimated load
torque output function enables the PMC to read the calculated torque
using the window function.
(2) Abnormal load detection alarm function
This function stops motors or reverses them by an amount specified
in a parameter, causing the CNC to output an alarm, if the load torque
obtained by the estimated load torque output function is greater than
the value specified in a parameter. (The function to reverse motors is
effective only for servo motors.)
101
D Parameter setting The following flowcharts explain how to specify parameters for the
abnormal load detection function.
(1) Servo axis
Abnormal load detection
function is available.
Abnormal load detection No. 2016#0 = 0

function to be used?
No
Yes
No. 2016#0 = 1, No. 2104 = 0
Abnormal load detection Only the estimated load

alarm function to be used? No torque output function is
enabled.
Yes
Set parameter bit 5 of No. 2015 to 1 to observe the load torque.
<Adjustment>
Set parameter Nos. 1880, 2050, 2051, 2103, and 2104.
Reset parameter bit 5 of parameter No. 2015 to 0.
The estimated load torque

output and abnormal load
detection functions are en-
abled.
(2) Spindle
Abnormal load detection
function is available.
Specify parameter Nos. 4247, 4248, 4249, and 4250, and reset parameter No.
4341 to 0.
Abnormal load detection Only the estimated load

alarm function to be used? No torque output function is
Yes enabled.
Specify parameter No. 4341.
The estimated load torque

output and abnormal load
detection functions are en-
abled.
102
Signal
Servo axis abnormal

load detected signal
ABTQSV <F090#0>

[Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on a servo axis.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” if:
S An abnormal load is detected for a servo axis, Cs axis, spindle
positioning axis, or spindle axis during rigid tapping.
First–spindle abnormal
load detected signal
ABTSP1 <F090#1>

[Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on the first axis.
S An abnormal load is detected for the first spindle under speed control.
Second–spindle
abnormal load detected
signal ABTSP2 <F090#2>

[Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on the second axis.
S An abnormal load is detected for the second spindle under speed
control.
The following list summarizes the alarms and signals output by each
function.
Signal output Alarm
ABTQSV ABTSP1/ 409 754/764

ABTSP2
Servo axis f — f —
Cs contour control f — f —
Spindle positioning axis f — f —
Rigid tapping f — — f
Spindle axis for speed control — f — f
103
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0090 ABTSP2 ABTSP1 ABTQSV
Parameter (1) Parameter common to servo axes and spindles
1880 Timer for abnormal load detection alarm
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] msec
(If 0 is set, 200 ms is assumed.)
This parameter specifies the interval between the detection of an
abnormal load and the issue of a servo alarm. When the set value is not a
multiple of eight, it is rounded up to the nearest multiple of eight.
[Example] When 30 is set, the system assumes 32 ms.

(2) Servo axis parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2015 TDOUT

TDOUT Output to the check board for each axis
0 : Output the torque command to the check board.
1 : Output the estimated load torque to the check board.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2016 ABNTDT

ABNTDT Output of the estimated load torque for each axis
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
This parameter must be specified when using the estimated load torque
output function or abnormal load detection alarm function.
2050 Velocity control observer

[Setting value] 3559
When using the velocity loop observer (by setting bit 2 of parameter No.
2003 to 1), set 956 in this parameter.
104
2051 Velocity control observer

[Setting value] 3329
When using the velocity loop observer (by setting bit 2 of parameter No.
2003 to 1), set 510 in this parameter.
2103 Retraction distance upon the detection of an abnormal load

This parameter specifies the amount by which the tool is retracted, by
reversing the motor, if an abnormal load is detected. When the motor is
rotating at low speed, however, the tool may be retracted too far. To
prevent this, the motor is stopped, instead of being reversed, upon the
detection of an abnormal load while the specified feedrate is less than the
value listed in the table below.
When this parameter is set to value A, the detection of an abnormal load
causes the tool to be retracted in the reverse direction by an amount A,
then stop , if the specified feedrate is equal to or greater than the value
listed below, for each detection unit.
Detection unit Feedrate
1m A / 8 mm/ min
0.1m A / 80 mm/ min
When this parameter is set to 0, the motor stops immediately upon the
detection of abnormal load.
2104 Threshold for abnormal load detection alarm

[Unit of data] Torque command unit (Refer to the digital servo operator’s manual for
details.)
(The maximum motor torque is 7282, regardless of the motor type.)
This parameter specifies the threshold load torque at which an abnormal
load detection alarm is issued.
Monitor the load torque by setting bit 5 of parameter No. 2015 to 1 then,
for this parameter (No. 2104), set a value larger than the maximum
monitored torque. An output of 4.4 V is equivalent to 7282 in the units of
this parameter.
105
(3) Spindle parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4015 SPLDMT

SPLDMT Spindle load torque monitor function
0 : The spindle load torque monitor function is disabled.
1 : The spindle load torque monitor function is enabled.
4247 Magnetic flux compensation time constant for spindle load torque monitor

[Unit of data] 1 msec
[Standard setting] Depends of the motor model.
This parameter is used to compensate the delay in the generation of
magnetic flux in the spindle motor relative to the specified value. When 0
is set, it is assumed that the generation of magnetic flux is not delayed.
4248 Spindle load torque monitor constant

[Standard setting] Depends of the motor model.
This constant is determined by the maximum output torque and inertia of
the motor. It is used for observer processing.
4249 Observer gain 1 for spindle load torque monitor

[Standard setting] 500
4250 Observer gain 2 for spindle load torque monitor

[Standard setting] 500
4341 Threshold for abnormal load detection alarm

[Unit of data] 0.01 %
This parameter specifies the threshold load torque at which an abnormal
load detection alarm is issued for the spindle. Set a percentage (in units of
0.01 %) for the maximum output torque of the motor. When 0 is set, no
abnormal load detection alarm is issued for the spindle.
106
Alarm and message (1) Servo axis
409 Servo alarm: Abnormal load An abnormal load was detected on a servo
detected on axis n motor, or on a spindle motor during Cs
mode. To release the alarm, use RESET.
(2) Spindle
754 Abnormal load detected on An abnormal load was detected on the first
the first spindle spindle motor. To release the alarm, use
RESET.
764 Abnormal load detected on An abnormal load was detected on the se-
the second spindle cond spindle motor. To release the alarm,
use RESET.
PMC window function

D Reading the load torque The load torque data can be read at the PMC using its window function.
data (1) Servo axis
[Input data structure]
Top address +0 (Function code)

211
2
(Completion code)
(Not to be set)
4
(Data length)
(Not to be set)
6 (Data number)
0
8 (M = 1 to n: Specifies separately
(Data attribute) for each axis whether
data for it is to be
M read; n is an axis
(M = 1 to n or –1) number.
M = –1: Specifies that data for
10
(Data area) all axes are to be
read.
(Not to be set)
42
107
[Completion code]
0: The load torque data was read normally.

4: Incorrect data was specified as a data attribute, that is a value other
than –1 or 1 to n (number of axes) was specified. Alternatively, a
value greater than the number of controllable axes was specified.
[Output data structure]
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
2
(Completion code)
?
(Refer to the above description
about the completion code.)
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 2*n, where n is the num-
ber of specified axes)
6 (Data number)
0
8 (Data attribute)
M
(M: Data at input) Description of value
10 Load torque for the specified Signed binary format (negative val-
axis (2 bytes) ue in two’s complement)
Or if there are four controllable axes
Description of value
10 Load torque for the first axis Signed binary format (negative val-
(2 bytes) ue in two’s complement)
12 Load torque for the second

axis (2 bytes)
Load torque for the third axis

14 (2 bytes)
16 Load torque for the fourth axis

(2 bytes)
108
(2) Spindle
[Input data structure]
Top address +0 (Function code)

211
2
(Completion code)
(Not to be set)
4
(Data length)
(Not to be set)
6 (Data number)
1
8 (M = 1 to n: Specifies separately
(Data attribute) for each axis whether
data for it is to be
M read; n is an axis
(M = 1 to n or –1) number.
10 M = –1: Specifies that data for

(Data area) all axes are to be
read.
(Not to be set)
42
[Completion code]
0: The load torque data was read normally.

4: Incorrect data was specified as a data attribute, that is a value other
than –1 or 1 to n (number of axes) was specified. Alternatively, a
value greater than controllable axes was specified.
109
[Output data structure]
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
2
(Completion code)
?
(Refer to the above description
about the completion code.)
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 2*n, where n is the num-
ber of specified axes)
6 (Data number)
1
8 (Data attribute)
M
(M: Data at input) Description of value
10 Load torque for the specified Signed binary format (negative val-
axis (2 bytes) ue in two’s complement)
Or if there are two controllable axes
Description of value
10 Load torque for the first axis Signed binary format (negative val-
(2 bytes) ue in two’s complement)
12 Load torque for the second

axis (2 bytes)
110
3. MANUAL OPERATION B–63503EN–1/01
3 MANUAL OPERATION
111
3.1
JOG FEED/
INCREMENTAL FEED
General
D Jog feed In the jog mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection signal to “1”
on the machine operator’s panel continuously moves the tool along the
selected axis in the selected direction.
Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. 3 axes can be
selected at a time by parameter JAX (No.1002#0).
D Incremental feed In the incremental feed mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection
signal to “1” on the machine operator’s panel moves the tool one step
along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distance
the tool is moved is the least input increment. Each step can be 10, 100,
or 1000 times the least input increment.
The jog feedrate is specified in a parameter (No.1423)

The jog feedrate can be adjusted with the jog feedrate override dial.
With the rapid traverse selection switch the tool can be moved at the rapid
traverse rate regardless of the jog feedrate override signal.
112
B–63503EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Signal The following signals determine the way in which jog feed or incremental
feed is executed.
Selection Jog feed Incremental feed
Mode selection MD1, MD2, MD4, MJ MD1, MD2, MD4, MINC
Selection of the axis to

move
+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3, ...
Selection of the direc-
tion to move the axis
Selection of the move MP1, MP2

amount
Selection of feedrate *JV0 – *JV15, RT, ROV1, ROV2
The only difference between jog feed and incremental feed is the method
of selecting the feed distance. In jog feed, the tool continues to be fed
while the following signals selecting the feed axis and direction are “1”:
+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3, etc. In incremental feed, the tool is fed by
one step.
The distance of the step is selected by the manual handle feed move
distance select signal MP1 an d MP2.
For the signals selecting the mode, see Section 2.6, “Mode Selection
Signals.” For the manual handle feed selection signals, MP1 and MP2 of
selection of the move amount, see 3.2 “Manual handle feed.” For rapid
traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2, see Section 7.1.6.1, “Feedrate
Override Signals.”
Other signals are described below.
Feed Axis and Direction

Selection Signal
+J1 – +J4<G100>
–J1 – –J4<G102>
[Function] Selects a desired feed axis and direction in jog feed or incremental feed.
The sign (+ or –) in the signal name indicates the feed direction. The
number following J indicates the number of the control
axis.
+ J 1
1 First axis is fed

2 Second axis is fed
3 Third axis is fed
4 Fourth axis is fed
+ Feed in positive direction

– Feed in negative direction
113
[Operation] When the signal is high, the control unit operates as described below.
D When jog feed or incremental feed is allowed, the control unit moves
the specified axis in the specified direction.
D In jog feed, the control unit continues to feed the axis while the signal
is “1”.
Jog mode
(or Teach in jog mode)
+J1
1st axis move
D In incremental feed, the control unit feeds the specified axis by the step
distance which is specified by the manual handle feed move distance
selection signal MP1, MP2. Then the control unit stops it. Even if the
signal is set to “0” while the axis is being fed, the control unit does not
stop feeding it.
To feed the axis again, set the signal to “0”, then set it to “1” again.
Incremental feed mode

(TEACH IN HANDLE
mode)
+J1
1st axis move
NOTE
1 If both the positive direction and negative direction signals
of the same axis are simultaneously set to “1”, neither the
positive direction nor the negative direction is selected. The
control unit assumes that both these signals are set to “0”.
2 If the feed axis and direction selection signals are set to “1”
before the jog feed mode or incremental feed mode is
selected, these signals are invalidated. After the jog feed
mode or incremental feed mode is selected, set these signal
to “0”, then set them to “1” again.
Jog mode
or incremental feed mode
+J1
1st axis move

+J1 is inef-
fective dur- Axis is fed again after signals
ing this have turned to “0” once.
period.
3 If the control unit is reset while the feed axis and direction
selection signals are set to “1” or if a feed axis and direction
signal turns to “1” while the control unit is in the reset state,
the signal cannot be validated by releasing the reset state.
After the reset state is released, set these signals to “0”,
then set them to “1” again.
114
Incremental feed mode

(TEACH IN HANDLE mode)
Reset
+J1
1st axis move

+J1 is inef-
fective dur- Axis is fed again
Move is stopped by ing this
resetting after signals have
period. turned to “0” once.
Manual Feedrate
Override Signal
*JV0 – *JV15<G011>
[Function] Selects a feedrate in jog feed or incremental feed. These signals are
sixteen binary code signals, which correspond to the override values as
follows:
ȍ|2
15
1
Override value (%) = 0.01% Vi |
i+0
where
Vi = 0 when the *JVi signal is “1”
Vi = 1 when the *JVi signal is “0”
The override value is assumed to be zero when all of the signals, (*JV0
to *JV15) are set to “1” or “0”. When this occurs, the feed is stopped.
The override value can be specified in the range of 0% to 655.34% in units
of 0.01%. Some examples are listed below.
*JV0 – *JV15 Override value
12 8 4 0 (%)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0.01
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1.00
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 10.00
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 100.00
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 400.00
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 655.34
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[Operation] If rapid traverse selection signal RT is “0” during jog feed or incremental
feed, the manual feedrate specified by the parameter (no. 1423) is
overridden by the value specified by the JVi signal.
NOTE
The JVi signals also serve as the override signals during dry
run in automatic operation mode.
115
Manual rapid traverse

selection signal
RT<G019#7>
[Function] Selects a rapid traverse rate for jog feed or incremental feed.
[Operation] When the signal turns to “1”, the control unit operates as described below:
D The control unit executes the jog feed or incremental feed at a rapid
traverse rate. The rapid traverse override is validated.
D When the signal is switched from “1” to “0” or vice versa during jog
feed or incremental feed, the feedrate is decelerated until it reaches
zero, then increased to the specified value. During acceleration and
deceleration, the feed axis and direction selection signal can be kept
“1”.
Jog feed mode

or incremental feed mode
+J1
RT
1st axis move
Rapid traverse
rate
Feedrate selected by manual

feedrate override signal
WARNING
After the power is turned on, the stroke limit function does
not work until the reference position return is completed.
During this period, the control unit ignores the RT signal, if
it is set to “1”, and keeps moving the tool at a feedrate
selected by the manual feedrate override signal. A
parameter RPD (No. 1401#0) can be specified so that the
rapid traverse is validated before the reference position
return is completed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
G019 RT
G100 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G102 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1
116
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 JAX
[Data type] Bit

JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in jog feed, manual rapid
traverse and manual reference position return
0 : 1 axis
1 : 3 axes
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RPD
[Data type] Bit

RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power–on time to the
completion of the reference position return.
0 : Disabled (Jog feed is performed.)
1 : Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV
[Data type] Bit

JRV Manual continuous feed (jog feed)
0 : Jog feed is performed at feed per minute.
1 : Jog feed is performed at feed per rotation.
NOTE
Specify a feedrate in parameter No. 1423.
1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis

(1) In M series, or in T series when JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is
set to 0 (feed per minute), specify a jog feedrate at feed per minute with
an override of 100%.
[Unit of data] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range
[Valid data range] Millimeter machine 1 mm/min

Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 – 32767
Rotation axis 1 deg/min
(2) When JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution)
in T series, specify a jog feedrate (feed per revolution) under an manual
feedrate override of 100%.
[Valid data range] Millimeter machine 0.01 mm/rev

Inch machine 0.001 inch/rev 0 – 32767
Rotation axis 0.01 deg/rev
117
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

[Unit of data] Valid data range
Increment system Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-B IS-C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 – 240000 30 – 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 – 96000 30 – 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 – 240000 30 – 100000
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is
100% for each axis.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 JGLx

JGLx Acceleration/deceleration in manual continuous feed (jog feed)
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied
(depending on which is used in cutting feed).
1624 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped

acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, in jog feed for each axis.

[Unit of data] 1 msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (for exponential acceleration/deceleration)
0 to 512 (for linear acceleration/deceleration after interporation)
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration or
linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in jog feed for each
axis.
1625 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis

Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration in

jog feed for each axis.
118
Warning
WARNING
For incremental feeding along an axis under diameter
programming, the tool moves in units of the diameter.
Note
NOTE
1 Time constant and method of automatic acceleration/
deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00
in programmed command.
2 If a manual handle feed is used, the manual handle feed
mode is enabled instead of incremental feed mode.
However, using parameter JHD (bit 0 of parameter No.
7100) enables both manual handle and incremental feed in
the manual handle feed mode.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL JOG FEED
(B–63514EN) INCREMENTAL FEED
OPERATOR’S MANUAL JOG FEED

INCREMENTAL FEED
119
3.2
MANUAL HANDLE
FEED
General In the manual handle feed mode, the tool can be minutely moved by
rotating the manual pulse generator. Select the axis along which the tool
is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection signal.
The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse
generator is rotated by one graduation is equal to the least input increment.
Or the distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator is
rotated by one graduation can be magnified by 10 times or by one of the
two magnifications specified by parameters (No. 7113 and 7114).
The handle magnifications can be selected by the manual handle feed
move distance selection signal.
The number of manual pulse generators :
(M series) – Up to three generators
(T series) – Up to two generators
D Availability of manual Parameter JHD (bit 0 of No. 7100) enables or disables the manual handle
handle feed in Jog mode feed in the JOG mode.
When the parameter JHD( bit 0 of No. 7100) is set 1,both manual handle
feed and incremental feed are enabled.
D Availability of manual Parameter THD (bit 1 of No. 7100) enables or disables the manual handle
handle feed in TEACH IN feed generator in the TEACH IN JOG mode.
JOG mode
D A command to the MPG Parameter (No. 7117) specifies as follows:

exceeding rapid traverse SET VALUE 0: The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate
rate and generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are
ignored.(The distance the tool is moved may
not match the graduations on the manual pulse generator.)
Other than 0: The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate and
generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are not
ignored but accumulated in the CNC.
(No longer rotating the handle does not immediately stop
the tool. The tool is moved by the pulses accumulated in the
CNC before it stops.)
D Movement direction of Parameter HNGx (No. 7102#0) switches the direction in which the tool
an axis to the rotation of moves along an axis, corresponding to the direction in which the handle
MPG of the manual pulse generator is rotated.
120
Signal
Manual Handle Feed

Axis Selection Signals
D (M series)
HS1A – HS1D [Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B,
<G018#0 – #3> C, and D is provided for each manual pulse generator. (Up to three
HS2A – HS2D generators can be used.) The number in the signal name indicates the
number of the manual pulse generator to be used.
<G018#4 – #7> HS 1 A
HS3A – HS3D
<G019#0 – #3> 1 First manual pulse generator
2 Second manual pulse generator
D (T series) 3 Third manual pulse generator (M series)
HS1A – HS1D
<G018#0 – #3> Code signals A, B, C, and D correspond to the feed axes as listed in the
HS2A – HS2D following table:
<G018#4 – #7>
Manual handle feed axis selection
Feed axis
HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA
0 0 0 0 No selection (None of axis is fed)

0 0 0 1 1st axis
0 0 1 0 2nd axis
0 0 1 1 3rd axis
0 1 0 0
4th axis
Manual Handle Feed

Amount Selection Signal
MP1, MP2<G019#4, 5>
(Incremental Feed
Signal) [Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal selects the distance traveled per pulse from the manual pulse
generator during the manual handle feed or manual handle interrupt. It
also selects the distance traveled per incremental feed step.
The table below lists the signal–to–distance correspondence.
Travel distance
select signal for
Distance traveled
manual handle
feed
Manual handle Manual handle
MP2 MP1 Incremental feed
feed interrupt
0 0 Least input Least command Least input
increment 1 increment 1 increment 1
increment 10 increment 10 increment 10
increment m*1 increment m*1 increment 100
increment n*1 increment n*1 increment 1000
*1 Scale factors m and n are specified using parameter Nos. 7113 and
7114.
121
WARNING
1 Because the least input increment is used as the units for
manual handle and incremental feed, the same value
represents a different distance depending on whether the
metric or inch input system is used.
2 For an axis under diameter programming, the tool moves by
the diameter value.
NOTE
See Section 3.3, “Manual Handle Interrupt” for manual
handle interrupts, and Section 3.1, “Jog Feed/Incremental
Feed” for incremental feed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A
G019 MP2 MP1 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8131 HPG
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

HPG Specifies whether to used manual handle feed, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
122
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 HPF THD JHD
[Data type] Bit

JHD Manual handle feed in JOG mode or incremental feed in the manual
handle feed
0: Invalid
1: Valid
THD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode
0: Invalid
1: Valid
HPF When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued,
0: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses
corresponding to the excess are ignored. (The graduations of the
manual pulse generator may not agree with the distance the machine
has traveled.)
1: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses
corresponding to the excess are not ignored, but stored in the CNC. (If
the rotation of the manual pulse generator is stopped, the machine
moves by the distance corresponding to the pulses preserved in the
CNC, then stops.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx

HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator
0: Same in direction
1: Reverse in direction
7110 Number of manual pulse generators used
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, or 3
This parameter sets the number of manual pulse generators.
7113 Manual handle feed magnification m
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] One time
This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed
movement selection signal MP2 is on.
123
7114 Manual handle feed magnification n
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] One time
This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed
movement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are “1”.
7117 Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated during manual handle feed
[Data type] 2–word

[Unit of data] Pulses
If manual handle feed is specified such that the rapid traverse rate will be
exceeded momentarily, those pulses received from the manual pulse
generator that exceed the rapid traverse rate are accumulated rather than
canceled. This parameter sets the maximum number of pulses which can
be accumulated in such a case.
Warning
WARNING
Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such
as x100 moves the tool too fast or the tool may not stop
immediately after the handle is no longer rotated or the
distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on
the manual pulse generator. The feedrate is clamped at the
rapid traverse rate.
Caution
CAUTION
Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations
per second or lower.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL HANDLE FEED
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL HANDLE FEED

124
3.3
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
General Rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation can
increase the distance traveled by the amount corresponding to the handle
feed. The axis to which the handle interrupt is applied is selected using
the manual handle interrupt axis select signal.
The minimum travel distance per graduation is the least command
increment. The minimum travel distance can be increased by tenfold or
by two scale factors (parameter Nos. 7113 and 7114). Each scale factor
can be selected using the manual handle travel distance select signal
(Section 3.2, ”Manual Handle Feed”).
Signal
Manual Handle Interrupt

Axis Selection Signal
D (M series) [Classification] Input signal
HS1IA – HS1ID [Function] These signals select an axis to which the manual handle interrupt is
<G041#0 – #3> applied. There are three sets of signals, each corresponding to a manual
HS2IA – HS2ID pulse generator (up to three). Each set consists of four code signals A, B,
<G041#4 – #7> C, and D. The number in each signal name corresponds to the number
HS3IA – HS3ID (position)of the manual pulse generator.
<G042#0 – #3> HS 1 IA
D (T series) 1 Selects the axis for which manual pulse generator
HS1IA – HS1ID No. 1 is used
<G041#0 – #3> 2 Selects the axis for which manual pulse generator
HS2IA – HS2ID No. 2 is used
<G041#4 – #7> 3 Selects the axis for which manual pulse generator
No. 3 is used (M series)
The correspondence between the code signals and the selected feed axis
is similar to the correspondence with the manual handle feed axis select
signals. See Section 3.2, “Manual Handle Feed.”
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HS1IA
G042 HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA
125
Warning
WARNING
The travel distance by handle interruption is determined
according to the amount by which the manual pulse
generator is turned and the handle feed magnification (x1,
x10, xM, xN).
Since this movement is not accelerated or decelerated, it is
very dangerous to use a large magnification value for
handle interruption.
Note
NOTE
1 No handle interrupt can be used in manual operation mode
(for example, job feed mode, manual handle feed mode
and TEACH IN HANDLE mode).
2 Handle interruption is disabled when the machine is locked
or interlocked.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION

126
B–63503EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
127
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63503EN–1/01
4.1
MANUAL
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No.
1006) for each axis by turning the feed axis and direction select signal to
“1” in the manual reference position return mode, and is returned to the
reference position.
Manual reference position return is performed by using a grid method.
The reference position is based on an electrical grid, using on one–rota-
tion signals received from the position detector.
D Automatic coordinate In that case, manual reference position return always establishes a
setting workpiece coordinate system based on the workpiece origin offsets,
specified with parameters No. 1220 to 1226.
The following signals relate with the manual reference position return:
Manual Reference Position Return
Mode selection MD1, MD2, MD4
Selection of reference position return ZRN, MREF
Selection of axis to be moved

+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3, ...
Selection of direction to be moved
Selection of speed to be moved ROV1, ROV2
Deceleration signal for reference *DEC1, *DEC2, *DEC3, ...

position return
Completion signal for reference ZP1, ZP2, ZP3, ...

position return
Reference position establishment ZRF1, ZRF2, ZRF3, ...

signal
Basic Procedure for (1) Select the JOG mode or TEACH IN JOG mode, and set the manual
Manual Reference reference position return selection signal ZRN to “1”.
Position Return (2) Feed a target axis toward the reference position by making an
appropriate feed axis and direction selection signal (+J1, –J1, +J2,
–J2,…) “1”.
(3) While the feed axis and direction selection signal is “1”, rapid traverse
takes place along that axis. Although the rapid traverse override
signals (ROV1, ROV2) are valid, the override is generally set to
100%.
(4) When the reference position is approached, a limit switch installed on
the machine is turned on, making the deceleration signal (*DEC1,
*DEC2, *DEC3,…) for reference position deceleration “0”.
Consequently, the feedrate is decelerated to 0, then the tool is fed at
a constant low speed (reference position return FL feedrate specified
by parameter (No. 1425) setting).
128
(5) When the deceleration signal turns to “1” again after the limit switch
for deceleration is passed, the tool is fed with the feedrate unchanged,
then the tool stops at the first grid point (electric grid point).
(6) Upon confirmation that the current position is in the in–position area,
the reference position return end signal (ZP1, ZP2, ZP3,…) and the
reference position establishment signal (ZRF1, ZRF2, ZRF3,…) turn
to “1”.
Step (2) and subsequent steps are performed independently for each axis.
The number of simultaneously controlled axes is usually one, but it
becomes three by parameter JAX (No. 1002#0).
If the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2,…) turns to
“0” between step (2) and (5) , the tool is stopped at once, and reference
position return is assumed to be canceled. If the signal turn to “1” again,
operation resumes from step (3) (rapid traverse).
The timing charts for the basic procedures are given below.
JOG or TEACH IN
JOG mode
ZRN
+J1
*DEC1
Grid ................ . . . . .
ZP1
ZRF1
Feedrate
Rapid traverse rate FL rate
Installation conditions When installing the deceleration limit switch for manual reference
for deceleration limit position return, ensure that following conditions are satisfied:
switch Deceleration limit Deceleration limit
operation position release position Reference position
LDW LDA
*DEC1
Grid
. . . . . . . . . . .
Feedrate
Rapid traverse rate (VR) FL rate (VL)
129
D LDW: Deceleration dog width (mm or inch)

TR
V R( ) 30 ) T S) ) 4V L TS
L DW u 2
60 1000
VR: Rapid traverse (mm/min or inch/min)
TR: Rapid traverse time constant (ms)
TS: Servo time constant (ms)
VL: FL speed for reference position return (mm/min or inch /min)
D LDA: Distance between deceleration limit switch released position
and reference position
LDA: Move amount of 1/2 revolution of motor
Since the above conditions do not include the limit switch operation
variations, this point must also be considered at installation.
Servo position error and To perform manual reference position return when the reference position
one–rotation signal has not yet been established, the tool must be fed, in manual reference
position return mode, in the reference position return direction at a speed
so that the servo position error exceeds the value set in parameter No.
1836. At this time, the tool must cross the grid line corresponding to a
one–rotation signal from the position detector.
The servo position error is calculated from the following formula:
Servo position error amount= F 1000 1 1

60 G U
F: Feedrate
G: Servo loop gain [s–1]
U: Detection unit [mm]
(Example)
When the tool is fed at a feedrate F of 6000 mm/min with a servo loop gain
G of 30 s–1 and a detection unit U of 1 mm, the servo position error is
calculated as follows:
Servo position error + 6000 1000 1 1

60 30 1
=3,333
By reversing the formula above, the following formula gives the feedrate
F needed to set the servo position error to 128 when the servo loop gain
G is 30 s–1 and the detection unit U is 1 mm:
128 60 30
F= 1000
= 230 [mm/min]
Therefore, when the servo loop gain is 30 s–1, the detection unit is 1 mm,
and parameter No. 1836 is set to 128, the tool must be fed in the reference
position return direction at a speed of at least 230 mm/min before manual
reference position return.
Grid shift The grid can be shifted by the distance set in parameter 1850, thus shifting
the reference position. The grid shift to be set in the parameter must not
exceed the reference counter capacity (parameter No. 1821) (grid
interval).
130
Signal
Manual reference
position return selection
signal (ZRN) <G043#7>
[Function] This signal selects manual reference position return. Manual reference
position return is a kind of jog feed. Therefor, to select manual reference
position return, it is required that the jog mode be selected and that the
manual reference position return selection signal be set to “1”.
[Operation] When the manual reference position return selection signal is set to “1”,
the control unit becomes as described below.
D If jog feed mode is not selected, the control unit ignores the manual
reference position return selection signal.
D If jog mode is selected, manual reference position return is enabled.
In this case, manual reference position return selection check signal
MREF turns to “1”.
NOTE
If the ZRN status changes from “0” to “1” or “1” to “0” during
jog feed, the feedrate is decelerated to 0. Then, to make
reference position return or jog feed, turn feed axis and
direction selection signal to “0” then set it to “1”.
Manual reference
position return selection
check signal MREF
<F004#5>
[Function] This signal reports that manual reference position return has been selected
once.
[Output condition] This signal turns to “1” when:
⋅ Manual reference position return has been selected.
The signal turns to “0” when:
⋅ The selection of manual reference position return has terminated.
131
Feed Axis and Direction For details about this signal, see 3.1.2, “Feed Axis and Direction
Selection Signal Selection Signal”. Here, only notes on use of reference position return are
given.
NOTE
The direction of reference position return is predetermined
for each axis by parameter ZMI (No. 1006#5). If the tool is
fed in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction
in manual reference position return, the deceleration signal
for reference position return turns to “0”, and the tool is
returned to the point at which the deceleration signal turns
to “1” again (that is, the point where the deceleration limit
switch would be encountered if the tool were fed in the
predetermined direction). Then reference position return is
performed automatically in the predetermined direction.
JOG mode or TEACH IN

JOG mode
ZRN
–J1
*DEC1
Grid ................ . . . . .
ZP1
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL rate
Rapid
traverse
Rapid traverse rate rate
NOTE
When reference position return is selected, an axis whose
reference position return end signal is already “1” or an axis
whose reference position return end signal was set “1” upon
completion of reference position return is locked, and
movement along that axis is disabled while the reference
position return selection signal (ZRN) is “1”. To perform
movement along such an axis, ZRN must be set “0”, and the
feed axis and direction selection signal must be set “0” then
set “1” again.
132
Reference position
return deceleration
signals *DEC1 to *DEC4
<X1009>
[Function] These signals decelerate the feedrate for manual reference position return
so that the reference position is approached at a low feedrate.
The deceleration signals are provided for axes in a one–to–one correspon-
dence. A number appended to a deceleration signal represents a con-
trolled axis number.
*DEC 1
1 : Reference position return deceleration signal for the first axis
2 : Reference position return deceleration signal for the second axis
3 : Reference position return deceleration signal for the third axis
:
:
[Operation] For the operation of the control unit in response to the deceleration signal,
see the description of the basic procedure for manual reference position
return.
Reference position
return end signals ZP1 to
ZP4 <F094>
[Function] These signals report that the tool is at the refernce position on a controlled
axis.
These siganls are provided for axes in a one–to–one corespondence.
A number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
ZP 1
1 : Reference position return end signal for the first axis
2 : Reference position return end signal for the second axis
3 : Reference position return end signal for the third axis
:
:

D Manual reference position returns is completed, and the current
position is in the in–position area.
D Automatic reference position return (G28) is completed, and the
current position is in the in–position area.
D Reference position return check (G27) is completed, and the current
position is in the in–position area.
These signals turn to “0”when:
D The tool has moved from the reference position.
D An emergency stop is applied.
D A servo alarm is raised.
133
Reference position
establishment signal
ZRF1 to ZRF4<F120>
[Function] Notify the system that the reference position has been established.
A reference position establishment signal is provided for each axis. The
number appended to each signal name indicates the number of the
controlled axis.
ZRF 1
1 : 1st–axis reference position establishment signal
2 : 2nd–axis reference position establishment signal
3 : 3rd–axis reference position establishment signal
:
:
[Output condition] The signals are set to 1 in the following case:

⋅ When the reference position is established after manual reference
position return
⋅ When the reference position is established using the absolute–position
detector at initial power–on
The signals are set to 0 in the following case:
⋅ When the reference position is lost
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1009 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G043 ZRN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F004 MREF
F094 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
F120 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 JAX
[Data type] Bit

JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in JOG feed, manual rapid
traverse and manual reference position return
0 : 1 axis
1 : 3 axes
134
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 ZRNx

ZRNx When a command specifying the movement except for G28 is issued in
automatic operation (MEM, RMT, or MDI) when a return to the reference
position has not been performed since the power was turned on
0 : An alarm is generated. (P/S alarm 224).
1 : An alarm is not generated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE

ZMIx The direction of reference position return
0 : Positive direction
1 : Negative direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZCL
[Data type] Bit

ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0 : The local coordinate system is not canceled.
1 : The local coordinate system is canceled.
1240 Coordinate value of the 1st reference position on each axis in the machine
coordinate system
NOTE

[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit
135

coordinate system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 LZR
[Data type] Bit

LZR Checking of stored stroke limit 1 during the time from power–on to the
manual reference position return
0 : The stroke limit 1 is checked.
1 : The stroke limit 1 is not checked
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 JZR
[Data type] Bit

JZR The manual reference position return at JOG feedrate
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
1425 FL rate of the reference position return for each axis

Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 – 15000 6 – 12000
Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return
is performed for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 OZR
[Data type] Bit

OZR When manual reference position return is attempted in the halt state
during automatic operation (feed hold stop state) under any of the
conditions listed below:
0 : Manual reference position return is not performed, with P/S alarm No.
091.
1 : Manual reference position return is performed without an alarm
occurring.
136
< Conditions >

D When there is a remaining distance to travel.
D When an auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindle–speed
function, tool function) is being executed.
D When a dwell or cycle such as a canned cycle is being executed.
NOTE

As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the
reference position return in the grid method.
grid interval
Size of the reference counter =
detection unit
Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder
1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible

This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return
in manual reference position return.
In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the
default.)
WARNING
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value ten
times greater than the value set in this parameter is used to
make the check.
Example:When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit
0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, reference
position return operation is enabled when a servo
error of 100 or more occurs.
137
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DEC
[Data type] Bit
DEC Deceleration signal (*DEC1 to *DEC4) for manual reference position

return
0 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 0.
1 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 1.
Alarm and message

090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot

INCOMPLETE be performed normally because the ref-
erence position return start point is too
close to the reference position or the
speed is too slow. Separate the start
point far enough from the reference
position, or specify a sufficiently fast
speed for reference position return.
Check the program contents.
091 REFERENCE RETURN Manual reference position return can-
INCOMPLETE not be performed in the feed hold state.
Perform a manual reference position
return in the automatic operation stop
state or reset state.
224 RETURN TO Not returned to reference point before
REFERENCE POINT cycle start. (Only when parameter
ZRNx (No. 1005#0).
Do reference position return.
138
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL REFERENCE
(For Machining Center) POSITION RETURN
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL REFERENCE

(For Lathe) (B–63504EN) POSITION RETURN
139
4.2
SETTING THE
REFERENCE
POSITION WITHOUT
DOGS
General This function moves the tool near around the reference position set for
each axis in the manual continuous feed mode. Then it sets the reference
position in the reference position return mode without the deceleration
signal for reference position return by turning the feed axis and direction
select signal to “1”. With this function, the machine reference position can
be set at a given position without installing the limit switch for
deceleration for reference position return.
Also, if the absolute-position detector is provided, the set reference

position is retained after the power is turned off. In this case, when the
power is turned on again, there is no need for setting the reference position
again.
Basic Procedure for Setting (1) Feed the tool, along the axis for which the reference position is to be
the Reference Position set, by manual continuous feed in the reference position return
Without Dogs direction. Stop the tool near the reference position, but do not exceed
the reference position.
(2) Enter manual reference position return mode, then set 1 for the feed
axis direction selection signal (for the positive or negative direction)
for the axis.
(3) The CNC positions the tool to the nearest grid line (based on
one–rotation signals from the position detector) in the reference
position return direction specified with bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No.
1006. The point to which the tool is thus positioned becomes the
reference position.
(4) The CNC checks that the tool is positioned to within the in–position
area, then sets the completion signal for reference position return and
the reference position establishment signal to 1.
The timing chart for the basic elements constituting steps (2) to (4) is
shown below.
140
Manual reference
position return
mode
+J1 or –J1
Grid . . . . . .
ZP1
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL rate
The following figure shows the positional relation between the reference
position and the point to which the tool is positioned by manual
continuous feed.
– direction + direction
Grid A Position B
after jog feed
A Reference position for reference position return in the negative direction
B Reference position for reference position return in the positive direction
Servo position error and To set the reference position without dogs, when the reference position
one–rotation signal has not yet been established, the tool must be fed, in manual continuous
feed mode, in the reference position return direction at such a speed that
the servo position error exceeds the value set in parameter No. 1836. The
tool must cross the grid line corresponding to a one–rotation signal from
the position detector.
Section 4.1 explains how to calculate the servo position error.
Grid shift To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the distance set
in parameter No. 1850. The grid shift to be set in the parameter must not
exceed the reference counter capacity (parameter No. 1821).
Reference position When the feed axis and direction selection signal is set to 1 in manual
return reference position return mode after the reference position has been
established, the tool is positioned to the reference position regardless of
the direction specified with the feed axis and direction selection signal.
The completion signal for reference position return is then set to 1.
141
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 DLZ JAX
[Data type] Bit

JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual continuous feed,
manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return
0 : 1 axis
1 : 3 axes
DLZ Function setting the reference position without dog
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
NOTE
This function can be specified for each axis by DLZx, bit 1
of parameter No. 1005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx ZRNx

ZRNx When a command specifying the movement except for G28 is issued in
automatic operation (MEM, RMT, or MDI) and when a return to the
reference position has not been performed since the power was turned on
0 : An alarm is generated (P/S alarm 224).
1 : An alarm is not generated.
DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
NOTE
When DLZ of parameter No. 1002#1 is 0, DLZx is enabled.
When DLZ of parameter No. 1002#1 is 1, DLZx is disabled,
and the function for setting the reference position without
dogs is enabled for all axes.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE
142
ZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initial
backlash at power–on
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZCL
[Data type] Bit

ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0 : The local coordinate system is not canceled.
1 : The local coordinate system is canceled.
1240 Coordinate value of the 1st reference position on each axis

in the machine coordinate system
NOTE


coordinate system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 LZR
[Data type] Bit

LZR Checking of stored stroke limit 1 during the time from power–on to the
0: The stroke limit 1 is checked.
1: The stroke limit 1 is not checked

143
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 OZR
[Data type] Bit

OZR When manual reference position return is attempted in the halt state
during automatic operation (feed hold stop state) under any of the
conditions listed below:
0: Manual reference position return is not performed, with P/S alarm No.
091.
1: Manual reference position return is performed without an alarm
occurring.
< Conditions >
D When there is a remaining distance to travel.
D When a auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindle–speed
function, tool function, B function) is being executed.
D When a dwell or cycle such as a canned cycle is being executed.
NOTE

As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the
reference position return in the grid method.
grid interval
Size of the reference counter =
detection unit
Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder
1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible

This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return
in manual reference position return.
In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the
default.)
144
WARNING
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value ten
times greater than the value set in this parameter is used to
make the check.
Example:When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit
0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, reference
position return operation is enabled when a servo
error of 100 or more occurs.
NOTE

Alarm and message

090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot

INCOMPLETE be performed normally because the ref-
erence position return start point is too
close to the reference position or the
speed is too slow. Separate the start
point far enough from the reference
position, or specify a sufficiently fast
speed for reference position return.
Check the program contents.
091 REFERENCE RETURN Manual reference position return can-
INCOMPLETE not be performed in the feed hold state.
Perform a manual reference position
return in the automatic operation stop
state or reset state.
224 RETURN TO Not returned to reference position before
REFERENCE POINT cycle start. (Only when parameter ZRNx
(No. 1005#0) =0).
Do reference position return.
Note
NOTE
P/S alarm No. 090 is issued when G28 is specified if the
reference position has not yet be established.
145
4.3
REFERENCE
POSITION SHIFT
(M SERIES)
General When reference position return is performed using a grid method, the
reference position can be shifted by a parameter–set distance without
having to move the deceleration dog.
This function is enabled by setting bit 2 of parameter No. 1002 (SFD) to

1. When distance LSFT, shown below, is set in parameter No. 1850, the
reference position can be shifted.
Distance LDEC’, shown below, for the axis along which reference position
return was last made is indicated on the diagnostic screen (No. 0302).
Direction of reference
position return
LDEC LSFT
Deceleration dog
| | ↑ |
↑ Reference
Grid point position
LSFT: Reference position shift amount

LDEC: Distance from the position where the deceleration dog is turned
off to the first grid point (grid point when the shift amount is 0)
D How to adjust the (1) Set the SFD bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 1002) to 1, and set the reference
reference position position shift amount to 0. Then, perform reference position return.
Direction of reference position return
LDEC LSFT
Deceleration dog
| | ↑ |
↑ ↑ Reference position
Grid point Stop position
After the deceleration dog is turned off, the tool stops when the first
grid point is reached. Distance LDEC is indicated on the diagnostic
screen (No. 0302).
(2) Determine the distance LSFT (reference position shift amount) from
the stop position to the reference position, and set it in parameter No.
1850.
This completes the adjustment of the reference position.
146
(3) Perform reference position return again. Then, the tool stops when it
reaches the reference position.
Direction of reference position return
Deceleration dog LSFT
| | | | |
↑ ↑
Grid point Reference position
(stop position)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 SFD
[Data type] Bit

SFD The function for shifting the reference position is
0 : Not used
1 : Used
1850 Reference position shift for each axis
NOTE

A reference position shift is set for each axis.
CAUTION
When bit 2 of parameter No. 1002, SFD, is set to 0, this
parameter is used for reference position shift.
147
Alarm and message

D Diagnostic display
0302 Distance from the position where the deceleration dog
is turned off to the first grid point

[Unit of data] 0.001 mm (metric output), 0.0001 inch (inch output)
Note
NOTE
1 The reference position can be shifted only in the direction
of reference position return.
2 When the SFD bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 1002) is 0, only the
distance from the position where the deceleration dog is
turned off to the first grid point (the grid point after grid shift)
is indicated.
148
4.4
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General The G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via the
specified intermediate point, along the specified axis, then sets the
completion signal for reference position return (see Section 4.1) to 1.
The reference position must be set in parameter No. 1240 with the
coordinates specified in the machine coordinate system, before issuing
the G28 command.
The tool moves to the intermediate point or reference position at the rapid
traverse rate.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE

1240 Coordinate value of the 1st reference position on each axis in the machine
coordinate system
NOTE


coordinate system.
149
Alarm and message

405 SERVO ALARM: Position control system fault. Due to

(WRONG ZRN) an CNC or servo system fault in the
reference position return, there is the
possibility that reference position re-
turn could not be executed correctly.
Try again from the manual reference
position return.
Caution
CAUTION
1 The tool is moved from the intermediate point in a sequence
similar to manual reference position return, if the G28
command is issued in the following cases:
· When the reference position has not yet been
established
· When the input increment (millimeter/inch) is changed at
a position other than the reference position
In these cases, the tool leaves the intermediate point in the
reference position return direction specified with bit 5 (ZMIx)
of parameter No. 1006. The intermediate point must
therefore be specified at a position from which reference
position return is possible.
2 If the G28 command is issued in the machine lock status,
the completion signal for reference position return is not set
to 1.
3 If millimeter input is selected for an inch–system machine,
the completion signal for reference position return may be
set to 1, even when the programmed tool position deviates
from the reference position by the least input increment.
This is because the least input increment is smaller than the
least command increment for the machine.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION
(B–63514EN)

150
4.5
2ND REFERENCE
POSITION
RETURN/3RD, 4TH
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference
position, via the specified intermediate point, along the specified axis.
Then, it sets the completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
return to 1.
The 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position must be set in parameter No. 1241,
1242, or 1243 with coordinates in the machine coordinate system, before
issuing the G30 command.
The tool moves to the intermediate point or 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference
position at the rapid traverse rate.
Return to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position can be performed only
after the reference position has been established.
Signal
Second reference
position return end
signals ZP21 to ZP 24
<F096>
Third reference position
return end signals ZP31
to ZP34 <F098>
Fourth reference
position return end
signals ZP41 to ZP44
<F100>
[Function] The second, third, and fourth reference position end signals report the tool
is at the second, third, and fourth reference positions on a controlled axis,
respectively. These signals are provided for axes in a one–to –one
correspondence. A numeric character appended to the end of a signal
represents a controlled axis number, and a numeric character immediately
following ZP represents a reference position number.
151
ZP 2 1
1 : Return end signal for the first axis
2 : Return end signal for the second axis
3 : Return end signal for the third axis
:
:
2 : Second reference position return

3 : Third reference position return
4 : Fourth reference position return

D The second, third, or fourth reference position return (G30) is
completed, and the current position is in the in–position area.
These signals turn to “0” when:
D The tool moved from the reference position.
D An emergency stop is applied.
D A servo alarm is raised.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F096 ZP25 ZP24 ZP23 ZP22 ZP21
F098 ZP35 ZP34 ZP33 ZP32 ZP31
F100 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41
Parameter
1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position on each axis
1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position on each axis

1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position on each axis



coordinate system.
152
Alarm and message

046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RE- Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded
TURN COMMAND for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position re-
turn command.
Correct program.
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the G30 command is issued in machine lock status, the
completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
return is not set to 1.
2 If millimeter input is selected for an inch–system machine,
the completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
return may be set to 1, even when the programmed tool
position deviates from the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
by the least input increment. This is because the least input
increment is smaller than the least command increment for
the machine.
Reference item
(B–63514EN)

153
4.6
BUTT–TYPE
REFERENCE
POSITION SETTING
General This function automates the procedure of butting the tool against a
mechanical stopper on an axis to set a reference position. The purpose of
this function is to eliminate the variations in reference position setting that
arise depending on the operator, and to minimize work required to make
fine adjustments after reference position setting.
Select the axis for which the reference position is to be set, then perform
cycle start. Then, the following operations are performed automatically:
1. The torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced to make the butting
feedrate constant, and the tool is butted against the mechanical stopper.
Then, the tool is withdrawn a parameter–set distance from the
mechanical stopper.
2. Again, the torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced, and the tool
is butted against the mechanical stopper. Then, the tool is withdrawn
a parameter–set distance from the mechanical stopper.
3. The withdrawal point on the axis is set as the reference position.
Basic procedure for (1) First, set the parameters required for butt–type reference position
butt–type reference setting.
position setting
ZMIx, bit 5 of parameter (No. 1006): Direction of reference
position setting
Parameter No. 7181: Withdrawal distance
Parameter No. 7182: Reference position setting
distance
Parameter No. 7183: Butting feedrate 1
Parameter No. 7184: Butting feedrate 2
Parameter No. 7185: Withdrawal feedrate in
reference position setting
Parameter No. 7186: Torque limit
(2) Select manual reference position return mode.
(3) By using a manual handle feed axis select signal, select the axis on
which the reference position is to be set.
(4) Perform cycle start.
This starts the cycle operation for reference position setting.
(5) During the cycle operation, the automatic operation start signal OP is
1.
154
Cycle operation When no reference position has been set (APZx, bit 4 of parameter No.
1815, is 0), operations (A) to (E), below, are performed automatically to
set a reference position.
Mechanical
stopper
Current position
(A)The tool is moved along a specified axis with a limited torque until
it butts against the mechanical stopper.
The tool is moved in the direction specified with ZMIx (bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with parameter No.
7183, at the torque specified with parameter No. 7186 (until the
tool strikes the mechanical stopper).
Mechanical
stopper
The direction, feedrate, and torque

are specified with parameters.
(B)After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper, the tool is withdrawn
in the direction opposite to the butting direction, along the axis for
a parameter–set distance.
The tool is moved in the direction opposite to that specified with
ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with
parameter No. 7185, for the distance specified with parameter No.
7181.
Mechanical
stopper
The direction, feedrate, distance,

and torque are all specified with pa-
rameters.
(C)Operations (D) and (E) are performed from the withdrawal point,
such that the tool is butted against the mechanical stopper at a
constant feedrate in reference position setting.
(D)The tool moves along the specified axis at a specified torque until
it butts against the mechanical stopper.
The tool moves in the direction specified with ZMIx (bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with parameter No.
7184, at the torque specified with parameter No. 7186 (until the
tool strikes the mechanical stopper).
155
Mechanical
stopper
The direction, feedrate, and torque

are all specified with parameters.
(E)After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper end on the axis, the
tool is withdrawn in the direction opposite to the butting direction,
along the axis for a parameter–set distance.
The tool is moved in the direction opposite to that specified with
ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with
parameter No. 7185, for the distance specified with parameter No.
7182.
Reference position
Mechanical
stopper
The direction, feedrate, distance,

and torque are all specified with pa-
rameters.
For parameter Nos. 7183 and 7184, set the feedrates at which the
tool is moved toward the mechanical stopper with a limited torque,
considering the machine accuracy.
After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper, and the tool is
withdrawn the distance specified with parameter No. 7182, the
withdrawal point is set as the reference position on the specified
axis. Then, the reference position return end signal and reference
position establishment signal are set to 1.
After reference position return has been completed, alarm PS000
is issued. Turn the power off then back on before continuing
operation.
156
After the reference When the reference position has already been set (when APZx, bit 4 of
position is set parameter No. 1815, is 1), performing butt–type reference position setting
causes the tool to be positioned to the reference position at the rapid
traverse rate without the cycle operation. Upon the completion of
positioning, the reference position return end signal is set to 1.
The timing chart for the cycle operation is shown below.
Manual reference position

return mode
Manual handle feed axis select

signals HS1A to HS1D
Automatic operation start

signal ST
Cycle operation
Automatic operation signal

OP
Reference position return end

signals ZP1 to ZP4
N%
Torque limit 100% 100%
Butting direction
Axis feedrate
Withdrawal
direction
Torque limit reach signals for

butt–type reference position set-
ting CLRCH1 to CLRCH4
N%: Torque limit (%) specified with parameter No. 7186 (%)
157
Signal
Torque limit reach

signals for butt–type
reference position
setting CLRCH1 to
CLRCH4 <F180>
[Function] These signals are used to post notification of the torque limit having been
reached for each corresponding axis during cycle operation for butt–type
reference position setting.
[Operation] Each signal is set to 1 when:
· The torque limit is reached for the corresponding axis during cycle
operation for butt–type reference position setting.
Each signal is set to 0 when:
· The torque limit is not reached for the corresponding axis during cycle
operation for butt–type reference position setting.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F180 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE

backlash at power–on.
7181 First withdrawal distance in butt–type reference position setting
[Data type] 2–word axis

158

When the butt–type reference position setting function is used, this
parameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performed
after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical stopper
to the withdrawal point).
NOTE
Set the same direction as the direction set for ZMIx, bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006. If the opposite direction is set, the
cycle operation will not start.
7182 Second withdrawal distance in butt–type reference position setting
[Data type] 2–word axis


parameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performed
after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical stopper
to the withdrawal point).
NOTE
Set the same direction as the direction set for ZMIx, bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006. If the opposite direction is set, the
cycle operation will not start.
7183 First butting feedrate in butt–type reference position setting

[Valid data range] IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30–15000 30–12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30–6000 30–4800

parameter sets the feedrate first used to hit the stopper on an axis.
7184 Second butting feedrate in butt–type reference position setting

159

parameter sets the feedrate used to hit the stopper on an axis for a second
time.
7185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and second butting operations)
in butt–type reference position setting)


parameter sets the feedrate used for withdrawal along an axis after the
mechanical stopper has been hit.
7186 Torque limit value in butt–type reference position setting
[Data type] Byte axes

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets a torque limit value in butt–type reference position
setting.
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, 100% is assumed.
Alarm and message
Number Message Contents

000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the
power off was input, turn off
power.
Note
NOTE
This function is supported only when an absolute–position
detector is installed.
160
B–63503EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
161
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63503EN–1/01
5.1
CYCLE START/
FEED HOLD
General
D Start of automatic When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in which
operation (cycle start) memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT), or manual data
input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the automatic operation start state then
starts operating.
Signal ST, however, is ignored in the following cases:
1. When the mode is other than MEM, RMT, or MDI
2. When the feed hold signal (*SP) is set to 0
3. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0
4. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1
5. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1
6. When <RESET> key on the MDI is pressed
7. When the CNC is in the alarm state
8. When the CNC is in the NOT READY state
9. When automatic operation is starting
10.When the program restart signal (SRN) is 1
11.When the CNC is searching for a sequence number.
The CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation in the following
cases during automatic operation:
1. When the feed hold signal (*SP) is set to 0
2. When the mode is changed to manual operation mode (JOG, INC,
HND, REF, TJOG, or THND).
The CNC enters the automatic operation stop state and stops operating in
the following cases during automatic operation:
1. When a single command block is completed during a single block
operation
2. When operation in manual data input (MDI) mode has been completed
3. When an alarm occurs in the CNC
4. When a single command block is completed after the mode is changed
to other automatic operation mode or memory edit (EDIT)
The CNC enters the reset state and stops operating in the following cases
during automatic operation:
4. When MDI RESET key is pressed
The state of the CNC (automatic operation start, feed hold , automatic
operation stop, or reset) is posted to the PMC with status output signals
OP, SPL, and STL. See the table in the “Signal” section for details.
162
D Halt of automatic When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the
operation (feed hold) CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation. At the same time,
cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0 and feed hold lamp signal SPL is
set to 1. Re–setting signal *SP to 1 in itself will not restart automatic
operation. To restart automatic operation, first set signal *SP to 1, then
set signal ST to 1 and then to 0.
ST ST ST This signal is ignored when the

feed hold signal is set to 0.
STL STL
SPL
*SP *SP
Fig. 5.1 Time chart for automatic operation
When signal *SP is set to 0 during the execution of a block containing

only the M, S, T, or B function, signal STL is immediately set to 0, signal
SPL is set to 1, and the CNC enters the feed hold state. If the FIN signal
is subsequently sent from the PMC, the CNC executes processing up until
the end of the block that has been halted. Upon the completion of that
block, signal SPL is set to 0 (signal STL remains set to 0) and the CNC
enters the automatic operation stop state.
(a) During threading
When signal *SP is set to 0 during threading, the CNC enters the feed
hold state after executing a non–threading block after the threading
blocks.
When signal *SP is set to 0 during threading with the G92 command
(threading cycle), signal SPL is immediately set to 1 but operation
continues up until the end of the retraction block following threading.
When signal *SP is set to 0 during threading with the G32 (M series:
G33) command, signal SPL is immediately set to 1 but operation
continues until the end of a non–threading block following the
threading blocks. (Stopping feeding during threading is dangerous
because the amount of cutting will increase.)
(b) During tapping in a cannec cycle (G84)
When signal *SP is set to 0 during tapping in a canned cycle (G84),
signal SPL is immediately set to 1 but operation continues until the
tool returns to the initial level or R point level after the completion
of tapping.
(c) When a macro instruction is being executed
Operation stops after the currently executing macro instruction has
been completed.
163
Signal
Cycle start signal

ST <G007#2> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Starts automatic operation.
[Operation] When signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in memory (MEM) mode, DNC
operation mode (RMT) or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters
the cycle start state and starts operation.
MEM, RMT, or MDI mode
Signal ST “1”
“0”
Start
⋅⋅⋅
Automatic operation
Feed hold signal

*SP <G008#5> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Halts automatic operation.
[Operation] When signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the CNC enters
the feed hold state and stops operation. Automatic operation cannot be
started when signal *SP is set to 0.
MEM, RMT, or MDI mode
Signal ST “1”
“0”
Ignored
Signal *SP “1”

“0”
Start Start
Feed hold
Automatic operation
Automatic operation
signal [Classification] Output signal
OP <F000#7>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that automatic operation is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 or 0, according to the state of the CNC, as listed in
Table 5.1.
Cycle start lamp signal

STL <F000#5> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that automatic operation start is entered.
Table 5.1.
164
Feed hold lamp signal

SPL <F000#4> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that feed hold state is entered.
Table 5.1.
Table 5.1 Status of operation
Signal name Cycle start Feed hold Automatic

State of lamp lamp operation
the operation STL SPL lamp
OP
Cycle start state 1 0 1
Feed hold state 0 1 1
Automatic operation stop 0 0 1

state
Reset state 0 0 0
· Cycle start state

The CNC is executing memory operation or manual data input
operation commands.
@ Feed hold state
The CNC is not executing memory operation nor manual data input op-
eration commands while the commands to be executed remain.
@ Automatic operation stop state
Memory operation or manual data input operation has been completed
and stopped.
@ Reset state
The automatic operation has been forcibly terminated.
NOTE
If the sequence number search is performed through MDI
panel during Memory mode (MEM), the signal OP turns to
“1”.
D Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 ST
G008 *SP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP STL SPL
165
Alarm and message

D Self–diagnosis During automatic operation, the machine may sometimes show no
information movement while no alarm is detected. In that case, the CNC may be
performing processing or waiting for the occurrence of an event. The state
of the CNC can be obtained using the CNC self–diagnosis function
(diagnosis numbers 000 to 015).
Detailed information on the automatic operation stop or feed hold state

can also be displayed (diagnosis numbers 020 to 025).
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MEMORY OPERATION
(B–63514EN) MDI OPERATION
DNC OPERATION
CHECKING BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MEMORY OPERATION

MDI OPERATION
DNC OPERATION
CHECKING BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN
166
5.2
RESET AND REWIND
General The CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases:
When the CNC is reset, the resetting signal (RST) is output to the PMC.
The resetting signal (RST) is set to 0 when the resetting signal output
time, set with parameter No. 3017, has elapsed after the above conditions
have been released.
RST signal output time = Treset (Reset processing time) + (parameter
setting value) 16 msec.
Reset ON
Reset Pro-
cessing
RST signal
Treset (Parameter
setting value)
16 msec
CAUTION
Treset requires at least 16 msec. This time will be longer on
other configurations.
When the CNC is reset during automatic operation, automatic operation

is stopped and tool movement along the controlled axis is decelerated and
stopped(*1). When the CNC is reset during the execution of the M, S, T,
or B function, signal MF, SF, TF, or BF is set to 0 within 100 ms.
Tool movement along the controlled axis is also decelerated and
stopped(*1) in manual operation (jog feed, manual handle feed,
incremental feed, or etc).
CAUTION
*1 When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0, the tool
is stopped by an emergency stop.
Bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is used to select whether the CNC
internal data (such as modal G codes) is cleared or reset when the
CNC is reset. Refer to the Appendix E, ”Status when turning on
power, when cleared, and when reset” in the Operator’s manual for
the state of the internal data when cleared or reset.
167
The following parameters are also used to select how to handle

processing for CNC data when the CNC is reset.
S Bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203
Whether programs created in MDI mode are erased or stored
S Bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No. 6001
Whether custom macro variables #100 to #149 are cleared or stored
S Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001
Whether custom macro local variables #1 to #33 are cleared or
stored
D Reset & Rewind When the reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1, reset is performed and
the following rewinding operation is also performed.
1. When the DNC operation mode, and a portable tape reader is
connected as the current input/output device, the tape reader is
rewound.
While the tape reader is being rewound, the rewinding–in–progress
signal (RWD) is output. This signal goes 0 when the tape reader has
been rewound.
2. In cases other than case 1, the head of the selected main program is
searched for. Setting RWM, bit 2 of parameter no. 3001, determines
whether the rewinding–in–progress signal is output.
When RWM is set to 1:
The rewinding–in–progress signal is output. It is set to 1, then set to
0 after about 100 ms. Since searching for the main program in memory
takes little time, when the rewinding–in–progress signal (RWD) is set
to 0, the main program has already been searched for.
Signal
External reset signal

ERS<G008#7>
[Function] Reset the CNC.
[Operation] Turning the signal ERS to 1 resets the CNC and enters the reset state.
While the CNC is reset, the resetting signal RST turns to 1.
Reset & rewind signal

RRW<G008#6>
[Function] CNC is reset and a program under an automatic operation is rewound.
[Operation] As described in the item, “Reset & Rewind”.
168
Resetting signal RST

<F001#1>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being reset. This signal is used for reset
processing on the PMC.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases:
3. When the reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1
This signal is set to 0 in the following case:
When the resetting signal output time, set with parameter No. 3017, has
elapsed after the above conditions have been released and the CNC is reset
Rewinding signal RWD

<F000#0>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being rewound.
[Output condition] As described in the item, “Reset and Rewind”.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G008 ERS RRW
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 RWD
F001 RST
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 RWM
[Data type] Bit

RWM RWD signal indicating that rewinding is in progress
0 : Output only when the tape reader is being rewound by the reset and
rewind signal RRW
1 : Output when the tape reader is being rewound or a program in
memory is being rewound by the reset and rewind signal RRW
169
3017 Output time of reset signal RST
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 16 ms
To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added is
specified in this parameter.
RST signal output time = time required for reset + parameter value
16 ms
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3203 MCL
[Data type] Bit

MCL Whether a program prepared in the MDI mode is cleared by reset
0: Not deleted
1: deleted
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402 CLR
[Data type] Bit

CLR Reset key on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal,
and emergency stop signal
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CLV CCV
[Data type] Bit

CCV Custom macro’s common variables Nos. 100 through 199
0: Cleared to “vacant” by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
CLV Custom macro’s local variables Nos. 1 through 33
0: Cleared to “vacant” by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND
(For Machining Center) WHEN RESET
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND
(For Lathe) (B–63504EN) WHEN RESET
170
5.3 Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be

executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine
TESTING A as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine
PROGRAM actually or viewing the position display change without running the
machine.
5.3.1
Machine Lock
General The change of the position display can be monitored without moving the
machine.
When all–axis machine lock signal MLK, or each–axis machine lock
signals MLK1 to MLK4 are set to 1, output pulses (move commands) to
the servo motors are stopped in manual or automatic operation. The
commands are distributed, however, updating the absolute and relative
coordinates. The operator can therefore check if the commands are
correct by monitoring the position display.
Signal
All–axis machine lock

signal
MLK <G044#1>
[Function] Places all controlled axes in the machine lock state.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, pulses (move commands) are not output to
the servo motors for all axes in manual or automatic operation.
Each–axis machine lock

signals
MLK1 to MLK4
<G108> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Place the corresponding controlled axes in the machine lock state.
These signals are provided for each controlled axis. The signal number
corresponds to the number of the controlled axis.
MLK 1
1. Machine lock for the 1st axis
2. Machine lock for the 2nd axis
3. Machine lock for the 3rd axis
L
[Operation] When these signals are set to 1, pulses (move commands) are not output
to the servo motors for the corresponding axes (1st to 4th) in manual or
automatic operation.
171
All–axis machine lock

check signal
MMLK <F004#1>
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the all–axis machine lock signal.
– When all–axis machine lock signal MLK is set to 1
– When all–axis machine lock signal MLK is set to 0
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G044 MLK
G108 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1
F004 MMLK
172
Note
NOTE
1 Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, T,
and B commands)
Machine lock applies only to move commands along
controlled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting a
coordinate system is performed normally. M, S, T, and B
(2nd auxilialy function) commands are also performed
normally.
2 Reference position return in the machine lock state
(G27, G28, and G30)
When the reference position return command (G28), or 2nd
to 4th reference position return command (G30), is
executed for an axis in the machine lock state, distribution
and position updating are performed. The tool, however, is
not returned to the reference position. The reference
position return completion signals (ZP1 to ZP4) are not
output.
The reference position return check command (G27) is
ignored in the machine lock state.
3 Turning on/off the machine lock signal during
movement along an axis
When the machine lock signal for an axis is set to 1 during
movement along the axis that is not in the machine lock
state, the axis is immediately placed in the machine lock
state and output pulses (move commands) to the servo
motor are stopped. The tool is decelerated and stopped
with the automatic acceleration/deceleration function.
On the other hand, when the machine lock signal for an axis
is set to 0 during distribution of the move command along
the axis in the machine lock state, pulse (move command)
output for the axis is immediately restarted. The tool is
accelerated with the automatic acceleration/deceleration
function.
173
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK

5.3.2
Dry Run
General Dry run is valid only for automatic operation.

The tool is moved at a constant feedrate(*1) regardless of the feedrate
specified in the program. This function is used, for example, to check the
movement of the tool without a workpiece.
CAUTION
This feedrate depends on the specified parameters, the
manual rapid traverse switching signal (RT), manual
feedrate override signals (*JV0 to *JV15), and whether the
command block specifies rapid traverse or cutting feed, as
listed in the table below.
Manual rapid Program command

traverse
switching Rapid traverse Feed
signal (RT)
1 Rapid traverse rate Dry run feedrate JVmax *2
0 Dry run speed JV,or rapid Dry run feedrate JV *2
traverse rate *1
Max. cutting feedrate Setting by parameter No.1422

Rapid traverse rate Setting by parameter No.1420
Dry run feedrate Setting by parameter No.1410
JV Manual feedrate override
JVmax Maximum value of manual feedrate override
*1:Dry run feedrate JV when parameter RDR (bit 6 of No. 1401) is 1.
Rapid traverse rate when parameter RDR is 0.
*2 Clamped by max. cutting feedrate.
174
Signal
Dry run signal

DRN <G046#7>
[Function] Enables dry run.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the tool is moved at the feedrate specified for
dry run.
When this signal is set to 0, the tool is moved normally.
CAUTION
When the dry run signal is changed from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0
during the movement of the tool, the feedrate of the tool is
first decelerated to 0 before being accelerated to the
specified feedrate.
Dry run check signal

MDRN <F002#7>
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the dry run signal.
– When dry run signal DRN is set to 1
– When dry run signal DRN is set to 0
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 DRN
F002 MDRN
175
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RDR TDR
[Data type] Bit

TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84; rigid
tapping)
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
1410 Dry run rate
[Data type] Word

Set the dry run rate when the manual feedrate is overridden by 100%.
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis

Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for
each axis.
1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes

Specify the maximum cutting feedrate.

A feedrate in the tangential direction is clamped in cutting feed so that it
does not exceed the feedrate specified in this parameter.
176
NOTE
To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
parameter No. 1430 instead.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Dry run
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Dry run

5.3.3
Single Block
General Single block operation is valid only for automatic operation.

When the single block signal (SBK) is set to 1 during automatic operation,
the CNC enters the automatic operation stop state after executing the
current block. In subsequent automatic operation, the CNC enters the
automatic operation stop state after executing each block in the program.
When the single block signal (SBK) is set to 0, normal automatic
operation is restored.
Single block operation during the execution of custom macro statements

depends on the setting of bit 5 (SBM) of parameter No. 6000, as follows:
SBM = 0: Operation does not stop in the custom macro statements but
stops once the next NC command has been executed.
SBM = 1: Operation stops after each block in the custom macro

statements.
When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state during single block
operation, the mode can be changed to manual data input (MDI), manual
handle feed (HND), incremental feed (INC), or jog feed (JOG), by using
the mode select signals (MD1, MD2, and MD4).
177
Signal
Single block signal

SBK <G046#1>
[Function] Enables single block operation.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, single block operation is performed. When
this signal is set to 0, normal operation is performed.
Single block check signal

MSBK <F004#3>
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the single block signal.
– When single block signal SBK is set to 1
– When single block signal SBK is set to 0
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 SBK
F004 MSBK
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6000 SBM
[Data type] Bit

SBM Custom macro statement
0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block
NOTE
SBM is invalid when NOP (bit 0 of parameter No. 3404) is
set to 1.
178
Caution
CAUTION
1 Operation in thread cutting
When the SBK signal turns to “1” during thread cutting,
operation stops after execution of the first non-thread
cutting block after the thread cutting command.
2 Operation in canned cycle
When the SBK signal turns to “1” during canned cycle
operation, the operation stops at each positioning,
approach, drilling and retreat instead of the end of the block.
The SPL signal turns to “1” while the STL signal turns to “0”,
showing that the end of the block has not been reached.
When the execution of one block is completed, the STL and
SPL signals turn to “0” and the operation is stopped.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Single block
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Single block

179
5.4
MANUAL ABSOLUTE
ON/OFF
General This function selects whether the movement of the tool with manual
operation (such as jog feed and manual handle feed) is counted for
calculating the current position in the workpiece coordinate system. A
check signal is also output to indicate whether the manual absolute
function in the CNC is turned on or off.
When manual absolute When manual operation interrupts during automatic operation:
turns on (manual i) At the end of the block where manual operation interrupts, the tool
absolute signal *ABSM position moves in parallel by the manual move amount, regardless of
=0) the absolute or incremental command.
ii) In subsequent blocks, the parallel-moved tool position remains
unchanged until an absolute command block appears. Therefore, if all
blocks are programmed by incremental commands, the tool keeps the
parallel-moved position until machining ends.
In case of incremental commands
Manual
intervention
End
point
Programmed tool path The tool returns to the programmed

tool path when an absolute command
block is encountered.
Fig. 5.4 (a) Manual absolute ON
CAUTION
If the machining end position has shifted by the manual
move amount because all blocks are programmed by
incremental commands only, the present position is
displayed shifted by the manual move amount.
180
When manual absolute The manual move amount is not counted to the present position on the
turns off (manual workpiece coordinate system. The present position display on the CRT
absolute signal includes the manual move amount. The display is reset to the initial value
*ABSM=1) (before manual operation) when the control is reset, or when operation in
the automatic operation mode MEM, RMT, or MDI is started after the
manual operation.
During automatic operation, if manual intervention of a block interrupts,

the tool position moves in parallel by the manual move amount,
regardless of the absolute or incremental command at the end point of that
block, as well as at the end point of subsequent blocks.
Actual tool path
(The tool moves along this path, regardless of The actual end point
absolute command or incremental command) always moves in parallel
Manual in-
tervention
End
Programmed tool path point
Fig. 5.4 (b) Manual absolute OFF
The present position display at the finish of the operation shows an end
point value on the program as if manual intervention had not been
executed. However, the tool position moves in parallel.
Signal
Manual absolute signal

*ABSM <G006#2>
[Function] Turns the manual absolute function on or off.
– Turns off the manual absolute function.
When this signal is set to 0, the control unit operates as follows:
– Turns on the manual absolute function.
181
Manual absolute check

signal
MABSM [Classification] Output signal
<F004#2>
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the manual absolute signal.
– When the manual absolute signal *ABSM is set to 0
– When manual absolute signal *ABSM is set to 1
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G006 *ABSM
F004 MABSM
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Manual absolute ON/OFF
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Manual absolute ON/OFF

182
5.5
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP/ADDITION OF
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP
General When a slash followed by a number (/n, where n = 1 to 9) is specified at

the head of a block, and optional block skip signals BDT1 to BDT9 are
set to 1 during automatic operation, the information contained in the block
for which /n, corresponding to signal BDTn, is specified is ignored (from
/n to the end of the block).
(Example) /2 N123 X100. Y200. ;

Input signal Code specified at the head of a block
BDT1 / or /1 (Note 1)
BDT2 /2
BDT3 /3
BDT4 /4
BDT5 /5
BDT6 /6
BDT7 /7
BDT8 /8
BDT9 /9
NOTE
1 Number 1 for /1 can be omitted. However, when two or more
optional block skip switches are used in one block, number
1 for /1 cannot be omitted.
(Example)
//3 N123 X100. Y200. ; — Invalid
/1 /3 N123 X100. Y200. ;— Valid
The following figures show the relationship between the timing, when
optional block skip signals (BDT1 to BDT9) are set to 1, and the ignored
information:
1. When BDTn is set to 1 before the CNC starts reading a block
containing /n, the block is ignored.
BDTn ”1”
”0”
ÄÄÄÄ
Reading by CNC ³ ...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234
....
Ignored
183
2. When BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block containing

/n, the block is not ignored.
BDTn ”1”
”0”
Reading by CNC ³ ...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 ....
Not ignored
3. When BDTn, currently set to 1, is set to 0 while the CNC is reading

a block containing /n, the block is ignored.
BDTn ”1”
”0”
Reading by CNC ³
ÄÄÄÄ
...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 ....
Ignored
4. When two or more optional block skip switches are specified in a block
and BDTn, corresponding to one of them, is set to 1, the block is
ignored.
BDT3 ”1”
”0”
Reading by CNC ³
ÄÄÄÄ
...;/1 /3 /5 N123 X100. Y200. ; N234
ÄÄÄÄ
....
Ignored
Signal
Optional block skip

signals
BDT1 <G044#0>
BDT2 to BDT9 <G045>
[Function] Select whether a block containing /n is to be executed or ignored.
[Operation] During automatic operation, a block containing /n in the program is
ignored when the corresponding optional block skip signal is set to 1. It
is executed normally when the signal is set to 0.
184
Optional block skip

check signals
MBDT1 <F004#0>
MBDT2 to MBDT9
<F005> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notify the PMC of the states of the optional block skip signals BDT1 to
BDT9. Nine signals are provided, corresponding to the nine optional
block skip signals. Signal MBDTn corresponds to signal BDTn.
[Output condition] Signal MBDTn is set to 1 in the following case:
– When the corresponding optional block skip signal (BDTn) is set to 1
Signal MBDTn is set to 0 in the following case:
– When the corresponding optional block skip signal (BDTn) is set to 0
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G044 BDT1
G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2
F004 MBDT1
F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 MBDT6 MBDT5 MBDT4 MBDT3 MBDT2
Note
NOTE
1 This function is ignored when programs are loaded into
memory. Blocks containing /n are also stored in memory,
regardless of how the optional block skip signal is set.
Programs stored in memory can be output, regardless of
how the optional block skip signals are set.
Optional block skip is effective even during sequence
number search operation.
2 Position of a slash
A slash (/) must be specified at the head of a block. If a slash
is placed elsewhere, the information from the slash to
immediately before the EOB code is ignored.
3 TV and TH check
When an optional block skip signal is “1”. TH and TV checks
are made for the skipped portions in the same way as when
the optional block skip switch is “0”.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Program section configuration
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Program section configuration

185
5.6
SEQUENCE NUMBER
COMPARISON AND
STOP
General During program execution, this function causes a single block stop right
after a block with a specified sequence number is executed.
To use this function, first specify the program number (1 to 9999) of a

program that contains a sequence number where operation is to be stopped
and the sequence number on the setting data screen:
With this setting, a single block stop occurs after the execution of the
block with the specified sequence number during automatic operation.
Parameter Setting data

– SEQUENCE STOP (PROGRAM NO.)
Specify the program number (1 to 9999) of a program to which a
sequence to be stopped belongs.
– SEQUENCE STOP (SEQUENCE NO.)
Specify the sequence number (1 to 99999) of a sequence to be stopped.
Note
NOTE
After the specified sequence number is found during the
execution of the program, the sequence number set for
sequence number compensation and stop is decremented
by one. When the power is turned on, the setting of the
sequence number is 0.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Sequence Number Comparison and Stop
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Sequence Number Comparison and Stop

186
5.7
PROGRAM RESTART
General A program may be restarted at a block by specifying the sequence number

of the block, after automatic operation is stopped because of a broken tool
or for holidays. This function can also be used as a high–speed program
check function.
There are two types of restart methods.
P type: Restart after a tool is broken down
Q type: Restart after holidays
Signal
Program restart signal

SRN<G006#0>
[Function] Selects program restart.
[Operation] When the program restart signal is set to “1” to search for the sequence
number of the block to be restarted, the CRT screen changes to the
program restart screen. When the program restart signal is set to “0”, and
automatic operation is activated, the tool is moved back to the machining
restart point at dry run speed along the axes one by one in the sequence
specified in parameter No. 7310. When the tool is set to the restart point,
machining restarts.
Program restart under

way signal
SRNMV<F002#4>
[Function] Indicates the program is being restarted.
[Output condition] The program restart under way signal becomes “1” when:
– The program restart signal is set to “0” after the CRT screen changes
to the program restart screen.
The signal is set to “0” when:
– The program restart sequence ends (the tool has been moved to the
restart point on all controlled axes).
187
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G006 SRN
F002 SRNMV
Parameter
7310 Movement sequence to program restart position
Setting entry is accepted.

[Valid data range] 1 to no. of controlled axes
This parameter sets the axis sequence when the machine moves to the
restart point by dry run after a program is restarted.
[Example]
The machine moves to the restart point in the order of the fourth, first,
second, and third axes one at a time when the first axis = 2, the second
axis = 3, the third axis = 4, and the fourth axis = 1 are set.
Alarm and message

094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the pro-
(COORD CHG) gram is restarted. (After the automatic op-
eration was interrupted, the coordinate
system setting operation was per-
formed.) Perform the correct operation
according to the operator’s manual.
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the
(EXT OFS CHG) program is restarted. (After the auto-
matic operation was interrupted, the
external workpiece offset amount
changed.)
(WRK OFS CHG) program is restarted. (After the auto-
matic operation was interrupted, the
workpiece offset amount changed.)
(AUTO EXEC) program is restarted. (After power ON,
after emergency stop or P / S alarm 94
to 97 were reset, no automatic opera-
tion was performed.) Perform automat-
ic operation.
098 G28 FOUND IN SE- A command of the program restart was
QUENCE RETURN specified without the reference position
return operation after power ON or
emergency stop, and G28 was found
during search.
Perform the reference position return.
099 MDI EXEC NOT AL- After completion of search in program
LOWED AFT. SEARCH restart, a move command is given with
MDI.
188
Warning
WARNING
As a rule, the tool cannot be returned to a correct position
under the following conditions.
Special care must be taken in the following cases since
none of them cause an alarm:
⋅ Manual operation is performed when the manual
absolute mode is OFF.
⋅ Manual operation is performed when the machine is
locked.
⋅ When the mirror image is used.
⋅ When manual operation is performed in the course of
axis movement for returning operation.
⋅ When the program restart is commanded for a block
between the block for skip cutting and subsequent
absolute command block.
⋅ When program restart specified for an intermediate block
for a multiple repetitive canned cycle
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL PROGRAM RESTART
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL PROGRAM RESTART

189
5.8
EXACT STOP/
EXACT STOP MODE/
TAPPING MODE/
CUTTING MODE
(M SERIES)
General NC commands can be used to control a feedrate in continuous cutting feed

blocks as described below.
D Exact stop (G09) The tool is decelerated in a block specifying G09, and an in–position
check (*1) is performed. When the feed motor falls in–position, the tool
is moved by the next block. This function may be used to produce a sharp
edge at the corner of a workpiece.
D Exact Stop Mode (G61) When G61 is commanded, deceleration of cutting feed command at the
end point and inposition check is performed per block thereafter. This
G61 is valid till G62 (automatic corner override), G63 (tapping mode),
or G64 (cutting mode), is commanded.
D Tapping Mode (G63) When G63 is commanded, feed rate override is ignored (always regarded
as 100%), and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not
decelerate at the end of block to transfer to the next block. This G63 is
valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G64
(cutting mode) is commanded.
D Cutting Mode (G64) When G64 is commanded, deceleration at the end point of each block
thereafter is not performed and cutting goes on to the next block. This
command is valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner
override), or G63 (tapping mode) is commanded.
However, in G64 mode, feed rate is decelerated to zero and in–position
check is performed in the following case;
1) Positioning mode (G00, G60)
2) Block with exact stop check (G09)
3) Next block is a block without movement command
*1 The term in–position indicates that the servo motor reaches in a range
of positions specified by a parameter. See Section 7.2.6.1 and 7.2.6.2
for details.
(Example) Tool paths from block (1) to block (2)
Y
(2) In–position check
Tool path in the exact stop mode

(1)
Tool path in the cutting mode or
tapping mode
0 X
190
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Exact Stop (G09, G61)
(For Machining Center) Cutting Mode (G64)
(B–63514EN) Tapping Mode (G63)
191
5.9
DNC OPERATION
General By starting automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT),
it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a program is
being read in via the reader/puncher interface. It is possible to select files
(programs) saved in an external input/output unit of a floppy format
(Handy File, Floppy Cassettes, or FA card) and specify (schedule) the
sequence and frequency of execution for automatic operation.
To use the DNC operation function, it is necessary to set the parameters
related to the reader/puncher interface in advance.
Signal
DNC operation select

signal
DNCI<G043#5>
[Function] Selects the DNC operation mode (RMT).
To select the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is necessary to select the
memory operation mode (MEM) and set the DNC operation select signal
to “1”.
[Operation] When the DNC operation select signal becomes “1”, the control unit
operates as follows:
– If the memory mode (MEM) has not been selected, the signal is
ignored, and nothing happens.
– If the memory operation mode (MEM) has been selected, the DNC
operation mode (RMT) is selected, and DNC operation becomes
possible. In this case, the DNC operation selection confirm signal
MRMT becomes “1”.
DNC operation selection

confirm signal
MRMT<F003#4>
[Function] Indicates that the DNC operation mode (RMT) has been selected.
[Output condition] The DNC operation selection confirm signal becomes “1” when:
– The DNC operation mode (RMT) is selected.
The DNC operation selection confirm signal becomes “0” when:
– The DNC operation mode (RMT) is not selected.
192
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G043 DNCI
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F003 MRMT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 ND3
Setting entry is accepted.

[Data type] Bit
ND3 In DNC operation, a program is:
0 : Read block by block. (A “DC3” code is output for each block.)
1 : Read continuously until the buffer becomes full. (A “DC3” code is
output when the buffer becomes full.)
NOTE
In general, reading is performed more efficiently when
ND3=1. This specification reduces the number of buffering
interruptions caused by reading of a series of blocks
specifying short movements. This reduces the cycle time.
Alarm and message

086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by

using Reader / Puncher interface, the
ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher
was off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable
is not connected or a P.C.B. is defec-
tive.
210 CAN NOT COMAND M198 and M99 are executed in the
M198/M99 schedule operation. Or M198 is
executed in the DNC operation.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL SCHEDULING FUNCTION
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL SCHEDULING FUNCTION

CONNECTION MANUAL READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE

(this manual)
193
5.10
MANUAL
INTERVENTION AND
RETURN
General If the tool movement along the axes is stopped by a feed hold during
automatic operation, then restarted after manual intervention such as tool
exchange, the tool moves back to the point of intervention before
automatic operation is resumed.
This function is easy to operate because unlike the program restart
function or the tool retract and restore function, it is unnecessary to
operate switches on the operator’s panel or MDI keys.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7001 MIN
[Data type] Bit

MIN The manual intervention and return function is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
Warning
WARNING
If you do not make manual intervention correctly according
to the direction of machining and the shape of the
workpiece, the machine and tool may be broken down. Use
sufficient care.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN

194
5.11
RETRACTION FOR
RIGID TAPPING
(M SERIES)
General When rigid tapping is stopped, either as a result of an emergency stop or

a reset, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be
drawn out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically stores
information relating to the tapping executed most recently. When a tap
retraction signal is input, only drawn out of the rigid tapping cycle is
executed, based on the stored information. The tap is pulled toward the
R point. When a retract value α is set in parameter No. 5382, the pulling
distance can be increased by α.
Initial point
2nd return
completion
α point
Retract 1st return

completion completion
R point point α point
L L
Center of
tapping
Z point (α=0) (when α is set)
Basic procedure (1) Start

Reset the CNC, then select MDI mode. Setting rigid tapping retraction
start signal RTNT to “1” starts rigid tapping retraction.
(2) Completion
Upon the completion of rigid tapping retraction, rigid tapping
retraction completion signal RTPT is set to “1”, with which the CNC
automatically enters the reset state. Setting rigid tapping retract start
signal RTNT to “0” sets rigid tapping retraction completion signal
RTPT to “0”.
(3) Stop
During rigid tapping retraction, setting rigid tapping retraction start
signal RTNT to “0” stops rigid tapping retraction, placing the CNC in
the reset state. To resume rigid tapping retraction, set rigid tapping
retraction start signal RTNT to “1”. Rigid tapping retraction can also
be stopped by means of a reset or feed hold.
195
(4) Resume
Once rigid tapping retraction has been stopped, it can be resumed by
performing the same operation as that used for starting rigid tapping
retraction. If rigid tapping retraction has been completed, however,
the start operation does not restart rigid tapping retraction. If retract
value α is set in parameter No. 5382, however, the start operation
performs rigid tapping retraction using α only.
Start and completion

time chart
Rigid tapping retraction

start signal RTNT
M29 command
Spindle enable signal ENB
Rigid tapping signal RGTAP
M29 completion signal FIN
Spindle excitation
Retract movement

completion signal RTPT
Fig. 5.11 Start and completion time chart
In the reset state, setting rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT to “1”
in MDI mode causes the rigid tapping M command to be output. For rigid
tapping retraction, specify neither gear switching nor orientation. Spindle
function strobe signal SF is also output if no S command has been
specified after power–on.
Upon the completion of rigid tapping retraction, spindle enable signal

ENB is set to “0”, in the same way as at the end of ordinary rigid tapping.
Therefore, perform the sequence for canceling rigid tapping. Once rigid
tapping retraction has been completed, rigid tapping retraction
completion signal RTPT is set to “1” and the CNC enters the reset state.
196
Time chart for stopping

rigid tapping retraction
Tapping retraction start signal
RTNT
Spindle enable signal ENB
Rigid tapping signal RGTAP
Spindle excitation
Retract movement
When tapping retract is stopped, spindle enable signal ENB is set to “0”,
in the same way as for ordinary rigid tapping. Therefore, perform the
sequence for canceling rigid tapping. The CNC also automatically enters
the reset state when tapping retract is stopped.
Signal

start signal RTNT
<G062#6> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Starts rigid tapping retraction.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
S Starts rigid tapping retraction.

completion signal RTPT
<F066#1> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the completion of rigid tapping retraction.
[Output condition] This signal is set to “1” in the following case:
S Rigid tapping retraction has been completed.
This signal is set to “0” in the following case:
S Rigid tapping retraction start signal has been set to “0”.
197
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G062 RTNT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F066 RTPT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5200 DOV
[Data type] Bit

DOV For tool extraction during rigid tapping, override is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
5381 Override for rigid tapping retraction
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
Sets an override value to be applied to rigid tapping retraction. No
override is applied if 0 is set.
NOTE
This parameter is enabled only when the parameter used to
enable tool extraction (DOV: bit 4 of No. 5200) is set to 1.
5382 Retract value α for rigid tapping return

[Unit of data] Input increments
Sets an extra retract value for rigid tapping retraction. The tool will be
pulled beyond the R point by α. If rigid tapping retraction has already
been completed, the tool is pulled by α only.
198
Caution
CAUTION
1 If rigid tapping is stopped as a result of an emergency stop,
the position on the tapping axis (Z–axis) is maintained but
the spindle position is lost. In such a case, therefore, the
positional relationship between the spindle and tapping axis
is not guaranteed when operation is resumed.
2 Rigid tapping retraction is performed based on the tapping
axis (Z–axis) commands accumulated for tapping. If rigid
tapping is stopped as a result of an emergency stop,
therefore, rigid tapping retraction may fail to draw the
tapping tool completely out of the workpiece. In such a
case, set retract value α (parameter No. 5382).
3 During rigid tapping retraction, switching the mode to
manual mode stops rigid tapping retraction.
4 For rigid tapping retraction, the CNC internally activates a
return program. Rigid tapping retraction may, therefore,
cause some G codes or M/F/S codes to be overwritten
(G80/G84/G74, G94/G95, G30).
Note
NOTE
1 Setting rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT to “1” starts
rigid tapping retraction only when the CNC is placed in both
the reset state and MDI mode.
2 The machining data for rigid tapping retraction is maintained
until a rigid tapping command is subsequently specified,
even while the power is turned off. Rigid tapping retraction
can, therefore, be specified even if the power has been
turned off after rigid tapping.
3 Rigid tapping retraction is not performed if the input
increments (inches or mm) selected when tapping return is
specified differ from those selected when the machining
data for tapping retraction was stored.
4 An override can be applied to rigid tapping retraction, if it is
enabled with the corresponding parameter.
199
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Ma- Rigid tapping
chining Center) (B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Rigid tapping

Lathe) (B–63504EN)
This manual 9.10 Rigid tapping
200
B–63503EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
201
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63503EN–1/01
6.1
POSITIONING
General The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system
specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse
rate.
In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is
programmed.
In the incremental command the distance the tool moves is programmed.
The tool path is determined by selecting one of the following with
parameter LRP (No. 1401#1):
D Linear interpolation type positioning
The tool is positioned using a straight path and a speed that is not
higher than the rapid traverse of each axis but that assures the shortest
positioning time. This tool path is not the same as for linear
interpolation (G01).
D Non–linear interpolation type positioning
Positioning is performed with each axis independently at the rapid
traverse rate. Generally, the tool path is not a straight line.
The rapid traverse rate in the G00 command is set to the parameter
No.1420 for each axis independently by the machine tool builder. In the
positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a
predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the end
of a block. Execution proceeds to the next block after confirming the
in–position.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 LRP
[Data type] Bit

LRP Positioning (G00)
0 : Positioning is performed with non–linear type positioning so that the
tool moves along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1 : Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool
moves in a straight line.

each axis.
202
Note
NOTE
The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address
F.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL POSITIONING (G00)
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL POSITIONING (G00)

203
6.2
LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
General Tools can move along a line

A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate
specified in F.
The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It
need not be specified for each block.
The feedrate commanded by the F code is measured along the tool path.
If the F code is not commanded, the feedrate is regarded as zero.
The feedrate of each axis direction is as follows.
G01ααββγγζζ Ff ;
Feed rate of α axis direction : Fa + a f

L
b
Feed rate of β axis direction : Fb + f
L
g
Feed rate of γ axis direction : Fg + f
L
z
Feed rate of ζ axis direction : Fz +
L
f
L + Ǹa 2 ) b2 ) g2 ) z2
The feedrate of the rotary axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min (if the
feedrate is 12 deg/min, F12.0 is commanded).
When the straight line axis α(such as X, Y, or Z) and the rotating axisβ
(such as A, B, or C) are linearly interpolated, the feed rate is that in which
the tangential feed rate in the αandβ cartesian coordinate system is
commanded by F(mm/min).
β–axis feedrate is obtained ; at first, the time required for distribution is
calculated by using the above fromula, then the β –axis feedrate unit is
changed to deg/min.
A calculation example is as follows.
(Example)
G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ;
This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric
input. The time required for distribution is calculated as follows:
Ǹ20 2 ) 40 2
8 0.14907 (min)
300
The feed rate for the C axis is
40 8 268.3 degńmin
0.14907
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the feed rate is calculated the same way
as in 2 axes control.
204
Parameter
1411
Cutting feedrate when the power is turned on

[Data type] Word
When the machine requires little change in cutting feedrate during
cutting, a cutting feedrate can be specified in the parameter. This
eliminates the need to specify a cutting feedrate in the NC command data.
The feedrate set in this parameter is effective between the CNC being
cleared, upon a power–on or a reset, and a feedrate being specified with a
program command (F command). Once a feedrate has been specified with
an F command, that feedrate becomes effective.
1422 Maximium cutting feedrate for all axes


NOTE
1430
Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis

Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.

A feedrate for each axis is clamped in cutting feed so that it does not
exceed the maximum feedrate specified for each axis.
205
NOTE
1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular
interpolation. In polar coordinate and cylindrical,
interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in
parameter No. 1422 is effective.
2 If the setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate
specified in parameter No. 1422 is applied to all axes and
the feedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402 G01
[Data type] Bit

G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
Alarm and message

No. Message Description
011 NO FEEDRATE COMMAN- Cutting feedrate was not commanded or

DED the feedrate was inadequate. Modify the
program.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)

206
6.3
CIRCULAR
INTERPOLATION
General The command below can move a tool along a circular arc in the defined
plane.
“Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane
(ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed
in the positive–to–negative direction of the Zp axis (Yp axis or Xp axis,
respectively) in the Cartesian coordinate system. See the figure below.
Yp Xp Zp
G03 G03 G03
G02 G02 G02

Xp Zp Yp
G17 G18 G19
The end point of an arc is specified by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is

expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91.
For the incremental value, the distance of the end point which is viewed
from the start point of the arc is specified with a sign.
The arc center is specified by addresses I, J, and K for the Xp, Yp, and Zp
axes, respectively. The numerical value following I, J, or K, however, is
a vector component in which the arc center is seen from the start point,
and is always specified as an incremental value, as shown below.
I, J, and K must be signed according to the direction.
End point (x,y) End point (z,x) End point (y,z)

y x z
x Start z Start y
i k j Start
point point point
j i k
Center Center Center
I0,J0, and K0 can be omitted. When Xp, Yp , and Zp are omitted (the end
point is the same as the start point) and the center is specified with I, J,
and K, a 360_ arc (circle) is specified.
G02 Ii; Command for a circle
If the difference between the radius at the start point and that at the
end point exceeds the value in a parameter (No.3410), an alarm (No.020)
occurs.
207
The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc
can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K.
In this case, one arc is less than 180_, and the other is more than 180_ are
considered.
For T series, an arc with a sector angle of 180_ or wider cannot be
specified (P/S alarm No. 023).
For M series, specify an arc more than 180_ with a negative radius value
commanded.
If Xp, Yp, and Zp are all omitted, if the end point is located at the same
position as the start point and when R is used, an arc of 0°is programmed.
G02Rr ; (The tool does not move.)
(Example) (T series)
For arc (1) (less than 180_)
G02 W60.0 U10.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc (2) (greater than 180_)
An arc with a sector angle of 180°
or wider cannot be specified
within a single block.
(2)
r=50mm
End point
(1)
Start point
r=50mm
Y
208
(Example) (M series)
For arc (1) (less than 180_)
G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc (2) (greater than 180_)
G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R–50.0 F300.0 ;
(2)
r=50mm
End point
(1)
Start point r=50mm

Y
NOTE
1 Specifying an arc center with addresses I, K, and J
When the distance from the arc start point to the arc center
is specified with addresses I, K, and J, a P/S alarm (No.
5059) is issued if:
Maximum value which can be specified < ǸI 2 ) K 2
Example:
When IS–B and metric input are selected, issuing the
following command (radius specification) will result in the
issue of a P/S alarm (No. 5059):
G50 X0 Z0;
G18 G02 X11.250 Z10. I–800000.000 K900000.000 F5.0;
N ǸI 2 ) K 2 + Ǹ(–800000.000) 2 ) 900000.000 2
= 1204159.458
> 999999.999
2 Tool nose radius compensation

In tool nose radius compensation mode, a P/S alarm (No.
5059) is issued if the distance from the tool nose radius
center to the arc center exceeds the maximum value which
can be specified.
209
The feedrate in circular interpolation is equal to the feedrate specified by

the F code, and the feedrate along the arc (the tangential feedrate of the
arc) is controlled to be the specified feedrate.
The error between the specified feedrate and the actual tool feedrate is
±2% or less. However, this feedrate is measured along the arc after the
cutter compensation (M series) or tool nose radius compensation (T
series) is applied.
Parameter
1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system
NOTE
When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter
compensation C (for the M series), tool nose radius compensation (for the
T series), etc., each control axis is set to one of the basic three axes X, Y,
and Z, or an axis parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis.
G17: Plane Xp–Yp
G18: Plane Zp–Xp
G19: Plane Yp–Zp
Only one axis can be set for each of the three basic axes X, Y, and Z, but
two or more parallel axes can be set.
Set value Meaning
0 Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis
1 X axis of the basic three axes
2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Axis parallel to the X axis
6 Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 Axis parallel to the Z axis
210
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402
G19 G18
[Data type] Bit

G18 and G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
G19 G18 G17, G18 or G19 mode

0 0 G17 mode (plane XY)
0 1 G18 mode (plane ZX)
1 0 G19 mode (plane YZ)
3410 Tolerance of arc radius


When a circular interpolation command (G02, G03) is executed, the
tolerance for the radius between the start point and the end point is set. If
the difference of radii between the start point and the end point exceeds the
tolerance set here, a P/S alarm No. 20 is informed.
NOTE
When the set value is 0, the difference of radii is not
checked.
211
Alarm and message

011 NO FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate was not commanded

COMMANDED or the feedrate was inadequate.
Modify the program.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF In circular interpolation (G02 or G03),
RADIUS difference of the distance between the
start point and the center of an arc
and that between the end point and
the center of the arc exceeded the
value specified in parameter No.
3410.
021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS An axis not included in the selected
COMMANDED plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was
commanded in circular interpolation.
Modify the program.
023 ILLEGAL RADIUS In circular interpolation by radius des-
COMMAND ignation, negative value was com-
(T series) manded for address R. Modify the
program.
025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 F0 (rapid traverse) was instructed by
IN G02/G03 F1 –digit command in circular inter-
(M series) polation. Modify the program.
028 ILLEGAL PLANE In the plane selection command, two
SELECT or more axes in the same direction
are commanded.
Modify the program.
P/S RADIUS IS OUT OF For circular interpolation, the radius
5059 RANGE specified with addresses I and K ex-
ceeds the allowable range.
Note
NOTE
1 For T series, the U, V and W axes (parallel with the basic
axis) can be used with G–code system B and C.
2 If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the
arc specified by address R takes precedence and the other
are ignored.
3 If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded,
an alarm is displayed.
For example, when G code system B or C is used, if U axis
with X axis is specified as a parallel axis to X axis when
plane XY is specified, an P/S alarm (No.028)is displayed.
212
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02,G03)
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02,G03)

213
6.4
THREAD CUTTING
6.4.1
Thread Cutting
General Tool movement can be synchronized with spindle rotation when cutting
threads.
The spindle speed is continuously read through the position coder

attached to the spindle. Then, it is converted to a cutting feedrate (feed
per minute) to feed the tool.
L : Lead L
L L
Straight Thread Tapered Screw Scroll Thread
In general, thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path in rough
cutting through finish cutting for a screw. Since thread cutting starts when
the position coder mounted on the spindle outputs a 1–turn signal,
threading is started at a fixed point and the tool path on the workpiece is
unchanged for repeated thread cutting. Note that the spindle speed must
remain constant from rough cutting through finish cutting. If not,
incorrect thread lead will occur.
214
Signal
Thread cutting signal

THRD<F002#3>
[Function] This signal indicates that thread cutting is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal turns to “1” in the following cases:
S Thread cutting mode in progress
S Thread cutting cycle for turning
This signal turns to “0” in the following case.
S Neither thread cutting mode nor thread cutting are in progress.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 THRD
Parameter
Enabling/disabling dry
run operation during
threading #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 TDR
[Data type] Bit

TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid
tapping)
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
Checking the spindle
speed arrival signal
before starting threading
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3708 SAT SAR
SAR
[Data type] Bit

SAR: The spindle speed arrival signal is:
0 : Not checked
1 : Checked
215
SAT: Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of executing the
thread cutting block
0 : The signal is checked only when SAR, #0 of parameter 3708, is set.
1 : The signal is always checked irrespective of whether SAR is set.
CAUTION
When thread cutting blocks are consecutive, the spindle
speed arrival signal is not checked for the second and
subsequent thread cutting blocks.
Setting the time constant

for the threading cycle
1626 Time constant of exponetial acceleration/deceleration in the thread

cutting cycle for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in the
thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each axis.
Setting the FL feedrate
for the thread cutting
cycle
1627 FL rate of exponential acceleration /deceleration in the thread cutting
cycle for each axis


the thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each
axis.
216
Setting the chamfering

distance for the thread
cutting cycle
5130 Chamfering distance in the thread cutting cycles G76 and G92
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 0.1 pitch
This parameter sets the chamfering in the thread cutting cycles G76 and
G92.
Setting the minimum

depth of cut for the
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5140 Minimium depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76


This parameter sets the minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76.
Setting the finishing
allowance for the
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5141 Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76


This parameter sets the finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76.
217
Setting the repetition

count of finishing for the
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5142 Repetition count of final finishing in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

[Unit of data] Cycle
This parameter sets the repetition count in the multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
Setting the tool angle for

the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5143 Tool nose angle in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

[Unit of data] Degree
[Valid data range] 0 to 120 (When FS10/11 TAPE FORMAT is used)
0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80 (When FS10/11 TAPE FORMAT is not used)
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in the multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
Warning
WARNING
During threading, stopping feed without stopping the
spindle is dangerous because the cutting depth will abruptly
increase. Feed hold is, therefore, disabled during
threading. If attempted during threading, feed stops in the
same way as single block stop upon the completion of the
first non–threading block after the termination of threading
mode. The feed hold lamp (SPL lamp), however, lights
immediately after the feed fold button (on the machine
operator’s panel) is pressed. The lamp goes off when feed
stops (the CNC enters the single block stop state).
218
Caution
CAUTION
1 Feedrate override is ignored during thread cutting, 100%
being assumed.
2 During threading, spindle override is ignored, 100% being
assumed.
3 When the first non–threading block is executed after
threading mode has been finished, and the feed hold button
is pressed again (or the feed hold button has been held
down), the execution of the non–threading block is stopped
immediately.
4 When thread cutting is executed in the single block status,
the tool stops after execution of the first block not specifying
thread cutting.
5 When the previous block was a thread cutting block, cutting
will start immediately without waiting for detection of the
1–turn signal even if the present block is a thread cutting
block.
6 When a dry run operation is performed the dry run rate
becomes the longitudinal axis feedrate.
7 For T series, the thread cutting retract function is supported
only for the threading cycle.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL CONSTANT LEAD THREAD CUTTING
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL CONSTANT LEAD THREAD CUTTING

VARIABLE LEAD THREAD CUTTING
CONTINUOUS THREAD CUTTING
MULTIPLE THREAD CUTTING
219
6.4.2
Thread Cutting Cycle
Retract (T series)
General When the automatic operation stop signal *SP <G008#5> is set to 0
during threading in a threading cycle, the tool immediately retracts while
performing chamfering, then returns to the start point of the current cycle,
first along the X–axis, then along the Z–axis.
Stop point
Ordinary cycle
Rapid traverse Motion when the signal *SP is
set to 0.
The signal *SP is set to 0 here.
Parameter
D Setting to enable the
override function during
thread cutting cycle
retraction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1403 RTV
[Data type] Bit

RTV Override while the tool is retracting in threading
0 : Override is effective.
1 : Override is not effective.
D Setting a chamfering
distance in thread
cutting cycle retraction
5130 Chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 0.1 pitch
This parameter sets the chamfering in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92.
220
Caution
CAUTION
While the tool is retracting, automatic operation stop signal
*SP <G008#5> is ignored.
Note
NOTE
The chamfering distance for retraction is determined by the
setting of parameter No. 5130.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Thread Cutting Cycle
Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
221
6.5
SINGLE DIRECTION
POSITIONING
(M SERIES)
General For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final
positioning from one direction is available.
Overrun
distance
Start position
Start position
Temporary stop
End position
An overrun and a positioning direction are set by the parameter (No.

5440). Even when a commanded positioning direction coincides with
that set by the parameter, the tool stops once before the end point.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5431 MDL
[Data type] Bit

MDL Specifies whether the G code for single direction positioning (G60) is
included in one–shot G codes (00 group) or modal G codes (01 group)
0: One–shot G codes (00 group)
1: Modal G codes (01 group)
222
5440 Positioning direction and overrun distance in uni–directional positioning

for each axis


This parameter sets the positioning direction and overrun distance in
uni–directional positioning (G60) for each axis. The positioning
direction is specified using a setting data sign, and the overrun distance
using a value set here.
Approach > 0: The positioning direction is positive (+).

Approach < 0: The positioning direction is negative (*).
Approach = 0: Uni–directional positioning is not performed.
Overrun distance
– +
Positioning direction (plus)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Single direction positioning
(B–63514EN)
223
6.6
HELICAL
INTERPOLATION
General Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up

to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular
interpolation by circular commands.
The command method is to simply add one or two move command axes
which is not circular interpolation axes. An F command specifies a
feedrate along a circular arc. Therefore, the feedrate of the linear axis is
as follows:
Length of linear axis
F×
Length of circular arc
Determine the feedrate so that the linear axis feedrate does not exceed any
of the various limit values.
Tool path
X Y
The feedrate along the circumference of two cir-

cular interpolated axes is the specified feedrate.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1404 HFC
HFC The feedrate for helical interpolation is:

0 : Clamped so that the feedrates along an arc and linear axis do not
exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified by parameter.
1 : Clamped so that the composite feedrate along an arc and linear axis
does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified by
parameter.
When HFC is 1, and two linear axes exist, the combined feedrate for
the four axes (two axes (arc) + two axes (straight line)) is clamped so
that it does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate.
224
<Parameters used for clamping>

When HFC is 0
No. 1430: Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
Since the cutting feedrate for the arc is clamped to the above
parameter value, the feedrate along the linear axis is clamped
to the smaller parameter value.
Example: No. 1430 X 1000
Y 1200
Z 1400
G17 G03 X0. Y100. R100. Z1000. F5000;
The feedrate along the linear axis is clamped to 1000.
No. 1422: Maximum cutting feedrate (common to all axes)
If parameter No. 1430 is set to 0, the feedrate is clamped to
the value set in this parameter.
When HFC is 1
No. 1422: Maximum cutting feedrate (common to all axes)
The cutting feedrate is clamped to the value set in this
parameter. The value set with parameter No. 1430 is
ignored.
Alarm and message If more than two axes are specified together with the two axes for circular
interpolation in a block specifying a helical interpolation operation, P/S
alarm No. 232 is issued.
0232 TOO MANY HELICAL Three or more axes are specified as

AXIS COMMANDS helical axes.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Helical Interpolation
(B–63514EN)
225
6.7
POLAR COORDINATE
INTERPOLATION
(T SERIES)
General Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control

in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system
to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movement
of a rotary axis (rotation of a workpiece). This function is useful for
grinding a cam shaft.
Explanations G12.1 starts the polar coordinate interpolation mode and selects a polar
coordinate interpolation plane (Fig. 6.8). Polar coordinate
interpolation is performed on this plane.
D Polar coordinate
interpolation plane
Rotary axis (virtual axis)
(unit:mm or inch)
Linear axis
(unit:mm or inch)
Origin of the local coordinate system (G52 command)

(Or origin of the workpiece coordinate system when a G52
command is not specified)
Fig. 6.7 Polar coordinate interpolation plane
When the power is turned on or the system is reset, polar coordinate

interpolation is canceled (G13.1).
The linear and rotation axes for polar coordinate interpolation must be set
in parameters (No. 5460 and 5461) beforehand.
226
Parameter

5460 Axis (linear axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation
5461 Axis (rotary axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolarion
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... control axes count
These parameters set control axis numbers of linear and rotary axes to
execute polar interpolation.
5462 Maximum cutting feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation

Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0, 6 – 240000 0, 6 – 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0, 6 – 96000 0, 6 – 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 0, 6 – 240000 0, 6 – 100000
This parameter sets the upper limit of the cutting feedrate that is effective
during polar coordinate interpolation. If a feedrate greater than the
maximum feedrate is specified during polar coordinate interpolation, it
is clamped to the feedrate specified by the parameter. When the setting is
0, the feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation is clamped to the
maximum cutting feedrate usually specified with parameter 1422.
Alarm and message

145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS The conditions are incorrect when the polar
IN POLAR COORDINATE coordinate interpolation starts or it is can-
INTERPOLATION celed.
1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1
was specified.
2) An error is found in the plane selection.
Parameters No. 5460 and No. 5461 are
incorrectly specified.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
227
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Polar Coordinate Interpolation
228
6.8
CYLINDRICAL
INTERPOLATION
General The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is once
internally converted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surface
so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with
another axis. After interpolation, such a distance is converted back to the
amount of travel of the rotary axis.
The cylindrical interpolation function allows the side of a cylinder to be
developed for programming. So programs such as a program for
cylindrical cam grooving can be created very easily.
Use parameter No. 1022 to specify whether the rotation axis is the X–, Y–,
or Z–axis, or an axis parallel to one of these axes.
Only one rotation axis can be set for cylindrical interpolation.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE

0 0 Linear axis
@ Inch/metric conversion is done.
@ All coordinate values are linear axis type.
@ Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to pa-
rameter No. 3624)

@ Inch/metric conversion is not done.
@ Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_ Absolute
coordinatevalues and relative coordinate values are rounded or
not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0 and #2.
@ Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type (Refer to
parameter No. 3624)
@ Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the
reference position return direction and the move amount does
not exceed one rotation.

@ Machine coordinate values is linear axis type (Is not rounded in
0 to 360_). Absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate
values are rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0
and #2.
rameter No. 3624).
@ Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the
index table indexing function (M series).
229
To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter

compensation C (for the M series), tool nose radius compensation (for the
T series), etc., each control axis is set to one of the basic three axes X, Y,
and Z, or an axis parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis.
G17: Plane Xp–Yp
G18: Plane Zp–Xp
G19: Plane Yp–Zp
Set value Meaning

Alarm and message

175 ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND Conditions when performing cylindrical in-

terpolation start or cancel not correct. To
change the mode to the cylindrical inter-
polation mode, specify the command in a
format of “G07.1 rotation–axis name radius
of cylinder.”
176 IMPROPER G–CODE IN Any of the following G codes which cannot

G107 be specified in the cylindrical interpolation
mode was specified.
1) G codes for positioning, such as G28,
G76, G81 – G89, including the codes
specifying the rapid traverse cycle
2) G codes for setting a coordinate system:
G50, G52
3) G code for selecting coordinate system:
G53 G54–G59
Modify the program.
230
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Cylindrical Interpolation
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Cylindrical Interpolation

231
6.9 Polygonal turning means machining a polygonal figure by rotating the

workpiece and tool at a certain ratio.
POLYGONAL
TURNING
(T SERIES)
Workpiece
Workpiece Tool
Fig. 6.9 (a) Polygonal turning
By changing conditions which are rotation ratio of workpiece and tool and
number of cutters,the machining figure can be changed to a square or
hexagon. The machining time can be reduced as compared with polygonal
figure machining using C and X axes of the polar coordinate. The
machined figure however, is not exactly polygonal. Generally, polygonal
turning is used for the heads of square and/or hexagon bolts or hexagon
nuts.
Fig. 6.9 (b) Hexagon bolt
This function controls the workpiece (spindle) and tool (rotation tool
axis) so that the relationship between the spindle speed and tool speed is
maintained at a constant ratio specified in a command given to the CNC.
(For the principle of polygonal turning, refer to Section 20.1, Part II of the
“Operator’s Manual (For Lathe).”)
Expranations One of the axes (servo axes) controlled by the CNC is assigned as a tool
rotation axis. Either serial spindle or analog spindle can be used as a
workpiece axis (spindle).
Polygonal turning using a servo axis is detailed in the operator’s manual
(for lathe).
This section focuses on supplementary information and examples for the
connection.
D Spindle connection A position coder must be mounted on the spindle. However, polygonal
turning requires no additional changes to the spindle connection (See
Section 9.3.).
232
Polygonal turning uses the position coder feedback signal to control the
positional relationship (cutting position) between the spindle and tool
rotation axis, and the ratio of speed.
D Tool rotation axis Parameter No. 7610 specifies the controlled axis (servo axis) to be used
(servo axis) connection as the tool rotation axis.
The same parameter setting as for ordinary servo axes applies to the servo
axis connection for polygonal turning except for some parameters.
When the machine is not in the polygonal turning mode, the servo axis
specified as the rotation tool axis functions as a feed axis. So, the servo
axis can be:
· Used as a subspindle under PMC axis control
· Positioned by a move command from a machining program.
However, be careful about the angle to rotate through and feedrate. Read
the operator’s manual (for lathe) and the following examples.
D Examples of parameter · The following descriptions exemplify typical parameter setting for
setting polygonal turning using a serial pulse coder (with a million pulse
capability).
→ The parameter setting described here is not a must for polygonal
turning.
→ Specify typical values for parameters unless otherwise stated.
D Tool rotation axis setting
This example uses the CNC’s fourth axis (connected as the Y–axis) as
a rotation tool axis for polygonal turning.
Parameter No. 7610 = 4
(controlled axis number for the tool rotation axis)
The following description assumes that the axis type parameter is set
to the fourth axis.
D Servo parameter setting
Set the servo parameters as listed below:
CMR = 1
DMR = 36/1000
(With the above setting, the reference counter capacity is 36000.)
Parameter No. 1820 = 2 (CMR)
Parameter No. 1821 = 36000 (reference counter capacity)
Parameter No. 2084 = 36 (DMR numerator)
Parameter No. 2085 = 1000 (DMR denominator)
For the other servo parameters, specify typical values.
D Parameter setting for polygonal turning
The least command increment, detection unit, the angle to rotate
through per rotation for the polygon axis are as follows:
L CMR
Least command increment =
Q DMR
least command increment L
Detection unit = =
DMR Q DMR
Angle to rotate through per tool axis rotation
360
=
least command increment
233
where
L: Tool axis rotation angle per motor rotation (degrees),
(360 speed increment ratio)
When the servo motor is connected directly to the rotation tool, for
example, L = 360. When the tool speed is doubled, L = 720.
Q: Number of pulses per pulse coder rotation
(For a serial pulse coder, Q = 1000000.)
The least command increment specified here is specific to the polygon
axis. It is determined regardless of what is specified in parameter No.
1004 (ISA/ISC). However, both ISA and ISC must be set to 0 for IS–B
setting.
If the servo motor is connected directly to the rotation tool:
360 1
Least command increment = 36 = 0.01 (degrees)
1000000
1000
Detection unit = 0.01 (degrees)
360
Angle to rotate through per tool axis rotation = = 36000
0.01
(degrees)
The upper limit to the tool rotation axis speed is:
Maximum servo motor speed speed increment ratio
Therefore, if the maximum servo motor speed is 2000 rpm, and the
servo motor is directly connected to the servo motor:
Upper limit to the tool rotation axis speed = 2000 1 = 2000 (rpm)
This means the parameters must be set as follows:
No. 7620 = 36000 (angle to rotate through per tool axis rotation)
No. 7621 = 2000 (upper limit to tool rotation axis speed)
D Feedrate parameter setting
Because the least command increment is 0.01 degrees, the input unit
for the feedrate is 10 degrees/min.
To obtain a rapid traverse speed of 2000 rpm, for example, specify as
follows:
360
No. 1420 = 72000 (= 2000 )
10
Also specify other feedrates in 10 degrees/min units.
D Commands from the NC program
When the machine is not performing polygonal turning, the machining
program can issue move commands to the polygon axis.
Such commands can be issued in the same way as for ordinary axes.
However, be careful about the angle to rotate through and feedrate.
Assuming the polygon axis is the Y–axis, the polygon axis rotates
through 0.03 degrees by the following command:
V3;
Likewise, the polygon axis rotates through 10.00 degrees by the
following command:
V1.0;
The feedrate unit is also increased by tenfold.
The current position of the polygon in the machine coordinate system
is normalized according to the value specified by parameter No. 7620.
234
Typical values range from 0.000 to 35.999.
Signal
Polygon synchronization
under way signal
PSYN [Classification] Output signal
<F063#7>
[Function] Informs the PMC that the machine is in the polygon turning mode.
[Output condition] The polygon synchronization signal is set to logical “1” by the polygon
turning mode command (G51.2) and stays at “1” during the polygonal
turning mode.
The signal is reset to logical “0” by the polygon turning mode reset
command (G50.2) or a reset. It stays at logical “0” when the machine is
not in the polygonal turning mode.
· Other signals (related to the tool rotation axis)
→ Some signals related to the CNC controlled axis used as the tool
rotation axis may be made ineffective depending on whether the
machine is in the polygonal turning mode.
For these signals, read the note in operator’s manual (for lathe).
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F063 PSYN
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7600 PLZ
[Data type] Bit

PLZ Synchronous axis using G28 command
0: Returns to the reference position in the same sequence as the manual
1: Returns to the reference position by positioning at a rapid traverse.
The synchronous axis returns to the reference position in the same
sequence as the manual reference position return when no
return–to–reference position is performed after the power is turned
on.
7610 Control axis number of tool rotation axis for polygon turning
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, . . . number of control axes
This parameter sets the control axis number of a rotation tool axis used for
polygon turning.
235
7620 Movement of tool rotation axis per revolution

Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit

This parameter sets the movement of a tool rotation axis per revolution.
7621 Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] min–1
[Valid data range] For polygonal turning using servo motors:
0 to 1.2 108
set value of the parameter No. 7620
This parameter sets the upper–limit rotation speed of a tool rotation axis.
The rotation speed of the tool rotation axis is clamped by the set
upper–limit rotation speed during polygon turning. The spindle and tool
rotation axis go out of synchronization when the rotation speed is clamped
(P/S alarm No. 5018).
Alarm and message

217 DUPLICATE G251 (COM- G51.2 (or G251) is further comman-

MANDS) ded in the polygonal turning mode.
Modify the program.
218 NOT FOUND P/Q COM- P or Q is not commanded in the
MAND IN G251 G51.2 (or the G251) block, or the
command value is out of the range.
Modify the program.
219 COMMAND G250/G251 G51.2 (or G251) and G50.2 (or G250)
INDEPENDENTLY are not independent blocks.
220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In the synchronous operation, move-
SYNCHR–MODE ment is commanded by the NC pro-
gram or PMC axis control interface for
the synchronous axis.
221 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Polygon machining synchronous op-
SYNCHR–MODE eration and Cs contouring control or
balance cutting are executed at a
time. Modify the program.
236
Caution
CAUTION
1 Before issuing a G51.2, rotate the spindle. If it is not rotating
when the G51.2 is issued, the program stops to wait for a
one–rotation signal from the position coder on the spindle.
This does not apply to a dry run.
2 A reset releases the polygonal turning mode.
3 Machine a workpiece at the same spindle speed until finish
machining for the workpiece.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL POLYGONAL TURNING
237
6.10
NORMAL DIRECTION
CONTROL
(M SERIES)
General When a tool with a rotation axis (C–axis) is moved in the XY plane during
cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that
the C–axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 6.10).
Programmed tool path
C–axis
C–axis
Tool
Tool
Normal direction (in

which the tool moves)
Fig. 6.10 Sample Movement of the tool
Movement of the tool inserted at the beginning of each block is executed

at the feedrate set in parameter 5481. If dry run mode is on at that time,
the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved along the X–and
Y–axes in rapid traverse (G00) mode, the rapid traverse rate is applied.
If the federate of the C axis exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate of the
C axis specified to parameter No. 1422, the federate of each of the other
axes is clamped to keep the federate of the C axis below the maximum
cutting feedrate of the C axis.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE
238

[Valid data range] ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis
0 0 Linear axis
@ Inch/metric conversion is done.
@ All coordinate values are linear axis type.
rameter No. 3624)

@ Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_
Absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are
rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0 and #2.
@ Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to
parameter No. 3624)
@ Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the
reference position return direction and the move amount does
not exceed one rotation.

@ Machine coordinate values is linear axis type (is not rounded in
0 to 360_).
@ Absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are
rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0 and #2.
rameter No. 3624).
@ Cannot be used with the rotation axes roll over function and the
index table indexing function (M series).
NOTE
The rotation axis must be set to the normal direction control
axis.
5480 Number of the axis for controlling the normal direction
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1 to the maximum control axis number
This parameter sets the control axis number of the axis for controlling the
normal direction.
5481 Rotation feedrate of normal direction control axis
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 deg/min
This parameter sets the feedrate of a normal direction control axis that is
inserted at the start point of a block during normal direction control.
239
5482 Limit value that ignores the rotation insertion of normal direction control axis


The rotation block of a normal direction control axis is not inserted when
the rotation insertion angle calculated during normal direction control
does not exceed this setting value. The ignored rotation angle is added to
the next rotation insertion angle. The block insertion is then judged.
NOTE
1 No rotation block is inserted when 360 or more degrees are
set.
2 If 180 or more degrees are set, a rotation block is inserted
only when the circular interpolation is 180 or more degrees.
5483 Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of
a preceding block


This parameter sets the limit value of movement at the normal direction
angle of a preceding block.
N2
Tool center path For straight line
Block N2 is machined with the tool being normal
N3 to block N1 when the movement of N2 in the
N1 figure on the left does not exceed the set value.
Movement
Programmed path
N2 For arc
Tool center path
Arc N2 is machined with the tool being normal
Programmed path to block N1 when the arc diameter of N2 in the
figure on the left does not exceed the setting
N3
value. A normal direction axis is not controlled
to move in the normal direction according to
the arc movement.
N1
Diameter
240


NOTE
Note
NOTE
Helical interpolation cannot be specified in the normal
direction control mode.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Normal Direction Control
(B–63514EN)
241
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63503EN–1/01
7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND

DECELERATION CONTROL
242
B–63503EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL
7.1 The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed
functions are available:
FEEDRATE
CONTROL 1. Rapid traverse
When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at
a rapid traverse rate set in the CNC (parameter No. 1420).
2. Cutting feed
The tool moves at a programmed cutting feedrate.
Override can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using
the override signal.
7.1.1
Rapid Traverse Rate
General The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse.
G00 IP_ ;
G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse)

IP_ ; Dimension word for the end point
In rapid traverse, the next block is executed after the specified rate
becomes 0 and the servo motor reaches a certain range set by the
parameter (No.1826) (in–position check).
A rapid traverse rate is set for each axis by parameter No. 1420, so no rapid
traverse rate need be programmed.
The following overrides can be applied to a rapid traverse rate with the
rapid traverse override signal:F0, 25, 50, 100%
F0: Allows a fixed feedrate to be set for each axis by parameter No. 1421.
In addition, the use of the 1% rapid traverse override selection signal
enables a rapid traverse override of between 0% and 100% to be applied
in 1% steps.
Signal
Rapid traversing signal

RPDO <F002#1>
[Function] This signal indicates that a move command is executed at rapid traverse.
[Output condition] “1” indicates that an axis starts moving after rapid traverse has been
selected.
“0” indicates that an axis starts moving after a feedrate other than rapid
traverse has been selected. This holds true for both automatic and manual
operation modes.
243
NOTE
1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid
traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference
point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The
manual rapid traverse also includes the rapid traverse in
2 Once rapid traverse has been selected, this signal remains
“1”, including during a stop, until another feedrate has been
selected and movement is started.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 RPDO
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RDR RFO LRP
[Data type] Bit

LRP Positioning (G00)
0 : Positioning is performed with non–linear type positioning so that the
tool moves along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1 : Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool
moves in a straight line.
RFO When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,
0 : The machine tool does not stop moving.
1 : The machine tool stops moving.
RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled

each axis.
244
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

Set the rate of manual rapid traverse for each axis when the rapid traverse
override is 100% for each axis.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rapid traverse
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rapid traverse

245
7.1.2
Cutting Feedrate
Clamp
General A common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis
with parameter No. 1422. If an actual cutting feedrate (with an override
applied) exceeds a specified upper limit, it is clamped to the upper limit.
For M series, the upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate for each
axis with parameter No. 1430.
Parameter


NOTE
parameter No. 1430 instead. (M series)
246
1430
Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis

Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.

A feedrate for each axis is clamped in cutting feed so that it does not
exceed the maximum feedrate specified for each axis.
NOTE
interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute
2 If the setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate
Warning
WARNING
CNC calculation may involve a feedrate error of +2% with
respect to a specified value. However, this is not true for
acceleration/deceleration. To be more specific, this error is
calculated with respect to a measurement on the time the
tool takes to move 500 mm or more during the steady state:
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Cutting Feed
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Cutting Feed

247
7.1.3
Feed Per Minute
General
D Feed per minute (G94) After specifying G94 (G98 for T series) (in the feed per minute mode), the
amount of feed of the tool per minute is to be directly specified by setting
a number after F. G94 (G98 for T series) is a modal code. Once a G94
(G98 for T series) is specified, it is valid until G95 (G99 for T series) (feed
per revolution) is specified. At power–on, the feed per minute mode (feed
per revolution mode for T series) is set.
An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per
minute with the feedrate override signal.
Feed amount per minute
(mm/min or inch/min)
Tool
Workpiece
Table
Fig. 7.1.3 Feed per minute
CAUTION
No override can be used for any commands such as for
threading.
Format
For M series
G94; G code for feed per minute (Group 05)
F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)
For T series
G98; G code for feed per minute (Group 05)
F_; Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)
248
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1403 MIF
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

MIF Cutting feedrates at feed per minute is specified by F commands
0 : In units of 1 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.01 inches/min for
inch machines.
1 : In unit of 0.001 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001
inches/min for inch machines.
NOTE
M series are not equipped with this parameter. Cutting
feedrates are specified by F commands in units of 0.001
mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for
inch machines.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 FCD
[Data type] Bit

FCD When an F command and a G command (G98, G99) for feed per minute or
feed per rotation are specified in the same block, and the G command
(G98, G99) is specified after the F command, the F command is:
0 : Assumed to be specified in the mode (G98 or G99) when the F
command is specified
1 : Assumed to be specified in the mode of the G command (G98 or G99)
of the same block
249
NOTE
1 When FCD = 1:
If the block containing a G command (G98, G99) does not
include an F command, the last F command specified is
assumed to be specified in the G command mode of the
block.
Example 1: N1 G99 ;
N2 Faaaa G98 ;
- Faaaa is assumed to be specified in the G98 mode.
N3 Fbbbb ;
- Fbbbb is assumed to be specified in the G98 mode.
N4 G99 ;
- Fbbbb is assumed to be specified in the G99 mode.
2 In G code system B or C, G98 and G99 function are
specified in G94 and G95.
Alarm and message

011 NO FEEDRATE COM- Feedrate was not commanded to a

MANDED cutting feed or the feedrate was inad-
equate. Modify the program.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Cutting feed
(B–63514EN)

250
7.1.4
Feed Per Revolution/
Manual Feed Per
Revolution
General
D Feed per revolution After specifying G95 (G99 for T series) (in the feed per revolution mode),
the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revolution is to be directly
specified by setting a number after F. G95 (G99 for T series) is a modal
code. Once a G95 is specified, it is valid until G94 (G98 for T series) (feed
per minute) is specified.
An override of between 0 and 254% (in steps of 1%) can be applied to feed
per rotation, using the feedrate override signals (*FV0 to *FV7). (See
Subsection 7.1.7.2.)
[T series]
F Feed amount per spindle revolution
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
Fig. 7.1.4 Feed per revolution
D Manual feed per Jog feedrate can be specified by feed per revolution.
revolution
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV NPC
NPC
[Data type] Bit

JRV Jog feed
0 : Jog feed is performed at feed per minute.
1 : Jog feed is performed at feed per rotation.
NOTE
Specify a feedrate in parameter No. 1423.
NPC Feed per revolution command

0 : The feed per revolution command is ignored when the position coder
is not installed.
1 : The feed per revolution command is accepted even when the position
coder is not installed. (The CNC automatically converts the feed per
revolution command to a feed–per–minute operation.)
251
1423 Feedrate in jog feed for each axis

When JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution) in
T series, specify a feedrate in jog feed (feed per revolution) with an
override of 100% applied to the jog feedrate.
[Valid data range] Millimeter machine 0.01 mm/rev

Inch machine 0.001 inch/rev 0 to 32767
Rotation axis 0.01 deg/rev
Caution
CAUTION
When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation
may occur. The slower the spindle rotates, the more
frequently feedrate fluctuation occurs.
Reference item
(B–63514EN)

252
7.1.5
F1-digit Feed
(M series)
General When a one–digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set
for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. When F0 is
specified, the rapid traverse rate is applied.
The feedrate corresponding to the number currently selected can be
increased or decreased by turning on the switch for changing F1–digit
feedrate on the machine operator’s panel, then by rotating the manual
pulse generator.
The increment/decrement, ∆F, in feedrate per scale of the manual pulse
generator is as follows:
∆ F + Fmax
100X
Fmax : feedrate upper limit for F1–F4 set by parameter 1460, or
feedrate upper limit for F5–F9 set by parameter 1461
X : any value of 1–127 set by parameter 1450
The feedrate set or altered is kept even while the power is off. The current
feedrate is displayed on the screen.
Signal
F1-digit feed select signal

F1D <G016#7>

[Function] Increases or decreases F1-digit speed set by the parameters No. 1451 to
1459 using the manual pulse generator.
Since the manual pulse generator may also be used for axis feeding, signal
F1D (G016#7) designates which function may be used.
[Operation] When the signal is “1”, the F1–digit speed can be increased/decreased
using the manual pulse generator.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G016 F1D
253
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8131 EDC
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

EDC Specifies whether to use external deceleration, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
1450
Change of feedrate for one graduation on the manual pulse
generator during F1 digit feed
[Data type] Byte

Set the constant that determines the change in feedrate as the manual pulse
generator is rotated one graduation during F1-digit feed.
∆ F + Fmaxi (where, i=1 or 2)
100n
In the above equation, set n. That is, the number of revolutions of the
manual pulse generator, required to reach feedrate Fmaxi is obtained.
Fmaxi refers to the upper limit of the feedrate for an F1-digit feed
command, and set it in parameter 1460 or 1461.
Fmax1: Upper limit of the feedrate for F1 to F4 (parameter 1460)
Fmax2: Upper limit of the feedrate for F5 to F9 (parameter 1461)
1451 Feedrate for F1 digit command F1
Input for setting is enabled.
254

Millimeter machine 0.1 mm/min 6 – 150000 6 – 120000
Rotation axis 0.1 deg/min 6 – 150000 6 – 120000
Set Feedrates for F1-digit feed commands F1 to F9.

When an F1-digit feed command is executed, as the feedrate is changed by
turning the manual pulse generator, these parameter values also change
accordingly.
1460 Upper limit of feedrate for the F1–digit feed command (F1 to F4)
1461 Upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command (F5 to F9)

Set the upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command.
As the feedrate increases by turning the manual pulse generator, the
feedrate is clamped when it reaches the upper limit set. If an F1-digit feed
command F1 to F4 is executed, the upper limit is that set in parameter
1460. If an F1-digit command F5 to F9 is executed, the upper limit is that
set in parameter 1461.
Reference item
(B–63514EN)
255
7.1.6
Override
7.1.6.1
Rapid traverse override
General An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the
rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421).
Also, 1% rapid traverse override select signal allows rapid traverse
override every 1% in the range of 0 to 100%.
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
Rapid traverse Override 5m/min
rate10m/min 50%
Fig.7.1.6.1 Rapid traverse override
D Feedrate Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the rapid traverse rate preset
by parameter no.1420 by the override value determined by this signal,
whether in automatic or manual operation (including manual reference
position return).
D F0 rate For F0 value, an absolute value is set by parameter no.1421 within a range
of 0 to rapid traverse rate (for each axis).
D 1% step rapid traverse 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV determines
override selection signal whether rapid traverse override specified with rapid traverse override
signals ROV1 and ROV2 is used or 1% step rapid traverse override is
used.
When signal HROV is 0, override is applied to the rapid traverse rate
using signals ROV1 and ROV2.
When signal HROV is 1, ROV1 and ROV2 are ignored, 1% step rapid
traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 being used to override the
rapid traverse rate.
D PMC axis control These 1% step rapid traverse override signals are also effective to the rapid
traverse rate for the PMC axis. When rapid traverse override is applied
to the PMC axis (using signals ROV1E and ROV2E) with the setting of
the OVE bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 8001) independently of the CNC, the
1% step rapid traverse override signals are ineffective.
256
Signal

signal
ROV1,ROV2
<G014#0, #1>
[Function] These signals override the rapid traverse rate
[Operation] These code signals correspond to the rates as follows:

Override value
ROV2 ROV1
0 0 100 %
0 1 50 %
1 0 25 %
1 1 F0 %
Fo: Set in parameter No. 1421
1% step rapid traverse

override selection signal
HROV <G096 #7>
[Function] Selects whether the rapid traverse override signals or the 1% step rapid
traverse override signals are enabled.
[Operation] When HROV is 1, signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are effective and rapid
traverse override with signals ROV1 and ROV2 is ignored.
When HROV is 0, signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are ineffective, and rapid
traverse override with signals ROV1 and ROV2 is effective.
1% step rapid traverse

override signals
*HROV0 to *HROV6
<G096 #0 to #6>
[Function] Applies override to the rapid traverse rate in the range of 0% to 100% in
steps of 1%.
[Operation] These seven signals give a binary code indicating an override applied to
the rapid traverse rate.
⋅ When a binary code corresponding to an override value of 101% to
127% is specified, the override applied is clamped at 100%.
257
⋅ Signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are inverted signals.

To set an override value of 1%, set signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 to
1111110, which corresponds to a binary code of 0000001.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G014 ROV2 ROV1
G096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
Parameter
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 OVE
[Data type] Bit

OVE Dry run and override signals during axis control by the PMC
0 : Use the same signals as CNC
(1) Feedrate override signal *FV0 to *FV7
(2) Override cancel signal OVC
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2
(4) Dry run signal DRN
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RT
1 : Use dedicated axis control signals by the PMC.
(1) Feedrate override signal *FV0E to *FV7E
(2) Override cancel signal OVCE
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E
(4) Dry run signal DRNE
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RTE
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rapid traverse override
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Rapid traverse override

258
7.1.6.2
Feedrate override
General A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%)

selected by the override dial.This feature is used to check a program.
For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program,
setting the override dial to 50% moves the tool at 50 mm/min.
Feedrate 100 mm/min Tool

(Specified by programmed) Check the machining
by altering the feedrate
Feedrate 50 mm/min after from the value speci-
feedrate override fied in the program.
Workpiece
Fig. 7.1.6.2 Feedrate override
Signal
Feedrate Override signal

*FV0 to *FV7
<G012>
[Function] These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code signals
correspond to override values as follows:
7
Override value = Σ ( 2i×Vi ) %
i=0
Vi=0 when *FVi is “1” and

Vi=1 when *FVi is “0”
These signals have the following weight.
*FV0 : 1% *FV1 : 2%
*FV2 : 4% *FV3 : 8%
*FV4 : 16% *FV5 : 32%
*FV6 : 64% *FV7 : 128 %
When all signals are “0”, they are regarded as overriding 0% in the same
way as when all signals are “1” .
Thus, the override is selectable in steps over a range of 0 to 254%.
259
[Operation] Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the speed specified in cutting

feed in automatic operation mode by the override value selected by this
signal.
The override is regarded as 100%, regardless of this signal, in the
following cases:
⋅Override cancel signal OVC is “1”.
⋅During cutting in tap cycle of canned cycle;
⋅Tapping mode (63); or
⋅Thread cutting is in progress.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RFO
[Data type] Bit

RFO When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,
0 : The machine tool does not stop moving.
1 : The machine tool stops moving.
Reference item
(B–63514EN)

260
7.1.6.3
Override cancel
General The override cancel signal fixes the feedrate override to 100%.
Signal
Override cancel signal

OVC <G006#4>
[Function] Feedrate override is fixed to 100%.
[Operation] When the signal is “1”, the CNC operates as follows:
⋅ Feedrate override is fixed to 100% irrespective of feedrate override
signal.
⋅ Rapid traverse override and spindle speed override are not affected.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G006 OVC
261
7.1.7
Automatic Corner
Override (M series)
General
D Inner corner automatic When G62 is specified, and the tool path with cutter compensation
override applied forms an inner corner, the feedrate is automatically overridden
at both ends of the corner.
There are four types of inner corners (Fig. 7.1.7).
2,xθxθpx178, in Fig. 7.1.7
θp is a value set with parameter No. 1711. When θ is approximately
equal to θp, the inner corner is determined with an error of 0.001,or
less.
1. Straight line–straight line :Tool 2. Straight line–arc

:Programmed path
:Cutter center path
θ θ
3. Arc–straight line 4. Arc–arc
Fig. 7.1.7 Inner corner
WARNING
When the block before a corner is a start–up block, or the
block after a corner includes G41 or G42, the feedrate is not
overridden. The feedrate override function is disabled when
the offset value is 0.
262
D Override value An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value
is valid even for dry run and F1–digit feed specification.
In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows:
F × (inner corner automatic override) × (feedrate override)
D Internal circular cutting For internally offset circular cutting, the feedrate on a programmed path
feedrate change is set to a specified feedrate (F) by specifying the circular cutting feedrate
with respect to F, as indicated below. This function is valid in the cutter
compensation mode, regardless of the G62 code.
F Rc
Rp
Rc : Cutter center path radius
Rp : Programmed radius
It is also valid for the dry run and the F1–digit feed command.
Programmed path
RC Cutter center
RP path
Internal circular cutting feedrate change
If Rc is much smaller than Rp, Rc/Rp80; the tool stops. A minimum

deceleration ratio (MDR) is to be specified with parameter No. 1710.
When Rc/RpxMDR, the feedrate of the tool is (F×MDR).
CAUTION
When internal circular cutting must be performed together
with automatic override for inner corners, the feedrate of the
tool is as follows:
F Rc (inner corner override)
Rp
× (feedrate override)
263
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8131 AOV EDC F1D HPG
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

AOV Specifies whether to use automatic corner override, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
1710 Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) of the inner circular cutting

rate in automatic corner override
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
Set the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) in changing the inner circular
cutting feedrate by automatic corner override.
In circular cutting with an inward offset, the actual feedrate for a specified
feedrate (F) becomes as follows:
Rc Rc: Radius of the path of the cutter’s center

F Rp: Programmed radius
Rp
As the actual feedrate becomes the value obtained from the above
equation, the specified rate F can be achieved on the program path.
Programmed
path
Rc
Rp Cutter center
path
If Rc is too samall in comparison with Rp so that Rc 80, the cutter will

Rp
stop. To prevent this, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is set.
When Rc 80,
Rp
the actural rate becomes as follows:
F × (MDR)
264
1711 Angle (qp) to recognize the inner corner in automatic override
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1 to 179 (standard value = 91)
Set the angle to recognize the inner corner when automatic corner override
is performed for the inner corner
1712 Amount of automatic override for an inner corner
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 100 (standard value = 50)
Set inner corner automatic override value when automatic corner override
is performed.
1713 Distance Le from the starting point in inner corner automatic override
[Data type] Word

Input in mm 0.1 0.01 mm
Input in inches 0.01 0.001 inch

Set distance Le from the starting point in an inner comer for automatic
corner override.
1714 Distance Ls up to the ending point in inner corner automatic override
[Data type] Word

Input in mm 0.1 0.01 mm
Input in inches 0.01 0.001 inch

Set distance Ls up to the end point in an inner corner for automatic corner
override.
If qx qp, the inside of a comer is recognized. (q is set in parameter 1711.)
When an inner corner is recognized, the feedrate is overridden in the range
of Le in the block immediately before the intersection of the corner and Ls
in the next block following the intersection.
Ls and Le are each a straight line connecting the intersection of the corner
and a given point on the path of the cutter’s center.
Ls and Le are set in parameters 1713 and 1714.
265
Ls
Le
θ b Programmed
a path
Cutter center
path
An override is applied from point a to b.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Automatic Override for Inner Corners
(B–63514EN)
266
7.1.8
External Deceleration
General These signals decelerate the feedrate of the control axes down to the speed
which has been set by parameter No. 1426 and 1427.
Signal
External deceleration
signal
*+ED1 to *+ED4<G118>
*–ED1 to *–ED4<G120>

[Function] These signals are used to apply deceleration; provided for each direction
of each control axis; +/* indicates the direction, while the signal number
corresponds to the number of the controlled axis.
* + ED
1 … The 1st axis is decelerated.
2 … The 2nd axis is decelerated.
3 … The 3rd axis is decelerated.
+ … The feed is decelerated in the plus (+) direction.

– … The feed is decelerated in the minus (–) direction.
[Operation] When a signal becomes “0”, the corresponding axis decelerate to stop in
the specified direction.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G118 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
G120 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1
267
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8131 EDC
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

EDC Specifies whether to use external deceleration, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 EDMx EDPx

EDPx External deceleration signal in the positive direction for each axis
0 : Valid only for rapid traverse
1 : Valid for rapid traverse and cutting feed
EDMx External deceleration signal in the negative direction for each axis
0 : Valid only for rapid traverse
1 : Valid for rapid traverse and cutting feed
1426 External deceleration rate of cutting feed
[Data type] Word

Set the external deceleration rate of cutting feed.
1427 External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis

Set the external deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis.
268
7.1.9
Feedrate Clamping by
Arc Radius (M series)
General When an arc is cut at a high speed in circular interpolation, a radial error
exists between the actual tool path and the programmed arc. An
approximation of this error can be obtained from the following
expression:
Y
Dr:Error
Programmed path
Actual path
0 X
1 v2
Dr= (T12+T22) . . . . (Expression 1)
2 r
Dr:Maximum radial error (mm)

v: Feedrate (mm/s)
r: Arc radius (mm)
T1 :Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration of
cutting feed (s)
T2: Time constant of the servo motor (s)
When actual machining is performed, radius r of the arc to be machined

and permissible error Dr are given. Then, maximum allowable feedrate
v (mm/min) is determined from the above expression.
The function for clamping the feedrate by the arc radius automatically
clamps the feedrate of arc cutting to the value set in a parameter. This
function is effective when the specified feedrate may cause the radial error
for an arc with a programmed radius to exceed the permissible degree of
error.
When the permissible error Dr is determined, the maximum permissible

speed V for the arc radius R is obtained from expression 2.
1 V2
Dr= (T12+T22) . . . . . (Expression 2)
2 R
For the arc radius r, the maximum permissible speed v to set the
permissible error to Dr is obtained from expression 1. From expressions
1 and 2, the following expression is obtained:
1 v2 1 V2
(T12+T22) = (T12+T22)
2 r 2 R
N v+ ǸRr V . . . . (Expression 3)
269
When a given arc radius R and the maximum permissible speed V for that
arc radius are set as parameters, the maximum permissible speed v for an
arc with a programmed radius r can be obtained from expression 3. Then,
if a specified feedrate exceeds the speed v, the feedrate is automatically
clamped to the speed v.
The maximum permissible speed v obtained from expression 3 decreases

with the specified arc radius. To prevent the maximum permissible speed
from decreasing excessively, the lower limit imposed on the maximum
permissible speed v can be set in parameter 1732.
Provided the specified feedrate does not exceed the maximum

permissible speed v obtained from expression 3, arc cutting is performed
at the specified feedrate.
D Cutting feed linear When the cutting feed linear acceleration/deceleration function is used,
acceleration/deceleration an approximate error in arc cutting can be obtained from expression 4.
Y
Dr : Error
Programmed
path Dr : Maximum radius error (mm)
v : Feedrate (mm/s)
Actual path r : Arc radius (mm)
T1 : Time constant for cutting
feed linear acceleration/
r deceleration (s)
T2 : Servo motor time constant
0 X
(s)
Dr + ( 1 T1 ) 1 T2 ) Vr
2 2 2
. . . . . . . . (Expression 4)
24 2
As can be seen from expression 4, expression 3 also holds for linear

acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. Therefore, feedrate
clamping by the arc radius is enabled.
D Actual error Expressions 1, 2, and 4 logically denote an approximate error in the CNC.
They do not denote an actual error in machining.
Let the actual error in machining be Dr all. Then, it is expressed as

follows:
Dr all + Dr NC ) Dr machine . . . . . . . . (Expression 5)
Error caused by the machine

Error caused by the acceleration/
deceleration time constant (T1) and
servo motor time constant (T2)
This function controls only the first term on the right side of expression
5. In other words, this function suppresses only the error caused by the
acceleration/deceleration time constant (T1) and servo motor time
constant (T2) to a certain level. This function does not control the error
caused by the machine.
270
Expressions 1, 2, and 4 are approximate expressions. This means that, as

the arc radius becomes smaller, the approximate precision lowers.
Therefore, even when the feedrate is clamped to the maximum
permissible speed v obtained from expression 3, the permissible error
may be exceeded.
Parameter
1730 Maximum feedrate for arc radius R
[Data type] Word

.Increment system Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Set a maximum feedrate for the arc radius set in parameter No. 1731.
1731 Arc radius value corresponding to a maximum feedrate

[Unit of data] Unit IS–B IS–C Unit
Linear axis
0.001 0.0001 mm
(millimeter machine)
Linear axis
0.0001 0.00001 inch
(inch machine)

Set the arc radius corresponding to the maximum feedrate set in parameter
No. 1730.
1732 Minimum value (RV min) for arc radius–based feedrate clamp
[Data type] Word

The arc radius–based feedrate clamping function reduces the maximum

feedrate as the arc radius decreases. When the specified maximum
feedrate is not greater than RV min (minimum value for arc radius–based
feedrate clamping), RV min is used as the maximum feedrate.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Feedrate clamp by circle radius
(B–63514EN)
271
7.1.10
Automatic Corner
Deceleration (M series)
General This function automatically controls the feedrate during corner

machining according to the angle of a corner made by machining blocks
or according to the feedrate difference for each axis.
This function is enabled when G64 (machining) mode is selected and

deceleration of the first of two consecutive cutting feed blocks is
executed.
Feedrate control can be performed according to the angle of a corner made

by machining blocks or according to the feedrate difference for each axis.
The desired method is selected by specifying the corresponding value in
the CSD bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1602).
Feedrate control
according to corner
angle
D Overview If the angle made by blocks A and B is smaller than that specified in parameter
No. 1740 (for the selected plane), and if the feedrates along the first and second
axes on that plane are lower than that specified in parameter No. 1741, the
system executes block B, assuming that no pulses are accumulated.
The figure shows the relationship between feedrate and time when a
corner angle is smaller than the angle specified in the parameter.
At time t, some accumulated pulses remain, as indicated by the shaded

part. The system, however, starts the next block because the feedrate of
the automatic acceleration/deceleration circuit is lower than that specified
in the parameter.
Feedrate
Block A Block B
Feedrate specified in
parameter No. 1741
t
Time
D Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 ACD
[Data type] Bit
272
ACD Function for automatically reducing the feedrate at corners (automatic

corner deceleration function)
0 : The function is not used.
1 : The function is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 CSD
[Data type] Bit

CSD In the function for automatically reducing a feedrate at corners,
0 : Angles are used for controlling the feedrate.
1 : Differences in feedrates are used for controlling the feedrate.
1740 Critical angle subtended by two blocks for automatic corner deceleration

[Unit of data] 0.001 deg
Set a critical angle to be subtended by two blocks for corner deceleration
when the angle–based automatic corner deceleration function is used.
The angle subtended by two blocks is defined as q in the examples shown
below.
Block A (G01)
Block B (G01)
θ θ
Block A (G02)
Block B(G01)
Angle made by two lines
If a circular path is included, the angle
between the tangent of the arc and
another line is considered.
1741 Feedrate for assuming the termination of automatic corner deceleration

(for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)

Set the feedrate for assuming the termination of deceleration in automatic

corner deceleration.
273
Caution
CAUTION
1 The angle of the machining tool path is compared with that
specified in parameter No. 1740 only for the selected plane.
The actual feedrate and that specified in parameter No.
1741 are compared only for the first and second axes of the
selected plane. Even if simultaneous movement is
performed along three or more axes, the feedrates of only
the first and second axes are compared for the selected
plane.
2 The roundness of a corner is determined by the angle and
feedrate specified in parameter Nos. 1740 and 1741,
respectively. If a sharp corner is always required, set a
feedrate of zero and an angle of 180000 (180 degrees).
3 If a G09 (exact stop) command is executed, an exact stop
is performed, irrespective of the angle and feedrate
specified in parameter Nos.1740 and 1741.
4 This function is disabled in single block and dry run mode.
Feedrate control
according to the feedrate
difference for each axis
D Overview If the difference between the programmed feedrates at the end of block A
and at the beginning of block B for each axis exceeds the value specified
in parameter No. 1781, and if the feedrates for all axes are lower than that
specified in parameter No. 1741, the system executes block B, assuming
that no pulses are accumulated.
The figure shows the relationship between the feedrate and time when the
feedrate difference for each axis exceeds the value specified in parameter
No. 1781.
At time t, some accumulated pulses remain, as indicated by the shaded

section. The system, however, starts the next block because the feedrate
of the automatic acceleration/deceleration circuit is lower than that
specified in parameter No. 1741.
Speed
Block A Block B
Speed set by parameter

(No. 1741)
t Time
274
D Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 ACD
[Data type] Bit
ACD Function for automatically reducing the feedrate at corners (automatic

corner deceleration function)
0 : The function is not used.
1 : The function is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 CSD
[Data type] Bit

1741 Feedrate for assuming the termination of automatic corner deceleration

(for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)

Set the feedrate for assuming the termination of deceleration in automatic

corner deceleration.
1781 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference–based automatic corner
deceleration function (for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)

Set a speed difference for the speed difference–based automatic corner

deceleration function when acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
is used.
275
Caution
CAUTION
1 Even during dry run or external deceleration, the feedrate
difference is checked according to the F command in the
program.
2 If the G09 (exact stop) command is executed, an exact stop
is performed, irrespective of the values specified for the
parameters.
3 This function is invalid for the feed per rotation command,
F1–digit feed command, and rigid tapping command, as
well as in single block mode.
4 If the override is changed during operation, the feedrate
difference cannot be checked correctly.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Automatic corner deceleration
(B–63514EN)
7.1.11
Advanced Preview
Control (M series)
General This function is designed for high–speed precise machining. With this
function, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the
servo system which increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be
suppressed.
The tool can then follow specified values accurately and errors in the
machining profile can be reduced.
This function becomes effective when advanced preview control mode is
entered by G08P1 command.
D Available functions In advanced preview control mode, the following functions are available:
(1) Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed

(2) Automatic corner deceleration function
For details on the above functions, see the descriptions of the functions.
276
Signal
advanced preview
control
mode signal
G08MD <F066#0>
[Function] Informs that is in the advanced preview control mode.
[Output condition] The signal is “1” in the following case:
⋅In the advanced preview control mode
The signal is “0” in the following case:
⋅It is not the advanced preview control mode
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F066 G08MD
Parameter
1431 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the advanced preview control mode

Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the advanced
preview control mode.
NOTE
1 To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
2 In a mode other than the advanced preview mode, the
maximum cutting feedrate specified in parameter No. 1422
or No. 1430 is applied and the feedrate is clamped at the
maximum feedrate.
277
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the advanced preview control mode

Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the advanced
preview control mode.
A feedrate for each axis is clamped during cutting feed so that it does not
exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified for each axis.
NOTE
interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute
2 If a setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate
3 In a mode other than the advanced preview mode, the
maximum cutting feedrate specified in parameter No. 1422
or No. 1430 is applied and the feedrate is clamped at the
maximum feedrate.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1602 LS2 CSD FWB
[Data type] Bit

FWB Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
0 : Type A of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
1 : Type B of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
Type A: When a feedrate is to be changed by a command, acceleration/
deceleration starts after the program enters the block in which
the command is specified.
Type B: When a feedrate is to be changed by a command, deceleration
starts and terminates at the block before the block in which the
command is specified.
278
<Example of a deceleration process> <Example of an acceleration process>
Feedrate Specified feedrate Feedrate Specified feedrate

Feedrate after accelera- Feedrate after accelera-
tion/decelerationbefore tion/decelerationbefore
interpolation is applied interpolation is applied
F3 Type A F3
Type B
F2 F2
F1 F1
Time Time
N1 N2 N1 N2

LS2 Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed in the
advanced preview control mode
0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration.
1762 Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting feed

in the advanced preview control mode

[Unit of data] 1 ms
Set an exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting
feed in the advanced preview control mode.
1763 Minimum speed in exponential acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed

in the advanced preview control mode

Set a minimum speed (FL) in exponential acceleration/deceleration for

cutting feed in the advanced preview control mode.
279
1768 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed

in the advanced preview control mode.
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
This parameter sets a time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration for
cutting feed in the advanced preview control mote.
1770 Parameter 1 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation in the advanced preview control mode (maximum machining
speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)

This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/

deceleration before interpolation in the advanced preview control mode.
In this parameter, set the maximum machining speed during linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Set the time used to reach
the maximum machining speed in parameter No. 1771.
Speed
Parameter1
(No. 1770)
Time
Parameter 2 (No. 1771)
CAUTION
When 0 is set in parameter No. 1770 or parameter No. 1771,
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled.
280
1771 Parameter 2 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation in the advanced preview control mode (time used to reach the maxi-
mum machining speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/decel-
eration before interpolation in the advanced preview control mode. In this
parameter, set the time (time constant) used to reach the speed set in pa-
rameter No. 1770.
CAUTION
1 When 0 is set in parameter No. 1770 or parameter No. 1771,
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled.
2 In parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771, set values that satisfy the
following: Parameter No. 1770/Parameter No. 1771
w5
1777 Minimum speed for the automatic corner deceleration function

(for the advanced preview control)

Set a speed at which the number of buffered pulses in deceleration is as-

sumed to be 0 when linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
is used.
1779 Critical angle subtended by two blocks for automatic corner deceleration
(for the advanced preview control)

Set a critical angle to be subtended by two blocks for corner deceleration
when the angle–based automatic corner deceleration function is used.
The angle subtended by two blocks is defined as q in the examples shown
below.
281
Block A (G01)
Block B (G01)
θ
θ
Block A (G02)
Block B (G01)
Angle subtended by two Angle subtended an arc tangent

straight lines and straight line
1780 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration
function (for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
[Data type] Word

Set the speed difference for the speed difference based automatic corner
deceleration function when linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is used.
1783 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration
function (for linear acceleration /deceleration before interpolation)

A separate allowable feedrate difference can be set for each axis. Among
the axes that exceed the specified allowable feedrate difference, the axis
with the greatest ratio of the actual feedrate difference to the allowable
feedrate difference is used as the reference to calculate the reduced
feedrate at the corner.
1784 Speed when overtravel alarm has generated during acceleration/deceleration

beforeinterpolation
[Data type] Word

282
Deceleration is started beforehand to reach the feedrate set in the

parameter when an overtravel alarm is issued (when a limit is reached)
during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. By using
this parameter, the overrun distance that occurs when an overtravel alarm
is output can be reduced.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the control described above
is not exercised.
2 Use type–B linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (by setting bit 0 (FWB) of parameter No. 1602
to 1).
3 The control described above is applicable only to stored
stroke check1.
Parameters for advanced @ Parameters for the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before in-
preview control mode terpolation
and normal mode Parameter No.
Parameter description Advanced

Normal mode preview
control mode
Acceleration/decelerationtype
(A type/B type)
– FWB (1602#0)
Acceleration (Parameter 1) – 1770
Acceleration (Parameter 2) – 1771
Speed when overtravel alarm has gener-

ated
– 1784
@ Parameters for automatic corner deceleration

Parameter No.
Parameter description Advanced

Normal mode preview
control mode
Automatic corner deceleration according to
the corner angle or the speed difference
CSD (1602#4) CSD (1602#4)
Minimum speed
(according to the corner angle)
1741 1777
Critical angle
(according to the corner angle)
1740 1779
Allowable speed difference for all axes

(according to speed difference)
– 1780
Allowable speed difference for each axis

(according to speed difference)
1781 1783
283
Alarm and message

109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was specified af-
ter P in the G08 code, or no value was spe-
cified.
Note
NOTE
In the advanced preview control mode, the functions listed
below cannot be specified. To specify these functions,
cancel the advanced preview control mode, specify the
desired function, then set advanced preview control mode
again.
⋅Rigid tapping function
⋅Cs contouring control function
⋅Feed per revolution
⋅One–digit F code feed
⋅Cylindrical interpolation function
⋅Involute interpolation function
⋅Exponential interpolation
⋅Normal direction control
⋅Polar coordinate command
⋅Index table indexing
⋅Threading and synchronous cutting
⋅Handle interruption
⋅Program restart
⋅Simple synchronous control
⋅Feed stop
⋅High–speed skip function
⋅Constant surface speed control
⋅Interrupt type custom macro
⋅Small–hole peck drilling cycle
⋅Automatic tool length measurement
⋅Skip cutting
⋅G28 (low–speed reference position return)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Look–ahead control (G08)
(B–63514EN)
284
7.1.12
Look–ahead control
(Multiple blocks are
read in advance) (M
series)
General This function is designed for high–speed high–precision machining. The

use of this function enables the suppression of the delay in the servo
system and the delay in acceleration/deceleration which increases as the
feedrate increases, therefore reducing the machining profile error.
This function enables look–ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before
the interpolation of multiple blocks. This results in smooth
acceleration/deceleration over many blocks, as well as high–speed
machining.
In Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are read in advance) mode, the
following functions are effective:
(1) Look–ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
(2) Automatic corner deceleration
(3) Feedrate clamping by acceleration
(4) Feedrate clamping by arc radius
(5) Block overlap (up to 5 blocks)
(6) Look–ahead feed–forward
For details of the above functions, see the relevant explanations.
Specifications Axis control
Name Description
Controlled axes 3 to 4
Simultaneously controlled Up to 4
axes
Axis name Basic three axes: Always X, Y, and Z
Other axes: U, V, W, A, B, or C
Least input increment 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, 0.0001 inch
Input increment 1/10 0.0001 mm, 0.0001 deg, 0.00001 inch
Interpolation function f : Can be programmed

: Cannot be programmed
Name Description
Positioning (G00) f (Positioning of linear interpolation type)
Single direction positioning

(G60)
Exact stop (G09) f
Exact stop mode (G61) f
Tapping mode (G63)
285
Name Description
Automatic corner override

(G62)
Linear interpolation (G01) f
Circular interpolation f (Multiple quadrants allowed)

(G02, G03)
Helical interpolation f (Circular interpolation + Up to two axes for
(G02, G03) linear interpolation)
A desired feedrate must be specified by also
taking movement along the helical axis into
consideration.
Dwell (G04) f (For a specified number of seconds or revo-
lutions)
Cylindrical interpolation
(G07.1)
Thread cutting/synchronous
feed (G33)
Skip function (G31) f *
High–speed skip function f *

(G31)
Multistage skip function *
(G31 Px)
Reference position return f When the reference position is not estab-
(G28) lished, P/S alarm No. 090 is issued.
*
Reference position return f *
check (G27)
2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference f *
position return (G30)
Canned cycle (G73 to G89) f *
Rigid tapping
Return to initial point in f *
canned cycle (G98)/Return to
R point in canned cycle (G99)
Normal direction control
(G41.1, G42.1)
Index table indexing
Absolute command (G90)/ f
Incremental command (G91)
286
Feed functions f : Can be programmed

Name Description
Rapid traverse rate Up to 240 m/min (0.01 mm)

Up to 100 m/min (0.0001 mm)
Rapid traverse rate override F0, 25, 50, 100 %
Rapid traverse rate override 0% to 100 %
in units of 1%
Feed per minute (G94) f
Feed per rotation (G95)

Rapid traverse bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration
Cutting feed linear accelera- f
tion/deceleration before inter-
polation
Feedrate override 0% to 254%
Feed by F command with
one digit
Inverse time feed (G93)
External deceleration f
Tool compensation functions f : Can be programmed

Name Description
Cutter compensation C f
(G40, G41, G42)
Tool length compensation f
(G43, G44, G49)
Program input f : Can be programmed

Name Description
Plane selection f
(G17, G18, G19)
Local coordinate system f *
(G52)
Workpiece coordinate system f *
(G54 to G59) (G54.1Pxx)
(G92)
preset (G92.1)
Interrupt–type custom macro
287
Others f : Can be programmed

Name Description
Cycle start/Feed hold f
Dry run f
Single block f
Interlock f
Machine lock f When an axis machine lock signal (MLK1 to

MLK4) is turned on or off, acceleration/de-
celeration is not performed on the axis held
under machine lock.
Control–in/control–out com- f
mand ( )
Optional block skip command f
(/n: n is a number)
Miscellaneous function f Only the function code signal and function
(Mxxxx) strobe signal are output.
Spindle function (Sxxxx) f
Tool function (Txxxx) f Only the function code signal and function
strobe signal are output.
Second auxiliary function f Only the function code signal and function
(Bxxxx) strobe signal are output.
Simple synchronous control f Synchronous control cannot be enabled or

disabled.
Program restart
Tool life management
Macro executor
(execution macro)
MDI operation When G05.1 Q1 is specified in MDI mode,
P/S alarm No. 5113 is issued. The operation
mode cannot be switched to MDI mode in
Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are
read in advance) mode.
Manual intervention Upon a restart after manual intervention, the
position at which manual intervention oc-
curred must be restored. If the position is not
restored, P/S alarm No. 5114 is issued.
Those functions marked with an asterisk (*) do not perform Look–ahead

control of multiple blocks.
Conditions for entering Before G05.1 Q1, the following modal codes must be specified. If this
Look–ahead control condition is not satisfied, P/S alarm No. 5111 will be issued.
(Multiple blocks are read G code Description
in advance)
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation
G02 Circular interpolation (CW)
G03 Circular interpolation (CCW)
G15 Polar coordinate command cancel
288
G code Description
G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off

G40 Cutter compensation cancel
G40.1 Normal direction control cancel mode
G49 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 Scaling cancel
G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
G64 Cutting mode
G67 Macro modal call cancel
G69 Coordinate rotation cancel
G80 Canned cycle cancel
G94 Feed per minute
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
Advanced preview linear For a cutting feed command in feed per minute mode, Look–ahead control
acceleration/deceleration of multiple blocks can be performed, and linear acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation can be performed for a programmed feedrate (before interpolation).
When acceleration/deceleration is performed after interpolation,
acceleration/deceleration is performed for the data resulting from
interpolation, which changes the interpolation data. For
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, on the other hand,
acceleration/deceleration is performed for the feedrate data before
interpolation, so that the interpolation data is not changed by
acceleration/deceleration. Therefore, interpolation data can always be
aligned with a specified line or curve to eliminate any machining profile
errors caused by a delay in acceleration/deceleration.
Linear acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
Pulse
Specified
distribution Acceleration/
Calculation feedrate Calculation of Servo
deceleration af-
of feedrate interpolation ter interpolation control
Linear interpolation,
circular interpolation, etc.
289
(Example of deceleration)
To execute a block at a specified feedrate, the feedrate is reduced from that
of the previous block.
Feedrate
Point 1 Specified feedrate
Feedrate resulting
F3
from acceleration/
deceleration before
Point 2 interpolation
F2
F1
Time
N1 N2
To reduce the feedrate from F3 to F2, deceleration must be started at Point

1.
To decrease the feedrate from F2 to F1, deceleration must be started at
Point 2.
Since Look–ahead control for multiple blocks is performed, deceleration
over multiple blocks can be performed.
(Example of acceleration)
To execute a block at a specified feedrate, the feedrate is increased.
Feedrate
Specified feedrate
F3 Feedrate resulting
from acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
F2
F1
Time
N1 N2
290
Automatic corner When there are axes for which the difference in feedrate between blocks
deceleration exceeds the allowable feedrate difference set in parameter 1783, the
automatic corner deceleration function calculates the feedrate at a corner
and performs deceleration so that the calculated feedrate is attained at the
junction of the blocks. The feedrate at the corner is calculated as
explained below, where the ratio of the difference in the actual feedrate
to the allowable feedrate difference is obtained for each axis, after which
the largest of these ratios is used as a reference.
The change in feedrate on each axis (Vx, Vy, ...) when the tool moves at
a specified feedrate F is compared with the value set in parameter 1783
(Vprm–x, Vprm–y, ...). If the change in the feedrate for any axis exceeds
the parameter–set value, the following is obtained first:
Vx Vy
Rmax = max ,...
Vprm–x , Vprm–y
Then, the feedrate (Fc) is obtained from the following expression, after
which corner deceleration is performed:
1
Fc = F
Rmax
For example, suppose that the direction of the tool movement changes
through 90 degrees from X–axis movement to Y–axis movement, and
also suppose that the specified feedrate is 1000 mm/min, and that the
allowable feedrate difference (parameter 1783) is set to 500 mm/min.
Then, deceleration is performed as shown in the figure below.
291
N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ;

N2 Y100. ;
N2
Tool path when tool movement
is not decelerated at the corner
Tool path when tool movement

is decelerated at the corner
Feedrate on the X–axis N1

Feedrate
When deceleration is not

performed at the corner
F1000
When deceleration is per-
formed at the corner
F500
N1 Time
Feedrate on the Y–axis
Feedrate
F1000
F500
N2 Time
Tangent direction feedrate
Feedrate
F1000
F500
N1 N2 Time
292
Feedrate clamping by When a curve is made up of a series of short straight lines as shown in the
acceleration figure below, the difference in feedrate on each axis at each corner is not
large. Therefore, deceleration by feedrate difference is not effective.
Small feedrate differences occur successively, however, so a large
acceleration will be generated on each axis as a whole.
In such cases, deceleration is performed to reduce the machining error and

the stress imposed on the machine, both of which are caused by excessive
acceleration. The target feedrate to be reached by deceleration is set so
that the acceleration on each axis, as obtained from the expression below,
does not exceed the allowable acceleration set for all axes.
The allowable acceleration is set using the maximum cutting feedrate

(parameter 1432) and the time required to reach the maximum cutting
feedrate (parameter 1785).
Acceleration on an axis =
Difference in feedrate on the axis at a corner
Amount of travel in Amount of travel
the previous block in the next block
max
F , F
A target feedrate to be reached by deceleration is obtained for each corner.

The actual feedrate is the feedrate to be reached by deceleration, as
obtained at the start point of a block, or the feedrate to be reached by
deceleration as obtained at the end point of the block, whichever is the
lower.
Example:
In the following example, too great an acceleration/deceleration (the
inclination of the dotted lines in the feedrate graphs) is observed
between N2 and N4 and between N6 and N8, so deceleration is
performed in these areas.
N8
N7
N9
N6
N5
N1 N4
N2 N3
293
N1 N2 N3 N1 N2 N3
Feedrate clamping by This function can suppress acceleration in an arc machining block to an
arc radius allowable level by clamping the feedrate. Based on the arc radius R and
the maximum allowable feedrate V for that arc radius (which are set in
parameters), this function calculates the maximum allowable feedrate v
for an arc with a programmed radius r, as shown below. If the specified
feedrate exceeds feedrate V, the feedrate can be clamped to feedrate v
automatically.
V2
Maximum allowable acceleration =
R
R : Arc radius, V : Feedrate for arc radius R
Then, the maximum allowable feedrate v for an arc with radius r is

obtained from the following expression:
v + ǸrńR V
As the specified arc radius becomes smaller, the maximum allowable
feedrate v falls. To prevent the maximum allowable feedrate from
becoming too small, the lower limit for feedrate clamping based on the
arc radius can be set in parameter 1732. If the maximum allowable
feedrate is less than the value set in parameter 1732, the parameter–set
value can be used as the maximum allowable feedrate v.
294
Rapid traverse In rapid traverse, acceleration/deceleration is performed using linear

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, and tool movement is
performed by positioning based on linear interpolation. The tool
movement feedrate is obtained from the rapid traverse rate for each axis
which is set in parameter 1420. The acceleration in
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is obtained from the rapid
traverse rate for each axis which is set in parameter 1420 and the linear
acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis in rapid traverse
which is set in parameter 1620. They are obtained as follows:
(1) Tool movement feedrate
For each axis along which the tool moves, calculation is performed
using the following expression. Then, from among the calculated
values, the smallest value is used as the tool movement feedrate.
Rapid traverse rate on an axis (parameter 1420)
Amount of travel for a block
Amount of travel along an axis
(2) Acceleration in linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
For each axis along which the tool moves, calculation is performed
using the following expression. Then, from among the calculated
values, the smallest value is used as the acceleration in linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation during movement.
Rapid traverse rate on an axis (parameter 1420)
Time constant for an axis (parameter 1620)
Amount of travel for a block
Amount of travel along an axis
NOTE
Any overlap of rapid traverse blocks is invalid.
Signal
(Multiple blocks are read
in advance) mode signal
SHPC <F062#0>
[Function] This signal indicates that the system is in Look–ahead control (Multiple
blocks are read in advance) mode.
D The system is in Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are read in
advance) mode.
D The system is in other than Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are
295
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F602 SHPC
Parameter
D Parameters related to
linear acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
1770 Maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration
beforeinterpolation

Valid data range
IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.01 inch/min 6 to 9600 6 to 4800
This parameter sets the maximum machining feedrate for linear

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. (Parameter 1 for setting
the acceleration in linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
1771 Time required to reach the maximum machining feedrate during linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (time constant)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
This parameter sets the time (time constant) required to reach the feedrate
set in parameter 1. (Parameter 2 for setting the acceleration in linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
NOTE
1 When parameter 1770 or 1771 is set to 0, linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not
performed.
2 Set these parameters so that parameter 1770/parameter
1771 = 5 or more.
296
Feedrate
(mm/min)
Parameter
1770
Parameter 1771 Time (ms)
1784 Speed when an overtravel alarm is issued during linear acceleration/deceleration

beforeinterpolation
[Data type] Word

Valid data range
IS–B IS–C
This parameter sets the speed to be reached when an overtravel alarm is

issued during linear acceleration/deceleration during interpolation. If an
overtravel alarm is issued during linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation, the movement is decelerated and halted after the issue of the
alarm. Therefore, the tool overruns by an amount equal to the distance
traveled during deceleration. The overrun varies depending on the
feedrate observed when the overtravel alarm is issued. The overrun can
be reduced by performing deceleration to the speed set in parameter 1784
in advance when an overtravel alarm is issued. In this case, deceleration
is performed so that the feedrate at the instant when the overtravel alarm
is issued does not exceed the parameter–set speed. So, deceleration may
be completed earlier. Upon the completion of deceleration, the feedrate
is set to the parameter–set speed.
NOTE
This parameter is invalid for rapid traverse blocks.
If the following condition is satisfied, deceleration is performed:
Distance required for de-

Distance to the celerating the current speed
stored stroke limit < (tangent direction feedrate)
on an axis to the speed set in parame-
ter 1784
The overrun is expressed as follows:
2
FOT T
FIX + 1.5
F 8 F
Overrun distance x
1875 T
297
F : Maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation (parameter 1770)
T : Time required to reach the maximum machining feedrate during linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter 1771)
FOT : Speed when an overtravel alarm is issued during linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter 1784)
FIX : Any fractional part is truncated.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set, the above control is not performed.
2 When stroke check is invalid, the above control is also
invalid.
3 The above control is valid only for stored stroke check 1.
D Parameter related to
automatic corner
deceleration
1783 Allowable feedrate difference for each axis in the corner deceleration function by
feedrate difference (for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)

Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
This parameter sets the allowable difference in feedrate on each axis in the
automatic corner deceleration function by the difference in feedrate when
liner acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
D Parameter related to
feedrate clamping by
acceleration
1785 Parameter for determining the allowable acceleration in feedrate clamping
by acceleration

[Unit of data] 1 ms
This parameter is used to set the time required to reach the maximum
cutting feedrate and determine the allowable acceleration when feedrate
clamping by acceleration is performed.
The allowable acceleration is determined from the maximum cutting

feedrate and the data set in this parameter. Parameter 1432 (maximum
cutting feedrate in Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are read in
advance mode) is used as the maximum cutting feedrate.
298
Feedrate
(mm/min)
Allowable acceleration
Parameter
1432
Parameter 1785 Time (ms)
D Parameters related to
feedrate clamping by arc
radius
1731 Arc radius for the upper limit imposed on feedrate


This parameter sets the arc radius for the upper limit imposed on the
feedrate set in parameter 1730.
1730 Upper limit imposed on feedrate for arc radius R
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the upper limit imposed on the feed rate for the arc
radius set in parameter 1731.
(Example)
Specified
feedrate
N1 a
N2
b
r
a b
N3
N1 N2 N3 Time
299
1732 Lower limit RVmin for feedrate clamping by arc radius
[Data type] Word

When the function for clamping the feedrate by arc radius is used, the
upper limit imposed on the feedrate falls with the arc radius. If the upper
limit imposed on the feedrate is less than the lower limit imposed on the
feedrate clamping RVmin, the upper limit imposed on the feedrate is set as
RVmin.
D Other parameters
1422 Upper limit imposed on cutting feedrate in Look–ahead control
(Multiple blocks are read in advance)

This parameter is used to set the upper limit on the cutting feedrate in
Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are read in advance) mode.
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are read in ad-
vance) mode (for each axis)

This parameter sets the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in
Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are read in advance) mode.
300
D Parameter numbers in (Parameters related to linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)

standard mode,
Look–ahead control Parameter Parameter No.
(Multiple blocks are read Standard Look–ahead Look–ahead
in advance) mode mode control (One control (Mul-
block is read tiple blocks
in advance) are read in
advance)
Acceleration/deceleration – FWB/1602#0 None
type (type A/B)
Parameter 1 for setting accel- – 1770
eration
Parameter 2 for setting accel- – 1771
eration
Speed when overtravel alarm – 1784
is issued
(Parameters related to automatic corner deceleration)
Parameter Parameter No.

Standard Look–ahead Look–ahead
mode control (One control (Mul-
advance)
Method for determining auto- CSD/1602#4 None
matic corner deceleration
(angle/feedrate difference)
Lower limit imposed on fee- 1741 1777 None
drate
(control based on angle)
Angle to be determined 1740 1779 None
(control based on angle)
Allowable feedrate difference – 1780 None
for all axes (control based on
feedrate difference)
Allowable feedrate difference 1781 1783
for each axis (control based
on feedrate difference)
(Parameters related to feedrate clamping by arc radius)
Parameter Parameter No.

Standard Look–ahead Look–ahead
mode control (One control (Mul-
advance)
Arc radius for the upper limit 1731
of feedrate
Upper limit imposed on fee- 1730
drate for arc radius R
Lower limit imposed on clamp 1732
feedrate
301
Alarm and message

5110 IMPROPER G–CODE An invalid G code is specified in

(G05.1 G1 MODE) Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks
are read in advance) mode.
A command is specified for the index
table indexing axis in simple high–
precision contour control mode.
5111 IMPROPER MODAL G– When Look–ahead control (Multiple
CODE (G05.1 G1) blocks are read in advance) mode is
specified, a G code that cannot be
used is placed in the model state.
5112 G08 CAN NOT BE COM- An Look–ahead control command
MANDED (G05.1 G1) (G08) is specified in Look–ahead con-
trol (Multiple blocks are read in ad-
vance) mode.
5113 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks
MODE (G05.1) (M series) are read in advance) (G05.1) is speci-
fied in MDI mode.
5114 NOT STOP POSITION Upon a restart after manual interven-
(G05.1 Q1) tion, the coordinates at which manual
intervention was performed are not
restored.
5156 SPL: ERROR The controlled axis selection signal
(MBL APC) (PMC axis control) changes in Look–
ahead control (Multiple blocks are
The simple synchronous axis selec-
tion signal changes in Look–ahead
control (Multiple blocks are read in ad-
vance) mode.
302
Caution
CAUTION
1 When the total distance for the blocks under Look–ahead
control is equal to or less than the deceleration distance
from the current feedrate, deceleration starts. When
Look–ahead control has proceeded upon the completion of
deceleration, and the total distance for the blocks
increases,acceleration starts. Especially, when a series of
blocks containing very small amounts of travel are specified,
deceleration and acceleration may be alternated, which
prevents the feedrate from becoming constant. In such a
case, specify a lower feedrate.
2 When the dry run signal is inverted from 0 to 1 or from 1 to
0 during movement along an axis, the speed of movement
is increased or reduced to a specified speed without first
being reduced to zero.
3 When a no–movement block or a one–shot G code such as
G04 is encountered in Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks
are read in advance) mode, the movement is decelerated
and halted in the preceding block.
Note
NOTE
1 As acceleration after interpolation, use linear acceleration.
Exponential acceleration/deceleration cannot be used.
2 Upon switching to Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are
read in advance) mode, all manual handle interrupts are
ignored.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Look–ahead control (Multiple blocks are read in advance)
(B–63514EN)
303
7.2
ACCELERATION/
DECELERATION
CONTROL
7.2.1
Automatic
Acceleration/
Deceleration
General
D Automatic acceleration/ To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically

deceleration applied when the tool starts and ends its movement (Fig. 7.2.1).
Rapid traverse rate
FR FR : Rapid traverse rate
T R : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for rapid
traverse rate
0 Time
TR TR
Cutting feedrate
FC FC : Cutting feedrate
T C : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a cutting
feedrate
0 Time
TC TC
Fig. 7.2.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration (example)
Acceleration and deceleration is performed when starting and ending

movement, resulting in smooth start and stop.
Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feedrate
changes, so change in speed is also smoothly done.
It is not necessary to take acceleration/deceleration into consideration
when programming.
Rapid traverse:Linear acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is
set by parameter 1620)
304
Cutting feed: Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per

axis is set by parameter 1622)
Jog feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per
axis is set by parameter 1624)
Rate after interpolation Rate after acceleration/deceleration
Servo motor
Acceleration/
deceleraton Servo control
Pulse control
CNC distribution
command (interpolation) Acceleraton/
deceleration Servo control
control
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 JGLx CTLx

CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run
0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied
(depending on which is used for cutting feed).
1620 Time constant used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped

acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
(1) When the bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse is
provided, set this parameter to time constant T1 used in bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, and set parameter No.1621
to time constant T2.
not provided, set this parameter to time constant used in linear
acceleration/deceleration, and set parameter No.1621 to “0”.
305
1621 Time constant t T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse

for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Specify time constant T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration
in rapid traverse for each axis.
Set to 0, when linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
1622 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/

deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (For exponential acceleration / deceleration)
0 to 512 (For linear acceleration / deceleration after interpolation
linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each
axis. Except for special applications, the same time constant must be set
for all axes in this parameter. If the time constants set for the axes differ
from each other, proper straight lines and arcs cannot be obtained.
1623 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis


cutting feed for each axis. Except for special applications, this parameter
must be set to 0 for all axes. If a value other than 0 is specified, proper
straight lines and arcs cannot be obtained.
1624 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear

acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis.

[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (For exponential acceleration / deceleration)
0 to 512 (For linear acceleration / deceleration after interpolation)
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration, or
306
axis.
The type of acceleration/deceleration is determined depending on the
setting in parameter No. 1610.
1625 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis


jog feed for each axis.
1626 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration

in the thread cutting cycle for each axis
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in the
thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each axis.
1627 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting

cycle for each axis


the thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each
axis.
307
1722 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks

[Unit of data] %
This parameter is used when rapid traverse blocks are arranged
successively, or when a rapid traverse block is followed by a block that
does not cause movement. When the feedrate for each axis of a block is
reduced to the ratio set in this parameter, the execution of the next block is
started.
NOTE
The parameter No. 1722 is effective when parameter No.
1601 #4 (RTO) is set to 1.
[Example]
Fh: Rapid traverse feedrate
X–axis feedrate α: Setting of parameter No. 1722 (feedrate reduction ratio)
Fd: Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: = Fh×α/ 100
N1 G00 X- - ; N2 G00 X- - ;
When the function of overlap-

ping rapid traverse blocks is
Fh enabled
When the function of overlap-
ping rapid traverse blocks is
Fd disabled
t
308
7.2.2
Rapid Traverse
Bell–shaped
Acceleration/
Deceleration
General Rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration smoothly increases
or decreases the rapid traverse rate, reducing the stress and strain imposed
on the machine due to the variation in the acceleration with changes in the
feedrate. As the time constant for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration
can be smaller than that for linear acceleration/deceleration, the time
needed for acceleration/deceleration can be reduced.
<Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration> <Rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration>
Feedrate Feedrate
0
Time Time
Acceleration Acceleration
0
Time Time
This function is enabled when the time constants for rapid traverse
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration T1 and T2 are specified in
parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621, respectively.
309
<Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration>
Speed
Rapid traverse rate
Time T: Time constant for linear

T acceleration/deceleration
T
<Rapid traverse bell shaped acceleration/deceleration>
Speed
Rapid
traverse rate T1: Set a time constant used for lin-
ear acceleration/deceleration
T2: Set a time for rounding.
Total time=T1 + T2
Time for linear=T1 – T2
Time for rounding part=T2
TIme
T2/2 T1 T2/2
T2
Set a time when rapid traverse override is 100% . When it is less than
100%, the total time is reduced (constant acceleration method).
Value of T1 is determined from motor torque. Set a value of T2 to 24 ms
or 32 ms.
Parameter
1620 Time constant used in linear acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
provided, set this parameter to time constant T1 used in bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, and set parameter No.1621
to time constant T2.
not provided, set this parameter to time constant used in linear
acceleration/deceleration, and set parameter No.1621 to “0”.
310
1621 Time constant t T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration

in rapid traverse for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Specify time constant T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration
in rapid traverse for each axis.
Set to 0, when linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 7.2.1 AutomaticAcceleration/Deceleration
(This manual)
311
7.2.3
Linear Acceleration/
Deceleration after
Cutting Feed
Interpolation
General If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is

enabled (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, CTL), acceleration/deceleration is
performed as follows:
Cutting feed: Linear acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration
time)
Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant for
each axis in parameter No. 1622.
Jog feed: Exponential or linear acceleration/deceleration (constant
acceleration time)
Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant for
each axis in parameter No. 1624.
If an identical time constant is specified, linear acceleration/deceleration
can halve the delay relative to the programmed time, in comparison with
exponential acceleration/deceleration, thus reducing the time needed for
acceleration and deceleration. If circular interpolation is performed,
especially when high–speed cutting is being performed, the actual tool
path created after acceleration/deceleration will deviate from the
programmed arc in the radial direction. This deviation can also be
reduced, in comparison with exponential acceleration/deceleration, by
applying linear acceleration/deceleration.
Feedrate Feedrate
Acceleration/
⇒ deceleration ⇒
circuit
Time Time
t t
Feedrate Feedrate
Acceleration/
⇒ deceleration ⇒
circuit
Time Time
t t
t : Time
constant
312
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is

enabled when the CTL (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610) set to 1. If
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed
is also enabled, bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration is executed. The
time constants for cutting feed and jog feed for each axis are specified in
parameter Nos. 1622 and 1624 respectively, in the same way as for
exponential acceleration/deceleration. The values specified for the FL
feedrate for cutting feed (parameter No. 1623) and the FL feedrate for jog
feed (parameter No. 1625) are ignored (always assumed to be 0).
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 JGLx CTLx

CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied
(depending on which is used in cutting feed).

deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (For exponential acceleration/deceleration)
0 to 512 (For linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each
axis. Except for special applications, the same time constant must be set
for all axes in this parameter. If the time constants set for the axes differ
from each other, proper straight lines and arcs cannot be obtained.
deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis.

[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (For exponential acceleration/deceleration)
0 to 512 (For linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
axis.
The type of acceleration/deceleration is determined depending on the
setting in parameter No. 1610.
313
Note
NOTE
1 If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for
cutting feed is enabled, linear acceleration/deceleration is
executed during cutting feed and during a dry run. Linear
acceleration/deceleration can also be executed during jog
feed if the JGL bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1610) is specified
accordingly.
2 In circular interpolation especially when circular cutting is
executed at high speed, the actual path of the accelerated
or decelerated tool deviates from the specified arc in the
direction of the radius.
Y
Dr Specified path
Dr :Maximum radius error (mm)
Actual path
v :Feedrate (mm/s)
r :Radius of arc (mm)
T1 :Acceleration/deceleration time constant (s)
r T2 :Time constant of servo loop (s)
(Reciprocal of position loop gain)
X
The maximum error in the radial direction (Dr) can be

approximated by the following expressions:
1 T 2+  v2
1 T 2)
Dr=( 1 2 …Exponential acceleration/deceleration
2 2 r
1 1 v2
Dr=( T12+  T22 )  …Linear acceleration/deceleration or bell
24 2 r
shaped acceleration /deceleration
after interpolation
If the error caused by the time constant of the servo loop is

excluded, the error cause by linear acceleration/
deceleration or bell shaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is 1/12 of that caused by exponential
acceleration/deceleration.
3 Linear acceleration/deceleration can be executed both for
cutting feed and for jog feed along a PMC axis.
Acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed is executed even
if acceleration/deceleration for jog feed is selected. In jog
feed along the PMC axis, the time constant for cutting feed
is used instead of that for jog feed.
314
7.2.4
Linear Acceleration/
Deceleration before
Cutting Feed
Interpolation
(Look–ahead Control)
General A specified cutting feedrate can be linearly increased or decreased before

interpolation. This function eliminates machining profile errors caused
by the delay occurring in acceleration or deceleration. The time required
for acceleration or deceleration by this function is significantly shorter
than that by the function of exponential acceleration/deceleration.
CNC command Servo motor
Move data Pulse Servo control

distribution
Feedrate (interpolation) Servo control
F Linear accel-
eration/decel-
Feedrate eration before
command interpolation
F: Value of feedrate command
Speed
F
Time
The function of linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in-

creases or decreases the feedrate specified in the tangential direction.
If the feedrate command is changed
D Type A
Acceleration/deceleration is started in the block in which a new feedrate
command is specified.
D Type B (Set the FWB bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 1602) to 1.)
Deceleration: Deceleration is started in a prior block such that decelera-
tion is completed before the beginning of the block in
which a new feedrate command is specified.
Acceleration: Acceleration is started in the block in which a new fee-
drate command is specified.
315
<Deceleration Example> <Acceleration Exapmle>
Command feedrate Command feedrate

Feedrate Feedrate
Feedrate after accel- Feedrate after accel-
eration/deceleration eration/deceleration
before interpolation before interpolation
F3 F3
Point P A type
B type
F2 F2
F1 Time F1 Time
N1 N2 N1 N2
With B type, to decelerate from F3 to F2,
deceleration must start with point P.
If an overtravel alarm occurs during linear acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation, the movement is decelerated and stopped. As
deceleration and stop are performed after the alarm occurs, the tool will
overrun by an amount equal to the distance required for the deceleration.
The actual overrun depends on the feedrate when the overtravel alarm
occurs.
The distance can be minimized by starting deceleration in advance, such

that the feedrate has fallen to the value specified in parameter No. 1784
when an overtravel alarm occurs. Because deceleration is executed such
that the feedrate at the time an overtravel alarm occurs does not exceed
the feedrate specified in the corresponding parameter, deceleration may
be completed earlier. After deceleration is completed, the feedrate
specified in the parameter is maintained.
Deceleration is performed when the following condition is
satisfied:
Distance needed to reduce the cur-
Distance to stored stroke limit 1 rent feedrate (tangential feedrate)
for each axis < to that specified in parameter No.
1784
The overrun is calculated as follows:
[FIX ( FOT T) ) 1.5] 2 F

F 8 T
OverrunĄ x
1875
F : Maximum cutting feedrate in linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (parameter No. 1770)
T : Time needed to attain the maximum cutting feedrate in linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1771)
316
FOT: Feedrate at the time an overtravel alarm occurs during linear accel-
eration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1784)
FIX: Any fractional part is truncated.
Note
NOTE
1 If a block without a move command is found during
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the
movement is decelerated and temporarily stopped in the
previous block.
2 If a one–shot G code is specified during acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation, the movement is
decelerated and temporarily stopped in the previous block.
3 If an M, S, or T code is specified in a block containing a move
command during acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation, the movement is decelerated and temporarily
stopped in that block.
4 Even during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
the block of G31 (skip function) is not subjected to
5 If the machine lock signal (MLK1 to MLK4) for an axis is set
on or off during acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation, the axis for which machine lock is performed
is not subjected to acceleration/deceleration.
6 During acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
automatic corner override is enabled only when the internal
circular cutting feedrate is changed.
7 Even during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation can be
executed. So that acceleration/deceleration is executed
only before interpolation, set the time constant for
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation to zero.
8 In acceleration/deceleration before interpolation of type B,
deceleration is started if preprocessing for the next block
has not been completed before the remaining distance of
the current block becomes less than that needed to
decelerate and stop the movement.
9 If an F1–digit command is executed in the inch input system,
avoid specifying a command for simultaneous movement
on two axes, including a rotation axis during
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
317
7.2.5
Corner Control
7.2.5.1
In–position check
General Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range is
checked.
If the in–position check function is enabled, the CNC checks the position
during deceleration. If the position is found to exceed the specified range,
the CNC does not execute the next block.
NOTE
The purpose of in–position check is to check that the servo
motor has reached within a specified range (specified with
parameter No. 1826).
Signal
In–position signals
INP1 to INP4 <F104>
[Function] These signals indicate that the control axes are set to the in-position
condition.
They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal name
corresponds to the control axis number.
I N P 1
1 . . . . The 1st axis is set to the in-position condition.
2 . . . . The 2nd axis is set to the in-position condition.
3 . . . . The 3rd axis is set to the in-position condition.
: :
: :
[Output condition] These signals turn to “1” in the following case :

⋅ The servo error of the corresponding control axis is within the
specified allowance.
These signals turn to “0” in the following cases :
⋅ The servo error of the corresponding control axis exceeds the specified
allowance
318
Signal address
.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F104 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI
[Data type] Bit

NCI Inposition check at deceleration
0 : Performed
1 : Not performed
1826 In–position width for each axis

The in–position width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position
(the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the
in–position width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specified
position.
Note
NOTE
1 The in–position signals may turn to “1” even during the
movement if the axis is fed at very low speed.
2 The in–position check function is enabled, at the interface
between two cutting blocks, in the following cases:
M series When the exact stop command (G09) or exact stop mode com-
mand (G61) is specified
T series When the error detect signal is on
319
7.2.5.2
In–position check
independently of
feed/rapid traverse
General If separate in–position check for cutting feed and rapid traverse is
executed, a small in–position check range can be specified between those
cutting feed blocks that require a high degree of precision. A large
in–position check range can be specified between those rapid traverse
blocks that require quick positioning.
Signal See Subsection 7.2.6.1.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI
[Data type] Bit

NCI Inposition check at deceleration
0 : Performed
1 : Not performed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1801 CCI
CIN CCI
[Data type] Bit

CCI The in–position area for cutting feed is:
0 : Set in parameter No. 1826 (same as for rapid traverse).
1 : Set in bit 5 (CIN) of parameter No. 1801.
CIN When bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801 = 1, the in–position area for
cutting feed is:
0 : Use value in parameter No. 1827 if the next block is also for cutting
feed, or use value in parameter No. 1826 if the next block is for rapid
traverse.
1 : Use value in parameter No. 1827, regardless of the next block. (The
setting of parameter No. 1826 is used for rapid traverse, and the
setting of parameter No. 1827 is used for cutting feed.)
320
Parameter CIN (No. 1801#5)
0 1
Rapid→Rapid No. 1826 Rapid→Rapid No. 1826

Rapid→Feed No. 1826 Rapid→Feed No. 1826
0
Feed→Feed No. 1826 Feed→Feed No. 1826
Parameter
Feed→Rapid No. 1826 Feed→Rapid No. 1826
CCI
(No. Rapid→Rapid No. 1826 Rapid→Rapid No. 1826
1801#4) Rapid→Feed No.1826 Rapid→Feed No. 1826
1
Feed→Feed No.1827 Feed→Feed No. 1827
Feed→Rapid No. 1826 Feed→Rapid No. 1827

The in–position width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position
(the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the
in–position width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specified
position.
1827 In–position width in cutting feed for each axis
[Data type] Word

Set an in–position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is
valid when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801=1.
Note
NOTE
If the NCI bit (bit 5 of parameter No. 1601) is set to 1, so that
position check is not performed during deceleration, this
function is invalid. The system starts execution of the next
block as soon as deceleration has been completed, without
checking whether the servo position error is within the
specified range.
321
7.2.5.3
Error detect (T series)
General Generally, the CNC does not zero the feedrate at the interface of two
blocks during cutting feed.
Because of this, a corner of a tool path may be rounded.
This part causes the corner of
the tool path to be rounded.
Programmed tool path
Actual tool–center path

Feedrate
Time
If the error detect signal is used, it is possible to specify that a block not
be started until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous block has
been completed.
Feedrate
Time
Signal
Error detect signal SMZ

<G053, #6>
[Function] Enables error detection.
[Operation] If the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
S At the interface of two blocks during cutting feed, the control unit waits
until the acceleration/deceleration of the first block has been completed.
Only then does the control unit execute the next block.
The setting of the SMZ signal determines whether, at the interface of
two cutting blocks, the control unit waits until the acceleration/decel-
eration of the previous block has been completed.
Siganl address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G053 SMZ
322
Note
NOTE
If the error detect signal is on, a cutting block is not executed
until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous cutting
block has been completed.
This function alone cannot prevent corner rounding due to
delay caused by the servo motor, however.
To prevent corner rounding due to delay caused by the
servo motor, use the in–position check function together
with this function.
After acceleration/ After servo

deceleration motor delay
Feedrate
Time
Range of in–position check
7.2.6
Feed Forward in Rapid
Traverse
General Feed–forward control can be performed even during rapid traverse. In

this case, the servo position error is reduced, thus reducing the time
required for positioning to within the specified range.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1800 FFR
[Data type] Bit

FFR Feed–forward control is enabled for
0 : Cutting feed only
1 : Cutting feed and rapid traverse
Reference item For details of this function, refer to the “FANUC SERVO MOTOR a
series Maintenance Manual (B–65165E).”
323
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63503EN–1/01
8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION
324
B–63503EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
8.1
MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION/2ND
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION
General
D Miscellaneous Function When a numeral of up to 8 digits is specified following address M, code

(M code) signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these
signals to turn on or off its functions.
Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. In some cases,
however, up to three M codes can be specified for some types of machine
tools (see 8.3 “Multiple M code per Block”)
Also, parameter No. 3030 can specify the maximum digits and if a
specified value exceeds the maximum digits, an alarm may be issued.
D 2nd Auxiliary Function When eight digits are specified after address B, a code signal and strobe
(B code) signal are sent. These signals are used to index the rotation axis of the
machine. The code signal is retained until another B code is specified.
In each block, a single B code can be specified. The maximum number
of digits that can be specified after address B is specified in parameter No.
3033. If more digits than the specified value are specified, an alarm
occurs.
For the M series, the address for specifying the 2nd auxiliary function can
be changed from B to another address (A, C, U, V, or W) by parameter
setting (parameter No. 3460).
D Command Format of 2nd

Auxiliary Function
@ Command range –99999999 to +99999999
@ Command method 1. For the M series, a decimal point and a negative valve can be used for
input by setting AUP (bit 0 of parameter No. 3450).
With the T series, a decimal point and a negative value are always
enabled regardless of the parameter setting.
Command Output value
B10. 10000
B10 10
2. It is possible to change over the scale factor of B output, 1000 or 1

when the decimal point input is omitted, using the parameter DPI
(No.3401#0).
When DPI is 1: B1 1000
When DPI is 0: B1 1
325
3. It is possible to change over the scale factor of B output 1000 or 10000

when the decimal point input is omitted in the inch input system, using
the parameter AUX (No.3405#0). When DPI=1.
When AUX is 1: B1 10000
When AUX is 0: B1 1000
Basic procedure The following signals are used with these functions. (For details of the
spindle–speed function and tool function, see Chapters 9 and 10.)
Output signal Input signal
Program
Function
address Distribution end Completion
Code signal Strobe signal
signal signal
Miscellaneous M M00 to M31 MF

function
Spindle–speed func- S S00 to S31 SF

tion
DEN FIN
Tool function T T00 to T31 TF
Secondary auxiliary B B00 to B31 BF

function
Each function uses different program addresses and different signals, but
they all input and output signals in the same way, as described below. (A
sample procedure for the miscellaneous function is described below. The
procedures for the spindle–speed function, tool function, and secondary
auxiliary function, are obtained simply by substituting S, T, or B in place
of M.)
(1) Suppose that Mxxx is specified in a program.
For xxx, the number of specifiable digits is specified in parameter Nos.
3030 to 3033 for each function. If more digits than the specified value
are specified, an alarm occurs.
(2) Code signal M00 to M31 is sent. After period TMF, specified in
parameter No. 3010 (standard value: 16 msec), strobe signal MF is set
to 1. The code signal is the binary representation of the programmed
value xxx.(*1) If the move, dwell, spindle–speed, or another function
is specified at the same time as the miscellaneous function, the
execution of the other function is started when the code signal of the
miscellaneous function is sent.
(3) When the strobe signal is set to 1, the PMC reads the code signal and
performs the corresponding operation.
(4) To execute an operation after the completion of the move, dwell or
other function specified in the block, wait until distribution end signal
DEN is set to 1.
(5) Upon completion of the operation, the PMC sets completion signal
FIN to 1. The completion signal is used by the miscellaneous function,
spindle–speed function, tool function, secondary auxiliary function,
external operation function described later, and other functions. If any
of these functions are executed simultaneously, the completion signal
must be set to 1 upon completion of all the functions.
326
(6) If the completion signal remains set to 1 for longer than period TFIN,
specified in parameter No. 3011 (standard value: 16 msec), the CNC
sets the strobe signal to 0 and reports that the completion signal has
been received.
(7) When the strobe signal is set to 0, set the completion signal to 0 in the
PMC.
(8) When the completion signal is set to 0, the CNC sets all code signals
to 0 and completes all sequences of the miscellaneous function.(*2)
(9) Once all other commands in the same block have been completed, the
CNC executes the next block.
*1 When the tool function is executed, the programmed tool number is
sent as the code signal (T series).
*2 When the spindle–speed function, tool function, or secondary
auxiliary function is executed, the code signal is maintained until a
new code for the corresponding function is specified.
The timing diagram is shown below:
Example 1 Single miscellaneous function specified in a block
(1)(2) (3) (5) (6) (7)(8) (9)

M command
(independent) Mxxx
code signals M00–M31 (*2)
Strobe signals MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN

Distribution
end signals DEN
TMF TFIN
Example 2 Move command and miscellaneous function in the same block

2a. Execution of a miscellaneous function without waiting for move command completion
(1)(2) (3) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
M command Mxxx
Move command
Code signals M00–M31 (*2)
Strobe signal MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN
Distribution
end signals DEN
TMF TFIN
327
2b. Execution of a miscellaneous function after move command completion
(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)(7)(8) (9)

M command Mxx
Move command
Code signals M00–M31 (*2)
Strobe signal MF
PMC side action
End signal FIN
Distribution
end signals DEN
TMF TFIN
Signal
Miscellaneous function
code signals
M00 to M31 <F010 to
F013>
strobe signal
MF <F007#0> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals report the specification of miscellaneous functions.
[Output condition] For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of “Basic
procedure” above.
NOTE
1 The following miscellaneous functions are only processed
internally by the control unit; they are not subject to output
even when specified:
· M98, M99, M198
· M code that calls a sub program (parameter No. 6071 to
6079)
· M code that calls a custom macro (parameter No. 6080
to 6089)
2 Decode signals as well as the code signals and strobe
signal are output for the miscellaneous functions listed
below.
M00, M01, M02, M30
328
Decode M signals
DM00 <F009#7>,
DM01 <F009#6>,
DM02 <F009#5>,
DM30 <F009#4>
[Function] These signals report particular miscellaneous functions are specified. The
miscellaneous functions in a command program correspond to output
signals as indicated below.
Command program Output signal
M00 DM00
M01 DM01
M02 DM02
M30 DM30
[Output condition] A decode M signal goes “1” when:

· The corresponding miscellaneous function is specified, and any move
commands and dwell commands specified in the same block are
completed. These signals are not output when the end signal of the
miscellaneous function is returned before completion of such move
commands and dwell commands.
A decode M signal goes “0” when:
· The FIN signal goes “1”
· Reset occurs
Spindle–speed code
signals S00 to S31
<F022–F025>
Spindle–speed strobe
signal SF <F007#2>

[Function] These signals report that spindle speed functions have been specified.
procedure” above.
For S code output when the spindle serial output/spindle analog output
is used refer to section 9.3.
329
Tool function code

signals T00 to T31
<F026–F029>
Tool function strobe
signal TF <F007#3>

[Function] These signals report that tool functions have been specified.
procedure” above.
Second auxiliary
function code signals
B00 to B31
<F030–F033>
Second auxiliary
function strobe signal
BF <F007#4> (For lathes)
<F007#7>
(For machining center)

[Function] These signals report that second auxiliary functions have been specified.
procedure” above.
End signal FIN <G004#3>

[Function] This signal reports the completion of a miscellaneous function,
spindle–speed function, tool function, second auxiliary function, or
external operation function.
[Operation] For the control unit operation and procedure when this signal goes “1”,
see the description of “Basic procedure” above.
The FIN signal must remain “1” for a certain time (TFIN, which is set by
a parameter No. 3011) or longer. The FIN signal driven “1” is ignored if
the FIN signal goes “0” before TFIN elapses.
WARNING
Only one end signal is used for all functions above. The end
signal must go “1” after all functions are completed.
330
Distribution end signal

DEN <F001#3>
[Function] These signals report that all commands (such as move commands and
dwell) are completed except those miscellaneous functions,
spindle–speed functions, 2nd auxilialy functions tool functions, and so
forth that are contained in the same block and have been sent to the PMC.
They also report that the end signal from the PMC is being awaited.
[Output condition] The DEN signal turns to “1” when:
· The completion of miscellaneous functions, spindle–speed functions,
tool functions, 2nd auxilialy functions and so forth is being awaited, all
other commands in the same block are completed, and the current
position is in the in–position.
The DEN signal turns to “0” when:
· The execution of one block is completed
NOTE
A parameter NCI (No.1601#5) can specify, whether to only
check if an acceleration/deceleration delay is eliminated, or
to also check if a servo delay (error) has been reduced to
within a certain range.
331
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 DEN
F007 BF BF TF SF MF
F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30
F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00
F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08
F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16
F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24
F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
F031 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08
F032 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
F033 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 BCD
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

BCD Specifies whether to use the 2nd auxiliary function, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
332
3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S,
T, and B codes are sent, respectively.
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF,

signal
Delay time
Fig. 8.1 (a) Delay time of the strobe signal
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example : When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 32 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 100 is set, 104 ms is assumed.
3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function
completion signal (FIN).
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF

signal
FIN sigal
Ignored be- Valid because

cause shorter longer than min.
than min. signal width
signal width
Fig. 8.1 (b) Valid Width of the FIN (M,S, T, and B Function Completion)
Signal
333
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example: When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code
3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code
[Data type] Byte

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, T, and B codes.
NOTE
Up to 5 digits can be specified in the S code
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 DPI
[Data type] Bit

DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal
point
0 : The least input increment is assumed.
1 : The unit of mm, inches, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M02 M30
[Data type] Bit

M30 When M30 is specified in a memory operation:
0 : M30 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automati-
cally searched for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset
or reset and rewind operation is not performed, the program is
executed, starting from the beginning.
1 : M30 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched
for. (The head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind
signal.)
M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation
0 : M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automati-
cally searched for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset
or reset and rewind operation is not performed, the program is
executed, starting from the beginning.
334
1 : M02 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched
for. (The head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind
signal.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 AUX
[Data type] Bit

AUX The least increment of the command of the second miscellaneous function
specified with a decimal point
0 : Assumed to be 0.001
1 : Depending on the input increment. (For input in mm, 0.001 is
assumed, or for input in inches, 0.0001 is assumed.)
3411 M code preventing buffering 1
L L
[Data type] Byte

Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing
directed by an M code must be performed by the machine without
buffering the following block, specify the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are
not specified in these parameters.
3421 Minimum value 1 of M code preventing buffering
3422 Maximum value 1 of M code preventing buffering
335
[Data type] Word

When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameter
Nos. 3421 and 3422, 3433 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429
and 3430, or 3431 and 3432, buffering for the next block is not performed
until the execution of the block is completed.
CAUTION
1 The specification of a minimum value that exceeds the
specified maximum value is invalid.
2 When there is only one data item, set the following:
minimum value =maximum value.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3450
AUP
AUP A second auxiliary function command, specified with a decimal point and
a negative value is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
NOTE
With the T series, second auxiliary function commands
specified with a decimal point and a negative value are
always enabled regardless of the parameter setting.
3460
Name of a second auxiliary function
[Data type] Byte

Set the name of a second auxiliary function according to the table given
below. Note that the same address as an axis name cannot be set.
Name A B C U V W
Setting 65 66 67 85 86 87
If a value other than those given above is set, address B is assumed.
336
Note
NOTE
1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are
specified in the same block, the commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and
miscellaneous function commands.
ii) Executing miscellaneous function commands upon
completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the
sequence of PMC.
2 When the 2nd auxiliary function is provided, the address
used for specifying the 2nd auxiliary function (B or the
address specified with parameter No. 3460) cannot be used
as an axis address.
3 The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read
into the input buffer register, if present. Similarly, ten M
codes which do not buffer can be set by parameters (No.
3411 to 3420).
4 For M00 and M01 only, miscellaneous function code signal,
auxiliary function strobe signal, and M decode signals are
sent; the control of program stop and optional stop shall be
designed on the PMC side.
5 When the automatic operation is stopped by M02 or M30,
it is necessary to send the external reset signal from the
machine side to the CNC, instead of the FIN signal, When
the external reset signal is returned against the M02 or M30,
the control returns to the top of the program recently
executed and enters the reset state. When the FIN signal
is returned, the control returns to the beginning of the
program recently executed and executes it from the top.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Miscellaneous function (M code)
(B–63514EN) 2nd Auxiliary function (B code)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Miscellaneous function (M code)

2nd Auxiliary function (B code)
337
8.2
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION LOCK
General Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function.

That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued.
This function is used to check a program.
Signal
Auxiliary function lock

signal AFL <G005#6>
[Function] This signal selects auxiliary function lock. That is, this signal disables
the execution of specified M, S, T, and B functions.
[Operation] When this signal turns to “1”, the control unit functions as described
below.
(1) The control unit does not execute M, S, T, and B functions specified
for memory operation, DNC operation, or MDI operation. That is, the
control unit stops the output of code signals and strobe signals (MF,
SF, TF, BF).
(2) If this signal turns to “1” after code signal output, the output operation
is executed in the ordinary manner until its completion (that is, until
the FIN signal is received, and the strobe signal turns to “0”).
(3) Among the miscellaneous functions, M00, M01, M02, and M30 are
executed even when this signal is “1”. All code signals, strobe signals,
decode signals are output in the ordinary manner.
(4) Among the miscellaneous functions, even when this signal is “1”,
those functions (M98 and M99) that are executed in the control unit
without outputting their execution results are executed in the ordinary
manner.
WARNING
Even when this signal is “1”, spindle analog output or
spindle serial output is executed.
338
Auxiliary function lock

check signal MAFL
<F004#4>
[Function] This signal reports the state of the auxiliary function lock signal AFL.
[Output condition] This signal turns to “1” when:
· The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is “1”
This signal turns to “0” when:
· The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is “0”
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G005 AFL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F004 MAFL
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Machine lock and auxiliary function lock
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Machine lock and auxiliary function lock

339
8.3
MULTIPLE M
COMMANDS IN A
SINGLE BLOCK
General So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, this
function allows up to three M codes to be contained in one block.
Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to the
machine. This means that compared with the conventional method of a
single M command in a single block, a shorter cycle time can be realized
in machining.
(Example)
One M command Multiple M commands
in a single block in a single block
M40 ; M40M50M60 ;
M50 ; G28G91X0Y0Z0 ;
M60 ; :
G28G91X0Y0Z0 ; :
: :
: :
: :
Basic procedure (1) Assume that “MaaMbbMcc;” was commanded by the program.
(2) The 1st M command (Maa) sends the code signals M00 to M31 in a
manner similar to the conventional one-block single command. The
strobe signal MF is set to “1” after a time TMF set by parameter No.
3010 (Standard setting: 16 msec).
The second M command (Mbb) sends the code signal M200-M215,
the third M command (Mcc) sends the code signal M300-M315, and
their respective strobe signals MF2 and MF3 are set to “1”.
Furthermore, the three code signals are sent simultaneously.
The strobe signals MF, MF2, and MF3 become “1” at the same time.
The code signal is a binary notation of the program command aa, bb
and cc.
(3) On the PMC side, the code signals corresponding to the respective
strobe signals are read when the strobe signals become “1”, and the
appropriate operations are performed.
(4) When the operation of all M commands ends on the PMC side, the end
signal (FIN) is set to “1”.
(5) When the completion signal stays “1” for a time (TFIN) set by
parameter No. 3011 (Standard: 16 msec), all strobe signals (MF, MF2
and MF3) are set to “0” at the same time and the reception of
completion signal is reported.
(6) On the PMC side, when MF, MF2 and MF3 are set to “0”, the
completion signal is set to “0”.
A time chart for this procedure is shown below:
340
M command (MaaMbbMcc;)
Code signal M00-M31
Strobe signal MF
Code signal M200-M215

Strobe signal MF2
Code signal M300-M315

Strobe signal MF3
PMC side operation
End signal FIN
TMF TFIN
Signal
2nd, 3rd M function code

signal M200 to M215
<F014, F015>
M300 to M315 <F016,
F017>
2nd, 3rd M Function
strobe signal MF2
<F008#4>
MF3 <F008#5>
[Function] Indicates that second and third auxiliary functions have been issued.
[Output condition] The output conditions and procedures are the same as that described in
“Basic procedure”.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F008 MF3 MF2
F014 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200
F015 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208
F016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
F017 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
341
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M3B
[Data type] Bit

M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block
0 : One
1 : Up to three
Caution
CAUTION
1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be
specified together with another M code.
2 Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99,
and M198 cannot be specified together with other M codes;
each of those M codes must be specified in a single block.
Such M codes include these which direct the CNC to
perform internal operations in addition to sending the M
codes themselves to the PMC. To be specified, such M
codes are M codes for calling program numbers 9001 to
9009 and M codes for disabling advance reading (buffering)
of subsequent blocks.
The M codes which can be specified in a single block must
be those which the CNC send only the M code signals to the
PMC side.
Note
NOTE
1 CNC allows up to three M codes to be specified in one block.
However, some M codes cannot be specified at the same
time due to mechanical operation restrictions. For example,
M42 can be specified only after the mechanical operation of
M41 is completed.
2 The 1st M code can be up to 8 digits and 2nd, 3rd M codes
can be the values up to 65535.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Multiple M commands in a single block
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Multiple M commands in a single block

342
8.4
HIGH–SPEED M/S/T/B
INTERFACE
General To accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the high–speed M/S/T/B

interface has simplified the transfer of the strobe and completion signals
of the M/S/T/B functions.
Whether to use the usual system or high–speed system for strobe signal
and completion signal handling can be specified by parameter MHI (No.
3001#7).
The description below uses the miscellaneous functions (M code

commands) as an example. The same description applies to the
spindle–speed function (S code), tool function (T code) and 2nd auxiliary
function (B code).
Basic procedure (1) Assume that the following program is given:

Mxx;
Myy;
(2) In response to an M command, the NC system sends out the code
signals M00 to M31.
The NC system inverts the logical level of the strobe signal MF, that
is, from “0”to “1”, or from “1” to “0”.
(3) The CNC system inverts the strobe signal, then when the logical level
of the auxiliary function completion signal MFIN becomes the same
as the strobe signal, the CNC assumes the completion of PMC
sequence.
With the usual method, the operation is assumed to be completed when
a falling edge (“1” to “0”) of the M/S/T/B completion signal FIN is
received after a rising edge (“0” to “1”) of the FIN signal is detected. This
new system, on the other hand, assumes the operation has been completed
upon detection of only one transition of the completion signal.
In addition , the usual system uses only one completion signal (FIN)
common to the M/S/T/B functions. This new system uses a different
completion signal for each of the M, S, T, and B functions; the completion
signals for the M, S, T, and B functions are MFIN, SFIN, TFIN, and
BFIN, respectively.
The Fig. 8.4 (a) below shows the timing chart of these signals with the
new system. For comparison, Fig. 8.4 (b) shows the timing chart of the
conventional system.
343
Next block
Code signal
Mxx Myy
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation
completion signal MFIN
Fig. 8.4 (a) Timing chart of the high–speed system
Next block
Code signal
Mxx Myy
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation
Completion signal FIN
Fig. 8.4 (b) Timing chart of the usual system
A high–speed interface can also be used for multiple M commands issued

for one block. This interface provides separate completion signals for
each M code. They are called MFIN (the same name as for the single M
command per block function), MFIN2, and MFIN3, respectively. The
signal transfer sequence for multiple M codes per block is the same as that
for a single M code per block.
The high–speed interface can also be used for the external operation
function. In this case, special external operation signal EFD and
completion signal EFIN are used. The procedure for sending and
receiving these signals is identical to that for sending and receiving the
strobe and completion signals of the miscellaneous function (M series).
344
Signal
completion signal
MFIN <G005#0>
[Function] Reports that the execution of a miscellaneous function using the high–
speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and aprocedure of the contol unit when this signal turns
to “1” and “0”, see the description of “Basic procedure” above.
Spindle function
completion signal
SFIN <G005#2>
[Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using the
high–speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure of the control unit when this signal turns
Tool function completion

signal TFIN <G005#3>

[Function] Reports that the execution of a tool function using the high–speed
M/S/T/B interface is completed.
2nd auxiliary function

completion signal BFIN
<G005#4> (T series)
<G005#7> (M series)

[Function] Reports that the execution of a second auxiliary function using the
high–speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
345
2nd, 3rd M function

completion signals
MFIN2, MFIN3
<G004#4, #5> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Indicate that when the high–speed interface is used for multiple M com-
mands per block, the second to 3rd M functions have been completed.
[Operation] See “Basic procedure” for how the control unit operates and what it per-
forms when the signal turns to “1” and “0”.
External operation signal

for high–speed interface
(M series) EFD <F007#1>

[Function] Indicates that positioning for the external operation function has been
completed for the high–speed M, S, T, or B interface, and that another
external operation is required.
[Operation] Refer to the description of the output conditions and procedure described
in “basic procedure.”
External operation
function completion
signal (M series) EFIN
<G005#1>
[Function] Indicates that the external operation function has been completed for the
high–speed M, S, T, or B interface.
[Operation] The “basic procedure” describes the procedure and operation of the
control unit when the signal is set to 1 or 0.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 MFIN3 MFIN2
G005 BFIN BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F007 EFD
346
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 MHI
MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, and B codes
0 : Normal
1 : High–speed
Note
NOTE
1 The strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF are “0” when the
power is turned on.
2 When the control unit is reset, MF, SF, TF, and BF are set
to “0”.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 8.1 Miscellaneous function/2nd auxiliary func-
(This manual) tion
8.3 Multiple M commands in a block
11.8 External operation function
347
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63503EN–1/01
9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
348
B–63503EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
9.1
SPINDLE SPEED
FUNCTION
(S CODE OUTPUT)
General When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobe
signals are sent out and used to control the spindle speed. The code
signals are retained until another S code is issued.
One S code is used for each block. Parameter No. 3031 can be used to
specify the maximum number of digits. If a number greater than the
maximum number is specified, an alarm can be raised.
Signal Refer to section 8.1.
Parameter
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code
[Data type] Byte

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the S codes.
Note
NOTE
1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are
specified in the same block, the commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and
miscellaneous function commands.
ii) Executing miscellaneous function commands upon
completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the PMC
processing sequence.
2 For S code output when the spindle serial output/spindle
analog output is used, refer to section 9.3.
349
9.2
SPINDLE SERIAL
OUTPUT/SPINDLE
ANALOG OUTPUT
General There are two types of spindle motor control interfaces, spindle serial
output and spindle analog output.
The spindle serial output interface can control two serial spindles. The
spindle analog output interface can control one analog spindle.
The table below lists the relationships between the spindle control
interfaces and the configuration of the spindle.
Spindle serial Spindle analog First spindle Second spindle

output output
f × First serial spindle Second serial spindle

The PC can be used. The PC can be used. (*)
× f Analog spindle
—
The PC can be used.
× × See Section 9.1.

⇒ Controlled by the PMC using an external interface.
· PC = position coder
· (*) The multispindle function is necessary to use the position coder of
the second spindle.
· See section 15.4 or 9.9 for how to control the speed of the second
spindles.
350
The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions.
f=Available ×=Unavailable
Spindle Serial spindle

Function Analog spindle
First serial spindle Second serial spindle
Thread cutting/feed per revolution

f f (*1) f
(synchronous feed)
Constant surface speed control f f (*1) f
Spindle speed fluctuation detection f f (*1) f
Actual spindle speed output

f f (*1) f
(T series only)
Spindle positioning (T series only) f × f
Cs contour control f × ×
f f
Multi–spindle (*2) ×
(First spindle) (Second spindle)
Rigid tapping f f (*1) f
Spindle synchronous control f Master f Slave ×
Spindle control unit functions (*3),

such as spindle orientation, spindle
f f f
output switching, spindle switching,
and etc.
Polygon turning (T series only)

(using the servo motor axis and f f (*1) f
spindle)
Spindle output control by the PMC f f f
NOTE
1 The multispindle function is necessary. The function cannot
be used for the first and second spindles simultaneously.
2 The multispindle function can control the speed of two
spindles and switch the feedback signal between two
position coders. It also can work without the second or third
spindle.
3 These functions belong to the spindle control unit. They
cannot be used unless the spindle control unit supports
those functions.
The signals and parameters for spindle speed control are common to both
spindle serial output and spindle analog output. (See Section 9.3.)
351
The table below lists the differences related to direct control of the spindle
control unit.
Spindle control unit for Spindle control unit for
spindle serial output spindle analog output
interface interface
Parameters for Specified as CNC parame- Directly specified for the
the spindle con- ters spindle control unit
trol unit (4000 to 4351/S1, S2)
Used after being transferred
to the spindle control unit
Control signal for Connected to the PMC via Connected to the PMC via
the spindle con- the CNC an external contact
trol unit G0070 to G0073 and F0045
to F0048:
Addresses for the first
spindle
G0074 to G0077 and F0049
to F0052:
Addresses for the second
spindle
Spindle speed Digital data in a range from Analog voltage from 0 to
command inter- 0 to"maximum spindle mo- "10 V (excluding portion
face tor speed for offset voltage adjust-
ment)
Position coder Connected to the CNC via Connected directly to the

interface the spindle control unit CNC
Signal · Spindle control unit signals for the serial spindle
<G0070 to G0073> (input), <F0045 to F0048> (output)

→ for the first serial spindle
<G0074 to G0077> (input), <F0049 to F0052> (output)
→ for the second serial spindle
These addresses are on the CNC. Actually, however, they are input/output
signals for the spindle control unit for the serial spindle.
For details of the signals belonging to these addresses, refer to the

manuals for the serial spindle:
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER a series Descriptions (B–65162E)

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a series Descriptions (B–65152E)
FANUC SERVO MOTOR a series Maintenance Manual (B–65165E)
352
Signal address
D For 1st SERIAL SPINDLE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
G071 RCHA RSLA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
G072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRIDA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
G073 MPOFA SLVA MORCMA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F045 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
F046 MORA2A MORA1A PORA2A SLVSA RCFNA RCHPA CFINA CHPA
F047 INCSTA PC1DEA
F048
D For 2ND SERIAL

SPINDLE #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1A CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G075 RCHB RSLB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB
G077 MPOFB SLVB MORCMB
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB
F051 INCSTB PC1DEB
F052
353
Parameter
D Connection of serial
spindle control unit
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3701 SS2 ISI
[Data type] Bit

ISI Specifieds whether the serial spindle interface is used.
0 : Used
1 : Not used
NOTE
This parameter is enabled only when the serial spindle
interface is provided. The parameter is used when the CNC
is started after serial spindle interface control is temporarily
disabled during startup adjustment of the CNC. This bit
should normally set to be 0.
SS2 The number of connections in serial spindle control

0: 1
1: 2
NOTE
To connect two serial spindles, set jumper S1 on the 1st
serial spindle control unit to B.
(For S series SERIAL SPINDLE AMPLIFIER)
D Parameters of serial No. 4000 to 4351: S1 → For 1st serieal spindle

spindle control unit S2 → For 2nd serial spindle
The above parameters are on the CNC, but actually they are used for the
spindle control unit of serial spindle.
For details of these parameters, refer to the following manual:
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL

(B–65160E)
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(B–65165E)
354
Alarm and message

749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR Acommunication error occurred for the serial
spindle. The cause may be noises, discon-
nection of an optical cable or the interruption
of the power to the spindle amplifier.
(Note) Unlike alarm No. 750, this alarm oc-
curs when a serial communication alarm is
detected after the spindle amplifier is normal-
ly activated.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK This alarm is generated when the spindle
ERROR control unit is not ready for starting correctly
when the power is turned on in the system
with the serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as fol-
lows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable, or
the spindle control unit’s power is OFF.
2) When the NC power was turned on under
alarm conditions other than SU–01 or
AL–24 which are shown on the LED dis-
play of the spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier
power off once and perform startup
again.
3) Other reasons (improper combination of
hardware)
4) The second spindle (when SP2, bit 4 of
parameter No. 3701, is 1) is in one of the
above conditions 1) to 3).
Note) This alarm does not occur after the
system including the spindle control
unit is activated.
See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.
751 SPINDLE–1 ALARM DETECT This alarm indicates the NC that an alarm is
(AL–XX) generatedin the spindle control unit of the se-
rial spindle. The alarm is displayed in form
AL–XX (XX is a number). Refer to the manu-
als for serial spindle. The alarm number XX
is the number indicated on the spindle ampli-
fier. The CNC holds this number and displays
on the screen.
752 SPINDLE–1 MODE CHANGE This alarm is generated if the system does
ERROR not properly terminate a mode change. The
modes include the Cs contouring, spindle
positioning,rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle
control unit does not respond correctly to the
mode change command issued by the CNC.
761 SPINDLE–2 ALARM DETEC- Refer to alarm No. 751. (For 2nd spindle)
TION (AL–XX)
762 SPINDLE–2 MODE CHANGE Refer to alarm No. 752.(For 2nd spindle)
ERROR
355
DIAGNOSIS SCREEN
D Information on spindle
control #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
400 SAI SS2 SSR POS SIC
SIC 0: No module is available for spindle serial output.

1: A module for spindle serial output is available.
POS 0: No module is available for spindle analog output.
1: A module for spindle analog output is available.
SSR 0: Spindle serial output is not used.
1: Spindle serial output is used.
SS2 0: The second spindle is not used with spindle serial output.
1: The second spindle is used with spindle serial output.
SAI 0: Spindle analog output is not used.
1: Spindle analog output is used.
401 Alarm condition for the serial spindle unit for the first spindle (AL–??)
402 Alarm condition for the serial spindle unit for the second spindle (AL–??)
D Communication error on
spindle serial output
interface
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE
CRE 1 : CRC error (warning)

FRE 1 : Framing error (warning)
SNE 1 : Mismatch between sending and receiving sections
CER 1 : Abnormal reception
CME 1 : No answer during auto scanning
SCA 1 : Communication error in the spindle amplifier
SSA 1 : System error in the spindle amplifier
(These errors are reflected in spindle alarm 749. They are caused by noise,
disconnection, or instantaneous power interruption.)
D Information related to the
activation of the spindle
serial output interface #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
409 SPE S2E S1E SHE
SHE 1 : Abnormal operation in the serial spindle communication module of

the CNC
S1E 1 : Abnormal operation on the first spindle during activation
S2E 1 : Abnormal operation on the second spindle during activation
SPE 1 : Serial spindle parameter not meeting activation conditions
(These errors are reflected in spindle alarm 750.)
356
D Load and speed meter

readings for the serial
spindle 410 First serial spindle: Load meter reading (%)
411 First serial spindle: Speed meter reading (min–1)
412 Second serial spindle: Load meter reading (%)
413 Second serial spindle: Speed meter reading (min–1)
To display the load and speed meter readings, the following parameters
must be specified correctly.
Maximum motor speed: Parameter No. 4020 (main) and 4196 (sub)
Load meter reading at maximum output:
Parameter No. 4127 (main) and 4276 (sub)
NOTE
The spindle switch function is used for main/sub switching.
Select main if the spindle switch function is not used.
D Position error display

during spindle
synchronization
414 Master spindle motion error during spindle synchronization
415 Slave spindle motion error during spindle synchronization
416 Absolute value of synchronization error during spindle synchronization
The display for diagnosis No. 414 to 416 are in pulse units (one pulse =
360/4096 degrees)
D Position error display
during spindle
synchronization
417 First serial spindle: Position coder feedback information
418 First serial spindle: Position error
419 Second serial spindle: Position coder feedback information
420 Second serial spindle: Position error
The above display data is the information obtained directly from the serial
spindle control unit.
357
9.3
SPINDLE SPEED
CONTROL
General This section describes spindle speed control. It also explains the position
coder and the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR).
358
Command flow of The following chart summarizes spindle speed control.

spindle speed control
CNC PMC and machine

Machining program, etc.
↓
Gear select signal output Output to the PMC

⋅ S command
(M series) (to change the machine gear).
(GR3O, GR2O, GR1O)
⋅S code/SF signal output . Output to the PMC

(to be used for ladders).
⋅Spindle stop signal/spindle orientation signal

Switching in the machine
⋅Spindle override signal (*SSTP/SOR, SOV0 to SOV7)
⋅ Processing for gear change Input the gear select

(S command → spindle motor speed con- ←From the PMC
signal (GR1, GR2).
version)
Clamp the speed according to parameters.
CNC output specification

(result of speed conversion) Output to the PMC
S12 bit code output (R12O to R01O) (used for ladders)
⋅ Determine the output. ← Output specification by the PMC ←From the PMC
(Selected by the SIND signal) (set to R12I to R01I)
Specify output polarity in the CNC.

(M03/M04 and parameter No. 3706 =
TCW, CWM)
⋅ Determination of output polarity ← Polarity specification by the PMC ←From the PMC
(Selected by the SSIN signal) (set to SGN)
Thread cutting, ⋅ Control over the ← Input the spindle

feed per revolu- start of cutting speed arrival
tion, etc. feed. signal (SAR).
⋅ Position coder Monitor the arrival

⋅ Command output to the spindle speed
feedback
spindle, spindle enable sig-
signal
nal output, gain, and offset
Spindle Spindle Position

amplifier motor coder
Gear change Sensors

Input the spindle amplifier Spindle
control signal from the mechanism
PMC, etc. Mechanical section of the machine
359
D S command The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machining
programs, etc. for the CNC.
For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC converts
the specified surface speed to the spindle speed.
In the M series with bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 = 0 without the
constant surface speed control, the CNC specifies the gear stage for the
desired spindle speed to the PMC according to parameter No. 3741, 3742,
and 3743, and the S command.
(GR3O, GR2O, GR1O <F034#2, #1, #0>)
D S code/SF signal output Spindle control function in the CNC converts the S command value to the
output value for the spindle motor. For correspondence to gear change
and constant surface speed control, the S code/SF signals output is as
follows :
M series → Outputs the S code.
The SF signal is output only when the CNC directs the PMC
to change the gear.
T series → Outputs neither S code nor SF signal.
(This is because the S code is not always the spindle speed
when the constant surface speed control option is used.)
If you use the S code in the PMC ladder, you must specify parameters
related to parameter No. 3705.
D Spindle stop signal This signal sets the S command value in the CNC to 0. If the CNC has
(*SSTP) the spindle output specified (see descriptions on the SIND signal), this
signal sets the speed command for the spindle to 0.
Even if the function of the spindle stop signal is not used, the signal must
be set to logical 1 for the CNC to perform spindle speed control.
D Spindle orientation If the spindle orientation signal is logical 1 and the spindle stop signal is
signal (SOR) logical 0, the spindle rotates in the direction specified by bit 5 (ORM) of
parameter No. 3706 at a constant speed specified by parameter No. 3732.
Because the spindle rotates at a constant speed regardless of the gear
stage, this signal can be used to rotate the spindle to drive the stopper or
pin during mechanical spindle positioning.
For the M series, setting parameter GST (bit 1 of parameter No. 3705)
enables the spindle motor to rotate at a constant speed at an M type gear
shift. This function can be used for gear shifting because it maintains a
constant speed of the gear change mechanism.
D Spindle speed override This signal specifies an override of 0% to 254% for the specified S value
signal (SOV00 to SOV07) for spindle control.
However, the spindle speed override function is disabled when the CNC
is in the following state:
Tapping cycle (M series : G84, G74 T series : G84, G88)
Thread cutting (M series : G33 T series : G32, G92, and G76)
When the spindle speed control is performed but the spindle speed
override is not used, set the override value to 100%.
360
D Processing for gear Although the S command contains the spindle speed, the object that is
changing actually controlled is the spindle motor. Therefore, the CNC must have
some provision to detect the gear stage between the speed and spindle
motor.
There are two types of gear selection methods:
M type
The CNC selects a gear stage according to the range of speed for each gear
stage previously specified in a parameter, as directed by the S command,
and informs the PMC of the selected gear stage (one of the three gear
stages ) using the gear select signal output (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O).
Also, the CNC outputs the spindle speed based on the selected gear stage
(output as the gear select signal).
T type
The gear stage (one of the four gear stages ) being currently used by the
machine is input in response to the gear select signal inputs (GR1, GR2).
The machine determines which gear to use.
The CNC outputs the spindle speed that corresponds to the gear stage
input.
D Selection of gear change The M series system can use either M or T type.
system M type ← Without constant surface speed control option, and bit 4
(GTT) of parameter No. 3706 = 0
T type ← With constant surface speed control, or bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 = 1
The T series system can use only T type.
D Details of M type By specifying from S0 to S99999 in memory or MDI operation, the CNC
(Output of GR1O, GR2O, outputs a command corresponding to the spindle speed. There is a
GR3O) two-speed (GR1O and GR2O) or three-speed range (GR1O, GR2O,
GR3O), set by parameter nos. 3741-3743, and the gear selection signal
is output simultaneously. When the gear selection signal is changed, the
SF signal is output at the same time (parameter SFA no. 3705#6).
The meaning of the gear signals is shown below:
Gear 2–stage Gear 3–state Remarks
GR1O Low Low
Low: Low Gear
GR2O High Middle Middle: Middle Gear
High: High Gear
GR3O High
361
The speed commands output to the spindle motor are as follows:

⋅ For the serial spindle, the speed commands are processed as values 0 to
16383 between the CNC and spindle control unit.
⋅ For the analog spindle, the speed commands are output to the analog
voltage signal SVC as analog voltages 0 to 10 V.
The following descriptions exemplify the analog spindle. They can be

applied to the serial spindle on the assumption that spindle motor speed
with analog voltage 10 V corresponds to the maximum spindle motor
speed.
D M type gear change method A (Fig. 9.3 (a))
Spindle motor speed command

(Analog voltage command)
For gear 2-stage
10V
Upper limit of
spindle speed
(Vc)
GR20 (GR30)
GR10 (GR20)
(GR10)
C
Spindle speed
A B command
(S code input)
Vmin Vmax Vmax Vmax ( ) for gear 3-stage

A× A× B× C×
4095 4095 4095 4095
Fig. 9.3 (a) S code input and output voltage
Set the following values as parameters:

· Constant Vmax: for upper limit of spindle speed (parameter No. 3736)
Upper limit of spindle speed
Vmax=4095×
Spindle speed at command voltage 10V
· Constant Vmin; for lower limit of spindle speed (parameter No. 3735)
Vmin=4095× Lower limit of spindle speed

Spindle speed at command voltage 10V
· Spindle speed A (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and low gear

(parameter no. 3741)
· Spindle speed B (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and high gear (or
middle-high gear) (parameter no. 3742)
· Spindle speed C (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and high gear
(parameter no. 3743)
362
NOTE
If a specified voltage of 10 V is already higher than the
acceptable input voltage for the spindle drive system,
calculate the spindle speed that corresponds to 10 V using
a proportional calculation method and use it instead. Now,
in response to the specified S code, the speed command
and gear select commands (G3O, G2O, G1O) are output to
the spindle motor as shown in Fig. 9.3. (a).
D Gear change point during tapping cycle mode (G84, G74)

In case of G84 (tapping cycle) or G74 (counter tapping cycle) the gear
shift speed is changed by parameter SGT(No. 3705#3). In this case,
gear shift is performed at the speed set by parameter nos. 3761 and
3762 (Fig. 9.3 (b)).
Spindle motor speed command Vc: Voltage for upper limit of spindle motor speed
(analog voltage output)
10V
Upper limit
voltage of
spindle GR10
motor speed
(Vc)
GR20
Spindle speed
command
(S code input)
D A E B C
D : Gear shift point (parameter No. 3761) for low/high speed change (or low/medium speed change) (set by
parameter as min–1 value) during tapping.
E : Gear shift point (parameter No. 3762) (3-stage gear) for medium/high speed change (set by parameter as
min–1 value) during tapping.
Fig. 9.3 (b) S code input and output voltage (in tapping)
D M type gear change method B (M series) (Fig. 9.3 (c))

The speed (min–1) at which the low-speed and the high-speed gears are
changed over can be set as a parameter (No.3751, 3752) by setting
parameter SGB (No. 3705# 2). When a 3-stage gear is used, it is possible
to set the speeds (min–1) for switching low-speed and medium-speed
gears, and medium-speed and high-speed gears, using parameters No.
3751, 3752.
363

(analog voltage output)
10V
VC
VH
GR30
VL
GR10 GR20
Spindle speed
command
A B C (S code input)
Vmin Vmaxl Vmaxh Vmax
A× A× B× C×
4095 4095 4095 4095
VC: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor.
VH: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor with high-speed gears (medium
speed gear for 3-stage gear)
VL: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor at low-speed gear
Fig. 9.3 (c) M type gear change B
When using this function, set the following parameters:

· Constant Vmax (Parameter No.3736) related to the upper limit of
spindle motor speed (min–1)
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (min–1)
Vmax = 4095×
Spindle motor speed (min–1) when the command voltage is 10V
· Constant Vmin (Parameter No. 3735) related to the lower limit of

spindle motor speed (min–1)
Lower limit of spindle motor speed (min–1)
Vmin = 4095×
· Constant Vmaxl (Parameter No. 3751) related to the upper limit of

spindle motor speed (min–1) with low-speed gears
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (min–1) with low-speed gears
Vmaxl = 4095×
Spindle motor speed (min–1) when the command voltage is
10V
· Constant Vmaxh (Parameter No. 3752) related to the upper limit of

spindle motor speed (min–1) with high-speed gears (medium-speed
gear for 3-stage gear)
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (min–1) with high-speed gears
(medium-speed gear for 3-stage gear)
Vmaxh = 4095×
364
· Spindle speed A (Parameter No.3741) (min–1) with low-speed gears

when the command voltage is 10V
· Spindle speed B (Parameter No.3742) (min–1) with high-speed gears
when the command voltage is 10V (medium-speed gear for 3-stage)
· Spindle speed C (Parameter No.3743) (min–1) with high-speed gears
when the command voltage is 10V (3-stage gear)
Spindle motor speed commands (0 to 10V) and gear selecting signals
(GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) are issued on each S code command as shown in
the figure:
CAUTION
1 In a tapping cycle when parameter SGT (No. 3705 #3 ) is
set, the gears are changed over at the gear changing point
for tapping.
2 For this function (parameter SGB=1 (No. 3705#2)), when
only one-stage gear is used, the voltage corresponding to
the upper limit value to the spindle motor is calculated using
Vmaxl, and when 2-stage gear is used, it is calculated
according to Vmaxh. Therefore, when SGB is 1, set Vmaxl
when only one-stage gear is used, Vmaxl and Vmaxh when
2-stage gear is used.
D Time chart When S code is commanded, the I/O signal time chart is :
D When Gear select signal does not change
S code read
To next block
Spindle speed
command output
VH
VL
0V
Fig. 9.3 (d) Time chart when gear select signal does not change
In this case, the SF signal is not output and the CNC advances to the next
block automatically after the next spindle speed command is output.
365
D When Gear select signal change
S code read
To next block
Gear select signal

TM
GR3O F
/GR2O
/GR1O SF
FIN
TMF
TFIN
Spindle speed command

VH
VL
0V
Fig. 9.3 (e) Time chart when gear select signal changes
In this case, the gear select signal is output; after elapse of the time
constant set by parameter (TMF), the SF signal is output. After another
TMF elapse, the spindle speed command is output. On the PMC side,
change the gears by this signal, and return the FIN signal after the end of
gear change. The time chart for SF and FIN signals is the same as in S
code output.TMF, set by parameter No. 3010, is common to M, S and T
functions.
Moreover, specifying bit 6 (SFA) of parameter No. 3705 can specify that
the SF signal be output even if no gear change is used.
D Details of T type To perform the T type gear changing, the maximum spindle speed for each
(Input of GR1, GR2) gear select signal issued from the PMC side must be set by parameter No.
3741-3744.
The gear select signal is a 2 bit code signal (GR1, GR2). The relationship
between the signal and gear number is :
Parameter No. for max.
GR1 GR2 Gear No.
spindle speed
0 0 1 No. 3741
1 0 2 No. 3742
0 1 3 No. 3743
1 1 4 No. 3744
The following descriptions exemplify the analog spindle. Like the

descriptions of the M type, they also apply to the serial spindle on the
assumption that spindle motor speed with analog voltage 10 V
corresponds to the maximum spindle motor speed.
366
In addition, for the speed command output to the spindle motor, analog
voltages 0 to 10 V for analog spindle control correspond to digital data
0 to 16383 for serial spindle control. However, it might be easier if you
consider them code signals from 0 to 4095 for convenience sake without
distinguishing between serial and analog spindles.
Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed
with the output voltage 10 V is 1000 min–1 for the low speed gear (G1)
and 2000 min–1 for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds by the
parameter No. 3741, 3742. In this case, the analog voltage has the linear
relationship shown below.
N
2000min–1 When gear
2 selected
When gear
1000min–1 1 selected
600min–1
Volt
0 V2 V1 10
When spindle speed S=600 is given, V1 (for G1) or V2 (for G2) is

calculated inside the CNC and output to the machine side.
V1: 6(V)
V2: 3(V)
The value of output voltage V is calculated automatically from the
following equations:
10N
V=
R
R: Spindle speed at 10V output voltage

N: Spindle speed given by S5-digits
This is equivalent to the G97 mode for constant surface speed control.
See Section 9.5 for operations during the constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
In addition, parameter No. 3772 (upper limit to the spindle speed) can
specify speed clamping for all gear positions.
367
Reference→ Block Diagram for Analog Voltage Output
When the constant surface speed control is used.

CNC Power magnetics cabinet
[Surface speed]
M code Gear change command
S(m/min)
Spindle speed
X–axis pres-
command
ent value Constant
r S (min–1)
surface
min–1/10V speed control
Gear change
G97
G96
Parameter GR1, GR2
Motor speed conversion gear select signal
Full scale conversion
(contact)
Spindle motor
D-A SVC
Speed
converter control
SF signal is not sent.
D Determination of output Using the above processing for gear change, the CNC calculates the speed
R12O–R01O (Output) command output to the spindle motor that is necessary to obtain the
R12I–R01I (Input) specified spindle speed with the gear.
SIND (Input)
For either serial spindle or analog spindle control, the calculation results
are output as the S12 bit code signal from 0 to 4095 to the PMC.
(R12O to R01O<F037#3 to F036#0>)
After the calculation results are received, the SIND signal <G033#7>
determines which is to be used, the speed command output calculated by
the CNC or the data specified in the PMC. Thus speed command output
control for the spindle motor is determined. (See also Section 15.4.)
D Determination of output The speed command output to the spindle motor is determined as
polarity SSIN/SGN (Input) described above, but the actually used output polarity is determined by the
CNC as follows:
⋅ If bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 0
→ Determined according to bit 6 (CWM) of parameter No. 3706
⋅ If bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 1
→ Determined according to bit 6 (CWM) of parameter No. 3706 and
M03/M04 given to the CNC
After that, the SSIN signal <G033#6> determines which is to be used, the
output polarity calculated by the CNC or the polarity specified in the
PMC. In this way, the output polarity of the speed command output to
the spindle motor is determined. (See also Section 15.4.)
368
Keep in mind the following: Even with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No.
3706 = 1, the CNC cannot determine the output polarity if it has not issued
M03/M04, and therefore, actual output does not work even if the speed
command output has been specified.
D Command output to According to the speed command output and the polarity determined so
spindle far, the command is sent to the spindle control unit as follows:
⋅ For serial spindle → Digital data 0 to"16383

⋅ For analog spindle → Analog voltage 0 to"10 V
D Requirement of output After power is switched on, a nonzero command is output to the spindle
only when the following conditions are met: A nonzero spindle speed
command is specified, and the output polarity is determined.
With bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 1, no command output is sent
to the spindle, because the output polarity is not determined until an
M03/M04 is issued.
D Requirement to stop The command output to the spindle is reset to 0 when a command to
output specify so (such as *SSTP = 0 or S0 command) is issued.
M05, emergency stop, or reset does not cause the CNC to reset the
command output to the spindle to 0.
D Spindle enable signal Another output related to spindle control is the spindle enable signal
ENB <F001#4> ENB.
The ENB signal is logical 1 when a nonzero command output is sent to
the spindle. If the command is logical 0, the ENB signal becomes logical
0.
When the analog spindle is being used, an offset voltage in the spindle
motor speed amplifier may cause the spindle motor to rotate at low speed
even if the command output (in this case, analog voltage) to the spindle
is zero. The ENB signal can be used to stop the motor in such a case.
D Gain and offset The analog spindle may require gain and offset voltage adjustment
depending on the spindle motor speed amplifier being used.
The following parameters are available for such adjustment.

Gain adjustment data: Parameter No. 3730
Offset voltage compensation: Parameter No. 3731
D Electrical specification The signals related to analog spindle interface are described below.
of analog spindle
interface The ENB1 and ENB2 signals are turned on and off under the same
condition as for the ENB signal <F001#4>. They can be used also for the
serial spindle.
369
Control unit
max+10V SVC
SVC Spindle speed
2mA analog voltage Name Connector/Pin
ES
Output ES output SVC JA40/7
impedance
100Ω ES JA40/5
ENB1
ENB Enable signal
ENB1 JA40/8
ENB2
ENB2 JA40/9
WARNING
Since the output voltage is a weak signal, do not relay it
through contacts.
D Position coder feedback The position coder is necessary for thread cutting or feed per revolution.
signal
The position coder detects the actual spindle speed and the one–rotation
signal (used to detect a fixed point on the spindle for thread cutting).
Ideally, the position coder should be connected directly to the spindle
(with a gear ratio of 1:1). If it is necessary to use a gear, select a gear ratio
from 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8 that reduces the position coder speed.
When using a gear between the spindle and position coder, specify the
gear ratio in bits 1 and 0 (PG2, PG1) of parameter No. 3706.
See Section 9.10 for position coder connection for rigid tapping.
D Speed arrival signal The spindle speed arrival signal SAR is an input signal used as a condition
(SAR) to cause the CNC to start cutting feed. This signal is used generally when
cutting feed should be started after the spindle reaches the specified speed.
In this case, a sensor is used to check the spindle speed. The detected
speed is sent to the CNC via the PMC.
When the above operation is performed using the PC ladder regularly,
however, cutting feed may be started based on the SAR signal indicating
the previous spindle state (spindle speed before change), if the spindle
speed change command and the cutting feed command are issued at the
same time.
To avoid the above problem, monitoring the SAR signal can be deferred
for a time specified by parameter No. 3740 after the S command or cutting
feed command was issued.
When using the SAR signal, set bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708 to 1.
Item No. 06 (SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK) on the diagnosis
screen is kept at 1 while this function is keeping the cutting feed block at
a halt.
370
Signal
Spindle stop signal

*SSTP<G029#6>
[Function] The command output to the spindle is held.
[Operation] When the spindle stop signal turns to “0” , the output voltage becomes 0V
and the enable signal ENB turns to “0” (M05 is not output). When this
signal turns to “1”, the analog voltage returns to its original value and the
ENB signal turns to “1”.
S××××
Input command M03 M05 M04 S0
processing
“1”
Spindle stop signal “0”
*SSTP
Analog voltage 0V
Enable signal ENB
The above time chart is an example. Actually, the time chart should meet
the specification of the spindle control unit.
· When this signal is not used, always set the signal to “1”.
· M03, M04, M05 are not processed inside the CNC.
Spindle orientation
signal SOR <G029#5>
[Function] The spindle or the spindle motor is rotated at a constant speed.
[Operation] When the spindle orientation signal turns to “1” and the spindle stop
signal *SSTP turns to “0”, a spindle speed command which lets the
spindle rotate at the constant speed set by parameter No. 3732 is output.
The enable signal ENB also turns to “1”. This signal is disabled when the
spindle stop signal is “1”.
When the spindle speed for orientation is set by parameter GST No.
3705#1 and the SOR signal is input, the CNC outputs the spindle speed
command corresponding to the speed set to parameter 3732 with an
output polarity set by parameter ORM (No. 3706#5), but the gear select
signal does not change. For example, if the SOR signal is turned to “1”
with high gear selected, and the speed set to parameter No. 3732 is in the
371
low gear range, the gear select signal does not change and the command
output is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear.
When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST (No. 3705#1)=1,
the command output is output regardless of gear select signal. When the
spindle motor speed is set, it is used for gear shift.
Example of usage is shown below:
Input command
M19 M03
processing
Stop command Orientation
detection
Spindle stop signal
*SSTP
Spindle orientation signal

SOR
Max. 70ms Max. 70ms
Command output to 0
the spindle
Enable signal
ENB
Spindle speed
0 rpm
RL: Constant speed set by parameter No. 3732
Spindle speed override

signal SOV0 to SOV7
<G030> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] The spindle speed override signal specifies an override from 0% to 254%
in 1% units for the S command sent to the CNC.
[Operation] An override value in binary must be set in 8 bits from SOV7 to SOV0.
The spindle speed override function is disabled (an override of 100% is
applied) under the following conditions:
⋅ Tapping cycle (M series : G84, G74 T series : G84, G88)
⋅ Thread cutting (M series : G33 T series : G32, G92, G76)
→ When this function is not in use, specify an override of 100%;
otherwise, an override of 0% becomes effective, thus disabling the
spindle from rotating.
372
Spindle speed arrival

signal SAR <G029#4>
[Function] The SAR signal initiates cutting feed. In other words, if the signal is
logical 0, cutting feed will not start.
[Operation] Generally, this signal is used to inform the CNC that the spindle has
reached the specified speed.
For this purpose, the signal must be set to 1 only after the actual speed of
the spindle has reached the specified speed.
Setting parameter No. 3740 with a wait time before the start of checking
the SAR signal inhibits cutting feed from starting under a condition of
SAR = 1 specified before the change of the spindle command.
To use the SAR signal, it is necessary to set bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No.
3708 to 1.
The CNC checks the SAR signal under the following conditions:
a. Bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708 is set to 1.
b. Before starting distribution of the first feed (move command) block
after shifting from the rapid traverse mode to the cutting feed mode.
This checking is performed after the time set by parameter No. 3740
has elapsed after the feed block is read.
c. Before starting distribution of the first feed command block after an
S code is commanded. The wait time for checking is the same as in
item b.
d. When an S code and feed are programmed in the same block, the S
code (or command output to the spindle) is output, and the SAR signal
is checked after a fixed time elapses. If the SAR signal is set to “1”,
feed begins.
CAUTION
According to the conditions of item d above, note that if the
circuit is so designed that SAR is turned to “0”
simultaneously with the output of an S code and the change
of spindle speed is gated with DEN signal, the operation will
stop. That is, the spindle speed does not reach the
commanded speed because the CNC is waiting for the DEN
signal and distribution is not started because the CNC is
waiting for the SAR signal.
373
Spindle enable signal

ENB <F001#4>
[Function] Informs absence or presence of spindle output command.
[Output condition] The ENB signal becomes logical 0 when the command output to the
spindle becomes logical 0. Otherwise, the signal is logical 1.
During analog spindle control, S0 may not be able to stop the spindle from
rotating at low speed because of an offset voltage in the spindle motor
speed control amplifier. In such a case, the ENB signal can be used to
provide a condition to determine whether to stop the motor.
The analog spindle interface (JA8A) has electric signals (ENB1 and
ENB2) similar to the ENB. These signals work under the same conditions
as with the ENB signal.
The ENB signal can be used also for serial spindle control.
Gear selection signal

GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
<F034#0 to #2>

[Function] The gear select signal specifies a gear stage to the PMC.
[Output condition] For details of this signal, see descriptions on the M type gear selection
method in General.

GR1, GR2 <G028#1, #2>

[Function] This signal informs the CNC of the gear stage currently selected.
[Output condition] For details of this signal, see descriptions on the T type gear selection
method in General.
374
S12–bit code signal

R01O to R12O
<F036#0 to F037#3>

[Function] This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the
CNC to code signals 0 to 4095.
[Output condition] The relationship between the spindle speed command value (calculated
by the CNC) and the value output by this signal is as shown below.
S12 bit code

signal
4095
0
16383 (Digital data) ← Serial spindle
0 10V (Analog voltage) ← Analog spindle
This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the
spindle control function of the CNC to data from 0 to 4095 (for both serial
and analog spindle control) and outputs the result. Note that the
conversion result is not the actual output value. (See Section 15.4.)
Other signals
Spindle speed function See Sections 9.1 and 15.4 for these signals.
code signal S00 to S31
<F025 to F022> (Output)
Spindle speed function
strobe signal
SF<F007#2> (Output)
Spindle speed output See Section 15.4 for these signals.

control signal by PMC
SIND<G033#7> (Input)
R01l to R12l
<G032#0 to G033#3>
(Input)
SSIN <G033#6> (Input)
SGN <G033#5> (Input)
375
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G027 CON *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS2 SWS1
G028 GR2 GR1
G029 *SSTP SOR SAR
G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0
G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 ENB
F007 SF
F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O
F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 MSP SSC
[Data type] Bit

SSC Specifies whether to use constant surface speed control, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
MSP Specifies whether to use multi–spindle control, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 EVS ESF
SFA NSF SGT SGB GST ESF
[Data type] Bit

ESF When the spindle control function (S analog outpu or S serial output) is
used, and the constant surface speed control function is used or bit 4
(GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is set to 1:
0 : S codes and SF are output for all S commands.
1 : S codes and SF are not output for an S command in constant surface
speed control mode (G96 mode) or for an S command used to specify
maximum spindle speed clamping (G50S–––;).
376
NOTE
For the T series, this parametar is enabled when bit 4 (EVS)
of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1.
For the M series, SF is not output:
(1)For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
speed clamping (G92S–––;) in constant surface speed
control mode
(2)When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
GST: The SOR signal is used for:

0 : Spindle orientation
1 : Gear shift
SGB: Gear switching method
0 : Method A (Parameters No. 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindle
speed at each gear are used for gear selection.)
1 : Method B (Parameters No. 3751 and 3752 for the spindle speed at the
gear switching point are used for gear selection.)
SGT: Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74)
0 : Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method)
1 : Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the
spindle speed set in parameters No. 3761 and 3762).
EVS When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is
used, S codes and SF are:
0 : Not output for an S command.
1 : Output for an S command.
NOTE
The output of S codes and SF for an S command in constant
surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command used
to specify maximum spindle speed clamping (G50S–––;)
depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of parameter No. 3705.
NSF: When an S code command is issued in constant surface speed control,

0 : SF is output.
1 : SF is not output.
SFA: The SF signal is output:
0 : When gears are switched
1 : Irrespective of whether gears are switched
377
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 TCW CWM ORM PG2 PG1
TCW CWM ORM GTT PG2 PG1
[Data type] Bit

PG2, PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder
Magnification PG2 PG1
1 0 0
Spindle speed
2 0 1 Magnification=
4 1 0 Number of position coder revolutions
8 1 1
GTT Selection of a spindle gear selection method

0 : Type M
1 : Type T
NOTE
1 Type M:
The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to an
S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed
range of each gear specified beforehand in parameters.
Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting
the gear selection signal. The spindle speed corresponding
to the gear selected by the gear selection signal is output.
Type T:
The gear selection signal is entered. The spindle speed
corresponding to the gear selected by this signal is output.
2 When the constant surface speed control is selected, type
T is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is
specified.
3 When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the
following parameters have no effect:
No. 3705#2 SGB, No. 3751, No. 3752, No. 3705#3 SGT,
No. 3761, No. 3762, No. 3705#6 SFA, No. 3735, No. 3736
However, parameter No. 3744 is valid.
ORM Voltage polarity during spindle orientation

0 : Positive
1 : Negative
TCW, CWM Voltage polarity when the spindle speed voltage is output
TCW CWM Voltage polarity

0 0 Both M03 and M04 positive
0 1 Both M03 and M04 negative
1 0 M03 positive, M04 negative
1 1 M03 negative, M04 positive
378
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 SAM
[Data type] Bit

SAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed
0 : 4 (Normally, set to 0.)
1: 1
3730 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.1 %
Set data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed.
[Adjustment method] (1) Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter.

(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed
is the maximum voltage (10 V).
(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No.
3730.
10 (V)
Set value= × 1000
Measured data (V)
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog
output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage. Confirm that the
output voltage is 10V.
NOTE
This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.
3731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Velo
Set compesation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the
spindle speed.
Set value =–8191 Offset voltage (V)/12.5
379
[Adjustment method]
(1) Assign standard value 0 to the parameter.
(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed
is 0.
(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No.
3731.
–8191 × Offset voltage (V)
Set value=
12.5
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog
output of the spindle speed is 0. Confirm that the output voltage is 0V.
NOTE
This parameter need not to be set for serial spindles.
3732 The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during
spindle gear shift

Set the spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor
speed during gear shift.
When GST, #1 of parameter 3705 or spindle gear selection system is T
type, is set to 0, set the spindle speed during spindle orientation in rpm.
When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 1 or spindle gear selection
system is M type, set the spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift
calculated from the following formula.
Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift
Set value = ×16383 (For a serial spindle)
Maximum spindle motor speed
Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift

Set value = ×4095 (For an analog spindle)
3735
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
[Data type] Word

Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
Set value = ×4095
380
3736
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor
[Data type] Word

Set the maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor
Set value = ×4095
Spindle motor speed
Max. speed (4095, 10V)
Spindle motor max.

clamp speed
(Parameter No. 3736)
Spindle motor minimum

clamp speed
Spindle speed (S command)
3740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to the
checking of the spindle speed arrival signal.
381
3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] mm–1
Set the maximum spindle speed corresponding to each gear.
Spindle motor speed
Spindle motor max.

clamp speed
Spindle motor mini-

mum clamp speed
(Parameter No. 3735) Spindle speed
command
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 (S command)
Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed
382
3751
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2
3752
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 3
[Data type] Word

For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gears
are switched.
Spindle motor speed when the gears are switched
Set value = ×4095
Spindle motor speed
Spindle motor max. clamp speed Parameter No. 3736
Speed at gear 2–3 change point Parameter No. 3752
Speed at gear 1–2 change point Parameter No. 3751
Spindle motor minimum clamp Parameter No. 3735

speed
Spindle speed
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 command
max. max. max (S command)
speed speed speed
parameter parameter parameter
No. 3741 No. 3742 No. 3743
Gear 1–2 Gear 2–3

change point change point
383
3761
Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping
3762
[Data type] Word

When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 3705, is set to 1) for the
tapping cycle gear switching method, set the spindle speed when the gears
are switched.
Spindle motor speed
Spindle motor max.

clamp speed
Spindle motor minimum

clamp speed
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 command
Max. Max. Max. (S command)
speed speed speed
Parameter Parameter Parameter
No. 3741 No. 3742 No. 3743
Gear 1–2 Gear 2–3

parameter parameter
No. 3761 No. 3762
384
3772 Maximum spindle speed
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed.
When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of
the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum
speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is
clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter.
NOTE
1 In the M series, this parameter is valid when the constant
surface speed control is selected.
2 When the constant surface speed control is selected, the
spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed,
regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is
specified.
3 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is
not clamped.
4 When spindle speed command control is applied using the
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed
is not clamped.
5 When the multi–spindle control option is selected, set the
maximum speed for each spindle in the following
parameters:
Parameter No. 3772: Sets the maximum speed for the first
spindle.
Parameter No. 3802: Sets the maximum speed for the
second spindle.
Caution
CAUTION
This section mentioned a spindle speed control that should
be prepared on the CNC side. But it is also necessary to
design the signals to the spindle control unit.
Consult the manual of the spindle control unit used and take
necessary actions on the spindle control unit.
385
9.4
CONSTANT
SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL
General With the spindle serial output or analog output function, specifying the
surface speed (m/min or feet/min) directly in an S command makes it
possible to change the spindle output continuously so as to maintain a
constant surface speed at a programmed point. (For the rapid traverse
command, however, the surface speed for the end point is output at the
beginning of rapid traverse.)
Spindle speed N
r
Surface speed S=2πr·N
Whether or not constant surface speed control is performed is selected by

G code.
G96: Constant surface speed control performed. S in the G96 mode is
m/min or feet/min.
G97: Constant surface speed control not performed. S in the G97 mode
is min–1.
To perform constant surface speed control, the maximum spindle speed
for each gear select signal issued from the PMC side must be set by
parameter No. 3741-3744.
The gear select signal is a 2 bit code signal (GR1, GR2). The relationship
between the signal and gear number is :
GR1 GR2 Gear number
0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 4
386
Example of Spindle Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed
Analog Output with the output 10 V is 1000 min–1 for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000
min–1 for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds to the parameter No.
3741, 3742, respectively. In this case, the spindle output has the linear
relationship shown below:
N
2000min–1 G2
When gear
2 selected
G1
1000min–1 When gear
1 selected
600min–1
Spindle output
(Volt)
0 V2 V1 10
Here, S = 60 m/min is given as the surface speed; if the position of the

present X-axis cutter is 16 mm from the center, the spindle speed N
becomes 600 min–1 (S = 2πr N). Therefore, V1 (for G1) or V2 (for G2)
is calculated inside the CNC and output to the machine side.
V1: 6(V)
V2: 3(V)
The value of output voltage V is calculated automatically from the
following equations:
(i) G96
10S
V=
2πrR
R: Spindle speed (min–1) at 10V output voltage (that is , spindle speed set
by parameter No. 3741 to No. 3744)
S: Surface speed (m/min) specified by S command
r: Radius value in the X-axis direction (m)
(ii)G97
10N
V=
R
R: Spindle speed at 10V output voltage (min–1)
N: Spindle speed given by S command (min–1)
387
Spindle Serial Output The output to the spindle in spindle serial output is a digital data.
Therefore assume the following relation for calculation:
Spindle analog output (voltage) 10V = Spindle serial output
(digital data) 4095.
The above calculation becomes as follows:
The value of Spindle output D:
(i) G96
4095S
D=
2πrR
R: Spindle speed (min–1) at maximum spindle motor speed (that is ,
spindle speed set by parameter No. 3741 to No. 3744)
S: Surface speed (m/min) specified by S
r: Radius value in the X-axis direction (m)
(ii)G97
4095N
D=
R
R: Spindle speed at maximum spindle motor speed (min–1)
N: Spindle speed given by S command (min–1)
Signal
Gear selection signal Refer to section 9.3 “Spindle Speed Control”.

(Input)
GR2, GR1 <G028#2, #1>
Constant surface speed

signal CSS <F002#2>

[Function] This signal indicates that constant surface speed control is in progress.
[Output condition] “1” indicates that constant surface speed control mode (G96) is in
progress, while “0” indicates it is not.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 CSS
388
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 SSC
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

SSC Specifies whether to use constant surface speed control, as follows:
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
[Data type] Word

Set the maximum spindle speed for each gear.
3770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed contorol
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, 1 to number of control axes
set the axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed contorol.
NOTE
When 0 is set, constant surface speed control is always
applied to the X–axis. In this case, specifying P in a G96
block has no effect on the constant surface speed control.
3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96)
[Data type] Word

Set the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
The spindle speed in constant surface speed control is clamped to the
speed given by parameter 3771.
389
[Data type] Word

When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindle
speed is specified, or the spindle speed exceeds the maximum speed
because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is
NOTE
1 In the M series, this parameter is valid when the constant
surface speed control is used.
2 When the constant surface speed control is used, the
specified.
Alarm and message

190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In the constant surface speed control,

the axis specification is wrong. (See pa-
rameter No. 3770.) The specified axis
command (P) contains an illegal value.
Correct the program.
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the spindle speed corresponding to the calculated surface
speed exceeds the speed specified in the spindle speed
clamp command (G50S_ for T series and G92S_ for M
series) during the G96 mode, the actual spindle speed is
clamped at the value specified in the spindle speed clamp
command.
If the specified spindle speed is lower than the value
specified in parameter No. 3771, the actual spindle speed
is clamped at the specified speed.
2 If the constant surface speed control function is provided for
a machining center system, it affects gear change under
normal spindle control. (See Section 9.3.)
390
Note
NOTE
Simultaneous use of multi–spindle control enables constant
surface speed control for spindles other than the first
spindle. (See Section 9.9.)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED
(For Machining Center) (B–63514EN) CONTROL (G96, G97)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED

(B–63504EN) CONTROL (G96, G97)
391
9.5
SPINDLE SPEED
FLUCTUATION
DETECTION
(T SERIES)
General With this function, an overheat alarm (No. 704) is raised and the spindle
speed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle
speed deviates from the specified speed due to machine conditions.
This function is useful, for example, for preventing the seizure of the
guide bushing.
G26 enables spindle speed fluctuation detection.
G25 disables spindle speed fluctuation detection.
Detection of Spindle The function for detecting spindle speed fluctuation checks whether the
Speed Fluctuation actual speed varies for the specified speed or not. Sd or Sr, whichever is
greater, is taken as the allowable fluctuation speed (Sm). An alarm is
activated when the actual spindle speed varies for the commanded speed
(Sc) under the condition that the variation width exceeds the allowable
variation width (Sm).
Sd: The allowable constant variation width which is independent of the
specified spindle speed (Sd is set with parameter No. 4913.)
Sr: The allowable variation width which is obtained by multiplying Sc
(commanded spindle speed) by r (constant ratio). (r is set with
parameter No. 4912.)
Sm: Sd or Sr, whichever is greater
Conditions to start If the specified spindle speed Sc changes, spindle speed fluctuation
spindle speed detection starts when one of the conditions below is met:
fluctuation detection
⋅ The actual spindle speed falls in a range of (Sc – Sq) to (Sc + Sq)
where Sq = Sc q/100
q: Percent tolerance of the target spindle speed, specified in parameter
No. 4911. If the actual spindle speed is in a range of the specified speed
"q, it is assumed that the actual speed has reached the specified speed.
⋅ When time p specified in parameter No. 4914 elapses after the specified
speed Sc changes.
Parameter No. 4914, 4911, and 4912 can be rewritten also by program
(G26 PpQqRr).
392
1. When an alarm is issued after a specified spindle speed is reached
Spindle speed
Sr
Sd
Sq Specified
Sq Sd speed
Sr
Actual speed
Check No check Check
Time
Specification of Start of check Alarm
another speed
2. When an alarm is issued before a specified spindle speed is reached
Spindle speed
Sr
Sq Sd Specified
Sq Sd speed
Sr
p Actual speed
Check No check Check
Time
Specification of Start of check Alarm
another speed
Specified speed :
(Speed specified by address S and five–digit value)×(spindle override)
Actual speed : Speed detected with a position coder
393
Signal
Spindle fluctuation
detection alarm signal
SPAL <F035#0>
[Function] This signal indicates that the actual spindle speed is not within a tolerance
to the specified speed.
[Output condition] The signal becomes logical “1” when:
⋅ The actual spindle speed goes out of tolerance to the specified speed.
The signal becomes logical “0” when:
⋅ No alarm condition has been detected for spindle speed fluctuation.
⋅ An alarm condition is cleared by resetting the NC when the signal is
logical “1”.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F035 SPAL
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3708 SVD
[Data type] Bit

SVD When the SIND signal is on, the detection of spindle speed fluctuation is:
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4900 FLR
[Data type] Bit

FLR When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, the rates of
allowance (q) and fluctuation (r) those are set in parameter No. 4911 and
No. 4912, respectively are set in steps of:
0 : 1%
1 : 0.1%
394
4911 Ratio (q) of the fluctuation of spindle speed which is assumed to be the specified
spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Unit of data 1% 0. 1%
Data range 1 – 100 1 – 1000
[Valid data range]
NOTE
Unit of data depends on parameter No. 4900#0 FLR.
Set the ratio (q) of the spindle speed which is assumed to be the specified
spindle speed in the spindle speed fluctuation detection function.
4912 Spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) for which no alarm is activated in the spindle
speed fluctuation detection function
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Unit of data 1% 0. 1%
Data range 1 – 100 1 – 1000
[Valid data range]
NOTE
Unit of data depends on parameter No. 4900#0 FLR.
Set the spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) for which no alarm is activated in
the spindle speed fluctuation detection function.
4913 Spindle speed fluctuation value (d) for which no alarm is activated in the spindle
speed fluctuation detection function
[Data type] Word

Set the allowable fluctuation speed (d) for which no alarm is activated in
the spindle speed fluctuation detection function.
4914 Time (p) elapsed from when the commanded spindle speed is changed to the start
of spindle speed fluctuation detection

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time (p) elapsed from when the specified spindle speed is changed
to the start of spindle speed fluctuation detection in the spindle speed
fluctuation detection function. That is, the fluctuation in the spindle speed
is not detected until the specified time elapses from when the specified
spindle speed is changed.
395
Alarm and message

704 OVER HEAT : SPINDLE Spindle overheat in the spindle fluc-

tuation detection
(1) If the cutting load is heavy, relieve the
cutting condition.
(2) Check whether the cutting tool is share.
(3) Another possible cause is a faulty
spindle amp.
Note
NOTE
1 When an alarm is issued in automatic operation, a single
block stop occurs.
2 No check is made during spindle stop state (*SSTP = 0).
3 An alarm is issued one second later if the actual spindle
speed is found to be 0 min–1.
4 Issuing the alarm does not cause the spindle to stop
automatically.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETEC-
(For Machining Center) (B–63514EN) TION FUNCTION (G25, G26)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETEC-

(B–63504EN) TION FUNCTION (G25, G26)
396
9.6
ACTUAL SPINDLE
SPEED OUTPUT
(T SERIES)
General The PMC can read actual spindle speed.
Signal
Actual spindle speed

signal AR0 to AR15
<F040, F041>
[Function] These 16-bit binary code signals output from the CNC to the PMC the
actual spindle speed obtained by feedback pulses from the position coder
mounted on the spindle.
15
[Operation] Spindle speed =Σ{2i×Vi}min–1
i=0
where Vi = 0 when ARi is “0” and Vi = 1 when ARi is “1”
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F040 AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0
Note
NOTE
1 The AR0 - AR15 signals are always output. Their values
change every 64 msec.
2 An absolute error of about 0.5 rpm exists as a measuring
error.
397
9.7
SPINDLE
POSITIONING
(T SERIES)
General This function positions the spindle using the spindle motor and position
coder.
The function has a coarser least command increment compared with the
Cs contour control function and has no interpolation capability with other
axes. However, it can be installed with ease because the position detector
is a position coder.
Generally, the spindle positioning axes are clamped mechanically except
when positioning is under way.
In the turning process, the workpiece is rotated by the spindle to which
it is attached (spindle rotation mode), at the speed specified for the spindle
motor. The value for the spindle speed is input from the spindle controller
to the spindle amplifier.
When the optional spindle positioning function is activated, the spindle
is moved to a defined angle, and the workpiece is repositioned at that
angle. The specified move distance is input to the error counter, and the
velocity command is issued for the spindle motor through the spindle
amplifier. The position of the spindle is detected by the installed position
coder (Spindle positioning mode).
The spindle positioning function can perform the following operations:
D Release the spindle rotation mode and enter the spindle positioning
mode
Specifying a particular M code sets a reference position in the
spindle positioning mode. (This is called spindle orientation.)
D Position the spindle in the spindle positioning mode
Position an optional angle using address C (H), and position a
semi-fixed angle using a specific M code parameter.
D Release the spindle positioning mode and enter the spindle rotation
mode
Specifying a particular M code parameter changes the spindle to
the spindle rotation mode.
Also, relationship between M codes and these operations are set by
parameters (refer to No. 4950#2 (ISZ), #7 (IMB)).
· Least command increment
360 .
=. 0.088 deg
4096
· Minimum input increment
0.001 deg
· Maximum command value
±9999.999 deg
398
Selecting a spindle Any axis in the control axis group can be used as the C axis (parameter
positioning axis no. 1020). Specify *1 as its servo axis number (parameter no. 1023).
The spindle subjected to spindle positioning is the first spindle.
Switching to spindle Orientation is required in advance if spindle positioning is first performed

positioning mode after the spindle motor is used as a normal spindle, or when spindle
(Spindle orientation) positioning is interrupted. The orientation stops the spindle in a constant
position. The orientation position can be sifted in the range of "180deg
for analog spindle and in the range from 0 to 360_ for serial spindle.
To specify orientation, use the M code whose parameter No. 4960.

The orientation direction is specified by using parameters ZMIx No. 1006
#5 for analog or RETURN No. 4000#5 for serial spindles.
D Orientation speed The spindle moves at rapid traverse set by parameter No. 1420 until it
reaches the orientation enable speed (shown below). After the spindle
crosses that speed point, it performs orientation at the speed set by
parameter No. 1425. When a serial spindle is used, orientation speed
depends on the spindle.
⋅ Orientation enable speed
RPD>9 (loop gain) KPPM
Loop gain: Parameter No. 4970 (unit: 1/sec)
Set rapid traverse speed at above value.
(Example)
When the loop gain parameter No. 4970 is set to 20 [1/sec], the orientation
speed is:
RPD>9 20 1000 (360/4096)=15820 [deg /min]
The serial spindle stops at the orientation position as soon as the command
is issued. The lower limit to the rapid traverse speed value does not need
to be specified for the serial spindle to reach the orientation enable speed.
The analog spindle stops after the spindle speed is changed from rapid
traverse to the FL speed. The rapid traverse speed lower limit must be
specified for the analog spindle, or obtaining the orientation enable speed
need not be specified for the serial spindle. However, it must be specified
for the analog spindle.
D Program origin The orientation position is regarded as a program origin. It is possible to

modify the program origin using the coordinates system (G50) or
automatic coordinates system settings.
399
Command system The command system comes in two types: The first positions a semi-fixed
angle; the second positions an optional angle.
D Semi-fixed angle A 2-digit numerical value following the M address is used for the
positioning by M code command. There are six positioning angle values (Mα to M(a + 5)),
where a is set by parameter No. 4962. Indexing angle β also requires prior
parameter setting data No. 4963. Rotation can be done in any direction,
using parameter IDM data No. 4950#1.
Also, when extended specification is used (parameter No. 4950#6
ESI=1), max. 256 kinds of values (Ma to M(a+255)) can be specified.
M–code Indexing angle eg) when b=30_
Mα β 30°
M (α+1) 2β 60°
M (α+2) 3β 90°
M (α+3) 4β 120°
M (α+4) 5β 150°
M (α+5) 6β 180°
D Optional angle Numerical value following either the C or H address is used to command
positioning by C or H the position. C and H addresses are commanded in G00 mode.
address
(Example) C-1000
H4500
(i) Minimum setting unit :
0.001deg
(ii) Maximum command value:
"9999.999 deg
(iii) Decimal point input: A numerical value with decimal point can be
entered. The decimal point location is in “degrees”, for instance:
C35.0=C35 degrees
D Absolute and The semi–fixed angle is always incremental. The optional angle
incremental commands positioning using address C or H differs as follows:
Program origin
90°
180°
400
G code system A G code system B, C
Command method Command of Command of

Address used
Address used A!B on the A!B on the
and G–code
above Fig. above Fig.
Direct the end
point position by
Absolute
the distance from C C180.0 ; G90,C G90C180.0 ;
command
the program
origin.
Command by the
Incremental distance between
H H90.0 ; G91,C G91C90.0 ;
command the start and end
points.
D Spindle positioning Spindle positioning is done at the rapid traverse rate specified by
feedrate parameter No. 1420, to which linear acceleration deceleration are applied.
Overrides of 100%, 50%, 25% and F0 (parameter No. 1421) are also
applied.
D Spindle positioning reset A specific M code (parameter no. 4961) must be set when the mode is
changed from spindle positioning to normal spindle rotation.
Signal
Spindle stop complete

signal SPSTP
<G028#6>
[Function] When this signal is 1, the CNC orients and positions the spindle.
Spindle unclamp signal

SUCLP <F038#1>

[Function] This signal specifies that spindle mechanical clamping be released in a
spindle positioning sequence.
When this signal is output, unclamp the spindle on the machine (release
the brakes or extract the pin).
[Output condition] Refer to the sequence (time chart) in this section.
Spindle unclamp
completion signal
*SUCPF <G028#4>
[Function] This signal indicates that unclamping the spindle is complete in response
to the spindle unclamp signal SUCLP.
401
Spindle clamp signal

SCLP <F038#0>
[Function] This signal specifies that the spindle be clamped mechanically in a spindle
positioning sequence.
When this signal turns to 1, clamp the spindle on the machine (apply the
brakes or insert the pin).
[Output condition] Refer to the sequence (time chart) in this section.
Spindle clamp
completion signal *SCPF
<G028#5>
[Function] This signal indicates that clamping the spindle is complete in response to
the spindle clamp signal SCLP.
Other signals
Gear selection signal Refer to 9.3 “Spindle Speed Control.”

GR1, GR2, <G028#1, #2>
CTH1A, CTH2A Refer to the manual of serial spindle.
<G070#3, #2>
The spindle loop gain multiplier corresponding to the gear currently
selected by this signal is used. When the serial spindle is used, input gear
selection signals CTH1A and CTH2A, as well.
Relationship between the selected gear and spindle gear selection signal
Analog spindle Serial spindle
GR2 GR1 Selected gear CTH1A CTH2A Selected gear
0 0 1st gear 0 0 HIGH

0 1 2nd gear 0 1 MEDIUM HIGH
1 0 3rd gear 1 0 MEDIUM LOW
1 1 4th gear 1 1 LOW
402
Spindle orientation
completion signal
ZPx<F094>
[Function] This signal indicates that the spindle orientation for the spindle
positioning has been completed.
[Output condition] When spindle orientation is complete, this signal turns to 1. When spindle
positioning is performed or cleared, it turns to 0.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G028 SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1
G070 CTH1A CTH2A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F038 SUCLP SCLP
403
Sequence (Time chart)
- Spindle Orientation
M code
MF
SPSTP POSITION LOOP

INITIALIZE
Spindle enable on
SUCLP
*SUCPF
Spindle
movement
ZPx
SCLP
Spindle enable off
*SCPF
FIN
⇒ POSITION LOOP INITIALIZE is performed within the CNC.

⇒ Spindle ENABLE ON/OFF specifies that the PMC ladder direct the
spindle control unit to run or stop the spindle motor.
(Example) For serial spindles, the ladder should contain the following
command or something like that:
ENABLE ON, and SFRA<G070#5> ⇒ 1
ENABLE OFF, and SFRA<G070#5> ⇒ 0
For details, refer to the manual for the spindle control unit you actually
use.
404
- Spindle Positioning by M code
M code
MF
SPSTP
Spindle enable on
SUCLP
*SUCPF
Spindle
movement
SCLP
Spindle enable off
*SCPF
FIN
405
- Spindle Positioning by Address C,H
SPSTP
Spindle enable ON
SUCLP
*SUPCF
Spindle
movement
SCLP
Spindle enable
OFF
*SCPF
- Spindle Positioning Reset
M code
MF
SPSTP
POSITION CODER INITIALIZE
SUCLP
*SUPCF
FIN
⇒ POSITION CODER INITIALIZE is performed only in the CNC.
406
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 AXC
[Data type] Bit

AXC Specifies whether to use spindle positioning, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
NOTE
It is impossible to select spindle positioning–based Cs
contour control and serial spindle–based Cs contour control
at the same time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx

NOTE
When the serial spindle is being used, this parameter is
invalid for the spindle positioning axis.

Axis name Set value Axis name Set value Axis name Set value
X 88 U 85 A 65
Y 89 V 86 B 66
Z 90 W 87 C 67
NOTE
names.
axis.
The axis name of spindle positioning is C axis.
407
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis

Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Generally, the same number shall be assigned to the control axis and the
corresponding servo axis.
Set –1 to the C axis when spindle positioning function is used.
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system
setting is performed

Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used
for setting a coordinate system automatically.
For spindle positioning.

each axis.
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
[Unit of data] deg/min

[Unit of data] deg/min
408
NOTE
When serial spindle is used, this parameter becomes
invalid.
1620 Time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Set time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for
each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1816 DM3x DM2x DM1x

DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiply
Set this parameter to “111” (=4) for spindle positioning.
1820 Command multiply for each axis (CMR)

D When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27
1
Set value= +100 [Valid data range: 102 to 127]
(Command multiply)
D When command multiply is 0.5 to 48
Set value = 2 command multiply [Valid data range: 1 to 96]
Set this parameter to 2 for spindle positioning.

[Unit of data]
Set this parameter to 10000 for spindle positioning.

Set the in–position width for each axis.
409



[Valid data range] 0 to ±99999999
Set a grid shift for each axis.
NOTE
Set this parameter when the analog spindle is used. When
the serial spindle is used, set the value to No. 4073.
1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis

Set the backlash compensation value for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 CCR
[Data type] Bit

CCR Addresses used for chamfering and corner rounding
0 : Address used for chamfering and corner rounding is I or K, not C. In
direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ’C, ’R, and ’A
(with comma) are used in stead of C, R, and A.
1 : Addresses used for chamfering, corner rounding, and direct drawing
dimension programming are C and R without comma. Thus,
addresses C cannot be used as the names of axes.
Always set this parameter to “0” for spindle positioning.
410
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4000 RETRN
[Data type] Bit

RETRN Reference position return direction of spindle.
0 : CCW (Counter clockwise)
1 : CW (Clockwise)
NOTE
The direction for spindle orientation (or reference position
return) in spindle positioning using a serial spindle is
determined by this parameter.
4044 Velocity loop proportion gain in servo mode (High gear)
4045 Velocity loop proportion gain in servo mode ( Low gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
This parameter sets a velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode
(spindle positioning, rigid tapping, etc.)
NOTE
Set this parameter when serial spindle is used.
4052 Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode (High gear)
4053 Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode (Low gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
This parameter sets a velocity loop integral gain in servo mode (spindle
positioning, rigid tapping, etc.)
NOTE
Set this parameter when serial spindle is used.
411
4056 Gear ratio (HIGH)
4057 Gear ration (MEDIUM HIGH)
4058 Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW)
4059 Gear ratio (LOW)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Motor speed per spindle rotation 100
These parameters set the gear ration between the spindle and AC spindle
motor.
NOTE
Set the gear ration between spindle and AC spindle motor
when the spindle positioning is performed with serial
spindle. For which gear is used, it depends on the
clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B.
4065 Position gain in servo mode (HIGH)
4066 Position gain in servo mode (MEDIUM HIGH)
4067 Position gain in servo mode (MEDIUM LOW)
4068 Position gain in servo mode (LOW)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.01 sec–1
This parameter sets a servo loop gain in servo mode.
(spindle positioning, rigid tapping, etc.)
NOTE
When the spindle positioning by a serial spindle is
performed, set the position control loop gain in place of
parameter No. 4970. For which gear is used, it depends on
the clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B.
412
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4950 IMB ESI TRV ISZ IDM IOR
[Data type] Bit

IOR Resetting the system in the spindle positioning mode
0 : Does not releases the mode.
1 : Releases the mode
IDM The positioning direction for the spindle using a M code is
0 : The positive direction
1 : The negative direction
ISZ When an M code for spindle orientation is specified in spindle
positioning:
0 : The spindle rotation mode is cleared and the mode is switched to the
spindle positioning mode, and spindle orientation operation is
performed.
1 : The spindle rotation mode is cleared and the mode is switched to the
spindle positioning mode but spindle orientation operation is not
performed.
TRV Direction of rotation of spindle positioning
0 : Normal
1 : Reverse
ESI Selection of a spindle positioning specification
0 : The conventional specificaion is used.
1 : The extended specificaion is used.
NOTE
The extended specification includes the following two
extensions:
D With the conventional specification, the number of M
codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle is always
6. With the extended specification, an arbitrary number
of such M codes from 1 to 256 can be selected by
parameter setting (See parameter No. 4964.)
D The maximum feedrate for spindle positioning (setting of
parameter No. 1420) can be extended from 240000 to
269000 (unit: 10 deg/min).
IMB When the spindle positioning function is used, half–fixed angle

positioning based on M codes uses:
0 : Specification A
1 : Specification B
413
NOTE
In the case of half–fixed angle positioning based on M
codes, three types of spindle positioning operations can
occur:
(1)The spindle rotation mode is cleared, then the mode is
switched to the spindle positioning mode.
(2)Spindle positioning is performed in the spindle
positioning mode.
(3)The spindle positioning mode is cleared, then the mode
is switched to the spindle rotation mode.
In the case of specifiection A:
Operations (1) to (3) are specified using separate M
codes.
(1)–Specified using M codes for performing spindle
orientation.
(See parameter No. 4960)
(2)–Specified using M codes for specifying a spindle
positioning angle. (See parameter No. 4962)
(3)–Specified using M codes for clearing spindle positioning
operation. (See parameter No. 4961.)
In the case of specification B:
When M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle are
specified, operations (1) to (3) are performed successively.
(See parameter No. 4962.)
4960 M code specifying the spindle orientation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Integer
Set an M code to change the spindle rotating mode to the spindle
positioning mode. Setting the M code performs the spindle orientation.
Spindle positioning can be specified from the next block.
4961 M code releasing the spindle positioning mode
[Data type] Word

Set the M code to release the spindle positioning mode and to change the
mode to the spindle rotating mode.
414
4962 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle
[Data type] Word

Two methods are availablel for specifying spindle positioning. One
method uses address C for arbitrary–angle positioning. The other use an
M code for half–fixed angle positioning. This parameter sets an M code
for the latter method.
D When bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950=0
Six M code from M a to M(a+5) are used for half–fixed angle
positioning, when a is the value of this parameter.
D When bit 6(ESI) of parameter No. 4950=1
Set the start M code in this parameter, and set the number of M codes
in parameter No. 4964. Then b M codes from Ma to M(a+b–1) are
used for half fixed angle positioning.
The table below indicates the relationship between the M codes and
positioning angles.
Example: Positioning
M code Positioning angle
angle when q = 30_
Mα θ 30°
M (α+1) 2θ 60°
M (α+2) 3θ 90°
M (α+3) 4θ 120°
M (α+4) 5θ 150°
M (α+5) 6θ 180°
L L L
M (α+n) (n+1)θ
NOTE
θ represents the basic angular diplacement set in
pamrameter No. 4963.
4963 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] deg
This parameter sets a basic angular displacement used for half–fixed
angle positioning using M codes.
415
4964 Number of M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, 1 to 255
This parameter sets the number of M codes used for Half–fixed angle
positioning using M codes.
As many M codes as the number specified in this parameter, starting with
the M code specified in parameter No. 4962, are used to specify half–fixed
angle positioning.
Let a be the value of parameter No. 4962, and let b be the value of
parameter No. 4964. That is, M codes from Ma to M (a+b–1) are used
for half–fixed angle positioning.
WARNING
Make sure that M codes from Ma to M (a+b–1) do not
duplicate other M codes.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No.
4950=1.
2 Setting this parameter to 0 has the same effect as setting 6.
That is, M code from Ma to M (a+5) are used for half–fixed
angle positioning.
4970 Servo loop gain of the spindle
[Data type] Word

Set the servo loop gain of the spindle in the spindle positioning mode.
NOTE
This is the parameter for analog spindle.
416
4971 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 1
[Data type] Word

Set the servo loop gain multipliers of the spindle for gears 1 to 4.
The multipliers are used to convert the amount of the position deviation
to the voltage used in the velocity command. Assign the data obtained
from the following equation to the parameters.
Loop gain multiplier = 2048000 E A/L
where;
E: Voltage required to rotate the spindle motor at 1000 min–1 in the
velocity command
L: Rotation angle of the spindle per one motor rotation (normally 360)
A: Unit used for the detection (degree)
Example) Let E be 2.2 V, L be 360 degrees, and A be 0.088
degrees/pulse.
Loop gain multiplier = 2048000 2.2 0.088/360 =

1101
NOTE
1 When the voltage specified for the spindle motor is 10 V at
a spindle speed of 4500 min–1, E is regarded as 2.2 V.
2 The above parameters No. 4971 to No. 4974 are for analog
spindle.
417
Alarm and message

053 TOO MANY ADDRESS In the chamfering and corner R com-

COMMANDS mands, two or more of I, K and R are
specified. Otherwise, the character af-
ter a comma(”,”) is not C or R in direct
drawing dimensions programming. Or
comma (“,”) was specified with parame-
ter No. 3405#4=1. Modify the program.
056 NO END POINT & ANGLE Neither the end point nor angle is speci-
IN CHF/CNR fied in the command for the block next
to that for which only the angle is speci-
fied (A). In the chamfering or corner R
command, I(K) is commanded for the
X(Z) axis.
Modify the program.
135 SPINDLE ORIENTATION Without any spindle orientation , an at-
PLEASE tept was made for spindle indexing.
Perform spindle orientation.
136 C/H–CODE & MOVE CMD A move command of other axes was
IN SAME BLK. specified to the same block as spindle
indexing addresses C, H. Modify the
program.
137 M–CODE & MOVE CMD IN A move command of other axes was
SAME BLK. specified to the same block as M–code
related to spindle indexing. Modify the
program.
194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour control mode, spindle posi-
SYNCHRO–MODE tioning (Cs–axis control) mode, or rigid
tapping mode was specified during the
serial spindle synchronous control
mode. Correct the program so that the
serial spindle synchronous control
mode is released in advance.
751 SPINDLE–1 ALARM This alarm indicates in the NC that an
DETECT (AL–XX) alarm is generated in the spindle unit of
the system with the serial spindle. The
alarm is displayed in form AL–XX (XX is
a number). The alarm number XX is the
number indicated on the spindle ampli-
fier. The CNC holds this number and
displays on the screen.
752 SPINDLE–1 MODE This alarm is generated if the system
CHANGE ERROR does not properly terminate a mode
change. The modes include the Cs
contouring, spindle positioning, rigid
tapping, and spindle control modes.
The alarm is activated if the spindle
control unit does not respond correctly
to the mode change command issued
by the NC.
418
Caution
CAUTION
1 Feed hold is invalid during spindle positioning.
2 Spindle positioning stops when emergency stop is applied;
restart with orientation operation.
3 Dry run, machine lock, and auxiliary function lock are not
available during spindle positioning.
4 The spindle positioning function and the serial spindle Cs
contour control function cannot be used together. If both
functions are used, positioning has priority.
5 Specify parameter No. 4962 even if semi-fixed angle
positioning is not used; otherwise M codes (M00 to M05) do
not work.
Note
NOTE
1 Command spindle positioning with an independent block.
X- and Y-axis positioning cannot be commanded to the
same block.
2 Spindle positioning cannot be done by manual operation.
3 Automatic drift compensation is not effective for spindle
positioning. To adjust the amount of drift compensation for
each axis, set values manually and adjust the spindle
amplifier to minimize the spindle motor rotation at a voltage
of 0V. (parameter No. 3731). Insufficient adjustment
causes poor positioning accuracy. Drift compensation is not
needed with a serial spindle.
4 The machine coordinates for the spindle positioning axis
are displayed in pulses units.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) SPINDLE POSITIONING FUNCTION
(B–63504EN)
419
9.8
Cs CONTOUR
CONTROL
General The Cs contour control function positions the serial spindle using the
spindle motor in conjunction with a dedicated detector mounted on the
spindle.
This function can perform more accurate positioning than the spindle
positioning function, and has an interpolation capability with other servo
axes.
D Increment system Least input increment: 0.001 [deg]

Least command increment: 0.001 [deg]
D Maximum command "9999.999 [deg]

value
D Feedrate Rapid traverse rate: 30 to 2400 [deg/min] (parameter no.1420)
Cutting feedrate (feed per minute):

1 to 15000 [deg/min] (for machines that use millimeters)
0.01 to 600 [deg/min] (for machines that use inches)
Explanations The speed of the serial spindle is controlled by the spindle speed control
function, while the spindle positioning is controlled by the Cs contouring
control function (“spindle contour control”). Spindle speed control
rotates the spindle using the velocity command, while the spindle contour
control rotates the spindle using the move command.
Switching between spindle speed control and spindle contour control is

performed by the DI signal from the PMC.
In the Cs contour control mode, the Cs contour control axis can be

operated either manually or automatically, in the same way as normal
servo axes.
(For a reference position return, see the relevant description in this

section.)
Setting the Cs contour The axis used for Cs contour control must be set as an axis of the axes
control axis controlled by the CNC. Using parameter no. 1023, assign “*1” in the
field corresponding to the chosen servo axis. Also set the spindle contour
control axis as a rotation axis by setting ROTx of parameter No. 1006#0
and No. 1022.
The spindle that operates under Cs contour control is a serial spindle as

the first spindle.
420
Command Address The address for the move command in Cs contour control is the axis name
specified in parameter no.1020. This address is arbitrary.
When the second auxiliary function option is valid, address B cannot be

used for the name of the contour axis. For the T series machines, when
either address A or C is used for the name of the contour axis, clear CCR
(parameter no. 3405#4) to “0”.
Setting Axes that Up to three servo axes can be specified for linear interpolation against the
interpolate with Cs Cs contour control axis, by setting defined parameters :
contour axis D When no servo axis is used for interpolation, specify “0” in parameter
nos. 3900, 3910, 3920.
D When one or more servo axes are used for interpolation, set the
parameter for each as follows :
(1) Assign the axis number (1 to 4) to each of the servo axes used for
interpolation in parameter nos. 39n0 (n=0, 1, or 2).
(2) Set the loop gain for each of the servo axes specified in (1) in parameter
nos. 39n1, 39n2, 39n3, 39n4. The loop gain must be the position loop
gain for the Cs contour control axis or a desired value. Four parameters
are provided to correspond to the four gears of the spindle. Use those
parameters according to the inputs of the serial spindle clutch /gear
signal CTH1A, CTH2A <G70#3, #2>.
NOTE
The fine acceleration/deceleration function cannot be used
between the servo axis and Cs contour control axis.
(3) When the number of servo axes to be used for interpolation is smaller
than three, set “0” in remaining parameter nos. 39n0.
Switching spindle - Switching from spindle speed control to Cs contour control

speed control/Cs The serial spindle is put in the Cs contour control mode by setting
contour control the DI signal CON (G027#7) to “1”. When the mode is switched
while the spindle is rotating, the spindle stops immediately to per-
form the change.
- Switching from Cs contour control to spindle speed control
Turning the DI signal CON (G027#7) to “0” puts the serial spindle
in spindle speed control mode. Confirm that the move command
for the spindle has been completed, then specify the switch. If it
is switched while the spindle is moving, the machine enters
interlock, or excessive position deviation alarm occurs.
421
Reference Position After the serial spindle is switched from spindle speed control to Cs
Return of Cs Contour contour control mode, the current position is undefined. Return the
Control Axis spindle to the reference position.
The reference position return of the Cs contour control axis is as follows:

- In manual mode
After the serial spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, move
the spindle in the direction of the reference position by turning on
the feed axis and direction select signal (+Jn (G100) or *Jn
(G102)). The spindle starts the movement to the reference
position; when it reaches that position, the reference position return
completion signal (ZPn (F094)) turns to “1”.
Turning any feed axis and direction select signal to “1” moves the
tool in the reference position direction.
- In the automatic mode
After the serial spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, the
spindle returns to the reference position when G28 is specified.
Under certain conditions, the G00 command returns the spindle to
the reference position, depending upon the setting of parameter
NRF no. 3700#1:
(i) G00 command
Returning to the reference position using the G00 command
differs from using the G28 command or the manual method.
The serial spindle can be positioned at any point using the
G00 command, while the latter two methods always return the
serial spindle to the reference position.
When parameter NRF no. 3700#1 is “0” and the serial spindle
is put in the Cs contour control mode, if the G00 command is
given before returning the spindle to the reference position,
the serial spindle returns to the reference position and indexes
it before moving to the commanded position. After
positioning at the reference position, the reference position
return completion signal (ZPn(F094)) turns to “1”. When the
G00 command is issued after the serial spindle has returned
to the reference position at least once, normal positioning
operation is executed.
(ii) G28 command
After the serial spindle is put in the Cs contour control mode,
issuing the G28 command stops the spindle motor, then
moves the spindle to the midpoint. The spindle then returns
to the reference position. At this point, the reference position
return completion signal (ZPn F094) turns to “1”. When the
serial spindle has returned to the reference position once while
in the Cs contour control mode, the G28 command positions
the spindle at the reference position without moving to the
midpoint and ZPn comes on.
422
- Interruption of reference position return

(i) Manual operation
Return to the reference position can be interrupted by reset-
ting, emergency stop, or turning off the feed axis and direction
select signal. When the interrupted return operation is re-
sumed, start from the beginning.
(ii) Automatic operation
Return to the reference position can be interrupted by reset-
ting, emergency stop, or feed hold. When the interrupted re-
turn operation is resumed, start from the beginning.
Operation of Cs contour If a reference position return is performed on the Cs contour control axis,
control axis the axis can be operated in the same way as a normal NC axis.
(Manual/Automatic) In the spindle speed control mode, on the other hand, it does not operate
as the Cs contour control axis, and P/S alarm 197 occurs during automatic
operation.
In the spindle speed mode, inhibit manual operation of the Cs contour
control axis using the PMC ladder.
Display of Position Error

of Cs Contour Control
Axis
DGN No.
418 Position deviation amount of 1st spindle
Position deviation amount of the position loop for the 1st spindle.
This diagnostic display shows information obtained from the serial
spindle control unit. This diagnosis displays position error of the spindle
contour axis during spindle contour control.
The position error can also be checked using a servo error display (DGN
of No. 300x) for an axis under Cs contour control.
Signal
Spindle contour control

change signal
CON <G027#7>
[Function] This signal specifies that with the Cs contour control function, the first
serial spindle be switched between the spindle speed control and Cs
contour control modes.
When this signal turns to ”1”, the spindle mode changes from speed
control to Cs contour control.
If the spindle is moving at the time of the change, it stops immediately.
Turning the signal to “0” changes the spindle mode from Cs contour
control back to speed control.
423
Spindle contour control

change completion
signal FSCSL <F004#1>
[Function] This signal indicates the axis is under Cs contour control.
[Output condition] Spindle speed control mode → 0
Cs contour control mode → 1
Time Chart
Spindle speed control Cs contour control Spindle speed control
CON
Gear change and

operation of spindle
motor must be
completed
FSCSL
Switching internal control Switching internal control
NOTE
Any mechanical gear change needed and inputs for GR1,
GR2, CTH1A, and CTH2A must be completed before the
CON signal selects Cs contour control mode.
A servo excessive error may be generated if the spindle
motor is not ready for operation. (Signal SRVA, SFRA
<G070#4, #5> or other required signals must be
appropriately processed on the machine side).
Other signals
Gear select signal (Input) Refer to 9.3 “Spindle speed Control”.

GR1, GR2, <G028#1, #2>
Gear select signal
(Output)
GR3O, GR2O, GR1O
<F034#2, #1, #0>
(M series)
424
Clutch/Gear signal Refer to the manual of serial spindle.

(Serial spindle)
These signals determine what parameter (loop gain, etc.) to be used for
CTH1A, CTH2A
each gear position.
<G070#3, #2>
CTH1A and CTH2A are the gear select signals for the serial spindle, but
GR1 and GR2 must also be set. Do not change these signals while in the
Cs contour control mode.
Relationship between gears selected and spindle gear select signals
CNC side
Serial spindle
T/M series with CSSC M series without CSSC
GR2 GR1 Gear selection GR3O GR2O GR1O Gear selection CTH1A CTH2A Gear selection
0 0 1st stage 0 0 1 1st stage 0 0 1st stage
0 1 2nd stage 0 1 0 2nd stage 0 1 2nd stage
1 0 3rd stage 1 0 0 3rd stage 1 0 3rd stage
1 1 4th stage 1 1 4th stage
CSSC: Constant surface speed control
NOTE
1 When the spindle gear select method is M type in M series,
and parameter No. 3706#4 GTT=0, GR1 and GR2 do not
need to be input. Input CTH1A and CTH2A when gears are
changed using GR1O, GR2O and GR3O.
2 The above combination of clutch/gear signals CTH1A and
CTH2A is an example.
The serial spindle gear is selected by CHT1A and CHT2A
independently of gear selection on the CNC side. So, enter
necessary signals, and set the corresponding serial spindle
parameters.
Cs contour control axis

reference position return
completion signal
ZPx <F094>
[Function] This signal indicates that a reference position return has been made for the
Cs contour control axis.
[Output condition] If a manual reference position return or automatic reference position
return by G28 is performed during the Cs contour control mode, this
signal becomes logical 1 when the Cs contour control axis reaches the
reference position.
425
Signals on manual Feed axis and direction select signal +Jn, *Jn <G100, G102> (Input)
operation Manual handle feed axis select signal HSnA, HSnB, HSnC, HSnD
<G018, G019> (Input) (Refer to respective items in this manual)
The Cs contour control axis can be manually operated in the same way as
normal servo axes, except for a manual reference position return. In the
spindle speed control mode, however, manual operations for the Cs
contour control axis must be inhibited using the PMC ladder, etc.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G027 CON
G028 GR2 GR1
G070 MRDYA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O
F044 FSCSL
Parameter The following describes major parameters.
In addition, parameters such as axis feedrate, acceleration/deceleration,

and display can be used. Also, digital servo parameters (No. 2000 ∼) for
the Cs contour axis are not required to be set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 SCS
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

SCS Specifies whether to use Cs contour control, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
NOTE
It is impossible to select spindle positioning–based Cs
contour control and serial spindle–based Cs contour control
at the same time.
426
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROTx

Type of controlled axis
0 : Linear axis
1 : Rotation axis
NOTE
Inch/metric conversion cannot be made to the rotation axis.
The machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 + O 360
deg. Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is
made in the manual reference position return direction and
the move amount does not exceed one rotation.
Set 1 as the rotation axis to the Cs contour control axis.

Axis Set Axis Set Axis Set Axis Set
name value name value name value name value
X 88 U 85 A 65 E 69
Y 89 V 86 B 66 – –
Z 90 W 87 C 67 – –
NOTE
names.
axis.
3 When the second auxiliary function is valid, address B
cannot be used as an axis name. In the T series, when
address A or C is used, set parameter CCR (No. 3405#4)
to 0.
4 If you use letter E as an axis name in format FS10/11, be sue
to use address F in the major–axis direction lead command
for equal–lead threading (G32).
Any axis name can be used for Cs contour control axis except for above
limitation.
427

Set value Meaning
Set 0 to the Cs contour control axis.
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis

Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Generally, the same number shall be assigned to the control axis and the
corresponding servo axis.
Set –1 as the number of servo axis to the Cs contour control axis.
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system
setting is performed

Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used
for setting a coordinate system automatically.

[Valid data range] 30 to 240000 (IS–A, IS–B)
30 to 120000 (IS–C)
each axis.
428
1620 Time constant used in linear acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped acceleration/

deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Set the time constant used in linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid
traverse for each axis.
1820 Command multiply for each axis (CMR)

D When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27
1
Set value= +100 [Valid data range: 102 to 127]
(Command multiply)
D When command multiply is 0.5 to 48
Set value = 2 command multiply [Valid data range: 1 to 96]

Set the in–position width for each axis.


1851 Backlash compensation value used for rapid traverse for each axis

[Valid data range] *9999 to +9999
Set the backlash compensation value for each axis.
429
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3700 NRF
[Data type] Bit

NRF The first positioning command by G00 after the serial spindle is switched
to Cs axis contouring control performs:
0 : Positioning after returning to the reference position.
1 : Normal positioning
3900 The number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
[Data type] Byte

Set the number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
(1st group)
NOTE
Set 0 when there is no servo axis that interpolates with Cs
contour control axis.
3901 Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during
interpolation (High gear)
interpolation (Medium high gear)
interpolation (Medium low gear)
interpolation (Low gear)

Set the servo loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour
control axis on each spindle gear (1st group)
3910 Number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control

(2nd group)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or only one servo axis that
interpolates with Cs contour control axis, set this parameter
to 0.
430

control axis on each spindle gear (2nd group)
3920 Number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control

(3rd group)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or less than three servo axes
that interpolates with Cs contour control axis, set this
parameter to 0.

control axis on each spindle gear (3rd group)
431
4056 Gear ratio (HIGH)
4057 Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH)
4058 Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW)
4059 Gear ratio (LOW)

[Unit of data] (Number of motor rotations to one spindle rotation) 100
Set the gear ratio between spindle and AC spindle motor.
NOTE
For which gear ratio is used in actual spindle operation, it
depends on clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A,
CTH2A.
4069 Position gain at Cs contour control (High gear)
4070 Position gain at Cs contour control (Medium High gear)
4071 Position gain at Cs contour control (Medium Low gear)
4072 Position gain at Cs contour control (Low gear)

Set the position gain at Cs contour control.
NOTE
For which position gain is used in actual spindle operation,
it depends on clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A,
CTH2A.
4135 Grid shift value at Cs contour control

[Unit of data] 1 pulse unit (360000 p/rev)
Set the number of pulses from an issue of one–rotation signal to the
machine zero point in Cs contour control.
432
Alarm and message

194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour control mode, spindle positioning

SYNCHRO–MODE (Cs–axis control) mode, or rigid tapping
mode was specified during the serial spindle
synchronous control mode. Correct the pro-
gram so that the serial spindle synchronous
control mode is released in advance.
197 C–AXIS COMMANDED IN The program specified a movement along the

SPINDLE MODE Cs contour control axis when the signal
CON(G027#7) was off. Correct the program,
or consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the
reason the signal is not turned on.
751 First spindle alarm detec- In a system with serial spindles at-
tion (AL–XX) tached, this is a warning alarm mes-
sage that indicates an alarm on the
spindle amplifier side to be displayed
on the CRT of the NC. An alarm on the
spindle amplifier side is displayed on
the spindle amplifier, as AL–XX (where
XX represents a number).
This alarm number (XX) is displayed by
latching the spindle alarm number de-
tected by the CNC as the cause of this
alarm.
752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE This alarm is generated if the system does
CHANGE FAULT not properly terminate a mode change. The
modes include the Cs contouring, spindle
positioning,rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle
control unit does not respond correctly to the
mode change command issued by the NC.
Warning
WARNING
In the spindle contour control mode, do not switch the
spindle gears. When the gears need to be changed put the
system in the spindle speed control mode first.
Note
NOTE
In the T series machines, the spindle contour control
function and the spindle positioning function cannot be
used at the same time. If both functions are specified
simultaneously, the spindle positioning function takes
precedence.
433
Reference item
FANUC SERVO Cs Contour Control Function
AMPLIFIER a series
DESCRIPTIONS (B–65162E)
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR Cs Contour Control Function Start–up Procedure

a series PARAMETER MANUAL
(B–65160E)
434
9.9
MULTI–SPINDLE
CONTROL (T SERIES)
General In addition to the conventional (first) spindle, another (second) spindle

can be controlled. These additional spindles allow two-stage gear
changes. An S code is used for a command to any of these spindles; which
spindle is selected is determined by a signal from the PMC. The second
spindle can change gears in 2 stages.
Also, the maximum spindle speed can be set to each spindle to clamp the
spindle speed of each spindle (set by parameters No. 3772 and 3802).
When the second spindle is used, one position coder interface channel is
added. Which position coder is selected is determined by a PMC signal.
(The conventional and additional position coders are referred to as the
first position coder and second position coder, respectively, throughout
the remainder of this discussion.)
Selection between 1st position coder and 2nd position coder is made by
a signal from PMC.
The spindle serial output option is required to use multi-spindle control.
Control Two multi-spindle control methods are available. Type A allows the
SIND function (controlling the spindle motor speed based on the PMC)
to be used only for the first spindle. Type B allows the SIND function to
be used for each of the two spindles independently.
Basic control (Common An S command is sent as a speed command to each spindle selected, using
to TYPE-A and TYPE-B) a spindle selection signal (SWS1 to SWS2 <G027#0-#1>). Each spindle
rotates at the specified speed. If a spindle is not sent a spindle selection
signal, it continues to rotate at its previous speed. This allows the spindles
to rotate at different speeds at the same time.
Each spindle also has a spindle stop signal (*SSTP1 to *SSTP2
<G027#3-#4>) to stop its rotation; an unused spindle can still be stopped.
There is a spindle enable signal to control each spindle; ENB <F001#4>

controls the first spindle, while ENB2 <F038#2> control the second and
third spindles, respectively.
The PMC signal PC2SLC <G028#7> is used to select between the first
and second position coders.
Multi-spindle control When parameter MSI (No. 3709#2)=0, TYPE-A is used.

(TYPE-A)
When the first spindle is selected with the SWS1 signal, the SIND signal
<G033#7> is used to determine whether the spindle analog voltage is
controlled by the PMC or CNC; then signals R01I to R12I <G0033#3 to
G0032#0> are used to set that spindle’s analog voltage. These signals do
not affect the second spindle.
435
The PMC-based polarity (rotation direction) control signals SGN and

SSIN <G033#5,#6> will function for any spindle selected by SWS1 to
SWS2.
The concept of Type A multi-spindle control is outlined below.
SIND
SWS 1 * SSTP 1
Hold 1 First spindle
S command
SWS 2 * SSTP 2
Hold 2 Second spindle
Multi-spindle control Select Type B control by setting parameter MSI No. 3709#2 to “1”.
(TYPE-B)
Each spindle has its own SIND, SSIN and SGN signals.
Each signal functions regardless of selection state of the spindle selection
signals (SWS1 to SWS2).
When either the spindle selection signal or the SIND signal for the first
or second spindle is set to “1”, the polarity control signals SSIN, SGN will
function. The first spindle is controlled by the SGN and SSIN signals; the
second and third spindles are controlled by SGN2 <G035#5>, and SSIN2
<G035#6>, respectively.
The concept of Type B multi-spindle control outlined below.
SIND
SWS 1
* SSTP 1
Hold 1 First spindle
S command SIND2
SWS 2
* SSTP 2
Hold 2 Second spindle
Spindles to be controlled In multi-spindle control, the first spindle is the first serial spindle, the
second spindle is the second serial spindle.
436
Connection of spindle Spindle configuration when multi-spindle control is used:

· Spindle serial output
Necessary
· Parameter NSP (No. 8133#3 multi–spindle control) = 1
option and
parameter · Parameter SS2 (No. 3701#4) = 1
(to use second spindle)
Connection of · JA7A (on CNC main board)
each spindle →JA7B (on first spindle control unit)
· JA7A (on first spindle control unit)
→JA7B (on second spindle control unit)
Connection of First position coder: Feedback information obtained by posi-
each position tion coder or equivalent sensor connected to first spindle con-
coder trol unit is fed to CNC via serial interface.
Second position coder: Feedback information obtained by
position coder or equivalent sensor connected to second
spindle control unit is fed to CNC via serial interface through
1st spindle control unit
Note) When second spindle is not connected, second posi-
tion coder cannot be used.
For detailed information about serial spindle connection, refer to the

manuals on the serial spindles.
Relationship with other

functions
D Constant surface speed The control function for keeping the surface speed constant can be used
control with any of the two spindles if the spindle speed is within the range
allowable for this function. (When the position coder is required, it can
be installed on the 1st or 2nd spindle). The spindle selection signal (SWS
1–2) for the spindle must stay set at “1” during machining using this
function.
D Spindle speed When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is combined with
fluctuation detection multi-spindle control, two position coders can be used. Monitor the states
of the second position coder selection signal (PL2SLC) and spindle
selection signals (SWS 1–2).
D Actual spindle speed The actual spindle speed output function conveys speed information
output obtained from the selected position coder specified by the 2nd position
coder selection signal (PC2SLC) to the PMC.
D Spindle positioning or When the spindle motor is used for positioning, as in the case of spindle
Cs contour control positioning or Cs contour control, the first spindle functions as the
positioning spindle. Switching to the positioning mode and positioning
command are possible irrespective of the state of the selection signal of
the first spindle (SWS1). This means that the first spindle cannot be
controlled as a spindle in positioning mode, but the second spindle can
be controlled as usual.
D Polygon turning Polygon turning rotates a tool axis in phase with the spindle. To perform
(T series) polygon turning when multi-spindle control issued, select the spindle and
the position coder associated with the spindle.
437
D Spindle synchronization During spindle synchronization or simplified synchronization control,

and simplified the second spindle operates in phase with the first spindle. Multi-spindle
synchronization control control for the first spindle can be used during synchronization control,
but multi-spindle control for the second spindle is disabled.
D Rigid tapping Using the spindle selection signal (SWS 1–2), rigid tapping can use either
the first or second spindle as the rigid tap spindle. There are certain
restrictions:
D Set the SWS 1 to 2 signals before directing rigid tapping;
D Do not switch the SWS 1 to 2 signals during rigid tapping; and
D Use the appropriate ENB signal (either ENB or ENB2) for the selected
spindle as the ENB signal for the rigid tapping PMC sequence.
The spindles not used for rigid tapping can be rotated at a speed specified
before rigid tapping starts, or can be stopped.
Signal
Spindle Selection Signal

SWS1, SWS2 <G027#0,
#1>
[Function] Controls whether S command specified to the NC is output to the spindle
or not in multi-spindle.
SWS1 1 : Outputs a speed command to the first spindle.
0 : Outputs no speed command to the first spindle.
SWS2 1 : Outputs a speed command to the second spindle.
0 : Outputs no speed command to the second spindle.
Individual spindle stop

signal *SSTP1, *SSTP2
<G027#3, #4>

[Function] Effective only to multi-spindle, each spindle can be stopped by this signal.
*SSTP1 1 : Does not set 0 min–1 for output to the first spindle.
0 : Sets 0 min–1 for output to the first spindle.
*SSTP2 1 : Does not set 0 min–1 for output to the second spindle.
0 : Sets 0 min–1 for output to the second spindle.
438
Gear select signal

GR21 <G029#0>

[Function] Gear selection signals for 2nd spindle when multi–spindle is equipped
(2–stage). Use GR1 and GR2 <G028#1, #2> for the 1st spindle and up
to 4–stage gears can be used.
GR21 1 : Selects the second-stage gear for the second spindle.
0 : Selects the first-stage gear for the second spindle.
2nd position coder

selection signal
PC2SLC <G028#7>
[Function] Position coder selection signal used for control.
PC2SLC 1 : Uses feedback pulses obtained by the second position coder for
control.
0 : Uses feedback pulses obtained by the first position coder for control.
When the second position coder is not installed, do not switch this signal
and always select the first position coder.

ENB2<F038#2>

[Function] These signals inform PMC of whether or not to perform output to the
second spindle in multi–spindle control.
The signals are used as a condition to stop the analog spindle, and are also
used for a PMC ladder sequence that is associated with rigid tapping. (See
Section 9.10.)
[Output condition] ENB2 1 : Outputs a value other than 0 to the second spindle control unit.
0 : Outputs 0 to the second spindle control unit.
Spindle control signal by

PMC 1st spindle SIND, SSIN, SGN, <G033#7, #6, #5> (Input)
R12I∼R01I<G033#3 to G032#0> (Input)
2nd spindle SIND2, SSIN2, SGN2, <G035#7, #6, #5> (Input)
R12I2∼R01I2<G035#3 to G034#0> (Input)
[Function] The spindle motor of each spindle can be controlled by issuing commands
from the PMC. The speed command and polarity (rotation direction) of
a spindle motor can be controlled. Usually, CNC commands are used to
specify a speed and polarity. By using these signals, whether commands
issued from the CNC or PMC are to be used for this control can be
selected. Even when multi–spindle control is not being used, the signals
can be used to control the second spindle.
439
When multi–spindle control is being used, and TYPE–A is selected (bit

2 (MSI) of parameter No. 3709 is set to 0), the signals for the second
spindle cannot be used.
For details of each signal, see Section 15.4.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G027 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS2 SWS1
G028 PC2SLC GR2 GR1
G029 *SSTP GR21
G034 R08I2 R07I2 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2
G035 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R12I2 R11I2 R10I2 R09I2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F038 ENB3 ENB2
Parameter The parameters for the 1st spindle and the 1st position coder are the same
as usual. This section describes the parameters which are added by this
function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 MSP
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

MSP Specifies whether to use multi–spindle control, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3701 SS2
[Data type] Bit

0: 1
1: 2
440
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3707 P22 P21
P22, P21 Gear ratio of spindle to second position coder

Magnification P22 P21
1 0 0
Number of spindle revolutions
2 0 1 Magnification=
8 1 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 MSI
MSI In multi–spindle control, the SIND signal is valid

0 : Only when the first spindle is valid (SIND signal for the 2nd spindle
becomes ineffective)
1 : For each spindle irrespective of whether the spindle is selected (Each
spindle has its own SIND signal).
[Data type] Word type

the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum
speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed
is clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter.
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is
not clamped.
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the speed of the
spindle is not clamped.
441
NOTE
specified.
2 When the multi–spindle control option is selected, set the
maximum speed for each spindle in the following
parameters:
Parameter No. 3772: Sets the maximum speed for the first
spindle.
Parameter No. 3802: Sets the maximum speed for the
second spindle.
3802 Maximum speed of the second spindle
[Data type] Word

Parameter sets the maximum speed for the second spindle.
the spindle is specified, or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum
speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the multi–spindle control is
selected.
spindle speed is clamped at the specified maximum speed,
specified.
3 When 0 is set in this parameter, the setting of parameter No.
3772 for the first spindle is used.
When 0 is set in parameter No. 3772, the spindle speed is
not clamped.
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed
is not clamped.
442
3811 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 of the second spindle
3812 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 of the second spindle
[Data type] Word

Set the maximum spindle speed for each gear of the second spindle.
NOTE
These parameters are used for the multi–spindle control.
Warning
WARNING
Do not switch between the first and second position coders
while a function that uses position coder feedback
information is being executed. That is, PMC signal PC2SLC
<G028#7> cannot be used while, for instance, a command
for feed per rotation or thread cutting is taking place.
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the primary spindle stop signal *SSTP for stopping all
selected (SWS1 to SWS2) spindles’ rotation is cleared, the
speed command is restored. A spindle not selected by
SWS1 to SWS2 and rotating at its previous speed, which is
stopped using its respective command *SSTP1 to *SSTP2,
cannot be restored to that speed when the signal is cleared.
2 Type A multi-spindle control differs from Type B in the
relationship between the SWS1 and SIND signals for the
first spindle. In Type B, SIND functions only when SWS1 is
set to “1”. In Type A, SIND functions whether SWS1 is “1”
or “0”; each spindle is selected by either of its respective
SWS1 or SIND signals being set to “1”.
443
Note
NOTE
1 The spindle orientation signal, spindle speed override
signals, and spindle stop signal *SSTP only function for
selected signals.
2 The S 12-bit code signals R01O to R12O outputs the state
of a selected spindle. If two or more spindles are selected
at the same time, the states of the first and second spindles
are output in this order.
3 The multi-spindle function allows two position coder
interfaces to be used. But the number of actual speed
indications on the CNC screen does not change. The speed
based on the feedback information of the selected position
coder is displayed.
4 An SOR command has priority over S commands and
SIND-based rotation control from the PMC, and will cause
all selected spindle to perform orientation rotation.
444
9.10
RIGID TAPPING
9.10.1 In a tapping cycle (M series: G84/G74, T series: G84/G88), synchronous

control is applied to the tapping operation of a tapping axis and the
General
operation of the spindle.
This capability eliminates the need to use a tool such as a float tapper, thus
enabling higher–speed, higher–precision tapping.
Whether a tapping cycle is an ordinary tapping cycle or rigid tapping cycle
is determined by the miscellaneous function code for rigid tapping M29.
(A different M code can be used by setting the parameters accordingly, but
M29 is used in the description given here.)
By setting the parameters, G codes for tapping cycles can be changed to
G codes for rigid tapping only. In this case, the CNC specifies M29
internally.
To perform rigid tapping, the following must be added to the ordinary
connections:
· Connection of a position coder to the spindles (described in 9.10.2)
· Addition of a sequence to the PMC (described in 9.10.6 and 9.10.7)
· Setting of related parameters (described in 9.10.8)
This section provides an example of M series connection.
To avoid duplicate descriptions, assume the following unless noted
otherwise:
⋅ G code for a tapping cycle
M series: G84 (G74) T series: G84 (G88)
⋅ Gear selection method
M series: M–type or T–type gear selection method
T series: T–type gear selection method only
⋅ Parameters used according to the number of gear stages (No. 5221
to No. 5224, No. 5231 to No. 5234, No. 5241 to No. 5244, No.
5261 to No. 5264, No. 5271 to No. 5274, No. 5281 to No. 5284,
No. 5291 to 5294, No. 5321 to No. 5324, etc.)
⋅ M series: Up to three stages T series: Up to four stages
(Shared by the second spindle. Up to two stages for the second
spindle.)
CAUTION
1 The description given in this section covers up to the fourth
axis.
2 When M–type gear selection is used for the M series, the
maximum spindle speed for rigid tapping (specified with
parameters No. 5241 to 5243) must also be set for
parameter No. 5243 regardless of the number of gear steps.
(For a system having a single gear step, set the same value
as that of parameter No. 5241 for parameter No. 5243. For
a system having two gear steps, set the same value as that
of parameter No. 5242 for parameter No. 5243.)
445
The descriptions given in this section (such as spindle gear switching and
M–type/T–type) are based on the explanation given in Section 9.3. Refer
to Section 9.3 as necessary.
Specification of The differences in the specifications for rigid tapping for the M series and
M series/T series T series are described below.
D Rigid tapping of M series The tapping cycle G84 and the reverse tapping cycle G74 can be used to
specify M series rigid tapping.
A tapping axis can be arbitrarily selected from the basic axes X, Y, and
Z, as well as axes parallel to the basic axes, by setting the corresponding
parameters accordingly (bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101).
The spindle operations of G84 and G74 are reversed with respect to each
other.
D Rigid tapping of T series The face tapping cycle G84 and the side tapping cycle G88 can be used
to specify T series rigid tapping.
Depending on the rigid tapping command, rigid tapping can be performed
along the Z–axis (when G84 is used) or the X–axis (when G88 is used).
A reverse tapping cycle, like that supported by M series, is not available.
446
9.10.2 As shown in the figure below a gear can be inserted between the spindle
Connection Among and spindle motor, and between the spindle and position coder.
Spindle, Spindle Motor,
and Position Coder
Spindle control
Error Spindle amplifier Spindle motor

counter
Gear ratio n:m
4 Position Gear ratio q:p Spindle

coder
1024 p/rev
(The 512 pulses/rev position coder is incorporated into some

spindle motors. When the serial spindle is used, the system
carries out conversion from 512 pulses/rev to 1024 pulses/rev.)
(1) Gear between spindle Up to three gear stages (1 st spindle of M series) or four gear stages (1st
and spindle motor spindle of T series), two gear stages (2nd spindle) can be provided be-
tween the spindle and the spindle motor. The gear ratio is arbitrary. The
spindle move distance per spindle motor rotation is different, based on the
gear ratio. The speed command to the spindle motor must be adjusted.
See (2), below, for additional information regarding a spindle motor in-
corporating a position coder.
(2) Gear between spindle The position coder is used to detect the position of the spindle.
and position coder The gear ratio for the spindle and position coder is specified in the parame-
ter sets No. 5221 to No. 5223 and No. 5231 to No. 5233, or parameter set
PG1 and PG2 No. 3706 #0, #1, parameter P21, P22 (No. 3707 #0, #1) for
2nd spindle. Which parameter set to use is specified by parameter VGR
No. 5200 #1.
S Arbitrary gear ratio This is used if the gear ratio for the spindle motor and position coder
(VGR=1) (built-in or separate) is not 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, or 1:8, set VGR to 1 and set the
gear ratio using parameter No. 5221 to 5224.
When position coder is mounted on a spindle, the gear ratio for the spindle
motor and position coder cannot be changed by shifting the spindle motor
and spindle gears. Parameters No. 5221 to 5224 must all specify the same
value for the teeth of the individual spindle gears. Parameters No. 5231
to 5234 must all specify the same value for the teeth of individual position
coder gears.
The 1024 or 512 pulses/rev position coder is built into the spindle motor.
For the 512 pulses/rev version, specify double the number of teeth on each
gear for the position coder. (Double the number of teeth need not be
specified for the serial spindle.)
447
The M series allows up to three stages, regardless of which gear selection

method has been selected. (Parameter Nos. 5224 and 5234 cannot be
used.)
The T series supports up to four stages. (Set parameter Nos. 5221 to 5224
and 5231 to 5234.) When the multi–spindle function is used to perform
rigid tapping with the second spindle, up to two stages are supported. (Set
parameter Nos. 5221, 5222, 5231, and 5232.)
Example)
Built–in position coder

Spindle
motor
1st gear set 30 : 70

2nd gear set 50 : 50
3rd gear set 70 : 30
Set value
Paramet 512p/rev 1024p/re

v Meaning
er No. Position
Position
coder
coder
5221 70 Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the
spindle side
5222 50 Number of teeth of the 2nd gear for the
spindle side
5223 30 Number of teeth of the 3rd gear for the
spindle side
5231 60 Note) 30 Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the
position coder side
5232 100 Note) 50 Number of teeth of the 2nd gear for the
position coder side
5233 140 Note) 70 Number of teeth of the 3rd gear for the
position coder side
NOTE
Double value setting is not required for serial spindle.
448
S Gear ratio is 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, If the gear ratio is either 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8, it is set using parameters
1:8 (VGR=0) PG1 and PG2 (No. 3706 #0, #1). This applies if the position coder is
mounted in a spindle or built into a spindle motor when only one stage
gear is provided. .
For 2nd spindle, set it to parameter P21, P22 (No.3707#0, #1).
Parameter Gear ratio
Detection unit
PG2 PG1 Spindle Position coder
0 0 1 1 360/4096=0.08789 deg
0 1 1 2 360/4096 2=0.17578
deg
1 0 1 4 360/4096 4=0.35156
deg
1 1 1 8 360/4096 8=0.70313
deg
The spindle motor building in the 512 pulses/rev position coder uses the
values set forth in the following table. A serial spindle does not require
double-value setting; use the same values as for the spindle motor
building in the 1024 pulses/rev position coder.
Gear ratio Parameter Gear ratio
Detection
of spindle
Spindle unit
Built–in Spindle PG2 PG1 to position
motor (deg)
position coder
coder 1 1 0 1 1:2 0.17578
512p/rev
2 1 1 0 1:4 0.35156
4 1 1 0 1:8 0.70313
(3) Rigid tapping and If the M type gear selection method is selected, the CNC determines
machines with whether gears need changing using the gear change specification
multiple gears mentioned in section 9.3. If the gears need to be changed, the CNC
generates the S function code read signal SF (F007#2) and gear selection
signals GR10, GR20, and GR30 (F034#0-#2) to notify the PMC. Change
gears using the PMC, based on these signals.
If the T type gear selection method is selected, the CNC does not process
gear changes. When the CNC has the S function code, it outputs signal
SF and S function code signals S00 to S31 (F022#0-F025#7) to the PMC.
(However, parameter No. 3705 and its related parameters need to be set
for S code and SF signal output). Using the PMC, determine whether
gears need changing, and make the change if needed. Input gear selection
signals GR1 and GR2 <G028#1,#2> or GR21 <G029#0> for 2nd spindle
for the selected gear, and notify the CNC of them.
To perform rigid tapping with the serial spindle, enter the clutch/gear
selection signals CTH1 and CTH2 (G070#3,#2 for the first spindle, and
G074#3, #2 for the second spindle) from the PMC. Notify the serial
spindle control unit of these signals via the CNC, irrespective of the gear
selection method.
449
Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process from that
for gear changes during normal machining. As described above, changing
gears conforms to the gear change specifications mentioned in section 9.3
when the M type gear selection method has been selected. With the T type
gear selection method, changing gears conforms to the logic programmed
in the PMC.
Regardless of the option’s selection, if the range in which the spindle
speed specified by the S function code does not correspond to the
currently selected gear, the gears are changed.
The following tables list the spindle speed ranges for each gear during
normal machining (assuming no machine restrictions) and rigid tapping:
Spindle speed range (normal machining)
Gear
Lower limit Upper limit
Low– 1 revolution Maximum low–speed gear speed =
speed Maximum spindle motor speed L%
gear Low–speed gear ratio
Medium Maximum low–speed Maximum medium–speed gear speed =
speed gear speed + 1 revo- Maximum spindle motor speed L%
gear lution Medium speed gear ratio
High– Maximum medium– Maximum high–speed gear speed =
speed speed gear speed +1 Maximum spindle motor speed L%
gear revolution High–speed gear ratio
NOTE
This table shows an example of three gears. L% indicates
a spindle motor protection constant (up to 100). L can be
specified for each gear using method B for changing in M
type gear selection method (bit 2 (SGB) of parameter No.
3705 =1).
Spindle speed range (during rigid tapping)

Gear
Lower limit Upper limit
Low– 1 revolution Maximum low–speed gear speed
speed Basic spindle motor speed +α
gear =
Low–speed gear ratio
Medium Maximum low–speed Maximum medium–speed gear speed
speed gear speed + 1 revo- Basic spindle motor speed +α
gear lution =
Medium–speed gear ratio
High– Maximum medium– Maximum high–speed gear speed
speed speed gear speed +1 Basic spindle motor speed +α
gear revolution =
High–speed gear ratio
450
NOTE
This table show an example of three gears. For the basic
spindle motor speed, refer to the spindle motor description
manual. “+ a” means that the spindle motor speed may
slightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed.
If the M type gear selection method is used, use gear change method B
(bit 3 (SGT) of parameter No. 3705 = 1) in the tapping cycle to specify
the following:
The table above shows the maximum low-speed gear speed during rigid
tapping for low-/medium-speed gear change position D (parameter No.
3761).
The table above shows the maximum medium-speed gear speed during
rigid tapping for medium-/high-speed gear change position E (parameter
No. 3762).
If the T type gear selection method is used, add the rigid tapping logic to
the logic programmed in the PMC.
See Section 9.3, “Spindle Control” for details of the spindle gear change
specifications.
The loop gain can be specified for each gear. Specify “0” for parameter
No. 5280 and specify loop gains for each gear for parameter Nos. 5281
to 5284. Unless “0” is specified for parameter No. 5280, the loop gains
for each gear are disabled, and the loop gain common to all gears, the
value of parameter No. 5280, is enabled.
Specify the time constant and the maximum spindle speed for each gear.
Use parameters Nos. 5261 to 5264 to specify the time constant.
Use parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244 to specify the maximum spindle speed.
For M type gear selection method, set the maximum spindle speed to
parameter No. 5243, irrespective of the number of gear stages used.
Setting bit 2 (TDR) of parameter No. 5201 to “1” enables setting of the
extraction time constant for each gear set. Specify the extraction time
constant for each gear in parameter Nos. 5271 to 5274.
If bit 1 (VGR) of parameter No. 5200 is set to “1”, the gear ratio for the
spindle and position coder can be set to anywhere between 1:32767 and
32767:1 in one-increment units for three gear sets with M series, four gear
sets with T series, or two gear sets with 2nd spindle. However 1:8 to 8:1
is the recommended value.
451
9.10.3
Rigid Tapping
Specification
D Feed rate In rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F; the
spindle speed is S 360(deg/min). Override is invalid for both of them.
An override of up to 200% can be applied to withdrawal operations by
setting bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 to “1”, and setting an
appropriate override value in parameter RGOVR of No. 5211. The time
constant for withdrawal operations can be modified by bit 2 (TDR) of
parameter No. 5201; when it is set to “1”, the values in parameter Nos.
5271 to 5274 are used as the time constant for withdrawal.
D Acceleration and Linear acceleration/deceleration is valid for rigid tapping.
deceleration
D Override Override is invalid for rigid tapping. Fixed override can be applied to
withdrawal operations by setting bit 4 (DOV) of parameters No. 5200 or
RGOVR of No. 5211.
D Dry run Dry run is valid for G84 (G74). When the dry run is applied to the tapping
axis speed of G84 (G74), tapping is performed. The spindle speed will
match the dry run speed.
D Machine lock Machine lock is valid for G84 (G74).
When G84 (G74) is executed with the machine locked, however the
tapping axis and the spindle do not move.
D Reset When the reset operation is performed during rigid tapping, the mode is
reset. The spindle motor goes to the ordinary mode, but G84 (G74) mode
is not reset.
D Feed hold and single The feed hold and single block functions are nullified for G84 (G74).
block The feed hold and single block functions in rigid tapping mode can be
effective by setting bit 6 (FHD) of parameter No. 5200 to “1”.
As with the machine lock signal, the feed hold and single block functions
are also effective for the spindle indirectly, through tapping axis
operations.
D Operation mode G84 (G74) can be executed only in the MEM and MDI modes.
D Manual feed Rigid tapping cannot be performed in the manual feed mode.
D Backlash compensation In rigid tapping mode, the backlash is compensated for the lost motion at
forward and reverse spindle rotations. Set it using parameter No. 5321
to No 5324. The backlash compensation is normally made for the tapping
axis.
452
9.10.4 For rigid tapping adjustment, the diagnosis screen displays information
Display Data on the related to rigid tapping.
Diagnosis Screen For part of the display data, the user can choose between two sets of data
items relating to the synchronization of the spindle and tapping axis by
setting bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204.
D Common display data The following information items are displayed, regardless of the setting
of bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204:
· Spindle position deviation → Diagnosis No. 450
· Number of command pulses distributed to the spindle
(momentary value) → Diagnosis No. 451
· Cumulative number of command pulses distributed to the spindle
→ Diagnosis No. 454
D Display of rigid tapping When bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204 is set to 0, the following
synchronization error information items are displayed.
(When DGN = 0)
(Diagnosis Nos. 452 and 453 are not displayed.)
· Spindle–converted move command difference → Diagnosis No. 455
· Spindle–converted position deviation difference → Diagnosis No. 456
· Synchronization error range → Diagnosis No. 457
Spindle–converted move command difference
spindle move command (tapping axis move command) 4096
=Σ Σ
gear ratio thread lead
Spindle–converted position deviation difference

spindle position deviation (tapping axis position deviation) 4096
=
gear ratio thread lead
Synchronization error range

= (maximum spindle–converted move position deviation difference on
the positive side)
– (maximum spindle–converted position deviation difference on the
negative side)
If a maximum allowable synchronization error range is set in parameter
No. 5214, the position deviation alarm during spindle movement (alarm
No. 741) is issued to indicate that the set synchronization error range has
been exceeded. (If 0 is set in parameter No. 5214, no check is performed
to detect whether the synchronization error range has been exceeded.)
D Rigid tapping error When bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204 is set to 1, the following
display information items are displayed. (Diagnosis Nos. 455, 456, and 457 are
(error difference display) not displayed.)
(When DGN = 1)
⋅ Momentary error difference between the spindle and tapping axis
⋅ Maximum error difference between the spindle and tapping axis
453
Diagnosis No. 0452 is cleared to “0” when rigid tapping mode is set or
canceled, and diagnosis No. 0453 is cleared to “0” in the positioning of
the rigid tapping cycle.
The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis.
Z–axis
error
Zc
Ze
Speed 1 1
Zc = × × 102 (Theoretical value)
60 Gain Detection unit
Ze = Z–axis error counts (measured value)
Spindle
error
Sc
Se
Speed 360 1 1
Sc = × × 102 (Theoretical value)
60 Gain Detection unit
Se = Spindle error counts (measured value)
Speed : mm/min or inch/min

Gain : 0.01 s-1
Detection unit :mm, inch, or deg
Speed : rpm
Ze
DZ= 100 [%]
Zc
The error difference between the spindle and Z axis

Se can be obtained by DS–DZ. This value is sampled
DS= 100 [%] at intervals of 64 ms.
Sc
454
Diagnosis screen
D Spindle position
deviation 0450 SPINDLE MOTION ERROR
Spindle position deviation during rigid tapping

[Unit] Pulse
D Number of pulses
distributed to the spindle
0451 SPINDLE MOTION PULSE
Number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid tapping

[Unit] Pulse
D Error difference between
the spindle and tapping
axis (momentary value)
0452 RIGID ERROR
Momentary error difference between the spindle and tapping axis during
rigid tapping (signed)
[Unit] %
NOTE
This data item is displayed only when bit 0 (DGN) of
parameter No. 5204 is set to 1.
D Error difference between

the spindle and tapping
axis (maximum)
0453 RIGID ERROR(MAX)
Maximum error difference between the spindle and tapping axis during
rigid tapping (absolute value)
[Unit] %
NOTE
D Cumulative number of
pulses distributed to the
spindle during rigid
tapping
0454 SPINDLE PULSE(SUM)
Cumulative number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid

tapping
[Unit] Pulse
455
D Spindle–converted move
command difference
during rigid tapping
(momentary value)
0455 SYNC. PULSE(SUM)
Momentary spindle–converted move during command difference

between the spindle and the tapping axis during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
NOTE
D Spindle–converted position
deviation difference during
rigid tapping
(momentary value)
0456 SYNC. ERROR
Momentary spindle–converted position deviation difference between the

spindle and the tapping axis during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
NOTE
D Synchronization error
range during rigid tapping
(momentary value)
0457 SYNC. WIDTH
Synchronization error range during rigid tapping (maximum value)

[Unit] Pulse
NOTE
456
9.10.5
Command Format
Command format for the The rigid tapping command format for the T series is described below.
T series For an explanation of the command format used with the M series, refer
to “Rigid tapping” of the “Operator’s Manual for Machining Center
(B–63514EN) ”.
Gjj X(Z)__ C__ Z(X)__ R__ P__ F__ K__ (Mjj) ;

M code for C–axis
clamping
Number of repeats
Cutting feedrate
Dwell time at the bottom face of a
tapped hole and upon R point return
Specifies the position of an R point
Specifies the position of the bottom
face of a tapped hole
Specifies a tapping position.
G84 Front tapping cycle
G88 Side tapping cycle
The rigid tapping mode can be specified by using any of three methods:
D Specification of M29S**** before specifying a tapping cycle
D Specification of M29S****in the same block
D Enabling rigid tapping to be performed without specifying M29S****
When using the third method, specify S**** either before or in a block
containing G84 (G88).
Thus, the spindle stops, after which the tapping cycle specified next is
placed in rigid tapping mode.
Rigid tapping mode can be canceled by G80;. Note, however, that a G
code for another canned cycle, or a group 01 G code can also cancel rigid
tapping mode.
When rigid tapping is terminated by a command issued to cancel rigid
tapping mode, the spindle stops. (Output to the spindle is equivalent to
the specification of S0.)
A reset (by means of the RESET button or an external reset) can also
cancel rigid tapping mode. Note, however, that canned cycle mode is not
canceled by a reset.
D Specifying M29 before a block containing G84 (G88)
M29 S****;
GjjX (Z) __C__Z (X) __R__P__F__K__ (Mjj) ;
X (Z) __C__;
Rigid
X (Z) __C__; tapping
· mode
·
G80;
457
D Specifying M29 and G84 (G88) in the same block (Note, however, that
M29 and Mjj for C–axis clamping cannot be specified in the same
block.)
GjjX (Z) __Z (X) __R__P__F__K__M29****;
X (Z) __C__;
Rigid
X (Z) __C__;
tapping
· mode
·
G80;
D Converting G84 (G88) to a G code for rigid tapping (by setting bit 0
(G84) of parameter No. 5200 to 1)
GjjX (Z) __C__Z (X) __R_P_F_K_S**** (Mjj);
X (Z) __C__;
Rigid
X (Z) __C__;
tapping
· mode
·
G80;
Notes on the T series
NOTE
1 In feed per minute mode, F_/S**** determines a thread
lead. In feed per rotation mode, F_ specifies a thread lead.
2 S**** must specify a value that does not exceed the value
set in the maximum spindle speed parameter (No. 5241 to
5244) for the gear to be used. Otherwise, P/S alarm No. 200
is issued in a block containing G84 (G88).
3 F_ must specify a value that does not exceed the maximum
cutting feedrate. When 0 is specified, P/S alarm No. 201 is
issued.
4 Between M29 and G84 (G88), S and a command for
movement along an axis must not be specified. Further,
M29 must not be specified in a tapping cycle. Otherwise,
P/S alarm Nos. 203 and 204 are issued, respectively.
458
G84⋅G85 ( Tapping cycle)
G84 (G88) (G98 mode) G84 (G88) (G99 mode)
Spindle Spindle
stop stop
Initial point
Motion 1
Motion 2 Motion 6
Spindle CW R point Spindle CW R point
Spindle Spindle
stop stop
Motion 3 Motion 5
Spindle CCW Spindle CCW

Z (X) point Z(X)point
P P
Spindle stop Spindle stop
Motion 4
Rapid traverse
Z (X) axis feed
P Dwell
CAUTION
During cutting feed along the Z–axis (X–axis), the feedrate
override is assumed to be 100%. The spindle speed
override is also assumed to be 100%. For a retract motion
(motion 5), a fixed override of up to 200% can be applied by
specifying bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 and
parameter No. 5211 (RGOVR).
NOTE
G code system A does not include G98 (return to initial level)
and G99 (return to R point level). Return to the initial level
is always used.
459
Rigid tapping in feed per Rigid tapping is classified into two types: rigid tapping in feed per
rotation mode rotation mode (G99) and rigid tapping in feed per minute mode (G98).
Example)
The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per rotation mode for
cutting a thread with a lead of 1 mm at a spindle speed of 1,000 rpm.
O0001 ;
G99 ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z–100. R–20. F1. ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
G80 ;
The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per minute mode for
cutting the same thread at the same spindle speed as above. (In feed per
minute mode, F/S determines the thread lead.)
O0002 ;
G98 ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z–100. R–20. F1000 ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
G80 ;
Units of F
Metric input Inch input Remarks
G98 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min A fractional value
can be specified.
G99 0.0001 mm/ rev 0.000001 inch/rev A fractional value
can be specified.
NOTE
1 G98 and G99 are modal G codes. Upon power–up, G99
(feed per rotation mode) is set.
2 Even in feed per rotation mode, a pulse distribution
command is converted to a feed per minute command.
Thus, feed per rotation mode does not strictly implement
feed per rotation. Accordingly, even if the spindle stops for
some reason, the tapping axis (Z–axis or X–axis) does not
stop.
460
9.10.6
Signal
9.10.6.1
Signals for the rigid
tapping function
Rigid tapping signal
RGTAP<G061#0>
[Function] When M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) is
specified, the PMC enters rigid tapping mode, then turns on this signal
to notify the CNC.
1 : The PMC enters in rigid tapping mode.
0 : The PMC does not enter rigid tapping mode.
For an explanation of placing the PMC in rigid tapping mode, see the
description of the interface with the PMC, given later.
This signal posts whether the PMC has entered rigid tapping mode. If this
signal is not set to 1, even when M29 is specified, a P/S alarm is issued
in a G84 (G74) block.
Spindle rotation
direction signals
RGSPM, RGSPP
<F065#1, #0>
(M series only)
[Function] During rigid tapping, these signals notify the PMC of whether the spindle
is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.
During rigid tapping, the spindle is:
RGSPP 1 : Rotating in the forward direction (CW).
0 : Not rotating in the forward direction.
RGSPM 1 : Rotating in the reverse direction (CCW).
0 : Not rotating in the reverse direction.
[Output condition] These signals are output when the spindle is rotating in rigid tapping
mode. This means that, even in rigid tapping mode, these signals are not
output, for example, when the spindle is being positioned to a hole
position, or a dwell operation is in progress at the bottom of a hole or at
an R point.
These signals are not output in the feed hold state or single block stop
state. When the spindle is placed in the interlock stop state, machine lock
state, or Z–axis ignore state, however, the spindle is not regarded as
having stopped; these signals are output.
These signals are valid only in rigid tapping mode. In normal spindle
control, these signals are not output; both RGSPP and RGSPM are set to
“0”.
461
Rigid tapping
in–progress signal
RTAP<F076#3>
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that rigid tapping mode is set.
RTAP 1 : Rigid tapping mode is currently set.
0 : Rigid tapping mode is not currently set.
By latching M29, the PMC knows that rigid tapping mode has been
specified, and thus performs the required processing on the PMC side.
This signal can substitute for the latching of M29. Even in this case,
however, FIN for M29 cannot be omitted.
9.10.6.2
Signals related to S code
output

ENB<F001#4>
Second spindle enable

signal
ENB2<F038#2>
(T series only)
[Function] These signals post whether the spindle output is 0. In rigid tapping mode,
these signals are used to cancel rigid tapping in a PMC sequence
associated with rigid tapping.
For details, see the explanation of the interface with the PMC, given later.
Spindle–speed function
code signals
(binary output)
S00 to S31
<F022 to F025>
Spindle–speed function
strobe signal
SF<F007#2>
[Function] These signals send S codes specified for the CNC, in binary format, to the
PMC.
[Output condition] When an S code is specified, the specified value is output, in binary
format, with the signals. Upon the completion of output, the SF signal
is set to “1”.
462
Before rigid tapping can be performed, however, parameter setting is

required to output these signals, as described below.
M series: SF output depends on the gear selection method, as described
below.
[1] M–type gear selection method
SF output depends on bit 6 (SFA) of parameter No. 3705.
[2] T–type gear selection method
SF output depends on the setting of bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705.
T series: The following parameter needs to be set to output S codes and
SF: Bit 4 (EVS) of parameter No. 3705 = 1
In rigid tapping, when SF is to be used by the PMC to read an S code
output signal for gear switching or output switching, set the above
parameters as required.
NOTE
1 The timing charts, given later, give examples of gear
switching by setting the parameters as follows:
M series: SFA = 0, NSF = 0
T series: EVS = 1
2 When the constant surface speed control function is being
used, an S code (specifying a surface speed) used for
constant surface control (G96) is output. Such an S code
can be distinguished from an S code used for specifying a
rotation speed. One method is to use, for example, the
constant surface speed control in–progress signal (F002#2)
for the processing performed on the PMC side. Another
method is to mask the S code and SF signal, output by
setting bit 0 (ESF) of parameter No. 3705.
9.10.6.3
Signals related to gear
switching
Gear selection signals
(output)
GR3O, GR2O, GR1O
<F034#2, #1, #0>
(M series only)
[Operation] When M–type gear selection is being used, these signals are used in a
PMC sequence for rigid tapping.
The signals post, to the PMC, information about a spindle gear to be used,
according to the value of S**** specified at the execution of G84 (G74).
As gear switching becomes necessary, the states of the signals change
together with the SF signal.
The PMC should perform gear switching according to the information
posted by the signals.
463
Reference information: The table below indicates the relationship

between the output signals and gear selection.
GR3O GR2O GR1O
1st (low) speed gear × × f
2nd (medium) speed gear × f ×
3rd (high) speed gear f × ×
Gear selection signals

(input)
GR2, GR1<G028#2, #1>
[Operation] When T–type gear selection is being used, these signals are used in a PMC
sequence for rigid tapping.
The signals post, to the CNC, information about a spindle gear to be used.
Reference information: The table below shows the relationship
between the output signals and spindle gear
selection.
GR2 GR1
1st (low) speed gear × ×
2nd (medium)
× f
speed gear
3rd (high) speed f ×
gear
4th (high) speed f f ← In M series rigid tapping, the specifi-
gear cation of the 4th (high) speed gear
is invalid. If specified, the system
assumes that the 3rd (high) speed
gear has been specified.

(input)
GR21<G029#0>
(T series only)
[Operation] When rigid tapping with the second spindle is being performed, the signal
is used in a PMC sequence.
The signal notifies the CNC of spindle gear information when the second
spindle has been selected.
The input signal is related to gear selection as described below.
GR21 1 : The second stage is currently selected as the second spindle gear.
0 : The first stage is currently selected as the second spindle gear.
GR21
1st speed gear ×
2nd speed gear f
464
When a serial spindle is used, the serial spindle clutch/gear selection

signals (G070#3, #2 for the first spindle, and G074#3, #2 for the second
spindle) must be set in addition to the setting of the gear selection signal
described above.
9.10.6.4
Signals related to
second spindle rigid
tapping
Gear selection signal See the description of the signals related to gear switching, given above.
(input)
GR21<G029#0>
(T series only)
Signals related to
multi–spindle control
Spindle selection signals

SWS1, SWS2
<G027#0, #1>
Rigid tapping spindle

selection signals
RGTSP2, RGTSP1
<G061#5, #4>
(T series only)
[Operation] SWS1 and SWS2 are used to transfer spindle commands when the
multi–spindle control is used. In rigid tapping, the signals can be shared
to select a spindle to be used for rigid tapping. (The signals can be used
for this purpose when bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 0.)
RGTSP2 and RGTSP1 are used to select a spindle used for rigid tapping,
independently of the SWS1 and SWS2 signals, when the multi–spindle
control is being used. (The RGTSP2 and RGTSP1 signals can be used
when bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1. These signals are
supported only by the T series.)
See the tables below for details of the settings of these signals.
When bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 0, to select a spindle to
be used for rigid tapping, set the signals as indicated below.
Signal state
Spindle used for rigid tapping
SWS1 SWS2
First spindle “1” “1”
Second spindle “0” “1”
P/S alarm No. 205 is issued. “0” “0”
465
When bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1, to select a spindle to

be used for rigid tapping, set the signals as indicated below.
Signal state
Spindle used for rigid tapping
RGTSP1 RGTSP2
Second spindle “0” “1”
P/S alarm No. 205 is issued. “0” “0”
WARNING
These signals must be applied before the command for rigid
tapping (M29 S....; G84 X...) is specified. The states of
these signals must not be changed before rigid tapping has
been completed.
Spindle–by–spindle stop
signals
*SSTP1, *SSTP2
<G027#3, #4>
[Operation] These signals are used to stop each spindle when the multi–spindle
control is used. In a PMC sequence for rigid tapping, the ENB and ENB2
signals are used. Accordingly, the logic of the signals used for a spindle
selected to perform rigid tapping must match the logic of the spindle stop
signal *SSTP.
*SSTP1 1 : The output to the first spindle does not specify 0 min–1.
0 : The output to the first spindle specifies 0 min–1.
*SSTP2 1 : The output to the second spindle does not specify 0 min–1.
0 : The output to the second spindle specifies 0 min–1.
Second position coder

selection signal
PC2SLC<G028#7>
[Operation] This signal is used to select the second position coder when the
multi–spindle control option is being used. Note, however, that it cannot
be used with a spindle selected to perform rigid tapping.
1 : Control is exercised using a feedback pulse signal from the second
position coder.
0 : Control is exercised using a feedback pulse signal from the first
position coder.
For rigid tapping, this signal is not used. Instead, a position loop is
constructed by combining the first spindle with the first position coder,
or by combining the second spindle with the second position coder.
466
However, the display of the actual speed is switched by this signal, even
during rigid tapping.
9.10.6.5
Signal addresses
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G027 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS2 SWS1
G028 PC2SLC GR2 GR1
G029 GR21
G061 RGTSP2 RGTSP1 RGTAP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 ENB
F007 SF
F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O
F038 ENB2
F065 RGSPM RGSPP
F076 RTAP
9.10.6.6 The following describes some notes in designing the interface with the
Notes on interface with PMC.
the PMC
Rigid tapping mode The PMC must manage rigid tapping mode as follows: rigid tapping
management and ENB mode is set using M29, and is canceled upon the issue of a reset or at the
(or ENB2) falling edge of the spindle enable signal ENB in rigid tapping mode. ENB
is used during rigid tapping in this way, so the spindle stop signal *SSTP
must not be set to “0”.
However, *SSTP and SOR may be used for gear switching. To do so,
ensure that the PMC does not cancel rigid tapping mode on a falling edge
of ENB while *SSTP is “0”. Rigid tapping mode may be set on a rising
edge of the RTAP signal instead of by using M29, and canceled on a
falling edge of the RTAP signal instead of the ENB signal.
In rigid tapping using the second spindle, the ENB2 signal must be used
for rigid tapping mode management.
Controlling spindle When the SIND signal is set to “1”, spindle output is controlled by the
output by the PMC signals (SSIN, SGN, R1I to R12I) output from the PMC.
At this time, the effect of ENB is as described above. In addition, when
rigid tapping mode is canceled in a block containing G80;, the momentary
rotation of the spindle, caused by a delay in the PMC processing, can
result. Accordingly, the PMC’s control over spindle output must be
disabled in rigid tapping mode by setting SIND to “0”.
For the same reason, the PMC’s control over second spindle output must
be disabled in rigid tapping mode by setting SIND2 to “0”.
467
T–type gear selection When T–type gear selection is used, the PMC must determine whether
method gear switching is to be performed, and subsequently perform gear
switching as required. For this purpose, each time a spindle–speed
function code is specified, the spindle–speed function code read signal
(SF) and spindle–speed function code signals (S00 to S31) must be output
to the PMC. The required parameter settings are described below.
⋅ M series: Set bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 to 0 to output SF.
⋅ T series: Set bit 4 (EVS) of parameter No. 3705 to 1 to output SF.
Gear switching timing In general, a block containing M29 (miscellaneous function for
preparation for rigid tapping) specifies S****, S**** being output when
a block containing G84 (G74) is executed. This means that gear switching
is performed in the block specifying G84 (G74).
When rigid tapping mode M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) and S****
is specified specify rigid tapping mode. When M29 is accepted by the PMC, the
following processing must be performed:
D Stop the spindle when it is rotating.
D Check that the spindle has stopped completely, then set the rigid
tapping signal RGTAP <G061#0> to on.
D Activate the spindle motor. Activate the motor so that a positive speed
command rotates the spindle in the forward direction (CCW when
viewed from the – side of the tapping axis).
D Return FIN at least 250 ms after activation.
NOTE
The condition “at least 250 ms after activation” results from
there being no way of checking the completion of spindle
motor activation. Therefore, this wait period serves as an
alternative. The time required for activation to be completed
varies with the spindle motor and amplifier. Therefore, this
value of 250 ms is given as a guideline only.
In an M29 block, S**** is not executed, merely being read in. S**** is
executed in a G84 block. Spindle output is equivalent to the specification
of S0.
The timing chart is shown in the chart indicating the execution of G84
(G74).
Execution of G84 (G74) When M29S****; is specified, S**** is read in, spindle output being
equivalent to the specification of S0;. S**** is output when G84 (G74)
is executed. Thus, the processing described below is performed.
D When M–type gear When using a machine that features multiple gear stages for use with the
selection is used spindle motor and spindle, and S**** is outside the previously selected
gear range, the spindle–speed function strobe signal SF <F007#2> and
gear selection signals (output) GR3O, GR2O, GR1O <F034#2, #1, #0>
are output to the PMC.
At this time, perform gear switching at the PMC.
468
D When T–type gear The spindle–speed function strobe signal SF <F007#2> and
selection is used spindle–speed function code signals S00 to S31 <F022 to F025> are
output to the PMC. (However, parameter setting is required to enable
output of the S codes and SF signal. See the description of each bit of
parameter No. 3705.)
At this time, the PMC must determine whether gear switching is to be

performed, and perform gear switching as required. The selected gear
must be reflected in the gear selection signals (input) GR2 and GR1
<G028#2, #1> for notification to the CNC.
From GR2 and GR1, the CNC determines which gear is selected.
However, note the difference between the M series and T series, as

described below.
M series: Up to three gear stages are supported for the first spindle, and
up to two gear stages for the second spindle. (The gear
selection for the second spindle is notified to the CNC by the
signal GR21 <G029#0>)
T series: Up to four gear stages are supported for the first spindle, and
up to two gear stages for the second spindle. (The gear
selection for the second spindle is notified to the CNC by the
signal GR21 <G029#0>.)
An S code is output in the first block (positioning to tapping position) of
G84 (G74) execution. However, the spindle motor position loop is closed
in the next block (R point positioning). Accordingly, spindle speed offset
must be adjusted accurately until the position loop has been closed in the
second block of G84 (G74) execution after the PMC activates the spindle
motor with M29. Otherwise, the spindle motor may rotate slightly. (This
applies only to an analog spindle. No offset adjustment is required for a
serial spindle.)
Rigid tapping mode may be specified by specifying M29 before G84,

specifying M29 and G84 in the same block, or by specifying G84 as a G
code for rigid tapping. In each case, PMC processing is the same. (The
M29 code is always output.)
469
9.10.7 The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the method
Timing Charts for Rigid used to specify rigid tapping mode, the gear selection method (M–type or
T–type), and whether to perform gear switching.
Tapping Specification
From the table, find the appropriate timing chart (Fig. 9.11.7.1 (a) to Fig.
9.11.7.3 (d)) and apply the information it contains as necessary.
Specification method
Gear
selection
Gear By parameter setting,
method M29 and G84 (G74) are
switching M29 is specified before G84 (G74) is specified as
M–type specified in the same
G84 (G74). a G code for rigid
T–type block.
tapping.
Not performed Fig. 9.10.7.1 (a) Fig. 9.10.7.2 (a) Fig. 9.10.7.3 (a)
M–type
Performed Fig. 9.10.7.1 (b) Fig. 9.10.7.2 (b) Fig. 9.10.7.3 (b)
Not performed Fig. 9.10.7.1 (c) Fig. 9.10.7.2 (c) Fig. 9.10.7.3 (c)
T–type
Performed Fig. 9.10.7.1 (d) Fig. 9.10.7.2 (d) Fig. 9.10.7.3 (d)
NOTE
For more information about the M/T type gear selection
method, see Section 9.3 SPINDLE CONTROL. Note the
following:
T series: T–type only
M series: M–type when constant surface speed control
is not being used and bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 is set to 0
T–type when constant surface speed control
is being used, or bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 is set to 1
470
9.10.7.1
When M29 is specified before G84 (G74)
M type gear selection method
M29
RTAP
First block Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the second
block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
250ms
RGTAP or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation
SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.10.7.1 (a) Gear is not changed
471
M29
RTAP
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle *Gear
output change
motion
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart show an example where the gear has shifted from low to middle gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O) has turned from “1” to “0”, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from “0” to “1”. This changes
the gear.
Fig. 9.10.7.1 (b) When gear change is performed (from low to middle gear)
472
T type gear selection method
M29
RTAP
First bllock Second block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the second block
Spindle
output
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.10.7.1 (c) Gear change is not performed
473
M29
RTAP
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle *Gear
output change
motion
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from low to middle gear. The PMC selects a required gear
through an S code output and selects the gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
Fig. 9.10.7.1 (d) When gear–change is performed (low to middle gear)
474
9.10.7.2
M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block
M type gear selection
M29
RTAP
G84 (G74)
ENB
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 9.10.7.2 (a) When gear–change is not performed
475
M29
RTAP
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from middle high gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O) has turned from “1” to “0”, and one of the two remaining signals has tuned from “0” to “1”. This changes
the gear.
Fig. 9.10.7.2 (b) When gear–change is performed (middle to high)
476
M29
RTAP
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.10.7.2 (c) When gear change is not performed
477
M29
RTAP
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
outpout
SF
S code out-
put
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from middle to high gear. The PMC selects a required gear
through an S code output and selects the gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
Fig 9.10. 7.2 (d) When gear–change is performed (middle to high gear)
478
9.10.7.3
Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters
M type gear selection
M29
RTAP
G84 (G74) M29 is commanded

internally.
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitaiton SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.10.7.3 (a) When gear–change is not performed
479
M29
RTAP

internally.
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from high to low gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O) has turned from “1” to “0”, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from “0” to “1”. This changes
the gear.
Fig. 9.10.7.3 (b) When gear change is performed (high to low gear)
480
M29
RTAP

internally.
ENB
Spindle
outoput
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.10.7.3 (c) When gear change is not performed
481
M29
RTAP
First blcok Second block

internally
ENB
To be masked to the
second blcok
Spindle
output
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP 250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Gear change
Excitation SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from high to low gear. The PMC selects a required gear
through an S code output and inputs the selected gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
Fig. 9.10.7.3 (d) When gear–change is performed (high to low gear)
482
9.10.7.4 When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (such
Timing to cancel rigid as G80, canned cycle G code, or Group 01 G code) is issued.
The spindle output is produced in the same way as executing S0. Cancel
tapping mode
the PMC rigid tapping mode at the falling edge of the ENB signal (ENB2
signal for 2nd spindle of T series) by de-energizing the spindle; then turn
off the rigid tapping mode signal. The system goes to the next block after
confirming that the signal is off.
When gear change is performed using *SSTP and SOR, the ENB signal
can be either “1” or “0”. Do not cancel the PMC’s rigid tapping mode at
the falling edge of the ENB signal under these circumstances. The
position loop is also canceled.
When the CNC is reset, the PMC’s rigid tapping mode must be canceled.
When CRG (parameter No. 5200#2) is “1”, the system goes directly to the
next block without checking that the rigid tapping signal is “0”. Set CRG
to “1” for systems in which the rigid tapping signal is always “1”.
G80
(or G code of group 01)
RTAP
ENB (orENB2)
Spindle output
RGTAP
Rotation
Excitation
Position loop
483
WARNING
1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code,
such as G00 or G01, the block containing the G code is
executed at the same time the ENB signal is turned to “0”.
Therefore, if a block contains an M code for controlling the
spindle, an error may occur during processing in the PMC.
2 When CRG (Parameter No. 5200#2) is 1, if the next block
contains an M code for controlling the spindle, an error may
occur during processing in the PMC, when:
⋅ Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing G80
⋅ Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing a Group 01 G
code , such as G00 or G01
NOTE
Rigid tapping mode is canceled as described above
regardless of the gear selection method of M–type or
T–type.
484
9.10.8
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 EVS ESF
SFA NSF SGT ESF
[Data type] Bit

ESF When the spindle control function (S analog outpu or S serial output) is
used, and the consatant surface speed control function is used or bit 7
NOTE
For the T system, this parametar is enabled when bit 4
(EVS) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1.
For the M series, SF is not output:
· For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
control mode
· When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
SGT Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84, G74)

0 : Method A (Same as normal gear switching method)
1 : Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the
spindle speed set in parameters 3761 and 3762)
NOTE
surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command
used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping
(G50S–––;) depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of
parameter No. 3705.
NSF: When an S code command is issued in constant surface–speed control,

0 : SF is output.
1 : SF is not output:
485
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 PG2 PG1
GTT PG2 PG1
[Data type] Bit

PG2, PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder
Magnific PG2 PG1

ation
1 0 0 Magnification =
2 0 1 Number of spindle revolutions
8 1 1
GTT Selection of a spindle gear selection method

0: Type M
1 : Type T
NOTE
1 Type M:
The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to an
S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed
range of each gear specified beforehand in a parameter.
Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting
the gear selection signal. The spindle speed corresponding
to the gear selected by the gear selection signal is output.
Type T:
The gear selection signal is entered. The spindle speed
corresponding to the gear selected by this signal is output.
2 When the constant surface speed control is selected, type
T is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is
specified.
3761
3762
[Data type] Word

When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 3705, is set to 1) for the
tapping cycle gear switching method, set the spindle speed when the gears
are switched.
486
Spindle motor speed
Max. output (4095, 10V)
Spindle motor
max. clamp speed
Spindle motor
min. clamp speed
command
Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed (S command)
at gear1 at gear2 at gear3
parameter parameter parameter
No. 3741 No. 3742 No. 3743
Speed at gear 1–2 Speed at gear 2–3

Parameter Parameter
No. 3761 No. 3762
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101
FXY
[Data type] Bit

FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is:
0 : Always the Z–axis
1 : The axis selected by the program
NOTE
For the M series, this parameter enables rigid tapping by
using a basic axis (X, Y, or Z) perpendicular to the
program–selected plane, or an axis parallel to that basic
axis, as the tapping axis.
487
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5200 SRS FHD DOV SIG CRG VGR G84
FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG VGR G84
[Data type] Bit

G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping
0 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the
issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No. 5210).
1 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is not used. (G84
cannot be used as a G code for the tapping cycle; G74 cannot be used
for the reverse tapping cycle.)
VGR Any gear ratio between spindle and position coder in rigid tapping
0 : Not used (The gear ratio is set in parameter No. 3706.)
1 : Used (The gear ratio is set by parameters Nos. 5221 through 5224 and
5231 through 5234.)
CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified (G80, G01
group G code, reset, etc.)
0 : Canceled after rigid mode signal RGTAP is set to 0.
1 : Canceled before rigid mode signal RGTAP is set to 0.
SIG When gears are changed for rigid tapping, the use of SIND <G032 and
G033> is
0 : Not permitted.
1 : Permitted.
DOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping
0 : Invalidated
1 : Validated (The override value is set in parameter No. 5211.)
PCP Rigid tapping
0 : Used as a high–speed peck tapping cycle
1 : Not used as a high–speed peck tapping cycle
FHD Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping
0 : Invalidated
1 : Validated
SRS To select a spindle used for rigid tapping in multi–spindle control:
0 : The spindle selection signals SWS1 and SWS2 (bits 0 and 1 of G027)
are used. (These signals are used also for multi–spindle control.)
1 : The rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1 and RGTSP2
(bits 4 and 5 of G061) are used. (These signals are provided expressly
for rigid tapping.)
488
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5201 TDR
TDR NIZ
[Data type] Bit

NIZ Smoothing in rigid tapping is:
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping
0 : Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter Nos.
5261 through 5264)
1 : Not use a same parameter during cutting and extraction
Parameter Nos. 5261 to 5264: Time constant during cutting
Parameter Nos. 5271 to 5274: Time constant during extraction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5202
ORI
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

ORI When rigid tapping is started:
0 : Spindle orientation is not performed.
1 : Spindle orientation is performed.
NOTE
This parameter can be used only for a serial spindle.
The spindle orientation is a zero return in the serial spindle
servo mode The stop position can be changed by serial
spindle parameter No. 4073.
489
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5204 DGN
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

DGN On the diagnosis screen:
0 : A rigid tapping synchronization error is displayed. (Nos. 455 to 457)
1 : An error difference between the spindle and tapping axis is displayed.
(Nos. 452 and 453)
5210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.
To set an M code larger than 255, set it to parameter No. 5212.
NOTE
The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when “0” is set.
5211 Override value during rigid tapping extraction
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 1 %
The parameter sets the override value during rigid tapping extraction.
NOTE
The override value is valid when DOV in parameter No.
5200#4 is “1”.
5212 M code that specifies a rigid tapping mode

This parameter sets the M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.
The M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode is usually set by
parameter 5210. To use an M code whose number is greater than 255,
specify the code number with parameter 5212.
490
NOTE
If the setting of this parameter is 0, the M code specifying the
rigid tapping mode is determined by the setting of parameter
5210. Otherwise, it is determined by the setting of
parameter 5212. The setting of parameter 5212 must
always be within the above valid range.
5213
Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle
[Data type] Word


This parameter sets the return or clearance in the peck tapping cycle.
When bit PCP in parameter No. 5200 is 0 When bit PCP in parameter No. 5200 is 1
(High–speed peck tapping cycle) (Peck tapping cycle)
q : Cutting q : Cutting
d : Return d : Clearance
ÄÄ R
ÄÄ R
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
q
d
point
ÄÄ
ÄÄ
q
d
point
ÄÄq
ÄÄq
ÄÄ ÄÄ
d d
ÄÄq
Z
ÄÄq
Z
point point
5214 Rigid tapping synchronization error range setting
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets an allowable synchronization error range for rigid
tapping.
When the synchronization error exceeds the allowable range set with this
parameter, alarm No. 741 is issued. Note that when 0 is set with this
parameter, no synchronization error check is performed.
491
5221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (First gear)
5222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5224 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

These parameters set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side for every
gear when any gear ratio is set in rigid tapping.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when VGR, #1 of parameter No.
5200, is “1”.
Set the same value to parameter Nos. 5221 to 5224 when
the spindle has a position coder.
5231 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (First gear)
5232 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5233 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5234 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

These parameters set the number of gear teeth on the position coder side
for every gear when any gear ratio is set in rigid tapping.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when VGR, #1 of parameter No.
5200, is “1”.
Set the same value to parameter Nos. 5231 to 5234 when
the spindle has a position coder.
A spindle motor incorporating the position coder uses a
position coder with 2048 pulses per revolution. In this case,
set the value that is two times as many as the actual number
of gear teeth (because of conversion to 4096 pulses per
revolution).
492
5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (First gear)
5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5244 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)

[Valid data range] Spindle and position coder gear ratio
1:1 0 to 7400
1:2 0 to 9999
1:4 0 to 9999
1:8 0 to 9999
These parameters set the maximum spindle speed for every gear in rigid
tapping.
NOTE
In a system having one–stage gear, set the same value as
parameter No. 5241 to parameter No. 5243. In a system
having two–stage gear, set the same value as parameter
No. 5242 to parameter No. 5243. If it is not set as such, P/S
alarm no. 200 will be informed.
These are applicable to M series.
5261 Acceleration/decelerationtime constant for every gear in rigid tapping

(First gear)
5262 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping

(Second gear)

(Third gear)

(Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
These parameters set the spindle and tapping axis’s time constant for
every gear during linear acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping.
Set the time required until a spindle speed reaches the maximum spindle
speed (parameter Nos. 5241 and greater). The actual time constant is a
proportional value between the maximum spindle speed and the specified
spindle speed.
493
5271 Acceleration/decelerationtime constant during extraction in rigid tapping

(First gear)
5272 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during extraction in rigid tapping

(Second gear)

(Third gear)

(Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
These parameters set the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
a spindle and tapping axis for every gear during extraction in rigid
tapping.
NOTE
The time constant is valid when TDR, #2 of parameter No.
5201, is “1”.
5280 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
(Common in each gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.01 s–1
This parameter sets the position control loop gain of a spindle and tapping
axis in rigid tapping.
The loop gain setting significantly influences the screw precision.
Perform a cutting test to adjust the loop gain and its multiplier to the
optimum values.
NOTE
To change the loop gain for every gear, set this parameter
value to “0” and set the loop gain for every gear to parameter
Nos. 5281 through 5284. If this parameter value is not “0”,
the loop gain for every gear is invalidated. This parameter
then becomes a loop gain that is used in common for all
gears.
494
5281 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (First gear)
5282 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5283 Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5284 Position control loop gain of spindle an tapping axis in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.01 s –1
These parameters set the position control loop gain of a spindle and
tapping axis for every gear in rigid tapping.
NOTE
To set the loop gain for every gear, set parameter No. 5280
to “0”.
5291 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1)
5294 Spindle loop gain multioplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear4)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Set the spindle loop gain multipliers for gears 1 to 4 in the rigid tapping
mode. The thread precision depends on the multipliers. Find the most
appropriate multipliers and 1OOP gain by conducting the cutting test.
NOTE
These parameters are used for analog spindles.
E
Loop gain multiplier = 2048 a 1000
L
where;
E: Voltage in the velocity command at 1000 min–1
L: Rotation angle of the spindle per one rotation of the
spindle motor
a: Unit used for the detection
495
Example)
When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are

connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows:
SPINDLE
MOTOR E = 1.667 (V)
Position (A motor speed of 6000 min–1 corresponds to 10
Spindle coder
V.)
L = 360°
(One rotation of the spindle corresponds to one
rotation of the spindle motor.)
a = La/4096
= 720°/4096
= 0.17578
La = 720°
(One rotation of the position coder corresponds
to two rotations of the spindle = 360° 2.)
1: 1: 2
4096 = The number of detected pulses per
rotation of the position coder
Gear ratio between the spindle and the position coder
1:1 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.08789 degrees
1:2 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.17578 degrees
1:4 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.35156 degrees
1:8 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.70313 degrees
Thus, Loop gain multiplier
= 2048 1.667/360 0.17578 1000 = 1667
NOTE
When the position coder which is built in a spindle motor
sends 512 pulses per rotation, the unit used for the
detection, a, is La/2048.
5300 In–position width of tapping axis in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the in–position width of a tapping axis in rigid
tapping.
5301 In–position width of spindle in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the in–position width of a spindle in rigid tapping.
496
CAUTION
The broad in–position width deteriorates the screw
precision.
5310 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a tapping axis positioning deviation
during movement in rigid tapping.
To set a value larger than this value, set it to No. 5314.
WARNING
The setting value is represented in a 10–times unit when a
high–resolution transducer is used.
5311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation
during movement in rigid tapping.
S 360 100 1.5
Limit value =
60 G a
where
S: Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping
(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5241 and greater)
G: Loop gain of rigid tapping axis
(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5280 and greater)
a: Detection unit
497
Example)
When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are

connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows:
SPINDLE S = 3600
MOTOR G = 3000
Position
Spindle coder L = 360_
(One spindle rotation per spindle motor rotaion)
a = La / 4096
= 720_/4096
= 0.17578_
La= 720_
(One position coder rotation requires two spindle
rotations =360_ 2)
4096=Detection pulse per positioncoder rotation
1: 1: 2 3600 360 100 1.5
Setting value =
60 3000 0.17578
= 6144
NOTE
The detection unit is a=La/2048 when the position coder
built–in spindle motor uses a position coder of 512 pulses
per revolution.
5312 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a tapping axis positioning deviation
during stop in rigid tapping.
5313 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation
during stop in rigid tapping.
5314 Limit value of position deviation during movement along the tapping axis for rigid
tapping

498

Parameter No. 5310 usually sets the limit of positional deviation during
movement along the tapping axis for rigid tapping. To specify a setting
exceeding the valid range specified in parameter No. 5310 according to
the resolution of the detector to be used, specify the limit value with
parameter No. 5314.
NOTE
If the setting of this parameter is 0, the setting of parameter
No. 5310 is enabled. Otherwise, the setting of parameter
No. 5310 is disabled, and the setting of parameter No. 5314
is enabled.
5321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (First gear)

Spindle backlash in rigid tapping
5322 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5323 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5324 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
[Data type] Byte

These parameters set the spindle backlash in rigid tapping.
499
9.10.9
Alarm and Message Number Message Description
200 ILLEGAL S CODE COM- In the rigid tapping, an S value is out of

MAND the range or is not specified.
The maximum value for S which can be
specified in rigid tapping is set in pa-
rameter (No.5241 to 5243). Change the
setting in the parameter or modify the
program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND In the rigid tapping, no F value is speci-
IN RIGID TAP fied.
202 POSITION LSI OVER- In the rigid tapping, spindle distribution
FLOW value is too large.
203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIG- In the rigid tapping, position for a rigid M
ID TAPPING code (M29) or an S command is incor-
rect. Modify the program.
204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERA- In the rigid tapping, an axis movement
TION is specified between the rigid M code
(M29) block and G84 or G74 block for
M series (G84 or G88 block for T se-
ries). Modify the program.
205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL Rigid tapping signal (DGNG061#0) is
OFF not 1 when G84 or G74 block for M se-
ries (G84 or G88 block for T series) is
executed though the rigid M code
(M29) is specified. Consult the PMC
ladder diagram to find the reason the
signal is not turned on. Modify the pro-
gram.
206 CAN NOT CHANGE Plane changeover was instructed in the
PLANE (RIGID TAP) rigid mode.
207 RIGID DATA MISMATCH The specified distance was too short or
too long in rigid tapping.
410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH The position deviation value when the
AXIS – EXCESS ERROR n–th axis (axis 1–4 of rigid tapping axis)
stops is larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to param-
eter No.5312 for each axis.
411 SERVO ALARM: n–TH The position deviation value when the
AXIS – EXCESS ERROR n–th axis (axis 1–4 of rigid tapping axis)
moves is larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to param-
eter No. 5310 or 5314 for each axis.
413 SERVO ALARM: n–th The contents of the error register for the
AXIS – LSI OVERFLOW n–th axis (axis 1–4 of rigid tapping axis)
are beyond the range of –231 to 231.
This error usually occurs as the result of
an improperly set parameters.
500
740 RIGID TAP ALARM; EX- Position deviation value of spindle at

CESS ERROR move exceeded a set value during
rigid tapping.
741 RIGID TAP ALARM; EX- Position deviation value of spindle at
CESS ERROR move exceeded a set value during
rigid tapping or synchronous error ex-
ceeded a set value (parameter No.
5214) during rigid tapping.
742 RIGID TAP ALARM; LSI LSI overflow has occurred on the
OVER FLOW spindle side during rigid tapping.
501
9.10.10
Notes
NOTES ON SPINDLES
CAUTION
1 When using an analog spindle, set the spindle speed offset
value parameter (No. 3731) accurately. For the standard
system, a value within –8191 to 8191 must be specified in
this parameter. To perform rigid tapping, a value within
–1023 to 1023 must be specified.
If the spindle speed offset is set inaccurately, the spindle is
stopped and placed in in–position wait state when tapping
is started.
In rigid tapping with a serial spindle, no setting is required
for parameter No. 3731. Be sure to set 0.
2 When the threading and synchronous feed functions are
enabled, the actual spindle speed during rigid tapping is
indicated correctly. When an arbitrary gear ratio is used (by
setting bit 1 (VGR) of parameter No. 5200 to 1), however,
the actual spindle speed will not be indicated correctly in
normal spindle mode.
When the T series is used, for example, information about
the actual spindle speed is important for lathe machining.
So, be particularly careful when using an arbitrary gear
between the spindle and position coder.
NOTE
1 A spindle pitch error is not compensated for in rigid tapping
mode. Drift compensation is not made with an analog
spindle.
2 The maximum number of pulses that can be distributed to
the spindle is:
⋅ 32,767 pulses per 8 msec for a serial spindle
⋅ 4,096 pulses per 8 msec for an analog spindle
(This information is displayed by selecting No. 451 on the
diagnosis screen.)
These values vary with the position coder gear ratio setting
and rigid tapping specification. If a value greater than the
maximum allowable number is specified, P/S alarm No. 202
is issued.
502
Notes on using
functions such as the
CAUTION
spindle positioning
1 When the spindle orientation function is to be used at the
function at the same
same time
time The spindle orientation function positions the spindle by
using sensors and the PMC, without being directly
controlled by the CNC.
The CNC has no direct control over this processing, instead
following the specifications of the spindle orientation
function being used.
2 When the spindle positioning function is to be used at the
same time
When the spindle positioning function is to be used together
with rigid tapping, rigid tapping mode must not be specified
in spindle indexing mode, and spindle indexing mode must
not be specified in rigid tapping mode. (Spindle positioning
and rigid tapping cannot be performed simultaneously for a
single spindle.)
This restriction does not apply, however, when
multi–spindle control is applied; rigid tapping can be
performed using the second spindle.
The spindle positioning function is effective for the first
spindle only. This means that when spindle indexing is
performed with the first spindle, rigid tapping can be
specified with the second spindle.
3 When the Cs contouring control function for the serial
spindle is used together with the rigid tapping function, the
same motor is used for spindle rotation control, Cs
contouring control, and rigid tapping modes. The following
points must be noted:
(1)Whether to enter Cs contouring control mode or spindle
rotation control mode is selected by the CON (Cs
contouring control switch signal) signal; however, the
system can enter rigid tapping mode regardless of the
state of the CON signal. When the rigid tapping mode is
canceled the system enters spindle rotation control
mode or Cs contouring control mode according to the
state of the CON signal.
(2)Since the system can change to rigid tapping mode
directly from the Cs contouring contorl mode, use of the
Cs contouring control function enables the tapping tool
to be positioned before rigid tapping begins. Accurate
positioning is not guaranteed. If the rigid tapping cycle
executes gear change or output range changing,
positioning is valid.
503
CAUTION
(3)Although the system can change to rigid tapping mode
directly from Cs contouring contorl mode, positions
designated in Cs contouring control mode are not
preserved if riged tapping mode is canceled by G80.
When the system is changed to rigid tapping mode from
Cs contouring control mode, then returns to the Cs
contouring control mode, G00 or G28 must be issued to
position the tapping tool.
(4)In systems with the serial spindle Cs contouring control
function, the spindle motor is in a state called servo mode
when it is operating in rigid tapping mode. In servo mode,
it can accept jogging and manual handling feed. To
prevent this, nullify jogging and manual handling feed of
the Cs contouring axis in the PMC during rigid tapping.
(5)The servo–off signal for the Cs contour control axis is
valid also for the spindle during rigid tapping. It should
be masked on the PMC side as required.
(6)When the multi–spindle control is also available and the
rigid tapping is performed on the 2nd spindle, the rigid
tapping can be specified to the 2nd spindle during the Cs
contouring control of the 1st spindle.
Position control loop In rigid tapping, the loop gain of the tapping axis is switched so that the
gain switching and serial loop gains for position control of the tapping axis and spindle match each
spindle parameters other.
This switching processing is specified by parameter Nos. 5280, and 5281
to 5284. The contents of the processing vary with whether the spindle is
an analog or serial spindle, as described below.
⋅ When the spindle is an analog spindle, the loop gains of the spindle and
tapping axis are switched according to the values set in these
parameters.
⋅ When the spindle is a serial spindle, the loop gain of the tapping axis
is switched according to the values set in these parameters. The loop
gain of the spindle depends on the values set in the serial spindle
parameters and applied gear signals (CTH2, CTH1).
Accordingly, to perform rigid tapping with a serial spindle, the loop gain
for position control of the spindle must be set in the serial spindle
parameters used for rigid tapping.
When multi–spindle control is being used, rigid tapping can also be
performed for the second spindle. For the serial spindle used for rigid
tapping, set the parameters indicated below.
The parameters indicated below are the major serial spindle parameters
required for the setting and adjustment needed to use a serial spindle.
For details of the serial spindle parameters, refer to the “FANUC AC
Spindle Motor α series DESCRIPTIONS (B–65152E) or FANUC AC
SPINDLE MOTOR a series PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65160E).
504
4044 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
4045 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 3, gear 4)
[Unit of data]
Set a proportional gain for the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid
tapping mode).
4052 Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
4053 Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode(gear 3, gear 4)
[Unit of data]
Set an integral gain of the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid
tapping mode).
4065 Position gain in the servo mode (HIGH) (CFPGH)
4066 Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM HIGH) (CFPGMH)
4067 Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM LOW) (CFPGML)
4068 Position gain in the servo mode (LOW) (CFPGL)
[Unit of data] 0.01 sec –1

Set a servo loop gain in a servo mode (such as rigid tapping mode).
CAUTION
Set a loop gain for spindle position control in rigid tapping
using a serial spindle. In these parameters, basically, set
the same values as those set in parameter Nos. 5280 and
5281 to 5284 (loop gains for position control of the tapping
axis).
Which serial spindle parameter (i.e., loop gain) is actually
used to operate the spindle depends on the serial spindle
clutch/gear selection signals CTH1 and CTH2 (G070#3, #2
for the first spindle, and G074#3, #2 for the second spindle).
Accordingly, which parameter is to be used must be
determined by considering the gear switching and PMC
software.
The table below indicates the relationship between the spindle gear
selection signals and selected gear numbers.
505
CTH1 CTH2 Gear selected Parameter No. to be used

0 0 HIGH 4065
4044 4052
0 1 MEDIUM HIGH 4066
1 0 MEDIUM LOW 4067

4045 4053
1 1 LOW 4068
9.10.11
Reference Item OPERATOR’S MANUAL RIGID TAPPING
(For Machining Center) (B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL RIGID TAPPING

CONNECTION MANUAL 9.3 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL

(This manual)
9.10 MULTI–SPINDLE
FANUC SERVO RIGID TAPPING

AMPLIFIER α series
FANUC AC SPINDLE RIGID TAPPING

MOTOR α series
PARAMETER MANUAL
506
9.11
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL
General This function enables the synchronous control of two spindles. It also
enables the control of the rotation phase of a spindle, allowing
non–standard workpieces as well as rods to be held by either of the two
spindles.
Synchronous–spindle In spindle synchronous control, the spindle to which an S command is

configuration issued is called the master spindle. A spindle which ignores any S
command that is issued for it, instead rotating synchronously with the
master spindle, is called the slave spindle.
The table below shows the synchronous spindle configuration.

Master spindle Slave spindle
T series/M series First serial spindle Second serial spindle
Supplementary For details of synchronous–spindle connection, see the description of

description serial spindles.
The following description relates to this CNC.

D Synchronous control of spindle phase is executed when the signal for
controlling the spindle phases in synchronization is entered in spindle
synchronization control mode (after output of the signal indicating
that the synchronous control of spindle speed has been completed).
The signal indicating that the synchronous control of spindle phase is
completed is output when the difference between the error pulses of
the two spindles does not exceed the number of pulses specified in
parameter No. 4810 of the NC function.
The positions of spindle phase synchronization can be specified in
spindle parameter No. 4034 on two spindles.
When the two spindles are subject to spindle–phase
synchronous–control (until the spindle–phase synchronous–control
completion signal, FSPPH <F044#3>, turns to “1”), they are not
synchronized with each other.
Do not specify spindle–phase synchronous control while the two
spindles are holding a workpiece. Specifying this item causes phase
synchronous control to start automatically.
D PMC signal, SYCAL <F044#4> is provided to monitor a
synchronization errors between spindles for which spindle
synchronization control or synchronous control of spindle phase is in
effect. The synchronization error between the two spindles is always
monitored. The SYCAL signal is set to 1 when the error (the absolute
value of the error pulse) specified in parameter No. 4811 of master
spindle is exceeded, and set to 0 when not exceeded.
507
D Constant surface speed control can be executed in synchronization

control even while a workpiece is being held with the two spindles.
However, if the speed is to change in excess of the specified time
constant, the speed changes within the extent specified by time
constant.
D The maximum speed in synchronization control is determined by the
maximum speed of the spindle motor of master spindle (parameter No.
4020).
(Example) Maximum speed of the spindle motor of master spindle:
6000 min–1
Maximum speed of the spindle motor of slave spindle:
4500 min–1
In the example above, a maximum spindle speed of 6,000 min–1 is
specified for master spindle, although a spindle–speed command can
specify up to 12 bits, 4096. If 6,000 min–1 is specified while synchronous
control is specified, an overspeed alarm is issued for slave spindle.
Therefore, do not specify a value of more than 4,500 rpm in this case.
D Like the conventional spindle speed (S) command for which 4 or 5
digits are issued for the first spindle, the signal for specifying spindle
speed can be generated when spindle synchronization control or
synchronous control of spindle phase are in the process of being put
into effect. The SIND, SSIN SSGN, R01l to R12l, *SSTP, and SOR
signals are effective as usual.
However, in the usual mode of spindle rotation control, spindle speed
can be controlled by the PMC function when the following conditions
are satisfied: The SIND signal is set to 1 and the SSIN, SSGN, and
R01l to R12l signals are provided. When spindle synchronization
control is in the process of being put into effect, something other than
the R01l to R12l signals is required to control the spindle speed in
synchronization. The maximum spindle gear speed must be properly
set in parameters No. 3741, 3742, 3743 and 3744. When the value set
in the parameter corresponding to the selected gear is 0, the rotations
of the spindles are not synchronized even if a command is entered in
the R01I to R12I signals.
D The S command for the master spindle and the PMC control signal for
spindle control become effective when issued before spindle
synchronization control or synchronous control of spindle phase are
put into effect. The S command issued in synchronization control
becomes effective for the first spindle immediately after
synchronization control is canceled.
D The load may change due to cutting (or threading). When the load
changes in spindle synchronization control, the spindle speed may
change and the signal indicating that the synchronous control of
spindle speed is completed may go off temporarily.
D Parameters No. 4800 #0 (for the master spindle) and #1 (for the slave
spindle) are used to set the direction of rotation of the first spindle and
second spindle, respectively.
D The gear ratio of the spindle to the position coder must be set to
one–to–one.
D In spindle synchronization control , the compensation value for
spindle speed offset (parameter No. 3731) is disabled.
508
D A spindle–phase synchronous control command is effective only in

synchronous spindle control mode. The specified phase can be
repeatedly changed under synchronous control.
Signal See the manual of serial spindles.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8133 SYC
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

SYC Specifies whether to use spindle synchronous control, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4800 ND2 ND1
[Data type] Bit type

ND1 In controlling the spindle synchronization, the direction of the first
spindle (master spindle) motor rotation is:
0 : The direction indicated by the command sign
1 : The opposite direction to that indicated by the command sign
ND2 In controlling the spindle synchronization, the direction of the 2nd
spindle (slave spindle) motor rotation is:
0 : The direction indicated by the command sign
1 : The opposite direction to that indicated by the command sign
4810 Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the serial spindle
synchronization control mode
[Data type] Byte type

[Unit of data] Pulse
Set the difference in error pulses between two spindles when synchroniz-
ing phases in the serial spindle synchronization control mode.
When the difference in error pulse between two spindles is within the
value set in this parameter, the spindle phase synchronization completion
signal FSPPH <F044#3> becomes “1”.
This parameter is used to check the difference in phase in synchronization
control and to confirm the completion of synchronization in the serial
spindle synchronization control mode.
509
4811 Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the serial spindle
synchronization control mode

[Unit of data] Pulse
Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in
the serial spindle synchronization control mode.
This parameter is used to output the inter–spindle phase error detection

signal SYCAL in the serial spindle synchronization control mode. The
SYCAL <F044#4> signal becomes “1” when a phase error exceeding the
value set in this parameter is found.
Alarm and message

194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour control mode, spindle positioning

SYNCHRO–MODE (Cs–axis control) mode, or rigid tapping
mode was specified during the serial
spindle
synchronous control mode. Correct the pro-
gram so that the serial spindle synchronous
control mode is released in advance.
Note
NOTE
Signal SYCAL <F044#4> is used for monitoring a phase
shift in synchronous control. The processing performed
when a phase shift is detected depends on the
specifications determined by the machine tool builder.
Reference item
FANUC SERVO Spindle synchronization control
AMPLIFIER α series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α Spindle synchronization control

series PARAMETER MANUAL
(B–65160E)
510
9.12
SPINDLE
ORIENTATION
General This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle can
be stopped in either of the following two ways.
· The spindle is mechanically stopped by using stoppers.
· The spindle is stopped by applying a function of the spindle control
unit.
Mechanical stop To mechanically stop the spindle by using, for example, a stopper, rotate
the spindle at a constant low speed and drive a stopper or pin into the
spindle. The spindle can be rotated at a constant speed by applying either
of the following methods.
· Spindle orientation signal (See 9.3, “Spindle Control.”)
· Spindle output control by the PMC (See 15.4.)
Using the spindle Some spindle control units can position the spindle motor by using
control unit sensors and position coders. The CNC itself does not control positioning
by using these units.
Serial spindle orientation In serial spindle orientation by a position coder, the stop position is
by a position coder specified either by a parameter or by the PMC (spindle orientation
function with the stop position externally set).
Signal
Spindle orientation
signals with the stop
position externally set
SHA00 to SHA11 for the

first spindle
<G078, G079>
SHB00 to SHB11 for the

second spindle
<G080, G081>

[Function] This command is used for specifying a stop position with an absolute
position within one rotation in the following equation:
360 n
= ȍ (2i Pi)
4096 i=0
511
where
Pi = 0 when SHAi = 0
Pi = 1 when SHAi = 1
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08
G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
G081 SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3702 OR2 OR1
[Data type] Bit

OR1 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function is
used by the first spindle motor
0 : Not used
1 : Used
OR2 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function is
used by the second spindle motor
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Caution
CAUTION
1 To perform spindle orientation by using the spindle control
unit, the signals of the spindle control unit must be used.
To perform serial spindle orientation by using a position
coder (to perform serial spindle orientation with the stop
position set externally), the serial spindle control unit signals
must be used.
2 When the spindle orientation function of stop position
external setting type is used, the stop position parameters
in spindle orientation with a position coder (No. 4031 and
4204) are invalid.
Note
NOTE
Spindle orientation with the spindle positioning function
differs from that described in this section. For details, see
Section 9.7, “Spindle Positioning.”
512
Reference item
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER a series Position coder method spindle orientation
DESCRIPTIONS (B–65162E) Magnetic sensor method spindle orientation
FANUC AC SPINDLE Position coder method spindle orientation

MOTOR a series Magnetic sensor method spindle orientation
PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65160E)
513
9.13
SPINDLE OUTPUT
SWITCHING
General Spindle output switching switches between the two windings, one for low
speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special spindle
motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stable output
characteristics over a wide range.
Since spindle output switching is a function of the spindle control unit,
see also the manual for the spindle control unit being used.
This section describes the relationship between spindle output switching
and the spindle control function in the CNC.
Operation of To switch the spindle output characteristics, the windings are usually
output–switchable switched using a relay. Prior to the completion of winding switching, the
spindle motor spindle rotates free from drive.
Output switching changes the relationship between a speed command,
issued from the CNC to the spindle, and the output characteristics of the
spindle motor. However, the relationship between the speed command
and spindle motor speed is not changed.
Output switching timing During actual machining, the spindle is usually controlled in the
following way.
(1) Constant spindle speed during cutting, such as milling
(2) Continuously changing spindle speed during cutting, such as in
constant surface speed control
(3) Controlling the position loop including the spindle motor during rigid
tapping, spindle positioning, Cs contour control, etc.
For applications such as those in (1), we recommend switching the output
characteristics for low speed and high speed by using the spindle motor
speed detection signal of the spindle control unit.
For applications such as those described in (2) and (3), the spindle shall
not rotate with no drive applied during cutting or positioning. It is
necessary for the output characteristics to be switched appropriately
before machining or for output switching to be masked by using a PMC
ladder sequence.
Output switching and Spindle output switching ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates
gear switching stable characteristics over a wide range, and eliminates the mechanical
spindle gear switching mechanism.
In creating a PMC ladder sequence for output switching, however, using
the gear switching of the CNC’s spindle control function (see 9.3) may
facilitate programming.
Note the following points when using gear switching for CNC spindle
control for output switching with a machine tool having no mechanical
gear switching mechanism.
514
D When gear selection output signals, GR2O and GR1O <F034 #0, #1>,
are used (for machining centers in which constant surface speed
control is not provided and GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set
to 0)
Set two gears, which are almost the same.
(Example: Value of parameter No. 3741 = value of parameter No.
3742 – 1, value of No. 3742 = Maximum spindle speed)
When parameter No. 3741 is equal to parameter No. 3742, the CNC
judges that one gear is used, and does not output the GR2O signal.
D The parameters related to gear switching points, SGT, bit 3 of
parameter No. 3705, and SGB, bit 2 of parameter No. 3761, parameter
Nos. 3761 and 3751 can be used.
D In usual spindle control, depending on the speed at switching points,
the speed specified by the spindle speed command may differ slightly
from the actual speed in the area where the maximum spindle speed
is set to the maximum speed "1. (This is because the spindle motor
speed, specified by the speed command, is calculated based on the
settings of parameter Nos. 3741 to 3744.)
This does not apply to rigid tapping. (Because the machine tool is
controlled using the feedback signal from the detector in the position
loop.)
D When gear selection input signals, GR1 and GR2 <G028 #1, #2>, are
used (for lathes or machining centers in which constant surface speed
control is provided or GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 1)
Parameter settings are read according to the input signal information.
Unlike the GR2O and GR1O signals, these signals do not require
special parameter settings.
Example) When parameter Nos. 3741 and 3742 are set to the maximum
spindle speed.
Create a PMC sequence that specifies the following.
For gear 1, set GR1 and GR2 to 0.
For gear 2, set GR2 to 0 and set GR1 to 1.
The PMC must determine the switching timing on the basis of some
information.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL 9.3 Spindle control
(This manual) 9.10 Rigid tapping
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER a series Output switching control

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a series Output switching control

PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65160E)
515
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63503EN–1/01
10 TOOL FUNCTIONS
516
B–63503EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
10.1
TOOL FUNCTION
General (M series)
Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to

an 8-digit numeral after address T.
(T series)
Selection of tools and offset amounts can be done by commanding tool

numbers and offset numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address
T. The offset number is specified with the last one or two digits of the T
code. The tool number is specified with the remaining digits after
excluding the one or two digits used to specify the offset number.
When the last one digit is used to specify the offset number:
(Parameter LD1 (No. 5002#0)=1)
Tfffffff f
Offset number
Tool number
When the last two digits are used to specify the offset number:
(Parameter LD1 (No. 5002#0)=0)
Tffffff ff
Offset number
Tool number
When a T code is specified, the code signal and strobe signal correspond-
ing to the specified tool number are issued. The machine selects a tool
according to the issued signals. The code signal is held until another T
code is specified.
In a block, no more than one T code can be specified. The maximum

number of digits that can follow T can be specified in parameter 3032.
If this number is exceeded, an alarm occurs.
Signal See Section 8.1.
Parameter
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code
[Data type] Byte

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code.
517
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5002 LGN LD1
[Data type] Bit

LD1 Offset number of tool offset (Wear offset number when option of tool
geometry/wear compensation is selected)
0 : Specified using the lower two digits of a T code
1 : Specified using the lower one digit of a T code
LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset (When the option of tool
geometry/wear compensation is selected, it is effective.)
0 : Is the same as wear offset number
1 : Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5006 TGC
[Data type] Bit

TGC When a T code is specified in a block containing G50, G04, or G10:
0 : No alarm occurs.
1 : P/S alarm No. 254 occurs.
Alarm and message

030 ILLEGAL OFFSET The offset number in T function speci-

NUMBER fied for tool offset is too large.
(T series) Modify the program.
245 T–CODE NOT ALOWED One of the G codes, G50, G10, and
IN THIS BLOCK G04, which cannot be specified in the
(T series) same block as a T code, was specified
with a T code.
Note
NOTE
When a move command and a tool function are specified in
the same block, the commands are executed in one of the
following two ways:
(i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool
function commands.
(ii) Executing tool function commands upon completion of
move command execution.
The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the sequence
program of PMC.
518
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center) TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION

(B–63504EN)
CONNECTION MANUAL (This manual) 8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION
519
10.2
TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/
TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY
General (M series)
Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values
and tool wear compensation values (Fig. 10.2 (a)).
The geometry compensation and wear compensation can be unified to the
tool compensation.
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
Standard position Standard position
Geometry
ÇÇÇ Tool com-
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
compensation pensation
value value
Wear
Compensation
value
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
(a) Geometry and wear com- (b) Geometry and were compensa-
pensation are discriminated tion are not discriminated
Fig. 10.2(a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the
CRT/MDI panel or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the
corresponding code is specified after address H or D in a program.
The value is used for tool length compensation, cutter compensation, or
the tool offset.
D Range of tool Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
compensation value
Tool compensation
Increment Tool wear compensation
(Geometry compensation)
system
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
IS-B "999.999mm "99.9999inch "99.999mm "9.9999 inch
IS-C "999.9999mm "99.99999inch "99.9999mm "9.99999inch
D Tool compensation The memory can hold 400 sets of tool compensation values.
number
D Tool compensation Type of tool compensation is C.
memory Tool compensation memory C
Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is pre-
pared separately in tool compensation memory C. Geometry com-
pensation and wear compensation can thus be set separately. Separate
memories are prepared for cutter compensation (for D code) and for
tool length compensation (for H code).
520
Tool compensation
Compensation amount
memory
Geometry compensation value for H code
Geometry compensation value for D code

C
Wear compensation value for H code
Wear compensation value for D code
(T series)
Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values

and tool wear compensation values (Fig. 10.2 (b)).
Tool compensation can be specified without differentiating compensation
for tool geometry from that for tool wear (Fig. 10.2 (c)).
Point on the program Point on the program
Imaginary tool
X axis
geometry Offset
offset value on
value X axis
X axis
wear Actual
offset tool
value
Z axis Z axis
wear geometry Offset
offset offset value on
value value Z axis
Fig. 10.2 (b) Difference the Fig.10.2 (c) Not difference the tool
tool geometry offset from tool geometry offset from tool wear
wear offset offset
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the
CRT/MDI panel or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the
corresponding code is specified after address T in a program.
The value is used for tool offset or tool nose radius compensation.
D Range of tool Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
compensation value
Tool compensation
Increment system (geometry compensation, wear compensation)
Metric input Inch input
IS-B "999.999 mm "99.9999 inch

IS-C "999.9999 mm "99.99999 inch
D Tool compensation The memory can hold 32 sets of tool compensation values.
number
521
D Tool compensation Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is prepared
memory separately. Geometry compensation and wear compensation can thus be
set separately.
Tool compensation
Compensation amount
memory
Geometry compensation
Geometry/wear com-
pensation Wear compensation
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3109 DWT
[Data type] Bit

DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation
amount
0 : The characters are displayed at the left of each number.
1 : The characters are not displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 GOF WOF
[Data type] Bit

WOF Setting the tool wear compensation value by MDI key input is:
0 : Not disabled
1 : Disabled (With parameter No. 3294 and No. 3295, set the offset
number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
GOF Setting the tool geometry compensation value by MDI key input is:
0 : Not disabled
1 : Disabled (With parameter No. 3294 and No. 3295, set the offset
number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
522
3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled
3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is
disabled
[Data type] Word

When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input is to be
disabled using bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 and bit 1 (GOF) of
parameter No. 3290, parameter Nos. 3294 and 3295 are used to set the
range where such modification is disabled. In parameter No. 3294, set the
offset number of the start of tool offset values whose modification is
disabled. In parameter No. 3295, set the number of such values.
Example:
The following setting disables the modification of both the tool geometry
compensation values and tool wear compensation values corresponding
to offset numbers 10 to 20:
Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (Disables tool geometry
compensation value modification.)
Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (Disables tool wear compensation
value modification.)
If bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 0, the modification of the
tool geometry compensation values alone is disabled. The tool wear
compensation values may be modified.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5002 WNP LGN
[Data type] Bit

LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset
0 : Is the same as wear offset number
1 : Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
WNP Imaginary tool tip direction used for tool nose radius compensation, is the
direction specified by:
0 : Geometry offset number
1 : Wear offset number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5004 ORC
[Data type] Bit

ORC Tool offset value
0 : Set by the diameter specification (Can be set in only the axis under
diameter programming)
1 : Set by the radius specification
523
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5006 OIM
[Data type] Bit

OIM When the unit is switched between the inch and metric systems, automatic
tool compensation value conversion is:
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation

[Valid data range] Increment system IS–B IS–C

Metric input 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999
Inch input 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999
This parameter sets the maximum value of tool wear compensation. The
following alarm or warning will be informed when the tool wear
compensation (absolute value) exceeding this setting value is set.
Input from MDI Too many digits
Input by G10 P/S 32 offset value is out of range by G10
5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation

[Valid data range] Increment system IS–B IS–C

Metric input 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999
Inch input 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999
This parameter sets the maximum value of tool wear compensation at an
incremental input. If the incremental value exceeds the set value, the
following alarm or warning message is indicated:
Input from MDI Data is out of range
Input by G10 P/S 32 offset value is out of range by G10
524
Alarm and message

032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE In setting an offset amount by G10 or

IN G10 in writing an offset amount by system
variables, the offset amount was ex-
cessive.
Warning message Content
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The value searched exceeds the permitted

range.
TOO MANY DIGITS The input value exceeds the permitted number of
digits.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSA-
(For Machining Center) TION VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PRO-
(B–63514EN) GRAM (G10)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSA-

(For Lathe) (B–63504EN) TION VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PRO-
GRAM (G10)
525
10.3
TOOL LIFE
MANAGEMENT
General When tools are classified into several groups, average tool life (No. of
uses or time) is designated for each group. Whenever a tool is used, the
usage time is subtracted from the tool life; when the tool life expires, the
next tool in the group is selected. The tool sequence within a group is
arranged in advance.
Signal The end of a tool’s life is reported by tool change signal TLCH or
individual tool change signal TLCHI. Tool change signal TLCH is set to
1 at the end of the life of the last tool of a group. Individual tool change
signal TLCHI is set to 1 at the end of the life of the current tool.
Tool change signal

TLCH <F064#0>
[Function] Reports the end of the life of the last tool of a group.
· The life of the last tool of a group ends, after tool change has been
performed each time the end of the life of each tool in a group is
detected.
· Tool–change reset is completed for all groups in which no available
tools remain.
NOTE
The TLCH signal turns to “1” when the CNC is reset by M02
or M30, for instance after the tool life, based on the
frequency of times used, is reached. When tool life is
specified by usage time, TLCH turns to “1” when the tool life
limit is reached. The signal will change during machine
operation, but machining will continue until the end of the
program.
Tool change reset signal

TLRST <G048#7>
[Function] Clears all executable data, including the life count of the group, *, and @.
To clear the data, specify a group number by tool group number selection
signal after replacing the worn–out tools that are displayed on the CRT.
The data can also be cleared from the MDI.
526
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
· Clears all executable data, including the life count of the group.
If the same group is specified after machining is resumed, the first tool in
the group is selected.
NOTE
Tool change reset signal TLRST is valid only when the
automatic operating signal OP is “0”.
Individual tool change

signal TLCHI <F064#2>
(M series) [Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports the end of the life of the current tool. The following processing
can be programmed: A running program is interrupted by a tool-change
program when the signal turns to “1”. Execution of the interrupted
program is resumed when the tool is changed.
[Output condition] The signal is set to “1 ”when:
· The end of the life of the current tool is detected.
· Individual tool-change reset is executed.
Individual tool change

reset signal TLRSTI
<G048#6> (M series)
[Function] Sets the individual tool change signal TLCHI to “0”.
[Operation] When the signal is set to “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
· Sets the individual tool change signal to “0”.
NOTE
1 These signals are valid only when tool life management is
performed on the basis of the tool life calculated in terms of
time or cutting length.
2 Individual tool change signal TLCHI is not cleared by reset.
Tool skip signal

TLSKP <G048#5>
[Function] A tool which has not reached its lifespan may be changed by one of two
methods:
527
(i) Designate the group number for the tool by tool group number
selection signal then turn the tool skip signal TLSKP to “1”. The next
T-code command will pass over the current tool in the group for which
the skip was designated, and select the next tool.
(ii)Turn the TLSKP signal to “1” without designating a group number,
and the machine will skip to the next tool in the group currently in use.
Either of these methods is set using parameter SIG (No. 6800#3). Tool
life is counted from zero. When the TLSKP signal is “1” and the last tool
in the group is being used, the TLCH signal turns to “1”.
[Operation] When the signal is set to “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
· Selects the next tool in the group for which a skip is specified with the
next T code.
· Assumes the number of the group to which the current tool belongs.
CAUTION
The cycle start lamp signal (STL) and feed hold lamp signal
(SPL) must both be “0” before inputting the TLSKP signal.
New tool select signal

TLNW <F064#1>
[Function] Reports that a new tool of a certain group is selected.
This signal can be used when, for example, a compensation value is to be
measured automatically when a new tool is selected.
The new tool select signal is issued at the same timing as TF (tool function
strobe signal).
[Output condition] The signal is set to “1” when:
· A new tool of a certain group is selected.
· The completion signal is set to “1”.
T code output
Tool function
strobe signal TF
New tool selecting

signal TLNW
End signal FIN
528
Tool group number

select signal
TL01 to TL128 (M series)
<G047#0 to #7>
TL01 to TL 16
<G47#0 to #4> (T series)

[Function] When the TLRST or TLSKP signals are input, the tool group number
must be given in advance, using the tool group number selection signals
TL01 to TL16 (T series) or TL01 to TL128 (M series).
Command the following value in binary form:
Tool group number to be specified –1
[Operation] A specified tool group is selected.
Tool life count override

signal *TLV0 to *TLV9
<G049#0 to G050#1>
(M series) [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Overrides the life count (time) if parameter LFV (No. 6801#2) is
specified.
Each of the ten binary code signals has a unique override value that
becomes valid when the signal is set to “0”. The life count is overridden
by the sum of the valid override values. The override value can be
specified in steps of 0.1, within the range of 0 to 99.9.
ȍ {2
9
i
Override value = Vi}
i+0
*TLV0 0.1
*TLV1 0.2
*TLV2 0.4
*TLV3 0.8
*TLV4 1.6
*TLV5 3.2
*TLV6 6.4
*TLV7 12.8
*TLV8 25.6
*TLV9 51.2
(Example) When *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are set to “0”, the override
value is calculated as follows:
12.8 + 6.4 + 0.8 = 20.0
The life count is multiplied by 20.0.
[Operation] The actual cutting time is counted and multiplied by the override value
obtained by the signals. The calculated time is used as the basis for
tool-life management.
529
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01
G048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP
G049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0
G050 *TLV9 *TLV8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F064 TLCHI TLNW TLCH
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 TLF
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

TLF Specifies whether to use tool life management, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6800 SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1
M6T IGI SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1
[Data type] Bit

GS1, GS2 This parameter sets the combination of the number of tool life groups
which can be entered, and the number of tools which can be entered per
group as shown in the table below.
M series T series
GS2 GS1
Group count Tool count Group count Tool count
0 0 1– 16 1– 16 1– 16 1– 16
0 1 1– 32 1– 8 1– 32 1– 8
1 0 1– 64 1– 4 1– 64 1– 4
1 1 1–128 1– 2 1– 16 1– 16
LTM Tool life

0 : Specified by the number of times
1 : Specified by time
530
SIG Group number is

0 : Not input using the tool group number selection signal during tool
skip (The current group is specified.)
1 : Input using the tool group signal during tool skip
GRS Tool change reset signal
0 : Clears only the execution data of a specified group
1 : Clears the execution data of all entered groups
SNG Input of the tool skip signal when a tool that is not considered tool life
management is selected.
0 : Skips the tool of the group used last or of the specified group (using
SIG, #3 of parameter No. 6800).
1 : Ignores a tool skip signal
IGI Tool back number
0 : Not ignored
1 : Ignored
M6T T code in the same block as M06
0 : Judged as a back number
1 : Judged as a next tool group command
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6801 EXG TSM
M6E EXT EMD LFV
[Data type] Bit

TSM When a tool takes several tool numbers, life is counted in tool life
management:
0 : For each of the same tool numbers.
1 : For each tool.
LFV Specifies whether life count override is enabled or disabled when the
extended tool life management function is used.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
EMD An asterisk (*) indicating that a tool has been expired is displayed,
0 : When the next tool is selected
1 : When the tool life is expired
EXG Tool life management data registration by G10 is:
0 : Performed after the data for all tool groups has been cleared.
1 : Performed by adding/changing or deleting the data for a specified
group.
EXT Specifies whether the extended tool life management function is used.
0 : Not used
1 : Used
M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06
0 : The T code is processed as a return number or as a group number
selected next. Either is set by parameter M6T No. 6800#7.
1 : The tool group life is counted immediately.
531
6810
Tool life management ignored number
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the tool life management ignored number.
When the set value is subtracted from a T code, a remainder is used as the
tool group number of tool life management when a value exceeding the set
value is specified in the T code.
6811 Tool life count restart M code
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 255 (not including 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When zero is specified, it is ignored.
When the life is specified by the number of times, the tool exchange signal
is output when a tool life count restart M code is specified if tool life of
at least one tool group is expired. A tool in life is selected in the specified
group when a T code command (tool group command) is specified after
the tool life count restart M code is specified. A tool life counter is then
incremented by one.
When the life is specified by time, a tool in life is selected in the specified
group when a T code command (tool group command) is specified after
the tool life count restart M code is specified.
532
Alarm and message

149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was spe-
cified as the life count type in the extended
tool life management.
150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allow-
NUMBER able value.
Modify the program.
151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT The tool group commanded in the machining
FOUND program is not set.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL The number of tools within one group ex-
ENTRY ceeds the maximum value registerable.
Modify the number of tools.
153 T–CODE NOT FOUND In tool life data registration, a T code was not
specified where one should be. Correct the
program.
154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE When the group is not commanded, H99 or
GROUP D99 was commanded.
(M series) Correct the program.
155 ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 In the machining program, M06 and T code in
the same block do not correspond to the
(M series) group in use. Correct the program.
ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 In the machining program, M06 and T code in

the same block do not correspond to the
(T series) group in use. Correct the program.
156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND P and L commands are missing at the head
of program in which the tool group is set. Cor-
rect the program.
157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be set exceeds
the maximum allowable value. (See parame-
ter No. 6800 bit 0 and 1) Modify the program.
158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify
the setting value.
159 TOOL DATA SETTING IN- During executing a life data setting program,
COMPLETE power was turned off.
Set again.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Tool Life Management Function
Center) (B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Tool Life Management Function

(B–63504EN)
533
10.4
CUTTER
COMPENSATION
10.4.1
Cutter Compensation C
(M Series)
General When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the
tool.
To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offset
vector with a length equal to the radius of the tool (start–up). The offset
vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail of the vector is on the
workpiece side and the head points to the center of the tool.
If a linear interpolation, corner offset (cutter compensation B only), or
circular interpolation command is specified after start–up, the tool path
can be shifted by the length of the offset vector during machining.
To return the tool to the start point at the end of machining, cancel the
cutter compensation mode.
Cutter
compensation
cancel
ÇÇÇ
Start–up
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
Fig. 10.4.1 Outline of cutter compensation C
534
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5001 OFH
[Data type] Bit

OFH Offset number of tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool
offset
0 : Specifies the tool length compensation using an H code, and cutter
compensation C using a D code
Tool offset conforms to TPH in parameter TPH (No. 5001#5).
1 : Specifies the tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool
offset using H codes
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 CCN SUV SUP
[Data type] Bit

SUP Start up or cancel in cutter compensation C
0 : Type A
1 : Type B
SUV When G40, G41, and G42 are specified independently,
0 : The start up and cancel operation conforms to the standard
specification.
1 : Moves by a distance corresponding to the offset vector which is
vertical to the next block movement.
CCN When automatic reference position return (G28) is specified in the cutter
compensation C mode :
0 : The cutter compensation vector is cancelled in movement to an
intermediate position.
1 : The cutter compensation vector is not cancelled in movement to an
intermediate position, but is cancelled in movement to the reference
position.
5010 Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool moves on the outside of a corner
during cutter compensation C
[Data type] Word


This parameter sets the limit value that ignores a slight movement
occurring when a tool moves on the outside of the corner during cutter
compensation C.
535
Alarm and message

033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be deter-

mined for cutter compensation C.
Modify the program.
034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to be
ST–UP /EXT BLK performed in the G02 or G03 mode in
cutter compensation C. Modify the pro-
gram.
036 CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cut-
G31 ter compensation mode.
Modify the program.
037 CAN NOT CHANGE The plane selected by using G17, G18
PLANE IN CRC or G19 is changed in cutter compensa-
tion C mode. Modify the program.
038 INTERFERENCE IN CIR- Overcutting will occur in cutter com-
CULAR BLOCK pensation C because the arc start point
or end point coincides with the arc cen-
ter.
Modify the program.
041 INTERFERENCE IN CRC Overcutting will occur in cutter com-
pensation C. Two or more blocks are
consecutively specified in which func-
tions such as the auxiliary function and
dwell functions are performed without
movement in the cutter compensation
mode. Modify the program.
042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded
IN CRC in cutter compensation. Modify the pro-
gram.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Cutter compensation C
536
10.4.2
Tool Nose Radius
Compensation
(T Series)
General It is difficult to produce the compensation necessary to form accurate parts

when using only the tool offset function due to tool nose roundness in
taper cutting or circular cutting. The tool nose radius compensation
function compensates automatically for the above errors.
Workpiece Tool path without compensation
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Tool path with compensation
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Insufficient
depth of ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Tool nose
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
cutting
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
R
Shape processed without tool

nose radius compensation
Fig. 10.4.2 Tool path of tool nose radius compensation
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5002 WNP
[Data type] Bit

WNP Imaginary tool tip direction used for tool nose radius compensation is the
direction specified by:
0 : Geometry offset number
1 : Wear offset number
537
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 CCN
[Data type] Bit

CCN When automatic reference position return (G28) is specified in the cutter
compensation C mode :
0 : The cutter compensation vector is cancelled in movement to an
intermediate position.
1 : The cutter compensation vector is not cancelled in movement to an
intermediate position, but is cancelled in movement to the reference
position.
5010 Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool moves on the outside of a corner
during tool nose radius compensation
[Data type] Word


This parameter sets the limit value that ignores a slight movement
occurring when a tool moves on the outside of a corner during tool nose
radius compensation.
538
Alarm and message

033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be deter-

mined for tool nose radius compensa-
tion. Modify the program. Modify the
program.
034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to be
ST–UP /EXT BLK performed in the G02 or G03 mode in
tool nose radius compensation. Modify
the program.
035 CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool
G31 nose radius compensation mode.
Modify the program.
037 CAN NOT CHANGE The offset plane is switched in tool nose
PLANE IN NRC radius compensation.
Modify the program.
038 INTERFERENCE IN CIR- Overcutting will occur in tool nose ra-
CULAR BLOCK dius compensation because the arc
start point or end point coincides with
the arc center.
Modify the program.
039 CHF/CNR NOT AL- Chamfering or corner R was specified
LOWED IN NRC with a start–up, a cancel, or switching
between G41 and G42 in tool nose ra-
dius compensation. The program may
cause overcutting to occur in chamfer-
ing or corner R. Modify the program.
040 INTERFERENCE IN Overcutting will occur in tool nose ra-
G90/G94 BLOCK dius compensation in canned cycle
G90 or G94. Modify the program.
041 INTERFERENCE IN NRC Overcutting will occur in tool nose ra-
dius compensation.
Modify the program.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Tool Nose Radius Compensation
539
11. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63503EN–1/01
11 PROGRAM COMMAND
540
B–63503EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND
11.1
DECIMAL POINT
PROGRAMMING/
POCKET
CALCULATOR TYPE
DECIMAL POINT
PROGRAMMING
General Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point
can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can
be specified with the following addresses:
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R, F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M series
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T series
There are two types of decimal point notation: calculatorĆtype notation

and standard notation.
When calculatorĆtype decimal point notation is used, a value without
decimal point is considered to be specified in millimeters, inches or
degree. When standard decimal point notation is used, such a value is
considered to be specified in least input increments. Select either
calculatorĆtype or standard decimal point notation by using the DPI bit
(bit 0 of parameter 3401). Values can be specified both with and without
decimal point in a single program.
Program command Pocket calculator Standard type decimal

type decimal point point programming
programming
X1000 1000mm 1mm

Command value with- Unit : mm Unit : Least input increment
out decimal point (0.001 mm)
X1000.0 1000mm 1000mm

Command value with Unit : mm Unit : mm
decimal point
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 DPI
[Data type] Bit

DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal
point
0 : The least input increment is assumed.
1 : The unit of mm, inches, degree, or s is assumed. (Pocket calculator
type decimal point programming)
541
Alarm and message

007 ILLEGAL USE OF DEC- Decimal point “ · ” input error (A decimal

IMAL POINT point was input after an address with
which it can not be used. Or multiple
decimal points were input.)
Modify the program.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Decimal point programming
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Decimal point programming

(B–63504EN)
542
11.2
G CODE SYSTEM
(T SERIES)
General There are three G code systems : A,B, and C (Table 11.2). Select a G code
system using parameter GSC (No. 3401#7) and parameter GSB (No.
3401#6).
Table 11.2 G code list (1/2)
G code
Group Function
A B C
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1
00 Cylindricalinterpolation
(G107) (G107) (G107)
G10 G10 G10 Data setting
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112) 21
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(G113) (G113) (G113)
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 G18 G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Reference position return
00
G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting
01
G34 G34 G34 Variable–lead thread cutting
G36 G36 G36 Automatic tool compensation X
00
G37 G37 G37 Automatic tool compensation Z
G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation right
G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting
00
G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2 Polygonal turning cancel
(G250) (G250) (G250)
20
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2
Polygonal turning
(G251) (G251) (G251)
543
Table 11.2 G code list (2/2)

G code
Group Function
A B C
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection

14
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro calling
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 G67 G67 Macro modal call cancel
G68 G68 G68 Mirror image for double turrets ON
04
G69 G69 G69 Mirror image for double turrets OFF
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating
G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling
G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 G76 G78 Multiple threading cycle
G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G86 G86 G86 10 Cycle for face boring
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle
G94 G79 G24 End face turning cycle
G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
02
G97 G97 G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 G94 G94 Per minute feed
05
G99 G95 G95 Per revolution feed
— G90 G90 Absoluteprogramming
03
— G91 G91 Incrementalprogramming
— G98 G98 Return to initial level
11
— G99 G99 Return to R point level
544
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 GSC GSB
[Data type] Bit

GSB, GSC The G code system is set.
GSC GSB G code
0 0 G code system A
0 1 G code system B
1 0 G code system C
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402 CLR G91 G01
[Data type] Bit

G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0 : G00 mode (positioning)
1 : G01 mode (linear interpolation)
G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0 : G90 mode (absolute command)
1 : G91 mode (incremental command)
CLR Reset button on the CRT/MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and
rewind signal and emergency stop signal
0 : Cause reset state.
1 : Cause clear state.
Alarm and message

010 IMPROPER G–CODE An unusable G code or G code correspond-

ing to the function not provided is specified.
Modify the program.
545
Note
NOTE
1 If the CNC enters the clear state (see bit 6 (CLR) of
parameter 3402) when the power is turned on or the CNC
is reset, the modal G codes change as follows.
(1) G codes marked with in Table 11.2 are enabled.
(2) When the system is cleared due to powerĆon or reset,
whichever specified, either G20 or G21, remains
effective.
(3) Bit 7 (G23) of parameter No. 3402 is used to specify
whether G22 or G23 is to be selected upon power–on.
The selection of G22 or G23 is not, however, changed
when the CNC is cleared upon a reset.
When the system is cleared due to reset, whichever
specified, either G22 or G23, remains effective.
(4) Setting bit 0 (G01) of parameter 3402 determines which
code, either G00 or G01, is effective.
(5) Setting bit 3 (G91) of parameter 3402 determines which
code, either G90 or G91, is effective.
2 G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are singleĆshot
G codes.
3 Alarm 010 is displayed when a G code not listed in the G
code list is specified or a G code without a corresponding
function is specified.
4 G codes of different groups can be specified in the same
block.
If G codes of the same group are specified in the same
block, the G code specified last is valid.
5 If a G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the
canned cycle is canceled in the same way as when a G80
command is specified. G codes of group 01 are not affected
by G codes for specifying a canned cycle.
6 When G code system A is used for a canned cycle, only the
initial level is provided at the return point.
7 G codes are displayed for each group number.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)
STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND
WHEN RESET
546
11.3
PROGRAM
CONFIGURATION
General A program consists of the following components:

Table 11.3 Program components
Components Descriptions
Tape start Symbol indicating the start of a program file
Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc.
Program start Symbol indicating the start of a program
Program section Commands for machining
Comment section Comments or directions for the operator
Tape end Symbol indicating the end of a program file
Leader section
Tape start % TITLE ; Program start

O0001 ;
Program section (COMMENT) Comment section
M30 ;
% Tape end
Fig. 11.3 Program configuration
547
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 CTV

[Data type] Bit
CTV: Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE N99
[Data type] Bit

N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, program
registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 EOR SBP
[Data type] Bit

SBP Address P of the block including M198 in the subprogram call function
0 : Indicating a file number
1 : Indicating a program number
EOR When the endĆofĆrecord mark (%) is read during program execution:
0 : P/.S alarm No. 5010 occurs.
(Automatic operation is stopped, and the system enters the alarm
state.)
(Automatic operation is stopped, and the system is reset.)
6030 M code that calls the program entered in file
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, and 1 to 255
When the subprogram call function is used, this parameter sets the M code
for calling a program in a file stored on the external input/output device.
NOTE
The M code is judged to be M198 when zero is specified as
the setting value.
548
Alarm and message

001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect

parity was input).
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in
a block is odd). This alarm will be gener-
ated only when the TV check is effective
(when TVC, bit 0 of setting parameter
0000 is set to 1).
5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Program Configuration
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Program Configuration

(B–63504EN)
549
11.4
INCH/METRIC
CONVERSION
General Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code.
Signal
Inch input signal

INCH<F002#0>
[Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is in progress.
[Output condition] “1”indicates that the inch input mode (G20) is in progress, and “0”
indicates that metric input mode (G21) is in progress.
This signal changes to the corresponding state when modes are switched
using the setting data display on the MDI panel.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F002 INCH
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI

[Data type] Bit
INI Unit of input
0: In mm
1: In inches
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

INM Least command increment on the linear axis
0 : In mm (metric system machine)
1 : In inches (inch system machine)
550
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
NOTE
0 0 Linear axis
D Inch/metric conversion is done.
D All coordinate values are linear axis type.
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer toparame-
ter No. 3624)

D Inch/metric conversion is not done.
D Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_. Absolute coor-
dinate values and relative coordinate values are rounded or not
rounded by parameter No. 1008 #0 and #2.
D Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. Refer to param-
eter No. 3624.
D Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the refer-
ence position return direction and the move amount does not exceed
one rotation.

D Machine coordinate values absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinatevalues are linear axis type and is not rounded in 0 to 360_.
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parame-
ter No. 3624)
D Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index
table indexing function (M series).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1403 MIF
[Data type] Bit
MIF Cutting feedrates at feed per minute is specified by F commands

0 : In units of 1 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.01 inches/min for
inch machines.
1 : In unit of 0.001 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001
inches/min for inch machines.
551
NOTE
M series are not equipped with this parameter. Cutting
feedrates are specified by F commands in units of 0.001
mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for
inch machines.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 MCN
[Data type] Bit

MCN Machine position is:
0 : Not displayed according to the unit of input.
(Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine
position is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for
inch machines.)
1 : Displayed according to the unit of input.
(When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm,
and when input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in
inches accordingly.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 AUX
[Data type] Bit

AUX The least increment of the command of the second miscellaneous function
specified with a decimal point
0 : Assumed to be 0.001
1 : Depending on the input increment.
(For input in mm, 0.001 is assumed, or for input in inches, 0.0001 is
assumed.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5006 OIM
[Data type] Bit

OIM When the unit is switched between the inch and metric systems, automatic
tool compensation value conversion is:
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
NOTE
If you change this parameter, re–set the tool compensation
data.
552
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8003 PIM
[Data type] Bit

PIM When only the axes controlled by the PMC are used, the linear axis is:
0 : Influenced by inch/millimeter input.
1 : Not influenced by inch/millimeter input.
Warning
WARNING
When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and
vice versa, the tool compensation value must be re–set
according to the least input increment.
However, when bit 0 (OIM) of parameter 5006 is 1, tool
compensation values are automatically converted and
need not be re–set.
Note
NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command
increment systems are different, the maximum error is half
of the least command increment. This error is not
accumulated.
2 Reference position return is performed at a low speed for
the first G28 command after the inch input is switched to the
metric input or vice versa.
3 The inch and metric input can also be switched using the
parameter INI (bit 2 of No.0000).
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21)

(B–63504EN)
553
11.5
CUSTOM MACRO
11.5.1
Custom Macro
General Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the
custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic
operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general
programs such as pocketing and user–defined canned cycles. A
machining program can call a custom macro with a simple command, just
like a subprogram.
Machining program Custom macro
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #1=#18/2 ;
: G01 G42 X#1 Y#1 F300 ;
: G02 X#1 Y–#1 R#1 ;
G65 P9010 R50.0 L2 ; :
: :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
This means that a function of general use can be formed when

programming a certain function as a custom macro. That is, programs can
be written using variables for data that might change or be unknown. This
can be further applied to group technology.
Similar workpieces can be collected as a group and a universal custom
macro body can be programmed using variables applicable to each group.
In this way, programming is not required for the workpieces in the group.
The programmer only need to assign actual values to the variables.
r β
α
Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be made easily.
Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programmed and
registered, the CNC can operate as if it has the bolt hole circle cutting
function.
Programmers can use the bolt hole circle function by using the following
command only:
(Example of calling bolt hole circle)
G65 P p R r A α Bβ K k ;
554
P : Macro number of bolt hole circle

r : Radius
α : Start angle
β : Angle between circles
k : Number of circles
Signal
Custom Macro Input

Signal
UI000 to UI015
<G054, G055>
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by
a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface
signals between custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Correspondence
Signals Q’ty Variables
of values
UI000 1 #1000
UI001 1 #1001
UI002 1 #1002
UI003 1 #1003 “0” at “0” and
: : : “1” at “1”
UI014 1 #1014
UI015 1 #1015
UI000 to UI015 16 #1032 16–bit binary code

*1
ȍ {#[1000 ) i]
15
*1 Variable value #1032 + 2 i}
i+0
Custom Macro Output

Signal
UI000 to UI015
<F054, F055>
UO100 to UO131
<F056 to F059>
555
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or
written by a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for
interface signals between custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Correspondence of
Signals Q’ty Variables
values
UO000 1 #1100
UO001 1 #1101
UO002 1 #1102
UO003 1 #1103 “0” at “0” and
: : : “1” at “1”
UO014 1 #1114
UO015 1 #1115
UO000AUO015 16 #1132 16–bit binary code *1

UO100AUO115 32 #1133 32–bit binary code *2
ȍ{#[1100 ) i]
15
*1 Variable value #1132 + 2 i}

i+0
ȍ{2
30
*2 Variable value #1133 + i
Vi}–2 31 V 31
i+0
Where Vi=0 when UO1i is H0Iand Vi=1 when UO1i is H1I
These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment

statement as well as on the right side.
The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used
for the value of the system variable to be assigned on the right side.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000
556
Parameter
D Setting for single block

stop
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6000 SBM
[Data type] Bit

SBM Custom macro statement
0 : Not stop the single block
1 : Stops the single block
D Other settings
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CLV CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT
[Data type] Bit

PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRNT command
0 : Outputs a space
1 : Outputs no data
PV5 Custom macro common variables
0 : Outputs custom macro common variables #500 through #599.
1 : Outputs custom macro common variables #100 through #199 and
#500 through #599.
CRO ISO code output using a BPRNT command or a DPRNT command
0 : Outputs only LF after data is output
1 : Outputs LF and CR after data is output
TCS Custom macro (subprogram)
0 : Not called using a T code
1 : Called using a T code
CCV Custom macro’s common variables Nos. 100 through 199
0 : Cleared to “vacant” by reset
1 : Not cleared by reset
CLV Custom macro’s local variables #1 through #33
0 : Cleared to “vacant” by reset
1 : Not cleared by reset
557
D Setting when macro

statement is input/output
with EIA code
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
[Data type] Bit

These parameters are used to input/output macro statements with EIA
code.
The numeral of a suffix indicates the bit position in a code.
*0 to *7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating *.
=0 to =7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating =.
#0 to#7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating #.
[0 to [7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating [.
]0 to ]7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating ].
0 :Corresponding bit is 0
1 :Corresponding bit is 1.
D Setting an M code that

calls a program entered
in a file
6030 M code that calls the program entered in file
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, and 1 to 255
When the subprogram call function is used, this parameter sets the M code
for calling a program in a file stored on the external input/output device.
NOTE
The M code is judged to be M198 when zero is specified as
the setting value.
558
D Setting G codes that call

custom macros of
program Nos.9010 to
9019
6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010
[Data type] Word

These parameters set the G codes that call the custom macros of program
numbers 9010 through 9019.
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by G00.
D Setting M codes that call

subprograms of program
Nos.9001 to 9009
6071 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9001

These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program
559
NOTE
by M00.
D Setting M codes that call

custom macros of
no.9020 to 9029
6080 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9020

These parameters set the M codes that call the custom macros of program
NOTE
by M00.
D ASCII codes that call

subprogram of program
No. 9004 and 9005
6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 65 (A:41H) to 90 (Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal.
Addresses that can be used are as follows:
T series : A, B, F, H, I, K, M, P, Q, R, S, T
M series: A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, L, M, P, Q, R, S, T, X, Y, Z
NOTE
Set 0 when no subprogram is called
560
Alarm and message

076 ADDRESS P NOT Address P (program number) was not com-

DEFINED manded in the block which includes an
M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the
program.
077 SUB PROGRAM The subprogram was called in five folds.
NESTING ERROR Modify the program.
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence number
which was specified by address P in the
block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or
G66 was not found. The sequence number
specified by a GOTO statement was not
found. Otherwise, a called program is being
edited in background processing. Correct
the program, or discontinue the back-
ground editing.
110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal point
display data exceeds the allowable range.
Modify the program.
111 CALCULATED DATA The result of calculation is out of the allow-
OVERFLOW able range (–1047 to –10–29, 0, and 10–29
to 1047).
112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. (including
tan 90_)
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom
macro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN There is an error in other formats than <For-
MACRO mula>.
Modify the program.
115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE A value not defined as a variable number is
NUMBER designated in the custom macro.
Modify the program.
116 WRITE PROTECTED The left side of substitution statement is a

VARIABLE variable whose substitution is inhibited.
Modify the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper
ERROR limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative, BCD ar-
gument is negative, or other values than 0
to 9 are present on each line of BIN argu-
ment.
Modify the program.
122 DUPLICATE MACRO The macro modal call is specified in double.
MODAL–CALL Modify the program.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is used during
COMMAND IN DNC DNC operation.
Modify the program.
124 MISSING END DO – END does not correspond to 1 : 1.
STATEMENT Modify the program.
561
125 FORMAT ERROR IN <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the

MACRO program.
126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n x 3 is not established.
Modify the program.
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT NC and custom macro commands coexist.
IN SAME BLOCK Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO The sequence number specified in the
SEQUENCE NUMBER branch command was not 0 to 9999. Or, it
cannot be searched. Modify the program.
129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT An address which is not allowed in <Argu-
ADDRESS ment Designation > is used.
Modify the program.
199 MACRO WORD Undefined macro word was used. Modify
UNDEFINED the custom macro.
Caution
CAUTION
Machine tool builders: You are requested to attach your
custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit
without fail.
If it is necessary to replace part program storage memory
due to a failure, FANUC servicemen or end user in charge
of maintenance should know the contents of your custom
macro for the purpose of repairing the trouble immediately.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Custom macro
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Custom macro

(B–63504EN)
562
11.5.2
Interruption Type
Custom Macro
General When a program is being executed, another program can be called by

inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is
referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program an
interrupt command in the following format:
M96 Pffff ; Enables custom macro interrupt
M97 ; Disables custom macro interrupt
Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to call
a program during execution of an arbitrary block of another program.
This allows programs to be operated to match situations which vary from
time to time.
(1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the

abnormality is started by an external signal.
(2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another ma-

chining operation without the cancellation of the current operation.
(3) At regular intervals, information on current machining is read.
Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of the

interruption type custom macro function.
M96
Pxxxx;
Interrupt
signal O xxxx;
(UINT)*
Interrupt
signal
(UINT)*
M99 (Pffff);
Nffff;
M97 Interrupt
; signal
(UINT)*
Fig 11.5.2 Interruption type custom macro function
563
When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program

operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input to
execute the program specified by Pxxxx.
Any interrupt signal (UNIT, asterisked in Fig. 11.5.2) issued after M97
is ignored.
Do not enter an interrupt signal during execution of an interrupt macro.
Signal
Interrupt Signal for

Custom Macro
UNIT<G053#3>
[Function] This signal calls and executes a program in memory. During execution,
a program in automatic operation is suspended.
To enable this signal to be accepted, a particular miscellaneous function
must be specified in a command program for automatic operation. In
addition, automatic operation must already be started to accept this signal.
The particular miscellaneous function code is set by parameter 6003,
6033 and 6034.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G053 UNIT
Parameter
D Various Setting for

Custom Macro
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6003 MUS MCY MSB MPR TSE MIN MSK
[Data type] Bit

MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro interrupt
0 : Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)
1 : Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5601 and later)
MIN Custom macro interrupt
0 : Performed by interrupting an in–execution block (Custom macro
interrupt type I)
1 : Performed after an in–execution block is completed (Custom macro
interrupt type II)
TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT
0 : Edge trigger method (Rising edge)
1 : Status trigger method
564
MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code

0 : M96/M97
1 : M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034)
MSB Interrupt program
0 : Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro–type interrupt)
1 : Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram–
type interrupt)
MCY Custom macro interrupt
0 : Not performed during cycle operation
1 : Performed during cycle operation
MUS Interrupt–type custom macro
0 : Not used
1 : Used
D Setting M code that
makes interruption
effective and ineffective
6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt
6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt

These parameters set the custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M codes.
NOTE
These parameters can be used when MPR, #4 of parameter
No. 6003, is 1. M96 is used as a valid M code and M97 is
used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of the
state of this parameter.
Note
NOTE
1 No interrupt–type custom macro can be used during DNC
operation.
2 No interrupt–type custom macro can be used during
multiple repetitive canned cycle execution.
565
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Interruption type custom macro
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Interruption type custom macro

(B–63504EN)
566
11.6
CANNED CYCLE
(M SERIES)/CANNED
CYCLE FOR HOLE
MACHINING
(T SERIES)
General Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs.
With a canned cycle, a frequently–used machining operation can be
specified in a single block with a G function; without canned cycles,
normally more than one block is required. In addition, the use of canned
cycles can shorten the program to save memory.
Explanations A canned cycle consists of a sequence of six operations.

Operation 1 Positioning a hole position
Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level
Operation 3 Hole machining
Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole
Operation 5 Retraction to point R level
Operation 6 Rapid traverse up to the initial point
Operation 1
Initial level
Operation 2 Operation 6
Point R level
Operation 5
Operation 3
Rapid traverse
Operation 4
Feed
Fig. 11.6 (a) Canned cycle operation sequence
567
SPINDLE CONTROL In some canned cycles, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse
direction may be output.
The following canned cycles require spindle control:

M series T series
Reverse tapping cycle G74 Face tapping cycle (G84)
Fine boring cycle G76 Side tapping cycle (G88)
Tapping cycle G84
Boring cycle G86
Back boring cycle G87
Boring cycle G88
For spindle control, the following normal miscellaneous functions are

used:
See the description of the miscellaneous functions.
M03: CW spindle rotation
M04: CCW spindle rotation
M05: Spindle stop
M19: Spindle orientation (M series)
When the rotation direction of the spindle is to be switched from one
direction to the other (for example, when M04 is output during M03
operation), a parameter can specify whether to send M05 at the time
switching.
Timing charts are described in the following page:
568
D G74 (Counter tapping cycle)
X, Y
Z
Z
Z
Dwell Dwell
(Note) (Note)
Note) It is possible to not output M05 M03 M05 M04
M05 code by using parame-
ter M5T (No. 5101#6). MF MF MF MF Next block
(G98 mode)
FIN FIN FIN FIN

Next block
(G99 mode)
D G76 (Fine boring cycle)
X, Y X or Y
X
or Y
Z
Z
Z
Dwell
(Note)
M05 M19 M03 M03
MF MF Return to ini- MF MF
Note) It is possible to not output tial level in
M05 code by using parame- G98 mode
ter M5B (No. 5101#7).
FIN FIN FIN FIN
Next block
D G84 (tapping cycle) (G98 mode)
Next block (G99 mode)

X, Y
Z
Z
Dwell Dwell
(Note) (Note)
M05 M04 M05 M03
Note) It is possible to not output MF MF MF MF Next block

M05 code by using parame- (G98 mode)
ter M5T (No. 5101#6).
FIN FIN FIN FIN

Next block
(G99 mode)
Fig. 11.6 (b) Canned cycle for M series (1/2)
569
D G86 (Boring cycle)
X, Y
Return to initial level in G98 mode

Z
Z
M05 M03 M03
MF MF MF
FIN FIN FIN

Next block
(G98 mode)
D G87 (Back boring cycle) Next block (G99 mode)
X or Y X or Y
X, Y
X or Y
Z
Z
Dwell
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
M05 M19
M03 M05 M19 M03
MF MF MF MF MF MF
FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN
D G88 (Boring cycle) (Note 1) Back boring cycle is not used in G99 mode but in
G98 mode.
(Note 2) It is possible to not output M05 code using pa-
rameter M5B (no. 5101#7).
X, Y
Manual feed Cycle start

Z
Z
Z
Dwell Z
M05 M03
MF MF
Return to initial level in G98 mode or
R point level in G99 mode.
FIN FIN
Fig. 11.6 (c) Canned cycle for M series (2/2)
570
D G84 (Face tapping cycle)

G88 (Side tapping cycle)
X, C
(Z, C)
Z
(X) Z
(X) Z Z
(X)
Dwell Dwell
(Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 2)

M05 M04 M05 M03
MF MF MF MF Next block
(G98 mode)
(Note 1) When parameter M5T FIN FIN FIN FIN

(No. 5101#6)=0, M05 is not output. Next block
(Note 2) Another M code may be used by (G99 mode)
parameter No. 5112 and 5113.
Fig 11.6 (d) Canned cycle for T series
D M code used for C–axis When an M code specified in parameter No.5110 for C–axis
clamp/unclamp (T series) clamp/unclamp is coded in a program, the CNC issues the M code for
C–axis clamp after the tool is positioned and before the tool is fed in rapid
traverse to the point–R level. The CNC also issues the M code (M code
C–axis clamp +1) for C–axis unclamp after the tool retracts to the point–R
level. The tool dwells for the time specified in parameter No. 5111.
Tapping signal During a tapping cycle, the tapping signal is output. The tapping signal
is also output while the G code of the tapping cycle is valid.
Override During tapping, cutting feedrate override is always set to 100%.
Feed hold When the feed hold key is pressed during tapping, the movement is not
stopped immediately but the movement is stopped when the tool is
returned to level R.
Dry run The TDR bit (bit 5 of parameter No. 1401) specifies whether dry run is
valid during tapping.
571
Signal
Tapping signal
TAP <F001#5>
[Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode.
– The system is in tapping cycle mode.
G74, G84: M series
G84, G88: T series
– The system is in tapping mode.
G63: M series
– The system is in neither tapping cycle mode nor tapping mode.
– A reset or emergency stop is specified.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F001 TAP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101 M5T ILV RTR FXY
M5B M5T RD2 RD1 EXC FXY
[Data type] Bit

FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is:
0 : Always the Z–axis
1 : The axis selected by the program
NOTE
In the case of the T system, this parameter is valid only for
the drilling canned cycle in the FS10/11 format.
EXC G81
0 : Specifies a drilling canned cycle
1 : Specifies an external operation command
RTR G83 and G87
0 : Specify a high–speed peck drilling cycle
1 : Specify a peck drilling cycle
ILV Initial point position in drilling canned cycle
0 : Not updated by reset
1 : Updated by reset
572
RD2, RD1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling canned cycle G76 or
G87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are set as shown below by plane selection.
RD2 RD1 G17 G18 G19
0 0 +X +Z +Y
0 1 –X –Z –Y
1 0 +Y +X +Z
1 1 –Y –X –Z
M5T When a spindle rotates from the forward to the reverse direction and vice
versa in tapping cycles G84 and G74 for M series (G84 and G88 for T
series), befor M04 or M03 is output:
For T series
0 : Not output M05
1 : Outputs M05
For M series
0 : Outputs M05
1 : Not output M05
M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87:
0 : Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops
1 : Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5102 RDI RAB
[Data type] Bit

RAB The R command for the drilling canned cycle in the FS10/11 format is:
0 : Regarded as an incremental command
1 : Regarded as:
An absolute command in the case of G code system A
An absolute command in the case of G code system B or C when the
G90 mode is specified.
An incremental command in the case of G code system B or C when
the G91 mode is specified.
RDI The R command for the drilling canned cycle in the FS10/11 format:
0 : Is regarded as the specification of a radius
1 : Follows the specification of a diameter/radius for the drilling axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5103
SIJ
[Data type] Bit

SIJ A tool shift value for the drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 in the FS10/11
format is specified by:
0 : Address Q
573
1 : Address I, J, or K
5110 C–axis clamp M code in drilling canned cycle
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets the C–axis clamp M code in a drilling canned cycle.
5111 Dwell time when C–axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
This parameter sets the dwell time when C–axis unclamping is specified
in a drilling canned cycle.
5112 Spindle forward–rotation M code in drilling canned cycle
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets the spindle forward–rotation M code in a drilling
canned cycle.
NOTE
M03 is output when “0” is set.
5113 Spindle reverse–rotation M code in drilling canned cycle
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets the spindle reverse–rotation M code in a drilling
canned cycle.
NOTE
M04 is output when “0” is set.
574
5114 Return or clearance value of drilling canned cycle G83

Return value of high–speed peck drilling cycle G73
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit

For M series, this parameter sets the return value in high–speed peck
drilling cycle G73 (G83 for T series).
G73 for M series
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
q
d
q
d
Z point
Fig. 11.6 (e) High–speed peck drilling cycle (G73) for M series
For T series, this parameter sets the return or clearance value in drilling
canned cycle G83.
G83 for T series

Parameter No. 5101 RTR=0 Parameter No. 5101 RTR=1
(High speed peck drilling cycle) (Peck drilling cycle)
q : Depth of cut q : Depth of cut

d : Return value d : Clearance value
R point R point
q q
d d
q q
d d
q q
Z point Z point
Fig. 11.6 (f) Drilling canned cycle (G83) for T series
575
5115
Clearance canned cycle G83
[Data type] Word

G83 for M series
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
q
d
q
d
Z point
Fig. 11.6 (g) Peck drilling cycle (G83) for M series
Alarm and message

044 G27–G30 NOT AL- One of G27 to G30 is commanded in

LOWED IN FIXED CYCLE a canned cycle mode.
(M series) Modify the program.
Note
NOTE
A parameter FXY (No. 5101#0) can be set to the Z axis
always used as the drilling axis. When FXY=0, the Z axis is
always the drilling axis.
576
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Canned cycle
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Canned cycle for hole machining

(B–63504EN)
577
11.7
EXTERNAL MOTION
FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
General Upon completion of positioning in each block in the program, an external

operation function signal can be output to allow the machine to perform
specific operation.
G81 IP_ ; (The IP_ is axis move command )
Every time positioning for the IP_ move command is completed, the CNC
sends an external operation signal to the machine. An external operation
signal is output for each positioning operation until canceled by G80 or
a group 01 G code.
No external operation signals are output during execution of a block that

contains neither X nor Y.
Basic procedure 1 Once positioning for a move command has been completed, the CNC
sets the external operation signal EF to 1.
2 When the EF signal is set to 1, the PMC executes drilling or another
operation. Once the operation has been completed, the PMC sets
completion signal FIN to 1.
3 The CNC resets the EF signal to 0 upon the elapse of the time (TFIN)
specified in parameter No. 3011 after the FIN signal is set to 1.
4 When the EF signal is set to 0, the PMC resets the FIN signal to 0.
5 The CNC starts executing the next block.
G81 command
Next block
Positioning
EF
Machine operation
FIN
TFIN
Fig. 11.7 Timing diagram of basic procedure
578
Signal
External Operation
Signal
EF<F008#0>
[Function] Reports that the positioning of G81 has been completed in the external
motion function, and that a special external operation is required.
[Output condition] For details of the output condition and procedure, see the ”basic
procedure”, described previously.
For details of completion signal FIN, see section 8.1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F008 EF
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101 EXC
[Data type] Bit

EXC G81:
0 : Specifies a drilling canned cycle
1 : Specifies an external operation command
Caution
CAUTION
1 When this function is used, canned cycles (G73, G74, G76,
and G82 to G89) cannot be used.
2 When the high–speed M, S, T, or B interface is used, the
signals used by this function are transferred in high–speed
mode. See Section 8.4.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining External operation function (G81)
579
11.8
CANNED CYCLE
(T SERIES)/MULTIPLE
REPETITIVE CANNED
CYCLE (T SERIES)
General This option canned cycles to make CNC programming easy. For instance,
the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough
machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cutting is available.
The following example shows stock removals in turning type I.
If a finished shape of A to A’ to B is given by a program as in the figure
below, the specified area is removed by ∆d (depth of cut), with finishing
allowance ∆u/2 and ∆w left.
C
B (R) A
(R) ∆d
(F) e
45°
(F)
Program command
(F) : Cutting feed ∆u/2

(R) : Rapid traverse
∆w
A’
G71 U (∆d) R (e) ;
G71 P (ns) Q (nf) U (∆u) W (∆w) F (f ) S (s ) T (t)
N (ns)⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅
F____ The move command of a finished shape of
S____ A to A’ to B is specified in the blocks from
T____ sequence number ns to nf.
N (nf)⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅;
∆d : Depth of cut (radius designation)
Designate without sign. The cutting direction depends on the direction
AA’. This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 5132),
and the parameter is changed by the program command.
e : Escaping amount
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 5133),
and the parameter is changed by the program command.
ns : Sequence number of the first block for the program of finishing shape.
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the program of finishing shape.
∆u : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter / radius
designation).
∆w : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.
f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks ns to nf in the cycle is ignored,
and the F, S, or T function in this G71 block is effective.
580
Signal
Chamfering signal
CDZ<G053#7>
[Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering
distance in parameter No. 5130.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading
cycle.
When the signal is set to 0, chamfering is executed in the threading cycle.
Approx. Approx.
45_ 45_
γ γ
Fig. 11.8 (a) Straight thread cutting cycle Fig. 11.8 (b)Taper thread cutting cycle
Set the chamfering distance g to the parameter No. 5130. When the
optional multiple repetitive canned cycle is provided, the chamfering
distance can be specified in G76. The chamfering angle is made smaller
than 45_ by the remaining pulses in the automatic acceleration/
deceleration circuit and servo system.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G053 CDZ
Parameter
D Various setting for

multiple repetitive
canned cycle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5102 QSR MRC
[Data type] Bit

MRC When a target figure other than a monotonically increasing or
monotonically decreasing figure is specified in a multiple repetitive
turning canned cycle (G71, G72):
1 : P/S alarm No. 064 is occurs.
NOTE
This parameter is valid for multiple repetitive turning canned
cycle type I.
581
QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check
to see if the program contains a block that has the sequence number
specified in address Q is:
0 : Not made.
1 : Made. (If the sequence number specified in address Q cannot be
found, an alarm occurs and the canned cycle is not executed.)
D Chamfering distance in
thread cutting cycles
G76 and G92
5130 Chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] 0.1
This parameter sets the chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76
and G92.
D Depth of cut in multiple

repetitive canned cycles
G71 and G72
5132 Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

This parameter sets the depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles
G71 and G72.
D Escape in multiple
G71 and G72.
5133 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72.

This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71
and G72.
582
D Escape in multiple
G73
5135 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in X–axis direction
5136 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in Z–axis direction


This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 of
an X, then Z axis.
D Division count in
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G73
5137 Division count in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73

[Unit of data]
This parameter sets the division count in multiple repetitive canned cycle
G73.
D Return in multiple
canned cycles G74 and
G75
5139 Return in multiple canned cycles G74 and G75


This parameter sets the return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74
and G75.
583
D Minimum depth of cut in

multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5140 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76


This parameter sets the minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76.
D Finishing allowance in
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5141 Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76


This parameter sets the finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
D Repetition count of final

finishing in multiple
repetitive canned cycle
G76 5142 Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

[Unit of data] Cycle
This parameter sets the repetition count in multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
D Tool nose angle in

multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76.
5143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76.

[Valid data range] 0 to 120 when FS10/11 tape format is used
0, 29, 30, 55, 60 and 80 when FS10/11 tape format is not used.
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle
G76.
584
Alarm and message

061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT Address P or Q is not specified in G70,

FOUND IN G70–G73 G71, G72, or G73 command.
Modify the program.
062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1 The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero or
G71–G76 negative value.
2 The repetitive count in G73 is zero or
negative value.
3 The negative value is specified to ∆i or ∆k
in G74 or G75.
4 A value other than zero is specified to ad-
dress U or W, though ∆i or ∆k is zero in
G74 or G75.
5 A negative value is specified to ∆d,
though the relief direction in G74 or G75
is determined.
6 Zero or a negative value is specified to
the height of thread or depth of cut of first
time in G76.
7 The specified minimum depth of cut in
G76 is greater than the height of
thread.
8 An unusable angle of tool tip is specified
in G76.
Modify the program.
063 SEQUENCE NUMBER The sequence number specified by ad-
NOT FOUND dress P in G70, G71, G72, or G73 com-
mand cannot be searched. Modify the
program.
064 SHAPE PROGRAM NOT A target shape which is not monotone
MONOTONOUSLY increase or decrease was specified in
a repetitive canned cycle (G71 or G72).
065 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1 G00 or G01 is not commanded at the
G71–G73 block with the sequence number which is
specified by address P in G71, G72, or
G73 command.
2. Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded
in the block with a sequence number
which is specified by address P in G71 or
G72, respectively.
Modify the program.
066 IMPROPER G–CODE IN An unallowable G code was comman-
G71–G73 ded beween two blocks specified by
address P in G71, G72, or G73. Modify
the program.
067 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with
MODE address P and Q was specified.
Modify the program.
069 FORMAT ERROR IN The final move command in the blocks
G70–G73 specified by P and Q of G70, G71, G72,
or G73 ended with chamfering or cor-
ner R.
585
Cautions for multiple 1 Necessary parameters (such as P, Q, X, Z, U, W, and R) must be set

repetitive canned cycle correctly for an individual block that specifies a multiple repetitive
(G70 to G76) canned cycle.
2 In G71, G72, and G73 blocks having a sequence number specified
using P, always specify G00 or G01 in group 01, or otherwise a P/S
alarm (No. 65) will be issued.
3 None of G70, G71, G72, and G73 can be specified in the MDI mode.
If any of them is specified, a P/S alarm (No. 67) will be issued.
G74, G75, and G76 can be specified, however.
4 M98/M99 cannot be specified in a G70, G71, G72, G73 block, or any
block having a sequence number between those specified using P or
Q in a G70, G71, G72, or G73 block.
5 The following commands cannot be specified in any block having a
sequence number between those specified using P or Q in a G70, G71,
G72, or G73 block.
S One–shot G code except dwell (G04)
S G code other than G00, G01, G02, or G03 in group 01
S G codes in group 06
S M98/M99
6 It is possible to stop operation during multiple repetitive canned cycle
(G70 to G76) execution to allow manual intervention. Before
restarting the multiple repetitive canned cycle, be sure to return the
tool to the point of manual intervention, because the distance through
which the tool is caused to move by manual intervention is not
included in the absolute value (the actual tool position deviates by that
distance).
7 When G70, G71, G72, or G73 is executed, P and Q cannot specify the
same sequence number in one program.
8 For a multiple repetitive canned cycle, no figure can be specified using
the direct drawing dimension programming or chamfering/corner
rounding format.
9 Also for G74, G75, and G76, it is impossible to use floating–point
input for P and Q. The unit of travel distance and cutting depth is the
least input increment.
10 If #1 = 2500 is executed in a custom macro, 2500.000 is assigned to
#1, and P#1 is equivalent to P2500.
11 It is impossible to apply tool–nose radius compensation in G71, G72,
G73, G74, G75, G76, and G78.
12 A multiple repetitive canned cycle program cannot be used for DNC
operation.
13 No interrupt–type custom macro can be used during multiple
repetitive canned cycle execution.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Canned cycle
(B–63504EN) Multiple repetitive canned cycle
586
11.9
INDEX TABLE
INDEXING FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
General By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one
rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can be
indexed.
Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped or
clamped .
Basic Procedure The control axis that indexes the index table can be named A, B or C. It
will be referred to as “B” in the following discussion.
The positioning angle for the index table is commanded by the numerics
following “B” in the program command, which is an independent block.
Both absolute and incremental commands are possible, but the value after
“B” is the integer times the numeric set by the parameter:
(Example) G00G90B100000; Absolute command
(Positioning angle 10 degrees)
G00G91B20.0; Incremental command
(Move distance 20 degrees)
There are two variations of the procedure (type A and type B) to set the
index table position; the difference is in the ON/OFF timing of the
position control servo. The sequence of events and the difference between
the variations are described below, followed by time charts showing them
graphically.
(1) Assume Bbbbb is ordered by the command program.
(2) The CNC turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP <F061#0> to “1”.
(Type B -- When BUCLP is turned to “ 1 ”, the position control servo
for the B axis is turned ON.)
(3) On the PMC side, the clamp of the B axis is released; when completed,
the B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL <G038#6> turns to
“0”.
(4) The CNC then turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to “0”, to
indicate it received the *BEUCL signal.
(5) When the PMC is notified that BUCLP has been turned to “0”, the
PMC should turn *BEUCL to “1”.
In type B, B–axis unclamp signal BUCLP is turned to “0”, B–axis
position control is made in servo–on state, B–axis is rotated, and the
B axis is stopped at the specified position. B axis always moves at
rapid traverse.
(6) When the B axis stops at the specified position, CNC turns B–axis
clamp signal BCLP<F061#1>to 1. In type A, signal BCLP is set to “1”
and B–axis position control is made in servo–off state.
(7) When BCLP is turned to “1” on the PMC side, the B axis is clamped
mechanically (with a clutch or shot pin, for example). When the clamp
is completed, the B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP <G038#7>
is turned to “0”.
587
(8) When *BECLP is turned to “0”, the CNC then turns BCLP to “0”,
informing it received the *BECLP signal. (Type B -- When BCLP
turns to “0”, the B axis position control servo is turned off.)
(9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to “0”, *BECLP is turned to
“1”. This completes the sequence.
The time charts for these operations are shown in the figures below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

B command (independent) Bbbbb
B axis servo on for position control
B axis unclamp signal BUCLP<F061#0>
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL<G038#6>
B axis rotation
B axis clamp signal BCLP<F061#1>
B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP<G038#7>
Fig. 11.9 (a) Time chart for positioning index table (type A)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

B command (independent) Bbbbb
B axis servo on for position control
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP<G038#6>
B axis rotation
Fig. 11.9 (b) Time chart for positioning index table (type B)
588
B axis manual feed selection signal +Jb*1<G100>
B axis position control servo ON
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP<G038#6>
B axis rotation
B axis deceleration signal DECb*1<X009>
B axis return completion signal ZPb*1<F094>
*1: “b” express the control axis number for B axis
Fig. 11.9 (c) Manual reference position return of B axis time chart (type A)
Type A and Type B As described in the basic procedure, type A differs from type B in that the
servo used for B–axis position control is turned on or off at the different
timing.
Type A is suitable for a system in which the B–axis is clamped with shot
pins.
Type B is suitable for a system in which the B–axis is clamped with a
clutch.
Minimum indexing angle When the B–axis is clamped with shot pins, the mechanism can be
indexed at only a limited number of positions. The minimum indexing
angle can be specified in parameter No. 5512. If an angle which is not a
multiple of this minimum indexing angle is specified in indexing, alarm
No. 135 is issued.
Direction of rotation The direction of rotation can be set to one of the following.
– Whichever direction has the shorter distance (INC, bit 3 of parameter
No. 5500)
– Direction specified with a command
– Usually the positive direction. Only when a particular M code is
specified in the same block, the axis rotates in the negative direction
(parameter No. 5511).
Absolute/incremental Setting G90, bit 4 of parameter No. 5500, specifies absolute

programming programming, irrespective of G90/G91 mode.
589
Signal
B axis clamp signal

BCLP<F061#1>
[Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch or
shot pin.
[Output condition] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the
basic procedure for positioning the index table.
B axis clamp completion

signal
BECLP<G038#7>
[Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the B axis clamp operation.
[Operation] The operation and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.
B axis unclamp signal

BUCLP<F061#0>
[Function] Instructs the PMC side to release the B axis from the mechanical clamp.
[Output condition] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the
basic procedure for positioning the index table.
B axis unclamp
completion signal
*BEUCP<G038#6>
[Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the release of the B axis from the
mechanical clamp.
[Operation] The operation and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.
590
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G038 *BECLP *BEUCP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F061 BCLP BUCLP
Parameter
D Setting linear or rotation

axis #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx

0 0 Linear axis
D Inch/metric conversion is done.
D All coordinate values are linear axis type.
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer toparame-
ter No. 3624)

D Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_. Absolute coor-
dinate values and relative coordinate values are
rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008 #0 and #2.
D Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. Refer to param-
eter No. 3624.
D Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the refer-
ence position return direction and the move amount does not exceed
one rotation.

D Machine coordinate values absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinatevalues are linear axis type and is not rounded in 0 to 360_.
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parame-
ter No. 3624)
D Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index
table indexing function (M series).
591
D Various setting for index

table indexing #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 IXC
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

IXC Specifies whether to use index table indexing, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5500 IDX G90 INC ABS REL DDP
[Data type] Bit

DDP Selection of decimal–point input method of index table indexing axis
0 : Conventional method (Example IS–B: B1; = 0.001 deg)
1 : Pocket calculator method (Example IS–B: B1; = 1.000 deg)
REL Relative position display of index table indexing axis
0 : Not rounded by 360 degrees
1 : Rounded by 360 degrees
ABS Displaying absolute coordinate value of index table indexing axis
0 : Not rounded by 360 degrees
The index table indexing axis rotates 720 degrees (two rotations)
when G90 B720.0; is specified from the 0–degree position. It rotates
in reverse direction 720 degrees (two rotations) when G90 B0.; is
specified. The absolute coordinate value then becomes 0 degree.
1 : Rounded by 360 degrees
The index table indexing axis is positioned in 40 degrees when G90
B400.0; is specified from the 0–degree position. The index table
indexing axis does not rotate by two or more turns when this
parameter is set to 1. It also does not move when G90 B720.0; is
specified from the 0–degree position.
INC Rotation in the G90 mode when negative–direction rotation command M
code (parameter No. 5511) is not set
0 : Not set to the shorter way around the circumference
1 : Set to the shorter way around the circumference (Set ABS, #2 of
parameter No. 5500, to 1.)
G90 Index table indexing command
0 : Judged to be an absolute/increment command according to the
G90/G91 mode
1 : Judged to be an absolute command
IDX Index table indexing sequence
0 : Type A
1 : Type B
592
D Negative direction
rotation command M
code 5511 Negative0directionrotation command M code
[Data type] Byte

0 : Not use an M code that sets the index table rotation to the negative
direction. The rotation direction is specified using a command and
parameter (INC, #3 of parameter No. 5500).
1 to 255:
Sets an M code that sets the index table rotation to the negative
direction. The rotation is set to the negative direction only when an M
code set here is specified in the same block as an index table indexing
command. If the M code is not specified in the same block, the
rotation is always set to the positive direction.
NOTE
Set ABS, #2 of parameter No. 5500, to 1.
D Unit of index table

indexing angle
5512 Unit of index table indexing angle


This parameter sets the unit of index table indexing angle. A P/S alarm
is generated when movement other than integer multiple of the setting
value is specified.
NOTE
If zero is specified as the setting value, any command can
be specified irrespective of the unit of angle.
Alarm and message

135 ILLEGAL ANGLE The index table indexing positioning

COMMAND angle was instructed in other than an in-
tegral multiple of the value of the mini-
mum angle.
Modify the program.
136 ILLEGAL AXIS In index table indexing , another control
COMMAND axis was instructed together with the B
axis.
Modify the program.
593
Caution
CAUTION
1 The secondary auxiliary function can be used if the address
is different from that of the indexing axis.
2 If the incremental command is used for indexing of the index
table, the workpiece zero point offset value on the index
table axis must always be 0. That is, the machine
coordinate system must always agree with the workpiece
coordinate system of the index table axis.
3 The dry run signal DRN is ineffective during positioning of
the B axis.
4 The machine lock signal MLK is functional during
positioning of the B axis. However, while the B axis is
moving, after the movement ends, the MLK is functional.
Note
NOTE
1 Specify a rotation axis as the index table indexing axis. (Set

1 in the ROTx bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 1006).)
2 The servo off signal for the index table indexing axis is
invalid.
3 Single direction positioning (G60) cannot be specified.
4 While the index table is being positioned, input signals that
reset the CNC, such as *ESP (emergency stop), ERS
(external reset), and RRW (reset & rewind), are functional.
When reset is applied to the CNC, this operation stops.
Further, if *SP (automatic operation stop signal) turns to “0”,
axis movement is stopped and the equipment enters the
automatic operation stop state.
If a stop at an any position is not suitable for the machine,
appropriate processing is required on the machine.
5 If a reset occurs while the system is awaiting the completion
of clamping or unclamping, the clamp or unclamp signal is
cleared. The CNC exits from the completion wait status.
6 Manual operation of jog feed, incremental feed and handle
feed cannot be used with the B axis, but manual reference
position return is possible. If reset is applied during the
movement of B axis, the manual reference position return
operation should be performed.
7 No movement can be performed by automatic return from
the reference position (G29), return to the second reference
position (G30), or selection of the machine coordinate
system (G53).
8 Only the fourth axis can be used as the index table indexing
axis.
594
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Index table indexing function
595
11.10
SCALING (M SERIES)
General A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).

The dimensions specified with X_, Y_, and Z_ can each be scaled up or
down with the same or different rates of magnification.
The magnification rate can be specified in the program.
Unless specified in the program, the magnification rate specified in the
parameter is applied.
D Scaling up or down Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001.
along all axes at the It depends on parameter SCR (No. 5400#07) which value is selected.
same rate of Specify an axis to be subjected to scaling, using parameter SCLx (bit 0
magnification of parameter No. 5401).
If scaling P is not specified on the block of scaling (G51X_Y_Z_P_ ;), the
scaling magnification set to parameter (No. 5411) is applicable.
If X,Y,Z are omitted, the tool position where the G51 command was
specified serves as the scaling center.
SCALING UP OR DOWN ALONG ALL AXES

AT THE SAME RATE OF MAGNIFICATION
Format Meaning of command
G51X_Y_Z_P_ ; Scaling start X_Y_Z_ : Absolute command for

center coordinate value
Scaling is effective. of scaling
(Scaling mode) P_ : Scaling magnification
G50 ; Scaling cancel
P4
P3
P4’ P3’
P0
P1’ P2’
P1 P2
0 X
P0:Scaling center
Fig. 11.10 (a) Scaling (P1 P2 P3 P4³P1’P2’P3’P4’)
596
D Scaling of each axis, Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative
programmable mirror magnification is specified, a mirror image is applied. First of all, set a
image (negative parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) which validates each axis scaling (mirror
magnification) image).
Then, set parameter SCLx (No. 5401#0) to enable scaling along each axis.
Least input increment of scaling magnification of each axis (I, J, K) is
0.001 or 0.00001( set parameter SCR (No. 5400#7)).
Magnification is set to parameter 5421 within the range ±0.00001 to
±9.99999 or ±0.001 to ±9.999.
If a negative value is set, mirror image is effected.
If magnification I, J or K is not commanded, a magnification value set to
parameter (No. 5421) is effective. However, a value other than 0 must be
set to the parameter.
SCALING UP OR DOWN ALONG EACH AXES AT A DIFFERENT

RATE OF MAGNIFICATION (MIRROR IMAGE)
Format Meaning of command
G51_X_Y_Z_I_J_K_; Scaling start X_Y_Z_: Absolute command for

center coordinate value
Scaling
of scaling
is effective. I_J_K_: Scaling magnification for
(Scaling X axis, Y axis and Z axis
mode) respectively
G50 Scaling cancel
a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis

c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis
0 : Scaling center
Y axis
Programmed figure
D
Scaled figure
C 0
X axis
A
B
Fig. 11.10 (b) Scaling of each axis
597
Parameter
D Setting valid/invalid and

magnification of scaling
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 SCL
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

SCL Specifies whether to use scaling, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
NOTE
It is impossible to select the small–hole peck drilling cycle
and scaling functions at the same time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400 SCR XSC
[Data type] Bit

XSC Axis scaling and programmable mirror image
0 : Invalidated (The scaling magnification is specified by P.)
1 : Validated
SCR Scaling magnification unit
0 : 0.00001 times (1/100,000)
1 : 0.001 times
D Valid/invalid setting to
each axis scaling
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5401 SCLx

SCLx Scaling for every axis
0 : Invalidated
1 : Validated
598
D Magnification used when

scaling magnification is
not specified
5411 Magnification used when scaling magnification is not specified

[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No. 5400)
This parameter sets the scaling magnification. This setting value is used
when a scaling magnification (P) is not specified in the program.
NOTE
Parameter No. 5421 becomes valid when scaling for every
axis is valid. (XSC, #6 of parameter No. 5400 is “1”.)
D Scaling magnification for

every axis
5421 Scaling magnification for every axis

[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No. 5400)
[Valid data range] *999999X*1, 1X999999
This parameter sets the scaling magnification for every axis.
Alarm and message

141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the

G51 IN CRC tool offset mode.
Modify the program.
142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE Scaling magnification is commanded in
other than 1 – 999999.
Correct the scaling magnification set-
ting (G51 Pp , or parameter 5411 or
5421).
143 SCALED MOTION DATA The scaling results, move distance,
OVERFLOW coordinate value and circular radius ex-
ceed the maximum command value.
Correct the program or scaling magnifi-
cation.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Scaling (G50, G51)
599
11.11
COORDINATE
SYSTEM ROTATION
(M SERIES)
General A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes

possible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation command
when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the
programmed position on the machine. Further, when there is a pattern
comprising some identical shapes in the positions rotated from a shape,
the time required for programming and the length of the program can be
reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling it after
rotation.
Angle of rotation
Center of rotation
X
0
Fig. 11.11 (a) Coordinate system rotation
600
FORMAT
G17
G18 G68 (G68.1)α_β_R_ ; Start rotation of a coordinate system.
G19
Coordinate system rotation mode
(The coordinate system is rotated.)
G69 (G69.1); Coordinate system rotation cancel command
Note:G68/G69 for M series, G68.1/G69.1 for T series.
MEANING OF COMMAND
G17 (G18 or G19) : Select the plane in which contains the figure to be
rotated.
α_β_ Absolute command for two of the x_,y_,and Z_ axes that
correspond to the current plane selected by a
command (G17, G18, or G19). The command specifies
the coordinates of the center of rotation for the values
specified subsequent to G68.
R_ Angular displacement with a positive value indicates
counter clockwise rotation. Parameter 5400#0
selects whether the specified angular displacement is
always considered an absolute value or is considered an
absolute or incremental value depending on the specified
G code (G90 or G91).
Least input increment : 0.001 deg

Valid data range : –360.000 to 360.000
Rotation plane G17
Center of Angle of rotation

rotation R
(α,β)
X
0
Fig. 11.11 (b) Coordinate system rotation
601
Parameter
D Angle specification
method of coordinate
system rotation #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400 RIN
[Data type] Bit

RIN Coordinate rotation angle command (R)
0 : Specified by an absolute method
1 : Specified by G90 or G91
D Angular displacement
used when no angular
displacement is
specified for coordinate
system rotation
5410 Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for
coordinate system rotation

[Unit of data] 0.001 degrees
This parameter sets the angular displacement for coordinate system
rotation. When the angular displacement for coordinate system rotation
is not specified with address R in the block where G68 is specified, the
setting of this parameter is used as the angular displacement for
coordinate system rotation.
Alarm and message

144 ILLEGAL PLANE SE- The coordinate rotation plane and arc
LECTED or cutter compensation C plane must
be the same. Modify the program.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Coordinate system rotation (G68, G69)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Coordinate system rotation (G68.1, G69.1)

(B–63504EN)
602
11.12
MACRO COMPILER/
EXECUTER
General There are two types of NC programs; those which, once created, are
scarcely changed, and those which are changed for each machining type.
The former are programs created by the custom macro, and the latter are
machining programs. If programs of these types are executed
simultaneously, a battery may run out or the custom macro may be
destroyed by error operation.
Such problems can be solved by this function. The custom macro created
by a machine tool builder is converted to an execute-form program, be
stored in the FLASH ROM module, and be executed.
Features
(1) Since the program is stored after converted to an execute-form
program, the execution speed is high. The machining time is then
reduced, and the precision is improved.
(2) Since the program is stored in FLASH ROM, there is no problem of
battery extinction or custom macro destruction by error operation.
The reliability is improved.
(3) Since the stored program is not displayed on a program screen, the
know-how of the machine tool builder is protected.
(4) Since the custom macro is stored in FLASH ROM, the program edit
memory can be used efficiently.
(5) The user can call the macro easily without knowing the stored
program. A custom macro can be created and executed in the program
edit memory as usual.
(6) An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or
selecting screens by the soft key. The machine tool builder can extend
the control function by using such functions as machining program
creation and edit control, reader/punch interface control, and PMC
data read/write functions.
Note
NOTE
To enable graphic display using the macro executor,
specification of the graphic display circuit is required.
Reference item
Macro compiler/executer programming manual (B–61803E–1)
603
11.13
SMALL HOLE PECK
DRILLING CYCLE
(M SERIES)
General This is a repetition of a peck drilling cycle in which when an overload

torque detection signal (skip signal is used) is received with an arbor
having an overload torque detection function during drilling, the tool is
retracted, and the spindle speed and cutting feedrate are changed to retry
machining.
The cycle is realized by:

* X– and Y–axis positioning
* Positioning at point R along the Z–axis
* Cutting along the Z–axis (first time, depth of cut Q, incremental)
Retracting
(bottom of hole → minimum clearance ∆ , incremental)
Retracting
( → to point R, absolute)
Repeated until
Forwarding
point Z is reached
(point R → to point with hole bottom + clearance ∆, absolute)
Cutting
(second and subsequent times, cut of depth Q + ∆, incremental)
* Dwell
* Return to point R along the Z–axis (or initial point) = end of cycle
G83(G98) G83(G99)
Initial level
Point R
Point R
Q Q
∆ ∆
∆ ∆
Overload torque ∆ Overload torque ∆

Point Z Point Z
Dwell Dwell
604
Change of cutting The cutting conditions are changed at each pecking operation (forwarding
conditions → cutting → retracting) during one G83 cycle. (Appropriate setting of
bits 1 and 2 of parameter No. 5160 can specify that the cutting conditions
are not to be changed.)
D Changing of cutting The cutting feedrate programmed with the F word is changed during each
feedrate of the second and subsequent cutting operations. Parameter Nos. 5166
and 5167 specify the ratio of change for a case in which a skip signal was
received during the previous cutting operation and a case in which no skip
signal was received during the previous cutting operation, respectively.
Cutting feed rate = Fă a
(First time) a = 1.0
(Second and subsequent times) a = a b B 100

(where b is the ratio of change for the first time)
Skip during the previous cutting: b = b1% (parameter No. 5166)

No skip during the previous cutting: b = b2% (parameter No. 5167)
When the ratio a at which the cutting feedrate is changed becomes less
than the ratio specified in parameter No. 5168, changing the cutting
feedrate is discontinued. The upper limit to the newly specified cutting
feedrate is the maximum cutting feedrate.
D Changing of spindle The spindle speed programmed with the S word is changed during each
speed of the second and subsequent cutting operations. Parameter Nos. 5164
and 5165 specify the ratio of change for a case in which a skip signal was
received during the previous cutting operation and a case in which no skip
signal was received during the previous cutting operation, respectively.
Spindle speed = Să g
(First time) g = 1.0
(Second and subsequent times) g = g d B 100

(where d is the ratio of change for the first time)
Skip during the previous cutting: d = d1% (parameter No. 5164)

No skip during the previous cutting: d = d2% (parameter No. 5165)
If the cutting feedrate is clamped at the lower limit, the spindle speed is
not changed. The upper limit to the newly specified spindle speed is the
maximum S analog data.
605
Signal
Overload torque signal

SKIP<X1004#7>
[Function] Retracts a tool if an overload torque is applied it.
[Operation] When this signal becomes “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
S Assuming that an overload torque is applied to a tool, retracts it, and
changes the spindle speed and cutting feedrate, then retries machining.
S This signal is valid, when the drill axis is between points R and Z and
is moving forward or in cutting operation (so that the tool can retract).
NOTE
This signal is used also as a skip signal. (See Section 14.3.)
Small–diameter peck
drilling in progress
signal PECK2<F066#5>
[Function] Indicates whether small–diameter peck drilling is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” under the following conditions.
S When the tool returns from drill axis point R positioning to R
point/initial level, after it was positioned at the hole position along a
nondrill axis.
S The signal does not become “1” during positioning at the hole
position.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1004 SKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F066 PECK2
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 SPK
NOTE
606
[Data type] Bit

SPK Specifies whether to use small–hole peck drilling cycle, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
NOTE
It is impossible to select the small–hole peck drilling cycle
and scaling functions at the same time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5160 NOL OLS
[Data type] Bit

OLS When an overload torque signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a
small diameter, the feed and spindle speed are
0 : Not changed.
1 : Changed.
NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque
signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feed and
spindle speed are:
0 : Not changed.
1 : Changed.
5163 M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter

[Unit of data]
This parameter sets an M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode
of a small diameter.
5164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted after an
overload torque signal is received
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed
when the tool is retracted because the overload torque signal is received in
a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
S2 = S1 d1 B 100
S1: Spindle speed to be chaged
S2: Spindle speed changed
d1 is set as a percentage.
607
5165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted without
an overload torque signal received
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed
when the tool is retracted without the overload torque signal received in a
peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
S2 = S1 d2 B 100
S1: Spindle speed to be chaged
S2: Spindle speed changed
d2 is set as a percentage.
5166 Percentage of cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted after an
overload torque signal is received
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed
when the tool is retracted because the overload torque signal is received in
a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
F2 = F1 b1 B 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Changed cutting feedrate
b1 is set as a percentage.
5167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted without
an overload torque signal received
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate tot be changed
when the tool is retracted without the overload torque signal received in a
F2 = F1 b2 B 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Changed cutting feedrate
b2 is set as a percentage.
608
5168 Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a
small diameter
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the lower limit of the percentage of the cutting
feedrate changed repeatedly in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter to
the specified cutting feedrate.
FL = F b3 B 100
F: Specified cutting feedrate
FL: Changed cutting feedrate
Set b3 as a percentage.
5170 Number of the macro variable to which the total number of retractions during cutting
is output
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the number of the macro variable to which the total
number of times the tool is retracted during cutting in a peck drilling cycle
mode of a small diameter is output. The total number cannot be output to
common variables 500 to 599.
5171 Number of the macro variable to which the total umber of retractions because of an
overload signal is output
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the common variable number of the custom macro to
which the number of times the tool is retracted after the overload signal is
received during cutting in a peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter is
output. The total number cannot be output to common variables 500 to
599.
5172 Speed of retraction to point R when no address I is issued
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] mm/min
This parameter sets the speed of retraction to point R when no address I is
issued in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
609
5173 Speed of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when no ad-
dress I is issued
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] mm/min
This parameter sets the speed of advancing to the position just before the
bottom of a previously machined hole when no address I is issued in a
5174 Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter
[Data type] Word

Linear axis
0.001 0.0001 mm
(millimeter input)
Linear axis
0.0001 0.00001 inch
(inch input)

This parameter sets the clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small
diameter.
Alarm and message

D Diagnostic display
520 Total number of retract operations during cutting since G83 was issued
521 Total number of retract operations due to reception of the overload torque signal
since G83 was issued
The indications of DGN Nos. 520 and 521 are cleared by G80.
522 Coordinates at which the drill axis started retracting (least input command)
523 Difference between the previous and current coordinates at which the drill axis
started retracting (least input increment: previous – current)
Warning
WARNING
Forwarding or retracting is not performed by rapid traverse
positioning. Instead, it is performed with the same
interpolation as for cutting feed. This means exponential
acceleration/deceleration is performed; however, the tool
life management function does not count the tool life during
forwarding or retracting.
610
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Small hole peck drilling cycle
611
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63503EN–1/01
12 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
612
B–63503EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
12.1
DISPLAY/SET
12.1.1
Clock Function
General Time is displayed in the hour/minute/second format on each display

screen. Some screens allows display of the year, month, and day.
The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time. The time
will be told through the window on the PMC side.
Time information can be read and written.

System variables for time information
Variable Function
number
#3001 This variable functions as a timer that counts in 1–millisecond in-

crements at all times. When the power is turned on, the value
of this variable is reset to 0. When 65535 milliseconds is
reached, the value of this timer returns to 0.
#3002 This variable functions as a timer that counts in 1–hour incre-

ments when the cycle start lamp is on. This timer preserves its
value even when the power is turned off. When 1145324.612
hours is reached, the value of this timer returns to 0.
#3011 This variable can be used to read the current date (year/month/
day). Year/month/day information is converted to an apparent
decimal number. For example, Janualy 23, 2000 is represented
as 20000123.
#3012 This variable can be used to read the current time (hours/min-
utes/seconds). Hours/minutes/seconds information is con-
verted to an apparent decimal number. For example, 34 minutes
and 56 seconds after 3 p.m. is represented as 153456.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts
Center) (B–63514EN) Count, and Time
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts
(B–63504EN) Count, and Time
613
12.1.2
Displaying Operation
History
General This function displays a history of the key and signal operations, performed by
the CNC operator, upon the occurrence of a failure or CNC alarm. The history
can also be displayed for previously generated CNC alarms.
The following history data is recorded:

(1) MDI key operation sequences, performed by the CNC operator
Example: A ~Z, <POS>, <PAGE ↑>, [SF1]
(2) On/off status transitions of selected input and output signals
Example: G0000.7↑ , SBK ↑
(3) CNC alarm information
Example: P/S0010
(4) Time (date, time) stamp
Example: 92/01/20
09:15:30
The history data can be output to an input/output device, connected via
the reader/punch interface. Previously output history data can be input
from an input/output device.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 OHS OHD
[Data type] Bit

OHD The operation history screen is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
OHS Operation history sampling is:
0 : Performed.
1 : Not performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OPH
NOTE
To put this parameter setting in effect, switch the power off
then back on again.
OPH Specifies whether to enable the operation history function.

0 : Enabled.
1 : Disabled.
614
3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Minutes
Time data is recorded in operation history at set intervals. When 0 is
specified in this parameter, 10 minutes is assumed as the default.
However, note that time data is not recorded if there is no data to be
recorded at the specified time.
Note
NOTE
1 While the operation history screen is displayed, history data
is not recorded.
2 When the duration of the on/off state of an input signal is 16
msec or shorter, that state is not recorded in the history. In
addition, note that some signals are not recorded in the
history.
3 Once the memory area becomes full, the oldest data is
deleted to allow new data to be recorded. The memory area
can store information corresponding to approximately 8000
key strokes.
4 Recorded history data is held in memory even after the
power is turned off. Note, however, that the history data is
erased by performing an entire–memory clear operation.
5 For the operation history function, sampling is disabled
when bit 7 (OHS) of parameter No. 3106 is set to 1.
6 Be careful to set the date and time correctly.
When the time is recorded at regular intervals, but no data
is recorded within a defined period, the time for that period
is not recorded.
615
12.1.3
Help Function
General The help function displays on the screen detailed information about
alarms issued in the CNC and about CNC operations. The following
information is displayed.
D Detailed information of When the CNC is operated incorrectly or an erroneous machining

alarms program is executed, the CNC enters the alram state. The help screen
displays detailed information about the alarm that has been issued and
how to reset it. The detailed information is displayed only for a limited
number of P/S alarms. These alarms are often misunderstood and are
rather difficult to understand.
D Operation method If you are not sure about a CNC operation, refer to the help screen for
information about each operation.
D Parameter table When setting or referring to a system parameter, if you are not sure of the
number of the parameter, the help screen displays a list of parameter Nos.
for each function.
Note
NOTE
The user cannot switch the screen display from the PMC
screen or CUSTOM screen to the help screen.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining HELP FUNCTION
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) HELP FUNCTION

(B–63504EN)
616
12.1.4
Displaying Alarm
History
General Up to 50 of the most recent CNC alarms are stored and displayed on the
screen.
The following information items are displayed.

(1) The date the alarm was issued
(2) Alarm No.
(3) Alarm message (some contains no message)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY

(B–63504EN)
12.1.5
Servo Tuning Screen
General On the servo tuning screen, parameters required for basic adjustment of
the servo motor and statuses being monitored are listed for each axis.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
[Data type] Bit

SVS Servo tuning screen
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
Reference item
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–63505EN) Servo Tuning Screen
617
12.1.6
Spindle Setting and
Tuning Screen
General On the spindle setting and tuning screen, parameters required for basic
adjustment of the serial spindle and statuses being monitored are listed.
The screen is only for the main spindle connected to the first amplifier.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVP SPS

SPS Spindle setting and tuning screen
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
SVP Synchronization errors displayed on the spindle setting and tuning screen
0 : Instantaneous values are displayed.
1 : Peak–hold values are displayed.
Reference item
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–63505EN) Spindle setting and tuning screen
618
12.1.7
Waveform Diagnosis
Display
General Waveform diagnosis is classified into two main types.

(1) One–shot type
One–shot waveform diagnosis provides graphs of waveforms to
illustrate changes in the following data.
In one–shot waveform diagnosis, the start of data collection can be
triggered by the rising or falling edge of a machine signal.
This function is designed to facilitate the adjustment of servo motors
and spindle motors.
a. Servo motor error value along each axis, number of distributed
pulses, torque, feedrate, current, and thermal simulation data
b. Combined feedrate for the first, second, and third axes
c. Spindle motor speed, load meter reading, and position deviation,
converted to spindle position
d. On/off status of the machine signal, specified by a signal address
(2) Stored type
In stored waveform diagnosis, changes in the following data are
recorded. When a servo alarm is issued, the recorded data can be read
and displayed graphically as a waveforms.
In stored waveform diagnosis, the end of data collection can be
triggered by the rising or falling edge of a machine signal.
This function is designed to facilitate the determination of a faulty
location.
Stored data can be output via the reader/punch interface.
a. Servo motor error value along each axis, number of distributed
pulses, torque, feedrate, current, and thermal simulation data
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 SGD
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

SGD Servo waveform
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
619
3120 Time from the output of an alarm to the termination of sampling (waveform diagno-
sis function)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
This parameter specifies the time allowed from the time a servo alarm
condition occurs until data collection and recording are stopped in the
waveform diagnosis function; data collection can be continued
additionally for the specified time.
Note
NOTE
1 Once the memory area becomes full, the oldest data is
deleted to allow new data to be recorded (stored type).
2 Waveform diagnosis data is held in memory even after the
power is turned off (stored type).
3 Be careful to set the date and time correctly.
4 Waveform diagnosis is enabled when bit 0 (SGD) of
parameter No. 3112 is set to 1. To perform waveform
diagnosis, a graphics display circuit is required.
Usual graphic display function can not be used when
waveform diagnosis function is enable.
Reference item
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–63505EN) Waveform diagnostic display
620
12.1.8
Self–diagnosis
General When a breakdown occurs, in order to quickly determine the cause, the
following should be done.
First, it has to be determined as to whether the breakdown occurred in the

CNC internal section, or the PMC or machine side.
There are times when it appears that a breakdown has occurred even when
the breakdown has not actually occurred. For example, when the
machinery ceases to operate because it is waiting for an external signal.
In this case, the condition of the interface between the CNC and PMC, or
between the CNC and the machinery, and the conditions within the CNC
need to be investigated.
The CNC checks the following itself.

1) Abnormality of detection system
2) Abnormality of position control unit
3) Abnormality of servo system
4) Overheat
5) Abnormality of CPU
6) Abnormality of ROM
7) Abnormality of RAM
8) Abnormality in data transfer between MDI
9) Abnormality of part program storage memory
10)Abnormality in tape reader read function
11)Abnormality in data transfer between PMC
Input/output signals from PMC to CNC, or vice versa, and inner status
of the CNC can be displayed on the screen.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining CHECKING BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC
Center) (B–63514EN) SCREEN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) CHECKING BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC

(B–63504EN) SCREEN
621
12.1.9
Display of Hardware
and Software
Configuration
General The required hardware/software configuration for CNC maintenance can
be displayed on the screen.
The system configuration screen displays the following information:

(1) Printed circuit board configuration
The type and function of the printed circuit board mounted in each slot
are displayed. When a CPU is mounted on a printed circuit board, the
software series and edition are also displayed.
(2) Software configuration
The series and editions of installed software, including the CNC soft-
ware, servo software, PMC management software, and ladder pro-
grams, are displayed. For the CNC software, assembly information
is also displayed.
(3) Module configuration
The configuration of the modules or hardware mounted on each
printed circuit board (such as the type of a module or the hardware, and
whether it is mounted) is displayed.
Reference item
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–63505EN) System Configuration Screen
622
12.1.10
Position Display
Neglect
General Indication of the current position can be suppressed by setting bit 0
(NDPx) of parameter No. 3115, or by issuing the position indication
ignore signal.
Bit 1 (NDAx) of parameter No. 3115 enables the display of positions in

the machine coordinate system only.
Signal
Position Display Neglect

Signal
NPOS1~NPOS4<G198>

[Function] Disables the display of the current position.
A separate signal is provided for each controlled axis. The number at the
end of each signal name denotes the controlled axis number.
NPOS1
1⋅⋅⋅1st axis current position display
2⋅⋅⋅2nd axis current position display
3⋅⋅⋅3rd axis current position display
4⋅⋅⋅4th axis current position display
[Operation] While a signal is set to 0, the current position in the corresponding axis
is displayed. While the signal is set to 1, the current position along the
corresponding axis is not displayed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G198 NPOS4 NPOS3 NPOS2 NPOS1
623
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3115 NDAx NDPx

NDPx Display of the current position for each axis
0 : The current position is displayed.
1 : The current position is not displayed.
NDAx Position display using absolute coordinates and relative coordinates is:
0 : Performed.
1 : Not performed. (Machine coordinates are displayed.)
12.1.11
Run Hour and Parts
Count Display
General This function displays the integrated power–on time, the integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer (started by an input
signal from PMC) on the screen. The integrated cycle operation time, the
integrated cutting time and timer can be altered and preset, using the MDI.
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total
number of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number
of parts machined on the screen. Each time M02, M30 or a parameter set
M code is executed, the count of the total number of parts machined and
the number of parts machined in memory is incremented by 1.
If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M
code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts
machined can be counted automatically.
If the count of the number of parts machined reaches the number of parts
required, a signal is output to the PMC side.
It is possible to change and preset the number of parts required and the
number of parts machined using MDI.
624
Signal
Target part count

reached signal
PRTSF<F062#7>
[Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been
machined.
[Output condition] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when:
@ Machining of the specified number of parts has been completed.
When 0 (infinity) is set as the required number of parts, this signal is
not output.
The PRTSF signal is set to 0 when:
@ Machining of the specified number of parts has not yet been
completed.
@ The system is reset.
General–purpose
integrating meter start
signal
TMRON <G053#0>
[Function] The CNC has an integrating meter which is started by an input signal from
the PMC, as well as integrating meters for counting the automatic
operation time and counting cutting time. The count for this integrating
meter can be displayed on the screen. The count can be preset by MDI
operation.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the integrating meter starts counting.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G053 TMRON
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F062 PRTSF
625
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6700 PCM
[Data type] Bit

PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts
0 : M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710
1 : Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710
6710 M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 255 except 98 and 99
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts
are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed.
NOTE
Set value 0 is invalid (the number of parts is not counted for
M00). Data 98 and 99 cannot be set.
6711 Number of machined parts

[Unit of data] One piece
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total
number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by
parameter No. 6710 is executed.
NOTE
When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1, the
number of parts is not counted with M02 and M30.
6712 Total number of machined parts

This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or
an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
626
NOTE
When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1, the
number of parts is not counted with M02 and M30.
6713 Number of required parts

[Data type] Word
This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF is output to PMC when the number
of machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of
parts is regarded as infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The
PRTSF signal is then not output.
6750 Integrated value of power–on period

[Unit of data] One min
This parameter displays the integrated value of power–on period.
6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

[Unit of data] One ms
6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic
operation (neither stop nor hold time included).
The actual operation time is the sum of the values set in parameter Nos.
6751 and 6752.
627
6753 Integrated value of cutting time

6754 Integrated value of cutting time

This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is
performed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular
interpolation (G02 or G03).
The actual cutting time is the sum of the values set in parameter Nos. 6753
and 6754.
6755 Integrated value of general–purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON

time

6756 Integrated value of general–purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON

time

This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input signal
TMRON from PMC is on.
The actual integrated time is the sum of the values set in parameter Nos.
6755 and 6756.
628
6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time)

6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time)

This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time (neither
stop nor hold state included). The actual operation time is the sum of the
values set in parameter Nos. 6757 and 6758. The operation time is
automatically preset to 0 during the power–on sequence and the cycle start
from the reset state.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts
Center) (B–63514EN) Count, and Time
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts
(B–63504EN) Count, and Time
629
12.1.12
Graphic Display
General
Graphic Display It is possible to draw the programmed tool path on the screen, which
makes it possible to check the progress of machining, while observing the
path on the screen.
In addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen.
The drawing coordinates (parameter) and graphic parameters must be set
before a tool path can be displayed.
O0100 N0100
X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000
X Y S 0T
MEM *** *** *** 14:23:03
PARAM GRAPH
M series
X 0001 00021
X 200.000
Z 200.000
MEM STRT * * * * FIN 08 : 00 : 53

G.PRM GRAPH ZOOM (OPRT)
T series
630
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6500 NZM DPA
[Data type] Bit

DPA Current position display on the graphic display screen
0 : Displays the actual position to ensure tool nose radius compensation
1 : Displays the programmed position
NZM 0 : The screen image is not enlarged by specifying the center of the screen
and magnification. (Screen image enlargement by a conventional
method is enabled.)
1 : The screen image is enlarged by specifying the center of the screen
and magnification. (Screen image enlargement by the conventional
method is disabled.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6501 CSR
[Data type] Bit

CSR While the screen image is enlarged, the shape of the graphic cursor is:
0 : A square. (J)
1 : An X. ( )
6510 Drawing coordinate system
[Data type] Byte

This parameter specifies the drawing coordinate system for the graphic
function.
The following show the relationship between the set values and the
drawing coordinate systems.
631
Set value = 0 Set value = 1 Set value = 2 Set value = 3

Z X Z
Z X
X Z
X
Set value = 4 Set value = 5 Set value = 6 Set value = 7
X
Z X Z
X Z X
Note
NOTE
When the waveform diagnosis function is valid, the graphics
function cannot be used.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining GRAPHICS FUNCTION
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) GRAPHICS FUNCTION

(B–63504EN)
632
12.1.13
Displaying Operating
Monitor
General The reading on the load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and
the serial spindle.
D Display of the servo axes The reading on the load meter can be displayed for up to four servo axes
by setting parameters 3151 to 3154.
D Display of the spindle When serial spindles are used, the reading on the load meter and
axes speedmeter can be displayed only for the main serial spindle.
D Speedmeter Although the speedmeter normally indicates the speed of the spindle
motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting
bit 6 (OPS) of parameter 3111 to 1.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 OPS OPM
[Data type] Bit

OPM Operating monitor
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
OPS The speedmeter on the operating monitor screen indicates:
0 : Spindle motor speed
1 : Spindle speed
3151 Number of the axis for which the first load meter for the servo motor is used
3152 Number of the axis for which the second load meter for the servo motor is used
3153 Number of the axis for which the third load meter for the servo motor is used
3154 Number of the axis for which the 4th load meter for the servo motor is used
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, 1, . . . , the number of control axes
Set the numbers of the axes for which measurement values on the load
meters for maximum four servo motors are displayed. Set 0 for those axes
for which a load meter need not be displayed.
2086 Rated current parameter (RTCURR)
633
4127 Load meter displayed value for maximum output
Note
NOTE
The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter
2086 and spindle parameter 4127.
These parameters are set by the automatic setting.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Operating Monitor Display
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Operating Monitor Display

(B–63504EN)
634
12.1.14
Software Operator’s
Panel
General The software operator’s panel function replaces part of the control
switches on the machine operator’s panel with soft switches which can be
turned on or off using the MDI of the control unit.
The control switches for the functions listed in the following table can be
replaced with soft switches. Also available are eight general–purpose soft
switches which can be used additionally by the machine tool builder.
These eight general–purpose soft switches can be optionally named by the
machine tool builder. For control switches in groups 1 to 7, parameter
(no.7200) can be used to select whether the control switches on the
machine operator’s panel or soft switches on the MDI of the control unit
are used for each group.
Group1 :Mode selection
Group2 :Selection of jog feed axis, manual rapid traverse
Group3 :Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of
manual pulse magnification
Group4 :Jog feedrate override, feedrate override, rapid traverse
override
Group5 :Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 :Protect key
Group7 :Feed hold
Group8 :General purpose
The states of all soft switches are informed to the PMC by output signals.
Based on these output signals, the PMC should turn “1” or “0” input
signals related to soft switch functions. In other words, turning “1” the
soft switch assigned to single block operation, for example, does not
cause the control unit to select single block operation internally. Single
block operation is selected when the PMC turns to “1” the input signal for
single block operation, instead.
635
Signal
Group Function Output signal Related input signal
1 Mode selection MD1O <F073#0> MD1
MD2O <F073#1> MD2
MD4O <F073#2> MD4
ZRNO <F073#4> ZRN
2 Jog feed axis select +J1O – +J4O +J1 – +J4

–J1O – –J4O –J1 – –J4
<F081>
Manual rapid tra- RTO <F077#6> RT

verse
3 Handle feed HS1AO <F077#0> HS1A

HS1BO <F077#1> HS1B
HS1CO <F077#2> HS1C
HS1DO <F077#3> HS1D
Handle feed magni- MP1O <F076#0> MP1

fication MP2O <F076#1> MP2
4 Jog feed rate over- *JV0O – *JV15O *JV0 – *JV15

ride <F079, F080>
Feedrate override *FV0O – *FV7O *FV0 – *FV7

<F078>
Rapid traverse ROV1O <F076#4> ROV1

override ROV2O <F076#5> ROV2
5 Optional block skip BDTO <F075#2> BDT
Single block SBKO <F075#3> SBK
Machine lock MLKO <F075#4> MLK
Dryrun DRNO <F075#5> DRN
6 Protect key KEYO <F075#6> KEY1 – KEY4
7 Feed hold SPO <F075#7> *SP
8 General purpose OUT0 – OUT7

(Switch from 1st line <F072>
to the 8th line)
636
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
F074
F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO
F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O
F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO
F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O
F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O
F081 –J4O +J4O –J3O +J3O –J2O +J2O –J1O +J1O
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1
[Data type] Bit

OP1 Mode selection on software operator’s panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse buttons on software
operator’s panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP3 Manual pulse generator’s axis select and manual pulse generator’s
magnification switches on software operator’s panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP4 JOG feedrate override and rapid traverse override switches on software
operator’s panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP5 Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, and dry run switches on
software operator’s panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP6 Protect key on software operator’s panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
637
OP7 Feed hold on software operator’s panel

0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
7210 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “↑”
7211 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “↓”
7212 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “→”
7213 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “←”
7214 Jog–movement axis and its direction on software operator’s panel “ ”
[Data type] Byte

On software operator’s panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow
key on the MDI panel when jog feed is performed.
Set value Feed axis and direction
Arrow keys on the MDI panel
0 Not moved
1 First axis, positive direction
2 First axis, negative direction 7 8 9
3 Second axis, positive direction
4 Second axis, negative direction

4 5 6
5 Third axis, positive direction
6 Third axis, negative direction
7 Fourth axis, positive direction 1 2 3
8 Fourth axis, negative direction
638
Example Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes
in the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given
below. [8°] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2±] to the negative
direction of the Z axis, [6³] to the positive direction of the X axis [4²]
to the negative direction of the X axis, [1¼] to the positive direction of
the Y axis, [9½] to the negative direction of the Y axis
Parameter No. 7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7216 = 0 (Not used)
Parameter No. 7217 = 0 (Not used)
7220 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator’s panel
7283 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator’s panel
[Data type] Byte
Example
OPERATOR’ S PANEL O1234 N5678
These parameters set

the names of the gen- SIGNAL 1 : OFF ON
eral–purpose switches SIGNAL 2 : OFF ON
(SIGNAL 1 through SIGNAL 3 : OFF ON
SIGNAL 8) on the SIGNAL 4 : OFF ON
software operator’s SIGNAL 5 : OFF ON
panel as described be- SIGNAL 6 : OFF ON
low. SIGNAL 7 : OFF ON
SIGNAL 8 : OFF ON
These names are set using character codes that are displayed in parameter
Nos. 7220 to 7283.
Parameter No. 7220:
Sets the character code (083) corresponding to S of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7221:
Sets the character code (073) corresponding to I of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7222:
Sets the character code (071) corresponding to G of SIGNAL 1.
639
Parameter No. 7223:

Sets the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7224:
Sets the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7225:
Sets the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7226:
Sets the character code (032) corresponding to (space) of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7227:
Sets the character code (049) corresponding to 1 of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter Nos. 7228 to 7235:
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 2 shown in the figure above.
The character codes are shown in character code list on the following
page.
640
Character to Code Correspondence Table
Char Com- Char Char Com- Char

Code Code Comment Code Code Comment
acter ment acter acter ment acter
A 065 6 054 177 209
B 066 7 055 178 210
C 067 8 056 179 211
D 068 9 057 180 212
E 069 032 Space 181 213
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark 182 214
G 071 ” 034 Quotation marks 183 215
H 072 # 035 Number 184 216
I 073 $ 036 Dollar mark 185 217
J 074 % 037 Percent 186 218
K 075 & 038 Ampersand 187 219
L 076 ’ 039 Apostrophe 188 220
M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis 189 166
N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis 190 221
O 079 * 042 Asterisk 191 167
P 080 + 043 Positive sign 192 168
Q 081 , 044 Comma 193 169
R 082 – 045 Negative sign 194 170
S 083 . 046 Period 195 171
T 084 / 047 Slash 196 172
U 085 : 058 Colon 197 173
V 086 ; 059 Semicolon 198 174
W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket 199 175
X 088 = 061 Equal sign 200 \\ 222 Dakuten
Y 089 > 062 Right angle 201 ° 223 Han dakuten

bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Question mark 202 ° 161 Full stop
0 048 @ 064 Commercial at 203  162 Left quotation
mark mark
1 049 [ 091 Left square 204  163 Right quotation
bracket mark
2 050 ¥ 092 Yen mark 205 , 164 Comma
3 051 ] 093 Right square 206 · 165 Centered dot
bracket
4 052 ^ 094 207 000 Space
5 053 _ 095 Underline 208
NOTE
The “dakuten” and “han dakuten” in Katakana also
correspond to one character.
641
Note
NOTE
1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft
switches. When the mode for DNC operation is to be
equipped, for example, all control switches for mode
selection should be on the machine operator’s panel or a
general–purpose soft switch should be used to select the
mode for DNC operation.
Soft switches available for mode selection
⋅ Manual data input
⋅ Automatic operation
⋅ Memory edit
⋅ Manual handle feed / incremental feed
⋅ Jog feed
⋅ Manual reference position return
2 Only one soft switch is available for protection key.
However, four input signals are available for protection key
(KEY1, KEY2, KEY3 and KEY4). Generally, four input
signals are simultaneously turned to “1” or “0” according to
the state of the soft switch for protection keys.
3 When the soft switch for feed hold is turned on, output signal
SPO is turned to “1”. At this time, the PMC turns feed hold
signal *SP to “0”.
In contrast to the above, when the soft switch for feed hold
is turned off, output signal SPO is turned ”0” and the PMC
turns signal *SP to “1”. For soft switches other than feed
hold and general soft switches, when an output signal
informing the state of a soft switch is turned to “1”, the
corresponding input signal is turned to “1”.
642
NOTE
4 The following table lists the override values which can be
selected by soft switches for jog feedrate.
*JV00 – *JV150 (*JV0 – *JV150)
15 12 8 4 0 Override
± ± ± ± ± values (%)
bit
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0.14
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0.2
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0.27
5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0.37
6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0.52
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0.72
8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1.0
9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1.4
10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 2.0
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 2.7
12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 3.7
13 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 5.2
14 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 7.2
15 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 10.0
16 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 14.0
17 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 20.0
18 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 27.0
19 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 37.0
20 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 52.0
21 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 72.0
22 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 100.0
23 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 140.0
24 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 200.0
643
NOTE
5 The following table lists the override values which can be
selected by soft switches for feedrate override.
*FV0O – *FV7O (*FV0 – *FV7)

Override
7 4 0 values (%)
± ± ±
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 10
2 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 20
3 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 30
4 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 40
5 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 50
6 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 60
7 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 70
8 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 80
9 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 90
10 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100
11 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 110
12 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 120
13 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 130
14 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 140
15 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 150
16 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 160
17 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 170
18 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 180
19 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 190
20 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 200
644
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Displaying and Setting the Software Opera-
Center) (B–63514EN) tor’s Panel
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Displaying and Setting the Software Opera-
(B–63504EN) tor’s Panel
645
12.1.15
Multi–language Display
General The LCD screens are displayed in a parameter–set language.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3102 SPN HNG ITA CHI FRN GRM JPN
NOTE
When this parameter is set, turn off the power once.
These bits select the language to be used for the display.

SPN HNG ITA CHI FRN GRM JPN language
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 English
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Japanese
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 German
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 French
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Chinese
(Taiwanese)
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Italian
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Korean
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Spanish
646
12.1.16
External Operator
Message Logging and
Display
General External operator messages can be logged in a history file.
These messages can be displayed on the external operator message history

screen.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OMH
[Data type] Bit

OMH The external operator message history screen is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 MHC
MHC External operator message history data:

0 : Cannot be cleared.
1 : Can be cleared.
(Such data can be cleared using the [CLEAR] soft key.)
MS0, MS1 A combination of the number of characters preserved as external operator
message history data and the number of history data items is set according
to the table below.
MS1 MS0 Number of history Number of history

data characters data items
0 0 255 8
0 1 200 10
1 0 100 18
1 1 50 32
CAUTION
When the values of MS0 and MS1 are changed, all
preserved external operator message history data is
cleared.
647
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining External operator message logging and dis-
Center) (B–63514EN) play
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) External operator message logging and dis-
(B–63504EN) play
648
12.1.17
Erase Screen
Display/Automatic
Erase Screen Display
General Displaying the same characters in the same positions on the screen causes
a CRT to degrade relatively quickly. To help prevent this, the screen can
be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also possible to specify the
automatic clearing of the screen if no keys are pressed during a period
specified with a parameter.
Erase screen display Holding down the CAN key and pressing an arbitrary function key clears
the screen.
Hold down the CAN key and press an arbitrary function key (such as POS
and PROG ).
Press an arbitrary function key, when the screen is displayed again.
Automatic erase screen The CNC screen is automatically cleared if no keys are pressed during the
display period (in minutes) specified with a parameter (No. 3123). The screen is
restored by pressing any key.
D Clearing the screen with The CNC screen is cleared once the period (minutes) specified with
automatic erase screen parameter No. 3123 has elapsed, provided the following conditions are
display satisfied:
Conditions for clearing the CNC screen

D Automatic erase screen display cacel signal *CRTOF is “0”.
D Parameter No. 3123 is set to other than 0.
D None of the following keys have been pressed:
MDI keys
Soft keys
External input keys
D No alarm has been issued.
D Restoring the screen The cleared CNC screen is restored once at least one of the following
with automatic erase conditions is satisfied:
screen display
Conditions for restoring the CNC screen
D Automatic erase screen display cancel signal *CRTOF is “1”.
D Any of the following keys has been pressed:
MDI keys
Soft keys
External input keys
D An alarm has been issued.
D Clearing the screen If parameter No. 3123 is set to 0, clearing of the screen using the CAN key
using CAN + function key and a function key is disabled.
649
WARNING
Pressing any key while the screen is being cleared restores
the screen. In such a case, however, the function assigned
to the pressed key is initiated. Do not press the DELETE , INSERT ,
or ALTER key to restore the screen, therefore.
Signal
Automatic erase screen

display cancel signal
*CRTOF <G062#1>

[Function] Enables or disables the automatic screen erase function. This signal is
used to switch the control mode.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 0, the control unit:
· Enables the automatic screen erase function.
When this signal is set to 1, the control unit:
· Disables the automatic screen erase function, displays the screen, and
initializes the timer.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G062 *CRTOF
Parameter
3123 Time until erase screen display is applied
[Data type] Bytes

[Unit of data] Minutes
This parameter specifies the period that must elapse before the erase
screen display is applied. If 0 is set, the screen is not cleared.
650
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Cleaning the screen
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Cleaning the screen

(B–63504EN)
651
12.2
EDIT
12.2.1
Part Program Storage
Length
General One of the following part program length can be selected.
T series 160 m 640 m (optional)
M series 160 m 640 m (optional)
Alarm and message

070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is insufficient.

MEMORY Delete any unnecessary programs,
then retry.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Displaying Memory Used and a List of Pro-
Center) (B–63514EN) grams
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Displaying Memory Used and a List of Pro-
(B–63504EN) grams
652
12.2.2
No. of Registered
Programs
General Up to 200 programs can be registered.
Alarm and message

072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored

exceeded 200.
Delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration again.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Displaying Memory Used and a List of Pro-
Center) (B–63514EN) grams
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Displaying Memory Used and a List of Pro-
(B–63504EN) grams
653
12.2.3
Memory Protection Key
General A key called the data protection key is used to prevent part programs,
offset values, parameters, and setting data from being registered,
modified, or deleted erroneously.
Signal
Memory protection
signal
KEY1 to KEY4
<G046#3 to #6>
[Function] Enables the changing of the memory contents from the MDI panel. Four
signals are provided. The operations that can be performed on the
contents of memory by each signal vary depending on the setting of bit
7 (KEY) of parameter No. 3290.
When KEY = 0
@ KEY1: Enables the input of tool compensation values and the
workpiece zero point offset values, and workpiece coordinate
systems shift amount.
@ KEY2: Enables the input of setting data and macro variables, and
tool life management data.
@ KEY3: Enables program loading and editing.
@ KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter data tables)
When KEY = 1
@ KEY1: Enables program loading and editing, as well as the input
of PMC parameters.
@ KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
[Operation] When a signal is set to 0, the associated operations are disabled.
When a signal is set to 1, the associated operations are enabled.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1
654
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 KEY
KEY For memory protection keys:

0 : The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used.
1 : Only the KEY1 signal is used.
NOTE
The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY = 0 or
KEY = 1.
Alarm and message

Warning message Contents
WRITE PROTECT Key input is invalid because of memory pro-

tect signal.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(B–63504EN)
655
12.2.4
Password Function
General The password function locks NE9 (bit 4 of parameter No. 3202), used to
protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999, by using the PASSWD (No. 3210)
and KEYWD (No. 3211) parameters. When NE9 is locked, NE9 cannot
be set to 0. Therefore, the protection for programs numbered 9000 to 9999
cannot be released unless the correct keyword is entered.
NE9 is locked when different values are set in the PASSWD and KEYWD
parameters. The values set in the two parameters are not displayed. NE9
is unlocked when the value preset in the PASSWD parameter is set in the
KEYWD parameter. When 0 is indicated for the PASSWD parameter, a
value has not yet been set for PASSWD.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9
[Data type] Bit

NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999
0 : Not inhibited
1 : Inhibited
The following edit operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing after registration
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs
656
3210 Password(PASSWD)

Set a secret number to this parameter. Its value is not displayed.
CAUTION
This parameter show 0, when no value is set to this
parameter. Once a key is lock, parameter NE9 cannot
become 0 and PASSWD cannot be changed unless you
perform an unlock operation or perform the memory all clear
operation. When an attempt is made to modify the
password by MDI input operation in this state, the warning
message “WRITE PROTECTED” is displayed to indicate
that the password cannot be modified. When an attempt is
made to modify the password with G10 (programmable
parameter input), P/S alarm No. 231 is issued.
3211 Keyword(KEYWD)

When the value set as the password (set in parameter No. 3210) is set to
this parameter, the locked state is released and the user can now modify
the password and the value set in bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202
becomes 0.
NOTE
The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the
power is turned off, this parameter is set to 0.
Alarm and message

231 FORMAT ERROR IN G10 Any of the following errors occurred in

L50 the specified format at the program-
mable–parameter input.
1) Address N or R was not entered.
2) A number not specified for a pa-
rameter was entered.
3) The axis number was too large.
4) An axis number was not specified
in the axis–type parameter.
5) An axis number was specified in
the parameter which is not an axis
type.
6) An attempt was made to reset bit 4
of parameter 3202 (NE9) or
change parameter 3210 (PSSWD)
when they are protected by a pass-
word. Correct the program.
657
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining PASSWORD FUNCTION
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) PASSWORD FUNCTION

(B–63504EN)
12.2.5
Background Editing
General Editing a program while executing another program is called background

editing. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing
(foreground editing).
A program edited in the background should be registered in foreground
program memory.
During background editing, all programs cannot be deleted at once.
Alarm and message

??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same number

as the P/S alarm that occurs in ordinary
program edit. (070, 071, 072, 073, 074
085,086,087 etc.)
140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in
the background a program being se-
lected in the foreground.
Use background editing correctly.
239 BP/S alarm Background editing was performed
while the external punch was being
executed in external I/O device control.
240 BP/S alarm Background editing was done while in
MDI operation.
NOTE
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line
of the background edit screen instead of the ordinary alarm
screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining BACKGROUND EDITING
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) BACKGROUND EDITING

(B–63504EN)
658
12.2.6
Playback
General When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN JOG mode
(TJOG) and TEACH IN HANDLE mode (THND) are added. In these
modes, a machine position along the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manual
operation is stored in memory as a program position to create a program.
The words other than X, Y, and Z, which include O, N, G, R, F, M, S, T,
P, Q, and EOB, can be stored in memory in the same way as in EDIT
mode.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 THD

THD Manual handle feed in TEACH IN JOG mode
0 : Valid
1 : Invalid
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining CREATING PROGRAMS IN TEACH IN
Center) (B–63514EN) MODE
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) CREATING PROGRAMS IN TEACH IN

(B–63504EN) MODE
CONNECTION MANUAL 2.6 MODE SELECTION

(This manual)
659
12.2.7
Conversational
Programming with
Graphic Function
General Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screen
while displaying the G code menu.
Blocks in a program can be modified, inserted, or deleted using the G code
menu and converstional screen.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8134 IAP
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

IAP Specifies whether to use conversational programming with graphic
function, as follows :
0 : Not to use.
1 : Use.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH
Center) (B–63514EN) GRAPHIC FUNCTION
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH

(B–63504EN) GRAPHIC FUNCTION
660
B–63503EN–1/01 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
661
13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63503EN–1/01
13.1
READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE
General The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher

interface.
1. Program
2. Offset data
3. Parameter
4. Pitch error compensation data
5. Custom macro common variables.
662
Parameter This CNC has two channels of input/output device interfaces. The
input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel
connected to that device in setting parameter I/O CHANNEL.
The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an
input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in
parameters for that channel in advance.
For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output
device data are provided.
The following shows the interrelation between the input/output device
interface parameters for the channels.
Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)
↓
0020 I/O CHANNEL 0101 Stop bit and other data

I/O CHANNEL=0 Number specified for the in-
Specify a channel for an 0102
(channel 1) put/output device
input/output device. 0103 Baud rate
I/ O CHANNEL
0111 Stop bit and other data
=0 : Channel1
=1 : Channel1 0112
=2 : Channel2
0113 Baud rate
0122
0123 Baud rate
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO TVC

[Data type] Bit
TVC TV check
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
ISO Code used for data output
0 : EIA code
1 : ISO code
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device

[Data type] Byte
0 : Select the device of channel 1 (I/O device connected to JD5A of
motherboard)
663
1 : Select the device of channel 1 (I/O device connected to JD5A of

motherboard)
2 : Select the device of channel 2 (I/O device connected to JD5B of
motherboard)
This CNC has two channels for interfacing I/O devices. Set the channels
for interfacing I/O devices. Set the channel to which an I/O device to be
used is connected.
NOTE
1 The input/output device used can be selected also on the
setting screen. Using the setting screen is a more common
method for selecting the device.
2 The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of
stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific
channel must be set in parameters for that channel in
advance.
I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer to
channel 1. For each, parameters to set the baud rate, the
number of stop bits, and other data are provided separately.
3 JD5A and JD5B are the connectors on the I/O card.
This CNC
I/O control
Channel 1 Channel 2
JD5A JD5B
RS–232–C RS–232–C
ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂ
Reader/puncher Reader/puncher
I/ O CHANNEL=0 I/ O CHANNEL=2
or
I/ O CHANNEL=1
664
(1) Parameters common to all channels

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 ENS NCR CTV

CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code
0 : LF, CR, CR are output.
1 : Only LF is output.
ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code
0 : An alarm is generated.
1: The NULL code is ignored.
(2) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2

SB2 The number of stop bits
0 : 1 bit
1 : 2 bits
ASI Code used at data input
0 : EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished)
1 : ASCII code
NFD Feed before and after the data at data output
0 : Output
1 : Not output
NOTE
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are
used, set NFD to 1.
0102 Number specified for the input/output device

(when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Data type] Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table 13.1 (a).
665
Table 13.1 (a)
Set value Input/output device
0 RS–232–C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/ B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor

FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 RS–232–C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
0103 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Data type] Byte

Set baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL
is set to 0, with a set value in Table 13.1 (b).
Table 13.1 (b)
Set value Baud rate (bps) Set value Baud rate (bps)
1 50 7 600
2 100 8 1200
3 110 9 2400
4 150 10 4800
5 200 11 9600
6 300 12 19200

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0111 NFD ASI SB2
[Data type] Bit

These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meanings
of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
[Data type] Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table 13.1 (a).
666
0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 1)
[Data type] Byte

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL
is set to 1, with a value in Table 13.1 (b).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0121 NFD ASI SB2
[Data type] Bit

These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2. The meanings
of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0122 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Data type] Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 13.1 (a).
0123 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Data type] Byte

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL
is set to 2, with a value in Table 13.1 (b).
667
Alarm and message

001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect

parity was input).
Correct the tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters
in a block is odd). This alarm will be
generated only when the TV check is
effective.
085 COMMUNICATION ER- When entering data in the memory by
ROR using Reader / Puncher interface, an
overrun, parity or framing error was
generated. The number of bits of input
data or setting of baud rate or specifi-
cation No. of I/O unit is incorrect.
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by
was turned off.
tive.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory by
using Reader / Puncher interface,
though the read terminate command
is specified, input is not interrupted
after 10 characters read. I/O unit or
P.C.B. is defective.
233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a
unit such as that connected via the
RS–232–C interface, other users
were using it.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

(B–63504EN)
668
13.2
EXTERNAL I/O
DEVICE CONTROL
General It is possible to request from the outside that a program be registered,

collated, or output.
D Registeration/Collation
As triggered by the external read start signal EXRD, the background
edit function saves programs from an external input unit onto tape and
verifies them.
D Output
As triggered by the external punch start signal EXWT, the background
edit function outputs all programs stored in the part program memory
to an external output device.
Signal
External Read Start

Signal EXRD <G058#1>
[Function] Programs are registered through the reader/puncher interface. Or the read
programs are collated with programs already stored in the part program
memory.
[Operation] When this signal becomes logical 1, the CNC operates as follows:
D In all modes other than the MDI mode, the background edit function
reads programs from an external input device, and register them on the
part program memory or collates them with programs already
registered in the part program memory.
(The memory protection key KEY3 <G046#5> determines whether to
register or collate.)
D Bit 1 (RAL) of parameter No. 3201 selects whether to register all
programs in a file or one program at a time. Bit 0 (RDL) of parameter
No. 3201 can be used to delete all programs previously stored in the
part program memory. However, it is impossible to delete programs
protected by bits 0 (NE8) and 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202.
D When programs are being registed or collated, the read/punch busy
signal (RPBSY) is kept to be logical 1.
D When the background processing–activated signal BGEACT is
logical 1 (for example, during background editing or MDI mode), the
external read start signal EXRD is ignored.
D When programs are being registered or collated, if the system is reset
or the external read/punch stop signal EXSTP becomes logical 1, the
registeration or collation is discontinued.
D If the foreground processing is already using the reader/puncher
interface (for example, during DNC operation or program reading in
the edit mode), the external read start signal EXRD is ignored.
669
D There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can

be registered or collated. For example, a program cannot be registered
or collated, if a program with the same program number is being
executed in the foreground processing.
External Punch Start

Signal EXWT <G058#3>
[Function] Programs stored in the part program memory are output to an external unit
via the reader/puncher interface.
D In all modes other than the MDI mode, the background edit function
outputs all programs stored in the part program memory to an external
output device.
D When programs are being output, the read/punch busy signal RPBSY
becomes logical 1.
D When the background processing–activated signal BGEACT is
logical 1 (for example, during background editing or MDI mode), the
external punch start signal EXWT is ignored.
D When programs are being output, if the system is reset or the external
read/punch stop signal EXSTP becomes logical 1, the output is
discontinued.
D If the foreground processing is already using the reader/puncher
interface (for example, during DNC operation or program reading in
the edit mode), the external punch start signal EXWT is ignored.
D There are some other conditions to determine whether all programs
can be output. For example, a program cannot be output, if it is
running or protected by bits 0 (NE8) and 4 (NE9) of parameter No.
3202.
External Read/Punch
Stop Signal
EXSTP <G058#2>
[Function] When the external read/punch stop signal becomes logical 1, it stops
program registeration, collation, or output via the reader/puncher
interface.
D The program registeration, collation or output triggered by the
external read or punch start signal is stopped immediately.
670
Background editing
signal
BGEACT <F053#4>

[Function] This signal indicates that the background edit function is operating.
[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1 when:
D The [BG EDIT] soft key is pressed to put the CNC in the background
edit mode.
D The MDI mode is selected.
D The external read or punch start signal starts program registeration,
collation, or output.
D When the uploading or downloading of a program is started on a
personal computer connected to the HSSB:
This signal becomes logical 0 when:
D The [BG END] soft key is pressed to terminate the background edit
mode.
D The CNC shifts from the MDI mode to another mode.
D Program registeration or output triggered by the external read or punch
start signal ends either normally or abnormally (reset or requested by
the EXSTP signal).
D When the uploading or downloading of a program is started on a
personal computer connected to the HSSB:
Read/punch busy signal

RPBSY <F053#2>
[Function] This signal indicates that program registeration, collation, or output
triggered by the external read or punch start signal is under way.
[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1, when:
D The external read or punch start signal triggers program registeration,
collation, or output.
This signal becomes logical 0, when:
D Program registeration collation or output triggered by the external read
or punch start signal ends either normally or abnormally (reset or
requested by the EXSTP signal).
671
Read/punch alarm signal

RPALM <F053#3>

[Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program
registeration, collation, or output triggered by the external read or punch
start signal.
[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1, when:
D An alarm condition occurs during program registeration, collation, or
output triggered by the external read or punch start signal.
This signal becomes logical 0, when:
D The system is reset, or the external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is
input.
Signal Address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY
672
Parameter
Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)
↓
0020 I/O CHANNEL 0101 Stop bit and other data

Specify a channel for an 0102
input/output device. 0103 Baud rate
I/ O CHANNEL
=0 : Channel1
=1 : Channel1 0112
=2 : Channel2
0113 Baud rate
0122
0123 Baud rate
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE N99 REP RAL RDL
[Data type] Bit

RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control
0 : The new program is registered following the programs already
registered.
1 : All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is
registered.
Note that programs which are protected from being edited are not
deleted.
RAL When programs are registered through the reader/puncher interface
0 : All programs are registered.
1 : Only one program is registered.
REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number is
the same as that of an existing program
0 : An alarm is generated.
1 : The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered.
Note that if the existing program is protected from being edited, it is
not deleted, and an alarm is generated.
N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, program
registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
673
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8

0 : Not inhibited
1 : Inhibited
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
(4) Registered program editing
0 : Not inhibited
1 : Inhibited
(2) Program punching (Even when punching of all programs is
specified, programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not
punched.)
(4) Registered program editing
674
Alarm and message

079 BP/S ALARM In memory or program collation,a pro-

gram in memory does not agree with
that read from an external I/O device.
Check both the programs in memory
and those from the external device.
085 BP/S ALARM When entering data in the memory by
using Reader / Puncher interface, an
overrun, parity or framing error was
generated. The number of bits of input
data or setting of baud rate or specifica-
tion No. of I/O unit is incorrect.
was turned off.
tive.
using reader /puncher interface,
though the read terminate command is
specified, input does not stop after 10
characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B. is de-
fective.
233 BP/S ALARM When an attempt was made to use a
unit such as that connected via the
RS–232–C interface, other users were
using it.
239 BP/S ALARM While punching was being performed
with the function for controlling external
I/O units ,background editing was per-
formed.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT

(B–63504EN)
675
13.3
EXTERNAL
PROGRAM INPUT
General By using the external program input start signal, a program can be loaded
from an input unit into CNC memory.
When an input unit such as the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy
Cassette is being used, a file can be searched for using the workpiece
number search signals, after which the program can be loaded into CNC
memory.
To use external program input start signal MINP <G058#0> to start data
input, the following conditions must be satisfied:
D Bit 7 (MIP) of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1.
D Programs are not protected using the memory protection signal.
D Automatic operation mode is set.
D The current state is other than the start of automatic operation, that is,
cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0. (Automatic operation signal
OP may be set to 1.)
Signal
External program input

start signal
MINP <G058#0>
[Function] This signal starts loading of a program from an input unit into CNC
memory.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
D When memory operation mode is set, but no automatic operation is
being performed and program loading is not inhibited by the setting
of the memory protection key, the CNC deletes all currently loaded
programs, then loads a program from the external input unit into CNC
memory.
D When the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy Cassette is being
used as the input unit, a desired file can be searched for using the
workpiece number search signals (PN1 to PN16), after which the
program can be loaded into CNC memory.
File numbers are indicated using the workpiece number search signals,
as follows:
Workpiece no. search signal
File no.
PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
0 0 0 0 0 00
0 0 0 0 1 01
0 0 0 1 0 02
676
Workpiece no. search signal

File no.
PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
0 0 0 1 1 03
0 0 1 0 0 04
0 0 1 0 1 05
0 0 1 1 0 06
0 0 1 1 1 07
0 1 0 0 0 08
0 1 0 0 1 09
0 1 0 1 0 10
0 1 0 1 1 11
0 1 1 0 0 12
0 1 1 0 1 13
0 1 1 1 0 14
0 1 1 1 1 15
1 0 0 0 0 16
1 0 0 0 1 17
1 0 0 1 0 18
1 0 0 1 1 19
1 0 1 0 0 20
1 0 1 0 1 21
1 0 1 1 0 22
1 0 1 1 1 23
1 1 0 0 0 24
1 1 0 0 1 25
1 1 0 1 0 26
1 1 0 1 1 27
1 1 1 0 0 28
1 1 1 0 1 29
1 1 1 1 0 30
1 1 1 1 1 31
File No. 00 is used for special specification; specifying file No. 00 means
that no search operation is to be performed. Therefore, numbers 01 to 31
can be assigned to files.
[Application] This function is applicable to the following case:

When a program to be used for machining is too large to be loaded into
CNC memory, the program is divided into several segments. These
segments are loaded into memory and executed, one by one.
677
In this case, the general operation flow is as shown below.
Press the cycle start button.
Issuing the external program input start

signal (MINP) starts program input.
The automatic operation mode signal (STL)

is set to 1, then program input starts.
When input terminates, the STL

signal is set to 0.
A change to 0 in the STL signal is

detected, then CNC operation starts.
Machining by the CNC
Yes
End of machining?
Operation terminates.
No
A miscellaneous function, previously added to the

end of the program, is executed. An appropriate
code is defined for this miscellaneous function in the
machine to input the next program.
This miscellaneous function is detected, then

operation is interrupted by a single block
signal or automatic operation stop signal.
The STL signal is set to 0. Then, input of

the next program is started according to the
MINP signal.
The timing chart for data reading is shown below.
678
Execution of a machining program
M code command for the Mxxx

next program input
Code signal M00~M31
Strobe signal MF
Single–block signal SBK
Completion signal FIN
Cycle start lamp signal STL
External program input MINP

start signal
Program input
Automatic operation ST
start signal
CAUTION
The M code used for input of the next program must not be
buffered.
NOTE
While a program is being input, the automatic operation
mode signal STL is set to 1. Upon termination of program
input, STL is set to 0.
Signal Address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G058 MINP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 MIP

MIP Specifies whether to load a program into memory according to the
external program input start signal (MINP).
0 : Does not load a program into memory.
1 : Loads a program into memory.
679
Note
NOTE
1 A program can be input according to the external program
input start signal only when the program has only one
program number.
To read programs having multiple program numbers, reset
the CNC each time the CNC reads one program. After
reset, search for a desired program by using the workpiece
number search signals, then input the program according to
the external program input start signal.
2 When program input is activated by the external program
input activation signal, all programs are deleted from the
CNC, at the beginning.
3 In background editing, the external program input activation
signal is ineffective.
680
B–63503EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT
14 MEASUREMENT
681
14. MEASUREMENT B–63503EN–1/01
14.1
TOOL LENGTH
MEASUREMENT
(M SERIES)
General
The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory
as an offset value by a soft key.
Call offset value display screen on the CRT. Relative positions are also
displayed on this screen. Then select the reference tool and set it at the
fixed point on the machine by manual operation. Reset the displayed
relative position to zero. Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed
point on the machine by manual operation. The relative position display
at this point shows difference between the reference tool and the tool
measured and the relative position display value is then set as offset
amounts.
ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ ÄÄ
Reference tool
ÄÄ
ÄÄ This difference
is set as offset
amount
Fixed point
Reference Item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Tool Length Measurement
(B–63514EN)
682
14.2
AUTOMATIC TOOL
LENGTH
MEASUREMENT
(M SERIES)/
AUTOMATIC TOOL
OFFSET (T SERIES)
General When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a

command given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures the
difference between the current coordinate value and the coordinate value
of the command measurement position and uses it as the offset value for
the tool. When the tool has been already offset, it is moved to the
measurement position with that offset value. If the CNC judges that
further offset is needed after calculating the difference between the
coordinate values of the measurement position and the commanded
coordinate values, the current offset value is further offset.
Signal
Measuring position
reached signals
XAE<X1004#0>,
YAE<X1004#1>,
ZAE<X1004#2>(M series)
XAE<X1004#0>,
ZAE<X1004#1>(T series)

[Function] If the measuring position specified by a program command differs from
the measuring position which a tool has reached in practice, that is, the
position at the moment the measuring position reached signal has just
been turned “1”, the difference in the coordinate value is added to the
current tool compensation value to update the compensation value. The
tool is first fed to the specified measuring position by rapid traverse in a
block where one of the following commands has been specified:
G37 (M series)
G36, G37 (T series)
683
The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance γ before the
measuring position.
The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a
parameter No. 6241. If the measuring position reached signal
corresponding to the G code is turned “1” after the tool has approached
within distance ε of the measuring position and before the tool overshoots
the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit updates the
compensation value and terminates the move command for the block. If
the measuring position reached signal is not turned “1” even after the tool
has overshot the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit enters
an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block without
updating the compensation value.
Presumed
Feedrate measuring position
Rapid traverse rate
Rapid traverse
Measuring speed
Start point e e
Measuring position reached signal
[Operation] When the signal is turned “1”, the control unit works as follows:
D Reads the position of the tool along the axis currently specified and
updates the current compensation value based on the difference
between the specified measuring position and the read measuring
position in the following case: When the measuring position reached
signal corresponding to the G code is turned on in a block where G36
(T series) or G37 is specified after the tool is within distance ε of the
measuring position specified by a program and before the tool
overshoots the measuring position by distance ε. The control unit then
stops the tool, and terminates the move command for the block.
D Enters an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block
without updating the compensation value in the following case: When
the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the command
is turned “1” in a block where G36 (T series), G37 is specified after
the tool is within distance γ of the measuring position but before the
tool is within distance ε of the measuring position.
D The control unit does not monitor the measuring position reached
signal for its rising edge but monitors the state of the signal. If the
signal remains “1” when the next corresponding automatic tool length
measurement (automatic tool offset) is specified, the control unit
enters an alarm state when the tool is within distance γ of the
measuring position.
684
NOTE
1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10
msec.
2 The CNC directly inputs the measuring position reached
signals from the machine tool; the PMC does not process
them.
3 If automatic tool offset nor automatic tool length
measurement is not used, the PMC can use the signal
terminals corresponding to the measuring position reached
signal as the general-purpose input signals.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1004 ZAE XAE
ZAE YAE XAE
Parameter
6241 Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool offset
Feedrate during measurement of tool length automatic measurement

Metric input 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch input 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
This parameter sets the feedrate during measurement of automatic tool

offset (T series) and tool length automatic compensation (M series).
6251 g value on X axis during automatic tool offset

g value during tool length automatic measurement
6252 g value on Z axis during automatic tool offset
[Data type] Two–word type


These parameters set the g value during automatic tool offset (T series)
or tool length automatic measurement (M series).
685
CAUTION
Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter
programming or the radius programming is specified.
6254 e value on X axis during automatic tool offset

e value during tool length automatic measurement
6255 e value on Z axis during tool automatic offset


These parameters set the e value during automatic tool offset (T series)
or tool length automatic measurement (M series).
CAUTION
Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter
programming or the radius programming is specified.
686
Alarm and message

080 G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL In the automatic tool length measure-

NOT ASSERTED ment function (G37), the measurement
position reached signal (XAE, YAE, or
ZAE) is not turned on within an area
specified in parameter 6254 (value ε).
(M series) This is due to a setting or operator error.
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL In the automatic tool offset function
NOT ASSERTED (G36, G37), the measurement position
reached signal (XAE or ZAE) is not
turned on within an area specified in pa-
rameter 6254, and 6255 (value ε).
(T series) This is due to a setting or operator error.
081 OFFSET NUMBER NOT Tool length automatic measurement
FOUND IN G37 (G37) was specified without a H code.
(Automatic tool length measurement
(M series) function) Modify the program.
OFFSET NUMBER NOT Automatic tool offset (G36, G37) was
FOUND IN G37 specified without a T code. (Automatic
tool compensation function) Modify the
(T series) program.
082 H–CODE NOT ALLOWED H code and automatic tool measure-
IN G37 ment (G37) were specified in the same
block. (Automatic tool length measure-
(M series) ment function) Modify the program.
T–CODE NOT ALLOWED T code and automatic tool offset (G36,
IN G37 G37) were specified in the same block.
(T series) (Automatic tool compensation function)
Modify the program.
083 ILLEGAL AXIS In automatic tool length measurement,
COMMAND IN G37 an invalid axis was specified or the
(M series) command is incremental. Modify the
program.
ILLEGAL AXIS In automatic tool offset (G36, G37), an
COMMAND IN G37 invalid axis was specified or the com-
(T series) mand is incremental. Modify the pro-
gram.
687
Note
NOTE
1 Measurement speed, γ, and ε are set as parameters.ε must
be positive numbers and keep condition of γ>ε.
2 The compensation value is updated by the following
formula:
New compensation value =(Current compensation
value)+[(Current position of the
tool along the specified axis
when the measuring position
reached signal is “1”) –
(specified measuring position)]
The following compensation values are updated:
(1)In a M series, the compensation value corresponding to
the tool compensation number selected by an H code.
Tool wear compensation value for the H code is changed.
(2)In a T series, the compensation value corresponding to
the tool compensation number selected by a T code and
to the specified axis (X, Z) in G36, G37.
3 The maximum measuring error is calculated as shown
below.
ERRmax = Fm × 1 × 4
60 1000
ERRmax: Maximum measuring error (mm)
Fm : Measuring feedrate (mm/min)
If Fm = 100 mm/min, for example, ERRmax = 0.007 mm
4 After the measuring position reached signal has been
detected, the tool moves for a maximum of 20 msec, then
stops. Values for calculating the compensation amount,
that is the coordinate of the tool where the tool reached the
measuring position are not those obtained after stop, but
those obtained at the position where the measuring position
reached signal was detected.
The overtravel amount for 20 msec is calculated as follows.
Qmax = Fm × 1 × 1
(20 + Ts)
60 1000
Qmax: Maximum overtravel amount (mm)

Fm : Measuring feedrate (mm/min)
Ts : Servo time constant [msec] (1/loop gain)
688
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (G37)
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (G36, G37)

689
14.3
SKIP FUNCTION
14.3.1
Skip Function
General Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move

following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input
during the execution of this command, execution of the command is
interrupted and the next block is executed.
The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed
but specified with a signal from the machine, for example, in grinding. It
is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece.
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a
custom macro because they are stored in the custom macro system
variable #5061 to #5064, as follows:
#5061 Fisrt axis coordinate value
#5062 Second axis coordinate value
#5063 3rd axis coordinate value
#5064 4th axis coordinate value
Signal
Skip Signal
SKIP<X1004#7>
SKIPP<G006#6>
(T series) [Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal terminates skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip
signal turns to “1” in a block containing G31 is stored in a custom macro
variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at the same
time.
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to “1”, the control unit works as described below.
· When a block contains a skip cutting command G31, the control unit
reads and stores the current position of the specified axis at that time.
The control unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that
the block was supposed to be moved.
· The skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge, but for its state. So,
if a skip signal continues to be “1”, a skip condition is assumed to be
satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting is specified.
690
NOTE
1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec.
2 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP<X004#7> from
the machine tool; the PMC no longer requires to process the
signal.
3 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the
signal terminal SKIP<X004#7> corresponding to the skip
signal as a general purpose input signal.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1004 SKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G006 SKIPP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF SK0 GSK
SKF SK0

GSK In skip cutting (G31), the signal SKIPP (bit 6 of G006) is:
0 : Not used as a skip signal.
1 : Used as a skip signal.
SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the
state of the skip signal SKIP (bit 7 of X1004).
0 : When these signals are 1, they are assumed to be input (skip).
1 : When these signals are 0, they are assumed to be input (skip).
SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip
command
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Alarm and message

035 CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool
G31 nose radius compensation mode.
(T series) Modify the program.
036 CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cut-
G31 ter compensation mode.
(M series) Modify the program.
691
Warning
WARNING
Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic
acceleration/deceleration (enabled with parameter No.
6200#7 SKF=1) when the feedrate per minute is specified,
allowing for reducing an error in the position of the tool when
a skip signal is input. These functions are enabled when the
feedrate per rotation is specified.
Note
NOTE
1 The G31 block is always set to G01 mode. The feedrate is
specified by an F code.
2 When the measuring motion is made by utilizing the skip
signal, program a constant feedrate; otherwise, if the
feedrate changes, the measuring error will be noticeable.
With a constant feedrate, the maximum measuring error can
be calculated as follows:
ERRmax = Fm × 1 × 4
60 1000
ERRmax : Maximum measuring error (mm or inch)
Fm : Measuring feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
3 Overtravel amount Qmax after skip signal has been turned
to “1” is calculated by the following:
Qmax = Fm × 1 × 1
(20#1 + Tc + Ts)
60 1000
Qmax : Overtravel amount (mm or inch)
Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
Tc : Cutting time constant (ms)
Ts : Servo time constant (ms) (1 loop gain)
#1 : The value becomes 28 when the skip signal SKIPP
<G006#6> is used. (Also it changes according to
the processing time of ladder program).
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL SKIP FUNCTION(G31)
(B–63514EN)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL SKIP FUNCTION(G31)

692
14.3.2
High–speed Skip
Signal
General The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HDI0 :
connected directly to the CNC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary
skip signal (X1004#7). In this case, one signal can be input.
Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 ~ 2 msec at the CNC side (not
considering those at the PMC side).
This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.004 msec
or less, thus allowing high precision measurement.
Acceleration / The skip function causes the NC to memorize the “current position” of
Deceleration and Servo the tool when a skip signal is input. However, the “current position”
Delay Compensation includes a delay in the servo system. In other words, the “current
(Type A/B) position” deviates by the distance corresponding to the servo delay from
the position where the tool actually was when the skip signal was input.
This deviation can be calculated from the positional error in the servo
system and the number of remaining pulses due to feedrate acceleration/
deceleration in the NC. Taking this deviation into account eliminates the
necessity to include the servo delay in a measurement error.
The deviation of the “current position” can be compensated for by either

of the following two types, using parameter SEA (bit 0 of parameter No.
6201) or parameter SEB (bit 1 of parameter No. 6201).
(1) Type A: The deviation is calculated from the cutting time constant
and the servo time constant (loop gain).
(2) Type B: The deviation is assumed to be a sum of the number of
remaining pulses due to acceleration/deceleration caused
when the skip signal is turned on, and the positional error.
Direction in which the tool

moves
High–speed
skip signal
Pnc
Q P
Position where Position of the tool when

the tool actually the skip signal was input
stopped Origin of the coordinate
system
693
Pnc : Position where the tool actually stopped after the skip signal was
input [mm/inch]
P : Distance to be measured [mm/inch]
Q : Servo delay [mm/inch]
Under the conditions shown above, the NC calculates the following
equation using parameter SEA (bit 0 of parameter No. 6201) or SEB (bit
1 of parameter No. 6201):
P = Pnc – Q
For type A (SEA bit 0 of parameter No. 6201 is “1”), the deviation is
calculated by:
Q = Fm 1/60 (a Tc/1000 + Ts/1000)
where
Fm : Feedrate [mm/min or inch/min]
Tc : Cutting time constant [msec]
Parameter No. 1622: Exponential acceleration/deceleration
Parameter No. 1628: Linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation
If parameter SKF (bit 7 of parameter No. 6200) = 0, Tc = 0.
Ts : Servo time constant [msec]
Assuming that the loop gain (parameter No. 1825) is G (unit: 1/s):
Ts = 1000/G
α : = 1 Exponential acceleration/deceleration
= 1/2 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
NOTE
For type A (parameter SEA (No. 6201 #0)=1), the skip signal
must be turned on when the tool moves at constant
feedrate.
Signal
High Speed Skip Staus

Signal
HDO0<F122#0>

[Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip
signal. The signal-to-bit correspondence is as follows:
High-speed skip signal Bit name

HDI0 HDO0
694
[Output condition] Each bit is set to 1 when:

D The high-speed skip signal is logical 1.
Each bit is set to 0 when:
D The high-speed skip signal is logical 0.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F122 HDO0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SRE HSS

HSS 0 : The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals.
1 : The skip function uses high-speed skip signals.
SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used:
0 : The signal is considered to be input at the rising edge (0→1).
1 : The signal is considered to be input at the falling edge (1→0).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 IGX SEB SEA

SEA When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used,
acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are:
0 : Ignored.
1 : Considered and compensated (type A).
SEB When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used,
acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are:
0 : Ignored.
1 : Considered and compensated (type B).
IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP (bit 7 of X1004) and
SKIPP (bit 6 of G006) are:
0 : Enabled as skip signals.
1 : Disabled as skip signals.
NOTE
SKIPP (bit 6 of G006) is enabled only when bit 0 (GSK) of
parameter No. 6200 is set to 1. Note also that these signals
are enabled only for the T series.
695
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S1
1S1
Specify high-speed skip signal is enabled when the G31 skip command is
issued. signals:
0 : The skip signal is disabled.
1 : The skip signal is enabled.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware) HIGH SPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE
(B–63503EN)
696
14.3.3
Torque Limit Skip
General Specifying a move command after G31 P99 (or G31 P98) with a motor
torque limit set (for example, specifying a torque limit on the PMC
window) allows the same cutting feed as that specified with G01 to be
performed.
While the tool is moved with a motor torque limit set during cutting feed,
skip is performed when a signal indicating that the motor torque limit has
been reached is input as a result of an operation such as pushing something
against the motor.
D Basic operations When the motor torque limit is reached or the SKIP signal <X1004#7>
is input during the execution of G31 P99, the execution of the next block
starts without executing the remaining portion of the move command.
When the motor torque limit is reached during the execution of G31 P98,
the execution of the next block starts without executing the remaining
portion of the move command. (The SKIP signal does not affect the
execution of G31 P98.)
When no torque limit is specified before executing G31 P99 or P98, the
move command is executed without performing the skip operation.
For G31 P99 and P98, the coordinate, indicating the position to which the
tool is to be positioned after skip, is stored in the system variable of the
custom macro.
Alarm No. 244 occurs if errors have accumulated to an amount (32767)

that cannot be corrected in one distribution before the
torque–limit–reached signal is input during the execution of G31 P99 or
P98.
Signal
Torque limit reached

signals
TRQL1 to TRQL4 <F114>
[Function] Indicates that the torque limit has been reached.
[Output condition] Set to “1” when:
· The torque limit has been reached for the corresponding axis.
Set to “0” when:
· The torque limit has not been reached for the corresponding axis
Numbers 1 to 4 indicate the corresponding axis numbers.
697
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F114 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 TSA TSE

TSE When a skip operation is performed by the G31 P99 or P98 command used
to specify torque limit skip:
0 : Corrects servo errors. (1)
1 : Does not correct servo errors. (2)
TSA Selects the axes to be monitored for whether the torque limit has been
reached during the execution of the G31 P99 or 98 command used to
specify torque limit skip:
0 : Monitors all axes.
1 : Monitors the axes specified by G31 P99 or P98.
200
Position stored
Position stored in the system
in the system variable when
variable when TSE = 1
TSE = 0
100
(1) Error amount (2)
Feed stops Torque limit Specified value
100 200 300 400 500
698
Alarm and message

015 TOO MANY AXES COM- In the block including the command for
MANDED the skip function (G31 P99/P98), to be
executed under the control of the
torque limit reach signal, no axis move
command is specified, or two or more
axes are specified.
In a single block, specify one axis only.
244 P/S ALARM When the skip function to be executed
under the control of the torque limit
reach signal is enabled, an error value
(32767) that exceeds the maximum re-
turn value that can be handled with a
single distribution is detected before in-
put of the torque limit reach signal.
Retry the processing after changing the
axis feedrate, torque limit, or other
conditions.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Specify a torque limit before G31 P99/P98. If G31 P99/P98
is executed with no torque limit specified, the move
command is executed without a skip operation.
2 When G31 P99 is specified, the SKIP signal causes a skip
operation. However, avoid using the high–speed skip
operation.
3 Before specifying G31 P99/P98, cancel tool–tip radius
compensation with G40.
4 Set the SKF bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 6200) to 0 to disable
the dry run, override, and automatic
acceleration/deceleration functions for the G31 skip
command.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL TORQUE LIMIT SKIP
699
14.4
ENTERING
COMPENSATION
VALUES
14.4.1
Input of Offset Value
Measured A (T series)
General This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece

diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard.
First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or in the cross direction
manually. When the position record signal is turned “1” (prepare a button
on the machine operator’s panel) on completion of the cutting, the work-
piece coordinate value of X axis and Z axis at that time is recorded in the
CNC. Then, withdraw the tool, stop the spindle, and measure the diame-
ter if the cutting was on the longitudinal direction or measure the distance
from the standard face if the cutting was on the facing. (The reference face
is made as Z = 0.) When the measured value is entered on the offset value
display screen, NC inputs the difference between the input measured
value and the coordinate value recorded in NC, as the offset value of the
offset number.
If you release the tool without moving the tool in the axis along which an
offset value is entered but moves the tool along the other axis, an offset
value can be set without using the position record signal.
The workpiece coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of
directly inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is used
when the coordinate system planned in the program does not match with
the coordinate system actually set.
The procedures are the same as those for direct input for offset, except a
difference of using the standard tool on the work shift screen.
Signal
Position record signal (PRC)

<G040#6>
[Function] This signal is prepared for the function of input of offset value measured
A. It is used to store in the control unit the data on the positions of the
tool for tentative cutting. After measuring a dimension of the workpiece,
input the measured value by the specified manual operation. The
difference is then stored as the specified tool compensation value.
[Operation] The control unit stores the current position along X and Z axes when the
signal turns to “1”.
700
NOTE
To use this signal, set parameter PRC (No.5005#2) to 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G040 PRC
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5005 PRC

PRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift
value
0 : Not use a PRC signal
1 : Uses a PRC signal
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Direct Input of Tool Offset Measured
701
14.4.2
Input of Tool Offset
Value Measured B
(T series)
General
When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value is automatically
settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool to make contact
with the touch sensor during manual operation. The workpiece
coordinate system shift amount is also automatically settable.
D Touch sensor This touch sensor makes contact in two directions in each axis, and
outputs four signals when it detects a tool contact. The contact faces are
selected according to the tool nose figures to be measured.
a) +MIT1 (+MITX) : Contact to X-axis (+) contact face (Contact
in X + direction)
b) –MIT1 (–MITX) : Contact to X-axis (–) contact face (Contact
in X – direction)
c) +MIT2 (+MITZ) : Contact to Z-axis (+) contact face (Contact
in Z + direction)
d) –MIT2 (–MITZ) : Contact to Z-axis (–) contact face (Contact
in Z – direction)
X axis (–) contact face

(–MIT1)
Z axis (+) con- Z axis (–) contact

tact face face
(+MIT2) (–MIT2)
+X
X axis (+) contact face
(+MIT1)
+Z
Touch sensor
D Setting tool offset value Determine a specific point on the machine tool as the measuring reference
position. In advance, set the distance from this point to the measuring
position (contact face of the touch sensor) as a reference value, using
parameter No. 5015 to 5018. Select the tool whose offset value is to be
measured, and bring it to touch the sensor, receiving a contact detection
signal (tool compensation value write signal). The mechanical coordinate
value is the distance from the tool nose position of the measuring tool at
the mechanical reference (home) position to the measuring position; set
the difference between this value and the reference value (parameter
setting) into the tool offset value memory as the tool geometry offset
value. The corresponding tool wear offset value becomes 0.
702
(Tool offset value to be set)

= (Mechanical coordinate value when tool compensation value write
signal has become “1”) – (Reference value (parameter value)
corresponding to the tool compensation value write signal)
The tool offset value to be set differs according to the method of
determining the measuring reference position.
Example 1 The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and the
measuring tool nose tip position is settable as the tool offset value. Define
the reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position
(machine zero position) as the measuring reference position, then set the
distances Xp, Zp, Xm, Zm, from the measuring reference position to the
contact faces of the sensor as parameters.
(0,0) Measuring reference

OFSX position (reference tool
Xm nose position at the me-
chanical reference posi-
X axis (–) contact face (0,0) tion)
Xt
Measuring tool nose
Xp position at the me-
chanical reference
position
Z axis (–) contact face
OFSZ
Zt
+X
Zm
+Z Zp
XP : Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (+) contact face (parameter
no. 5015)
Xm : Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (–) contact face (parameter
no. 5016)
Zp : Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (+) contact face (parameter
no. 5017)
Zm : Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (–) contact face (parameter
no. 5018)
Xt : X-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(X-axis machine coordinate value)
Zt : Z-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(Z-axis machine coordinate value)
(when Xt and Zt touch the X-axis (–) contact face and Z-axis (–) contact face in the
above figure)
OFSx : Tool offset value to be set (X-axis): OFSx = Xt - Xm
OFSz : Tool offset value to be set (Z-axis): OFSz = Zt - Zm
When the reference tool nose tip position is set as the measuring reference position
703
Example 2 The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginary

zero point), as shown in the figure below. The difference between the
imaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at the
mechanical reference point is settable as the tool offset value of the
measuring tool, by setting the distances from the imaginary zero point to
the respective contact faces as parameters.
Machine
Zt
zero point
OFSZ
Xt (0 , 0) Measuring tool nose

position at the
mechanical
+X reference position
+Z
Xm OFSx
Zm
Zp Xp
Measuring reference position

(Imaginary zero point)
When the imaginary zero position is set as the measuring reference position
D Setting the workpiece The workpiece coordinate system shift amount for the Z-axis is settable
coordinate system shift as follows: Bring the tool to touch the workpiece end face. Subtract the
amount tool geometry offset value of the tool (the value shifted in the coordinate
system by the tool geometry offset) from the machine coordinate value
(the distance from the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical
reference position (machine zero point) to the workpiece end face).The
result is set as the workpiece coordinate system shift value.
(Z axis workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set

(EXOFSz) )
= (Z axis tool geometry offset value of the corresponding tool
(OFSz)) – (Z axis machine coordinate value(Zt))
Using the above methods, the workpiece coordinate system is set with
the workpiece end face (the contact point of the sensor) specified as
the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system of the
Z-axis.
704
Machine
+X zero point
Zt
+Z OFSZ
–EXOFSZ (0,0) Measuring tool nose
position at the mechani-
OFSX cal machine position
Workpiece coordinate
system zero point
(programmed zero point)
EXOFSz : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set

OFSz : Tool geometry offset value
Zt : Mechanical coordinate value (Distance to the workpiece end face)
Setting of workpiece coordinate system shift amount
To deviate the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate

system from the workpiece end face, such as adding a cutting
allowance, use the incremental input of the workpiece coordinate
system shift amount in MDI operation. By setting the distance from
the programmed zero point to the workpiece end face with a sign, the
numeric value input is added to the preset amount.
+X
EXOFSZ(NEW)
Cutting
allowance
W EXOFSZ(OLD)
Workpiece coordinate system

programmed zero point
+Z
Imaginary zero point
EXOFSZ(OLD) : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount being set by the

function of input of tool offset value measured B
W : Cutting allowance (incremental input value)
EXOFSZ(NEW) : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount after adding the
cutting allowance.
Setting of cutting allowance
705
Basic Procedure to Set (1) Execute manual reference position return.

Tool Offset Value By executing manual reference position return, a machine coordinate
system is established.
The tool offset value is computed on the machine coordinate system.
(2) Select manual handle mode or manual continuous feed mode and set
the tool compensation value write mode select signal GOQSM to “1”.
The CRT display is automatically changed to the tool offset screen
(geometry), and the “OFST” indicator starts blinking in the status
indication area in the bottom of the screen, which informs that the tool
compensation value writing mode is ready.
(3) Select a tool to be measured.
(4) When the cursor does not coincide with the tool offset number desired
to be set, move the cursor to the desired offset number by page key and
cursor key.
Besides, the cursor can also be coincided with the tool offset number
desired to set automatically by the tool offset number input signals
(when parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1).
In this case, the position of the cursor cannot be changed on the tool
compensation screen using page keys or cursor keys.
(5) Near the tool to the sensor by manual operation.
(6) Place the tool edge to a contacting surface of the sensor by manual
handle feed.
Bring the tool edge in contact with the sensor. This causes the tool
compensation value writing signals (+MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2 or
–MIT2) to input to CNC.
The tool compensation value writing signal is set to “1”, and the :
i) The axis is interlocked in this direction and its feeding is stopped.
ii) The tool offset value extracted by the tool offset memory (tool
geometry offset value) which corresponds to the offset number
shown by the cursor is set up.
(7) For both X-axis and Z-axis, their offset value are set by the operations
(5) and (6).
(8) Repeat operations (3) to (7) for necessary tools.
(9) Set the tool compensation value writing mode signal GOQSM to “0”.
The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “OFST” indicator light
goes off.
706
Basic Procedure to Set (1) Set the tool geometry offset values of each tool in advance.
Workpiece Coordinate (2) Execute manual reference position return.
Shift Value By executing manual reference position return, the machine
coordinate system is established.
The workpiece coordinate system shifting amount is computed based
on the machine coordinate system of the tool.
(3) Set the workpiece coordinate system shifting amount writing mode
select signal WOQSM to “1”.
The CRT display is automatically switches to the workpiece shifting
screen, the “WFST” indicator starts blinking at the status indicator
area in the bottom of the screen, which inform that the workpiece
coordinate system shifting amount writing mode is ready.
(4) Select a tool to be measured.
(5) Check tool offset numbers.
The tool offset number corresponding to the tool required for
measurement, shall be set in the parameter (No.5020) in advance.
Besides the tool offset number can be set automatically by setting the
tool offset number input signal (with parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1).
(6) Manually approach the tool to an end face of the workpiece.
(7) Place the tool edge to the end face (sensor) of the workpiece by
manual handle feed.
When the tool edge contacts with the end face of the workpiece, input
the workpiece coordinate system shift amount signal WOSET.
The workpiece coordinate system shifting amount on the Z–axis is
automatically set.
(8) Release the tool.
(9) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode select
signal WOQSM to “0”.
The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “WSFT” indicator
light goes off.
Signal
Tool offset write mode

select signal
(GOQSM <G039#7>)

[Function] Selects the mode for writing tool compensation.
[Operation] When this signal is turned “1” in a manual operation mode, the mode for
writing tool compensation is selected. The control unit then automatically
switches the screen displayed on the CRT to the tool geometry
compensation screen and blinks the “OFST” status display in the bottom
of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for
writing tool compensation.
707
Tool offset write signal

+MIT1, +MIT2
<X1004#2, #4>
–MIT1, –MIT2
<X1004#3, #5> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corre-
sponding axis during manual operation. When signal GOQSM for select-
ing the mode for writing tool compensation is set to “1”, the manual feed
is inhibited and also the tool geometry compensation along the axis is au-
tomatically calculated and the result is set in tool compensation memory.
[Operation] When these signals are turned “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
D Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during
manual operation.
+MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive
direction along the X-axis.
–MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative
direction along the X-axis.
+MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive
direction along the Z-axis.
–MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative
direction along the Z-axis.
D When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool
compensation is turned “1”, the manual feed interlock signal also
automatically calculates the tool geometry compensation for the tool
compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets the result in
tool compensation memory.
NOTE
This signal is used as the manual feed interlock signal in
each axis direction.
Tool offset number

select signals
OFN0 to OFN5, OFN6
<G039#0 to #5, G040#0>
[Function] Selects the tool offset number.
[Operation] When the mode for writing tool compensation is selected, the cursor is
automatically positioned on the tool geometry compensation number
selected by these signals.
A tool offset number is specififed by 7–bit binary number. Number 0 to
98 corresponds to the compensation number 1 to 99.
NOTE
This signal is available only when parameter QNI (No.
5005#5) =1.
708
system shift value write
mode select signal
WOQSM <G039#6>

[Function] Selects the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate
system.
[Operation] When this signal is turned “1” in a manual operation mode, the mode for
writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system is selected.
The control unit then automatically switches the screen displayed to the
WORK SHIFT screen and blinks the “OFST” status display in the bottom
of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for
writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. However,
this is not performed when the mode for writing tool compensation values
is selected.
system shift value write
signal
WOSET <G040#7>

[Function] Automatically calculates and sets the shift amount for the workpiece
coordinate system.
[Operation] When this signal turns to “1” in the mode for writing the shift amount for
the workpiece coordinate system, it triggers automatic calculation and
setting of the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1009 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G039 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0
G040 WOSET OFN6
709
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT

DIT Interlock for each axis direction
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5005 QNI

QNI In the function of input of offset value measured B
0 : Not automatically select the tool offset number
1 : Automatically selects a tool offset number
5015 Distance (XP) betweeen reference position and X axis + contact surface
5016 Distance (XM) betweeen reference position and X axis – contact surface
5017 Distance (ZP) betweeen reference position and Z axis + contact surface
5018 Distance (ZM) betweeen reference position and Z axis – contact surface

[Valid data range] –99999999 – 99999999

These parameters are related to the function of input of tool offset value
measured B.
They set the distance (with sign) between the measurement reference
position and sensor contact surface. For an axis under diameter program-
ming, set it by a diameter value.
710
Measuring
reference
position
Xm
X axis – contact face
Xp
Z axis – contact Z axis + contact face

face
+X Zm
X axis + contact
face
Zp
+Z
5020 Tool offset number used for the input of tool offset value measured B

[Valid data range] 0 to the number of tools to be compensated.
Set tool offset number used for the input of tool offset value measured B
function (i.e. when workpiece coordinate system shift value is set). (The
tool offset number corresponding to the measured tool shall be set in ad-
vance.) This parameter is valid when the tool offset number is not selected
automatically (QNI, #5 of parameter 5005, is zero).
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Direct Input of Tool Offset Measured B
711
14.4.3
Input of Measured
Workpiece Origin
Offsets
General By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinate
system from a programmed work coordinate system, the workpiece zero
point offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a command value
matches the actual measurement.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Offsets
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe) Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Offsets

(B–63504EN)
712
B–63503EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
15 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
713
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63503EN–1/01
15.1
PMC AXIS CONTROL
General The PMC can directly control any given axis, independently of the CNC.
In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by the
CNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying moving
distance and feedrate, from the PMC. This enables the control of turrets,
pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices using any given axes of
the CNC.
Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input

signal provided for that particular axis.
The PMC can directly control the following operations:

(1) Rapid traverse with moving distance specified
(2) Cutting feed – feed per minute, with moving distance specified
(3) Cutting feed – feed per revolution, with moving distance specified
(4) Skip – feed per minute, with moving distance specified
(5) Dwell
(6) Continuous feed
(7) Reference position return
(8) 1st reference position return
(9) 2nd reference position return
(10) 3rd reference position return
(11) 4th reference position return
(12) External pulse synchronization – Main spindle
(13) External pulse synchronization – first manual handle
(14) External pulse synchronization – second manual handle
(15) External pulse synchronization – third manual handle (for M series
only)
(16) Feedrate control
(17) Auxiliary function, Miscellaneous function 2, Miscellaneous
function 3
(18) Selection of the machine coordinate system
(19) Torque control
The PMC is provided with four paths to control these operations using
input and output signals.
By issuing commands through these four paths, the PMC can

simultaneously control multiple axes separately. Use parameter No. 8010
to determine which path controls which axis. Commands may be issued
through one path to two or more axes, thus allowing the PMC to control
multiple axes using one path.
714
PMC CNC
DI/ DO
Commands from path 1 Group A α axis control
Commands from path 2 Group B β axis control
Commands from path 3 Group C γ axis control
Commands from path 4 Group D ε axis control
In the following description, input/output signals from the four paths are
called group A (path 1), group B (path 2), group C (path 3), and group D
(path 4), respectively.
The name of an input/output signal used for PMC axis control always
contains a lowercase “g”, as in EBUFg. However, there is no such signal
as EBUFg. The actual signal names represented by EBUFg are EBUFA,
EBUFB, EBUFC, and EBUFD, which respectively correspond to signals
of group A (path 1), group B (path 2), group C (path 3), and group D (path
4).
Basic procedure (1) In parameter No. 8010, specify which DI/DO signal group (A, B, C,
or D) is to be used for PMC axis control on a per–axis basis.
When using the same group for simultaneously controlling two or
more axes, check that the settings of the parameters related to
feedrate (rapid traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time
constant, diameter/radius, linear axis/rotation axis, etc.) are
identical for each axis to be controlled.
(2) To enable direct PMC axis control, set each control axis selection
signal (EAX1 to EAX4), that corresponds to an axis to be controlled,
to 1.
(3) Determine the operation.
The axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g) specify the type
of operation. The axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g)
specify the feedrate. The axis control data signals (EID0g to
EID31g) specify the moving distance and other data.
715
These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg

(described later), determine one complete operation, which is tantamount
to one block executed during CNC–controlled automatic operation.
These signals may be collectively called the axis control block data
signals.
List of Signals Determining Data, Tantamount to One Block for PMC

Axis Control
Generic name Signal name Symbol Data type
Block stop prohibi- EMSBKg Bit type

tion signal
Axis control EC0g to EC6g Byte type

Axis control command signal
block data
signals Axis control feedrate EIF0g to EIF15g Word type
signal
Axis control data EID0g to EID31g Two words type

signal
(4) When the data governing a complete operation (one block) is

determined, reverse the logical state of axis control command read
signal EBUFg (i.e., from “0” to “1” or vice versa). Note that, for this
to occur, axis control command read completion signal EBSYg must
be in the same logical state as EBUFg.
D The CNC is capable of storing axis control functions from the PMC
in its buffer so that multiple operations can be performed in series,
under the control of the PMC. This allows the CNC to accept a new
command block from the PMC during the execution of another
block if the buffer has free space.
The following figure illustrates an example in which command [1]
is being executed, commands [2] and [3] are stored in the buffers,
and command [4] has been issued (the axis control block data signal
is set).
PMC Commands Setting of the axis control CNC’s buffers

block data signal
Block 1 Command [1] [4] [3] Input buffer
Block 2 Command [2] ↓
Block 3 Command [3] [2] Waiting buffer
Block 4 Command [4]

↓
Block 5 Command [5] [1] Executing buffer
~ ~
Block n
When the execution of command [1] is completed:
716
⋅ command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing

buffer;
⋅ command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer;
and
⋅ command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the command block
(axis control block data signal).
After the reception of command [4] by the input buffer, the PMC can issue
command [5] to the CNC (the axis control block data signal is set).
The timing chart for the command operation is shown below.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Command block
(Input)
EBUFg
(Input)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EBSYg
(Output)
The buffer is full.
Input buffer [3] [4]
Waiting buffer [2] [3]
Executing [1] [2]

buffer Beginning of execution Beginning of execution
End of
execution
(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) : A new block cannot be issued during these
intervals (while EBUFg and EBSYg are in different logical states).
D The status of the CNC buffer can be determined by the exclusive OR
of axis control command read signal EBUFg, input from the PMC, and
axis control command read completion signal EBSYg, output from the
CNC.
EBUFg Exclusive
ø OR CNC buffer status
EBSYg (XOR)
0 1
The previous block has already been read into the
ø ø 0
CNC buffer. The PMC can issue the next block.
0 1
The previous block has not yet been read com-

pletely. It is just being read or waiting for the CNC
0 1
buffer to become available. Do not issue the next
ø ø 1
block, nor reverse the logical state of EBUFg. Re-
1 0
versing the EBUFg state invalidates any block that
has been already issued.
717
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued.
When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection
signals EAX1 to EAX4 to “0”. Before setting these signals to “0”,
however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC’s input, waiting,
and executing buffers have all been executed. Setting the signals to
“0” while a block is being executed, or while a block remains in any
of these buffers, results in the issue of a P/S alarm. This alarm
suspends the current block execution and invalidates the blocks
stored in the input and waiting buffers.
To ensure no block is being executed, or that there are no blocks
remaining in the input or waiting buffer, check that control axis
selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “0”.
For those axes that are always subject to PMC control, such as those
controlling turrets, pallets, and ATCs, ensure that the EAX1 to
EAX4 signals are always set to “1”. There is no need to set these
signals to “0” after issuing commands from the PMC to the CNC.
When all command blocks have been executed (there are no blocks
remaining to be executed), the CNC automatically stops execution.
(6) When control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX4 are set “1” to
“0”, control is returned to the CNC.
Signal
Signal list
No. Symbol Signal name
1 EAX1 to EAX4 Control axis selection signals
2 EC0g to EC6g Axis control command signals
3 EIF0g to EIF15g Axis control feedrate signals
4 EID0g to EID31g Axis control data signals
5 EBUFg Axis control command read signal
6 EBSYg Axis control command read completion signal
7 ECLRg Reset signal
8 ESTPg Axis control temporary stop signal
9 ESBKg Block stop signal
10 EMSBKg Block stop disable signal
11 EM11g to EM48g Auxiliary function code signals
12 EMFg Auxiliary function strobe signal
13 EMF2g Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal
14 EMF3g Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal
15 EFINg Auxiliary function completion signal
16 ESOFg Servo–off signal
718
No. Symbol Signal name
17 EMBUFg Buffering disable signal
18 *EAXSL Control axis selection status signal
19 EINPg In–position signal
20 ECKZg Following zero checking signal
21 EIALg Alarm signal
22 EGENg Axis moving signal
23 EDENg Auxiliary function executing signal
24 EOTNg Negative–direction overtravel signal
25 EOTPg Positive–direction overtravel signal
26 *FV0E to *FV7E Feedrate override signals
27 OVCE Override cancellation signal
28 ROV1E, ROV2E Rapid traverse override signals
29 DRNE Dry run signal
30 RTE Manual rapid traverse selection signal
31 EOV0 Override 0% signal
32 ESKIP Skip signal
33 EADEN1 to EADEN4 Distribution completion signals
34 EABUFg Buffer full signal
35 EACNT1 to EACNT4 Controlling signals
36 *+ED1 to *+ED4 External deceleration signal

*–ED1 to *–ED4
37 ELCKZg Accumulated zero check signal
38 TRQMx Torque control mode signal
719
Signal Detail
1 Control axis selection

signals EAX1 to EAX4
[Function] When the signal is set to “1”, the corresponding axis becomes subject to
PMC control.
When the signal is set to “0”, PMC control becomes invalid. Changing
the setting of the control axis selection signal is possible only when
control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “0”. Changing the
setting when *EAXSL is set to “1” results in the issue of a P/S alarm (No.
139). Alarm signal EIALg is set to “1”.
When NCC, bit 5 of parameter No. 8001, is set to “0”, a command issued
from the CNC is executed while the control axis selection signal is set to
“1” and signal *EAXSL is set to “0”. When the parameter is set to “1”,
the same attempt results in the issue of a P/S alarm (No. 139). Note that
the command is invalidated when the tool is moving along the axis in
manual continuous feed mode.
If the control axis selection signal is set to “1” while the CNC is currently
executing a command, a P/S alarm is generated. In manual continuous
feed mode, setting this signal to “1” suspends the execution of the
command. While *EAXSL is set to “0”, the status of alarm signal EIALg
does not change to 1 when the control axis selection signal is set to 1 and
a P/S alarm (No. 139) is generated. In this case, the axis can be controlled
from the PMC, even when the CNC is in the alarm status.
NOTE
After setting control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX4 to
1, it takes at least 8 msec before the PMC can issue
commands to the CNC.
2 Axis control command

signals EC0g to EC6g
[Function] Specifies the following operations through each path.
Axis control
command
Operation
(hexadecimal
code)
Rapid traverse (linear acceleration/deceleration)

00h
Performs the same operation as G00, used by the CNC.
Cutting feed – feed per minute

(exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation)
01h
Performs the same operation as G94 G01, used by the
CNC.
720
Axis control
command
Operation
(hexadecimal
code)
Cutting feed – feed per revolution (exponential acceleration/

deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after inter-
polation)
02h
Performs the same operation as G95 G01, used by the
CNC.
Skip – feed per minute

03h Performs the same operation as G31 G01, used by the
CNC.
Dwell
04h
Reference position return
Moves the tool in the direction of reference position return

05h specified by ZMIx, bit 5 of parameter No. 1006, in rapid tra-
verse mode, then performs the same operation as manual
reference position return, done by the CNC.
Continuous feed (exponential acceleration/deceleration)
06h Moves the tool in the specified direction in jog feed mode.
Performs the same operation as that of JOG feed, done by
the CNC.
1st reference position return
07h Performs the same operation as done when positioning the

tool to the reference position from the intermediate point
specified by G28 of the CNC.
2nd reference position return

specified by G30 P2 of the CNC.
3rd reference position return

4th reference position return
0Ah Performs the same operation as done when positioning the

External pulse synchronization – main spindle

0Bh
Synchronizes with the main spindle.
External pulse synchronization – 1st manual handle

0Dh
Synchronizes with the 1st manual handle.
721
Axis control
command
Operation
(hexadecimal
code)
External pulse synchronization – 2nd manual handle

0Eh
Synchronizes with the second manual handle.
External pulse synchronization – 3rd manual handle

0Fh
Synchronizes with the 3rd manual handle.
Speed command (linear acceleration/deceleration)

10h
Performs continuous feed at the specified speed.
Torque control
11h
Continuous feed under torque control
Auxiliary function
12h Performs the same function as the miscellaneous function
(M function), used by the CNC.
Miscellaneous function 2
14h
Similar to the miscellaneous function of the CNC
Miscellaneous function 3
15h
Similar to the miscellaneous function of the CNC
Machine coordinate system selection

20h
Rapid traverse rate When using the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h), the
feedrate can be specified in either the same parameter as that used by the
CNC (No. 1420) or the PMC’s axis interface feedrate signals EIF0g to
EIF15g. This can be set with RPD, bit 0 of parameter No. 8002.
Reference without dogs The reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) enables the
position return following operation: When DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifying
reference position return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx, bit 1 of
parameter No. 1005, specifying reference position return without dogs for
each axis, is valid and the tool has not been returned to the reference
position since the power was turned on, move each axis in the direction
specified by the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h)
(position the tool to a point near the reference position) and issue the
reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h). This returns
the tool to the reference position (positions the tool to the grid nearest the
current position) without using the deceleration signal for reference
position return.
Note that, when positioning the tool to a point near the reference position,
the tool must be moved in the direction of reference position return at such
a speed that the servo position error exceeds the value of parameter No.
1836.
722
The direction of the grid relative to the proximate position depends on

ZMIx, bit 5 of parameter No. 1006.
After the reference position has been established, reference position
return can be performed at high speed by issuing the reference position
return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h), irrespective of the reference
position return direction specified by ZMIx, bit 5 of parameter No. 1006.
First reference position When using the 1st reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g:
return for an incomplete 07h), if DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifying reference position
reference position return return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx, bit 1 of parameter No. 1005,
without dogs specifying reference position return without dogs on a per–axis basis is
valid and the tool has not been returned to the reference position since the
power was turned on, issuing the 1st reference position return command
(EC0g to EC6g: 07h) results in the issue of a P/S alarm (No. 090).
1st to 4th reference When using the 1st to 4th reference position return commands (EC0g to
position return EC6g: 07h to 0Ah), the feedrate can be specified using RPD, bit 0 of
parameter No. 8002, in the same manner as when using the rapid traverse
command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h).
Note that, in the case of the 1st reference position return, if the tool has
not been manually returned to the reference position after the power was
turned on, the feedrate specified by parameter No. 1424 applies.
External pulse When using the external pulse synchronization commands (EC0g to
synchronization EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh), the tool moves backwards if the external pulse
has a negative value. When a manual handle interrupt is executed for the
axis to which the external pulse is being applied, the moving distance is
the sum of the external pulse and the interrupt pulse.
When a serial spindle is used, synchronization with the main spindle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh) is not possible.
Display of remaining When using the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the
distance external pulse synchronization command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to
0Fh), the displayed remaining distance is always “0”.
Speed command When using the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h), specify the axis
to be controlled as a rotation axis in ROTX, bit 0 of parameter No. 1006.
While position control is being executed for the continuous feed
command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h), the speed command (EC0g to EC6g:
10h) exerts speed control over the servo motor, thus allowing the speed
to be dynamically changed during continuous feed. This makes this
command suitable for driving a rotation tool with a servo motor.
A linear acceleration/deceleration time constant can be set for each axis,
using parameter No. 8028.
Note that, while jog feed is being executed by the speed command, no
coordinate system values are changed. This will result in the loss of the
tool position. Therefore, after continuous feed has been completed,
always return the tool to the reference position before executing the move
command.
723
Machine coordinate The machine coordinate system selection command (EC0g to EC6g:
system selection 20h) performs absolute positioning to move the tool in rapid traverse to
a specified position on the machine coordinate system. This command
is used to move the tool to a position specifically defined for the machine,
such as the tool exchange position.
For a rotation axis, short cut rotation can also be specified. When using
this command for the T series, cancel the tool offset and the tool nose
radius compensation. For the M series, cancel cutter compensation, tool
length compensation, and tool offset.
The machine coordinate system must be set before attempting to use this
command. After turning on the power, return the tool to the reference
position either manually or by using G28. When an absolute position
detector is provided, returning the tool to the reference position is not
necessary because the tool position will be stored in memory.
Torque control command When torque control is selected (EC0g to EC6g: 11h), the PMC
controlled axis can be subjected to torque control instead of position
control. In the torque control mode, the servo motor outputs the torque
specified by the NC.
(1) Switching from position control to torque control
a. Setting a torque control axis
Set the axis to be subjected to torque control in the TRQMx bit (bit
7 of parameter No. 2007). Set the torque control axis also in
parameter No. 2105 of torque constant. The motor–specific
standard value is automatically set in this parameter when the
power is turned on with the DGPR bit (bit 1 of parameter No. 2000)
set to 0.
b. Position management in torque control mode
In torque control mode, whether to perform follow–up can be
selected by setting the TQF bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1803).
When follow–up is not performed, an integrated travel value (error
count) exceeding the value of parameter No. 1885 causes servo
alarm 423 to be issued. When torque control is switched to position
control, follow–up is always performed, even if follow–up
suppression is selected.
The CNC manages the position even in torque control mode. After
torque control is switched to position control, no reference position
return is necessary.
c. Traveling direction and speed in torque control mode
In torque control mode, the torque specified by the axis control data
signal is output. While there is no target of torque generation or
while the output torque falls below the specified torque, the
traveling direction is determined by the plus or minus sign added
to the torque data, as in position control. When the traveling speed
exceeds the specified speed, servo alarm 422 is issued.
d. Timing of switching to torque control
A mode is switched to torque control mode after the position error
enters the effective range (in–position state).
724
(2) Switching from torque control to position control

(canceling torque control mode)
Torque control mode is canceled when any of the following conditions
is satisfied:
1) The reset signal ECLRg is brought to “1”.
2) A servo alarm is issued.
3) An OT alarm is issued on the torque control axis.
4) An emergency stop occurs.
5) The servo motor is turned off by the servo off signal ESOFg.
a. Timing for canceling torque control
When torque control by the PMC controlled axis is canceled,
follow–up may or may not be performed, depending on the setting
in the TRF bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1803). If follow–up is
suppressed, the torque control mode signal TRQMx immediately
goes “0” when a cause to cancel torque control is detected. Then,
position control mode is selected. The execution terminates when
the position error enters the effective range. If follow–up is
performed, the torque control mode signal TRQMx goes “0” when
a cause to cancel torque control is detected. Then, follow–up starts.
When the position error falls below or equals to the cancel limit
value specified in parameter 1886, position control mode is
selected. The execution terminates when the position error enters
the effective range.
b. Command after torque control mode is canceled
When torque control mode is canceled, normal position control
mode is selected. In torque control mode, the position is managed,
and the machine coordinates are not displaced. The workpiece
coordinates, however, are shifted from the machine coordinates.
The shift must be canceled by specifying the command for setting
the workpiece coordinate system or the like.
CAUTION
1 If the torque control axis may be moved in torque control
mode, the follow–up parameter TQF (bit 4 of parameter No.
1803) must be set to “1”.
2 If torque control mode is canceled while the torque control
axis is moving, the return to position control mode causes
a mechanical impact. A faster movement causes a greater
impact. To cancel torque control mode, decelerate or stop
the movement in advance.
3 When specifying the torque control command after a
manual reference position return is completed, set the feed
direction selection signal to “0” in advance. Alternatively,
select a mode other than manual reference position return
mode in advance.
725
The following table shows the correspondence between the axis control
commands and their data:
Command block
Axis control code
Operation Command data
signal EC0g to EC6g
Rapid traverse 00h Total moving distance
EID0g to EID31g
Rapid traverse rate
EIF0g to EIF15g
The rapid traverse rate

is valid when PRD, bit 0
of parameter No. 8002,
is set to “1”.
Cutting feed – feed per 01h Total moving distance

minute EID0g to EID31g
Feedrate
Skip – feed per minute 03h EIF0g to EIF15g
Cutting feed – feed per 02h Total moving distance

revolution EID0g to EID31g
Feed per rotation
EIF0g to EIF15g
Dwell 04h Dwell time

EID0 to EID31g
Reference position 05h None

return
Jog feed 06h Feed direction EID31g

Jog feedrate
EIF0g to EIF15g
1st reference position 07h Rapid traverse rate

return EIF0g to EIF15g
2nd reference position 08h The rapid traverse rate

return is valid when PRD, bit 0
of parameter No. 8002,
3rd reference position 09h is set to “1”.
return
4th reference position 0Ah

return
External pulse 0Bh Pulse weight

synchronization – EIF0g to EIF15g
main spindle
External pulse 0Dh

synchronization –
manual handle 0Eh
0Fh <For M series only>
Speed command 10h Continuous feed

EIF0g to EIF15g
726
Axis control code

Operation Command data
signal EC0g to EC6g
Torque control 11h Maximum feedrate,
EIF0g to EIF15g
Torque data, EID0g to
EID31g
Auxiliary function 12h Auxiliary function code

EID0g to EID15g
Miscellaneous function 14h Miscellaneous function

2 code, EID0g to EID15g
Miscellaneous function 15h Miscellaneous function

3 code, EID0g to EID15g
Machine coordinate 20h Machine coordinate

system setting system setting
(absolute value)
EID0g to EID31g
Rapid traverse rate
EIF0g to EIF15g
The rapid traverse rate
setting is effective when
bit 0 (RPD) of parameter
No. 8002 is set to “1”.
3 Axis control feedrate

signals EIF0g to
EIF15g
[Function] (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h)

(2) 1st reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 07h)
(3) 2nd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 08h)
(4) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 09h)
(5) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 0Ah)
(6) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g: 20h)
For these commands, signals EIF0g to EIF15g are used to specify
the rapid traverse rate, in binary format, when bit 0 (RPD) of
parameter No. 8002 is set to “1”. For 1st reference position return,
however, the rapid traverse rate specified with parameter No. 1424
is used if manual reference position return has not been performed
after the power was first turned on.
[Unit of data] Data unit
Unit
IS–B IS–C
Linear Metric machine 1 mm/min

axis Inch machine 0.1 inch/min
Rotation axis 1 deg/min
727
[Valid data range] Specify data within the range given in the following table.
Data range
Unit
IS-B IS-C
Linear Metric machine 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 mm/min

axis Inch machine 30 to 6000 30 to 4800 inch/min
Rotation axis 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 deg/min
(7) Cutting feed – feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)

(8) Skip – feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 03h)
For these commands, the signals are used to specify, in binary
format, the feedrate along an axis. The specified feedrate can be
magnified by ten by the setting of bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002.
[Unit of data] When bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0
Data unit
Unit
IS–B IS–C
Linear Metric machine 1 0.1 mm/min

axis Inch machine 0.01 0.01 inch/min
Rotation axis 1 0.1 deg/min
When bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1

Data unit
Unit
IS–B IS–C
Linear Metric machine 10 1 mm/min

axis Inch machine 0.1 0.01 inch/min
Rotation axis 10 1 deg/min

(Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.)
Data range
Unit
IS–B IS–C
Linear Metric machine 1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 mm/min

axis Inch machine 0.01 to 4000.00 0.001 to 480.000 inch/min
Rotation axis 1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 deg/min
CAUTION
When “0” is specified, the CNC continues to perform
buffering without moving the tool. In such a case, release
the buffering by issuing reset signal ECLRg.
Cutting feedrate clamp is disabled.
728
(9) Cutting feed – feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)

For this command, the signals are used to specify the amount by
which the tool is moved for every rotation of the spindle.
<For T series>
[Unit of data] The data increment depends on the settings of bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) of
parameter No. 8002, as listed in the following table.
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis

FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.0001 0.000001 0.0001
0 0
0 1 0.001 0.00001 0.001
1 0 0.01 0.0001 0.01

Data range
Unit
IS–B IS–C
Linear Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev

axis Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.0001 to 500.0000 deg/rev
<For M series>
[Unit of data] The data unit depends on the settings of bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) of
parameter No. 8002, as listed in the following table.
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.01 0.0001 0.01
0 0
0 1 0.1 0.001 0.1
1 0 1 0.01 1

Data range
Unit
IS–B IS–C
Linear Metric input 0.01 to 500.00 mm/rev

axis Inch input 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00 deg/rev
WARNING
1 The value of parameter No. 8022 is used as the upper limit
for clamping the feedrate.
2 Override for the feedrate is effective. Dry run is invalid.
729
CAUTION
The specified feedrate can be magnified by 1, 10, or 100 by
setting bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002
accordingly.
(10) External pulse synchronization – main spindle

(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Eh)
(13) External pulse synchronization – third manual handle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh)
For these commands, the signals are used to specify the weight of the
external pulses. A weight range of "1/256 to "127 can be set by using
signals EIF0g to EIF7g for the figures after the decimal point. When a
negative weight is specified, the tool is moved in the reverse direction.
When a new pulse weight is specified while the tool is moving in
synchronization with external pulses, inverting signal EBUFg causes the
tool to move with the new pulse weight.
As commands for (10) to (13) are executed without buffering, axis control
command read completion signal EBSYg usually need not be checked.
CAUTION
The pulse weight is clamped according to the value set for
parameter No. 1424 (parameter for the manual rapid
traverse rate for each axis).
NOTE
When diameter programming is specified with bit 3 (DIAx)
of parameter No. 1006, bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005
can be used to specify whether a radius or diameter is to be
used in a command (T series).
(14) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g: 06h)

Set the feedrate as the same as for cutting feed – feed per minute
(EC0g to EC6g: 01h). The feedrate can be changed during
continuous feed.
Specify the feedrate with signals EIF0g to EIF15g, and invert the
axis control command read signal EBUFg during continuous feed,
then the tool moves at the new feedrate.
As commands for jog feed are executed without buffering, axis
control command read completion signal EBSYg usually need not
be checked.
The specified feedrate can be magnified by 10 by setting bit 3 (F10)
of parameter No. 8002, and by 200 by setting bit 2 (JFM) of
parameter No. 8004.
730
D Maximum feedrate (with override of 254%)

IS–B IS–C
Magnified 166458mm/ 1664.58inch/ 16645mm/min 166.45inch/
by 1 min min min
Magnified 1664589mm/ 16645.89 166458mm/ 1664.58inch/

by 10 min inch/min min min
CAUTION
The maximum feedrate depends on whether override is
applied or canceled. The following table lists the maximum
feedrate when override is canceled.
IS–B IS–C
Magni- 65535mm/ 655.35inch/ 6553mm/min 65.53inch/
fied by 1 min min min
Magni- 655350mm/ 6553.50inch/ 65535mm/ 655.35inch/

fied by min min min min
10
(15) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h)

For this command, the signals are used to specify, in binary format,
the servo motor speed.
Specify a positive value for rotation in the forward direction.
Specify a negative value (twos complement) for rotation in the
reverse direction.
When a new servo motor speed is specified, inverting the axis
control command read signal EBUFg accelerates or decelerates the
servo motor until it attains the new speed.
Data range Unit
–32768 to +32767 min–1
NOTE
The servo motor speed may contain a slight error, as
follows:
Gears
Speed command
Amplifier Motor
↑
(b) Axis
Detector ↑
(a)
731
(a) The speed command for PMC axis control requires specification
of the servo motor speed, not the feedrate along an axis. To
specify a feedrate along the axis when gears are used to link the
servo motor and axis, the feedrate must be converted to a rotation
speed of the servo motor speed. As the motor speed must be
specified with an integer, the converted speed is subject to a
round–off error.
(b) The minimum increment for specifying the motor speed is
calculated by the following formula and rounded to the nearest
integer:
Fmin : Minimum increment
Fmin + P 2 1 for the motor speed
15 1000
P : Number of pulses per
rotation of the detector
for velocity feedback
Specify the speed command using the value calculated by the
following formula:
F : Speed command value
F+N P 2 1
(integer)
15 1000
N : Servo motor speed
(min–1)
P : Number of detector
pulses issued per rotation
for velocity feedback
NOTE
In speed command mode, the speed after
acceleration/deceleration is specified to the servo control
unit. The loop gain for position control is invalid.
(16) When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified

Specify the maximum speed in torque control mode, in rpm.
A servo alarm (No. 422) is issued if there is no object for which a
torque is to be generated or if the feedrate exceeds the specified value
while torque control is being applied.
The maximum feedrate in torque control mode can be changed in
torque control mode by setting the new feedrate data in the signal
then inverting the logic of axis control command read signal
EBUFg.
Valid data range Units
1 to 32767 min–1
732
4 Axis control data

signals
EID0g to EID31g
[Function]
[Unit of data] IS–B IS–C Unit
Degree input deg
[Valid data range]

(1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h)
(2) Cutting feed – feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(3) Cutting feed – feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
(4) Skip – feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 03h)
For these commands, signals EID0g to EID31g are used to specify, in
binary format, the incremental moving distance, according to the input
increment used for the axis.
IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric input "99999.999 "9999.9999 mm
Degree input deg
Inch input "9999.9999 "999.99999 inch
When diameter programming is specified with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter

No. 1006, bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 can be used to specify
whether a radius or diameter is to be used in a command.
(5) Dwell (EC0g to EC6g: 04h)
the dwell time.
Data range Unit
1 to 9999999 ms
When diameter programming is specified with bit 3 (DIAx) of

parameter No. 1006, bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 can be used
to specify whether a radius or diameter is to be used in a command.
NOTE
When the increment system IS–C is used, the least input
increment for the dwell time can be set to 0.1 ms, according
to the setting of bit 1 (DWE) of parameter No. 8002.

For this command, signal EID31g is used to specify the direction of
continuous feed, as follows:
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
733
Signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined.
Auxiliary (7) Auxiliary functions (EC0g to EC6g: 12h)

an auxiliary function code to be sent to the PMC. The auxiliary
function code can be specified using either one or two bytes,
depending on the setting of bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001, in
signals EID0g to EID15g.

an absolute machine coordinate, according to the increment system
used by the axis.
Example: For absolute value “10000”
Input increment inch 1.0000 mm 10.000
Output increment mm 25.400 inch 0.3937
The direction of rotation can be specified about a rotation axis with

a parameter. To enable the roll–over function, set bit 0 (ROAx) of
parameter No. 1008 to 1. Then, select whether the tool is to be
rotated in the direction corresponding to the sign of the specified
value, or in whichever direction minimizes the distance to the end
point, using bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008. The moving
distance per rotation must be set in parameter No. 1260.
(9) When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified
Specify the torque data.
Specify a positive value when the torque is to be applied in the
positive direction. Specify a negative value when the torque is to be
applied in the negative direction.
The specified torque data can be changed in torque control mode by
setting the new data in the signal then inverting the logic of axis
control command read signal EBUFg.
Valid data range Units
–99999999 to +99999999 0.00001 Nm

read signal EBUFg
[Function] Directs the CNC to read a block of command data for PMC axis control.
See “Basic procedure” for details of the operation performed when this
signal is set from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”.
734

read completion
signal EBSYg

[Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data for
PMC axis control and has stored the block in the input buffer. See “Basic
procedure” for details of the output conditions and the procedure.
7 Reset signal ECLRg

[Function] Resets the corresponding PMC–controlled axis.
When this signal is set to “1”, the following is performed:
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the
tool.
(2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation.
(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation.
Simultaneously, all buffered commands are canceled. Any control
command is ignored while this signal is set to “1”.
The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and external pulse
synchronization command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) can be
terminated by setting reset signal ECLRg to “1”. When these commands
are terminated, the servo motor decelerates and stops, the axis moving
signal EGENg is set to “0”, and the control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL is set to “0”. Confirm that the control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL has been set to “0” before issuing the next command. Do not
set reset signal ECLRg to “0” until the control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL has been set to “0”.
The speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can also be terminated by
setting the reset signal ECLRg to “1”. When this command is terminated,
the servo motor decelerates and stops, and the axis moving signal EGENg
is set to “0”. Confirm that the axis moving signal EGENg has been set
to “0” before issuing the next command. Do not attempt to set the reset
signal ECLRg to “0” until the axis moving signal EGENg has been set to
“0”.
8 Axis control
temporary stop signal
ESTPg

[Function] When this signal is set to “1”, the following is performed:
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the
tool.
735
(2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation.

(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation
when auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is input.
The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to “0”.
9 Block stop signal

ESBKg
10 Block stop disable
signal EMSBKg

[Function] When block stop signal ESBKg is set to “1” during the execution of a
command issued from the PMC, axis control is stopped after the block
being executed is completed. When this signal is set to “0”, the buffered
command is executed. Block stop signal ESBKg is disabled when block
stop disable signal EMSBKg is set to “1” for the block.
|← More than →|
ESBKg 8 msec
(input)
[1] [2] [3]
Command
block
(input)
EBUFg
(input)
EBSYg
(output)
The buffer is full.
Input buffer [2] [3]
Waiting buffer
[1] [2]
Executing
buffer [1]
Beginning of execution
11 Auxiliary function
code signals
EM11g to EM48g
strobe signal EMFg
736
13 Miscellaneous
function 2 strobe
signal EMF2g
14 Miscellaneous
function 3 strobe
signal EMF3g
completion signal
EFINg
[Function] When an auxiliary function command (EC0g to EC6g: 12h), an auxiliary
function 2 command (EC0g to EC6g: 14h), or an auxiliary function 3
command (EC0g to EC6g: 15h) is issued by the PMC, the auxiliary
function code is specified in a byte (using signals EID0g to EID7g) or two
bytes (using signals EID0g to EID15g), depending on the setting of bit
6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001.
The CNC sends the auxiliary function code specified in signals EID0g to
EID7g and EID8g to EID15g to auxiliary function code signals EM11g
to EM28g and EM31g to EM48g and awaits auxiliary function
completion signal EFINg. When the auxiliary function completion signal
EFINg is returned, the CNC starts executing the next block.
The timings for sending the auxiliary function code signals and auxiliary
function strobe signal (,auxiliary function 2 strobe signal, or auxiliary
function 3 strobe signal), as well as for receiving the auxiliary function
completion signal, are the same as those for the miscellaneous functions
(M functions) under the control of the CNC. See “Auxiliary function
executing signal” for details.
16 Servo–off signal
ESOFg
[Function] When this signal is set to “1”, the servo motor for the corresponding
PMC–controlled axis is turned off (servo–off state).
When this signal is set to “0”, the servo motor is turned on.
When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified,
entering the servo–off state cancels torque control mode, but the torque
control state remains set. In such a case, set reset signal ECLRg to “1”.
737
17 Buffering disable
signal EMBUFg
[Function] When this signal is set to “1”, commands from the PMC are not read while
the executing, waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is
set to “1” when any of these buffers contain a block, that block is executed
but subsequent commands are read only when the buffers are all empty.
To discriminate the buffering disabled condition, the CNC outputs the
axis control command read completion signal (EBSYg) only when a
command is read when all buffers are empty.
EMBUFg
(input)
[1] [2]
Command
block
(input)
EBUFg
(input)
Command
disabled
EBSYg
(output)
Input buffer
Waiting buffer
Executing [1] [2]

buffer
Beginning of End Beginning of
execution execution
Buffering is disabled, regardless of buffering disable signal EMBUFg, for

the following commands:
(1) Skip–feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 03h)
(2) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 05h)
(3) 1st reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 07h)
(4) 2nd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 08h)
(5) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 09h)
(6) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 0Ah)
The following commands, for which reset signal ECLRg is used for
termination, operate as though buffering had been disabled. That is, the
subsequently specified block is not executed but canceled:
(2) External pulse synchronization – main spindle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh)
738

(EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Eh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh)
(6) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h)
18 Control axis selection

status signal *EAXSL

[Function] When this signal is set to “0”, control axis selection signals EAX1 to
EAX4 can be changed.
This signal is set to “1” in the following cases:

(1) When the tool is moving along a PMC–controlled axis
(2) When a block is being read into a buffer
(3) When the servo–off signal ESOFg is set to “1”
When this signal is set to “1”, control axis selection signals EAX1 to
EAX4 cannot be changed. Any attempt to change these signals results in
the output of P/S alarm No. 139.
If an attempt to change signals EAX1 to EAX4 is made when servo–off

signal ESOFg is “1”, P/S alarm No. 139 occurs and cannot be released
simply by setting reset signal ECLRg to “1”. In such a case, restore
signals EAX1 to EAX4 or set servo–off signal ESOFg to “0” before
setting reset signal ECLRg to “1”.
When a command is issued for any of the four paths with PMC axis
control, signal *EAXSL is set to “1” to disable axis selection. Thus,
changing signals EAX1 to EAX4 results in the output of P/S alarm No.
139. For paths for which commands are not issued, however, axis
selection is enabled if bit 5 (DSL) of parameter No. 8004 is set
accordingly.
19 In–position signal
EINPg

[Function] This signal is set to “1” when the corresponding PMC–controlled axis is
in the in–position state.
When the tool is decelerated, in–position check is performed to disable
the next command until the tool enters the in–position area. The
in–position check, however, can be skipped using bit 6 (NCI) of
parameter No. 8004 to reduce the cycle time.
739
NOTE
When the axis fed at a very low speed, in –position signal
might turn “1”.
20 Following zero
checking signal
ECKZg

[Function] This signal is set to “1” when following zero check or in–position check
is being performed for the corresponding PMC–controlled axis.
21 Alarm signal EIALg

[Function] This signal is set to “1” when a servo alarm, overtravel alarm, or P/S alarm
No. 130 or 139 occurs for the corresponding PMC–controlled axis. This
signal is set to “0” when reset signal ECLRg is set to “1” after the alarm
is released, as described below.
D Servo alarm
Eliminate the cause of the alarm, then reset the CNC.
D Overtravel alarm
Move the tool into the area within the stored stroke limit, then reset the
CNC.
The following commands can be used to move the tool into the area
within the stored stroke limit during an overtravel alarm:
(2) Cutting feed–feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(3) Cutting feed–feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Eh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh)
D P/S alarm (130 or 139)
Reset the CNC. See “Alarms and messages” for details.
Reset signal ECLRg cannot be used to reset the CNC in the above cases.
Use the reset button on the setting panel, external reset signal ERS, or
emergency stop signal *ESP.
740
22 Axis moving signal

EGENg

[Function] This signal is set to “1” when the tool is moving along the corresponding
PMC–controlled axis according to commands such as rapid traverse
(EC0g to EC6g: 00h) and cutting feed (EC0g to EC6g: 01h).
NOTE
This signal is set to “0” when distribution for the axis is
completed (the signal is set to “0” during deceleration).
executing signal
EDENg

[Function] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is specified by the
PMC, this signal is set to “1” during the period from when auxiliary
function codes EID0g to EID15g are sent to auxiliary function code
signals EM11g to EM48g until auxiliary function completion signal
EFINg is returned.
Auxiliary function command Next command

Command block
(input)
EM11g to EM48g
(output)
TMF
EMFg, EMF2g, EMF3g
(output)
TFIN
EFINg
(input)
EDENg
(output)
TMF and TFIN are set with parameters No. 3010 and 3011.
741
24 Negative–direction
overtravel signal
EOTNg
25 Positive–direction
overtravel signal
EOTPg
[Function] These signals are set to “1” when an overtravel alarm is detected. When
the stroke limit in the negative direction is exceeded, signal EOTNg is set
to “1”. When the stroke limit in the positive direction is exceeded, signal
EOTPg is set to “1”. Simultaneously, alarm signal EIALg is set to “1”.
These signals are set to “0” when the overtravel alarm is released and reset
signal ECLRg is set to “1”. See “Alarm signal EIALg” for details of how
to release an overtravel alarm.
26 Feedrate override
signals *FV0E to *FV7E
[Function] Like the CNC’s feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7, these signals can
be used to select the override for the cutting feedrate, in steps of 1% from
0 to 254%, independently of the CNC using bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No.
8001.
These signals form an eight–bit binary code and correspond to the
override value as follows:
ȍ |2
7
Override value + i
Vi|%
i+0
Vi = 0 when signal *FViE is 1

Vi = 1 when signal *FViE is 0
That is, each signal has the following significance:
*FV7E = 128%, *FV3E = 8% ,
*FV6E = 64%, *FV2E = 4% ,
*FV5E = 32%, *FV1E = 2% ,
*FV4E = 16%, *FV0E = 1%
When all signals are set to “0”, the override is regarded as being 0%, as
well as when all signals are “1”.
27 Override cancellation
signal OVCE
[Function] When override is enabled, independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2
(OVE) of parameter No. 8001, setting this signal to “1” fixes the cutting
feed override to 100%. This signal does not affect the rapid traverse over-
ride.
742
28 Rapid traverse
override signals
ROV1E and ROV2E

[Function] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate,
independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001.
Rapid traverse override signals

Override value
ROV2E ROV1E
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 F0
F0 is the minimum feedrate specified with parameter No. 1421.
29 Dry run signal DRNE

30 Manual rapid traverse
selection signal RTE

[Function] These signals can be used to perform dry run or manual rapid traverse,
independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001.
When dry run signal DRNE is set to “1”, the specified rapid traverse rate
and cutting feedrate are ignored and the tool moves at the dry run speed
(set in parameter No. 1410) multiplied by the specified override. Bit 3
(RDE) of parameter No. 8001 can be used to specify whether to enable
or disable dry run for rapid traverse.
When manual rapid traverse selection signal RTE is set to “1” during dry
run, the tool moves at the rapid traverse rate for rapid traverse and at the
maximum jog feedrate for cutting feed. When the signal is set to “0”, the
tool moves at the jog feedrate. When dry run signal DRNE is set to “0”,
the specified rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate is restored.
Feedrate of Dry run
Manual rapid Command from PMC

traverse select
signal Rapid traverse Feed
1 Rapid traverse rate Maximum cutting

feedrate
0 Dry run feed Dry run feed

rate JV(*) rate JV
* Can also be set to the rapid traverse rate with bit 3 (RDE) of parameter
No. 8001.
743
31 Override 0% signal
EOV0
[Function] This signal is set to “1” when the feedrate override is 0%.
32 Skip signal ESKIP

[Function] When this signal is set to “1” during executing the skip cutting command,
the block being executed is immediately stopped and the next block is
executed. Bit 7 (SKE) of parameter No. 8001 can be used to select
whether to use signal SKIP, which is the common skip signal for the PMC
and CNC, or PMC–specific skip signal ESKIP.
NOTE
When two paths are controlled, the skip signal ESKIP is
valid for the first path. For the second path, use the SKIP
signal (X013, #7), which is used also by the CNC.
33 Distribution
completion signals
EADEN1 to EADEN8

[Function] These signals are set to “0” when the tool is moving with a command from
the PMC. The signals are set to “1” when the tool is not moving, except
when it is stopped by the issue of an axis control temporary stop signal
ESTPg during the execution of a move command.
34 Buffer full signal

EABUFg
[Function] This signal is set to “1” when the input buffer contains a command block.
35 Controlling signals
EACNT1 to EACNT4
[Function] When the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “1”, signal
EACNTn corresponding to the axis being controlled is set to “1”.
744
36 External deceleration
signals *+ED1 to
*+ED4/*–ED1 to *–ED4

[Function] These signals are also used by the CNC. The signals are provided for each
direction of the individual controlled axes. The plus or minus sign in the
signal name indicates the direction, and the number at the end corresponds
to the axis number of the controlled axis.
"EDx
1 … Feed along the first axis is decelerated.
:
4 …Feed along the fourth axis is decelerated.
+ … Feed in the positive direction is decelerated.

:
– … Feed in the negative direction is decelerated.
When any of the following axis control command is specified while the
EDC bit (bit 0 of parameter 8005) is held 1, the external deceleration
function becomes effective:
(2) Cutting feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(3) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 05h)
(5) First reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 07h)
(6) Second reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 08h)
(7) Third reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 09h)
(8) Fourth reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 0Ah)
While the signal is held “0”, the feedrate in the corresponding direction
of axial movement can be reduced to the speed specified in parameter
1427 (external deceleration speed).
When the feedrate is lower than the external deceleration speed, the
specified feedrate is valid.
The feedrate on other axes for which the signal is not held “0” is not
affected.
745
37 Accumulated zero
check signal ELCKZg
[Function] Setting this signal to 1 causes an accumulated zero check between blocks
to be made at a subsequent cutting feed command.
(1) Cutting feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(2) Cutting feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
This enables the chopping function.
38 Torque control mode

signal TRQMx
[Function] This signal indicates which axis is placed in torque control mode under
PMC axis control.
Signal address
MT→CNC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1004 SKIP ESKIP
PMC→CNC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G118 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
G120 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1
G136 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E
G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E
746
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA ELCKZA EFINA
G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A
G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A

For
group A
G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB ELCKZB EFINB
G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B
G156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B

For
group B
G158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B
747
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC ELCKZC EFINC
G167 EMSBKC EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C
G168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C

For
group C
G170 EID7C EID6C EID5C EID4C EID3C EID2C EID1C EID0C
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD ELCKZD EFIND
G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D
G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D

For
group D
G182 EID7D EID6D EID5D EID4D EID3D EID2D EID1D EID0D
748
CNC→PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F112 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1
F129 *EAXSL EOV0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
For F131 EMF3A EMF2A EABUFA EMFA

group A
F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
For
group B F134 EMF3B EMF2B EABUFB EMFB
F135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F136 EBSYC EOTNC EOTPC EGENC EDENC EIALC ECKZC EINPC
For F137 EMF3D EFD2D EABUFC EMFC

group C
F138 EM28C EM24C EM22C EM21C EM18C EM14C EM12C EM11C
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F139 EBSYD EOTND EOTPD EGEND EDEND EIALD ECKZD EINPD
For F140 EABUFD EMFD

group D
F141 EM28D EM24D EM22D EM21D EM18D EM14D EM12D EM11D
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Group A F142 EM48A EM44A EM42A EM41A EM38A EM34A EM32A EM31A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Group B F145 EM48B EM44B EM42B EM41B EM38B EM34B EM32B EM31B
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Group C F148 EM48C EM44C EM42C EM41C EM38C EM34C EM32C EM31C
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Group D F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D
749
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F182 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1
F190 TRQM4 TRQM3 TRQM2 TRQM1
Parameter
1427 External deceleration speed of each axis
[Data type] Word axis type

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1803 TQF

TQF In torque control mode,
0 : Follow–up is not performed.
1 : Follow–up is performed.
1885 Permissible value of integrated travel distance under torque control

This parameter sets the maximum permissible value for the integrated
travel distance in torque control mode. If the integrated travel distance
exceeds the value set in this parameter, servo alarm No. 423 is issued.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the TQF (bit 4 of parameter No.
1803) is set to 0.
1886 Torque control cancel limit

This parameter sets the cancel limit value used to cancel torque control
mode.
When the position error falls below or equals to the value set in this
parameter, torque control mode is canceled and position control becomes
effective.
750
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the TQF (bit 4 of parameter
1803) is held 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 DGPRx
[Data type] Bit axis type

DGPRx At power–ON, the torque constant (parameter No. 2105):
0 : Is automatically set to the standard value specific to the motor.
1 : Is not automatically set to the standard value specific to the motor.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2007 TRQx
[Data type] Bit axis type

TRQx Torque control:
0 : Is not performed for the axis.
1 : Is performed for the axis.
2105 Torque constant

[Unit of data] 0.00001 Nm/(torque command)
A torque constant is set for each motor torque characteristic.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 PCF

PCF Whether movement along PMC–controlled axes is included in the actual
speed display
0 : Included
1 : Not included
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the same axis is controlled
alternately by the CNC and PMC.
751
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 SKE AUX NCC RDE OVE MLE

MLE Whether machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC–controlled axes
0 : Valid
1 : Invalid
NOTE
Each–axis machine lock signals MLK1 to MLK4 are always
valid, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control
0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
(1) Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7
(2) Override cancellation signal OVC
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2
(4) Dry run signal DRN
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RT
1: Signals specific to the PMC
(1) Feedrate override signals *FV0E to *FV7E
(2) Override cancellation signal OVCE
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E
(4) Dry run signal DRNE
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RTE
RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
NCC When a travel command is issued for a PMC–controlled axis (selected by
a controlled–axis selection signal) according to the program:
0 : P/S alarm 139 is issued while the PMC controls the axis with an axis
control command. While the PMC does not control the axis, a CNC
command is enabled.
1 : P/S alarm 139 is issued unconditionally.
AUX The number of bytes for the code of an auxiliary function (12H) command
to be output is
0 : 1 byte type (0 to 255)
1 : 2 bytes type (0 to 65535)
SKE Skip signal during axis control by the PMC
0 : Uses the same signal SKIP (X1004#7) as CNC.
1 : Uses dedicated axis control signal ESKIP (X1004#6) used by the
PMC.
752
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 FR2 FR1 PF2 PF1 F10 SUE DWE RPD

RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC–controlled axes
0 : Feedrate specified with parameter No. 1420
1 : Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command
DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PMC axis
control when the increment system is IS–C
0 : 1 ms
1 : 0.1 ms
SUE Whether acceleration/deceleration is performed for an axis that is
synchronized with external pulses, for external pulse synchronization
commands in PMC axis control
0 : Performed (exponential acceleration/deceleration)
1 : Not performed
F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis
control
F10 Metric input Inch input
0 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min
1 10 mm/min 0.1 inch/min
PF1, PF2 Set the the feedrate unit of feed per minute in PMC axis control
PF2 PF1 Feedrate unit
0 0 1/1
0 1 1/10
1 0 1/100
1 1 1/1000
FR1, FR2 Set the feedrate unit for feed per rotation for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
FR2 FR1 Metric input Inch input
0 0
0.0001 mm/rev 0.000001 inch/rev
1 1
0 1 0.001 mm/rev 0.00001 inch/rev
1 0 0.01 mm/rev 0.0001 inch/rev
753
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8003 PIM
NOTE
then back on again to make the setting effective.

PIM If a linear axis is controlled solely by the PMC, the commands for that axis
are:
0 : Affected by inch/metric input.
1 : Not affected by inch/metric input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8004 NDI NCI DSL JFM NMT CMV
NCI DSL G8R G8C JFM NMT CMV

CMV If the PMC issues a command for an axis after the completion of a
movement along that axis according to a command issued by the CNC,
but before receiving the signal indicating that the miscellaneous function
is completed in the same block,
1 : The axis is handled as a PMC axis and the specified movement is
executed.
NMT If the CNC issues a command that does not result in any movement along
a PMC–controlled axis while another command, specified for the axis, is
being processed,
JFM Specifies the units used to specify the feedrate for continuous feed (06H)
for a PMC–controlled axis.
Increment
JFM Metric input Inch input Rotation axis
system
0 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min 0.00023 min–1

IS–B
0 0.1 mm/min 0.001 inch/min 0.000023 min–1

IS–C
G8C If a cutting feed command is specified for a PMC–controlled axis,

look–ahead control is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
754
NOTE
The above setting is effective only when the NAHx bit (bit 7
of parameter No. 1819) is set to 0.
G8R If a rapid traverse command is specified for a PMC–controlled axis,

look–ahead control is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
NOTE
The above setting is effective only when the NAHx bit (bit 7
of parameter No. 1819) is set to 0.
DSL If an axis exchange is attempted while the selection of a PMC–controlled

axis is inhibited,
0 : The attempt fails and a P/S alarm No. 139 occurs.
1 : The axis exchange is executed for the axes that belong to an
unspecified path.
NCI During deceleration along an axis controlled by the PMC, the in–position
check is:
0 : Performed.
1 : Not performed.
NDI When diameter programming is selected for a PMC controlled axis, under
PMC axis control:
0 : Radius programming is used to specify the travel distance and
feedrate.
1 : Diameter programming is used to specify the travel distance and
feedrate.
NOTE
While the CDI bit (bit 1 of parameter No. 8005) is held 0, the
NDI bit is valid for an axis of diameter programming (the
DIAx bit (bit 3 of parameter No. 1006) is set to 1).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8005 MFD CDI EDC
[Data type] Bit

EDC Under PMC axis control, the external deceleration signal is:
0 : Ineffective.
1 : Effective.
CDI When diameter programming is selected for a PMC controlled axis, under
PMC axis control:
0 : Radius programming is used to specify the travel distance and
feedrate.
1 : Diameter programming is used to specify the travel distance, and
radius programming is used to specify the feedrate.
755
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the DIAx bit (bit 3 of parameter
1006) is held 1.
2 When the CDI bit is set to 1, the NDI bit (bit 7 of parameter
8004) is invalid.
MFD : The miscellaneous function individual output of the PMC axis control
function is:
0 : Not effective.
1 : Effective.
8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC
[Data type] Byte axis type

Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each
PMC–controlled axis.
Value Description
1 DI/DO group A (G142 to G153) is used.
2 DI/DO group B (G154 to G165) is used.
3 DI/DO group C (G166 to G177) is used.
4 DI/DO group D (G178 to G189) is used.
NOTE
If another value is specified, the axis is not PMC–controlled.
8022 Maximum feedrate for feed per rotation along a PMC–controlled axis

Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Specify the maximum feedrate for feed per rotation along a PMC–con-
trolled axis
NOTE
The maximum feedrate set to first axis is valid to all axes.
The data of after second axis are invalid.
756
8028 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for jog feed specified

by the speed command for each PMC–controlled axis

[Unit of data] msec/1000 rpm
Specify, for each PMC–controlled axis, the time needed to increase or
decrease the speed of the servo motor by 1000 rpm, that is, the time
constant of linear acceleration/deceleration for jog feed according to the
speed specified for that axis.
NOTE
If 0 is specified, the system does not control the
Alarm and message A servo alarm or overtravel alarm for a PMC–controlled axis is detected
in the same way as an alarm for a CNC–controlled axis.
If an alarm occurs, the alarm is handled by applying the normal procedure,
alarm signal EIALg being set to “1” to inform the PMC of the alarm.
(If an overtravel alarm occurs, either negative overtravel signal EOTNg
or positive overtravel signal EOTPg is also set to “1”.)
If the PMC issues a command for a CNC–controlled axis, a P/S alarm No.
130 occurs.
Commands issued by the PMC are effective if the axis is in feed hold or
single block stop mode. The command results in the issue of an alarm if
cutting feed is executed with an override of 0%, or if the interlock is
enabled.
If the CNC issues a command for a PMC–controlled axis, a P/S alarm No.
130 occurs.
If the PMC issues a movement command for an axis in the plane of polar
coordinate interpolation in polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1),
a P/S alarm No. 130 occurs.
757
(1) P/S Alarm

130 ILLEGAL AXIS An axis control command was given by

OPERATION PMC to an axis controlled by CNC. Or
an axis control command was given by
CNC to an axis controlled by PMC.
Modify the program.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC A PMC controlled axis was again se-
CONTROL AXIS lected. Or, the CNC issued a control
command for an axis that has been set
as a PMC–controlled axis for which no
command has been specified. Or, an
axis under control of CNC was selected
by PMC.
(2) Servo alarm

417 SERVO ALARM: An invalid parameter is specified for

n AXIS EXCESS ERR torque control. The torque constant pa-
rameter is set to 0.
422 SERVO ALARM: The maximum speed permitted under
n AXIS EXCESS ERR torque control has been exceeded.
423 SERVO ALARM: The maximum permissible value of in-
n AXIS EXCESS ERR tegrated travel distance set in the pa-
rameter under torque control has been
exceeded.
Warning
WARNING
1 The mode selection, CNC reset, and other CNC statuses
have no effect.
2 Feed hold, single block stop, reset, or interlock of one or all
axes, performed by the CNC, does not affect a
PMC–controlled axis. Similar control is possible by using
the equivalent signals issued from the PMC.
3 The mirror image functions (setting, parameter, input signal)
are disabled.
758
Caution
CAUTION
1 Emergency stop or machine lock is enabled. Machine lock
can be disabled if the MLE bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 8001)
is specified accordingly. However, machine lock for an
individual axis is always enabled.
2 In consecutive cutting feed blocks, a new block starts its
operation without waiting for the following zero of the servo
acceleration/deceleration. In other than the above blocks,
a new block starts its operation after the following zero of the
servo acceleration/deceleration is confirmed.
3 Commands for a linear axis that is controlled solely by the
PMC (not used as an axis controlled by the CNC) are not
affected by inch/metric input if the PIM bit (bit 0 of parameter
No. 8003) is specified accordingly. The current position
display, also, is not affected by inch/metric input.
4 For a PMC–controlled axis, manual absolute mode is
always set. If the PMC starts control of an axis after manual
intervention (manual continuous feed, manual handle feed,
etc.) is performed during automatic operation while manual
absolute mode is not set (*ABSM is set to 1), manual
absolute mode is set.
5 Under PMC axis control, all commands are handled as axis
commands. Even for the miscellaneous function, the
position check is effective.
6 When the CNC specifies the command of workpiece
coordinate system setting (G54 to G59) during an axial
movement by the PMC, a correct coordinate system cannot
be set.
Note
NOTE
1 The actual speed excluding the effect of the movement
along a PMC–controlled axis can be displayed if the PCF bit
(bit 1 of parameter No. 3105) is specified.
2 If an absolute pulse coder is used, a specified reference
position is retained in memory, even after the power is
turned off.
3 If the index table indexing function of the M series is used,
the PMC cannot control the fourth axis.
4 The individual output of the miscellaneous function is
provided by adding a signal for individual output. The timing
diagram of controlling and specifying the miscellaneous
function is not changed. The normal specifications of the
miscellaneous functions for PMC axis control function are
applied.
759
15.2
EXTERNAL DATA
INPUT
General The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC.
Signal name Signal code
Data signal for external data input (input) ED0 to ED15

Address signal for external data input (input) EA0 to EA6
Read signal for external data input (input) ESTB
Read completion signal for external data input EREND
(output)
Search completion signal for external data input ESEND
(output)
The basic external data input procedure is described below:

(1) The PMC sets address signals EA0 to EA6 that indicate the data type
and data signals ED0 to ED15.
(2) The PMC sets read signal ESTB to “1”.
(3) When the ESTB signal is set to “1”, the control unit reads the address.
(4)After reading the address, the control unit sets read completion signal
EREND to “1”.
(5) When the EREND signal is set to “1”, the PMC sets the ESTB signal
to 0.
(6) When the ESTB signal is set to “0”, the control unit sets the EREND
signal to 0.
This completes the data input procedure. New data can now be entered.
ED0 to 15
EA0 to 6
0 ms or
32 ms or more more
ESTB
EREND
Only for external program number search

ESEND
End of
search
760
Kind of data accessed by external data input
E ED15 to ED0
SEEE EEEE
No. Item
TAAA AAAA
15141312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B65 4 321 0
External program number Program number(BCD4 digits)

1 1 0 0 0 ××××
search 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
External tool compensa- Offset value(BCD 4 digits with sign)

2 1 0 0 1 ××××
tion ±0 to 7 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
External workpiece coordi- Shift value(BCD 4 digits with sign)
3 nate 1 0 1 0 axis code
system shift ±0 to 7 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
External machine coordi- Machine coordinate system shift value(binary)
4 1 0 1 1 axis code
nate system shift ±0 to 9999
Alarm No.(binary)
Alarm set 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 to 999
Alarm No.(binary)
Alarm clear 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 to 999
5 Message No.(binary)
Oper to tor message list 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 to 999
Message No.(binary)
Operator message clear 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 to 999
Message 1 1 0 0 0 ×1 1 character(Character code)
Substitute No. of parts No. of parts required(BDC4 digits)

1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
required 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
6
Substitute No. of parts No. of parts machined(BDC4 digits)
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
machined 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9
WARNING
Though bits EA4 to EA6 distinguish one set of data from
another, the PMC must be interlocked in order to prevent
other function data being fed during a process for which
they are invalid.
NOTE
Input an axis code according to the list below.
EA3 to EA0
Axis
3 2 1 0
1st axis 0 0 0 0
2nd axis 0 0 0 1
3rd axis 0 0 1 0
4th axis 0 0 1 1
761
1) External Program A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from the outside and is selected
Number Search in the CNC memory.
For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can
automatically select for execution the program corresponding to a
specific workpiece.
Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of the
mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state in MEM
mode.
The ESEND signal switches from “0” to “1” at the end of the external
program number search. This signal does not turn to “0” unless the cycle
start or reset signal is input, or another search is made. Use ESEND to
make a cycle start signal after the search.
NOTE
1 The external program number search is valid when
parameter ESR no. 6300#4=1.
2 The reset state is when the automatic operation lamp is off.
If the start button is pushed in the cycle operation stop or
hold state, search execution starts from the actual position
indicated by the pointer.
3 When there is not a program stored in memory
corresponding to the set program number, P/S alarm no. 59
will be activated.
4 Program search is not made if the program number is set to
“0”. When the start button is pushed, execution starts from
the position indicated by the pointer, instead.
2) External tool These signals provide for changing the tool compensation amount via the
compensation PMC. When the offset number is specified by a program, data input from
the PMC is added to the offset amount. The offset amount can also be used
as input data itself by specifying the input signal.
When the machine tool is equipped with automatic tools or workpiece

measuring functions, the offset amount can be corrected using this
function, by inputting the error from the correct value into the CNC via
PMC.
If the tool compensation amount is externally input when offset number

0 is specified in a program (a offset cancel) in T series, the workpiece
coordinate system shifts by the entered quantity. The external tool
compensation amount is 0 - "7.999mm or "0.7999 inch at a time.
762
Data specification method in external tool compensation (For M series)
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 ABS 0 0 0 s MSB LSB
/ i
INC g Offset amount
n
0 :+ Specified by BCD 4-digit code

sign
1 :– (0000 to 7999)
Specify “000”
0 : Incremental specification
(Input value is added to present compensation amount)
1 : Absolute specification
(Input value is replaced with present compensation amount)
Specify “001” for external tool offset
Data specification method in external tool compensation (For T series)
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
s
0 0 1 ABS W
i MSB LSB
/
/ X/Z/R g
INC Offset amount
G n
0 :+ Specified by BCD 4-digit code

sign
1 :– (0000A7999)
EA1 EA0 Description
0 0 Specification of X axis offset
0 1 Specification of Z axis offset

1 0 Specification of tool nose radius compensation amount
0 : Specification of tool wear offset amount

1 : Specification of tool geometry offset amount
0 : Incremental specification
(Input value is added to present compensation amount)
1 : Absolute specification
(Input value is replaced with present compensation amount)
Specify “001” for external tool offset
763
3) External workpiece The external workpiece coordinate system shift adjusts the workpiece
coordinate system coordinate system depending on the shift amount set via PMC. Each axis
shift (parameter No. 1220) has this shift amount, and it is added to all the
workpiece coordinate systems for use. The shift amount is not lost by cut
off of the power supply. It is not added incrementally, but each input shift
amount makes a new shift amount. The amount that can be input is
0-"7.999 mm or "0.7999 inch.
4) External machine The machine coordinate system can be shifted by inputting shift value.
coordinate system When the shift amount is input, compensation is immediately applied to
shift the corresponding axis and the machine starts operation. The position
accuracy can be improved by combining this function with the sensor.
The specification method for the axis to be shifted is the same as that for
the external workpiece coordinate system shift.
The compensation value is specified for the signals ED0 to ED15 by a
binary code ranging from 0 to "9.999. This compensation value should
be absolute and the amount which the machine actually moves on input
is the difference from the previously stored value. When a large amount
of compensation is applied at a time, an alarm such as “excessive error on
stop” may occur. In this case, input the compensation amount several
times.
5) External alarm (a) External alarm message

message The external alarm message holds the CNC under an alarm
condition by sending an alarm number from the external unit, as
well as a message that is displayed on the CRT screen of the CNC.
Up to four alarm numbers and messages can be sent at a time; the
alarm number ranges from 0 to 999, and the CNC displays it with
1000 added. The message for one alarm number can be up to 32
characters long. The alarm condition is reset by external data.
(b) External operator message
The external operator message sends the operator message and
number from the external unit to the CNC, with a display on the
CRT screen of the CNC.
Only one message can be transmitted, with a potential message
length of 255 characters. The alarm number ranges from 0 to 999;
from 0 to 99, the CNC adds 2000 to the number, while from 100
to 999 the number is not displayed, only the message is displayed.
Data specification method in external message

E E E E E E E
ED15 to ED0
Item A A A A A A A
(binary)
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Alarm set 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Alarm No.
Alarm clear 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Alarm No.
Operator mes- 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 Message No.
sage list
Operator mes- 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Message No.
sage clear
Message 1 0 0 0 × 1 1 Character
(Note)
764
NOTE
Two characters are sent at a time (see ISO code given in
Table below).
ED15 to ED8 . . . . . . Character code in 1st character.
ED7 to ED0 . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character.
If sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code
smaller than 20 and it will be ignored.
Character code table
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
0 0 0 0 SP 0 @ P –
0 0 0 1 ! 1 A Q #
0 0 1 0 I 2 B R V
0 0 1 1 # 3 C S W
0 1 0 0 $ 4 D T ”
0 1 0 1 % 5 E U ·
0 1 1 0 & 6 F V
0 1 1 1 ’ 7 G W
1 0 0 0 ( 8 H X
1 0 0 1 ) 9 I Y
1 0 1 0 * : J Z
1 0 1 1 + ; K [
1 1 0 0 , < L o
1 1 0 1 = = M ]
1 1 1 0 . > N ^ m
1 1 1 1 / ? O _ #
SP : Space code
765
6) Substituting No. of Substitution is possible for the No. of parts required and the No. of parts
parts required and No. machined.
of parts, machined Data specifiecation method for No. of parts required and
No. of parts machined.
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1
... 0
5
1 1 0 0 0 0 0/1 MSB LSB

Value of aprt nos.
BCD 4–digit code

(0000 to 9999)
0 : No. of parts required

1 : No. of parts machined
Set to 110000.
Signals
Data signals for external

data input ED0 to ED15
<G000, G001>
[Function] The signals indicate the entered data.
The use of the 16 code signals varies with the data type.
Address signals for

external data input
EA0 to EA6 <G002>
[Function] The signals indicate the type of the entered data.
Read signal for external

data input ESTB
<G002#7>
[Function] The signal reports that the address and data are set in external data input.
When the signal is set to “1”, the control unit reads the address and data
for external data input.
[Operation] The “basic procedure” describes the procedure for, and operation of, the
control unit when the signal turns to “1”.
766
Read completion signal

for external data input
EREND <F060#0>
[Function] The signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entered
data.
[Operation] The output condition and procedure are described in the “basic
procedure.”
Search completion
signal for external data
input ESEND <F060#1>
[Function] The signal reports that program number search, specified by external data
input, has been completed.
[Output condition] The signal is set to “1” when:
The program number search specified by external data input is completed.

· An automatic operation is started.
· A reset occurs.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0
G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F060 ESEND EREND
767
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 PSR

PSR Search for the program number of a protected program
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6300 ESR

ESR External program number search
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Alarm and Message

059 PROGRAM NUMBER In an external program number search

NOT FOUND or external workpiece number search,
a specified program number was not
found. Otherwise, a program specified
for searching is being edited in back-
ground processing. Check the program
number and external signal. Or discon-
tinue the background eiting.
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL Five or more alarms have generated in
ALARM MESSAGES external alarm message.
Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find
the cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT No alarm No. concerned exists in exter-
FOUND nal alarm message clear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. Small section data is erroneous in ex-
ALARM MSG ternal alarm message or external oper-
ator message. Check the PMC ladder
diagram.
768
15.3
EXTERNAL
WORKPIECE
NUMBER SEARCH
General When several part programs are stored in program storage memory, a
program can be searched with the workpiece number search signals PN1
to PN16 from the machine side.
When the cycle operation is actuated in the memory operation mode under
reset status, the workpiece number (program number) specified by PN1
to PN16 is searched and executed from the beginning.
Signal
Workpiece Number
Search Signal PN1, PN2,
PN4, PN8, PN16 <G009#0
to #4> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Select the number of a workpiece to be machined in the memory mode.
Five code signals are provided. These signals are set as binary code to
designate a workpiece number as follows:
Workpiece number search signal Workpiece
PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 number
0 0 0 0 0 00
0 0 0 0 1 01
0 0 0 1 0 02
0 0 0 1 1 03
0 0 1 0 0 04
0 0 1 0 1 05
0 0 1 1 0 06
0 0 1 1 1 07
0 1 0 0 0 08
0 1 0 0 1 09
0 1 0 1 0 10
0 1 0 1 1 11
0 1 1 0 0 12
0 1 1 0 1 13
0 1 1 1 0 14
0 1 1 1 1 15
769
Workpiece number search signal Workpiece

PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 number
1 0 0 0 0 16
1 0 0 0 1 17
1 0 0 1 0 18
1 0 0 1 1 19
1 0 1 0 0 20
1 0 1 0 1 21
1 0 1 1 0 22
1 0 1 1 1 23
1 1 0 0 0 24
1 1 0 0 1 25
1 1 0 1 0 26
1 1 0 1 1 27
1 1 1 0 0 28
1 1 1 0 1 29
1 1 1 1 0 30
1 1 1 1 1 31
Workpiece number 00 is used for special designation “no search”. Thus,

a workpiece number ranges from 01 to 31.
NOTE
These signals are also used to specify a file number for file
search during external program input. See Section 13.7,
“External Program Input.”
Expansion Workpiece
Number Search Signal
EPN0 to EPN13
<G024#0 to #7, G025#0
to #5>
[Function] Select the number of a workpiece to be machined in the memory operation
mode. Fourteen code signals are provided. These signals are set as binary
code to designate a workpiece number as follows:
770
Expansion workpiece number search signal

E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
P P P P P P P P P P P P P P Workpiece
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N number
1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3
...
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 9998
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 9999
Workpiece number 0 is used for special designation “no search”. Thus.

a workpiece number ranges from 1 to 9999.
These signals are enabled when parameter EPN (No. 3006#1) is 1. They
are used instead of work number search signals PN1 to PN16.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G009 PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G024 EPN7 EPN6 EPN5 EPN4 EPN3 EPN2 EPN1 EPN0
G025 EPN13 EPN12 EPN11 EPN10 EPN9 EPN8
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3006 EPN
[Data type] Bit

EPN When a program number is specified, external work number search
signals are used as follows:
0 : Work number search signals (PN1 to PN16) are used.
1 : Extended work number search signals (EPN1 to EPN13) are used.
Alarm and Message

059 PROGRAM NUMBER In an external program number search

NOT FOUND or external workpiece number search,
a specified program number was not
found. Otherwise, a program specified
for searching is being edited in back-
ground processing. Check the program
number and external signal. Or discon-
tinue the background eiting.
771
Note
NOTE
1 This function can be used only in memory operation. It
cannot be used during DNC operation and MDI operation.
2 Select the program number from O001 to O031 or O0001
to O9999.
3 Program numbers from O0001 to O9999 can be used.
However, programs corresponding to all the program
numbers do not have to be stored in memory.
4 When a program corresponding to the specified program
number is not stored in memory, an alarm (No. 059) is
activated when the start button is pressed.
5 Program search is performed only when the start button is
pressed in the reset state. When the CNC is in the
automatic operation stop state (single block stop, etc.) or
pause state (feedhold stop, etc.), program search is not
performed even if the start button is pressed and execution
is started from the point specified by the present execution
pointer.
6 To restart program halfway through, press the start button
after sequence number search in MEM mode. The
workpiece number search is not performed; program
execution starts from the block which is searched by
sequence number search, because the OP signal is set by
sequence number search in MEM mode and the CNC reset
state is released.
7 When the start button is pressed with all workpiece number
search signals are “0”, program search is not performed but
execution is started from the point specified by the present
execution pointer. To restart operation from the start of a
program which cannot be searched by this function, perform
the usual program number search operation (CRT/MDI
panel operation), turn all the workpiece number search
signals to “0” and press the start button
772
15.4
SPINDLE OUTPUT
CONTROL BY THE
PMC
General The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor,
connected by the optional spindle serial output/spindle analog output
function.
The first and second spindles all have their own individual interfaces. By
using a PMC ladder program, the user can control the spindles as desired.
This section describes how to use the PMC to control spindle rotation and
provides example applications.
Switching control This function can be used to specify the following:

⋅ Spindle motor speed (number of rotations)
⋅ Output polarity for each spindle motor (direction of rotation)
Usually, the CNC is used to control the speed and polarity of the first
spindle motor. If the multispindle control function is added, the CNC can
also control the second spindle motor.
This function allows the user to select whether the CNC or PMC is used
to control the speed and output polarity of the spindle motors.
Specifying the spindle The PMC can be used to specify the spindle motor speed upon executing
motor speed the following:
⋅ Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing an
SINDx signal
⋅ Setting the spindle motor speed data, calculated by the PMC, in spindle
control signal R01Ix to R12Ix
When controlled by the PMC, the spindle motor speed is not affected by
any signal (for example, the spindle speed override signal) or parameter
setting (for example, the maximum speed clamp parameter) related to the
spindle speed command of the CNC spindle control function.
→ If the multispindle control function is added, however, the spindle stop
signal *SSTPx <G0027, #3, #4> can be used to stop a PMC–
controlled spindle.
The spindle motor speed data is obtained from the following expression.
Its value can range from 0 to 4095:
Spindle motor speed

Spindle motor speed data = 4095
Remark) Usually, the spindle speed must be controlled. If a gear train is
used to connect the spindle to the spindle motor, first obtain the
maximum spindle speed at the maximum spindle motor speed.
773
Spindle speed
Spindle motor speed data = 4095
Maximum spindle speed
By using this expression, the spindle motor speed data can be
obtained easily.
Specifying the output The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when the
polarity for the spindle following are executed:
motor ⋅ Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing an
SSINx signal
⋅ Specifying the output polarity to the SGNx signal
S–code and SF signals To control the spindle, the PMC may require to read the S value specified
by the CNC.
If the spindle serial output/spindle analog control function is added (if the
PMC can control the spindle), the S–code signals <F022 to F025> and SF
signal <F007, #2> can be output only when many conditions, determined
by the CNC spindle control, are satisfied. In some cases, the signals
cannot be used under standard conditions.
Specify the related bits of parameter No. 3705 according to the desired
application, then use the S–code and SF signals.
Twelve code signals Twelve code signals corresponding to S value R01O to R12O <F036, #0
corresponding to the S to F037, #3> are output to the first spindle motor. The output data is
value (output) calculated from the results of the CNC spindle control. (See Section 9.3.)
Even while a spindle is subject to PMC control, an S command that is
issued to the CNC is converted to spindle output data and output.
The SIND signal determines whether the speed output command, issued
to the spindle motor, is obtained from the twelve code signals
corresponding to the S value, or from the R01I to R12I signals calculated
and specified by the PMC.
The use of this signal may simplify PMC ladder processing used to enable
PMC spindle control.
Sample application 1) Controlling the first and second spindles of a lathe system
→ Share the gear stages between the first and second spindles.
(If the first spindle uses two gears, for example, specify parameters
Nos. 3743 and 3744, thus enabling the use of gears 3 and 4 for the
second spindle.)
Perform the necessary setting to enable control of the first and second
spindles by the PMC.
To specify a rotation command for the first spindle, enter the gears for
the first spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data of the twelve code
signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the data as the speed
output command for the first spindle in the PMC control interface for
the first spindle.
774
To specify a rotation command for the second spindle, enter the gears
to be used for the second spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data
of the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the
data as the speed output command for the second spindle in the PMC
control interface for the second spindle.
Sample application 2) Using a lathe’s orientation function with the stop position of the serial
spindle specified externally, specifying the S value as the angle of the stop
position for spindle orientation after the spindle positioning mode has
been selected
→ Use those gears that are not being used for the first spindle.
(In this application, gear 4 is used to calculate the spindle position. Set
parameter No. 3744 to 360.)
Specify the M code used to set the spindle to positioning mode and
stop the spindle. Enter gear 4 in GR1 and GR2.
Then, specify a spindle positioning angle with the S command. (To
specify the position of 145 degrees, for example, specify S145;.)
Expression 145/360 4095 is calculated and the result is output to the
twelve code signals corresponding to the S value (output signal).
Enter the data in external stop position commands SHA00 to SHA11
<G078, #0 to G079, #3> and perform the orientation.
Signal
PMC spindle control signals

For the first spindle: SIND, SSIN, SGN <G033#7, #6, #5>
R01I to R12I <G032#0 to G033#3>
For the second spindle: SIND2, SSIN2, SGN2 <G035#7, #6, #5>
R01I2 to R12I2 <G034#0 to G035#3>

[Function] The above signals enable the control of a spindle motor by issuing
commands from the PMC. Both the speed and polarity of the spindle
motor (direction of rotation) can be controlled.
The speed command and polarity are usually specified by the CNC. The
use of these signals allows the user to select whether the speed and
polarity are controlled by the CNC or PMC.
Even if the multispindle control function is not provided, these signals
allow the second or third spindle to be controlled.
When the multispindle control function and type A are being used (if the
MSI bit, bit 2 of parameter No. 3709, is set to 0), the signals for the second
spindle cannot be used.
775
D Details of the signals D Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SINDx
→ The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed is
controlled by the CNC or PMC.
1: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands
(R01Ix to R12Ix) issued by the PMC.
0: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands
issued by the CNC. The spindle speed specified with the S
command is output.
D Signals used to input the spindle motor speed command issued by the
PMC R01Ix to R12Ix
→ If the PMC is being used to control the spindle motor speed command,
specify, in binary format, the value obtained using the following
expression.
Spindle motor speed
Value to be specified = 4095
(Spindle motor speed)
Maximum
spindle motor
speed
0 min–1 Code signal

0 4095
D Signal used to select the polarity of the spindle motor speed command,
SSINx
→ The above signal selects whether the output polarity of the spindle
motor speed command is controlled by the CNC or PMC.
1 : The spindle motor is controlled according to the polarity command
(SGNx) issued by the PMC.
0 : The CNC controls the polarity. The polarity is determined by the
TCW and CWM bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No. 3706) and the
M03 or M04 command.
D Signal used to specify the polarity of the spindle motor selected by the
PMC, SGNx
→ If the PMC is used to control the output polarity of the spindle motor
speed command, specify the polarity with this signal.
1 : The output polarity of the spindle is negative.
0 : The output polarity of the spindle is positive.
776
Twelve code signals

corresponding to the S
value R01O to R12O
<G036#0 to G037#3>
[Function] The S value, specified in the CNC part program, is converted to the speed
output to the spindle motor that is required to control the connected
spindle. The converted value is sent to the PMC with twelve code signals,
in proportion to the spindle motor speed output.
The speed data, the final result of the CNC spindle control, is output to
the spindle motor after the spindle gear ratio, spindle speed override,
speed clamp, conversion of the surface speed into the spindle speed by the
constant surface speed control command, and other data have been
considered.
(See Section 9.3 for an explanation of the relationship between the CNC
spindle control and the speed output to the spindle motor.)
Code signal
4095
(Speed output to the

spindle motor)
0
Maximum spindle
0 min–1
motor speed
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3701 SS2
[Data type] Bit

0 : 1 spindle
1 : 2 spindles
777
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 EVS ESF
SFA NSF ESF

ESF When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is
used, and the constant surface speed control function is used or bit 7
NOTE
For the T series, this parameter is enabled when bit 4 (EVS)
of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1. For the M series, SF is not
output:
(1) For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
control mode
(2) When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
NOTE
surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command
used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping
(G50S–––;) depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of
parameter No. 3705.
NSF: When an S code command is issued in constant surface–speed control,

0 : SF is output.
1 : SF is not output.
778
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3709 MSI

MSI In multi–spindle control, the SIND signal is valid:
0 : Only when the first spindle is selected. (SIND signal for 2nd and 3rd
spindle become invalid)
1 : For each spindle irrespective of whether the spindle is selected. (Each
spindle has its own SIND signal.)
Note
NOTE
1 If the spindle fails to move after the PMC issues the spindle
motor speed command, check the following:
Type A is selected (the MSI bit, bit 2 of parameter No. 3709,
is set to 0) when the multispindle control function is used.
→ The second spindle cannot be controlled. The first
spindle can be controlled only when the spindle selection
signal SWS1 is set to “1”.
The spindle stop signal for each axis is set to “0” when the
multispindle control function is being used.
→ Spindle stop signal for each axis *SSTPx <G027, #3, #4>
stops the spindle.
M03/M04 is not specified when the CNC is being used to
control the output polarity.
→ If the TCW bit, bit 7 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 1, the
M03/M04 command issued to the CNC changes the
output polarity for the spindle motor. If no M03/M04
command is specified after the CNC is turned on, the
specified speed output is not sent to the spindle motor
because the output polarity has not been determined.
2 The SF signal indicates that output of the S code to the PMC
has been completed. The signal does not indicate the end
of the command for specifying the spindle speed.
3 For an explanation of connecting the second spindle, see
Sections 9.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE
ANALOG OUTPUT and 9.9 MULTI–SPINDLE CONTROL.
4 If the multispindle control function is not being used, the
CNC does not issue any commands to the second spindle.
The output polarity is controlled by the SGNx signal. It is not
affected by the SSINx signal.
The speed output to the spindle motor can be controlled
only when the SINDx signal is set to “1”.
779
15.5
EXTERNAL KEY
INPUT
General MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface
signals. This allows the CNC to be controlled in the same way as when
the operator performs MDI key operation.
Control is realized by exchanging the following interface signals between

the PMC and CNC:
Signal name Abbreviation

External key input mode selection signal (input) ENBKY
Key code signals (input) EKC0 to EKC7
Key code read signal (input) EKSET
Key code read completion signal (output) EKENB
Key input disable signal (output) INHKY
Program screen display mode signal (output) PRGDPL
The processing flow in the PMC is shown below.
(START)
1) Set the external key input control mode.

Set ENBKY = 1
no
< EKSET = EKENB > 2) Check whether a key code can be set.
yes
< INHKY = 0 > no
yes
3) When a key code can be set:
Set key code (1) Set the key code to be input.
(2) Invert the (EKSET) signal to instruct the CNC to
read the key code.
Invert EKSET
no 4) Repeat the operation for the key data to be input

< Has key input ended? >
yes
5) After reporting the last data, check that the CNC has
no read the key data.
< EKSET = EKENB >
yes
< INHKY = 0 > no
yes
6) Release external key input control mode.
Set ENBKY = 0
(END)
780
NOTE
Read processing is controlled by exclusive–ORing (XOR)
the key code read signal (EKSET) with the read completion
signal (EKENB). When the EKSET and EKENB signals
differ in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Once
reading has been completed, the CNC inverts the EKENB
signal to match its logic with that of the EKSET signal.
In the PMC, on the other hand, a new key code cannot be
set while the EKSET and EKENB signals differ in their logic.
Signals
External key input mode

selection signal
ENBKY <G066#1>
[Function] While this signal is turned on “1”, external key input control is enabled.
In external key input control mode, any MDI key operations are ignored.
Key code read signal

EKSET <G066#7>

[Function] This signal instructs the CNC to read the input key code.
Key code signals

EKC0 to EKC7 <G098>

[Function] These signals set an input key code. (See the MDI key code table.)
Key input disable signal

INHKY<F053#0>

[Function] While this signal is “1”, no key code is accepted in external key input
control mode.
781
Program screen display

mode signal PRGDPL
<F053#1>

[Function] This signal is on “1” while the CNC is displaying a program screen.
Key code read

completion signal
EKENB <F053#7>
[Function] This signal reports that the CNC has read a key code.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G066 EKSET ENBKY
G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F053 EKENB PRGDPL INHKY
MDI key code table

Codes in the table are given in hexadecimal. For example, A
corresponds to 41H in hexadecimal. RESET corresponds to 90H in
hexadecimal.
(Note) is explained below:
NOTE
Handling of the soft keys
[F0] to [F4], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the key
codes for the soft keys. They are associated with the MDI
keys as shown below.
Key configuration for 7.2″/8.4″ LCD, or etc. : 5 keys + 2 keys
([F0] to [F4] and [FR], [FL])
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[FL] [F4] [F3] [F2] [F1] [F0] [FR]
782
MDI Key Code Table(00H–7FH)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Space 0 @ P
1 1 A Q
2 2 B R
3 # 3 C S
4 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 & 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 ( 8 H X
9 ) 9 I Y
A ; * J Z
(EOB)
B + K [
C , L
D – = M ]
E . N
F / ? O
783
MDI Key Code Table(80H–0FFH)

8 9 A B C D E F
0 RESET [F0]
(Note2)
1 [F1]
(Note2)
2 [F2]
(Note2)
3 [F3]
(Note2)
4 INSERT [F4]
(Note2)
5 DELETE [F5]
(Note2)
[F6]
6 CAN ALTER
(Note2)
7 [F7]
(Note2)
8 Cursor INPUT POS [F8]

→ (Note2)
9 Cursor PROG [F9]

← (Note2)
OFFSET
A Cursor HELP SET-
↓ TING
B Cursor SYSTEM
↑
C MES-
SAEG
D GRAPH
(CUSTOM)
(Note1)
E PAGE CUSTOM [FR]

↓ (Note1) (Note2)
F PAGE FAPT [FL]

↑ (Note2)
784
15.6
DIRECT OPERATION
BY Personal
computer connected
to the HSSB
General Activating memory operation in memory operation mode (MEM) with

the direct operation select signal set to 1 enables machining (direct
operation) while reading a program stored in the personal computer
connected to the HSSB.
Signal
Direct operation select

signal DMMC <G042#7>
[Function] Selects the mode (direct operation mode) for performing machining while
reading a program stored in the Personal computer connected to the
HSSB.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
· When memory operation mode (MEM) is not selected, the control unit
ignores this signal.
· When memory operation mode (MEM) is selected, the control unit
selects direct operation mode and enables direct operation.
Reference Item
FANAC OPEN CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL (DNC Operation
Management Package) (B–63214EN)
785
APPENDIX
B–63503EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
789
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63503EN–1/01
A.1
LIST OF ADDRESSES
A.1.1 Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows:
List of Addresses
CNC PMC MT
G000 or X1000 or
later later
Built in I/O
F000 or (Basic) Y1000 or
later later
X 000 or
later
FANUC
I/O Link
(Optional) Y 000 or
later
Following shows table of addresses:

In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signals
are covered with shade ( ) in the signal address figure as shown
below. This means either T series or M series does not have this signal.
Upper part is for T series and lower part is for M series.
[Example 1]
Signals EXLM and ST are common signals, STLK is for T series only
and RLSOT are for M series only.
#7 #6 #2 #1 #0
T series
G007 RLSOT SA ST STLK
M series
790
D T series
MT → PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X1000
X1001
X1002
X1003
X1004 SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE (T series)
SKIP ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE (M series)
X1005
X1006
X1007
X1008 *ESP
X1009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
X1010
X1011
NOTE
1 The signals indicated in the box (heavy solid lines) are for
high–speed receivers as well as for a group with a
switchable common.
2 Address X1004 allows common switching.
The DI signals other than *ESP can be used as
general–purpose DI signals if appropriate functions are not
used.
791
PMC → MT
Address Bit number
Y1000
Y1001
Y1002
Y1003
Y1004
Y1005
Y1006
Y1007
792
PMC → CNC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
G003
G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN
G005 BFIN AFL BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN
G006 SKIPP OVC *ABSM SRN
G007 RLSOT EXLM *FLWU RLSOT3 ST STLK
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT
G009 PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
G013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0
G014 ROV2 ROV1
G015
G016 F1D
G017
G018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A
G019 RT MP2 MP1 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
G020
G021
G022
G023
G024
793
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G025
G026
G027 CON *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS2 SWS1
G028 PC2SLC SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1
G029 *SSTP SOR SAR GR31 GR21
G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0
G031
G034 R08I2 R07I2 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2
G035 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R12I2 R11I2 R10I2 R09I2
G036
G037
G038 *BECLP *BEUCP SPPHS SPSYC
G039 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0
G040 WOSET PRC OFN6
G041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HS1IA
G042 DMMC HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA
G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1
G044 MLK BDT1
G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2
G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK
G047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01
G048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP
G049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0
794
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G050 *TLV9 *TLV8
G051
G052
G053 CDZ SMZ UINT TMRON
G056
G057
G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD MINP
G059
G060
G061 RGTSP2 RGTSP1 RGTAP
G062 *CRTOF
G063
G064
G065
G066 EKSET ENBKY IGNVRY
G067
G068
G069
G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
G071 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
G072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRIDA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
G073 MPOFA SLVA MORCMA
G074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
795
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB
G077 MPOFB SLVB MORCMB
G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08
G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
G081 SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08
G082
G083
G084
G085
G086
G087
G088
G089
G090
G091
G092
G093
G094
G095
G096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
G097
G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
G099
796
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G100 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G101
G102 -J4 -J3 -J2 -J1
G103
G104
G105
G106 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
G107
G108 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1
G109
G110 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1
G111
G112 -LM4 -LM3 -LM2 -LM1
G113
G114 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1
G115
G116 *-L4 *-L3 *-L2 *-L1
G117
G118 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
G119
G120 *-ED4 *-ED3 *-ED2 *-ED1
G121
G122
G123
797
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G124
G125
G126 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1
G127
G128
G129
G130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
G131
G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
G133
G134 -MIT4 -MIT3 -MIT2 -MIT1
G135
G136 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1
G137
G139
G140 SYNCJ4 SYNCJ3 SYNCJ2 SYNCJ1
G141
G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA EFINA
G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A
798
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E
G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E
G152
G153
G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB EFINB
G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B
G162
G163
G164
G165
G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC EFINC
G167 EMSBKC EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C
799
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G174
G175
G176
G177
G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD EFIND
G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D
G186
G187
G188
G189
G190
G191
G192 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1
G193
G194
G195
G196
G197
G198 NPOS4 NPOS3 NPOS2 NPOS1
800
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
G199
G200
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
G206
G207
G208
G209
G210
G211
G212
G213
G214
G215
G216
G217
G218
G219
G220
G221
G222
801
CNC → PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL
F002 MDRN CUT SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH
F003 MTCHIN MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH MINC
F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1
F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 MBDT6 MBDT5 MBDT4 MBDT3 MBDT2
F006
F007 BF BF TF SF EFD MF
F008 MF3 MF2 EF
F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30
F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
F014 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200
F015 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208
F016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
F017 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
F018
F019
F020
F021
F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
802
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00
F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08
F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16
F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24
F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
F031 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08
F032 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16
F033 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24
F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O
F035 SPAL
F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O
F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O
F038 ENB3 ENB2 SUCLP SCLP
F039
F042
F043
F044 SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY FSCSL
F045 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
F046 MORA2A MORA1A PORA2A SLVSA RCFNA RCHPA CFINA CHPA
F047 INCSTA PC1DEA
F048
F049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
803
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB
F051 INCSTB PC1DEB
F052
F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY
F060 ESEND EREND
F061 BCLP BUCLP
F062 PRTSF
F063 PSYN
F064 TLCHI TLNW TLCH
F065 RGSPM RGSPP
F066 PECK2 G08MD
F067
F068
F069
F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01
F071 PSW10 PSW09
F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
F074
804
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO
F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O
F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO
F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O
F081 - J4O + J4O - J3O + J3O - J2O + J2O - J1O + J1O
F082
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F090 ABTSP2 ABTSP1 ABTQSV
F091
F092
F093
F095
F096 ZP24 ZP23 ZP22 ZP21
F097
F098 ZP34 ZP33 ZP32 ZP31
F099
805
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F100 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41
F101
F102 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1
F103
F104 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1
F105
F106 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1
F107
F108 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1
F109
F110
F111
F112 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1
F113
F114 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1
F115
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1
F121
F122 HDO0
F123
F124
806
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129 *EAXSL EOV0
F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
F131 EABUFA EMFA
F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
F134 EABUFB EMFB
F136 EBSYC EOTNC EOTPC EGENC EDENC EIALC ECKZC EINPC
F137 EABUFC EMFC
F139 EBSYD EOTND EOTPD EGEND EDEND EIALD ECKZD EINPD
F140 EABUFD EMFD
F143
F144
F146
F147
F149
807
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F150
F152
F153
F154
F155
F156
F157
F158
F159
F160
F161
F162
F163
F164
F165
F166
F167
F168
F169
F170
F171
F172
F173
F174
808
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F175
F176
F177
F178
F179
F180 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1
F181
F182 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1
F183
F184
F185
F186
F187
F188
F189
F190
F191
F192
F193
F194
F195
809
A.2
SIGNAL SUMMARY
A.2.1
Signal Summary f : Available
– : Unavailable
(In Order of Functions)
T M
Function Signal name Symbol Address Section
series series
External read start signal EXRD G058#1 f f
External punch start signal EXWT G058#3 f f
External I/O device External read/punch stop signal EXSTP G058#2 f f

control
13.2
Background editing signal BGEACT F053#4 f f
Read/punch busy signal RPBSY F053#2 f f
Read/punch alarm signal RPALM F053#3 f f
Alarm signal AL F001#0 f f

Alarm signal 2.4
Battery alarm signal BAL F001#2 f f
Servo axis abnormal load detected

ABTQSV F090#0 f f
signal
Abnormal load First–spindle abnormal load detected

ABTSP1 F090#1 f f 2.9
detection signal
Second–spindle abnormal load

ABTSP2 F090#2 f f
detected signal
Position display
Position display neglect signals NPOS1 to NPOS4 G198 f f 12.1.10
neglect
2nd M function code signals M200 to M215 F014 to F015 f f

Multiple M 3rd M function code signals M300 to M315 F016 to F017 f f
commands in a 8.3
single block 2nd M function strobe signal MF2 F008#4 f f
3rd M function strobe signal MF3 F008#5 f f
Inch/metric
Inch input signal INCH F002#0 f f 11.4
conversion
B–axis clamp signal BCLP F061#1 — f
Index table indexing B–axis clamp completion signal *BECLP G038#7 — f

(M series)
11.9
B–axis unclamp signal BUCLP F061#0 — f
B–axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP G038#6 — f
In–position check In–position signals INP1 to INP4 F104 f f 7.2.5.1

F 1–digit feed
F 1–digit feed selection signal F1D G016#7 — f 7.1.5
(M series)
Error detection
Error detection signal SMZ G053#6 f — 7.2.5.3
(T series)
*+L1 to *+L4 G114 f f

Overtravel signal Overtravel signals 2.3.1
*–L1 to *–L4 G116 f f
Override cancel Override cancel signal OVC G006#4 f f 7.1.6.3

Feedrate override Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 G012 f f 7.1.6.2
810
T M
series series
Optional block Optional block skip signals BDT1, BDT2 to BDT9 G044#0, G045 f f
skip/addition of MBDT1, MBDT2 to 5.5
optional block skip Optional block skip check signals G004#0, F005 f f
MBDT9
External key input mode selection

ENBKY G066#1 f f
signal
Key code signals EKC0 to EKC7 G098 f f
External key input Key code read signal EKSET G066#7 f f 15.5
Key code read completion signal EKENB F053#7 f f
Key input disable signal INHKY F053#0 f f
Program screen display mode signal PRGDPL F053#1 f f
*+ED1 to *+ED4 G118 f f

External deceleration External deceleration signals 7.1.8
*–ED1 to *–ED4 G120 f f
Data signals for external data input ED0 to ED15 G000, G001 f f
Address signals for external data input EA0 to EA6 G002#0 to #6 f f
Read signal for external data input ESTB G002#7 f f

External data input 15.2
Read completion signal for external
EREND F060#0 f f
data input
Search completion signal for external

ESEND F060#1 f f
data input
External motion
External operation signal EF F008#0 — f 11.7
function (M series)
External program
External program input start signal MINP G058#0 f f 13.3
input
External workpiece PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8,

Workpiece number search signals G009#0 to 4 f f 15.3
number search PN16
Expansion
Expansion workpiece number search G024#0 to #7
workpiece number EPN0 to EPN13 f f 15.3
signals G025#0 to #5
search signal
Input signals for custom macro UI000 to UI015 G054, G055 f f
Custom macro signal UO000 to UO015 F054, F055 f f 11.5.1

Output signals for custom macro
UO100 to UO131 F056 to F059 f f
Target part count reached signal PRTSF F062#7 f f

Run hour and part
count display General–purpose integrating meter 12.1.11
TMRON G053#0 f f
start signal
Screen
erase/automatic Automatic screen erase disable signal *CRTOF G062#1 f f 12.1.17
screen erase
Simple synchronous axis selection

SYNC1 to SYNC4 G138 f f
signals
Simple synchronous
control
1.6
Simple synchronous manual feed axis
SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ4 G140 — f
selection signals
811
T M
series series
Tool change signal TLCH F064#0 f f
Tool change reset signal TLRST G048#7 f f
Individual tool change signal TLCHI F064#2 — f
Individual tool change reset signal TLRST IG048#6 — f
Tool skip signal TLSKP G048#5 f f

Tool life management 10.3
New tool selection signal TLNW F064#1 f f
TL01 to TL128 G047#0 to #7 — f

Tool group number selection signals
TL01 to TL16 G047#0 to #4 f —
G049#0 to
Tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 — f
G050#1
XAE X1004#0 f f
Automatic tool length
YAE X1004#1 — f
measurement (M
Measuring position reached signals 14.2
series)/automatic ZAE X1004#2 — f
tool offset (T series)
ZAE X1004#1 f —
Tool offset value write mode selection

GOQSM G039#7 f —
signal
+MIT1, +MIT2 X1004#2, #4 f —

Tool offset value write signals
–MIT1, –MIT2 X1004#3, #5 f —
Direct input of tool
offset value OFN0 to OFN5, G039#0 to #5,
Tool offset number selection signals f — 14.4.2
measured B (T OFN6 G040#0
series)
Workpiece coordinate system shift
WOQSM G039#6 f —
value write mode selection signal
Workpiece coordinate system shift

WOSET G040#7 f —
value write signal
Input of tool offset

value measured A (T Position record signal PRC G040#6 f — 14.4.1
series)
Miscellaneous function completion

MFIN G005#0 f f
signal
Spindle function completion signal SFIN G005#2 f f
Tool function completion signal TFIN G005#3 f f
BFIN G005#4 f —
2nd auxiliary function completion signal
High–speed M/S/T/B BFIN G005#7 — f
interface 8.4
2nd M function completion signal MFIN2 G004#4 f f
3rd M function completion signal MFIN3 G004#5 f f
External operation signal for

EFD F007#1 — f
high–speed interface
External operation function completion

EFIN G005#1 — f
signal
High–speed skip
High–speed skip status signals HDO0 F122 #0 f f 14.3.2
signal
Canned cycle
(M series)/canned
Tapping signal TAP F001#5 f f 11.6
cycle for hole
machining (T series)
812
T M
series series
Servo off
Servo off signals SVF1 to SVF4 G126 f f 1.2.7
(mechanical handle)
Cycle start signal ST G007#2 f f
Feed hold signal *SP G008#5 f f
Cycle start/feed hold Automatic operation signal OP F000#7 f f 5.1

Cycle start lamp signal STL F000#5 f f
Feed hold lamp signal SPL F000#4 f f
Cs contour control change signal CON G027#7 f f

Cs contour control Cs contour control change completion 9.8
FSCSL F044#1 f f
signal
Outputting the Axis moving signals MV1 to MV4 F102 f f

movement state of 1.2.4
an axis Axis moving direction signals MVD1 to MVD4 F106 f f
Actual spindle speed

Actual spindle speed signals AR0 to AR15 F040, F041 f — 9.6
output
Constant surface
Constant surface speed signal CSS F002#2 f f 9.4
speed control
Spindle stop completion signal SPSTP G028#6 f —
Spindle unclamp signal SUCLP F038#1 f —
Spindle positioning Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPF G028#4 f — 9.7

Spindle clamp signal SCLP F038#0 f —
Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPF G028#5 f —
G078#0 to
SHA00 to SHA11 f f
G079#3
Spindle orientation external stop
Spindle orientation 9.12
position command signals G080#0 to
SHB00 to SBH11 f f
G081#3
Torque limit command LOW signals TLMLA G070#0 f f

(serial spindle) TLMLB G074#0 f f
Torque limit command HIGH signals TLMHA G070#1 f f

(serial spindle) TLMHB G074#1 f f
CTH1A, CTH2A G070#3, #2 f f

Clutch/gear signals (serial spindle)
CTH1B, CTH2B G074#3, #2 f f
SRVA G070#4 f f
CCW command signals (serial spindle)
Spindle serial SRVB G074#4 f f
output/spindle 9.2
analog output SFRA G070#5 f f
CW command signals (serial spindle)
SFRB G074#5 f f
Orientation command signals ORCMA G070#6 f f

(serial spindle) ORCMB G074#6 f f
MRDYA G070#7 f f
Machine ready signals (serial spindle)
MRDYB G074#7 f f
ARSTA G071#0 f f
Alarm reset signals (serial spindle)
ARSTB G075#0 f f
813
T M
series series
*ESPA G071#1 f f
Emergency stop signals (serial spindle)
*ESPB G075#1 f f
Spindle selection signals SPSLA G071#2 f f

(serial spindle) SPSLB G075#2 f f
Power line switch completion signals MCFNA G071#3 f f

(serial spindle) MCFNB G075#3 f f
Soft start/stop cancel signals SOCNA G071#4 f f

(serial spindle) SOCNB G075#4 f f
INTGA G071#5 f f
Speed integral signals (serial spindle)
INTGB G075#5 f f
Output switch request signals RSLA G071#6 f f

(serial spindle) RSLB G075#6 f f
Power line status check signals RCHA G071#7 f f

(serial spindle) RCHB G075#7 f f
Orientation stop position change INDXA G072#0 f f

command signals (serial spindle) INDXB G076#0 f f
Rotational direction command signals ROTAA G072#1 f f

for orientation stop position change
Spindle serial (serial spindle) ROTAB G076#1 f f
output/spindle 9.2
analog output Shortcut command signals for NRROA G072#2 f f
orientation stop position change
(serial spindle) NRROB G076#2 f f
Differential speed mode command DEFMDA G072#3 f f

signals (serial spindle) DEFMDB G076#3 f f
OVRIDA G072#4 f f
Analog override signals (serial spindle)
OVRIDB G076#4 f f
Incremental command externally set INCMDA G072#5 f f

orientation signals (serial spindle) INCMDB G076#5 f f
Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact MFNHGA G072#6 f f

status signals (serial spindle) MFNHGB G076#6 f f
Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact RCHHGA G072#7 f f

status signals (serial spindle) RCHHGB G076#7 f f
Magnetic sensor orientation command MORCMA G073#0 f f

signals (serial spindle) MORCMB G077#0 f f
Subordinate operation mode command SLVA G073#1 f f

signals (serial spindle) SLVB G077#1 f f
Motor power cutoff command signals MPOFA G073#2 f f

(serial spindle) MPOFB G077#2 f f
814
T M
series series
ALMA F045#0 f f
Alarm signals (serial spindle)
ALMB F049#0 f f
SSTA F045#1 f f
Speed zero signals (serial spindle)
SSTB F049#1 f f
SDTA F045#2 f f
Speed detection signals (serial spindle)
SDTB F049#2 f f
SARA F045#3 f f
Speed arrival signals (serial spindle)
SARB F049#3 f f
LDT1A F045#4 f f
Load detection signals 1 (serial spindle)
LDT1B F049#4 f f
LDT2A F045#5 f f
Load detection signals 2 (serial spindle)
LDT2B F049#5 f f
TLMA F045#6 f f
Torque limit signals (serial spindle)
TLMB F049#6 f f
Orientation completion signals ORARA F045#7 f f

(serial spindle) ORARB F049#7 f f
Power line switch signals CHPA F046#0 f f

Spindle serial (serial spindle) CHPB F050#0 f f
output/spindle 9.2
analog output Spindle switch completion signals CFINA F046#1 f f
(serial spindle) CFINB F050#1 f f
RCHPA F046#2 f f
Output switch signals (serial spindle)
RCHPB F050#2 f f
Output switch completion signals RCFNA F046#3 f f

(serial spindle) RCFNB F050#3 f f
Subordinate operation status signals SLVSA F046#4 f f

(serial spindle) SLVSB F050#4 f f
Position coder orientation proximity PORA2A F046#5 f f

signal (serial spindle) PORA2B F050#5 f f
Magnetic sensor orientation completion MORA1A F046#6 f f

signals (serial spindle) MORA1B F050#6 f f
Magnetic sensor orientation proximity MORA2A F046#7 f f

signals (serial spindle) MORA2B F050#7 f f
Position coder one–rotation signal PC1DEA F047#0 f f

detection status signals (serial spindle) PC1DEB F051#0 f f
Incremental orientation mode signals INCSTA F047#1 f f

(serial spindle) INCSTB F051#1 f f
815
T M
series series
Spindle stop signal *SSTP G029#6 f f
Spindle orientation signal SOR G029#5 f f
Spindle speed override signals SOV0 to SOV7 G030 f f
Spindle speed arrival signal SAR G029#4 f f

Spindle speed
control Spindle enable signal ENB F001#4 f f 9.3
Gear selection signals (output) GR1O, GR2O, GR3O F034#0 to #2 — f
Gear selection signals (input) GR1, GR2 G028#1, #2 f f
F036#0 to
S 12–bit code signals R01O to R12O f f
F037#3
Spindle speed Spindle fluctuation detection alarm

SPAL F035#0 f f 9.5
fluctuation detection signal
Spindle synchronous control signal SPSYC G038#2 f f
Spindle phase synchronous control

SPPHS G038#3 f f
signal
Spindle synchronous speed control

Spindle synchronous FSPSY F044#2 f f
completion signal 9.11
control
Spindle phase synchronous control
FSPPH F044#3 f f
completion signal
Spindle synchronous control alarm

SYCAL F044#4 f f
signal
HS1A to HS1D G018#0 to #3 f f

Manual handle feed axis selection
HS2A to HS2D G018#4 to #7 f f
signals
Manual handle feed HS3A to HS3D G019#0 to #3 — f 3.2
Manual handle feed amount selection

MP1, MP2 G019#4, #5 f f
signals (incremental feed signals)
HS1IA to HS1ID G041#0 to #3 f f

Manual handle Manual handle interrupt axis selection
HS2IA to HS2ID G041#4 to #7 f f 3.3
interrupt signals
HS3IA to HS3ID G042#0 to #3 — f
Manual reference position return

ZRN G043#7 f f
selection signal
Manual reference position return

MREF F004#5 f f
selection check signal
Manual reference
Reference position return deceleration 4.1
position return *DEC1 to *DEC4 X1009 f f
signal
Reference position return end signal ZP1 to ZP4 F094 f f
Reference position establishment

ZRF1 to ZRF4 F120 f f
signal
Feed axis and direction selection +J1 to +J4 G100 f f

signals –J1 to –J4 G102 f f
Jog feed/incremental
feed
3.1
Manual feedrate override signals *JV0 to *JV15 G010, G011 f f
Manual rapid traverse selection signals RT G019#7 f f
CNC ready signal MA F001#7 f f

CNC ready signal 2.2
Servo ready signal SA F000#6 f f
816
T M
series series
Small hole peck Overload torque signal SKIP X1004#7 — f

drilling cycle Small hole peck drilling–in–progress 11.13
(M series) PECK2 F066#5 — f
signal
Rapid traversing signal RPDO F002#1 f f

Status output signal 2.7
Cutting feed signal CUT F002#6 f f
Single block signal SBK G046#1 f f

Single block 5.3.3
Single block check signal MSBK F004#3 f f
SKIP X1004#7 f f
Skip function Skip signals 14.3.1
SKIPP G006#6 f —
Start lock signal STLK G007#1 f —
Interlock signal *IT G008#0 f f
Interlock signal for each axis *IT1 to *IT4 G130 f f
Manual feed interlock signal for each

+MIT1, +MIT2 X1004#2, #4 f —
Start lock/interlock axis and direction 2.5
Manual feed interlock signal for each
–MIT1, –MIT2 X1004#3, #5 f —
axis and direction
Interlock signal for each axis and +MIT1 to +MIT4 G132#0 to #3 — f

direction –MIT1 to –MIT4 G134#0 to #3 — f
Stored stroke limit change signal EXLM G007#6 f f
+LM1 to +LM4 G110 — f

Stored stroke limit Stroke limit external setting signals 2.3.2
–LM1 to –LM4 G110 — f
Stroke limit release signal RLSOT G007#7 — f
Stored stroke limit

Stroke limit 3 release signal RLSOT3 G007#4 f — 2.3.3
2, 3
Look–ahead control mode signal G08MD F066#0 — f 7.1.11
(M series)
Software operator’s panel signal (MD1) MD1O F073#0 f f
Software operator’s panel signal (ZRN) ZRNO F073#4 f f
Software operator’s panel signals F081#0, #2, #4,

+J1O to +J4O f f
(+J1 to +J4) #6
Software operator’s Software operator’s panel signals F081#1, #3, #5,

–J1O to –J4O f f 12.1.14
panel (–J1 to –J4) #7
Software operator’s panel signal (RT) RTO F077#6 f f
Software operator’s panel signal

HS1AO F077#0 f f
(HS1A)

HS1BO F077#1 f f
(HS1B)

HS1CO F077#2 f f
(HS1C)
817
T M
series series

HS1DO F077#3 f f
(HS1D)

MP1O F076#0 f f
(MP1)

MP2O F076#1 f f
(MP2)
Software operator’s panel signals (*JV0

*JVO0 to *JV15O F079, F080 f f
to *JV15)
Software operator’s panel signals

*FV0O to *FV7O F078 f f
(*FV0 to *FV7)

ROV1O F076#4 f f
(ROV1)
Software operator’s
panel
12.1.14
ROV2O F076#5 f f
(ROV2)
Software operator’s panel signal (BDT) BDTO F075#2 f f
Software operator’s panel signal (SBK) SBKO F075#3 f f
Software operator’s panel signal (MLK) MLKO F075#4 f f
Software operator’s panel signal (DRN) DRNO F075#5 f f
Software operator’s panel signals

KEYO F075#6 f f
(KEY1 to KEY4)
Software operator’s panel signal (*SP) SPO F075#7 f f
Software operator’s panel

OUT0 to OUT7 F072 f f
general–purpose switch signals
2nd reference position return

ZP21 to ZP24 F096 f f
completion signals
Second reference
position return/3rd, 3rd reference position return
ZP31 to ZP34 F098 f f 4.5
4th reference completion signals
position return
4th reference position return
ZP41 to ZP44 F100 f f
completion signals
Canned cycle (M
series)/multiple
repetitive turning Chamfering signal CDZ G053#7 f — 11.8
canned cycle
(T series)
Butt–type reference
Torque limit reached signals for
position return CLRCH1 to CLRCH4 F180 f f 4.6
butt–type reference position setting
setting
DNC operation selection signal DNCI G043#5 f f

DNC operation DNC operation selection confirmation 5.9
MRMT F003#4 f f
signal
Dry run signal DRN G046#7 f f

Dry run 5.3.2
Dry run check signal MDRN F002#7 f f
Torque limit skip

Torque limit reached signals TRQL1 to TRQL4 F114 f — 14.3.3
(T series)
Thread cutting Thread cutting signal THRD F002#3 f f 6.4.1
818
T M
series series
Rapid traverse override signals ROV1, ROV2 G014#0, #1 f f
Rapid traverse 1% step rapid traverse override

HROV G096#7 f f 7.1.6.1
override selection signals
1% step rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 G096#0 to #6 f f
Direct operation by
Direct operation selection signal DMMC G042#7 f f 15.6
PMC/MMC
Control axis selection signals

EAX1 to EAX4 G136 f f
(PMC axis control)
EC0A to EC6A G143#0 to #6 f f
Axis control command signals EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to #6 f f

(PMC axis control) EC0C to EC6C G167#0 to #6 f f
EC0D to EC6D G179#0 to #6 f f
EIF0A to EIF15A G144, G145 f f
Axis control feedrate signals EIF0B to EIF15B G156, G157 f f

(PMC axis control) EIF0C to EIF15C G168, G169 f f
EIF0D to EIF15D G180, G181 f f
EBUFA G142#7 f f
Axis control command read signals EBUFB G154#7 f f

(PMC axis control) EBUFC G166#7 f f
EBUFD G178#7 f f
EID0A to EID31A G146 to G149 f f
Axis control data signals EID0B to EID31B G158 to G161 f f

PMC axis (PMC axis control) EID0C to EID31C G170 to G173 f f
control/PMC axis
speed control EID0D to EID31D G182 to G185 f f
15.1
function
EBSYA F130#7 f f
Axis control command read completion EBSYB F133#7 f f

signals (PMC axis control) EBSYC F136#7 f f
EBSYD F139#7 f f
ECLRA G142#6 f f
ECLRB G154#6 f f
Reset signals (PMC axis control)
ECLRC G166#6 f f
ECLRD G178#6 f f
ESTPA G142#5 f f
Axis control temporary stop signals ESTPB G154#5 f f

(PMC axis control) ESTPC G166#5 f f
ESTPD G178#5 f f
ESBKA G142#3 f f
ESBKB G154#3 f f
Block stop signals (PMC axis control)
ESBKC G166#3 f f
ESBKD G178#3 f f
819
T M
series series
EMSBKA G143#7 f f
Block stop disable signals EMSBKB G155#7 f f

(PMC axis control) EMSBKC G167#7 f f
EMSBKD G179#7 f f
EM11A to EM48A F132, F142 f f
Auxiliary function code signals EM11B to EM48B F135, F145 f f

(PMC axis control) EM11C to EM48C F138, F148 f f
EM11D to EM48D F141, F151 f f
EMFA F131#0 f f
Auxiliary function strobe signals EMFB F134#0 f f

(PMC axis control) EMFC F137#0 f f
EMFD F140#0 f f
EFINA G142#0 f f
Auxiliary function completion signals EFINB G154#0 f f

(PMC axis control) EFINC G166#0 f f
EFIND G178#0 f f
ESOFA G142#4 f f
ESOFB G154#4 f f
PMC axis Servo off signals (PMC axis control)
control/PMC axis ESOFC G166#4 f f
speed control 15.1
function ESOFD G178#4 f f
EMBUFA G142#2 f f
Buffering disable signals (PMC axis EMBUFB G154#2 f f

control) EMBUFC G166#2 f f
EMBUFD G178#2 f f
Control axis selection status signals

*EAXSL F129#7 f f
(PMC axis control)
EINPA F130#0 f f
EINPB F133#0 f f
In–position signals (PMC axis control)
EINPC F136#0 f f
EINPD F139#0 f f
ECKZA F130#1 f f
Following zero checking signals (PMC ECKZB F133#1 f f

axis control) ECKZC F136#1 f f
ECKZD F139#1 f f
EIALA F130#2 f f
EIALB F133#2 f f
Alarm signals (PMC axis control)
EIALC F136#2 f f
EIALD F139#2 f f
820
T M
series series
EGENA F130#4 f f
EGENB F133#4 f f
Axis moving signals (PMC axis control)
EGENC F136#4 f f
EGEND F139#4 f f
EDENA F130#3 f f
Auxiliary function executing signals EDENB F133#3 f f

(PMC axis control) EDENC F136#3 f f
EDEND F139#3 f f
EOTNA F130#6 f f
Negative–direction overtravel signals EOTNB F133#6 f f

(PMC axis control) EOTNC F136#6 f f
EOTND F139#6 f f
EOTPA F130#5 f f
Positive–direction overtravel signals EOTPB F133#5 f f

(PMC axis control) EOTPC F136#5 f f
PMC axis
control/PMC axis EOTPD F139#5 f f
speed control 15.1
Feedrate override signals (PMC axis
function *FV0E to *FV7E G151 f f
control)
Override cancellation signal

OVCE G150#5 f f
(PMC axis control)
Rapid traverse override signals (PMC

ROV1E, ROV2E G150#0, #1 f f
axis control)
Dry run signal (PMC axis control) DRNE G150#7 f f
Manual rapid traverse selection signal

RTE G150#6 f f
(PMC axis control)
Override 0% signal (PMC axis control) EOV0 F129#5 f f
Skip signal (PMC axis control) ESKIP X1004#6 f f
Distribution completion signals (PMC

EADEN1 to EADEN4 F112 f f
axis control)
EABUFA F131#1 f f
EABUFB F134#1 f f
Buffer full signals (PMC axis control)
EABUFC F137#1 f f
EABUFD F140#1 f f
Controlling signals (PMC axis control) EACNT1 to EACNT4 F182 f f
821
T M
series series
SIND G033#7 f f
SIND2 G035#7 f f
selection signals
SIND3 G037#7 f f
G032#0 to
R01I to R12I f f
G033#3
G034#0 to
Spindle motor speed command signals R01I2 to R12I2 f f
G035#3
Spindle output G036#0 to
control by the PMC R01I3 to R12I3 f f 15.4
G037#3
SSIN G033#6 f f
Spindle motor command polarity
SSIN2 G035#6 f f
selection signals
SSIN3 G037#6 f f
SGN G033#5 f f
Spindle motor command polarity
SGN2 G035#5 f f
command signals
SGN3 G037#5 f f
*ESP G008#4 f f
Emergency stop Emergency stop signal 2.1
*ESP X1008#4 f f
All–axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal IGNVRY G066#0 f f

VRDY off alarm
ignore signal Each–axis VRDY off alarm ignore 2.8
IGVRY1 to IGVRY4 G192 f f
signal
Follow–up Follow–up signal *FLWU G007#5 f f 1.2.6

Program restart signal SRN G006#0 f f
Program restart 5.7
Program restart under way signal SRNMV F002#4 f f
F070#0 to
Position switch Position switch signals PSW01 to PSW10 f f 1.2.8
F071#1
Miscellaneous function code signals M00 to M31 F010 to F013 f f
Miscellaneous function strobe signal MF F007#0 f f
DM00 F009#7 f f
DM01 F009#6 f f
Decode M signals
DM02 F009#5 f f
DM30 F009#4 f f
Spindle function code signals S00 to S31 F022 to F025 f f

Miscellaneous
function/2nd auxiliary Spindle function strobe signal SF F007#2 f f 8.1
function
Tool function code signals T00 to T31 F026 to F029 f f
Tool function strobe signal TF F007#3 f f
2nd auxiliary function code signals B00 to B31 F030 to F033 f f
BF F007#4 f —
2nd auxiliary function strobe signal
BF F007#7 — f
End signal FIN G004#3 f f
Distribution end signal DEN F001#3 f f
822
T M
series series
Auxiliary function Auxiliary function lock signal AFL G005#6 f f

lock
8.2
Auxiliary function lock check signal MAFL F004#4 f f
Polygon synchronization under way

Polygonal turning PSYN F063#7 f — 6.9
signal
All–axis machine lock signal MLK G044#1 f f
Machine lock Each–axis machine lock signal MLK1 to MLK4 G108 f f 5.3.1
All–axis machine lock check signal MMLK F004#1 f f
Manual absolute Manual absolute signal *ABSM G006#2 f f

on/off
5.4
Manual absolute check signal MABSM F004#2 f f
SWS1 G027#0 f —
Spindle selection signals
SWS2 G027#1 f —
Multi–spindle control
*SSTP1 G027#3 f — 9.9
(T series)
Individual spindle stop signals
*SSTP2 G027#4 f —
Gear selection signals (input) GR21 G029#0 f —
2nd position coder selection signal PC2SLC G028#7 f —

Multi–spindle control
ENB2 F038#2 f — 9.9
(T series)
Spindle enable signals
ENB3 F038#3 f —
Mirror image signals MI1 to MI4 G106 f f

Mirror image 1.2.5
Mirror image check signals MMI1 to MMI4 F108 f f
Memory protection
Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4 G046#3 to #6 f f 12.2.3
key
Mode selection signals MD1, MD2, MD4 G043#3 to #2 f f
Manual data input selection check

MMDI F003#3 f f
signal
Automatic operation selection check

MMEM F003#5 f f
signal
Mode selection Memory edit selection check signal MEDT F003#6 f f 2.6
Manual handle feed selection check
MH F003#1 f f
signal
Incremental feed selection check signal MINC F003#0 f f
Jog feed selection check signal MJ F003#2 f f
TEACH IN selection check signal MTCHIN F003#7 f f
RGTAP G061#0 f f
Rigid tapping signal
RGSPP F065#0 — f
Rigid tapping Spindle rotation direction signals RGSPM F065#1 — f 9.10

Rigid tapping–in–progress signal RTAP F076#3 f f
Rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1, RGTSP2 G061#4, #5 f —
823
T M
series series
External reset signal ERS G008#7 f f
Reset & rewind signal RRW G008#6 f f

Reset and rewind 5.2
Resetting signal RST F001#1 f f
Rewinding signal RWD F000#0 f f
Interrupt type custom

Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT G053#3 f f 11.5.2
macro
824
A.2.2
List of Signals f : Available
– : Unavailable
(In Order of Symbols)
Refer-
T M
Group Symbol Signal name Address ence
series series
item
*+ED1 to *+ED4 External deceleration signal G118 f f 7.1.8
*+L1 to *+L4 Overtravel signal G114 f f 2.3.1
*-ED1 to *-ED4 External deceleration signal G120 f f 7.1.8
*-L1 to *-L4 Overtravel signal G116 f f 2.3.1
*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2 f f 5.4
*BECLP B-axis clamp completion signal G038#7 - f 11.9
*BEUCP B-axis unclamp completion signal G038#6 - f 11.9
*CRTOF Automatic erase CRT screen display cancel signal G062#1 f f 12.1.17
*DEC1 to *DEC4 Deceleration signal for reference position return X1009 f f 4.1
Control axis selection status signal(PMC axis

*EAXSL F129#7 f f 15.1
control)
*ESP X1008#4 f f
Emergency stop signal 2.1
*ESP G008#4 f f
*ESPA G071#1 f f
Emergency stop signal (serial spindle) 9.2
*ESPB G075#1 f f
*FLWU Follow-up signal G007#5 f f 1.2.6

*
*FV0 to *FV7 Feedrate override signal G012 f f 7.1.6.2
*FV0E to *FV7E Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control) G151 f f 15.1
*FV0O to *FV7O Software operator's panel signal(*FV0 to *FV7) F078 f f 12.1.14
*HROV0 to *HROV6 1% step rapid traverse override signal G096#0 to #6 f f 7.1.6.1
*IT Interlock signal G008#0 f f 2.5
*IT1 to *IT4 Interlock signal for each axis G130 f f 2.5
*JV0 to *JV15 Manual feedrate override signal G010,G011 f f 3.1
*JV0O to *JV15O Software operator's panel signal(*JV0 to *JV15) F079,F080 f f 12.1.14
*SCPF Spindle clamp completion signal G028#5 f - 9.7
*SP Feed hold signal G008#5 f f 5.1
*SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6 f f 9.3
*SSTP1 G027#3 f -
Stop signal in each spindle 9.9
*SSTP2 G027#4 f -
*SUCPF Spindle unclamp completion signal G028#4 f - 9.7
G049#0 to
*TLV0 to *TLV9 Tool life count override signal - f 10.3
G050#1
825
Refer-
T M
series series
item
+J1 to +J4 Feed axis and direction selection signal G100 f f 3.1
F081#0,#2,#4,#
+J1O to +J4O Software operator's panel signal(+J1 to +J4) f f 12.1.14
6
+ +LM1 to +LM4 Stroke limit external setting signal G110 - f 2.3.2
+MIT1,+MIT2 Manual feed interlock signal for each axis X1004#2,#4 f - 2.5
+MIT1,+MIT2 Tool offset write signal X1004#2,#4 f - 14.4.2
+MIT1 to +MIT4 Interlock signal for each axis and direction G132#0 to #3 - f 2.5
-J1 to -J4 Feed axis and direction selection signal G102 f f 3.1
F081#1,#3,#5,#
-J1O to -J4O Software operator's panel signal(-J1 to -J4) f f 12.1.14
7
– -LM1 to -LM4 Stroke limit external setting signal G112 - f 2.3.2
-MIT1,-MIT2 Manual feed interlock signal for each axis f - 2.5

X1004#3,#5
-MIT1,-MIT2 Tool offset write signal f - 14.4.2
-MIT1 to -MIT4 Interlock signal for each axis and direction G134#0 to #3 - f 2.5
ABTQSV Servo axis abnormal load detected signal F090#0 f f 2.9
ABTSP1 First-spindle abnormal load detected signal F090#1 f f 2.9
ABTSP2 Second-spindle abnormal load detected signal F090#2 f f 2.9
AFL Miscellaneous function lock signal G005#6 f f 8.2
AL Alarm signal F001#0 f f 2.4

A
ALMA F045#0 f f
Alarm signal (serial spindle) 9.2
ALMB F049#0 f f
AR0 to AR15 Actual spindle speed signal F040,F041 f - 9.6
ARSTA G071#0 f f
Alarm reset signal (serial spindle) 9.2
ARSTB G075#0 f f
B00 to B31 2nd auxiliary function code signal F030 to F033 f f 8.1
BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2 f f 2.4
BCLP B-axis clamp signal F061#1 - f 11.9
BDT1,BDT2 to BDT9 Optional block skip signal G044#0,G045 f f 5.5
BDTO Software operator's panel signal(BDT) F075#2 f f 12.1.14

B
BF F007#4 f -
2nd auxiliary function strobe signal 8.1
BF F007#7 - f
BFIN G005#4 f -
2nd auxiliary function completion signal 8.4
BFIN G005#7 - f
BGEACT Background busy signal F053#4 f f 13.2
826
Refer-
T M
series series
item
CDZ Chamferring signal G053#7 f - 11.8
CFINA F046#1 f f
Spindle switch completion signal (serial spindle) 9.2
CFINB F050#1 f f
CHPA F046#0 f f
Power line switch signal (serial spindle) 9.2
CHPB F050#0 f f
Torque limit reach signals for butt–type reference

C CLRCH1 to CLRCH4 F180 f f 4.6
position setting
CON Cs contour control change signal G027#7 f f 9.8
CSS Constant surface speed signal F002#2 f f 9.4
CTH1A,CTH2A G070#3,#2 f f
Clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) 9.2
CTH1B,CTH2B G074#3,#2 f f
CUT Cutting feed signal F002#6 f f 2.7
DEFMDA G072#3 f f
Differential mode command signal (serial spindle) 9.2
DEFMDB G076#3 f f
DEN Distribution end signal F001#3 f f 8.1
DM00 F009#7 f f
DM01 F009#6 f f
Decode M signal 8.1
DM02 F009#5 f f
D
DM30 F009#4 f f
DMMC Direct operation select signal G042#7 f f 15.6
DNCI DNC operation select signal G043#5 f f 5.9
DRN Dry run signal G046#7 f f 5.3.2
DRNE Dry run signal (PMC axis control) G150#7 f f 15.1
DRNO Software operator's panel signal(DRN) F075#5 f f 12.1.14
EA0 to EA6 Address signal for external data input G002#0 to #6 f f 15.2
EABUFA F131#1 f f
EABUFB F134#1 f f
Buffer full signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
EABUFC F137#1 f f
EABUFD F140#1 f f
EACNT1 to EACNT4 Controlling signal (PMC axis control) F182 f f 15.1

E
EADEN1 to EADEN4 Distribution completion signal(PMC axis control) F112 f f 15.1
EAX1 to EAX4 Control axis select signal (PMC axis control) G136 f f 15.1
EBSYA F130#7 f f 15.1
EBSYB Axis control command read completion signal F133#7 f f 15.1
EBSYC (PMC axis control) F136#7 f f 15.1
EBSYD F139#7 f f 15.1
827
Refer-
T M
series series
item
EBUFA G142#7 f f
EBUFB Axis control command read signal(PMC axis G154#7 f f

15.1
EBUFC control) G166#7 f f
EBUFD G178#7 f f
EC0A to EC6A G143#0 to #6 f f
EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to #6 f f

Axis control command signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
EC0C to EC6C G167#0 to #6 f f
EC0D to EC6D G179#0 to #6 f f
ECKZA F130#1 f f
ECKZB F133#1 f f
Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
ECKZC F136#1 f f
ECKZD F139#1 f f
ECLRA G142#6 f f
ECLRB G154#6 f f
Reset signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
ECLRC G166#6 f f
ECLRD G178#6 f f
ED0 to ED15 Data signal for external data input G000,G001 f f 15.2
EDENA F130#3 f f
E
EDENB Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis F133#3 f f
15.1
EDENC control) F136#3 f f
EDEND F139#3 f f
EF External operation signal F008#0 - f 11.7
EFD External operation signal for high-speed interface F007#1 - f 8.4
EFIN External operation function completion signal G005#1 - f 8.4
EFINA G142#0 f f
EFINB Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis G154#0 f f

15.1
EFINC control) G166#0 f f
EFIND G178#0 f f
EGENA F130#4 f f
EGENB F133#4 f f
Axis moving signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
EGENC F136#4 f f
EGEND F139#4 f f
EIALA F130#2 f f
EIALB F133#2 f f
Alarm signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
EIALC F136#2 f f
EIALD F139#2 f f
828
Refer-
T M
series series
item
EID0A to EID31A G146 to G149 f f
EID0B to EID31B G158 to G161 f f

Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
EID0C to EID31C G170 to G173 f f
EID0D to EID31D G182 to G185 f f
EIF0A to EIF15A G144,G145 f f
EIF0B to EIF15B G156,G157 f f

Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
EIF0C to EIF15C G168,G169 f f
EIF0D to EIF15D G180,G181 f f
EINPA F130#0 f f
EINPB F133#0 f f
-
In-position signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
EINPC F136#0 f f
EINPD F139#0 f f
EKC0 to EKC7 Key code signal G098 f f 15.5
EKENB Key code read completion signal F053#7 f f 15.5
EKSET key code read signal G066#7 f f 15.5
EM11A to EM48A F132,F142 f f
EM11B to EM48B F135,F145 f f

E Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
EM11C to EM48C F138,F148 f f
EM11D to EM48D F141,F151 f f
EMBUFA G142#2 f f
EMBUFB Buffering disable signal G154#2 f f

15.1
EMBUFC (PMC axis control) G166#2 f f
EMBUFD G178#2 f f
EMFA F131#0 f f
EMFB F134#0 f f
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
EMFC F137#0 f f
EMFD F140#0 f f
EMSBKA G143#7 f f
EMSBKB Block stop disable signal G155#7 f f

15.1
EMSBKC (PMC axis control) G167#7 f f
EMSBKD G179#7 f f
ENB F001#4 f f 9.3

ENB2 F038#2 f - 9.9
ENBKY External key input mode selection signal G066#1 f f 15.5
829
Refer-
T M
series series
item
EOTNA F130#6 f f
EOTNB Negative direction overtravel signal (PMC axis

Negative-direction F133#6 f f
15.1
EOTNC control) F136#6 f f
EOTND F139#6 f f
EOTPA F130#5 f f
EOTPB Positive direction overtravel signal (PMC axis

Positive-direction F133#5 f f
15.1
EOTPC control) F136#5 f f
EOTPD F139#5 f f
EOV0 Override 0% signal (PMC axis control) F129#5 f f 15.1
G024#0 to #7
EPN0 to EPN13 Expansion workpiece number serach signal f f 15.3
G025#0 to #5
EREND Read completion signal for external data input F060#0 f f 15.2
ERS External reset signal G008#7 f f 5.2
ESBKA G142#3 f f
ESBKB G154#3 f f
Block stop signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
ESBKC G166#3 f f
E
ESBKD G178#3 f f
ESEND Search completion signal for external data input F060#1 f f 15.2
ESKIP Skip signal (PMC axis control) X1004#6 f f 15.1
ESOFA G142#4 f f
ESOFB G154#4 f f
Servo off signal (PMC axis control) 15.1
ESOFC G166#4 f f
ESOFD G178#4 f f
ESTB Read signal for external data input G002#7 f f 15.2
ESTPA G142#5 f f
ESTPB Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC axis G154#5 f f

15.1
ESTPC control) G166#5 f f
ESTPD G178#5 f f
EXLM Stored stroke limit select signal G007#6 f f 2.3.2
EXRD External read start signal G058#1 f f 13.2
EXSTP External read/punch stop signal G058#2 f f 13.2
EXWT External punch start signal G058#3 f f 13.2
F1D F1-digit feed select signal G016#7 - f 7.1.5
FIN Completion signal G004#3 f f 8.1
FSCSL Cs contour control change completion signal F044#1 f f 9.8

F
Spindle phase synchronous control completion
FSPPH F044#3 f f 9.11
signal
Spindle synchronous speed control completion

FSPSY F044#2 f f 9.11
signal
830
Refer-
T M
series series
item
G08MD Lock-ahead control mode signal F066#0 - f 7.1.11
GOQSM Tool offset value write mode select signal G039#7 f - 14.4.2
G GR1,GR2 Gear selection signal (input) G028#1,#2 f f 9.3
GR1O,GR2O,GR3O Gear selection signal (output ) F034#0 to #2 - f 9.3
GR21 Gear selection signal (input) G029#0 f - 9.9
HDO0 High-speed skip status signal F122#0 f f 14.3.2
HROV 1% step rapid traverse override select signal G096#7 f f 7.1.6.1
HS1A to HS1D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G018#0 to #3 f f 3.2
HS1AO Software operator's panel signal(HS1A) F077#0 f f 12.1.14
HS1BO Software operator's panel signal(HS1B) F077#1 f f 12.1.14
HS1CO Software operator's panel signal(HS1C) F077#2 f f 12.1.14

H
HS1DO Software operator's panel signal(HS1D) F077#3 f f 12.1.14
HS1IA to HS1ID Manual handle interruption axis select signal G041#0 to #3 f f 3.3
HS2A to HS2D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G018#4 to #7 f f 3.2
HS2IA to HS2ID Manual handle interruption axis select signal G041#4 to #7 f f 3.3
HS3A to HS3D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G019#0 to #3 - f 3.2
HS3IA to HS3ID Manual handle interruption axis select signal G042#0 to #3 - f 3.3
IGNVRY All-axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal G066#0 f f 2.8
IGVRY1 to IGVRY4 Each-axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal G192 f f 2.8
INCH Inch input signal F002#0 f f 11.4
INCMDA Incremental command external setting type G072#5 f f

9.2
INCMDB orientation signal (serial spindle) G076#5 f f
INCSTA Incremental method orientation signal (serial F047#1 f f

9.2
I INCSTB spindle) F051#1 f f
INDXA Orientation stop position change signal (serial G072#0 f f

9.2
INDXB spindle) G076#0 f f
INHKY Key input disable signal F053#0 f f 15.5
INP1 to INP4 In-position signal F104 f f 7.2.5.1
INTGA Signal for controlling velocity integration (serial G071#5 f f

9.2
INTGB spindle) G075#5 f f
KEY1 to KEY4 Memory protect signal G046#3 to #6 f f 12.2.3

K
KEYO Software operator's panel signal(KEY1 to KEY4) F075#6 f f 12.1.14
LDT1A F045#4 f f
Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle) 9.2
LDT1B F049#4 f f
L
LDT2A F045#5 f f
Load detection signal 2 (serial spindle) 9.2
LDT2B F049#5 f f
831
Refer-
T M
series series
item
M00 to M31 Miscellaneous function code signal F010 to F013 f f 8.1
M200 to M215 2nd M function code signal F014 to F015 f f 8.3
M300 to M315 3rd M function code signal F016 to F017 f f 8.3
MA CNC ready signal F001#7 f f 2.2
MABSM Manual absolute check signal F004#2 f f 5.4
MAFL Miscellaneous function lock check signal F004#4 f f 8.2
MBDT1,MBDT2 to
Optional block skip check signal F004#0,F005 f f 5.5
MBDT9
MCFNA G071#3 f f
Power line switch completion signal (serial spindle) 9.2
MCFNB G075#3 f f
MD1,MD2,MD4 Mode selection signal G043#0 to #2 f f 2.6
MD1O Software operator's panel signal(MD1) F073#0 f f 12.1.14
MDRN Dry run check signal F002#7 f f 5.3.2
MEDT Memory edit select check signal F003#6 f f 2.6
MF Auxiliary function strobe signal F007#0 f f 8.1
M MF2 2nd M function strobe signal F008#4 f f 8.3
MF3 3rd M function strobe signal F008#5 f f 8.3
MFIN Auxiliary function completion signal G005#0 f f 8.4
MFIN2 2nd M function completion signal G004#4 f f 8.4
MFIN3 3rd M function completion signal G004#5 f f 8.4
MFNHGA Main spindle MCC status signal while changing G072#6 f f

9.2
MFNHGB spindles signal (serial spindle) G076#6 f f
MH Manual handle feed select check signal F003#1 f f 2.6
MI1 to MI4 Mirror image signal G106 f f 1.2.5
MINC Incremental feed select check signal F003#0 f f 2.6
MINP External program input start signal G058#0 f f 13.3
MJ JOG feed select check signal F003#2 f f 2.6
MLK All-axis machine lock signal G044#1 f f 5.3.1
MLK1 to MLK4 Each-axis machine lock signal G108 f f 5.3.1
MLKO Software operator's panel signal(MLK) F075#4 f f 12.1.14
MMDI Manual data input select check signal F003#3 f f 2.6
MMEM Automatic operation select check signal F003#5 f f 2.6
MMI1 to MMI4 Mirror image check signal F108 f f 1.2.5
832
Refer-
T M
series series
item
MMLK All-axis machine lock check signal F004#1 f f 5.3.1
MORA1A Signal for completion of spindle orientation with a F046#6 f f

9.2
MORA1B magnetic sensor (serial spindle) F050#6 f f
MORA2A SIgnal for approximate spindle orientation with a F046#7 f f

9.2
MORA2B magnetic sensor (serial spindle) F050#7 f f
MORCMA Command for spindle orientaion with a magnetic G073#0 f f

9.2
MORCMB sensor (serial spindle) G077#0 f f
Manual handle feed amount selection signal

MP1,MP2 G019#4,#5 f f 3.2
(incremental feed signal)
MP1O Software operator's panel signal(MP1) F076#0 f f 12.1.14
MP2O Software operator's panel signal(MP2) F076#1 f f 12.1.14

M
MPOFA G073#2 f f
Motor power stop signal (serial spindle) 9.2
MPOFB G077#2 f f
MRDYA G070#7 f f
Machine ready signal (serial spindle) 9.2
MRDYB G074#7 f f
Manual reference position return selection check

MREF F004#5 f f 4.1
signal
MRMT DNC operation select check signal F003#4 f f 5.9
MSBK Single block check signal F004#3 f f 5.3.3
MTCHIN TEACH IN select check signal F003#7 f f 2.6
MV1 to MV4 Axis moving signal F102 f f 1.2.4
MVD1 to MVD4 Axis moving direction signal F106 f f 1.2.4
NPOS1 to NPOS4 Position display neglect signal G198 f f 12.1.10
N NRROA Short–distant movement command while changing G072#2 f f

9.2
NRROB the orientation stop position signal (serial spindle) G076#2 f f
G039#0 to
OFN0 to OFN5,OFN6 Tool offset number select signal f - 14.4.2
#5,G040#0
OP Automatic operation signal F000#7 f f 5.1
ORARA F045#7 f f
Orientation completion signal (serial spindle) 9.2
ORARB F049#7 f f
ORCMA G070#6 f f
Orientation command signal (serial spindle) 9.2
O ORCMB G074#6 f f
Software operator's panel general-purpose switch

OUT0 to OUT7 F072 f f 12.1.14
signal
OVC Override cancel signal G006#4 f f 7.1.6.3
OVCE Override cancellation signal (PMC axis control) G150#5 f f 15.1
OVRIDA G072#4 f f
Analog override command signal (serial spindle) 9.2
OVRIDB G076#4 f f
833
Refer-
T M
series series
item
PC1DEA Signal indicating the status of the detected F047#0 f f

9.2
PC1DEB one-rotation position coder signal (serial spindle) F051#0 f f
PC2SLC 2nd position coder selection signal G028#7 f - 9.9
PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,
Workpiece number search signal G009#0 to 4 f f 15.3
PN16
PORA2A Signal for approximate spindle orientation with a F046#5 f f

9.2
P PORA2B position coder (serial spindle) F050#5 f f
PRC Position record signal G040#6 f - 14.4.1
PRGDPL program screen display mode signal F053#1 f f 15.5
PRTSF Target parts count reached signal F062#7 f f 12.1.11
F070#0 to
PSW01 to PSW10 Position switch signal f f 1.2.8
F071#1
PSYN Polygon synchronization under way signal F063#7 f - 6.9
G032#0 to
R01I to R12I f f
G033#3
Spindle motor speed command signal 15.4
G034#0 to
R01I2 to R12I2 f f
G035#3
F036#0 to
R01O to R12O S12-bit code signal f f 9.3
F037#3
RCFNA F046#3 f f
Output switch completion signal (serial spindle) 9.2
RCFNB F050#3 f f
RCHA G071#7 f f
Power line status check signal (serial spindle) 9.2
RCHB G075#7 f f
RCHHGA High–output MCC status signal while a magnetic G072#7 f f

9.2
RCHHGB sensor (serial spindle) G076#7 f f
R
RCHPA F046#2 f f
Output switch signal (serial spindle) 9.2
RCHPB F050#2 f f
RGSPM F065#1 - f
Spindle rotation direction signal 9.10
RGSPP F065#0 - f
RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061#0 f f 9.10
RGTSP1,RGTSP2 Rigid tapping spindle selection signal G061#4,#5 f - 9.10
RLSOT Strok check release signal G007#7 - f 2.3.2
RLSOT3 Stroke check 3 release signal G007#4 f - 2.3.3
ROTAA Rotation direction command while changing the G072#1 f f

9.2
ROTAB orientation stop position signal (serial spindle) G076#1 f f
ROV1,ROV2 Rapid traverse override signal G014#0,#1 f f 7.1.6.1
834
Refer-
T M
series series
item
ROV1E,ROV2E Rapid traverse override signal(PMC axis control) G150#0,#1 f f 15.1
ROV1O Software operator's panel signal(ROV1) F076#4 f f 12.1.14
ROV2O Software operator's panel signal(ROV2) F076#5 f f 12.1.14
RPALM Read/punch alarm signal F053#3 f f 13.2
RPBSY Read/punch in–progress signal F053#2 f f 13.2
RPDO Rapid traversing signal F002#1 f f 2.7
RRW Reset&rewind signal G008#6 f f 5.2
RSLA G071#6 f f
R Output switch request signal (serial spindle) 9.2
RSLB G075#6 f f
RST Reset signal F001#1 f f 5.2
RT Manual rapid traverse selection signal G019#7 f f 3.1
RTAP Rigid tapping in-progress signal F076#3 f f 9.10
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis

RTE G150#6 f f 15.1
control)
RTO Software operator's panel signal(RT) F077#6 f f 12.1.14
RWD Rewinding signal F000#0 f f 5.2
S00 to S31 Spindle speed code signal F022 to F025 f f 8.1
SA Servo ready signal F000#6 f f 2.2
SAR Spindle speed arrival signal G029#4 f f 9.3
SARA F045#3 f f
Speed arrival signal (serial spindle) 9.2
SARB F049#3 f f
SBK Single block signal G046#1 f f 5.3.3
SBKO Software operator's panel signal(SBK) F075#3 f f 12.1.14
SCLP Spindle clamp signal F038#0 f - 9.7
SDTA F045#2 f f
Speed detection signal (serial spindle) 9.2
SDTB F049#2 f f
S SF Spindle speed strobe signal F007#2 f f 8.1
SFIN Spindle function completion signal G005#2 f f 8.4
SFRA G070#5 f f
CW command signal (serial spindle) 9.2
SFRB G074#5 f f
SGN G033#5 f f
Spindle motor command polarity select signal 15.4
SGN2 G035#5 f f
G078#0 to
SHA00 to SHA11 f f
G079#3
Spindle orientation external stop position command
9.12
signal G080#0 to
SHB00 to SHB11 f f
G081#3
SIND G033#7 f f
Spindle motor speed command select signal 15.4
SIND2 G035#7 f f
835
Refer-
T M
series series
item
Skip signal X1004#7 f f 14.3.1

SKIP
Overload torque signal X1004#7 - f 11.13
SKIPP Skip signal G006#6 f - 14.3.1
SLVA G073#1 f f
Slave operation command signal (serial spindle) 9.2
SLVB G077#1 f f
SLVSA F046#4 f f
Slave operation status signal (serial spindle) 9.2
SLVSB F050#4 f f
SMZ Error detect signal G053#6 f - 7.2.5.3
SOCNA G071#4 f f
/
Soft start/stop cancel signal (serial spindle) 9.2
SOCNB G075#4 f f
SOR Spindle orientation signal G029#5 f f 9.3
SOV0 to SOV7 Spindle speed override signal G030 f f 9.3
SPAL Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal F035#0 f – 9.5
SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000#4 f f 5.1
SPO Software operator's panel signal(*SP) F075#7 f f 12.1.14
SPPHS Spindle phase synchronous control signal G038#3 f f 9.11
SPSLA G071#2 f f
Spindle select signal (serial spindle) 9.2
SPSLB G075#2 f f
SPSTP Spindle stop complete signal G028#6 f - 9.7
S SPSYC Spindle synchronous control signal G038#2 f f 9.11
SRN Program restart signal G006#0 f f 5.7
SRNMV Program restart under way signal F002#4 f f 5.7
SRVA G070#4 f f
CCW command signal (serial spindle) 9.2
SRVB G074#4 f f
SSIN G033#6 f f
SSIN2 G035#6 f f
SSTA F045#1 f f
Speed zero signal (serial spindle) 9.2
SSTB F049#1 f f
ST Cycle start lamp signal G007#2 f f 5.1
STL Cycle start signal F000#5 f f 5.1
STLK Start lock signal G007#1 f - 2.5
SUCLP Spindle unclamp signal F038#1 f - 9.7
SVF1 to SVF4 Servo off signal G126 f f 1.2.7
SWS1 G027#0 f -
Spindle selection signal 9.9
SWS2 G027#1 f -
SYCAL Spindle synchronous control alarm signal F044#4 f f 9.11
SYCAL Phase error monitor signal F044#4 f f 9.11
SYNC1 to SYNC4 Simple synchronous axis select signal G138 - f 1.6
SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ4 Simple synchronous manual feed axis select signal G140 - f 1.6
836
Refer-
T M
series series
item
T00 to T31 Tool function code signal F026 to F029 f f 8.1
TAP Tapping signal F001#5 f f 11.6
TF Tool function strobe signal F007#3 f f 8.1
TFIN Tool function completion signal G005#3 f f 8.4
THRD Thread cutting signal F002#3 f f 6.4.1
TL01 to TL16 G047#0 to #4 f -

Tool group number select signal 10.3
TL01 to TL128 G047#0 to #7 - f
TLCH Tool change signal F064#0 f f 10.3
TLCHI Individual tool change signal F064#2 - f 10.3
TLMA F045#6 f f
Torque limit signal (serial spindle) 9.2
T TLMB F049#6 f f
TLMHA G070#1 f f
Torque limit command HIGH signal (serial spindle) 9.2
TLMHB G074#1 f f
TLMLA G070#0 f f
Torque limit command LOW signal (serial spindle) 9.2
TLMLB G074#0 f f
TLNW New tool select signal F064#1 f f 10.3
TLRST Tool change reset signal G048#7 f f 10.3
TLRSTI Individual tool change reset signal G048#6 - f 10.3
TLSKP Tool skip signal G048#5 f f 10.3
TMRON General-purpose integrating meter start signal G053#0 f f 12.1.11
TRQL1 to TRQL4 Torque limit reached signal F114 f - 14.4.3
UI000 to UI015 Input signal for custom macro G054,G055 f f 11.5.1
UINT Interrupt signal for custom macro G053#3 f f 11.5.2

U
UO000 to UO015 F054,F055 f f
Output signal for custom macro 11.5.1
UO100 to UO131 F056 to F059 f f
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write

WOQSM G039#6 f - 14.4.2
mode select signal
W
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write
WOSET G040#7 f - 14.4.2
signal
837
Refer-
T M
series series
item
X XAE X1004#0 f f
Y YAE X1004#1 - f
Measuring position reached signal 14.2
ZAE X1004#1 f -
ZAE X1004#2 - f
ZP1 to ZP4 Reference position return end signal F094 f f 4.1
ZP21 to ZP24 2nd reference position return end signal F096 f f 4.5
Z ZP31 to ZP34 3rd reference position return end signal F098 f f 4.5
ZP41 to ZP44 4th reference position return end signal F100 f f 4.5
ZRF1 to ZRF4 Reference position establishment signal F120 f f 4.1
ZRN Manual reference position return selection signal G043#7 f f 4.1
ZRNO Software operator's panel signal(ZRN) F073#4 f f 12.1.14
838
A.2.3
List of Signals f : Available
– : Unavailable
(In Order of Addresses)
Refer-
T M
Address Signal name Symbol ence
series series
Item
X1004#0 XAE f f
X1004#1 YAE - f
Measuring position reached signal 14.2
X1004#1 ZAE f -
X1004#2 ZAE - f
X1004#2,#4 Manual feed interlock signal for each axis +MIT1,+MIT2 f - 2.5
X1004#2,#4 Tool offset write signal +MIT1,+MIT2 f - 14.4.2
X1004#3,#5 Manual feed interlock signal for each axis -MIT1,-MIT2 f - 2.5
X1004#3,#5 Tool offset write signal -MIT1,-MIT2 f - 14.4.2
X1004#6 Skip signal (PMC axis control) ESKIP f f 15.1
X1004#7 Skip signal SKIP f f 14.3.1
X1004#7 Overload torque signal SKIP - f 11.13
X1008#4 Emergency stop signal *ESP f f 2.1
X1009 Reference position return deceleration signal *DEC1 to *DEC4 f f 4.1
G000,G001 Data signal for external data input ED0 to ED15 f f 15.2
G002#0 to #6 Address signal for external data input EA0 to EA6 f f 15.2
G002#7 Read signal for external data input ESTB f f 15.2
G004#3 End signal FIN f f 8.1
G004#4 2nd M function completion signal MFIN2 f f 8.4
G004#5 3rd M function completion signal MFIN3 f f 8.4
G005#0 Auxiliary function completion signal MFIN f f 8.4
G005#1 External operation function completion signal EFIN - f 8.4
G005#2 Spindle function completion signal SFIN f f 8.4
G005#3 Tool function completion signal TFIN f f 8.4
G005#4 2nd auxiliary function completion signal BFIN f - 8.4
G005#6 Auxiliary function lock signal AFL f f 8.2
G005#7 2nd auxiliary function completion signal BFIN - f 8.4
G006#0 Program restart signal SRN f f 5.7
G006#2 Manual absolute signal *ABSM f f 5.4
G006#4 Override cancel signal OVC f f 7.1.6.3
G006#6 Skip signal SKIPP f - 14.3.1
G007#1 Start lock signal STLK f - 2.5
G007#2 Cycle start signal ST f f 5.1
G007#4 Stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT3 f - 2.3.3
G007#5 Follow-up signal *FLWU f f 1.2.6
839
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
G007#6 Stored stroke limit select signal EXLM f f 2.3.2
G007#7 Stroke limit release signal RLSOT - f 2.3.2
G008#0 Interlock signal *IT f f 2.5
G008#4 Emergency stop signal *ESP f f 2.1
G008#5 Feed hold signal *SP f f 5.1
G008#6 Reset & rewind signal RRW f f 5.2
G008#7 External reset signal ERS f f 5.2
PN1,PN2,PN4,
G009#0 to 4 Workpiece number search signal f f 15.3
PN8,PN16
G010,G011 Manual feedrate override signal *JV0 to *JV15 f f 3.1
G012 Feedrate override signal *FV0 to *FV7 f f 7.1.6.2
G014#0,#1 Rapid traverse override signal ROV1,ROV2 f f 7.1.6.1
G016#7 F1-digit feed select signal F1D - f 7.1.5
G018#0 to #3 HS1A to HS1D f f
G018#4 to #7 Manual handle feed axis selection signal HS2A to HS2D f f 3.2
G019#0 to #3 HS3A to HS3D - f
Manual handle feed amount selection signal (incremental

G019#4,#5 MP1,MP2 f f 3.2
feed signal)
G019#7 Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT f f 3.1
G024#0 to #7
Expansion workpiece number search signal EPN0 to EPN13 f f 15.3
G025#0 to #5
G027#0 SWS1 f -
Spindle selection signal 9.9
G027#1 SWS2 f -
G027#3 *SSTP1 f -
Stop signal in each spindle 9.9
G027#4 *SSTP2 f -
G027#7 Cs contour control switch signal CON f f 9.8
G028#1,#2 Gear selection signal (input) GR1,GR2 f f 9.3
G028#4 Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPF f - 9.7
G028#5 Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPF f - 9.7
G028#6 Spindle stop complete signal SPSTP f - 9.7
G028#7 2nd position coder selection signal PC2SLC f - 9.9
G029#0 Gear select signal (input) GR21 f - 9.9
G029#4 Spindle speed arrival signal SAR f f 9.3
G029#5 Spindle orientation signal SOR f f 9.3
G029#6 Spindle stop signal *SSTP f f 9.3
G030 Spindle speed override signal SOV0 to SOV7 f f 9.3
G032#0 to G033#3 Spindle motor speed command signal R01I to R12I f f 15.4
G033#5 SGN f f
G033#6 SSIN f f
G033#7 Spindle motor speed command select signal SIND f f 15.4
840
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
G034#0 to G035#3 Spindle motor speed command signal R01I2 to R12I2 f f 15.4
G035#5 Spindle motor command polarity select signal SGN2 f f 15.4
G035#6 Spindle motor command polarity select signal SSIN2 f f 15.4
G035#7 Spindle motor speed command select signal SIND2 f f 15.4
G038#2 Spindle synchronous control signal SPSYC f f 9.11
G038#3 Spindle phase synchronous control signal SPPHS f f 9.11
G038#6 B-axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP - f 11.9
G038#7 B-axis clamp completion signal *BECLP - f 11.9
G039#0 to OFN0 to OFN5,

Tool offset number select signal f - 14.4.2
#5,G040#0 OFN6
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode

G039#6 WOQSM f - 14.4.2
select signal
G039#7 Tool offset value write mode select signal GOQSM f - 14.4.2
G040#6 Position record signal PRC f - 14.4.1
G040#7 Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal WOSET f - 14.4.2
G041#0 to #3 HS1IA to HS1ID f f
G041#4 to #7 Manual handle interrupt axis selection signal HS2IA to HS2ID f f 3.3
G042#0 to #3 HS3IA to HS3ID - f
G042#7 Direct operation select signal DMMC f f 15.6
G043#0 to #2 Mode selection signal MD1,MD2,MD4 f f 2.6
G043#5 DNC operation select signal DNCI f f 5.9
G043#7 Manual reference position return selection signal ZRN f f 4.1
BDT1, BDT2 to
G044#0,G045 Optional block skip signal f f 5.5
BDT9
G044#1 All-axis machine lock signal MLK f f 5.3.1
G046#1 Single block signal SBK f f 5.3.3
G046#3 to #6 Memory protect signal KEY1 to KEY4 f f 12.2.3
G046#7 Dry run signal DRN f f 5.3.2
G047#0 to #4 TL01 to TL16 f -

Tool group number select signal 10.3
G047#0 to #7 TL01 to TL128 - f
G048#5 Tool skip signal TLSKP f f 10.3
G048#6 Individual tool change reset signal TLRSTI - f 10.3
G048#7 Tool change reset signal TLRST f f 10.3
G049#0 to G050#1 Tool life count override signal *TLV0 to *TLV9 - f 10.3
G053#0 General-purpose integrating meter start signal TMRON f f 12.1.11
G053#3 Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT f f 11.5.2
G053#6 Error detect signal SMZ f - 7.2.5.3
G053#7 Chamferring signal CDZ f - 11.8
G054,G055 Input signal for custom macro UI000 to UI015 f f 11.5.1
G058#0 External start signal program input MINP f f 13.3
841
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
G058#1 External read start signal EXRD f f 13.2
G058#2 External read/punch stop signal EXSTP f f 13.2
G058#3 External punch start signal EXWT f f 13.2
G061#0 Rigid tapping signal RGTAP f f 9.10
G061#4,#5 Rigid tap spindle select signal RGTSP1, RGTSP2 f - 9.10
G062#1 Automatic erase CRT screen display cancel signal *CRTOF f f 12.1.17
G066#0 All-axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGNVRY f f 2.8
G066#1 External key input mode selection signal ENBKY f f 15.5
G066#7 Key code read signal EKSET f f 15.5
G070#0 Torque limit command LOW signal (serial spindle) TLMLA f f 9.2
G070#1 Torque limit command HIGH signal (serial spindle) TLMHA f f 9.2
G070#3,#2 Clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A,CTH2A f f 9.2
G070#4 CCW command signal (serial spindle) SRVA f f 9.2
G070#5 CW command signal (serial spindle) SFRA f f 9.2
G070#6 Orientation command signal (serial spindle) ORCMA f f 9.2
G070#7 Machine ready completion signal (serial spindle) MRDYA f f 9.2
G071#0 Alarm reset signal (serial spindle) ARSTA f f 9.2
G071#1 Emergency stop signal (serial spindle) *ESPA f f 9.2
G071#2 Spindle select signal (serial spindle) SPSLA f f 9.2
G071#3 Power line switch completion signal (serial spindle) MCFNA f f 9.2
G071#4 Soft start stop cancel signal (serial spindle) SOCNA f f 9.2
G071#5 Signal for controlling velocity integration (serial spindle) INTGA f f 9.2
G071#6 Output switch request signal (serial spindle) RSLA f f 9.2
G071#7 Power line status check signal (serial spindle) RCHA f f 9.2
G072#0 Orientation stop position change signal (serial spindle) INDXA f f 9.2
Rotation direction command while changing the

G072#1 ROTAA f f 9.2
orientation stop position signal (serial spindle)
Short–distant movement command while changing the

G072#2 NRROA f f 9.2
G072#3 Differential mode command signal (serial spindle) DEFMDA f f 9.2
G072#4 Analog override command signal (serial spindle) OVRIDA f f 9.2
Incremental command external setting type orientation

G072#5 INCMDA f f 9.2
signal (serial spindle)
Main spindle MCC status signal while changing spindles

G072#6 MFNHGA f f 9.2
High–output MCC status signal while a magnetic sensor

G072#7 RCHHGA f f 9.2
(serial spindle)
Command for spindle orientaion with a magnetic sensor

G073#0 MORCMA f f 9.2
(serial spindle)
G073#1 Slave operation command signal (serial spindle) SLVA f f 9.2
G073#2 Motor power stop signal (serial spindle) MPOFA f f 9.2
842
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
G074#0 Torque limit command LOW signal (serial spindle) TLMLB f f 9.2
G074#1 Torque limit command HIGH signal (serial spindle) TLMHB f f 9.2
G074#3,#2 Clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1B,CTH2B f f 9.2
G074#4 CCW command signal (serial spindle) SRVB f f 9.2
G074#5 CW command signal (serial spindle) SFRB f f 9.2
G074#6 Orientation command signal (serial spindle) ORCMB f f 9.2
G074#7 Machine ready completion signal (serial spindle) MRDYB f f 9.2
G075#0 Alarm reset signal (serial spindle) ARSTB f f 9.2
G075#1 Emergency stop signal (serial spindle) *ESPB f f 9.2
G075#2 Spindle select signal (serial spindle) SPSLB f f 9.2
G075#3 Power line switch completion signal (serial spindle) MCFNB f f 9.2
G075#4 Soft start stop cancel signal (serial spindle) SOCNB f f 9.2
G075#5 Signal for controlling velocity integration (serial spindle) INTGB f f 9.2
G075#6 Output switch request signal (serial spindle) RSLB f f 9.2
G075#7 Power line status check signal (serial spindle) RCHB f f 9.2
G076#0 Orientation stop position change signal (serial spindle) INDXB f f 9.2
Rotation direction command while changing the

G076#1 ROTAB f f 9.2
Short–distant movement command while changing the

G076#2 NRROB f f 9.2
G076#3 Differential mode command signal (serial spindle) DEFMDB f f 9.2
G076#4 Analog override command signal (serial spindle) OVRIDB f f 9.2
Incremental command external setting type orientation

G076#5 INCMDB f f 9.2
Main spindle MCC status signal while changing spindles

G076#6 MFNHGB f f 9.2
High–output MCC status signal while a magnetic sensor

G076#7 RCHHGB f f 9.2
(serial spindle)
Command for spindle orientaion with a magnetic sensor

G077#0 MORCMB f f 9.2
(serial spindle)
G077#1 Slave operation command signal (serial spindle) SLVB f f 9.2
G077#2 Motor power stop signal (serial spindle) MPOFB f f 9.2
G078#0 to G079#3 SHA00 to SHA11 f f

Spindle orientation external stop position command signal 9.12
G080#0 to G081#3 SHB00 to SHB11 f f
G096#0 to #6 1% step rapid traverse override signal *HROV0 to *HROV6 f f 7.1.6.1
G096#7 1% step rapid traverse override select signal HROV f f 7.1.6.1
G098 Key code signal EKC0 to EKC7 f f 15.5
G100 +J1 to +J4 f f

Feed axis and direction selection signal 3.1
G102 -J1 to -J4 f f
G106 Mirror image signal MI1 to MI4 f f 1.2.5
G108 Each-axis machine lock signal MLK1 to MLK4 f f 5.3.1
843
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
G110 +LM1 to +LM4 - f

Stroke limit external setting signal 2.3.2
G112 -LM1 to -LM4 - f
G114 *+L1 to *+L4 f f

Overtravel signal 2.3.1
G116 *-L1 to *-L4 f f
G118 *+ED1 to *+ED4 f f

External deceleration signal 7.1.8
G120 *-ED1 to *-ED4 f f
G126 Servo off signal SVF1 to SVF4 f f 1.2.7
G130 Interlock signal for each axis *IT1 to *IT4 f f 2.5
G132#0 to #3 +MIT1 to +MIT4 - f

Interlock signal for each axis and direction 2.5
G134#0 to #3 -MIT1 to -MIT4 - f
G136 Control axis select signal (PMC axis control) EAX1 to EAX4 f f 15.1
G138 Simple synchronous axis select signal SYNC1 to SYNC4 - f 1.6
G140 Simple synchronous manual feed axis select signal SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ4 - f 1.6
G142#0 Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis control) EFINA f f 15.1
G142#2 Buffering disable signal (PMC axis control) EMBUFA f f 15.1
G142#3 Block stop signal (PMC axis control) ESBKA f f 15.1
G142#4 Servo off signal (PMC axis control) ESOFA f f 15.1
G142#5 Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC axis control) ESTPA f f 15.1
G142#6 Reset signal (PMC axis control) ECLRA f f 15.1
G142#7 Axis control command read signal (PMC axis control) EBUFA f f 15.1
G143#0 to #6 Axis control command signal (PMC axis control) EC0A to EC6A f f 15.1
G143#7 Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control) EMSBKA f f 15.1
G144,G145 Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control) EIF0A to EIF15A f f 15.1
G146 to G149 Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) EID0A to EID31A f f 15.1
G150#0,#1 Rapid traverse override signal (PMC axis control) ROV1E,ROV2E f f 15.1
G150#5 Override cancel signal (PMC axis control) OVCE f f 15.1
G150#6 Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis control) RTE f f 15.1
G150#7 Dry run signal (PMC axis control) DRNE f f 15.1
G151 Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control) *FV0E to *FV7E f f 15.1
G154#0 Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis control) EFINB f f 15.1
G154#2 Buffering disable signal (PMC axis control) EMBUFB f f 15.1
G154#3 Block stop signal (PMC axis control) ESBKB f f 15.1
G154#4 Servo off signal (PMC axis control) ESOFB f f 15.1
G154#5 Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC axis control) ESTPB f f 15.1
G154#6 Reset signal (PMC axis control) ECLRB f f 15.1
G154#7 Axis control command read signal (PMC axis control) EBUFB f f 15.1
G155#0 to #6 Axis control command signal (PMC axis control) EC0B to EC6B f f 15.1
G155#7 Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control) EMSBKB f f 15.1
G156,G157 Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control) EIF0B to EIF15B f f 15.1
844
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
G158 to G161 Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) EID0B to EID31B f f 15.1
G166#0 Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis control) EFINC f f 15.1
G166#2 Buffering disable signal (PMC axis control) EMBUFC f f 15.1
G166#3 Block stop signal (PMC axis control) ESBKC f f 15.1
G166#4 Servo off signal (PMC axis control) ESOFC f f 15.1
G166#5 Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC axis control) ESTPC f f 15.1
G166#6 Reset signal (PMC axis control) ECLRC f f 15.1
G166#7 Axis control command read signal (PMC axis control) EBUFC f f 15.1
G167#0 to #6 Axis control command signal (PMC axis control) EC0C to EC6C f f 15.1
G167#7 Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control) EMSBKC f f 15.1
G168,G169 Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control) EIF0C to EIF15C f f 15.1
G170 to G173 Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) EID0C to EID31C f f 15.1
G178#0 Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis control) EFIND f f 15.1
G178#2 Buffering disable signal (PMC axis control) EMBUFD f f 15.1
G178#3 Block stop signal (PMC axis control) ESBKD f f 15.1
G178#4 Servo off signal (PMC axis control) ESOFD f f 15.1
G178#5 Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC axis control) ESTPD f f 15.1
G178#6 Reset signal (PMC axis control) ECLRD f f 15.1
G178#7 Axis control command read signal (PMC axis control) EBUFD f f 15.1
G179#0 to #6 Axis control command signal (PMC axis control) EC0D to EC6D f f 15.1
G179#7 Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control) EMSBKD f f 15.1
G180,G181 Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control) EIF0D to EIF15D f f 15.1
G182 to G185 Axis control data signal (PMC axis control) EID0D to EID31D f f 15.1
G192 Each-axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGVRY1 to IGVRY4 f f 2.8
G198 Position display neglect signal NPOS1 to NPOS4 f f 12.1.10
F000#0 Rewinding signal RWD f f 5.2
F000#4 Feed hold lamp signal SPL f f 5.1
F000#5 Cycle start lamp signal STL f f 5.1
F000#6 Servo ready completion signal SA f f 2.2
F000#7 Automatic operation signal OP f f 5.1
F001#0 Alarm signal AL f f 2.4
F001#1 Resetting signal RST f f 5.2
F001#2 Battery alarm signal BAL f f 2.4
F001#3 Distribution end signal DEN f f 8.1
F001#4 Spindle enable signal ENB f f 9.3
F001#5 Tapping signal TAP f f 11.6
F001#7 CNC signal MA f f 2.2
F002#0 Inch input signal INCH f f 11.4
F002#1 Rapid traversing signal RPDO f f 2.7
845
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
F002#2 Constant surface speed signal CSS f f 9.4
F002#3 Thread cutting signal THRD f f 6.4.1
F002#4 Program restart under way signal SRNMV f f 5.7
F002#6 Cutting feed signal CUT f f 2.7
F002#7 Dry run check signal MDRN f f 5.3.2
F003#0 Incremental feed select check signal MINC f f 2.6
F003#1 Manual handle feed select check signal MH f f 2.6
F003#2 Jog feed select check signal MJ f f 2.6
F003#3 Manual data input select check signal MMDI f f 2.6
F003#4 DNC operation selection confirm signal MRMT f f 5.9
F003#5 Automatic operation select check signal MMEM f f 2.6
F003#6 Memory edit select check signal MEDT f f 2.6
F003#7 TEACH IN select check signal MTCHIN f f 2.6
MBDT1,MBDT2 to
F004#0,F005 Optional block skip check signal f f 5.5
MBDT9
F004#1 All-axis machine lock check signal MMLK f f 5.3.1
F004#2 Manual absolute check signal MABSM f f 5.4
F004#3 Single block check signal MSBK f f 5.3.3
F004#4 Auxiliary function lock check signal MAFL f f 8.2
F004#5 Manual reference position return selection check signal MREF f f 4.1
F007#0 Miscellaneous function strobe signal MF f f 8.1
F007#1 Externaloperationsignal for high-speed interface EFD - f 8.4
F007#2 Spindle-speed function strobe signal SF f f 8.1
F007#3 Tool function strobe signal TF f f 8.1
F007#4 BF f -
2nd auxiliary function strobe signal 8.1
F007#7 BF - f
F008#0 External operation signal EF - f 11.7
F008#4 2nd M function strobe signal MF2 f f 8.3
F008#5 3rd M function strobe signal MF3 f f 8.3
F009#4 DM30 f f
F009#5 DM02 f f
Decode M signal 8.1
F009#6 DM01 f f
F009#7 DM00 f f
F010 to F013 Miscellaneous function code signal M00 to M31 f f 8.1
F014 to F015 2nd M function code signal M200 to M215 f f 8.3
F016 to F017 3rd M function code signal M300 to M315 f f 8.3
F022 to F025 Spindle speed code signal S00 to S31 f f 8.1
F026 to F029 Tool function code signal T00 to T31 f f 8.1
F030 to F033 2nd miscellaneous function code signal B00 to B31 f f 8.1
846
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
GR1O,GR2O,
F034#0 to #2 Gear selection signal (output ) - f 9.3
GR3O
F035#0 Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL f - 9.5
F036#0 to F037#3S 12-bit code signal R01O to R12O f f 9.3
F038#0 Spindle clamp signal SCLP f - 9.7
F038#1 Spindle unclamp signal SUCLP f - 9.7
F038#2 ENB2 f -
Spindle enable signal 9.9
F038#3 ENB3 f -
F040,F041 Actual spindle speed signal AR0 to AR15 f - 9.6
F044#1 Cs contour control switch completion signal FSCSL f f 9.8
F044#2 Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal FSPSY f f 9.11
F044#3 Spindle phase synchronous control completion signal FSPPH f f 9.11
F044#4 Spindle synchronous control alarm signal SYCAL f f 9.11
F044#4 Phase error monitor signal SYCAL f f 9.11
F045#0 Alarm signal (serial spindle) ALMA f f 9.2
F045#1 Speed zero signal (serial spindle) SSTA f f 9.2
F045#2 Speed detection signal (serial spindle) SDTA f f 9.2
F045#3 Speed arrival signal (serial spindle) SARA f f 9.2
F045#4 Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle) LDT1A f f 9.2
F045#5 Load detection signal 2 (serial spindle) LDT2A f f 9.2
F045#6 Torque limit signal (serial spindle) TLMA f f 9.2
F045#7 Orientation completion signal (serial spindle) ORARA f f 9.2
F046#0 Power line switch signal (serial spindle) CHPA f f 9.2
F046#1 Spindle switch completion signal (serial spindle) CFINA f f 9.2
F046#2 Output switch signal (serial spindle) RCHPA f f 9.2
F046#3 Output switch completion signal (serial spindle) RCFNA f f 9.2
F046#4 Slave operation status signal (serial spindle) SLVSA f f 9.2
Signal for approximate spindle orientation with a position

F046#5 PORA2A f f 9.2
coder (serial spindle)
Signal for completion of spindle orientation with a

F046#6 MORA1A f f 9.2
magnetic sensor (serial spindle)
SIgnal for approximate spindle orientation with a magnetic

F046#7 MORA2A f f 9.2
sensor (serial spindle)
Signal indicating the status of the detected one-rotation

F047#0 PC1DEA f f 9.2
position coder signal (serial spindle)
F047#1 Incremental method orientation signal (serial spindle) INCSTA f f
F049#0 Alarm signal (serial spindle) ALMB f f 9.2
F049#1 Speed zero signal (serial spindle) SSTB f f 9.2
F049#2 Speed detection signal (serial spindle) SDTB f f 9.2
F049#3 Speed arrival signal (serial spindle) SARB f f 9.2
F049#4 Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle) LDT1B f f 9.2
847
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
F049#5 Load detection signal 2 (serial spindle) LDT2B f f 9.2
F049#6 Torque limit signal (serial spindle) TLMB f f 9.2
F049#7 Orientation completion signal (serial spindle) ORARB f f 9.2
F050#0 Power line switch signal (serial spindle) CHPB f f 9.2
F050#1 Spindle switch completion signal (serial spindle) CFINB f f 9.2
F050#2 Output switch signal (serial spindle) RCHPB f f 9.2
F050#3 Output switch completion signal (serial spindle) RCFNB f f 9.2
F050#4 Slave operation status signal (serial spindle) SLVSB f f 9.2
Signal for approximate spindle orientation with a position

F050#5 PORA2B f f 9.2
coder (serial spindle)
Signal for completion of spindle orientation with a

F050#6 MORA1B f f 9.2
magnetic sensor (serial spindle)
SIgnal for approximate spindle orientation with a magnetic

F050#7 MORA2B f f 9.2
sensor (serial spindle)
Signal indicating the status of the detected one-rotation

F051#0 PC1DEB f f 9.2
position coder signal (serial spindle)
F051#1 Incremental method orientation signal (serial spindle) INCSTB f f 9.2
F053#0 Key input disable signal INHKY f f 15.5
F053#1 Program screen display mode signal PRGDPL f f 15.5
F053#2 Read/punch in–progress signal RPBSY f f 13.2
F053#3 Read/punch alarm signal RPALM f f 13.2
F053#4 Background busy signal BGEACT f f 13.2
F053#7 Key code read completion signal EKENB f f 15.5
F054,F055 UO000 to UO015 f f

Output signal for custom macro 11.5.1
F056 to F059 UO100 to UO131 f f
F060#0 Read completion signal for external data input EREND f f 15.2
F060#1 Search completion signal for external data input ESEND f f 15.2
F061#0 B-axis unclamp signal BUCLP - f 11.9
F061#1 B-axis clamp signal BCLP - f 11.9
F062#7 Target part count reached signal PRTSF f f 12.1.11
F063#7 Polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN f - 6.9
F064#0 Tool change signal TLCH f f 10.3
F064#1 New tool select signal TLNW f f 10.3
F064#2 Individual tool change signal TLCHI - f 10.3
F065#0 RGSPP - f
Spindle rotation direction signal 9.10
F065#1 RGSPM - f
F066#0 Lock-ahead control mode signal G08MD - f 7.1.11
F066#5 Small-diameter peck drilling in progress signal PECK2 - f 11.13
F070#0 to F071#1 Position switch signal PSW01 to PSW10 f f 1.2.8
F072 Software operator's panelgeneral-purpose switch signal OUT0 to OUT7 f f 12.1.14
848
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
F073#0 Software operator's panel signal (MD1) MD1O f f 12.1.14
F073#4 Software operator's panel signal (ZRN) ZRNO f f 12.1.14
F075#2 Software operator's panel signal (BDT) BDTO f f 12.1.14
F075#3 Software operator's panel signal (SBK) SBKO f f 12.1.14
F075#4 Software operator's panel signal (MLK) MLKO f f 12.1.14
F075#5 Software operator's panel signal (DRN) DRNO f f 12.1.14
F075#6 Software operator's panel signal (KEY1 to KEY4) KEYO f f 12.1.14
F075#7 Software operator's panel signal (*SP) SPO f f 12.1.14
F076#0 Software operator's panel signal (MP1) MP1O f f 12.1.14
F076#1 Software operator's panel signal (MP2) MP2O f f 12.1.14
F076#3 Rigid tapping mode signal RTAP f f 9.10
F076#4 Software operator's panel signal (ROV1) ROV1O f f 12.1.14
F076#5 Software operator's panel signal (ROV2) ROV2O f f 12.1.14
F077#0 Software operator's panel signal (HS1A) HS1AO f f 12.1.14
F077#1 Software operator's panel signal (HS1B) HS1BO f f 12.1.14
F077#2 Software operator's panel signal (HS1C) HS1CO f f 12.1.14
F077#3 Software operator's panel signal (HS1D) HS1DO f f 12.1.14
F077#6 Software operator's panel signal (RT) RTO f f 12.1.14
F078 Software operator's panel signal (*FV0 to *FV7) *FV0O to *FV7O f f 12.1.14
F079,F080 Software operator's panel signal (*JV0 to *JV15) *JV0O to *JV15O f f 12.1.14
F081#0,#2, #4,#6 Software operator's panel signal (+J1 to +J4) +J1O to +J4O f f 12.1.14
F081#1,#3, #5,#7 Software operator's panel signal (-J1 to -J4) -J1O to -J4O f f 12.1.14
F090#0 Servo axis abnormal load detected signal ABTQSV f f 2.9
F090#1 First-spindle abnormal load detected signal ABTSP1 f f 2.9
F090#2 Second-spindle abnormal load detected signal ABTSP2 f f 2.9
F094 Reference position return end signal ZP1 to ZP4 f f 4.1
F096 2nd reference position return end signal ZP21 to ZP24 f f 4.5
F098 3rd reference position return end signal ZP31 to ZP34 f f 4.5
F100 4th reference position return end signal ZP41 to ZP44 f f 4.5
F102 Axis moving signal MV1 to MV4 f f 1.2.4
F104 In-position signal INP1 to INP4 f f 7.2.5.1
F106 Axis moving direction signal MVD1 to MVD4 f f 1.2.4
F108 Mirror image check signal MMI1 to MMI4 f f 1.2.5
EADEN1 to
F112 Distribution completion signal (PMC axis control) f f 15.1
EADEN4
F114 Torque limit reached signal TRQL1 to TRQL4 f - 14.3.3
F120 Reference position establishment signal ZRF1 to ZRF4 f f 4.1
849
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
F122 #0 High-speed skip status signal HDO0 f f 14.3.2
F129#5 Override 0% signal (PMC axis control) EOV0 f f 15.1
F129#7 Control axis selection status signal (PMC axis control) *EAXSL f f 15.1
F130#0 In-position signal (PMC axis control) EINPA f f 15.1
F130#1 Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control) ECKZA f f 15.1
F130#2 Alarm signal (PMC axis control) EIALA f f 15.1
F130#3 Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis control) EDENA f f 15.1
F130#4 Axis moving signal (PMC axis control) EGENA f f 15.1
F130#5 Positive-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTPA f f 15.1
F130#6 Negative-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTNA f f 15.1
Axis control command read completion signal (PMC axis

F130#7 EBSYA f f 15.1
control)
F131#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFA f f 15.1
F131#1 Bufferful signal (PMC axis control) EABUFA f f 15.1
F132,F142 Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) EM11A to EM48A f f 15.1
F133#0 In-position signal (PMC axis control) EINPB f f 15.1
F133#1 Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control) ECKZB f f 15.1
F133#2 Alarm signal (PMC axis control) EIALB f f 15.1
F133#3 Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis control) EDENB f f 15.1
F133#4 Axis moving signal (PMC axis control) EGENB f f 15.1
F133#5 Positive-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTPB f f 15.1
F133#6 Negative-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTNB f f 15.1

F133#7 EBSYB f f 15.1
control)
F134#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFB f f 15.1
F134#1 Bufferful signal (PMC axis control) EABUFB f f 15.1
F135,F145 Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) EM11B to EM48B f f 15.1
F136#0 In-position signal (PMC axis control) EINPC f f 15.1
F136#1 Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control) ECKZC f f 15.1
F136#2 Alarm signal (PMC axis control) EIALC f f 15.1
F136#3 Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis control) EDENC f f 15.1
F136#4 Axis moving signal (PMC axis control) EGENC f f 15.1
F136#5 Positive-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTPC f f 15.1
F136#6 Negative-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTNC f f 15.1

F136#7 EBSYC f f 15.1
control)
F137#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFC f f 15.1
F137#1 Buffer full signal (PMC axis control) EABUFC f f 15.1
F138,F148 Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) EM11C to EM48C f f 15.1
F139#0 In-position signal (PMC axis control) EINPD f f 15.1
850
Refer-
T M
series series
Item
F139#1 Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control) ECKZD f f 15.1
F139#2 Alarm signal (PMC axis control) EIALD f f 15.1
F139#3 Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis control) EDEND f f 15.1
F139#4 Axis moving signal (PMC axis control) EGEND f f 15.1
F139#5 Positive-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTPD f f 15.1
F139#6 Negative-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control) EOTND f f 15.1

F139#7 EBSYD f f 15.1
control)
F140#0 Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control) EMFD f f 15.1
F140#1 Buffer full signal (PMC axis control) EABUFD f f 15.1
F141,F151 Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control) EM11D to EM48D f f 15.1
Torque limit reach signals for butt–type reference position

F180 CLRCH1 to CLRCH4 f f 4.6
setting
EACNT1 to
F182 Controlling signal (PMC axis control) f f 15.1
EACNT4
851
B–63503EN–1/01 Index
ƠNumbersơ Cutting feedrate clamp, 246
Cycle start/feed hold, 162
2nd reference position return/3rd, 4th reference position return,
151 Cylindrical interpolation, 229
ƠAơ ƠDơ
Abnormal load detection, 101 Decimal point programming/pocket calculator type decimal
point programming, 541
Absolute position detection, 42
Direct operation by PMC/MMC, 785
Acceleration/deceleration control, 304
Display data on the diagnosis screen, 453
Actual spindle speed output (T series), 397 Display of hardware and software configuration, 622
Advanced preview control (M series), 276 Display/set, 613
Alarm signal, 83 Display/set/edit, 612
Automatic acceleration/deceleration, 304 Displaying alarm history, 617
Automatic corner deceleration (M series), 272 Displaying operating monitor, 633
Automatic corner override (M series), 262 Displaying operation history, 614
Automatic operation, 161 DNC operation, 192
Automatic tool length measurement (M series)/automatic tool Dry run, 174
offset (T series), 683
Auxiliary function, 324
Auxiliary function lock, 338
ƠEơ
Axis control, 1
Edit, 652
Emergency stop, 63
Entering compensation values, 700
ƠBơ Erase screen display/automatic erase screen display, 649
Background editing, 658 Error compensation, 25
Backlash compensation, 34 Error detect (T series), 322
Butt–type reference position setting, 154 Exact stop/exact stop mode/tapping mode/cutting mode (M
series), 190
External data input, 760
ƠCơ
External deceleration, 267
External I/O device control, 669
Canned cycle (M series)/canned cycle for hole machining (T
series), 567 External key input, 780
External motion function (M series), 578
Canned cycle (T series)/multiple repetitive canned cycle (T
series), 580 External operator message logging and display, 647
Circular interpolation, 207 External program input, 676
Clock function, 613 External workpiece number search, 769
CNC ready signal, 66
Command format, 457
Connection among spindle, spindle motor, and position coder,
447
ƠFơ
F1–digit feed (M series), 253
Constant surface speed control, 386
Feed forward in rapid traverse, 323
Controlled axes, 2
Feed per minute, 248
Conversational programming with graphic function, 660
Feed per revolution/manual feed per revolution, 251
Coordinate system rotation, 600
Feedrate clamping by arc radius (M series), 269
Corner control, 318
Feedrate control, 243
Cs contour control, 420
Feedrate control/acceleration and deceleration control, 242
Custom macro, 554
Feedrate override, 259
Cutter compensation, 534
Follow–up, 17
Cutter compensation B, C (M series), 534
i–1
INDEX B–63503EN–1/01
ƠGơ Machine coordinate system, 43

Machine lock, 171
G code system (T series), 543
Macro compiler/executer, 603
Graphic display/dynamic graphic display/background graphic,
630 Manual absolute on/off, 180
Manual handle feed, 120
Manual handle interruption, 125
ƠHơ Manual intervention and return, 194

Manual operation, 111
Helical interpolation, 224
Manual reference position return, 128
Help function, 616
Measurement, 681
High–speed M/S/T/B interface, 343
Memory protection key, 654
High–speed skip signal, 693
Mirror image, 14
Miscellaneous function/2nd auxiliary function, 325
ƠIơ
Mode selection, 89
Multi–language display, 646
In–position check, 318
Multi–spindle control, 435
In–position check independently of feed/rapid traverse, 320
Multiple M commands in a single block, 340
Inch/metric conversion, 550
Increment system, 5
Index table indexing function (M series), 587
ƠNơ
Input of measured workpiece origin offsets, 712
Name of axes, 3
Input of offset value measured A (T series), 700
No. of registered programs, 653
Input of tool offset value measured B (T series), 702
Normal direction control (M series), 238
Input/output of data, 661
Notes on interface with the PMC, 467
Interface between CNC and PMC, 789
Interpolation function, 201
Interruption type custom macro, 563
ƠOơ
Optional block skip/addition of optional block skip, 183
Outputting the movement state of an axis, 12
ƠJơ Override, 256
Jog feed/incremental feed, 112 Override cancel, 261
Overtravel check, 68
Overtravel signal, 68
ƠLơ
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation,
312
Linear acceleration/deceleration before cutting feed
ƠPơ
Interpolation (look–ahead control), 315 Parameters related to servo, 36
Linear interpolation, 204 Part program storage length, 652
List of Addresses, 790 Password function, 656
List of Addresses (One–Path Control), 790 Playback, 659
List of signals, 810 PMC axis control/PMC axis speed control function, 714
List of signals (in order of addresses), 838 PMC control function, 713
List of signals (in order of functions), 810 Polar coordinate interpolation, 226
List of signals (in order of symbols), 825 Polygonal turning (T series), 232
Look–ahead control (multiple blocks are read in advance) (M Position display neglect, 623
series), 285 Position switch, 21
Positioning, 202
Preparations for operation, 62
ƠMơ Program command, 540
M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block, 475 Program configuration, 547
i–2
B–63503EN–1/01 INDEX
Program restart, 187 Spindle output control by the PMC, 773

Spindle output switching, 514
Spindle positioning (T series), 398
ƠRơ Spindle serial output/spindle analog output, 350
Rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration, 309 Spindle setting and tuning screen, 618
Rapid traverse override, 256 Spindle speed control, 358
Rapid traverse rate, 243 Spindle speed fluctuation detection, 392
Reader/puncher interface, 662 Spindle speed function, 348
Reference position establishment, 127 Spindle speed function (S code output), 349
Reference position return, 149 Spindle synchronous control, 507
Reference position shift, 146 Start lock/interlock, 85
Reset and rewind, 167 Status output signal, 97
Retraction for rigid tapping (M series), 195 Stored pitch error compensation, 25
Rigid tapping, 445 Stored stroke check 1, 71
Rigid tapping specification, 452 Stored stroke limit 2, 3, 75
Rotary axis roll over, 49
Run hour and parts count display, 624
ƠTơ
Testing a program, 171
ƠSơ Thread cutting, 214
Scaling (M Series), 596 Thread cutting cycle retract (T series), 220
Self–diagnosis, 621 Timing charts for rigid tapping specification, 470
Sequence number comparison and stop, 186 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode, 483
Servo off (mechanical handle), 19 Tool compensation value/tool compensation number/tool
Servo tuning screen, 617 compensation memory, 520
Setting each axis, 3 Tool function, 517
Setting the reference position without dogs, 140 Tool functions, 516
Settings related to servo–controlled axes, 36 Tool length measurement (M series), 682
Settings related with coordinate systems, 43 Tool life management, 526
Signals for the rigid tapping function, 461 Tool nose radius compensation (T series), 537
Signals related to gear switching, 463 Torque limit skip, 697
Signals related to S code output, 462

Signals related to second spindle rigid tapping, 465
Simple synchronous control, 52 ƠVơ
Single block, 177 VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal, 99
Single direction positioning (M series), 222
Skip function, 690
Small hole peck drilling cycle (M series), 604 ƠWơ
Software operator’s panel, 635
Waveform diagnosis display, 619
Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters, 479
When M29 is specified before G84 (G74), 471
Specifying the rotation axis, 8
Workpiece coordinate system/addition of workpiece coordinate
Spindle orientation, 511 system pair, 44
i–3
Revision Record
FANUCĄSeriesĄ0i MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–63503EN–1)
01 May, 2000
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

en 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

en 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

en 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Connection Manual (Function)

GFZ-63503EN-1/01 May 2000

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

©Copyright 2000 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine

FANUC Series 0i–TA 0i–TA

For ease of understanding, the models are categorized as follows:

G000 or later X1000 or

D Expression of signals One address accommodates eight signals.

Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)

Parameter description Parameters are classified by data type as follows :

D Notation of bit type and

Data No. Data (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)

1023 Servo axis number of a specific axis

Tool nose radius compensation . . . T series

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–63503EN–1 *

2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

3. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . 242

7.1.6.1 Rapid traverse override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

9.10.6.4 Signals related to second spindle rigid tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

10. TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

11. PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

12.1.3 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

14. MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

15.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780

Item M series T series

No. of basic 1–path 3 axes 2 axes

[Data type] Byte

1010 Number of CNC–controlled axes

[Data type] Byte

OPERATOR’S MANUAL Controlled Axes

[Data type] Byte axis

OPERATOR’S MANUAL NAMES OF AXES

Table 1.2.2 (b) Increment system IS–C

Setting entry is acceptable.

[Data type] Bit

[Data type] Bit

[Data type] Bit axis

OPERATOR’S MANUAL Increment System

[Data type] Bit axis

0 1 Rotation axis (A type)

1 0 Setting is invalid (unused)

1 1 Rotation axis (B type)

[Data type] Bit axis

RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

RRLx Relative coordinates are